FACILITIES AND FACILITIES UPGRADES FOR F/A-18 E/F

eProjectsWork Order Number: 510251

Appropriation: MCON

FACILITIES AND FACILITIES UPGRADES FOR F/A-18 E/F

At the

Marine Corps Air Station Cherry Point, North Carolina

(P-809)

DESIGNED BY:

Dills Ainscough Duff, P.C. 1432 North Great Neck Road, Suite 204 Virginia Beach, Virginia 23454-1342

SPECIFICATION PREPARED BY:

Architectural: Dills Ainscough Duff, P.C.Civil: C. Allan Bamforth, Jr., Engineer-Surveyor, Ltd. Structural: Stroud, Pence & Associates, Ltd. Mechanical: Vansant & Gusler, Inc. Electrical: Vansant & Gusler, Inc. Fire Prot.: Atlantic Fire Protection Engineering, Inc. Geotechnical: GeoEnvironmental Resources, Inc.

Date: August 12, 2008

SPECIFICATION APPROVED BY:

For Commander, NAVFAC MID-ATLANTIC: Date:

VOLUME III

ABBOTT.BRIAN.G.1229521450

Digitally signed by ABBOTT.BRIAN.G.1229521450DN: cn=ABBOTT.BRIAN.G.1229521450, c=US, o=U.S. Government, ou=DoD, PKI, USN Date: 2008.09.24 15:52:56 -04'00'

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 20 00 MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL05 21 19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING05 30 00 STEEL DECKS05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING05 50 00 METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 17 00 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING07 21 13 BOARD INSULATION07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION07 24 00 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07 41 63 FABRICATED ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS07 52 00.00 20 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING07 57 13.01 22 SPRAYED ROOF COATING07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES08 13 73 SLIDING METAL DOORS08 14 00 WOOD DOORS08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS08 34 16.10 STEEL SLIDING HANGAR DOORS08 34 73 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE08 81 00 GLAZING08 91 00.00 22 TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANELS08 91 00 METAL WALL LOUVERS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

Page 1

receptn

Text Box

HANGAR RENOVATION, FACILITIES UPGRADES FOR F/A-18 E/F 08P0809 MCAS CHERRY POINT, NORTH CAROLINA E PROJECTS W.O. NO.: 510251

09 22 00 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES09 24 23 CEMENT PLASTER09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS09 62 50.10 THIN FILM FLOORING SYSTEM FOR AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE

FACILITIES09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING09 68 00 CARPET09 69 13 RIGID GRID ACCESS FLOORING09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 10 00 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE10 14 02 INTERIOR SIGNAGE10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS10 22 13 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS10 99 00 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 21 00 WINDOW BLINDS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 34 19 PREENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 13 13.00 20 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION21 13 16.00 20 DRY-PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS21 13 19.00 20 PREACTION AND DELUGE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS21 13 20.00 20 FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING FOR AIRCRAFT HANGARS21 22 00.00 20 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL22 07 19.00 40 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION22 15 14.00 40 GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS, LOW PRESSURE

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS23 08 00.00 20 HVAC TESTING/ADJUSTING/BALANCING23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING

SYSTEMS23 22 26.00 20 STEAM SYSTEM AND TERMINAL UNITS23 31 11.11 40 DUCTS, LOW PRESSURE

Page 2

23 31 11.12 40 DUCTS, MEDIUM/HIGH PRESSURE23 35 00.00 10 OVERHEAD VEHICLE TAILPIPE EXHAUST REMOVAL SYSTEM(S)23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS23 81 00.00 20 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT23 81 23.00 20 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS23 81 43.00 40 AIR-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS23 83 00.00 20 ELECTRIC SPACE HEATING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS26 13 00.00 20 SF6 INSULATED PAD-MOUNTED SWITCHGEAR26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR26 32 13.00 20 SINGLE OPERATION GENERATOR SETS26 35 43 400-HERTZ (HZ) SOLID STATE FREQUENCY CONVERTER26 41 00.00 20 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM27 21 00.00 20 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 20 00.00 20 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS (ESS), COMMERCIAL28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM WITH MASS

NOTIFICATION VOICE EVACUATION AND DETECTION

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL31 31 16 SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS

32 10 00 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVEMENT32 13 13.03 AIRFIELDS AND HEAVY-DUTY CONCRETE PAVEMENT AT HANGAR 130

AND ORDINANCE OPERATIONS FACILITY32 17 23.00 20 PAVEMENT MARKINGS32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION33 16 15 FIRE WATER STORAGE STEEL TANKS33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS INCLUDING AFFF SEWERS33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES33 46 13 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEM33 56 10 FACTORY-FABRICATED AFFF STORAGE TANKS33 58 00 LEAK DETECTION FOR AFFF STORAGE TANKS33 71 02.00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

Page 3

33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

41 22 03.16 20 MONORAILS WITH AIR MOTOR POWERED HOIST41 22 13.15 BRIDGE CRANES, AIR POWERED, UNDER RUNNING

DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

44 42 53 PARALLEL PLATE OR VERTICAL TUBE, GRAVITY OIL-WATER SEPARATOR

-- End of Project Table of Contents --

Page 4

HANGAR RENOVATION, FACILITIES UPGRADES FOR F/A-18 E/F 08P0809MCAS CHERRY POINT, NORTH CAROLINA E PROJECTS W.O. NO.: 510251

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE01/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI/MCP-1 (2007) Manual of Concrete Practice Part 1: ACI 104-71R-97 to 223-98

ACI/MCP-2 (2007) Manual of Concrete Practice Part 2 - ACI 224R-01 to ACI 313R-97

ACI/MCP-3 (2007) Manual of Concrete Practice Part 3 - ACI 315-99 to ACI 343R-95

ACI/MCP-4 (2006) Manual of Concrete Practice Part 4 - ACI 345R-05 to 355.2R-04

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

AASHTO M 182 (2005) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats

AASHTO M 53 (1996) Standard Specification Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

AHA A135.4 (2004) Basic Hardboard

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D1.4/D1.4M (2005; Errata 2005) Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A 185/A 185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

ASTM A 496/A 496M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 497/A 497M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for

SECTION 03 30 00 Page 1


Concrete

ASTM A 615/A 615M (2007) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 82/A 82M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 934/A 934M (2007) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars

ASTM A 996/A 996M (2006a) Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars or Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C 1017/C 1017M (2007) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete

ASTM C 1107/C 1107M (2007a) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM C 1260 (2007) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C 143/C 143M (2005a) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C 150 (2007) Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C 156 (2005) Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials

ASTM C 1567 (2007) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

ASTM C 171 (2003) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

ASTM C 172 (2007) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C 173/C 173M (2007) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method

ASTM C 192/C 192M (2007) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory

ASTM C 231 (2004) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the



Pressure Method

ASTM C 233 (2007) Standard Test Method for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 260 (2006) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 295 (2003) Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete

ASTM C 309 (2007) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C 31/C 31M (2006) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C 311 (2005) Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete

ASTM C 33 (2003) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C 330 (2005) Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete

ASTM C 39/C 39M (2005e1) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C 42/C 42M (2004) Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete

ASTM C 494/C 494M (2005a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 567 (2005a) Determining Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete

ASTM C 595 (1997) Blended Hydraulic Cements (Metric)

ASTM C 618 (2005) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete

ASTM C 881/C 881M (2002) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

ASTM C 920 (2005) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM C 932 (2006) Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior Plastering



ASTM C 94/C 94M (2007) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C 989 (2006) Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars

ASTM D 1190 (1997) Standard Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Applied Elastic Type

ASTM D 1751 (2004) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

ASTM D 1752 (2004a) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion

ASTM D 4397 (2002) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications

ASTM D 5759 (1995; R 2005) Characterization of Coal Fly Ash and Clean Coal Combustion Fly Ash for Potential Uses

ASTM E 329 (2007) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction

ASTM E 648 (2006a) Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

CRSI MSP-2 (1998) Manual of Standard Practice

NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)

NIST PS 1 (1996) Construction and Industrial Plywood

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

COE CRD-C 572 (1974) Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC)

PS1 (1995) Consturction and Industrial Plywood (APA V995)

U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

FS MMM-A-001993 (1978) Adhesive, Epoxy, Flexible, Filled (For Binding, Sealing, and Grouting)



FS SS-S-200 (Rev E; Am 2) Sealant, Joint, Two-Component, Jet-Blast-Resistant, Cold-Applied, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement

U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)

1.2 DEFINITIONS

a. "Cementitious material" as used herein must include all portland cement, pozzolan, fly ash, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.

b. "Exposed to public view" means situated so that it can be seen from eye level from a public location after completion of the building. A public location is accessible to persons not responsible for operation or maintenance of the building.

c. "Chemical admixtures" are materials in the form of powder or fluids that are added to the concrete to give it certain characteristics not obtainable with plain concrete mixes.

d. "Workability (or consistence)" is the ability of a fresh (plastic) concrete mix to fill the form/mould properly with the desired work (vibration) and without reducing the concrete's quality. Workability depends on water content, chemical admixtures, aggregate (shape and size distribution), cementitious content and age (level of hydration).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Reinforcing steel; G

Reproductions of contract drawings are unacceptable.

Provide erection drawings that show placement of reinforcement and accessories, with reference to the contract drawings.

SD-03 Product Data

Materials for curing concreteJoint sealants; (LEED)

Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content.



Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items must include printed instructions for admixtures, bonding agents, waterstops, and liquid chemical floor hardeners.

Joint filler; (LEED)Cement; (LEED)Portland CementReady-Mix ConcreteBonding MaterialsFloor Finish MaterialsConcrete Curing MaterialsReinforcement;

Liquid Chemical Floor HardenerVapor retarderEpoxy bonding compoundWaterstops

SD-05 Design Data

Concrete mix design; G

Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design for each strength and type of concrete. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement, fly ash, pozzolans, ground slag , and admixtures; and applicable reference specifications. Provide mix proportion data using at least three different water-cement ratios for each type of mixture, which produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required. If source material changes, resubmit mix proportion data using revised source material. Provide only materials that have been proven by trial mix studies to meet the requirements of this specification, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Indicate clearly in the submittal where each mix design is used when more than one mix design is submitted. Submit additional data regarding concrete aggregates if the source of aggregate changes. Submit copies of the fly ash, and pozzolan test results, in addition. The approval of fly ash, and pozzolan test results must be within 6 months of submittal date. Obtain acknowledgement of receipt prior to concrete placement.

SD-06 Test Reports

Concrete mix design; G

Fly ash; G

Pozzolan; G

Ground granulated blast-furnace slag; G

Aggregates; G

Compressive strength tests; G



Unit weight of structural lightweight concrete

Ion concentration; G

Air Content; GSlump

Air Entrainment

SD-07 Certificates

Curing concrete elements

Pumping concrete

Biodegradable Form Release Agent

Material Safety Data Sheets

SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions

Fly ash

Ground granulated blast-furnace slag

Provide certificates for concrete that are in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Classification and Quality of Concrete," of this section. Provide certificates that contain project name and number, date, name of Contractor, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer, brand name of manufactured materials, material name, values as specified for each material, and test results. Provide certificates for Welder Qualifications that are in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Qualifications for Welding Work," of this section.

SD-11 Closeout Submittals

1.3.1 LEED Submittal Requirements

a. Recycled Content LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content.

b. Regional Materials LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating location of final manufacturer's origin for all products and materials from within 500 mile radius.

1.4 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES

Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified herein. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory. Interpret reference to the "Building Official," the "Structural Engineer," and the "Architect/Engineer" to mean the Contracting Officer.



1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Do not deliver concrete until vapor retarder, forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and chamfer strips are in place and ready for concrete placement. ACI/MCP-2 for job site storage of materials. Protect materials from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure materials can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed. Do not store concrete curing compounds or sealers with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions. Do not store concrete curing compounds or sealers in occupied spaces.

1.5.1 Reinforcement

Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the ground to avoid excessive rusting. Protect from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure bar sizes can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.6.1 Design Data

1.6.2 Drawings

1.6.2.1 Reinforcing Steel

ACI/MCP-4. Indicate bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and laps of bars, shapes, dimensions, and details of bar reinforcing, accessories, and concrete cover. Do not scale dimensions from structural drawings to determine lengths of reinforcing bars.

1.6.3 Control Submittals

1.6.3.1 Curing Concrete Elements

Submit proposed materials and methods for curing concrete elements.

1.6.3.2 Pumping Concrete

Submit proposed materials and methods for pumping concrete. Submittal must include mix designs, pumping equipment including type of pump and size and material for pipe, and maximum length and height concrete is to be pumped.

1.6.3.3 Form Removal Schedule

Submit schedule for form removal indicating element and minimum length of time for form removal.

1.6.3.4 Material Safety Data Sheets

Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials that are regulated for hazardous health effects. Prominently post the MSDS at the construction site.

1.6.4 Test Reports

1.6.4.1 Concrete Mix Design

Submit copies of laboratory test reports showing that the mix has been



successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and that mix must be suitable for the job conditions. Include mill test and all other test for cement, aggregates, and admixtures in the laboratory test reports. Provide maximum nominal aggregate size, gradation analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a graph of percentage retained verses sieve size. Submit test reports along with the concrete mix design. Obtain approval before concrete placement.

1.6.4.2 Fly Ash and Pozzolan

Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C 618 for fly ash and pozzolan. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal date. Submit manufacturer's policy statement on fly ash use in concrete.

1.6.4.3 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag

Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C 989 for ground granulated blast-furnace slag. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal date. Submit manufacturer's policy statement on slag use in concrete.

1.6.4.4 Aggregates

ASTM C 1260 for potential alkali-silica reactions, ASTM C 295 for petrographic analysis.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Provide space ventilation according to manufacturer recommendations, at a minimum, during and following installation of concrete curing compound and sealer. Maintain one of the following ventilation conditions during the curing compound/sealer curing period or for 72 hours after installation:

a. Supply 100 percent outside air 24 hours a day.

b. Supply airflow at a rate of 6 air changes per hour, when outside temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 84 degrees F and humidity is between 30 percent and 60 percent.

c. Supply airflow at a rate of 1.5 air changes per hour, when outside air conditions are not within the range stipulated above.

1.7.1 Submittals for Environmental Performance

a. Provide data indication the percentage of post-industrial pozzolan (fly ash, blast furnace slag) cement substitution as a percentage of the full product composite by weight.

b. Provide data indicating the percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content aggregate.

c. Provide product data indicating the percentage of post-consumer recycled steel content in each type of steel reinforcement as a percentage of the full product composite by weight.

d. Provide product data stating the location where all products were manufactured

e. For projects using FSC certified formwork, provide chain-of-custody



documentation for all certified wood products.

f. For projects using reusable formwork, provide data showing how formwork is reused.

g. Provide MSDS product information data showing that form release agents meet any environmental performance goals such as using vegetable and soy based products.

h. Provide MSDS product information data showing that concrete adhesives meet any environmental performance goals including low emitting, low volatile organic compound products.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETE TESTING SERVICE

Perform concrete testing by an approved laboratory and inspection service experienced in sampling and testing concrete. Testing agency must meet the requirements of ASTM E 329.

1.9 CONCRETE SAMPLING AND TESTING

Testing by the Contractor must include sampling and testing concrete materials proposed for use in the work and testing the design mix for each class of concrete. Perform quality control testing during construction.

Sample and test concrete aggregate materials proposed for use in the work in accordance with ASTM C 33.

Sample and test portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150.

Sample and test air-entraining admixtures in accordance with ASTM C 233.

Testing must be performed by a Grade I Testing Technician.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LEED REQUIREMENTS

Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED Certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.

Manufacturer's location for regionally manufactured materials LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured project products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius.

2.2 MATERIALS FOR FORMS

Provide wood, plywood, plastic, carton, or steel. Use plywood or steel forms where a smooth form finish is required.

2.2.1 Wood Forms

Provide lumber that is square edged or tongue-and-groove boards, free of



raised grain, knotholes, or other surface defects. Provide plywood that complies with PS1, B-B concrete form panels or better or AHA A135.4, hardboard for smooth form lining.

2.2.1.1 Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Rough)

Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, concrete form, not less than 5/8-inch thick.

2.2.1.2 Overlaid Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Smooth)

Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, high density form overlay, not less than 5/8-inch thick.

2.2.2 Plastic Forms

Provide plastic forms that contain a minimum of 50 percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 50 percent post-industrial recycled content.

2.2.3 Steel Forms

Provide steel form surfaces that do not contain irregularities, dents, or sags.

2.3 FORM TIES AND ACCESSORIES

The use of wire alone is prohibited. Provide form ties and accessories that do not reduce the effective cover of the reinforcement.

2.3.1 Dovetail Anchor Slot

Preformed metal slot approximately 1 by 1 inch of not less than 22 gage galvanized steel cast in concrete. Coordinate actual size and throat opening with dovetail anchors and provide with removable filler material.

2.4 CONCRETE

2.4.1 Contractor-Furnished Mix Design

ACI/MCP-1, ACI/MCP-2, and ACI/MCP-3 except as otherwise specified. Indicate the compressive strength (f'c) of the concrete for each portion of the structure(s) and as specified below.

f'c ASTM C 33 Maximum (Min. 28- Maximum Range Water- Day Comp. Nominal of Cement Air Strength) Aggregate Slump Ratio Entr. Location (psi) (Size No.) (inches) (by weight) (percent)

Foundations 3000 57 1-4 N/A N/A Concrete exposed to weather 4000 57 1-5 0.50 6

Supported Floor slabs 4000 57 1-5 N/A N/A



f'c ASTM C 33 Maximum (Min. 28- Maximum Range Water- Day Comp. Nominal of Cement Air Strength) Aggregate Slump Ratio Entr. Location (psi) (Size No.) (inches) (by weight) (percent) All other areas 3500 57 1-5 N/A N/A

Maximum slump shown above may be increased 1 inch for methods of consolidation other than vibration. Slump may be increased to 8 inches when superplasticizers are used. Provide air entrainment using air-entraining admixture. Provide air entrainment within plus or minus 1.5 percent of the value specified. The water soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42 days must not exceed 0.30. Note (a): Entrapped air must be 3% or less.

Proportion concrete mixes for strength at 28 days.

2.4.1.1 Mix Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete

Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing requirements for various classes and types of concrete specified are the responsibility of the Contractor. Base mixture proportions on compressive strength as determined by test specimens fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. Samples of all materials used in mixture proportioning studies must be representative of those proposed for use in the project and must be accompanied by the manufacturer's or producer's test report indicating compliance with these specifications. Base trial mixtures having proportions, consistencies, and air content suitable for the work on methodology described in ACI/MCP-1. In the trial mixture, use at least three different water-cement ratios for each type of mixture, which must produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required on the project. The maximum water-cement ratio required must be based on equivalent water-cement ratio calculations as determined by the conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus pozzolan, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag by weight equivalency method. Design laboratory trial mixture for maximum permitted slump and air content. Each combination of material proposed for use must have separate trial mixture, except for accelerator or retarder use can be provided without separate trial mixture. Report the temperature of concrete in each trial batch. For each water-cement ratio, at least three test cylinders for each test age must be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M for 7 and 28 days. From these results, plot a curve showing the relationship between water-cement ratio and strength for each set of trial mix studies. In addition, plot a curve showing the relationship between 7 and 28 day strengths.

2.4.1.2 Lightweight Concrete Proportion

ACI/MCP-1, using weight method. Provide ASTM C 330 aggregates for concrete; 115 pcf (dry) for floors with a 4000 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Provide aggregate size No. 57. Range of slump must be between 1 and 5 inches. 2.4.1.3 Required Average Strength of Mix

Design

The selected mixture must produce an average compressive strength exceeding



the specified strength by the amount indicated in ACI/MCP-2. When a concrete production facility has a record of at least 15 consecutive tests, the standard deviation must be calculated and the required average compressive strength must be determined in accordance with ACI/MCP-2. When a concrete production facility does not have a suitable record of tests to establish a standard deviation, the required average strength must follow ACI/MCP-2 requirements.

2.4.2 Ready-Mix Concrete

Provide concrete that meets the requirements of ASTM C 94/C 94M.

Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer must provide duplicate delivery tickets with each load of concrete delivered. Provide delivery tickets with the following information in addition to that required by ASTM C 94/C 94M:

Type and brand cement

Cement content in 95-pound bags per cubic yard of concrete

Maximum size of aggregate

Amount and brand name of admixtures

Total water content expressed by water/cement ratio

Amount of water witheld

2.4.3 Concrete Curing Materials

2.4.3.1 Absorptive Cover

Provide burlap cloth cover for curing concrete made from jute or kenaf, weighing 10 ounces plus or minus 5 percent per square yard when clean and dry, conforming to ASTM C 171, Class 3; or cover may be cotton mats as approved.

2.4.3.2 Moisture-Retaining Cover

Provide waterproof paper cover for curing concrete conforming to ASTM C 171, regular or white, or polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM C 171, or polyethylene-coated burlap consisting of a laminate of burlap and a white opaque polyethylene film permanently bonded to the burlap; burlap must conform to ASTM C 171, Class 3, and polyethylene film must conform to ASTM C 171. When tested for water retention in accordance with ASTM C 156, weight of water lost 72 hours after application of moisture retaining covering material must not exceed 0.039 gram per square centimeter of the mortar specimen surface.

2.4.3.3 Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

Provide liquid type compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear, Type 1D with fugitive dye for interior work and Type 2, white, pigmented for exterior work.



2.5 MATERIALS

2.5.1 Cement

ASTM C 150, Type I or II or ASTM C 595, Type IP(MS) or IS(MS) blended cement except as modified herein. Provide blended cement that consists of a mixture of ASTM C 150, Type II, cement and one of the following materials: ASTM C 618 pozzolan or fly ash, ASTM C 989 ground granulated blast-furnace slag. For portland cement manufactured in a kiln fueled by hazardous waste, maintain a record of source for each batch. Supplier must certify that no hazardous waste is used in the fuel mix or raw materials. For exposed concrete, use one manufacturer for each type of cement, ground slag, fly ash, and pozzolan.

2.5.1.1 Fly Ash and Pozzolan

ASTM C 618, Type N, F, or C, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition must be 6 percent for Types N and F. Add with cement. Fly ash content must be a minimum of 15 percent by weight of cementitious material, provided the fly ash does not reduce the amount of cement in the concrete mix below the minimum requirements of local building codes. Where the use of fly ash cannot meet the minimum level, provide the maximum amount of fly ash permittable that meets the code requirements for cement content. Report the chemical analysis of the fly ash in accordance with ASTM C 311. Evaluate and classify fly ash in accordance with ASTM D 5759.

High contents of supplementary cementitious materials can have some detrimental effects on the concrete properties, such as slowing excessively the strength gain rate, and delaying and increasing the difficulty of finishing. The recommended maximum content (by weight of the total cementitious material) for these materials are:

1. For GGBF slag: 50 percent

2. For fly ash or natural pozzolan: 25 percent

2.5.1.2 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag

ASTM C 989, Grade 100. Slag content must be a minimum of 25 percent by weight of cementitious material.

2.5.1.3 Portland Cement

Provide cement that conforms to ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Use one brand and type of cement for formed concrete having exposed-to-view finished surfaces.

2.5.2 Water

Minimize the amount of water in the mix. The amount of water must not exceed 45 percent by weight of cementitious materials (cement + pozzolans), and in general, improve workability by adjusting the grading rather than by adding water. Water must be fresh, clean, and potable; free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other substances deleterious to concrete.

2.5.3 Aggregates

ASTM C 33, except as modified herein. Furnish aggregates for exposed



concrete surfaces from one source. Provide aggregates that do not contain any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement.

Fine and coarse aggregates must show expansions less than 0.08 percent at 16 days after casting when testing in accordance with ASTM C 1260. Should the test data indicate an expansion of 0.08 percent or greater, reject the aggregate(s) or perform additional testing using ASTM C 1567 using the Contractor's proposed mix design. In this case, include the mix design low alkali portland cement and one of the following supplementary cementitious materials:

1. GGBF slag at a minimum of 40 percent of total cementitious

2. Fly ash or natural pozzolan at a minimum of total cementitious of a. 25 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 70 percent or more, b. 20 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 80 percent or more, c. 15 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 90 percent or more.

If a combination of these materials is chosen, the minimum amount must be a linear combination of the minimum amounts above. Include these materials in sufficient proportion to show less than 0.08 percent expansion at 16 days after casting when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1567.

Aggregates must not possess properties or constituents that are known to have specific unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C 295.

2.5.3.1 Aggregates for Lightweight Concrete

ASTM C 330.2.5.4 Nonshrink Grout

ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

2.5.5 Admixtures

ASTM C 494/C 494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C, accelerating; Type D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E, water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do not use calcium chloride admixtures.

2.5.5.1 Air-Entraining

ASTM C 260.

2.5.5.2 High Range Water Reducer (HRWR) (Superplasticizers)

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F and Type G (HRWR retarding admixture) and ASTM C 1017/C 1017M.

2.5.5.3 Pozzolan

Provide fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures that conform to ASTM C 618.



2.5.6 Vapor Retarder

ASTM D 4397 polyethylene sheeting, minimum 10 mil thickness.

2.5.7 Materials for Curing Concrete

Use water-based curing compounds, sealers, and coatings with low (maximum 160 grams/liter, less water and less exempt compounds) VOC content.

Consider the use of water based or vegetable or soy based curing agents in lieu of petroleum based products. Consider agents that are not toxic and emit low or no Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC). Consider the use of admixtures that offer high performance to increase durability of the finish product but also have low toxicity and are made from bio-based materials such as soy, and emit low levels of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).

2.5.7.1 Impervious Sheeting

ASTM C 171; waterproof paper, clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap.

2.5.7.2 Pervious Sheeting

AASHTO M 182.

2.5.7.3 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound

ASTM C 309, white-pigmented, Type 2, Class B.

2.5.8 Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener and Dust Proofer Compound

Provide magnesium fluorosilicate compound which when mixed with water seals and hardens the surface of the concrete. Do not use on exterior slabs exposed to freezing conditions.

2.5.9 Expansion/Contraction Joint Filler

ASTM D 1751, ASTM D 1752, cork or 100% post-consumer paper meeting ASTM D 1752. Material must be 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5.9.1 Preformed Joint Filler Strips

Povide nonextruding and resilient nonbituminous type filler strips conforming to ASTM D 1752, Type I or II.

2.5.10 Joint Sealants

Use concrete penetrating sealers with a low VOC content.

2.5.10.1 Horizontal Surfaces, 3 Percent Slope, Maximum

ASTM D 1190 or ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Use T.

2.5.10.2 Vertical Surfaces Greater Than 3 Percent Slope

ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T.



2.5.10.3 Waterstops

Provide ribbed waterstops: 0.375 inch by 4 inches.

Provide waterstops made of polyvinylchloride (PVC) and that conform to COE CRD-C 572. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

2.5.10.4 Joint Sealant Compound

Provide cold-applied, two-component, elastomeric polymer type compound conforming to FS SS-S-200.

2.5.11 Epoxy Bonding Compound

ASTM C 881/C 881M. Provide Type I for bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete; Type II for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete; and Type III as a binder in epoxy mortar or concrete, or for use in bonding skid-resistant materials to hardened concrete. Provide Grade 1 or 2 for horizontal surfaces and Grade 3 for vertical surfaces. Provide Class A if placement temperature is below 40 degrees F; Class B if placement temperature is between 40 and 60 degrees F; or Class C if placement temperature is above 60 degrees F.

2.5.12 Biodegradable Form Release Agent

Provide form release agent that is colorless and biodegradable A minimum of 85 percent of the total product must be biobased material. Provide product that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Provide form release agent that does not contain diesel fuel, petroleum-based lubricating oils, waxes, or kerosene.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

2.6.1 Reinforcing Bars

ACI/MCP-2 unless otherwise specified. Use deformed steel. ASTM A 615/A 615M and AASHTO M 53 with the bars marked A, S, W, Grade 60; or ASTM A 996/A 996M with the bars marked R, Grade 60, or marked A, Grade 60.

2.6.2 Mechanical Reinforcing Bar Connectors

ACI/MCP-2. Provide 125 percent minimum yield strength of the reinforcement bar.

2.6.3 Wire

ASTM A 82/A 82M or ASTM A 496/A 496M.

2.6.3.1 Welded Wire Fabric

ASTM A 185/A 185M or ASTM A 497/A 497M. Provide flat sheets of welded wire fabric for slabs.



2.6.3.2 Steel Wire

Wire must conform to ASTM A 82/A 82M.

2.6.4 Reinforcing Bar Supports

Provide bar ties and supports of coated or non corrodible material.

2.6.5 Supports for Reinforcement

Supports include bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices necessary for proper spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and wire fabric in place.

Provide wire bar type supports conforming to ACI/MCP-3 and CRSI MSP-2.

Legs of supports in contact with formwork must be hot-dip galvanized, or plastic coated after fabrication, or stainless-steel bar supports.

2.7 BONDING MATERIALS

2.7.1 Concrete Bonding Agent

Provide aqueous-phase, film-forming, nonoxidizing, freeze and thaw-resistant compound agent suitable for brush or spray application conforming to ASTM C 932.

2.7.2 Epoxy-Resin Adhesive Binder

Provide two-component, epoxy-polysulfide polymer type binder with an amine-type curing-agent conforming to FS MMM-A-001993, Type I or ASTM C 881/C 881M.

2.8 FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS

2.8.1 Liquid Chemical Floor Hardener and Dust Proofer

Hardener must be a colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluorosilicate and zinc fluorosilicate combined with a wetting agent. Solution must contain not less than 1/2 pounds of fluorosilicates per gallon. An approved proprietary chemical hardener may be used provided hardener is delivered ready for use in manufacturer's original containers.

PART 3 EXECUTION


a. Recycled Content LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

b. Regional Materials LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating location of final manufacturer's origin for all products and materials from within 500 mile radius for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.



3.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT LEED

Separate all waste material in accordance with the Construction Waste Management Plan. Place and/or dispose of all waste materials such that a minimum of 50 percent is diverted from landfill by either salvage, recycling plan, and/or reuse.

Provide invoices, plant slips, certification indicating total quantities of waste material, and amounts diverted by way of means as stated above for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

3.3 EXAMINATION

Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed; verify that substrates are plumb and true.

If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect/Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before processing.

Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary too much from design dimensions for proper installation, notify Architect/Engineer and wait for instructions before beginning installation.

3.4 PREPARATION

Determine quantity of concrete needed and minimize the production of excess concrete. Designate locations or uses for potential excess concrete before the concrete is poured.

3.4.1 General

Surfaces against which concrete is to be placed must be free of debris, loose material, standing water, snow, ice, and other deleterious substances before start of concrete placing.

Remove standing water without washing over freshly deposited concrete. Divert flow of water through side drains provided for such purpose.

3.4.2 Subgrade Under Foundations and Footings

When subgrade material is semiporous and dry, sprinkle subgrade surface with water as required to eliminate suction at the time concrete is deposited. When subgrade material is porous, seal subgrade surface by covering surface with specified water barrier subgrade cover; this may also be used over semiporous, dry subgrade material instead of water sprinkling.

3.4.3 Subgrade Under Slabs on Ground

Before construction of slabs on ground, have underground work on pipes and conduits completed and approved.

Previously constructed subgrade or fill must be cleaned of foreign materials and inspected by the Contractor for adequate compaction and surface tolerances as specified.

Finish surface of porous fill under interior slabs on ground must not show deviation in excess of 1/4 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge parallel with and at right angles to building lines.



Finished surface of subgrade or fill under exterior slabs on ground must not be more than 0.02-foot above or 0.10-foot below elevation indicated.

Cover porous fill surface under interior slabs on ground with specified water-vapor retarder subgrade cover immediately prior to placing reinforcement. Install vapor retarder to avoid puncture or tear. Patch punctures or tears over 12 inches with separate sheets lapped not less than 6 inches. Seal all punctures or tears less than 12 inches with pressure-sensitive vapor barrier tape not less than 2-inches wide. Seal lapped joints with vapor barrier adhesive or pressure-sensitive vapor barrier tape not less than 2-inches wide. Lay subgrade cover sheets with not less than a 6-inch lap at edges and ends and in direction in which concrete is to be placed.

Prepare subgrade or fill surface under exterior slabs on ground as specified for subgrade under foundations and footings.

3.4.4 Formwork

Complete and approve formwork. Remove debris and foreign material from interior of forms before start of concrete placing.

3.4.5 Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs

Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain indicated elevations and contours in finished slab surface and must be strong enough to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds if nature of specified slab finish requires use of such equipment. Align concrete surface to elevation of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds.

3.4.6 Reinforcement and Other Embedded Items

Secure reinforcement, joint materials, and other embedded materials in position, inspected, and approved before start of concrete placing.

3.5 FORMS

ACI/MCP-2. Provide forms, shoring, and scaffolding for concrete placement. Set forms mortar-tight and true to line and grade. Chamfer above grade exposed joints, edges, and external corners of concrete 0.75 inch unless otherwise indicated. Provide formwork with clean-out openings to permit inspection and removal of debris. Forms submerged in water must be watertight.

3.5.1 General

Construct forms to conform, within the tolerances specified, to shapes dimensions, lines, elevations, and positions of cast-in-place concrete members as indicated. Forms must be supported, braced, and maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load.

3.5.2 Design and Construction of Formwork

Provide formwork design and construction that conforms to and ACI/MCP-2, Chapter 4.

Provide forms that are tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placing.



Support form facing materials by structural members spaced close to prevent deflection of form facing material. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment to ensure a smooth completed surface within the tolerances specified. Where necessary to maintain the tolerances specified, such as long spans where immediate supports are not possible, camber formwork for anticipated deflections in formwork due to weight and pressure of fresh concrete and to construction loads.

Chamfer exposed joints, edges, and external corners a minimum of 3/4 inch by moldings placed in corners of column, beam, and wall forms.

Provide shores and struts with a positive means of adjustment capable of taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations. Obtain adjustment with wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. When adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured, provide trussed supports.

Provide temporary openings in wall forms, column forms, and at other points where necessary to permit inspection and to facilitate cleaning.

Provide forms that are readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to concrete.

3.5.3 Coating

Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a nonstaining mineral oil, nonstaining form coating compound, or two coats of nitrocellulose lacquer. Do not use mineral oil on forms for surfaces to which adhesive, paint, or other finish material is to be applied.

3.5.4 Reshoring

Reshore concrete elements where forms are removed prior to the specified time period. Do not permit elements to deflect or accept loads during form stripping or reshoring. Forms on columns, walls, or other load-bearing members may be stripped after 2 days if loads are not applied to the members. After forms are removed, reshore slabs and beams over 10 feet in span and cantilevers over 4 feet for the remainder of the specified time period in accordance with paragraph entitled "Removal of Forms." Perform reshoring operations to prevent subjecting concrete members to overloads, eccentric loading, or reverse bending. Provide reshoring elements with the same load-carrying capabilities as original shoring and spaced similar to original shoring. Firmly secure and brace reshoring elements to provide solid bearing and support.

3.5.5 Reuse

Reuse forms providing the structural integrity of concrete and the aesthetics of exposed concrete are not compromised.

3.5.6 Forms for Standard Rough Form Finish

Give rough form finish concrete formed surfaces that are to be concealed by other construction, unless otherwise specified.

Form facing material for standard rough form finish must be the specified concrete form plywood or other approved form facing material that produces concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that produced



by new concrete form plywood panels.

For concrete surfaces exposed only to the ground, undressed, square-edge, 1-inch nominal thickness lumber may be used. Provide horizontal joints that are level and vertical joints that are plumb.

3.5.7 Forms for Standard Smooth Form Finish

Give smooth form finish concrete formed surfaces that are to be exposed to view or that are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete or with covering material bonded to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar coating system.

Form facing material for standard smooth finish must be the specified overlaid concrete form plywood or other approved form facing material that is nonreactive with concrete and that produce concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that produced by new overlaid concrete form plywood panels.

Maximum deflection of form facing material between supports and maximum deflection of form supports such as studs and wales must not exceed 0.0025 times the span.

Provide arrangement of form facing sheets that are orderly and symmetrical, and sheets that are in sizes as large as practical.

Arrange panels to make a symmetrical pattern of joints. Horizontal and vertical joints must be solidly backed and butted tight to prevent leakage and fins.

3.5.8 Form Ties

Provide ties that are factory fabricated metal, adjustable in length, removable or snap-off type that do allow form deflection or do not spall concrete upon removal. Portion of form ties remaining within concrete after removal of exterior parts must be at least 1-1/2 inches back from concrete surface. Provide form ties that are free of devices that leave a hole larger than 7/8 inch or less than 1/2 inch in diameter in concrete surface. Form ties fabricated at the project site or wire ties of any type are not acceptable.

3.5.9 Tolerances for Form Construction

Construct formwork to ensure that after removal of forms and prior to patching and finishing of formed surfaces, provide concrete surfaces in accordance with tolerances specified in ACI/MCP-1 and ACI/MCP-2.

3.5.10 Removal of Forms and Supports

After placing concrete, forms must remain in place for the time periods specified in ACI/MCP-4. Do not remove forms and shores (except those used for slabs on grade and slip forms) until the client determines that the concrete has gained sufficient strength to support its weight and superimposed loads. Base such determination on compliance with one of the following:

a. The plans and specifications stipulate conditions for removal of forms and shores, and such conditions have been followed, or



b. The concrete has been properly tested with an appropriate ASTM standard test method designed to indicate the concrete compressive strength, and the test results indicate that the concrete has gained sufficient strength to support its weight and superimposed loads.

Prevent concrete damage during form removal. Clean all forms immediately after removal.

3.5.10.1 Special Requirements for Reduced Time Period

Forms may be removed earlier than specified if ASTM C 39/C 39M test results of field-cured samples from a representative portion of the structure indicate that the concrete has reached a minimum of 85 percent of the design strength.

3.6 WATERSTOP SPLICES

Fusion weld in the field.

3.7 FORMED SURFACES

3.7.1 Preparation of Form Surfaces

Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide a commercial formulation form-coating compound that does not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces and impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces that entails bonding or adhesion nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. Do not allow excess form-coating compound to stand in puddles in the forms nor to come in contact with concrete against which fresh concrete is placed. Make thinning of form-coating compound with thinning agent of the type, in the amount, and under the conditions recommended by form-coating compound manufacturer's printed or written directions.

3.7.2 Tolerances

ACI/MCP-4 and as indicated.

3.7.3 As-Cast Form

Provide form facing material producing a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. Arrange facing material in an orderly and symmetrical manner and keep seams to a practical minimum. Support forms as necessary to meet required tolerances. Do not use material with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which can impair the texture of the concrete surface.

3.8 PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

ACI/MCP-2. Provide bars, wire fabric, wire ties, supports, and other devices necessary to install and secure reinforcement. Reinforcement must not have rust, scale, oil, grease, clay, or foreign substances that would reduce the bond. Rusting of reinforcement is a basis of rejection if the effective cross-sectional area or the nominal weight per unit length has been reduced. Remove loose rust prior to placing steel. Tack welding is prohibited.



3.8.1 General

Provide details of reinforcement that are in accordance with, and ACI/MCP-4 and as specified.


Provide beneath the on-grade concrete floor slab. Use the greatest widths and lengths practicable to eliminate joints wherever possible. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches and tape or cement joints. Remove torn, punctured, or damaged vapor retarder material and provide with new vapor retarder prior to placing concrete. Concrete placement must not damage vapor retarder material.

3.8.3 Reinforcement Supports

Place reinforcement and secure with galvanized or non corrodible chairs, spacers, or metal hangers. For supporting reinforcement on the ground, use concrete or other non corrodible material, having a compressive strength equal to or greater than the concrete being placed.

3.8.4 Splicing

As indicated. For splices not indicated ACI/MCP-2. Do not splice at points of maximum stress. Overlap welded wire fabric the spacing of the cross wires, plus 2 inches. AWS D1.4/D1.4M. Approve welded splices prior to use.

3.8.5 Future Bonding

Plug exposed, threaded, mechanical reinforcement bar connectors with a greased bolt. Provide bolt threads that match the connector. Countersink the connector in the concrete. Calk the depression after the bolt is installed.

3.8.6 Cover

ACI/MCP-2 for minimum coverage, unless otherwise indicated.

3.8.7 Setting Miscellaneous Material

Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such items in position before concrete placement. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete.

3.8.8 Construction Joints

Locate joints to least impair strength. Continue reinforcement across joints unless otherwise indicated.

3.8.9 Expansion Joints and Contraction Joints

Provide expansion joint at edges of interior floor slabs on grade abutting vertical surfaces, and as indicated. Make expansion joints 1/2 inch wide unless indicated otherwise. Fill expansion joints not exposed to weather with preformed joint filler material. Completely fill joints exposed to weather with joint filler material and joint sealant. Do not extend reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete through



any expansion joint unless an expansion sleeve is used. Provide contraction joints, either formed or saw cut or cut with a jointing tool, to the indicated depth after the surface has been finished. Complete saw joints within 4 to 12 hours after concrete placement. Protect joints from intrusion of foreign matter.

3.8.10 Fabrication

Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to shapes and dimensions indicated for reinforcement, and as follows:

Provide fabrication tolerances that are in accordance with ACI/MCP-1, ACI/MCP-2 and ACI/MCP-3.

Provide hooks and bends that are in accordance with and ACI/MCP-3.

Reinforcement must be bent cold to shapes as indicated. Bending must be done in the shop. Rebending of a reinforcing bar that has been bent incorrectly is not be permitted. Bending must be in accordance with standard approved practice and by approved machine methods.

Tolerance on nominally square-cut, reinforcing bar ends must be in accordance with ACI/MCP-3.

Deliver reinforcing bars bundled, tagged, and marked. Tags must be metal with bar size, length, mark, and other information pressed in by machine. Marks must correspond with those used on the placing drawings.

Do not use reinforcement that has any of the following defects:

a. Bar lengths, depths, and bends beyond specified fabrication tolerances

b. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or approved shop drawings

c. Bars with reduced cross-section due to rusting or other cause

Replace defective reinforcement with new reinforcement having required shape, form, and cross-section area.

3.8.11 Placing Reinforcement

Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI/MCP-4.

For slabs on grade and for footing reinforcement, support bars on precast concrete blocks, spaced at intervals required by size of reinforcement, to keep reinforcement the minimum height specified above the underside of slab or footing.

Contractor must cooperate with other trades in setting of anchor bolts, inserts, and other embedded items. Where conflicts occur between locating reinforcing and embedded items, the Contractor must notify the Contracting Officer so that conflicts may be reconciled before placing concrete. Anchors and embedded items must be positioned and supported with appropriate accessories.

Provide reinforcement that is supported and secured together to prevent displacement by construction loads or by placing of wet concrete, and as follows:



Provide supports for reinforcing bars that are sufficient in number and sufficiently heavy to carry the reinforcement they support, and in accordance with ACI/MCP-4 and CRSI MSP-2. Do not use supports to support runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.

Equip supports on ground and similar surfaces with sand-plates.

Support welded wire fabric as required for reinforcing bars.

Secure reinforcements to supports by means of tie wire. Wire must be black, soft iron wire, not less than 16 gage.

With the exception of temperature reinforcement, tied to main steel approximately 24 inches on center, reinforcement must be accurately placed, securely tied at intersections with 18-gage annealed wire, and held in position during placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or other approved supports. Point wire-tie ends away from the form. Unless otherwise indicated, numbers, type, and spacing of supports must conform to ACI/MCP-3.

Bending of reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete is permitted only as specified inand ACI/MCP-4.

3.8.12 Spacing of Reinforcing Bars

Spacing must be as indicated. If not indicated, spacing must be in accordance with theACI/MCP-3.

Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid interference with other reinforcement, or with conduit, pipe, or other embedded items. If any reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding one bar diameter or specified placing tolerance, resulting rearrangement of reinforcement is subject to approval.

3.8.13 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement

Concrete protection must be in accordance with the ACI/MCP-4, ASTM E 648,and ACI/MCP-3.

3.8.14 Welding

Welding must be in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.

3.9 BATCHING, MEASURING, MIXING, AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and ACI/MCP-2, except as modified herein. Batching equipment must be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently measured within the following tolerances: 1 percent for cement and water, 2 percent for aggregate, and 3 percent for admixtures. Furnish mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete.

3.9.1 Measuring

Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs entitled "Sampling" and "Testing."



3.9.2 Mixing

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ACI/MCP-2. Machine mix concrete. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates. Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air temperature is less than 84 degrees F. Reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than 84 degrees F except as follows: if set retarding admixture is used and slump requirements can be met, limit for placing concrete may remain at 90 minutes. Additional water may be added, provided that both the specified maximum slump and water-cement ratio are not exceeded. When additional water is added, an additional 30 revolutions of the mixer at mixing speed is required. If the entrained air content falls below the specified limit, add a sufficient quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content within the specified limits. Dissolve admixtures in the mixing water and mix in the drum to uniformly distribute the admixture throughout the batch.

3.9.3 Transporting

Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable. Prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Clean transporting equipment thoroughly before each batch. Do not use aluminum pipe or chutes. Remove concrete which has segregated in transporting and dispose of as directed.

3.10 PLACING CONCRETE

Place concrete as soon as practicable after the forms and the reinforcement have been inspected and approved. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation; in uncovered areas during periods of precipitation; or in standing water. Prior to placing concrete, remove dirt, construction debris, water, snow, and ice from within the forms. Deposit concrete as close as practicable to the final position in the forms. Do not exceed a free vertical drop of 3 feet from the point of discharge. Place concrete in one continuous operation from one end of the structure towards the other. Position grade stakes on 10 foot centers maximum in each direction when pouring interior slabs and on 20 foot centers maximum for exterior slabs.

3.10.1 General Placing Requirements

Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete is placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to procedures which cause segregation.

Concrete to receive other construction must be screeded to proper level to avoid excessive skimming or grouting.

Do not use concrete which becomes nonplastic and unworkable or does not meet quality control limits as specified or has been contaminated by foreign materials. Use of retempered concrete is permitted. Remove rejected concrete from the site.



3.10.2 Footing Placement

Concrete for footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon inspection and approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.10.3 Vibration

ACI/MCP-2 and ASTM A 934/A 934M. Furnish a spare, working, vibrator on the job site whenever concrete is placed. Consolidate concrete slabs greater than 4 inches in depth with high frequency mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading and tamping. Consolidate concrete slabs 4 inches or less in depth by wood tampers, spading, and settling with a heavy leveling straightedge. Operate internal vibrators with vibratory element submerged in the concrete, with a minimum frequency of not less than 6000 impulses per minute when submerged. Do not use vibrators to transport the concrete in the forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators approximately 20 inches apart. Penetrate the previously placed lift with the vibrator when more than one lift is required. Place concrete in 20 inch maximum vertical lifts. Use external vibrators on the exterior surface of the forms when internal vibrators do not provide adequate consolidation of the concrete.

3.10.4 Application of Epoxy Bonding Compound

Apply a thin coat of compound to dry, clean surfaces. Scrub compound into the surface with a stiff-bristle brush. Place concrete while compound is stringy. Do not permit compound to harden prior to concrete placement. Follow manufacturer's instructions regarding safety and health precautions when working with epoxy resins.

3.10.5 Pumping

ACI/MCP-2. Pumping must not result in separation or loss of materials nor cause interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments. Loss of slump in pumping equipment must not exceed 2 inches. Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. Avoid rapid changes in pipe sizes. Limit maximum size of course aggregate to 33 percent of the diameter of the pipe. Limit maximum size of well rounded aggregate to 40 percent of the pipe diameter. Take samples for testing at both the point of delivery to the pump and at the discharge end.

3.10.6 Cold Weather

ACI/MCP-2. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees FObtain approval prior to placing concrete when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat to maintain 50 degrees F minimum adjacent to both the formwork and the structure while curing. Limit the rate of cooling to 37 degrees F in any 1 hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours after heat application.

3.10.7 Hot Weather

Maintain required concrete temperature using Figure 2.1.5 in ACI/MCP-2 to prevent the evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. Shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing. Start curing when the surface of the fresh



concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Provide water hoses, pipes, spraying equipment, and water hauling equipment, where job site is remote to water source, to maintain a moist concrete surface throughout the curing period. Provide burlap cover or other suitable, permeable material with fog spray or continuous wetting of the concrete when weather conditions prevent the use of either liquid membrane curing compound or impervious sheets. For vertical surfaces, protect forms from direct sunlight and add water to top of structure once concrete is set.

3.10.8 Follow-up

Check concrete within 24 hours of placement for flatness, levelness, and other specified tolerances. Adjust formwork and placement techniques on subsequent pours to achieve specified tolerances.

3.10.9 Placing Concrete in Forms

Deposit concrete placed in forms in horizontal layers not exceeding 24 inches.

Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached elevation of spreaders.

Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Design vibrators to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete and maintain a speed of not less than 9,000 impulses per minute when submerged in concrete. Provide vibrating equipment adequate in number of units and power of each unit to properly consolidate concrete. Vibration of forms and reinforcement is not be permitted. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced points not farther apart than visible effectiveness of machine. Do not insert vibrator into lower courses of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of concrete mix.

Do not start placing of concrete in supporting elements until concrete previously placed in columns and walls is no longer plastic and has been in place a minimum of 2 hours.

3.10.10 Placing Concrete Slabs

Place and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of approved construction joints until placing of panel or section is completed.

During concrete placing operations, consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs and against bulkheads of slabs on ground by mechanical vibrators as specified. Consolidate concrete in remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other approved method. Limit consolidation operations to time necessary to obtain consolidation of concrete without bringing an excess of fine aggregate to the surface. Concrete to be consolidated must be as dry as practical and surfaces thereof must not be manipulated prior to finishing operations. Bring concrete correct level with a straightedge and struck-off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, leaving it free



of humps or hollows. Sprinkling of water on plastic surface is not permitted.

Provide finish of slabs as specified.

3.10.11 Bonding

Surfaces of set concrete at joints, except where bonding is obtained by use of concrete bonding agent, must be roughened and cleaned of laitance, coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter. Roughen surfaces in a manner that exposes the aggregate uniformly and does not leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate, nor damaged concrete at the surface.

Obtain bonding of fresh concrete that has set as follows:

At joints between footings and walls or columns, between walls or columns and the beams or slabs they support, and elsewhere unless otherwise specified; roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete must be dampened, but not saturated, immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete.

At joints in exposed-to-view work; at vertical joints in walls; at joints near midpoint of span in girders, beams, supported slabs, other structural members; in work designed to contain liquids; the roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete must be dampened but not saturated and covered with a cement grout coating.

Provide cement grout that consists of equal parts of portland cement and fine aggregate by weight with not more than 6 gallons of water per sack of cement. Apply cement grout with a stiff broom or brush to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Deposit fresh concrete before cement grout has attained its initial set.

Bonding of fresh concrete to concrete that has set may be obtained by use of a concrete bonding agent. Apply such bonding material to cleaned concrete surface in accordance with approved printed instructions of bonding material manufacturer.

3.11 SURFACE FINISHES EXCEPT FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES

3.11.1 Defects

Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than 1 square inch surface area or 0.25 inch maximum depth, or otherwise defective areas. Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and patch with nonshrink grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed. Concrete with extensive honeycomb including exposed steel reinforcement, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects which affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. The surface of the concrete must not vary more than the allowable tolerances of ACI/MCP-4. Exposed surfaces must be uniform in appearance and finished to a smooth form finish unless otherwise specified.

3.11.2 Not Against Forms (Top of Walls)

Surfaces not otherwise specified must be finished with wood floats to even surfaces. Finish must match adjacent finishes.



3.11.3 Formed Surfaces

3.11.3.1 Tolerances

ACI/MCP-1 and as indicated.

3.11.3.2 As-Cast Rough Form

Provide for surfaces not exposed to public view. Patch these holes and defects and level abrupt irregularities. Remove or rub off fins and other projections exceeding 0.25 inch in height.

3.11.3.3 Standard Smooth Finish

Finish must be as-cast concrete surface as obtained with form facing material for standard smooth finish. Repair and patch defective areas as specified; and all fins and remove other projections on surface.

3.12 FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES AND MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION

ACI/MCP-2, unless otherwise specified. Slope floors uniformly to drains where drains are provided. Where straightedge measurements are specified, Contractor must provide straightedge.

3.12.1 Finish

Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade, and elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the weight of the finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the surface, drag the excess water off or remove by absorption with porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater.

3.12.1.1 Scratched

Use for surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious applications. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class C tolerance as defined below,roughen the surface with stiff brushes of rakes before final set.

3.12.1.2 Floated

Use for exterior slabs where not otherwise specified. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do not work the concrete further, until ready for floating. Whether floating with a wood, magnesium, or composite hand float, with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes, or with a powered disc, float must begin when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first floating, check surface with a 10 foot straightedge applied at no less than two different angles, one of which is perpendicular to the direction of strike off. Cut down high spots and fill low spots during this procedure to produce a surface level within 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3.12.1.3 Steel Troweled

Use for floors intended as walking surfaces and for reception of floor coverings. First, provide a floated finish. Next, the finish must be power troweled two times, and finally hand troweled. The first troweling after floating needs to produce a smooth surface which is relatively free



of defects but which may still show some trowel marks. Perform additional trowelings done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final troweling is done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. Thoroughly consolidate the surface by the hand troweling operations. The finished surface must be essentially free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. The finished surface must produce a surface level to within 1/4 inch in 10 feet. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering by grinding.3.12.1.4 Broomed

Use on surfaces of exterior walks, steps, platforms, patios exposed to view and ramps, unless otherwise indicated. Perform a floated finish, then draw a broom or burlap belt across the surface to produce a coarse scored texture. Permit surface to harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom transverse to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab.

3.12.1.5 Pavement

Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined longitudinal and crosswise motion. Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of the template. After screeding, float the concrete longitudinally. Use a straightedge to check slope and flatness; correct and refloat as necessary. Obtain final finish by belting. Lay belt flat on the concrete surface and advance with a sawing motion; continue until a uniform but gritty nonslip surface is obtained. Round edges and joints with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch.

3.12.1.6 Chemical-Hardener Treatment

Apply liquid-chemical floor hardener where indicated after curing and drying concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water and apply in three coats. First coat must be one-third strength, second coat one-half strength, and third coat two-thirds strength. Apply each coat evenly and allow to dry 24 hours between coats.

Approved proprietary chemical hardeners must be applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions.

3.12.2 Concrete Walks

Provide 4 inches thick minimum. Provide contraction joints spaced every 5 linear feet unless otherwise indicated. Cut contraction joints one inch deep with a jointing tool after the surface has been finished. Provide 0.5 inch thick transverse expansion joints at changes in direction where sidewalk abuts curb, steps, rigid pavement, or other similar structures; space expansion joints every 50 feet maximum. Give walks a broomed finish. Unless indicated otherwise, provide a transverse slope of 1/48. Limit variation in cross section to 1/4 inch in 5 feet.

3.12.3 Pits and Trenches

Place bottoms and walls monolithically or provide waterstops and keys.

3.12.4 Curbs and Gutters

Provide contraction joints spaced every 10 feet maximum unless otherwise indicated. Cut contraction joints 3/4 inch deep with a jointing tool after the surface has been finished. Provide expansion joints 1/2 inch thick and



spaced every 100 feet maximum unless otherwise indicated. Perform pavement finish.

3.12.5 Splash Blocks

Provide at outlets of downspouts emptying at grade. Splash blocks may be precast concrete, and must be 24 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 4 inches thick, unless otherwise indicated, with smooth-finished countersunk dishes sloped to drain away from the building.

3.13 CURING AND PROTECTION

ACI/MCP-2 unless otherwise specified. Begin curing immediately following form removal. Avoid damage to concrete from vibration created by blasting, pile driving, movement of equipment in the vicinity, disturbance of formwork or protruding reinforcement, and any other activity resulting in ground vibrations. Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks, and oil stains. Do not allow concrete to dry out from time of placement until the expiration of the specified curing period. Do not use membrane-forming compound on surfaces where appearance would be objectionable, on any surface to be painted, where coverings are to be bonded to the concrete, or on concrete to which other concrete is to be bonded. If forms are removed prior to the expiration of the curing period, provide another curing procedure specified herein for the remaining portion of the curing period. Provide moist curing for those areas receiving liquid chemical sealer-hardener or epoxy coating. Allow curing compound/sealer installations to cure prior to the installation of materials that adsorb VOCs.

3.13.1 General

Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and cold or hot temperature and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening of concrete.

Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from surface of concrete after placing and finishing. Keep concrete moist for minimum 72 hours.

Final curing must immediately follow initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing until cumulative number of hours or fraction thereof (not necessarily consecutive) during which temperature of air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F has totaled 168 hours. Alternatively, if tests are made of cylinders kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods, final curing may be terminated when the average compressive strength has reached 70 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength. Prevent rapid drying at end of final curing period.

3.13.2 Moist Curing

Remove water without erosion or damage to the structure. Prevent water run-off.

3.13.2.1 Ponding or Immersion

Continually immerse the concrete throughout the curing period. Water must not be more than 50 degrees F less than the temperature of the concrete.



For temperatures between 40 and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.

3.13.2.2 Fog Spraying or Sprinkling

Apply water uniformly and continuously throughout the curing period. For temperatures between 40 and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.

3.13.2.3 Pervious Sheeting

Completely cover surface and edges of the concrete with two thicknesses of wet sheeting. Overlap sheeting 6 inches over adjacent sheeting. Provide sheeting that is at least as long as the width of the surface to be cured. During application, do not drag the sheeting over the finished concrete nor over sheeting already placed. Wet sheeting thoroughly and keep continuously wet throughout the curing period.

3.13.2.4 Impervious Sheeting

Wet the entire exposed surface of the concrete thoroughly with a fine spray of water and cover with impervious sheeting throughout the curing period. Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap edges 12 inches minimum. Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured. Secure edges and transverse laps to form closed joints. Repair torn or damaged sheeting or provide new sheeting. Cover or wrap columns, walls, and other vertical structural elements from the top down with impervious sheeting; overlap and continuously tape sheeting joints; and introduce sufficient water to soak the entire surface prior to completely enclosing.

3.13.3 Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

Seal or cover joint openings prior to application of curing compound. Prevent curing compound from entering the joint. Apply in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface. Provide and maintain compound on the concrete surface throughout the curing period. Do not use this method of curing where the use of Figure 2.1.5 in ACI/MCP-2 indicates that hot weather conditions cause an evaporation rate exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot per hour.

3.13.3.1 Application

Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise, apply compound immediately after the surface loses its water sheen and has a dull appearance, and before joints are sawed. Mechanically agitate curing compound thoroughly during use. Use approved power-spraying equipment to uniformly apply two coats of compound in a continuous operation. The total coverage for the two coats must be 200 square feet maximum per gallon of undiluted compound unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer's written instructions. The compound must form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that does not check, crack, or peel. Immediately apply an additional coat of compound to areas where the film is defective. Re-spray concrete surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound application.

3.13.3.2 Protection of Treated Surfaces

Prohibit pedestrian and vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion at



least 72 hours after compound application. Maintain continuity of the coating for the entire curing period and immediately repair any damage.

3.13.4 Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener and Dust Proofer

Apply sealer-hardener/dust proofer to interior floors not receiving floor covering and floors located under access flooring. Apply the sealer-hardener/dust proofer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Seal or cover joints and openings in which joint sealant is to be applied as required by the joint sealant manufacturer. Do not apply the sealer hardener/dust proofer until the concrete has been moist cured and has aged for a minimum of 30 days. Apply a minimum of two coats of sealer-hardener/dust proofer.

3.13.5 Curing Periods

ACI/MCP-2 except 10 days for retaining walls or pavement , 21 days for concrete that is in full-time or intermittent contact with seawater, salt spray, alkali soil or waters. Begin curing immediately after placement. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot temperatures, and mechanical injury; and maintain minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete. The materials and methods of curing are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer.

3.13.6 Curing Methods

Accomplish curing by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, by membrane curing, and by combinations thereof, as specified.

Moist curing:

Accomplish moisture curing by any of the following methods:

Keeping surface of concrete wet by covering with water

Continuous water spraying

Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover for curing concrete saturated with water and keeping absorptive cover wet by water spraying or intermittent hosing. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges with a slight overlap over adjacent absorptive covers.

Moisture-cover curing:

Accomplish moisture-retaining cover curing by covering concrete surfaces with specified moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete. Place cover directly on concrete in widest practical width, with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches. Weight cover to prevent displacement; immediately repair tears or holes appearing during curing period by patching with pressure-sensitive, waterproof tape or other approved method.

Membrane curing:

Accomplish membrane curing by applying specified membrane-forming curing compound to damp concrete surfaces as soon as moisture film has disappeared. Apply curing compound uniformly in a two-coat operation



by power-spraying equipment using a spray nozzle equipped with a wind guard. Apply second coat in a direction at right angles to direction of first coat. Total coverage for two coats must be not more than 200 square feet per gallon of curing compound. Respray concrete surfaces which are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied by method and at rate specified. Maintain continuity of coating for entire curing period and immediately repair damage to coating during this period.

Membrane-curing compounds must not be used on surfaces that are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete or with a covering material bonded to concrete, such as other concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, painting, and other coatings and finish materials.

3.13.7 Curing Formed Surfaces

Accomplish curing of formed surfaces, including undersurfaces of girders, beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed before end of curing period, accomplish final curing of formed surfaces by any of the curing methods specified above, as applicable.

3.13.8 Curing Unformed Surfaces

Accomplish initial curing of unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by membrane curing.

Unless otherwise specified, accomplish final curing of unformed surfaces by any of curing methods specified above, as applicable.

Accomplish final curing of concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener of finish flooring by moisture-retaining cover curing.

3.13.9 Temperature of Concrete During Curing

When temperature of atmosphere is 41 degrees F and below, maintain temperature of concrete at not less than 55 degrees F throughout concrete curing period or 45 degrees F when the curing period is measured by maturity. When necessary, make arrangements before start of concrete placing for heating, covering, insulation, or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions for concrete during curing period.

When the temperature of atmosphere is 80 degrees F and above or during other climatic conditions which cause too rapid drying of concrete, make arrangements before start of concrete placing for installation of wind breaks, of shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or moisture-retaining covering of light color as required to protect concrete during curing period.

Changes in temperature of concrete must be uniform and not exceed 37 degrees F in any 1 hour nor 80 degrees F in any 24-hour period.

3.13.10 Protection from Mechanical Injury

During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration and from damage caused by rain or running water.



3.13.11 Protection After Curing

Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction operations.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3.14.1 Sampling

ASTM C 172. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified. ASTM C 31/C 31M for making test specimens.

3.14.2 Testing

3.14.2.1 Slump Tests

ASTM C 143/C 143M. Take concrete samples during concrete placement. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement, when test cylinders are made, and for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.

3.14.2.2 Temperature Tests

Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests in hot or cold weather conditions (below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F) for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete, until the specified temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders and slump tests are made.

3.14.2.3 Compressive Strength Tests

ASTM C 39/C 39M. Make five test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M. Take precautions to prevent evaporation and loss of water from the specimen. Test two cylinders at 7 days, three cylinders at 28 days. Take samples for strength tests of each mix design of concrete placed each day not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 160 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 5400 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. For the entire project, take no less than five sets of samples and perform strength tests for each mix design of concrete placed. Each strength test result must be the average of two cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days. If the average of any three consecutive strength test results is less than f'c or if any strength test result falls below f'c by more than 450 psi, take a minimum of three ASTM C 42/C 42M core samples from the in-place work represented by the low test cylinder results and test. Concrete represented by core test is considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85 percent of f'c and if no single core is less than 75 percent of f'c. Retest locations represented by erratic core strengths. Remove concrete not meeting strength criteria and provide new acceptable concrete. Repair core holes with nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of adjacent concrete.

3.14.2.4 Air Content

ASTM C 173/C 173M or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete. Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests.



3.14.2.5 Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete

ASTM C 567. Determine unit weight of lightweight concrete. Perform test for every 20 cubic yards maximum.3.14.2.6 Ion Concentration

ACI/MCP-3. Determine water soluble ion concentration. Perform test once for each mix design.

3.14.2.7 Strength of Concrete Structure

Compliance with the following is considered deficient if it fails to meet the requirements which control strength of structure in place, including following conditions:

Failure to meet compressive strength tests as evaluated

Reinforcement not conforming to requirements specified

Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a manner as to reduce strength

Concrete curing and protection of concrete against extremes of temperature during curing, not conforming to requirements specified

Concrete subjected to damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration

Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength

3.14.2.8 Testing Concrete Structure for Strength

When there is evidence that strength of concrete structure in place does not meet specification requirements, make cores drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination in accordance with ASTM C 42/C 42M, and as follows:

Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete-in-place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores will be determined by the Contracting Officer.

Test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C 42/C 42M if concrete they represent is more than superficially wet under service.

Air dry cores, (60 to 80 degrees F with relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and test dry if concrete they represent is dry under service conditions.

Strength of cores from each member or area are considered satisfactory if their average is equal to or greater than 85 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength of the class of concrete.

Core specimens will be taken and tested by the Government. If the results of core-boring tests indicate that the concrete as placed does not conform to the drawings and specification, the cost of such tests and restoration required must be borne by the Contractor.

Fill core holes solid with patching mortar and finished to match adjacent



concrete surfaces.

Correct concrete work that is found inadequate by core tests in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.15 WASTE MANAGEMENT

As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows.

3.15.1 Mixing Equipment

Before concrete pours, designate on-site area to be paved later in project for cleaning out concrete mixing trucks. Minimize water used to wash equipment.

3.15.2 Reinforcing Steel

Collect reinforcing steel and place in designated area for recycling.

3.15.3 Other Waste

Identify concrete manufacturer's or supplier's policy for collection or return of construction waste, unused material, deconstruction waste, and/or packaging material.

3.16 JOINTS

3.16.1 Construction Joints

Make and locate joints not indicated so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as approved. Locate construction joints as follows:

a. In walls at not more than 60 feet in any horizontal direction; at top of footing; at top of slabs on ground; at top and bottom of door and window openings or where required to conform to architectural details; and at underside of deepest beam or girder framing into wall

b. In columns or piers, at top of footing; at top of slabs on ground; and at underside of deepest beam or girder framing into column or pier

c. Near midpoint of spans for supported slabs, beams, and girders unless a beam intersects a girder at the center, in which case construction joints in girder must offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. Make transfer of shear through construction joint by use of inclined reinforcement.

d. In slabs on ground, so as to divide slab into areas not in excess of 1,200 square feet

Provide keyways at least 1-1/2-inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings; approved bulkheads may be used for slabs.

Joints must be perpendicular to main reinforcement. Reinforcement must be continued across construction joints.



3.16.2 Waterstops

Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated.

Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make adequate provisions to support and protect waterstops during progress of work. Make field joints in waterstops in accordance with waterstop manufacturer's printed instructions, as approved. Protect waterstops protruding from joints from damage.

3.16.3 Isolation Joints in Slabs on Ground

Provide joints at points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated.

Fill joints with premolded joint filler strips 1/2 inch thick, extending full slab depth. Install filler strips at proper level below finish floor elevation with a slightly tapered, dress-and-oiled wood strip temporarily secured to top of filler strip to form a groove not less than 3/4 inch in depth where joint is sealed with sealing compound and not less than 1/4 inchin depth where joint sealing is not required. Remove wood strip after concrete has set. Contractor must clean groove of foreign matter and loose particles after surface has dried.

3.16.4 Control Joints in Slabs on Ground

Provide joints to form panels as indicated.

Under and on exact line of each control joint, cut 50 percent of welded wire fabric reinforcement before placing concrete.

Joints must be 1/8-inch wide by 1/5 to 1/4 of slab depth and formed by inserting hand-pressed fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface or by cutting the concrete with a saw after the concrete has set. After concrete has cured for at least 7 days, the Contractor must remove inserts and clean groove of foreign matter and loose particles.

3.16.5 Sealing Joints in Slabs on Ground

Isolation and control joints which are to receive finish flooring material must be sealed with joint sealing compound after concrete curing period. Slightly underfill groove with joint sealing compound to prevent extrusion of compound. Remove excess material as soon after sealing as possible.

Sealing is not required for isolation and control joints to be covered with finish flooring material. Groove must be left ready to receive filling material that is provided as part of finish floor covering work.

3.17 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGE DEVICES

3.17.1 General

Anchorage devices and embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, set and build in cast-in-place concrete as part of the work of this section, using setting drawings, instructions, and



directions for work to be attached thereto.

3.17.2 Placing Anchorage Devices

Anchorage devices and embedded items must be positioned accurately and supported against displacement. Fill openings in anchorage devices such as slots and threaded holes with an approved, removable material to prevent entry of concrete into openings.

3.18 CONCRETE CONVEYING

3.18.1 Transfer of Concrete At Project Site

Handle concrete from point of delivery and transfer to concrete conveying equipment and to locations of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods which prevent segregation and loss of concrete mix materials.

3.18.2 Mechanical Equipment for Conveying Concrete

Equipment must ensure a continuous flow of concrete at delivery end, as approved. Provide runways for wheeled concrete-conveying equipment from concrete delivery point to locations of final deposit. Interior surfaces of concrete conveying equipment must be free of hardened concrete, debris, water, snow, ice, and other deleterious substances.

-- End of Section --


MCON Project P-809Hangar 130 Renovations and

F/A-18 Facilities UpgradesMarine Corps Air Station

Cherry Point, NC

prepared forStroud-Pence & Associates, Ltd.

Virginia Beach, Virginia

30 October 2007

REPORT OFENGINEERING

SERVICES

2712 Southern Boulevard, Suite 101Virginia Beach, Virginia 23452

757-463-3200 Fax 757-463-3080 [email protected]

30 October 2007

Stroud-Pence & Associates, Ltd.5032 Rouse Drive, Suite 200Virginia Beach, Virginia 23462

Attention: Mr. Earl H. Inge, Jr., P.E.

Subject: Report of Engineering ServicesHangar 130 Pavement CoringMCON Project P-809Hangar 130 Renovations and F/A-18 Facilities UpgradesMarine Corps Air Station, Cherry Point, North CarolinaA/E Contract No. N40085-07-D-1903GER Project No. 110-4700

GeoEnvironmental Resources, Inc. is pleased to present this report of engineering services for the abovereferenced project. Our services were authorized on 1 October 2007 by Mr. Dan Dills of Dills AinscoughDuff Architects.

We appreciate the opportunity to serve as your geotechnical consultant on this project and trust that youwill contact us at your convenience with any questions concerning this report or the project in general.

Sincerely,GeoEnvironmental Resources, Inc.

Charles F. P. Crawley, III, P.E.Geotechnical Group Manager 10/30/2007

cc: Mr. Richard Harris, DAD Architects

lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll

llllllllllllllllllllll llllllllllllll

llllllllllllllllll

lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll lll lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll

NO

RTH CAROLINA

SEAL028246C

HARLES

P.

F. CRAWLEY,

III

PROFESSIONAL

ENGINEER

Southern Professional Center I 2712 Southern Boulevard, Suite 101 Virginia Beach, Virginia 23452(757) 463-3200 Fax (757) 463-3080 [email protected]

APPENDIX C - Raw Field Data Sheets

APPENDIX B - Pavement Coring Records

APPENDIX A - Coring Location Plan

SUMMARY OF RESULTS

REPORT CONTENTS

GER

In support of a design-build RFP preparation package for the Hangar 130 Renovations and F/A-18Facilities Upgrades for NAVFAC Mid-Atlantic under A/E Contract N40085-07-D-1903, GeoEnvironmentalResources, Inc. conducted airfield pavement coring on 17 October 2007 at Marine Corps Air Station,Cherry Point, North Carolina. A total of six (6) pavement cores were performed at locations selected bythe A/E and NAVFAC MIDLANT personnel.

Coring locations included the north and south bays inside Hangar 130 and each side on the exteriorperiphery of Hangar 130. A site plan showing the approximate coring locations is provided in Appendix A.

Coring was conducted using a conventional electric core drill machine and a four-inch diameter corebarrel. Each core specimen was extracted, measured for thickness, observed for material composition andphotographed.

Pavement at the coring locations was composed of plain Portland Cement Concrete (PCC). Records of thevisual observations are presented in Appendix B. The linear quantity of coring totaled 60.25 inches.

Base and subgrade materials were explored at each location by hand augering. The two locations insideHangar 130 did not appear to contain a formal base layer below the pavement. Three of the fourlocations outside of the hangar contained a crushed stone and sand base layer.

The subgrade material encountered at the coring locations consisted of a fine silty and clayey SAND (SM,SC).

Core holes were backfilled with soil cuttings and patched with a similar thickness of sack mix concreteimmediately upon completion of work at each location. Extracted core specimens were returned to ourlaboratory for storage.

Raw field data sheets are included in Appendix C.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS

GER

CORING LOCATION PLAN

APPENDIX A

GER

�

�

�

�

�

�

LEGEND:

Approx. PavementCoring Location�

Core105

Core104

Core106

Core102

Core103

Core101

HANGAR130

NOTES:General coring locations were selectedby DAD Architects and NAVFACMIDLANT personnel. Field locationswere not surveyed and may be severalfeet from the locations indicated. Thelocations shown shall be consideredapproximate.

1 OF 1

2712 Southern Boulevard, Suite 101

Virginia Beach, VA 23452

GeoEnvironmental Resources, Inc.

DRAWING NUMBERPROJECT NUMBER

110-4700

SCALE: Not to Scale

CORING LOCATION PLAN

MCON Project P-809Hangar 130 RenovationsMCAS Cherry Point, NC

GERGeoEnvironmental Resources, Inc.

Consulting Engineers

EnvironmentalGroundwater

Hazardous MaterialsGeotechnical

Industrial Hygiene

PAVEMENT CORING RECORDS

APPENDIX B

GER

Hangar 130 RenovationsMCAS Cherry Point, NC110-4700 GER

Pavement Coring Results Summary

8.5 8.5

12.5 12.5

8.2510

1512

8

0

5

10

15

20

25

30101 102 103 104 105 106

Core Location

Thic

knes

s (in

ches

)

Base

PCC

Project: MCON Project P-809, Renovations to Hangar 130and F/A-18 Facilities Upgrades

Location: MCAS Cherry Point, North CarolinaContract: N40085-07-D-1903

Project #: 110-4700

Core No.: 101Date Cored:

Location: North Bay Inside Hangar 130

Measurements / Visual Description

Pavement: 8.5" Portland Cement Concrete

Base: None

Subgrade: Light brown, fine silty SAND (SM)


Location: South Bay Inside Hangar 130



Base: None

Subgrade: Light brown, fine clayey SAND (SC)


Location: NW Side of Hangar 130



Base: 15.0" Crushed stone and sand


17-Oct-07

17-Oct-07

17-Oct-07

PAVEMENT CORING RECORD

Photograph of Pavement Core Description

Project: MCON Project P-809, Renovations to Hangar 130and F/A-18 Facilities Upgrades

Location: MCAS Cherry Point, North CarolinaContract: N40085-07-D-1903

Project #: 110-4700


Location: NE Side of Hangar 130




Subgrade: Grey & light brown, fine silty SAND (SM)with mild petroleum odor


Location: SE Side of Hangar 130



Base: None



Location: SW Side of Hangar 130




Subgrade: Dark grey, fine clayey SAND (SC)with moderate petroleum odor

17-Oct-07

17-Oct-07

17-Oct-07

PAVEMENT CORING RECORD

Photograph of Pavement Core Description

RAW FIELD DATA SHEETS

APPENDIX C

GER


-

SECTION 04 20 00

MASONRY10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI 530 (2005) Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures Commentaries

ACI 530.1 (2005) Specification for Masonry Structures

ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual


ASTM A 153/A 153M (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A 615/A 615M (2007) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A 641/A 641M (2003) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

ASTM A 82/A 82M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C 1019 (2007) Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout

ASTM C 1072 (2006) Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength

ASTM C 1142 (1995; R 2001) Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM C 140 (2007) Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units

ASTM C 144 (2004) Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar




ASTM C 270 (2007) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM C 476 (2002) Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry

ASTM C 494/C 494M (2005a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C 593 (2006) Fly Ash and Other Pozzolans for Use with Lime

ASTM C 62 (2005) Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)

ASTM C 67 (2007) Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile

ASTM C 780 (2006a) Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry

ASTM C 90 (2006b) Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

ASTM C 91 (2005) Masonry Cement


ASTM D 1972 (1997; R 2005) Standard Practice for Generic Marking of Plastic Products

ASTM D 2000 (2006ae1) Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

ASTM D 2240 (2005) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

ASTM D 2287 (1996; R 2001) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds

ASTM E 119 (2007a) Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials



1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control



approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Structural Masonry; G

Drawings including plans, elevations, and details of wall reinforcement; details of reinforcing bars at corners and wall intersections; offsets; tops, bottoms, and ends of walls; control and expansion joints; lintels; and wall openings. Bar splice locations shall be shown. Bent bars shall be identified on a bending diagram and shall be referenced and located on the drawings. Wall dimensions, bar clearances, and wall openings greater than one masonry unit in area shall be shown. No approval will be given to the shop drawings until the Contractor certifies that all openings, including those for mechanical and electrical service, are shown. If, during construction, additional masonry openings are required, the approved shop drawings shall be resubmitted with the additional openings shown along with the proposed changes. Location of these additional openings shall be clearly highlighted. The minimum scale for wall elevations shall be 1/4 inch per foot. Reinforcement bending details shall conform to the requirements of ACI SP-66.

SD-03 Product Data

Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)

Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Clay or Shale Brick; G; (LEED)

Concrete Masonry Units (CMU); G; (LEED)Cement; G; (LEED)Insulation; GFlashing; G

Manufacturer's descriptive data. Documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

Cold Weather Installation; G

Cold weather construction procedures.

Documentation certifying products are from salvaged/recovered sources. Indicate relative dollar value of salvaged content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

SD-04 Samples

Precast Items; G



Clay or Shale Brick; G

Color samples of three stretcher units and one unit for each type of special shape. Units shall show the full range of color and texture.

SD-05 Design Data

Mortar; GGrout; G

Pre-mixed mortar composition. Calculations and certifications of masonry unit and mortar strength.

SD-06 Test Reports

Field Testing of Mortar; GField Testing of Grout; G

Masonry Cement; GFire-rated CMU; G

Test reports from an approved independent laboratory. Test reports on a previously tested material shall be certified as the same as that proposed for use in this project.

SD-07 Certificates

Clay or Shale BrickConcrete BrickConcrete Masonry Units (CMU)Control Joint KeysAnchors, Ties, and Bar PositionersExpansion-Joint MaterialsJoint ReinforcementReinforcing Steel Bars and RodsMasonry Cement

InsulationPrecast Concrete ItemsAdmixtures for Masonry MortarAdmixtures for Grout

Certificates of compliance stating that the materials meet the specified requirements.


Masonry Cement

When masonry cement is used, submit the manufacturer's printed instructions on proportions of water and aggregates and on mixing to obtain the type of mortar required.

SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data



Plastic Identification

When not labeled, identify types in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Take-Back Program

Documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.

1.3 SAMPLE MASONRY PANELS

After material samples are approved and prior to starting masonry work, a portable panel of clay or shale brick and sample masonry panels shall be constructed for each type and color of masonry required. At least 48 hours prior to constructing the sample panel or panels, the Contractor shall submit written notification to the Contracting Officer's Representative. Sample panels shall not be built in, or as part of the structure, but shall be located where directed.

1.3.1 Configuration

Panels shall be L-shaped or otherwise configured to represent all of the wall elements. Panels shall be of the size necessary to demonstrate the acceptable level of workmanship for each type of masonry represented on the project. The minimum size of a straight panel or a leg of an L-shaped panel shall be 8 feet long by 6 feet high.

1.3.2 Composition

Panels shall show full color range, texture, and bond pattern of the masonry work. The Contractor's method for mortar joint tooling; grouting of reinforced vertical cores, collar joints, bond beams, and lintels; positioning, securing, and lapping of reinforcing steel; positioning and lapping of joint reinforcement (including prefabricated corners); and cleaning of masonry work shall be demonstrated during the construction of the panels. Installation or application procedures for anchors, wall ties, CMU control joints, brick expansion joints, insulation, flashing, and weep holes shall be shown in the sample panels. The panels shall contain a masonry bonded corner that includes a bond beam corner. Panels shall show installation of electrical boxes and conduit. Panels that represent reinforced masonry shall contain a 2 by 2 foot opening placed at least 2 feet above the panel base and 2 feet away from all free edges, corners, and control joints. Required reinforcing shall be provided around this opening as well as at wall corners and control joints.

1.3.3 Construction Method

Where anchored veneer walls are required, the Contractor shall demonstrate and receive approval for the method of construction; i.e., either bring up the two wythes together or separately, with the insulation and appropriate ties placed within the specified tolerances across the cavity. Temporary provisions shall be demonstrated to preclude mortar or grout droppings in the cavity and to provide a clear open air space of the dimensions shown on the drawings. Where masonry is to be grouted, the Contractor shall demonstrate and receive approval on the method that will be used to bring up the masonry wythes; support the reinforcing bars; and grout cells, bond



beams, lintels, and collar joints using the requirements specified herein. If sealer is specified to be applied to the masonry units, sealer shall be applied to the sample panels. Panels shall be built on a properly designed concrete foundation.

1.3.4 Usage

The completed panels shall be used as the standard of workmanship for the type of masonry represented. Masonry work shall not commence until the sample panel for that type of masonry construction has been completed and approved. Panels shall be protected from the weather and construction operations until the masonry work has been completed and approved. After completion of the work, the sample panels, including all foundation concrete, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the construction site.

1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

Materials shall be delivered, handled, stored, and protected to avoid chipping, breakage, and contact with soil or contaminating material. Store and prepare materials in already disturbed areas to minimize project site disturbance and size of project site.

1.4.1 Masonry Units

Cover and protect moisture-controlled concrete masonry units and cementitious materials from precipitation. Conform to all handling and storage requirements of ASTM C 90. Prefabricated lintels shall be marked on top sides to show either the lintel schedule number or the number and size of top and bottom bars.

1.4.2 Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties

Steel reinforcing bars, coated anchors, ties, and joint reinforcement shall be stored above the ground. Steel reinforcing bars and uncoated ties shall be free of loose mill scale and rust.

1.4.3 Cementitious Materials, Sand and Aggregates

Cementitious and other packaged materials shall be delivered in unopened containers, plainly marked and labeled with manufacturers' names and brands. Cementitious material shall be stored in dry, weathertight enclosures or be completely covered. Cement shall be handled in a manner that will prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness. Sand and aggregates shall be stored in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation.

1.5 STRUCTURAL MASONRY


1.6.1 Appearance

Bricks shall be manufactured at one time and from the same batch. Blend all brick to produce a uniform appearance when installed. An observable "banding" or "layering" of colors or textures caused by improperly mixed brick is unacceptable.



1.6.2 Contamination

When using bricks containing contaminated soil, supplier shall certify that the hazardous waste is neutralized by the manufacturing process and that no additional pollutants will be released, or that the product is free from hazardous contaminants.

1.6.3 Testing

Masonry strength shall be determined in accordance with ACI 530; submit test reports on three prisms as specified in ACI 530.1. The cost of testing shall be paid by the Contractor.

1.6.4 Bracing and Scaffolding

Provide bracing and scaffolding necessary for masonry work. Design bracing to resist wind pressure as required by local code.

1.7 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.7.1 Local/Regional Materials

Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.

1.7.2 Environmental Data

1.7.3 Plastic Identification

Verify that plastic products to be incorporated into the project are labeled in accordance with ASTM D 1972. Where products are not labeled, provide product data indicating polymeric information in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.a. Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).b. Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).c. Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).d. Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).e. Type 5: Polypropylene (PP).f. Type 6: Polystyrene (PS).g. Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sym of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.

Manufacturer's Location for Regionally Manufactured Materials LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured project products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent



possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The source of materials which will affect the appearance of the finished work shall not be changed after the work has started except with Contracting Officer's approval.

2.3 CLAY OR SHALE BRICKColor range and texture of clay or shale brick shall be as indicated and shall conform to the approved sample. Brick shall conform to ASTM C 62; Grade SW shall be used for brick in contact with earth or grade and for all exterior work and for all nonvertical surfaces. Average dimensions of brick shall be 3-5/8 inches thick, 2-1/4 inches high, and 8 inches long (standard) or 4 inches thick, 2-2/3 inches high, and 8 inches long (nominal), provide special shapes as indicated, subject to the tolerances specified in ASTM C 62. Brick shall be tested for efflorescence. Clay or shale brick units shall be delivered factory-blended to provide a uniform appearance and color range in the completed wall. Clay units shall contain a minimum of 5 percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 20 percent post-industrial recycled content.See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Clay units may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.2.4

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)

Cement shall have a low alkali content and be of one brand. Units shall contain a minimum of 5 percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 20 percent post-industrial recycled content. Units may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. Units shall be of modular dimensions and air, water, or steam cured. Surfaces of units which are to be plastered or stuccoed shall be sufficiently rough to provide bond; elsewhere, exposed surfaces of units shall be smooth and of uniform texture.

a. ASTM C 90, made with lightweight aggregate. Provide load-bearing units for exterior walls, foundation walls, load-bearing walls, and shear walls.

2.4.1 Aggregates

Lightweight aggregates and blends of lightweight and heavier aggregates in proportions used in producing the units, shall comply with the following requirements when tested for stain-producing iron compounds in accordance with ASTM C 331-98: by visual classification method, the iron stain deposited on the filter paper shall not exceed the "light stain" classification. Use industrial waste by-products (air-cooled slag, cinders, or bottom ash), ground waste glass and concrete, granulated slag, and expanded slag in aggregates.

2.4.2 Kinds and Shapes

Units shall be modular in size and shall include closer, jamb, header, lintel, and bond beam units and special shapes and sizes to complete the work as indicated. In exposed interior masonry surfaces, units having a bullnose shall be used for vertical external corners except at door, window, and louver jambs. Radius of the bullnose shall be 1 inch. Units used in exposed masonry surfaces in any one building shall have a uniform



fine to medium texture and a uniform color.

2.4.3 Fire-Rated CMU

Concrete masonry units used in fire-rated construction shown on the drawings shall be of minimum equivalent thickness for the fire rating indicated and the corresponding type of aggregates indicated in TABLE I. Units containing more than one of the aggregates listed in TABLE I will be rated on the aggregate requiring the greater minimum equivalent thickness to produce the required fire rating. Construction shall conform to ASTM E 119.

TABLE I

FIRE-RATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

See note (a) below

Minimum equivalent thickness inches for fire rating of:

Aggregate Type 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours ______________ _______ _______ _______

Pumice 4.7 4.0 3.0

Expanded slag 5.0 4.2 3.3

Expanded clay, shale, 5.7 4.8 3.7 or slate

Limestone, scoria, cinders 5.9 5.0 4.0 or unexpanded slag

Calcareous gravel 6.2 5.3 4.2

Siliceous gravel 6.7 5.7 4.5

Minimum equivalent thickness shall equal net volume as determined in conformance with ASTM C 140 divided by the product of the actual length and height of the face shell of the unit in inches. Where walls are to receive plaster or be faced with brick, or otherwise form an assembly; the thickness of plaster or brick or other material in the assembly will be included in determining the equivalent thickness.

2.5 PRECAST CONCRETE ITEMS

Lintels, medallions and splashblocks shall be factory-made units from a plant regularly engaged in producing precast concrete units. Unless otherwise indicated, concrete shall be 4,000 psi minimum conforming to Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE using 1/2 inch to No. 4 nominal-size coarse aggregate, and minimum reinforcement shall be the reinforcement required for handling of the units. Clearance of 3/4 inch shall be maintained between reinforcement and faces of units. Unless precast-concrete items have been subjected during manufacture to saturated-steam pressure of at least 120 psi for at least 5 hours, the items, after casting, shall be either damp-cured for 24 hours or steam-cured and shall then be aged under cover for 28 days or longer.



Cast-concrete members weighing over 80 pounds shall have built-in loops of galvanized wire or other approved provisions for lifting and anchoring. Units shall have beds and joints at right angles to the face, with sharp true arises and shall be cast with drip grooves on the underside where units overhang walls. Exposed-to-view surfaces shall be free of surface voids, spalls, cracks, and chipped or broken edges. Precast units exposed-to-view shall be of uniform appearance and color. Unless otherwise specified, units shall have a smooth dense finish. Prior to use, each item shall be wetted and inspected for crazing. Items showing evidence of dusting, spalling, crazing, or having surfaces treated with a protective coating will be rejected.

2.5.1 Lintels

Precast lintels, unless otherwise shown, shall be of a thickness equal to the wall and reinforced with two No. 4 bars for the full length. Top of lintels shall be labeled "TOP" or otherwise identified and each lintel shall be clearly marked to show location in the structure. In reinforced masonry, lintels shall conform to ACI 318/318R for flexural and shear strength and shall have at least 8 inches bearing at each end. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi using 1/2 inch to No. 4 nominal-size coarse aggregate. Reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60,000 psi. Limit lintel deflection due to dead plus live load to L/600 or 0.3 inches. Provide top and bottom bars for lintels over 36 inches in length.

2.5.2 Medallions

Medallions shall be a matrix of cement, crushed and graded stone, virgin polypropylene fiber, iron oxide pigment, and admixtures necessary to achieve required physical properties.

a. Cement: Portland Type I White meeting ASTM C 150

b. Aggregate: Graded and washed natural sands and crushed graded stone meeting ASTM C33, except that graduation may vary to achieve desired finish and texture.

c. Fiber: Virgin homopolymer polypropylene non-fibrillated fibers.

d. Coloring: Inorganic synthetic iron oxide pigments meeting ASTM C979 dispersed integrally throughout the mix.

e. Admixtures: Proprietary list of ingredients necessary to achieve required air entrainment, low permeability, accelerated cure, increased flexural and compressive strength and freeze-thaw resistance.

2.5.3 Splash Blocks

Splash blocks shall be as detailed. Reinforcement shall be the manufacturer's standard.

2.6 MORTAR FOR STRUCTURAL MASONRY

ASTM C 270, Type S. Strength (f'm) as indicated. Test in accordance with ASTM C 780. Use Type I or III portland cement. Or use Masonry cement. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides. When structural reinforcement is incorporated, maximum air-content shall be 12 percent in cement-lime mortar



and 18 percent in masonry cement mortar. Use up to 40 percent Class F fly ash with type IP cement in cement-lime mortar. Fly ash shall comply with ASTM C 593.

2.7 MASONRY MORTAR

Type M mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 and shall be used for foundation walls . Mortar Type S shall conform to the proportion specification of ASTM C 270 except Type S cement-lime mortar proportions shall be 1 part cement, 1/2 part lime and 4-1/2 parts aggregate. Type S mortar shall be used for non-load-bearing, non-shear-wall interior masonry. When masonry cement ASTM C 91 is used the maximum air content shall be limited to 12 percent and performance equal to cement-lime mortar shall be verified. Verification of masonry cement performance shall be based on ASTM C 780 and ASTM C 1072. Cement shall have a low alkali content and be of one brand. Aggregates shall be from one source.

2.7.1 Admixtures for Masonry Mortar

In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating admixture may be used subject to approval. Accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.

2.7.2 Cement

Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type I, or II. Masonry cement shall conform to ASTM C 91, Type S . Containers shall bear complete instructions for proportioning and mixing to obtain the required types of mortar. Incorporate to the maximum extent, without conflicting with other requirements of this section, up to 40 percent fly ash, up to 70 percent slag, up to 10 percent cenospheres, and up to 10 percent silica fume. Additives shall conform to requirements in Section 03 30 00.00 20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

2.7.3 Pre-Mixed Mortar

Pre-mixed mortar shall conform to ASTM C 1142, Type RS .

2.7.4 Sand and Water

Sand shall conform to ASTM C 144. Water shall be clean, potable, and free from substances which could adversely affect the mortar.

2.8 GROUT AND READY-MIXED GROUT

Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476. Cement used in grout shall have a low alkali content. Grout slump shall be between 8 and 10 inches. Minimum grout strength shall be 2000 psi in 28 days, as tested by ASTM C 1019. Grout shall be used subject to the limitations of Table III. Proportions shall not be changed and materials with different physical or chemical characteristics shall not be used in grout for the work unless additional evidence is furnished that the grout meets the specified requirements. Ready-Mixed grout shall conform to ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.8.1 Admixtures for Grout

In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating admixture may be used subject to approval; accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall



contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. In general, air-entrainment, anti-freeze or chloride admixtures shall not be used except as approved by the Contracting Officer.

2.9 ANCHORS, TIES, AND BAR POSITIONERS

Anchors and ties shall be fabricated without drips or crimps and shall be zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. Steel wire used for anchors and ties shall be fabricated from steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82/A 82M. Wire ties or anchors in exterior walls shall conform to ASTM A 641/A 641M. Joint reinforcement in interior walls, and in exterior or interior walls exposed to moist environment shall conform to ASTM A 641/A 641M; coordinate with paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT below. Anchors and ties shall be sized to provide a minimum of 5/8 inch mortar cover from either face.

2.9.1 Wall Ties

Wall ties shall be rectangular-shaped or Z-shaped fabricated of 3/16 inch diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Rectangular wall ties shall be no less than 4 inches wide. Wall ties may also be of a continuous type conforming to paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT. Adjustable type wall ties, if approved for use, shall consist of two essentially U-shaped elements fabricated of 3/16 inch diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Adjustable ties shall be of the double pintle to eye type and shall allow a maximum of 1/2 inch eccentricity between each element of the tie. Play between pintle and eye opening shall be not more than 1/16 inch. The pintle and eye elements shall be formed so that both can be in the same plane.

2.9.2 Adjustable Anchors

Adjustable anchors shall be 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, triangular-shaped. Anchors attached to steel shall be 5/16 inch diameter steel bars placed to provide 1/16 inch play between flexible anchors and structural steel members. Spacers shall be welded to rods and columns. Equivalent welded-on steel anchor rods or shapes standard with the flexible-anchor manufacturer may be furnished when approved. Welds shall be cleaned and given one coat of zinc-rich touch up paint.

2.9.3 Bar Positioners

Bar positioners, used to prevent displacement of reinforcing bars during the course of construction, shall be factory fabricated from 9 gauge steel wire or equivalent, and coated with a hot-dip galvanized finish. Not more than one wire shall cross the cell.

2.10 JOINT REINFORCEMENT

Joint reinforcement shall be factory fabricated from steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82/A 82M, welded construction. Tack welding will not be acceptable in reinforcement used for wall ties. Wire shall have zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. All wires shall be a minimum of 9 gauge. Reinforcement shall be ladder type design, having one longitudinal wire in the mortar bed of each face shell for hollow units and one wire for solid units. Joint reinforcement shall be placed a minimum of 5/8 inch cover from either face. The distance between crosswires shall not exceed 16 inches. Joint reinforcement for straight runs shall be furnished in flat sections not less than 10 feet long. Joint reinforcement shall be



provided with factory formed corners and intersections. If approved for use, joint reinforcement may be furnished with adjustable wall tie features.

2.11 REINFORCING STEEL BARS AND RODS

Reinforcing steel bars and rods shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60.

2.12 CONTROL JOINT KEYS

Control joint keys shall be a factory fabricated solid section of natural or synthetic rubber (or combination thereof) conforming to ASTM D 2000or polyvinyl chloride conforming to ASTM D 2287. The material shall be resistant to oils and solvents. The control joint key shall be provided with a solid shear section not less than 5/8 inch thick and 3/8 inch thick flanges, with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch. The control joint key shall fit neatly, but without forcing, in masonry unit jamb sash grooves. The control joint key shall be flexible at a temperature of minus 30 degrees F after five hours exposure, and shall have a durometer hardness of not less than 70 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240.

2.13 INSULATION

2.13.1 Spray Applied Foam Insulation

Cavity wall insulation shall be spray applied polyurethane foam produced from two liquid components. Insulation shall conform to the following properties:

Density (core)(ASTM D-1622):(lb/ft) (1.90)Compressive strength(ASTM D-1621): Parallel to rise (10% compression)(psi) (32)Tensile strength(ASTM D-1623):(psi) (49)Open cell content(ASTM D-2856): % <1Water absorption(ASTM D-2842): % by volume 2.5

Dimensional stability (ASTM D-2126): % volume change after 28 days -20°C (-4°F) -0.047 100°C (212°F) 8.45 70°C (158°F), 90+3% RH 7.64 Thermal resistance* (ASTM C-518): After 2 days at 23°C (73°F) ft²•hr•°F/Btu/in 8.29 After 90 days at 23°C (73°F), 50% RH ft²•hr•°F/Btu/in 6.47 Thermal conductivity (ASTM C-518): After 2 days at 23°C (73°F) Btu•in/ft²•hr•°F 0.118 After 90 days at 23°C (73°F), 50% RH Btu•in/ft²•hr•°F 0.159



Water vapour permeance - without the skins (ASTM E-96): ng/Pa•s•m² 125 Flame spread classification** For a thickness of 50mm (2 inches) Smoke Determined 288 Emissions during aging volatile organic compound (VOC) Below detection limit after 24 hours Service temperature °C (°F)-40 to +80 (-40 to +176)

2.13.1.1 Aged R-Value

The insulation shall provide a minimum aged R-value of 12 for the overall thickness. The aged R-value shall be determined at 75 degrees F in accordance with the appropriate referenced specification. The stated R-value of the insulation shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory or certified by an independent Registered Professional Engineer if tests are conducted in the manufacturer's laboratory.

2.14 EXPANSION-JOINT MATERIALS

Backer rod and sealant shall be adequate to accommodate joint compression equal to 50 percent of the width of the joint. The backer rod shall be compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, or other flexible, nonabsorptive material as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Sealant shall conform to Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS, and shall be penetrating with a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content of 600 grams/liter.

2.15 FLASHING

a. Coated-Copper Flashing: 7 ounce, electrolytic copper sheet, uniformly coated on both sides with acidproof, alkaliproof, elastic bituminous compound. Factory apply coating to a weight of not less than 6 ounces/square foot (approximately 3 ounces/square foot on each side).

PART 3 EXECUTION


a. Recycled Content LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.

b. Regional Materials LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating location of final manufacturer's origin for all products and materials from within a 500 mile radius for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.





Provide invoices, plant slips, certification indicating total quantities of waste material, and amounts diverted by way of means as stated above for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.

3.3 PREPARATION

Prior to start of work, masonry inspector shall verify the applicable conditions as set forth in ACI 530.1, inspection. The Contracting Officer will serve as inspector or will select a masonry inspector.

3.3.1 Hot Weather Installation

The following precautions shall be taken if masonry is erected when the ambient air temperature is more than 99 degrees F in the shade and the relative humidity is less than 50 percent or the ambient air temperature exceeds 90 degrees F and the wind velocity is more than 8 mph. All masonry materials shall be shaded from direct sunlight; mortar beds shall be spread no more than 4 feet ahead of masonry; masonry units shall be set within one minute of spreading mortar; and after erection, masonry shall be protected from direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours.

3.3.2 Cold Weather Installation

Before erecting masonry when ambient temperature or mean daily air temperature falls below 40 degrees F or temperature of masonry units is below 40 degrees F, a written statement of proposed cold weather construction procedures shall be submitted for approval. The following precautions shall be taken during all cold weather erection. Conform to ACI 530.1 for hot and cold weather masonry erection.

3.3.2.1 Protection

Ice or snow formed on the masonry bed shall be thawed by the application of heat. Heat shall be applied carefully until the top surface of the masonry is dry to the touch. Sections of masonry deemed frozen and damaged shall be removed before continuing construction of those sections.

a. Air Temperature 40 to 32 Degrees F. Sand or mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F

b. Air Temperature 32 to 25 Degrees F. Sand and mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F. Temperature of mortar on boards shall be maintained above freezing.

c. Air Temperature 25 to 20 Degrees F. Sand and mixing water shall be heated to provide mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F. Temperature of mortar on boards shall be maintained above freezing. Sources of heat shall be used on both sides of walls under construction. Windbreaks shall be employed when wind is in excess of 15 mph.

d. Air Temperature 20 Degrees F and below. Sand and mixing water shall be heated to provide mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F. Enclosure and auxiliary heat shall be provided to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F. Temperature of units when laid shall not be less than 20 degrees F.



3.3.2.2 Completed Masonry and Masonry Not Being Worked On

a. Mean daily air temperature 40 to 32 degrees F. Masonry shall be protected from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather-resistive membrane.

b. Mean daily air temperature 32 to 25 degrees F. Masonry shall be completely covered with weather-resistant membrane for 24 hours.

c. Mean Daily Air Temperature 25 to 20 degrees F. Masonry shall be completely covered with insulating blankets or equally protected for 24 hours.

d. Mean Daily Temperature 20 degrees F and Below. Masonry temperature shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps, or other approved methods.

3.3.3 Stains

Potect exposed surfaces from mortar and other stains. When mortar joints are tooled, remove mortar from exposed surfaces with fiber brushes and wooden paddles. Protect base of walls from splash stains by covering adjacent ground with sand, sawdust, or polyethylene.

3.3.4 Loads

Do not apply uniform loads for at least 12 hours or concentrated loads for at least 72 hours after masonry is constructed. Provide temporary bracing as required.

3.3.5 Surfaces

Surfaces on which masonry is to be placed shall be cleaned of laitance, dust, dirt, oil, organic matter, or other foreign materials and shall be slightly roughened to provide a surface texture with a depth of at least 1/8 inch. Sandblasting shall be used, if necessary, to remove laitance from pores and to expose the aggregate.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY UNITS

Coordinate masonry work with the work of other trades to accommodate built-in items and to avoid cutting and patching. Masonry units shall be laid in running bond pattern. Facing courses shall be level with back-up courses, unless the use of adjustable ties has been approved in which case the tolerances shall be plus or minus 1/2 inch. Each unit shall be adjusted to its final position while mortar is still soft and plastic. Units that have been disturbed after the mortar has stiffened shall be removed, cleaned, and relaid with fresh mortar. Air spaces, cavities, chases, expansion joints, and spaces to be grouted shall be kept free from mortar and other debris. Units used in exposed masonry surfaces shall be selected from those having the least amount of chipped edges or other imperfections detracting from the appearance of the finished work. Vertical joints shall be kept plumb. Units being laid and surfaces to receive units shall be free of water film and frost. Solid units shall be laid in a nonfurrowed full bed of mortar. Mortar for veneer wythes shall be beveled and sloped toward the center of the wythe from the cavity side. Units shall be shoved into place so that the vertical joints are tight. Vertical joints of brick and the vertical face shells of concrete masonry



units, except where indicated at control, expansion, and isolation joints, shall be completely filled with mortar. Mortar will be permitted to protrude up to 1/2 inch into the space or cells to be grouted. Means shall be provided to prevent mortar from dropping into the space below. In double wythe construction, the inner wythe may be brought up not more than 16 inches ahead of the outer wythe. Collar joints shall be filled with mortar or grout during the laying of the facing wythe, and filling shall not lag the laying of the facing wythe by more than 8 inches.

3.4.1 Forms and Shores

Provide bracing and scaffolding as required. Design bracing to resist wind pressure as required by local codes. Forms and shores shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent deflections which may result in cracking or other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Supporting forms and shores shall not be removed in less than 10 days.

3.4.2 Reinforced Concrete Masonry Units Walls

Where vertical reinforcement occurs, fill cores solid with grout. Lay units in such a manner as to preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of cores to be filled. Embed the adjacent webs in mortar to prevent leakage of grout. Remove mortar fins protruding from joints before placing grout. Minimum clear dimensions of vertical cores shall be 2 by 3 inches. Position reinforcing accurately as indicated before placing grout. As masonry work progresses, secure vertical reinforcing in place at vertical intervals not to exceed 160 bar diameters. Use puddling rod or vibrator to consolidate the grout. Minimum clear distance between masonry and vertical reinforcement shall be not less than 1/2 inch. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, form splices by lapping bars not less than 40 bar diameters and wire tying them together.

3.4.3 Concrete Masonry Units

Units in piers, pilasters, columns, starting courses on footings, solid foundation walls, lintels, and beams, and where cells are to be filled with grout shall be full bedded in mortar under both face shells and webs. Other units shall be full bedded under both face shells. Head joints shall be filled solidly with mortar for a distance in from the face of the unit not less than the thickness of the face shell. Foundation walls below grade shall be grouted solid. Jamb units shall be of the shapes and sizes to conform with wall units. Solid units may be incorporated in the masonry work where necessary to fill out at corners, gable slopes, and elsewhere as approved. Double walls shall be stiffened at wall-mounted plumbing fixtures by use of strap anchors, two above each fixture and two below each fixture, located to avoid pipe runs, and extending from center to center of the double wall. Walls and partitions shall be adequately reinforced for support of wall-hung plumbing fixtures when chair carriers are not specified.

3.4.4 Clay or Shale Brick Units

Brick facing shall be laid with the better face exposed. Brick shall be laid in running bond with each course bonded at corners, unless otherwise indicated. Molded brick shall be laid with the frog side down.



3.4.4.1 Wetting of Units

Wetting of clay, shale brick, or hollow brick units having an initial rate of absorption of more than 1 gram per minute per square inch of bed surface shall be in conformance with ASTM C 67. The method of wetting shall ensure that each unit is nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Test clay or shale brick daily on the job, prior to laying, as follows: Using a wax pencil, draw a circle the size of a quarter on five randomly selected bricks. Apply 20 drops of water with a medicine dropper to the surface within the circle on each brick. If the average time that the water is completely absorbed in the five bricks is less than 1-1/2 minutes, wet bricks represented by the five bricks tested.

3.4.4.2 Solid Units

Bed, head, and collar joints shall be completely filled with mortar.

3.4.4.3 Hollow Units

Hollow units shall be laid as specified for concrete masonry units.

3.4.4.4 Brick-Faced Walls

For brick-faced walls bond the two wythes in every sixth brick course with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement. Provide additional bonding ties spaced not more than 3 feet apart around the perimeter of and within 12 inches of all openings.

a. Collar Joints: Fill collar joints solid with mortar as each course of brick is laid. Do not disturb units in place.

3.4.4.5 Cavity Walls

Provide a continuous cavity as indicated. Securely tie the two wythes together with horizontal joint reinforcement. Bevel mortar beds away from cavity to prevent projection into cavity when bricks are shoved in place. Keep cavities clear and clean of mortar droppings. At the bottom of cavity walls, in the course immediately above the through-wall flashing, temporarily omit one brick every 4 feet. With a hose and clean water, wash all mortar droppings and debris out of the cavity through the temporary openings at least twice each day masonry is laid, and more often when required to keep the cavities clean. Fill in the openings with bricks and mortar after the wall is complete and the cavity has been inspected and found clean. Provide weep holes of open head joints spaced 24 inches o.c. wherever the cavity is interrupted and at base of wall and vertical obstructions (e.g. lintels). Cavity face of interior wythe shall be polyurethane foam insulation.3.4.5 Tolerances

Masonry shall be laid plumb, true to line, with courses level. Bond pattern shall be kept plumb throughout. Corners shall be square unless noted otherwise. Except for walls constructed of prefaced concrete masonry units, masonry shall be laid within the following tolerances (plus or minus unless otherwise noted):

TABLE II



TOLERANCES

Variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises _______________________________________________________________

In adjacent masonry units 1/8 inch In 10 feet 1/4 inch In 20 feet 3/8 inch In 40 feet or more 1/2 inch

Variations from the plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines _______________________________________________________________

In 20 feet 1/4 inch In 40 feet or more 1/2 inch

Variations from the level for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines _______________________________________________________________


Variation from level for bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls _______________________________________________________________


Variations from horizontal lines _______________________________________________________________

In 10 feet 1/4 inch In 20 feet 3/8 inch In 40 feet or more 1/2 inch

Variations in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls _______________________________________________________________

Minus 1/4 inch Plus 1/2 inch

3.4.6 Cutting and Fitting

Full units of the proper size shall be used wherever possible, in lieu of cut units. Cutting and fitting, including that required to accommodate the work of others, shall be done by masonry mechanics using power masonry saws. Concrete masonry units may be wet or dry cut. Wet cut units, before being placed in the work, shall be dried to the same surface-dry appearance as uncut units being laid in the wall. Cut edges shall be clean, true and sharp. Openings in the masonry shall be made carefully so that wall plates, cover plates or escutcheons required by the installation will completely conceal the openings and will have bottoms parallel with the



masonry bed joints. Reinforced masonry lintels shall be provided above openings over 12 inches wide for pipes, ducts, cable trays, and other wall penetrations, unless steel sleeves are used.

3.4.7 Jointing

Joints shall be tooled when the mortar is thumbprint hard. Horizontal joints shall be tooled last. Joints shall be brushed to remove all loose and excess mortar. Mortar joints shall be finished as follows:

3.4.7.1 Flush Joints

Joints in concealed masonry surfaces and joints at electrical outlet boxes in wet areas shall be flush cut. Flush cut joints shall be made by cutting off the mortar flush with the face of the wall. Joints in unparged masonry walls below grade shall be pointed tight. Flush joints for architectural units, such as fluted units, shall completely fill both the head and bed joints.

3.4.7.2 Tooled Joints

Joints in exposed exterior and interior masonry surfaces shall be tooled slightly concave . Joints shall be tooled with a jointer slightly larger than the joint width so that complete contact is made along the edges of the unit. Tooling shall be performed so that the mortar is compressed and the joint surface is sealed. Jointer of sufficient length shall be used to obtain a straight and true mortar joint.

3.4.7.3 Door and Window Frame Joints

On the exposed interior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and abutting masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 3/8 inch. On the exterior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and abutting masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 3/8 inch.

3.4.8 Joint Widths

Joint widths shall be as follows:

3.4.8.1 Concrete Masonry Units

Concrete masonry units shall have 3/8 inch joints, except for prefaced concrete masonry units.

3.4.8.2 Prefaced Concrete Masonry Units

Prefaced concrete masonry units shall have a joint width of 3/8 inch wide on unfaced side and not less than 3/16 inch nor more than 1/4 inch wide on prefaced side.

3.4.8.3 Brick

Brick joint widths shall be the difference between the actual and nominal dimensions of the brick in either height or length. Brick expansion joint widths shall be as shown.

3.4.9 Embedded Items

Spaces around built-in items shall be filled with mortar. Openings around



flush-mount electrical outlet boxes in wet locations shall be pointed with mortar. Anchors, ties, wall plugs, accessories, flashing, pipe sleeves and other items required to be built-in shall be embedded as the masonry work progresses. Anchors, ties and joint reinforcement shall be fully embedded in the mortar. Cells receiving anchor bolts and cells of the first course below bearing plates shall be filled with grout.

3.4.10 Unfinished Work

Unfinished work shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Toothing may be resorted to only when specifically approved. Loose mortar shall be removed and the exposed joints shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying new work.

3.4.11 Masonry Wall Intersections

Each course shall be masonry bonded at corners and elsewhere as shown. Masonry walls shall be anchored or tied together at corners and intersections with bond beam reinforcement and prefabricated corner or tee pieces of joint reinforcement as shown.

3.4.12 Partitions

Partitions shall be continuous from floor to underside of floor or roof deck where shown. Openings in firewalls around joists or other structural members shall be filled as indicated or approved. An isolation joint shall be placed in the intersection between partitions and structural or exterior walls as shown. Cells within vertical plane of ties shall be filled solid with grout for full height of partition or solid masonry units may be used. Interior partitions having masonry walls over 4 inches thick shall be tied together with joint reinforcement. Partitions containing joint reinforcement shall be provided with prefabricated pieces at corners and intersections or partitions.

3.5 ANCHORED VENEER CONSTRUCTION

The inner and outer wythes shall be completely separated by a continuous airspace as shown on the drawings. Both the inner and the outer wythes shall be laid up together except when adjustable joint reinforcement assemblies are approved for use. When both wythes are not brought up together, through-wall flashings shall be protected from damage until they are fully enclosed in the wall. The airspace between the wythes shall be kept clear and free of mortar droppings by temporary wood strips laid on the wall ties and carefully lifted out before placing the next row of ties. A coarse gravel or drainage material shall be placed behind the weep holes in the cavity to a minimum depth of 4 inches of coarse aggregate or 10 inches of drainage material to keep mortar droppings from plugging the weep holes.

3.6 WEEP HOLES

Wherever through-wall flashing occurs, provide weep holes to drain flashing to exterior at acceptable locations as indicated on drawings. Weep holes shall be open head joints. at 24 inches o.c. Weep holes shall be provided not more than 24 inches on centers in mortar joints of the exterior wythe above wall flashing, over foundations, bond beams, and any other horizontal interruptions of the cavity. Weep holes shall be perfectly horizontal or slightly canted downward to encourage water drainage outward and not inward. Other approved methods may be used for providing weep holes.



Weep holes shall be kept free of mortar and other obstructions.

3.7 MORTAR

Mortar shall be mixed in a mechanically operated mortar mixer for at least 3 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes. Measurement of ingredients for mortar shall be by volume. Ingredients not in containers, such as sand, shall be accurately measured by the use of measuring boxes. Water shall be mixed with the dry ingredients in sufficient amount to provide a workable mixture which will adhere to the vertical surfaces of masonry units. Mortar that has stiffened because of loss of water through evaporation shall be retempered by adding water to restore the proper consistency and workability. Mortar that has reached its initial set or that has not been used within 2 hours after mixing shall be discarded.

3.8 REINFORCING STEEL

Reinforcement shall be cleaned of loose, flaky rust, scale, grease, mortar, grout, or other coating which might destroy or reduce its bond prior to placing grout. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the drawings shall not be used. Reinforcement shall be placed prior to grouting. Unless otherwise indicated, vertical wall reinforcement shall extend to within 2 inches of tops of walls.

3.8.1 Positioning Bars

Vertical bars shall be accurately placed within the cells at the positions indicated on the drawings. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained between the bars and masonry units. Minimum clearance between parallel bars shall be one diameter of the reinforcement. Vertical reinforcing may be held in place using bar positioners located near the ends of each bar and at intermediate intervals of not more than 192 diameters of the reinforcement. Column and pilaster ties shall be wired in position around the vertical steel. Ties shall be in contact with the vertical reinforcement and shall not be placed in horizontal bed joints.

3.8.2 Splices

Bars shall be lapped a minimum of 48 diameters of the reinforcement. Welded or mechanical connections shall develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the reinforcement.

3.9 JOINT REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

Joint reinforcement shall be installed at 16 inches on center or as indicated. Reinforcement shall be lapped not less than 6 inches. Prefabricated sections shall be installed at corners and wall intersections. The longitudinal wires of joint reinforcement shall be placed to provide not less than 5/8 inch cover to either face of the unit.

3.10 PLACING GROUT

Cells containing reinforcing bars shall be filled with grout. Hollow masonry units in walls or partitions supporting plumbing, heating, or other mechanical fixtures, voids at door and window jambs, and other indicated spaces shall be filled solid with grout. Cells under lintel bearings on each side of openings shall be filled solid with grout for full height of openings. Walls below grade, lintels, and bond beams shall be filled solid with grout. Units other than open end units may require grouting each



course to preclude voids in the units. Grout not in place within 1-1/2 hours after water is first added to the batch shall be discarded. Sufficient time shall be allowed between grout lifts to preclude displacement or cracking of face shells of masonry units. If blowouts, flowouts, misalignment, or cracking of face shells should occur during construction, the wall shall be torn down and rebuilt.3.10.1 Grout Holes

and Cleanouts

3.10.1.1 Grout Holes

Grouting holes shall be provided in slabs, spandrel beams, and other in-place overhead construction. Holes shall be located over vertical reinforcing bars or as required to facilitate grout fill in bond beams. Additional openings spaced not more than 16 inches on centers shall be provided where grouting of all hollow unit masonry is indicated. Openings shall not be less than 4 inches in diameter or 3 by 4 inches in horizontal dimensions. Upon completion of grouting operations, grouting holes shall be plugged and finished to match surrounding surfaces.

3.10.1.2 Cleanouts for Hollow Unit Masonry Construction

Cleanout holes shall be provided at the bottom of every pour in cores containing vertical reinforcement when the height of the grout pour exceeds 5 feet. Where all cells are to be grouted, cleanout courses shall be constructed using bond beam units in an inverted position to permit cleaning of all cells. Cleanout holes shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 32 inches where all cells are to be filled with grout. A new series of cleanouts shall be established if grouting operations are stopped for more than 4 hours. Cleanouts shall not be less than 3 by 4 inch openings cut from one face shell. Manufacturer's standard cutout units may be used at the Contractor's option. Cleanout holes shall not be closed until masonry work, reinforcement, and final cleaning of the grout spaces have been completed and inspected. For walls which will be exposed to view, cleanout holes shall be closed in an approved manner to match surrounding masonry.

3.10.2 Grouting Equipment

3.10.2.1 Grout Pumps

Pumping through aluminum tubes will not be permitted. Pumps shall be operated to produce a continuous stream of grout without air pockets, segregation, or contamination. Upon completion of each day's pumping, waste materials and debris shall be removed from the equipment, and disposed of outside the masonry.

3.10.2.2 Vibrators

Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of not less than 5,000 impulses per minute when submerged in the grout. At least one spare vibrator shall be maintained at the site at all times. Vibrators shall be applied at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Duration of vibration shall be limited to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation.

3.10.3 Grout Placement

Masonry shall be laid to the top of a pour before placing grout. Grout shall not be placed in two-wythe solid unit masonry cavity until mortar



joints have set for at least 3 days during hot weather and 5 days during cold damp weather. Grout shall not be placed in hollow unit masonry until mortar joints have set for at least 24 hours. Grout shall be placed using a hand bucket, concrete hopper, or grout pump to completely fill the grout spaces without segregation of the aggregates. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower pours that are in a semi-solidified state. The height of grout pours and type of grout used shall be limited by the dimensions of grout spaces as indicated in Table III. Low-lift grout methods may be used on pours up to and including 5 feet in height. High-lift grout methods shall be used on pours exceeding 5 feet in height.

3.10.3.1 Low-Lift Method

Grout shall be placed at a rate that will not cause displacement of the masonry due to hydrostatic pressure of the grout. Mortar protruding more than 1/2 inch into the grout space shall be removed before beginning the grouting operation. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration or by puddling. Grout pours over 12 inches in height shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration and reconsolidated by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower pours that are in a semi-solidified state. Low-lift grout shall be used subject to the limitations of Table III.

3.10.3.2 High-Lift Method

Mortar droppings shall be cleaned from the bottom of the grout space and from reinforcing steel. Mortar protruding more than 1/4 inch into the grout space shall be removed by dislodging the projections with a rod or stick as the work progresses. Reinforcing, bolts, and embedded connections shall be rigidly held in position before grouting is started. CMU units shall not be pre-wetted. Grout, from the mixer to the point of deposit in the grout space shall be placed as rapidly as practical by pumping and placing methods which will prevent segregation of the mix and cause a minimum of grout splatter on reinforcing and masonry surfaces not being immediately encased in the grout lift. The individual lifts of grout shall be limited to 4 feet in height. The first lift of grout shall be placed to a uniform height within the pour section and vibrated thoroughly to fill all voids. This first vibration shall follow immediately behind the pouring of the grout using an approved mechanical vibrator. After a waiting period sufficient to permit the grout to become plastic, but before it has taken any set, the succeeding lift shall be poured and vibrated 12 to 18 inches into the preceding lift. If the placing of the succeeding lift is going to be delayed beyond the period of workability of the preceding, each lift shall be reconsolidated by reworking with a second vibrator as soon as the grout has taken its settlement shrinkage. The waiting, pouring, and reconsolidation steps shall be repeated until the top of the pour is reached. The top lift shall be reconsolidated after the required waiting period. The high-lift grouting of any section of wall between vertical grout barriers shall be completed to the top of a pour in one working day unless a new series of cleanout holes is established and the resulting horizontal construction joint cleaned. High-lift grout shall be used subject to the limitations in Table III.



TABLE III

POUR HEIGHT AND TYPE OF GROUT FOR VARIOUS GROUT SPACE DIMENSIONS

Minimum Dimensions of the Total Clear Areas Within Grout Maximum Spaces and Cells (in.) (1,2) Grout Pour Height Grout Grouting Multiwythe Hollow-unit (feet) (4) Type Procedure Masonry (3) Masonry ____________ _______ ____________ ___________ ______________

1 Fine Low Lift 3/4 1-1/2 x 2 5 Fine Low Lift 2 2 x 3 8 Fine High Lift 2 2 x 3 12 Fine High Lift 2-1/2 2-1/2 x 3 24 Fine High Lift 3 3 x 3 1 Coarse Low Lift 1-1/2 1-1/2 x 3 5 Coarse Low Lift 2 2-1/2 x 3 8 Coarse High Lift 2 3 x 3 12 Coarse High Lift 2-1/2 3 x 3 24 Coarse High Lift 3 3 x 4

Notes:(1) The actual grout space or cell dimension must be larger than the sum of the following items:

a) The required minimum dimensions of total clear areas given in the table above;b) The width of any mortar projections within the space;c) The horizontal projections of the diameters of the horizontal reinforcing bars within a cross section of the grout space or cell.

(2) The minimum dimensions of the total clear areas shall be made up of one or more open areas, with at least one area being 3/4 inch or greater in width.

(3) For grouting spaces between masonry wythes.

(4) Where only cells of hollow masonry units containing reinforcement are grouted, the maximum height of the pour shall not exceed the distance between horizontal bond beams.

3.11 BOND BEAMS

Bond beams shall be filled with grout and reinforced as indicated on the drawings. Grout barriers shall be installed under bond beam units to retain the grout as required. Reinforcement shall be continuous, including around corners, except through control joints or expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Where splices are required for continuity, reinforcement shall be lapped 48 bar diameters. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained between reinforcement and interior faces of units.

3.12 CONTROL JOINTS

Control joints shall be provided as indicated and shall be constructed by using special control-joint units in accordance with the details shown on the drawings. Sash jamb units shall have a 3/4 by 3/4 inch groove near the



center at end of each unit. The vertical mortar joint at control joint locations shall be continuous, including through all bond beams. This shall be accomplished by utilizing half blocks in alternating courses on each side of the joint. The control joint key shall be interrupted in courses containing continuous bond beam steel. In single wythe exterior masonry walls, the exterior control joints shall be raked to a depth of 3/4 inch; backer rod and sealant shall be installed in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. Exposed interior control joints shall be raked to a depth of 1/4 inch. Concealed control joints shall be flush cut.

3.13 BRICK EXPANSION JOINTS AND

Brick expansion joints and concrete masonry veneer joints shall be provided and constructed as shown on the drawings. Joints shall be kept free of mortar and other debris.

3.14 SHELF ANGLES

Shelf angles shall be adjusted as required to keep the masonry level and at the proper elevation. Shelf angles shall be galvanized. Shelf angles shall be provided in sections not longer than 10 feet and installed with a 1/4 inch gap between sections. Shelf angles shall be mitered and welded at building corners with each angle not shorter than 4 feet, unless limited by wall configuration.

3.15 LINTELS

3.15.1 Masonry Lintels

Masonry lintels shall be constructed with lintel units filled solid with grout in all courses and reinforced with a minimum of two No. 4 bars in the bottom course unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Lintel reinforcement shall extend beyond each side of masonry opening 40 bar diameters or 24 inches, whichever is greater. Reinforcing bars shall be supported in place prior to grouting and shall be located 1/2 inch above the bottom inside surface of the lintel unit.

3.15.2 Precast Concrete and Steel Lintels

Precast concrete and steel lintels shall be as shown on the drawings. Lintels shall be set in a full bed of mortar with faces plumb and true. Steel and precast lintels shall have a minimum bearing length of 8 inches unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

3.16 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE AND STRUCTURAL STEEL

3.16.1 Anchorage to Structural Steel

Masonry shall be anchored to vertical structural steel framing with adjustable steel wire anchors spaced not over 16 inches on centers vertically, and if applicable, not over 24 inches on centers horizontally.

3.17 INSULATION

Anchored veneer walls shall be insulated, where shown, by spary polyurethane foam insulation on the cavity side of the inner wythe.



3.18 SPLASH BLOCKS

Splash blocks shall be located as shown.

3.19 POINTING AND CLEANING

After mortar joints have attained their initial set, but prior to hardening, mortar and grout daubs or splashings shall be completely removed from masonry-unit surfaces that will be exposed or painted. Before completion of the work, defects in joints of masonry to be exposed or painted shall be raked out as necessary, filled with mortar, and tooled to match existing joints. Immediately after grout work is completed, scum and stains which have percolated through the masonry work shall be removed using a high pressure stream of water and a stiff bristled brush. Masonry surfaces shall not be cleaned, other than removing excess surface mortar, until mortar in joints has hardened. Masonry surfaces shall be left clean, free of mortar daubs, dirt, stain, and discoloration, including scum from cleaning operations, and with tight mortar joints throughout. Metal tools and metal brushes shall not be used for cleaning.

3.19.1 Concrete Masonry Unit Surfaces

Exposed concrete masonry unit surfaces shall be dry-brushed at the end of each day's work and after any required pointing, using stiff-fiber bristled brushes.

3.19.2 Clay or Shale Brick Surfaces

Exposed clay or shale brick masonry surfaces shall be cleaned as necessary to obtain surfaces free of stain, dirt, mortar and grout daubs, efflorescence, and discoloration or scum from cleaning operations. After cleaning, the sample panel of similar material shall be examined for discoloration or stain as a result of cleaning. If the sample panel is discolored or stained, the method of cleaning shall be changed to assure that the masonry surfaces in the structure will not be adversely affected. The exposed masonry surfaces shall be water-soaked and then cleaned with a solution proportioned 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate and 1/2 cup laundry detergent to one gallon of water or cleaned with a proprietary masonry cleaning agent specifically recommended for the color and texture by the clay products manufacturer. The solution shall be applied with stiff fiber brushes, followed immediately by thorough rinsing with clean water. Proprietary cleaning agents shall be used in conformance with the cleaning product manufacturer's printed recommendations. Efflorescence shall be removed in conformance with the brick manufacturer's recommendations.

3.20 BEARING PLATES

Bearing plates for beams, joists, joist girders and similar structural members shall be set to the proper line and elevation with damp-pack bedding mortar, except where non-shrink grout is indicated. Bedding mortar and non-shrink grout shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00.00 20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

3.21 PROTECTION

Facing materials shall be protected against staining. Top of walls shall be covered with nonstaining waterproof covering or membrane when work is not in progress. Covering of the top of the unfinished walls shall continue until the wall is waterproofed with a complete roof or parapet



system. Covering shall extend a minimum of 2 feet down on each side of the wall and shall be held securely in place. Before starting or resuming, top surface of masonry in place shall be cleaned of loose mortar and foreign material.


Manage waste according to the Waste Management Plan and as follows. Minimize water used to wash mixing equipment. Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.

3.22.1 Separate and Recycle Waste

Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area for recycling. Collect wood packing shims and pallets and place in designated area. Use leftover mixed mortar as cavity fill at grade where lower strength mortar meets the requirements for bulk fill. Separate masonry waste and place in designated area for use as structural fill. Separate selected masonry waste and excess for landscape uses, either whole or crushed as ground cover.

3.22.2 Take-Back Program

Collect information from manufacturer for take-back program options. Set aside masonry units, full and partial to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.

3.23 TEST REPORTS

3.23.1 Field Testing of Mortar

At least three specimens of mortar shall be taken each day. A layer of mortar 1/2 to 5/8 inch thick shall be spread on the masonry units and allowed to stand for one minute. The specimens shall then be prepared and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 780.

3.23.2 Field Testing of Grout

Field sampling and testing of grout shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C 1019. A minimum of three specimens of grout per day shall be sampled and tested. Each specimen shall have a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2000 psi at 28 days.




SECTION 05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

AISC 303 (2005) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges

AISC 317 (1992; Reprint 1999) ASD Manual of Steel Construction, Vol II: Connections

AISC 325 (2005) Manual of Steel Construction

AISC 326 (2002) Detailing for Steel Construction

AISC 348 (2000) Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts

AISC 360 (2005) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, with Commentary

AISC 810 (1997) Erection Bracing of Low-Rise Structural Steel Frames/Fisher and West

AISC FCD (1995a) Quality Certification Program Description


AWS A2.4 (2007) Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination

AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2006; Errata 2006) Structural Welding Code - Steel

ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)

ASME B46.1 (2002) Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness and Lay)


ASTM A 123/A 123M (2002) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A 153/A 153M (2005) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel



Hardware

ASTM A 325 (2007) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A 325M (2005) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 830 Mpa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric)

ASTM A 36/A 36M (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A 490 (2006) Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A 500/A 500M (2007) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A 514/A 514M (2005) Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding

ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A 563 (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A 6/A 6M (2007) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling

ASTM A 780 (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A 992/A 992M (2006a) Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes

ASTM C 1107/C 1107M (2007a) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM C 827 (2001a; R 2005) Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures

ASTM F 1554 (2007; Rev A)Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength

ASTM F 436 (2007) Hardened Steel Washers

ASTM F 844 (2007) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),



Unhardened for General Use

ASTM F 959 (2007) Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners

THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting

SSPC PS 13.01 (1982; E 2004) Epoxy-Polyamide Painting System

SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 25Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I and Type II

SSPC SP 3 (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 6 (2000; E 2004) Commercial Blast Cleaning

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Provide the structural steel system, including shop primer and galvanizing, complete and ready for use. Structural steel systems including design, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, inspection, quality control, and testing shall be provided in accordance with AISC 325 and AISC 317 except as modified in this contract.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Erection Plan; G

Fabrication drawings including details of connections; G

SD-03 Product Data

Shop primer

Welding electrodes and rods

Load indicator washers

Non-Shrink Grout

Load indicator bolts

SD-07 Certificates



Steel

Bolts, nuts, and washers

Galvanizing

AISC Quality Certification

Welding procedures and qualifications




1.4 AISC QUALITY CERTIFICATION

Work shall be fabricated in an AISC certified Category Sbd fabrication plant. In lieu of Category Sbd certification, the Contractor shall hire, at the Contractor's expense, an Independent Testing Agency acceptable to the Architect to verify that the fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and quality control procedures which provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and the fabricator's ability to conform to approved drawings, project specifications and referenced standards. The Independent Testing Agency shall review the procedures for completeness and adequacy relative to the Code requirements for the fabricator's scope of work.


1.5.1 Drawing Requirements

Submit fabrication drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Prepare in accordance with AISC 326, AISC 325 and AISC 317. Fabrication drawings shall not be reproductions of contract drawings. Include complete information for the fabrication and erection of the structure's components, including the location, type, and size of bolts, welds, member sizes and lengths, connection details, blocks, copes, and cuts. Use AWS A2.4 standard welding symbols. Member substitutions of details shown on the contract drawings shall be clearly highlighted on the fabrication drawings. Explain the reasons for any deviations from the contract drawings.

1.5.2 Certifications

1.5.2.1 Erection Plan

Submit for record purposes. Indicate the sequence of erection and a detailed sequence of welding, including each welding procedure required.

1.5.2.2 Welding Procedures and Qualifications

Prior to welding, submit certification for each welder stating the type of



welding and positions qualified for, the code and procedure qualified under, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the qualification tests. If the qualification date of the welding operator is more than one-year old, the welding operator's qualification certificate shall be accompanied by a current certificate by the welder attesting to the fact that he has been engaged in welding since the date of certification, with no break in welding service greater than 6 months.

Conform to all requirements specified in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 STEEL

2.2.1 Structural Steel

ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.2.2 Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing

Wide flange shapes, ASTM A 992/A 992M.

2.2.3 Structural Steel Tubing

ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B .

2.2.4 Steel Pipe

ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

2.3 BOLTS, NUTS, AND WASHERS

Provide the following unless indicated otherwise.


2.3.1.1 Bolts

ASTM A 325, Type 1, . The bolt heads and the nuts of the supplied fasteners must be marked with the manufacturer's identification mark, the strength grade and type specified by ASTM specifications.



2.3.1.2 Nuts

ASTM A 563, Grade and Style for applicable ASTM bolt standard recommended.

2.3.1.3 Washers

ASTM F 436 washers for ASTM A 325.

2.3.2 Structural Steel Tubing

2.3.2.1 Bolts

ASTM A 325, Type 1.

2.3.2.2 Nuts

ASTM A 563, Grade and Style as specified in the applicable ASTM bolt standard.

2.3.2.3 Washers

ASTM F 436, plain carbon steel.

2.3.3 Foundation Anchorage

2.3.3.1 Anchor Rods

ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

2.3.3.2 Anchor Nuts

ASTM A 563, Grade A, hex style.

2.3.3.3 Anchor Washers

ASTM F 844.

2.3.4 Load Indicator Washers

ASTM F 959.

2.3.5 Load Indicator Bolts

ASTM A 325, Type 1; with a manufactured notch between the bolt tip and threads. The bolt shall be designed to react to the opposing rotational torques applied by the installation wrench, with the bolt tip automatically shearing off when the proper tension is obtained.

2.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL ACCESSORIES

2.4.1 Welding Electrodes and Rods

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

2.4.2 Non-Shrink Grout

ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with no ASTM C 827 shrinkage.



2.4.3 Welded Shear Stud Connectors

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

2.5 SHOP PRIMER

SSPC Paint 25, (alkyd primer) or SSPC PS 13.01 epoxy-polyamide, green primer (Form 150) type 1. Primer shall conform to Federal, State, and local VOC regulations. If flash rusting occurs, re-clean the surface prior to application of primer.

2.6 GALVANIZING

ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable, unless specified otherwise galvanize after fabrication where practicable.

2.7 FABRICATION

2.7.1 Markings

Prior to erection, members shall be identified by a painted erection mark. Connecting parts assembled in the shop for reaming holes in field connections shall be match marked with scratch and notch marks. Do not locate erection markings on areas to be welded . Do not locate match markings in areas that will decrease member strength or cause stress concentrations. Affix embossed tags to hot-dipped galvanized members.

2.7.2 Shop Primer

Shop prime structural steel, except as modified herein, in accordance with SSPC PA 1. Do not prime steel surfaces embedded in concrete, galvanized surfaces, or surfaces within 0.5 inch of the toe of the welds prior to welding (except surfaces on which metal decking is to be welded). Prior to assembly, prime surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly. Do not apply primer in foggy or rainy weather; when the ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F; or when the primer may be exposed to temperatures below 40 degrees F within 48 hours after application, unless approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer.

2.7.2.1 Cleaning

SSPC SP 6, except steel exposed in spaces above ceilings, attic spaces, furred spaces, and chases that will be hidden to view in finished construction may be cleaned to SSPC SP 3 when recommended by the shop primer manufacturer. Maintain steel surfaces free from rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants through final assembly.

2.7.2.2 Primer

Apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mil in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Repair damaged primed surfaces with an additional coat of primer.

2.8 DRAINAGE HOLES

Adequate drainage holes shall be drilled to eliminate water traps. Hole diameter shall be 1/2 inch and location shall be indicated on the detail drawings. Hole size and location shall not affect the structural integrity.



PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 FABRICATION

Fabrication shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC 325. Fabrication and assembly shall be done in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

Compression joints depending on contact bearing shall have a surface roughness not in excess of 500 micro inch as determined by ASME B46.1, and ends shall be square within the tolerances for milled ends specified in ASTM A 6/A 6M.

Structural steelwork, except surfaces of steel to be encased in concrete, surfaces to be field welded and surfaces to be fireproofed shall be prepared for painting in accordance with endorsement "P" of AISC FCD and primed with the specified paint.

Splices not indicated require the approval of the Contracting Officer.

3.4 INSTALLATION

3.5 ERECTION

a. Erection of structural steel, except as indicated in item b. below, shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC 325, endorsement F of AISC FCD.

b. For low-rise structural steel buildings ( 60 feet tall or less and a maximum of 2 stories), the erection plan shall conform to AISC 303 and the structure shall be erected in accordance withAISC 810.

After final positioning of steel members, provide full bearing under base plates and bearing plates using nonshrink grout. Place nonshrink grout in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.



3.5.1 STORAGE

Material shall be stored out of contact with the ground in such manner and location as will minimize deterioration.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

Except as modified in this section, connections not detailed shall be designed in accordance with AISC 360 . Build connections into existing work. Do not tighten anchor bolts set in concrete with impact torque wrenches. Punch, subpunch and ream, or drill bolt holes perpendicular to the surface of the member. Holes shall not be cut or enlarged by burning. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be clean of dirt and rust, and lubricated immediately prior to installation.

3.6.1 Anchor Rods

ASTM F 1554 anchor rods shall be tightened to a "snug tight" fit. "Snug tight" is the tightness that exists when plies in a joint are in firm contact. If firm contact of joint plies cannot be obtained with a few impacts of an impact wrench, or the full effort of a man using a spud wrench, contact the Contracting Officer for further instructions.

3.6.2 High-Strength Bolts

ASTM A 325 bolts shall be fully tensioned to 70 percent of their minimum tensile strength. Provide load indicator bolts or washers in all ASTM A 325M bolted connections. Bolts shall be installed in connection holes and initially brought to a snug tight fit. After the initial tightening procedure, bolts shall then be fully tensioned, progressing from the most rigid part of a connection to the free edges.

3.6.2.1 Installation of Load Indicator Washers (LIW)

ASTM F 959. Where possible, the LIW shall be installed under the bolt head and the nut shall be tightened. If the LIW is installed adjacent to the turned element, provide a flat ASTM F 436 washer between the LIW and nut when the nut is turned for tightening, and between the LIW and bolt head when the bolt head is turned for tightening. In addition to the LIW, provide flat ASTM F 436 washers under both the bolt head and nut when ASTM A 490 bolts are used.

3.7 GAS CUTTING

Use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted on any major member in the structural framing. Use of a gas cutting torch will be permitted on minor members not under stress only after approval has been obtained from the Contracting Officers.

3.8 WELDING

AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Do not stress relieve ASTM A 514/A 514M steel by heat treatment. Grind exposed welds smooth as indicated. Provide AWS D1.1/D1.1M qualified welders, welding operators, and tackers.

The Contractor shall develop and submit the Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) for all welding, including welding done using prequalified procedures. Prequalified procedures may be submitted for



information only; however, procedures that are not prequalified shall be submitted for approval.

3.8.1 Removal of Temporary Welds, Run-Off Plates, and Backing Strips

Remove only from finished areas.

3.9 SHOP PRIMER REPAIR

Repair shop primer in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendation for surfaces damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting.

3.9.1 Field Priming

After erection, the field bolt heads and nuts, field welds, and any abrasions in the shop coat shall be cleaned and primed with paint of the same quality as that used for the shop coat.

3.10 GALVANIZING REPAIR

Provide as indicated or specified. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable. Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A 780 zinc rich paint for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces to which repair paint has been applied.


Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The Contracting Officer shall be notified in writing of defective welds, bolts, nuts, and washers within 7 working days of the date of weld inspection.

3.11.1 Welds

3.11.1.1 Visual Inspection

AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Furnish the services of AWS-certified welding inspectors for fabrication and erection inspection and testing and verification inspections. Welding inspectors shall visually inspect and mark welds, including fillet weld end returns.

3.11.2 Load Indicator Washers

3.11.2.1 Load Indicator Washer Compression

Load indicator washers shall be tested in place to verify that they have been compressed sufficiently to provide the 0.015 inch gap when the load indicator washer is placed under the bolt head and the nut is tightened, and to provide the 0.005 inch gap when the load indicator washer is placed under the turned element, as required by ASTM F 959.

3.11.2.2 Load Indicator Gaps

In addition to the above testing, an independent testing agency as approved by the Contracting Officer, shall test in place the load indicator gaps on 20 percent of the installed load indicator washers to verify that the ASTM F 959 load indicator gaps have been achieved. If more than 10 percent



of the load indicators tested have not been compressed sufficiently to provide the average gaps required by ASTM F 959, then all in place load indicator washers shall be tested to verify that the ASTM F 959 load indicator gaps have been achieved. Test locations shall be selected by the Contracting Officer.

3.11.3 High-Strength Bolts

3.11.3.1 Inspection

Inspection procedures shall be in accordance with AISC 348 , Section 9. Confirm and report to the Contracting Officer that the materials meet the project specification and that they are properly stored. Confirm that the faying surfaces have been properly prepared before the connections are assembled. Observe the specified job site testing and calibration, and confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required tension. Monitor the work to ensure the testing procedures are routinely followed on joints that are specified to be fully tensioned.

The Contractor shall inspect proper preparation, size, gaging location, and acceptability of welds; identification marking; operation and current characteristics of welding sets in use; and calibration of torque wrenches for high-strength bolts.

The Contractor shall inspect high-strength bolted connections in accordance with AISC 317.

3.11.3.2 Testing

The Government has the option to perform nondestructive tests on 5 percent of the installed bolts to verify compliance with pre-load bolt tension requirements. The nondestructive testing will be done in-place using an ultrasonic measuring device or any other device capable of determining in-place pre-load bolt tension. The test locations shall be selected by the Contracting Officer. If more than 10 percent of the bolts tested contain defects identified by testing, then all bolts used from the batch from which the tested bolts were taken, shall be tested. Retest new bolts after installation.




SECTION 05 21 19

OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING07/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWS B2.1 (2005; Errata 2006; Errata 2006) Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification


STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE (SJI)

SJI 279167 SPECS/LOADS (2006) 42nd Edition Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders


SSPC PS 14.01 (1982; E 2004) Steel Joist Shop Painting System

SSPC Paint 15 (1999; R 2004) Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

29 CFR 1910.1200 Hazard Communication

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

29 CFR 1926.757 Steel Erection; Open Web Steel Joists

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Welder qualification

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) per OSHA 1910.1200



SD-02 Shop Drawings

Steel joist framing; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Erection inspection

Welding inspections

SD-07 Certificates

Accessories

Certification of Compliance


a. Recycled Content LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content.Text


1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT

All joist framing must conform to 29 CFR 1926.757. Secure all joist bridging and anchoring in place prior to the application of any construction loads. Distribute temporary loads so that joist capacity is not exceeded. Do not apply loads to bridging.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Handle, transport, and store joists in a manner to prevent damage affecting their structural integrity. Store all items off the ground in a well drained location protected from the weather and easily accessible for inspection and handling.


All work must comply with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.


Submit steel joist framing drawings. Show joist type and size, layout in plan, and erection details including methods of anchoring, framing at openings, type and spacing of bridging, requirements for field welding, and details of accessories as applicable.

1.5.2 Certification of Compliance

Prior to construction commencement, submit Material Safety Data Sheet per 29 CFR 1910.1200 for steel joists , and certification for welder qualification, compliance with AWS B2.1, welding operation, and tacker, stating the type of welding and positions qualified for, the code and procedure qualified under, date qualified, and the firm and individual



certifying the qualification tests.

Submit certification of compliance for SJI Manuals:

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 JOISTS AND ACCESSORIES

Provide design data from SJI 279167 SPECS/LOADS for the joist series indicated.

2.3 PAINTING

2.3.1 Shop Painting

Clean and prime joists in accordance with SSPC Paint 15 and SSPC PS 14.01, Steel Joist Shop Painting System, using manufacturer standard primer. Finish coat of paint is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING.

PART 3 EXECUTION






Provide invoices, plant slips, certification indicating total quantities of waste material, and amounts diverted by way of means as stated above for



LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Handling and Erection

Conform to SJI 279167 SPECS/LOADS for the joist series indicated.

3.3.2 Welding

All welding must conform to AWS B2.1 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 BEARING PLATES

Provide bearing plates as indicated to accept full bearing after the supporting members have been plumbed and properly positioned, but prior to placing superimposed loads. The area under the plate must be damp-packed solidly with bedding mortar, except where nonshrink grout is indicated on the drawings.

3.5 PAINTING

3.5.1 Touch-Up Painting

After erection of joists , touch-up connections and areas of abraded shop coat with paint of the same type used for the shop coat.

3.5.2 Field Painting

Paint joists requiring a finish coat in conformance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING.

3.6 VISUAL INSPECTIONS

3.6.1 Erection Inspection

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6. Perform erection inspection and field welding inspections with AWS certified welding inspectors. Welding inspectors must visually inspect and mark welds.




SECTION 05 30 00

STEEL DECKS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

AISI SG-913 (1991) LRFD Cold-formed Steel Design Manual

AISI SG03-3 (2002) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set



AWS D1.3 (1998) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel


ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2007a) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened

ASTM A 653/A 653M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process


ASTM A 792/A 792M (2006a) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)

SDI 30 (2001) Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks

SDI DDMO3 (3rd Edition) Diaphragm Design Manual

SDI MOC2 (2006) Manual of Construction with Steel Deck




SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 20 Zinc-Rich Coating Type I Inorganic and Type II Organic

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fabrication Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

Welder Qualifications

SD-05 Design Data

Deck Units

Submit manufacturer's design calculations, or applicable published literature for the structural properties of the proposed deck units.

SD-07 Certificates

Welding Procedures





1.3.1 Deck Units

Furnish deck units and accessory products from a manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacture of steel decking. Provide manufacturer's certificates attesting that the decking material meets the specified requirements.

1.3.2 Qualifications for Welding Work

Follows Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

Submit qualified Welder Qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,



or under an equivalent approved qualification test. Qualifications tests shall be conducted on pieces in positions and with clearances equivalent to those actually encountered.

1.3.3 Fabrication Drawings

Show type and location of units, location and sequence of connections, bearing on supports, methods of anchoring, attachment of accessories, size and location of holes to be cut and reinforcement to be provided, the manufacturer's erection instructions and other pertinent details.


Deliver deck units to the site in a dry and undamaged condition. Store and handle steel deck in a manner to protect it from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Do not use decking for storage or as working platform until units have been fastened into position. Exercise care not to damage material or overload decking during construction. Must not exceed the design live load. Stack decking on platforms or pallets and cover with weathertight ventilated covering. Elevate one end during storage to provide drainage. Maintain deck finish at all times to prevent formation of rust. Repair deck finish using touch-up paint. Replace damaged material.

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOF DECKS

1.5.1 Properties of Sections

Properties of metal roof deck sections must comply with engineering design width as limited by the provisions of AISI SG-913.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Steel Sheet

Flat rolled carbon steel sheets of structural quality, thickness not less than indicated meeting the requirements of AISI SG03-3, except as modified herein.

2.2.2 Steel Coating

ASTM A 653/A 653M designation G60 galvanized. Apply coating to both sides



of sheet.

2.2.3 Mixes

2.2.3.1 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Floor Decks

Provide a high-zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 780.

2.2.4 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Roof Decks

Provide a high zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel and shall conform to ASTM A 780.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

Provide accessories of same material as deck, unless specified otherwise. Provide manufacturer's standard type accessories, as specified.

2.3.1 End Closures

Fabricated of sheet metal by the deck manufacturer. Provide end closures minimum 0.028 inch thick to close open ends at exposed edges of floors, and openings through deck.

2.3.2 Mechanical Fasteners

Provide mechanical fasteners as indicated for anchoring the deck to structural supports and adjoining units that are designed to meet the loads indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

2.4.1 Deck Units

2.4.2 Roof Deck

Conform to ASTM A 792/A 792M or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M for deck used in conjunction with insulation and built-up roofing. Fabricate roof deck units of steel design thickness required by the design drawings and zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating class.

2.4.3 Form Deck

Conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 1008 for deck used as formwork for concrete. Fabricate form deck of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings.Zinc-coat in conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60 coating class.

2.4.4 Shop Priming

Shop prime accessories at the factory after coating. Clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's standard procedure followed by a spray, dip or roller coat of rust-inhibitive primer, oven cured.

2.4.5 Touch-Up Paint

Touch-up welds with paint conforming to SSPC Paint 20 in accordance with ASTM A 780. Maintain finish of deck units and accessories by using touch-up paint whenever necessary to prevent the formation of rust.



For floor decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint the scarred areas on the top and bottom surfaces of the metal floor decking and on the surface of supporting steel members. Include welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots for scarred areas. Touched up the galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint.

After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint the scarred areas on top and bottom surfaces of metal roof decking. The scarred areas include welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots. Touchup galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 EXAMINATION

Prior to installation of decking units and accessories, examine worksite to verify that as-built structure will permit installation of decking system without modification.

3.4 INSTALLATION

Install steel deck units in accordance with SDI 30 and approved shop drawings. Place units on structural supports, properly adjusted, leveled, and aligned at right angles to supports before permanently securing in place. Damaged deck and accessories including material which is permanently stained or contaminated, deformed, or with burned holes shall not be installed. Extend deck units over three or more supports unless absolutely impractical. Report inaccuracies in alignment or leveling to the Contracting Officer and make necessary corrections before permanently anchoring deck units. Locate deck ends over supports only. Ends of floor deck shall be lapped. Do not use unanchored deck units as a work or storage platform. Do not fill unanchored deck with concrete. Permanently anchor units placed by the end of each working day. Do not support suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, utilities, or other loads by steel deck unless indicated. Distribute loads by appropriate means to



prevent damage.

3.4.1 Attachment

Immediately after placement and alignment, and after correcting inaccuracies, permanently fasten steel deck units to structural supports and to adjacent deck units by welding with normal 5/8 inch diameter puddle welds as indicated on the design drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure and SDI 30. Clamp or weight deck units to provide firm contact between deck units and structural supports while performing welding.

3.4.1.1 Welding

Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3 using methods and electrodes recommended by the manufacturers of the base metal alloys being used. Ensure only operators previously qualified by tests prescribed in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3 make welds. Immediately recertify, or replace qualified welders, that are producing unsatisfactory welding. Do not use welding washers at the connections of the deck to supports. Do not use welding washers at sidelaps. Holes and similar defects will not be acceptable. Lap 2 inch deck ends. Attach all partial or segments of deck units to structural supports in accordance with Section 2.5 of SDI DDMO3. Immediately clean welds by chipping and wire brushing. Heavily coat welds, cut edges and damaged portions of coated finish with zinc-dust paint conforming to ASTM A 780.

3.4.2 Openings

Cut or drill all holes and openings required and be coordinated with the drawings, specifications, and other trades. Frame and reinforce openings as indicated.

3.4.3 Deck Damage

SDI MOC2, for repair of deck damage.

3.4.4 Accessory Installation

3.4.4.1 End Closures

Provide end closure to close open ends of cells at columns, walls, and openings in deck.

3.4.5 Concrete Work

Prior to placement of concrete, inspect installed decking to ensure that there has been no permanent deflection or other damage to decking. Replace decking which has been damaged or permanently deflected as approved by the Contracting Officer. Place concrete on metal deck in accordance with Construction Practice of SDI 30.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION FOR ROOF DECKS

Upon completion of the deck, sweep surfaces clean and prepare for installation of the roofing.




3.6.1 Decks Not Receiving Concrete

Inspect the decking top surface for distortion after installation. For roof decks not receiving concrete, verify distortion by placing a straight edge across three adjacent top flanges. The maximum allowable gap between the straight edge and the top flanges is 1/16 inch; when gap is more than 1/16 inch, provide corrective measures or replacement. Reinspect decking after performing corrective measures or replacement.




SECTION 05 40 00

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AISI SG02-1 (2001) North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members


AISI SG-973 (2002) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual


AWS D1.3 (1998) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel




ASTM A 370 (2005) Mechanical Testing of Steel Products


ASTM B 633 (2007) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

ASTM C 955 (2003) Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases

ASTM E 329 (2007) Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction



SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

SAE J78 (1998) Steel Self Drilling Tapping Screws

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Framing Components; G

a. Cross sections, plans, and/or elevations showing component types and locations for each framing application; including shop coatings and material thicknesses for each framing component.

b. Connection details showing fastener type, quantity, location, and other information to assure proper installation.

SD-03 Product Data

Hat channels and accessories

SD-07 Certificates

Load-bearing cold-formed metal framing

Mill certificates or test reports from independent testing agency, qualified in accordance with ASTM E 329, showing that the steel sheet used in the manufacture of each cold-formed component complies with the minimum yield strengths and uncoated steel thickness specified. Test reports shall be based on the results of three coupon tests in accordance with ASTM A 370.


a. Recycled Content LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating materil's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-inducstrial recycled content.



Deliver materials to job site and store in adequately ventilated, dry locations. Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. If necessary to store materials outside, stack off the ground, support on a level platform, and protect from the weather as approved. Handle materials to prevent damage. Finish of the framing members shall be maintained at all times, using an approved high zinc dust content, galvanizing repair paint whenever necessary to prevent the formation of rust. Replace damaged items with new, as directed by the Contracting



Officer.

1.4 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

Bracing, fastenings, and other accessories necessary for complete installation. Framing members shall have the properties indicated. Where physical structural properties are not indicated, they shall be as necessary to withstand all imposed loads. Design framing in accordance with AISI SG-973. Non-load-bearing metal framing, furring, and ceiling suspension systems are specified in Section 09 22 00 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE


Submit framing components to show sizes, thicknesses, layout, material designations, methods of installation, and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.

Manufacturer's Location for Regionally Manufactured Materials LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured project products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius.

2.2 HAT CHANNELS AND ACCESSORIES

Framing components shall comply with ASTM C 955 and the following.

2.2.1 Hats of 16 Gage (0.0598 Inch) and Heavier

Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, SS Grade 50, G90 .

2.2.2 Sizes, Gages, and Other Structural Properties

Size and gage as indicated.

2.3 CONNECTIONS

Screws for steel-to-steel connections shall be self-drilling tapping in compliance with SAE J78. Electroplated screws shall have a Type II coating in accordance with ASTM B 633. Screws, bolts, and anchors shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as appropriate. Screws bolts, and anchors shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as appropriate.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FASTENING

Fasten framing members together by welding or by using self-drilling or self-tapping screws. Electrodes and screw connections shall be as required and indicated in the design calculations.

3.1.1 Welds

All welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.3, as modified by AISI SG02-1. All welders, welding operations, and welding procedures shall be qualified according to AWS D1.3. All welds shall be cleaned and coated with rust inhibitive galvanizing paint. Do not field weld materials lighter than 18 gage.

3.1.2 Screws

Screws shall be self-drilling self-tapping. Screw penetration through joined materials shall not be less than three exposed threads. Minimum spacings and edge distances for screws shall be as specified in AISI SG02-1. Screws covered by sheathing materials shall have low profile heads.

3.1.3 Anchors

Anchors shall be of the type, size, and location shown on the drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Hat Channels

Cut hat channels square and set with firm bearing. -- End of Section --



SECTION 05 50 00

METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

ASSE A10.3 (2006) Operations -- Safety Requirements for Powder Actuated Fastening Systems




ASME B18.2.2 (1987; R 2005) Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)

ASME B18.21.1 (1999; R 2005) Lock Washers (Inch Series)

ASME B18.22.1 (1965; R 2003) Plain Washers

ASME B18.52.1 (1996; R 2005) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series

ASME B18.6.2 (1998; R 2005) Slotted Head Cap Screws, Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted Headless Set Screws: Inch Series

ASME B18.6.3 (2003) Machine Screws and Machine Screw Nuts




ASTM A 307 (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon



Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength


ASTM A 48/A 48M (2003) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings



ASTM A 687 (1993) Standard Specification for High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs


ASTM A 786/A 786M (2005) Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates

ASTM A 924/A 924M (2007) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B 108 (2006) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B 209 (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B 221 (2006) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

ASTM B 26/B 26M (2005) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM D 1187 (1997; R 2002e1) Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal

ASTM E 814 (2006) Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

ASTM F 1679 (2004e1) Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer



MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

MPI 79 (Jan 2004) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

NAAMM MBG 531 (2000) Metal Bar Grating Manual

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 10 (2006; Errata 2006) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers


29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fabrication drawings of steel stairs; G

Fabrication drawings of structural steel door frames; G

Access doors and panels, installation drawings; G

Cover plates and frames, installation drawings; G

Floor gratings, installation drawings; G

Ladders, installation drawings; G

Roof hatch; G

Fire extinguisher cabinets; G

Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to structural system, and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303.

Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction.

SD-03 Product Data

Access doors and panels

Floor gratings



Ladders

Structural steel door frames

Fire extinguisher cabinets

Roof hatch



b. Regional Materials LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating location of final manufacturer's origin for all products and materials from



within 500 mile radius.1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove and replace damaged items with new items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




Indoor sealants and adhesives used must have a VOC content less than current VOC content limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168. Sealants used as fillers must meet requirements of the Bay Area Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule #51.

2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Structural Carbon Steel

ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.2.2 Steel Pipe

ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

2.2.3 Gratings

a. Gray cast iron ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 40, unless another Class is indicated or required by structural loads.

b. Metal plank grating, non-slip requirement, steel ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90.

2.2.4 Floor Plates, Patterned

Floor plate ASTM A 786/A 786M. Steel plate shall not be less than 14 gage.

2.2.5 Anchor Bolts

ASTM A 307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and finish as the metal to which applied.

2.2.5.1 Lag Screws and Bolts

ASME B18.52.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.



2.2.5.2 Toggle Bolts

ASME B18.52.1.

2.2.5.3 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets

ASME B18.2.2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307.

2.2.5.4 Powder Driven Fasteners

Follow safety provisions of ASSE A10.3.

2.2.5.5 Screws

ASME B18.52.1, ASME B18.6.2, and ASME B18.6.3.

2.2.5.6 Washers

Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18.22.1. Provide beveled washers for American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular, tapered in thickness, and smooth. Provide lock washers to conform to ASME B18.21.1.

2.2.6 Aluminum Alloy Products

Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B 26/B 26M or ASTM B 108 for castings, as applicable. Provide aluminum extrusions at least 1/8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0.050 inch thick.

2.3 FABRICATION FINISHES

2.3.1 Galvanizing

Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication where practicable. Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 924/A 924M, G90, as applicable.

2.3.2 Galvanize

Anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3.3 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces

Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A 780 or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by Contracting Officer. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds. Heat surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied, with a torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste; spread molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess material.

2.3.4 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces

Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.



2.4 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

Provide flush type access doors and panels unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames for access doors of steel not lighter than 14 gage with welded joints and anchorage for securing into construction. Provide access doors with a minimum of 14 by 20 inches and of not lighter than 14 gage steel, with stiffened edges and welded attachments. Provide access doors hinged to frame and with a flush-face, turn-screw-operated latch. Provide exposed metal surfaces with a shop applied prime coat. Access doors and panels in fire-rated walls must be of equivalent fire ratings.

2.5 COVER PLATES AND FRAMES

Fabricate cover plates of 1/4 inch thick rolled steel weighing not more than 100 pounds per plate with a selected raised pattern nonslip top surface . Plate shall be shop painted. Frames shall be structural steel shapes and plates, with bent steel bars or headed anchors welded to frame for anchoring to concrete . Miter and weld all corners. Butt joint straight runs. Allow for expansion on straight runs over 15 feet. Provide holes for lifting tools. Provide holes and openings with 1/2 inch clearance for pipes and equipment. Remove sharp edges and burrs from cover plates and exposed edges of frames. Weld all connections and grind top surface smooth. Weld bar stops every six inches. Provide 1/8 inch clearance at edges and between cover plates.

2.6 FLOOR GRATINGS

Design steel grating in accordance with NAAMM MBG 531 for bar type grating or manufacturer's charts for plank grating. Galvanize steel floor gratings.

a. Design floor gratings to support a live load of 100 pounds per square foot for the spans indicated, with maximum deflection of L/240 unless otherwise indicated.

b. NAAMM MBG 531, band edges of grating with bars of the same size as the bearing bars. Weld banding in accordance with the manufacturer's standard for trim . Design tops of bearing bars, cross or intermediate bars to be in the same plane and match grating finish.

c. Design grating castings uniform in quantity for the traffic classification indicated. Gratings shall be free from blow holes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, swells, cracks and other injurious defects. Surfaces shall be smooth and true to pattern. Castings shall conform to ASTM A 48-94 Class 35B. Provide angle frames cast in concrete floor to receive gratings. Frames shall be tapped to receive bolt anchors.

d. Anchor gratings to structural members with bolts. e. Slip resistance requirements must exceed both wet and dry a static

coefficient of friction of 0.5 as tested in accordance with ASTM F 1679.

2.7 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)

Provide inch galvanized extra strong weight steel pipe as specified in ASTM A 53/A 53M. Anchor posts in concrete as indicated and fill solidly with concrete with minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi.



HDPE bollard sleeves with UV inhibitors. Sleeves shall have vertical ribs for a snug fit and additional impact resistance.

2.8 LADDERS

Fabricate vertical ladders conforming to Section 7 of 29 CFR 1910.27. Use 2 1/2 by 3/8 inch steel flats for stringers and 3/4 inch diameter steel rods for rungs. Rungs to be not less than 16 inches wide, spaced one foot apart, plug welded or shouldered and headed into stringers. Install ladders so that the distance from the rungs to the finished wall surface will not be less than 7 inches. Provide heavy clip angles riveted or bolted to the stringer and drilled as indicated. Provide intermediate clip angles not over 48 inches on centers.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES

Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework, such as lintels, sill angles, miscellaneous mountings and frames. Provide lintels fabricated from structural steel shapes over openings in masonry walls and partitions as indicated and as required to support wall loads over openings. Construct to have at least 8 inches bearing on masonry at each end.

Provide angles and plates, ASTM A 36/A 36M, for embedment as indicated. Galvanize embedded items exposed to the elements according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

2.10 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES

a. Provide frames as indicated. If not otherwise shown, construct frames of structural shapes, or shape and plate composite, to form a full depth channel shape with at least 1 1/2 inchoutstanding legs.

b. Where track, guides, hoods, hangers, operators, and other such accessories are required, provide support as indicated.

c. Provide jamb anchors near top, bottom, and at not more than 12 inch intervals.

2.11 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

Cabinets to be located in fire-rated walls shall be fire-rated type, fabricated in accordance with ASTM E 814, and shall be listed by an approved testing agency for 1- and 2-hour combustible and non-combustible wall systems. The testing agency's seal shall be affixed to each fire-rated cabinet. Cabinets shall be of the semi recessed or surface type suitable for 10 pound extinguishers. Trim shall be of heavy gage rolled stainless steel. Door shall be a rigid frame with full length piano type hinge and double strength (DSA) glass panel. Door and panel shall be stainless steel. Box shall be of heavy gage rolled steel and have the manufacturer's standard white baked enamel finish inside and out.

2.12 METAL DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES

Provide downspot nozzles made from cast bronze with loose wall flange and with inlets of size and shape to suit downspout leaders.



PART 3 EXECUTION


a. Recycled Content LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 77 00.00 20, "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES".

b. Regional Materials LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating location of final manufacturer's origin for all products and materials from within a 500 mile radius for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 77 00.00 20, "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES".



Provide invoices, plant slips, certification indicating total quantities of waste material, and amounts diverted by way of means as stated above for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 77 00.00 20, "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES".

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall take all field measurements necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and shall harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied. Materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely shown or specified, shall be included. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause for rejection. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water.Items listed below require additional procedures.

3.4 WORKMANSHIP

Miscellaneous metalwork shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and true curves. Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. Welding shall be continuous along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Exposed connections of work in place shall not be tack welded. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. Exposed surfaces of work in place shall have a smooth finish, and unless otherwise approved, exposed riveting shall be flush. Where tight fits are required, joints shall be milled. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Work shall be accurately set to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details.

3.5 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS

Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items



securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners, when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.

3.6 BUILT-IN WORK

Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses.

3.7 WELDING

Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation.

3.8 FINISHES

3.8.1 Dissimilar Materials

Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D 1187, asphalt-base emulsion.

3.8.2 Field Preparation

Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled, shall be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.

3.8.3 Environmental Conditions

Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.9 ACCESS PANELS

Install where indicated and install a removable access panel not less than 12 by 12 inches directly below each valve, flow indicator, damper, or air splitter that is located above the ceiling, other than an acoustical ceiling, and that would otherwise not be accessible.

3.10 COVER PLATES AND FRAMES

Install the tops of cover plates and frames flush with floor.

3.11 LADDERS

Secure to the adjacent construction with the clip angles attached to the



stringer. Secure to masonry or concrete with not less than two 1/2 inch diameter expansion bolts. Install intermediate clip angles not over 48 inches on center. Install brackets as required for securing of ladders.

3.12 ROOF HATCH (SCUTTLES)

Shall be of zinc-coated steel sheets not less than 14 gage, with 3 inch beaded flange, welded and ground at corner. Provide a minimum clear opening of 30 by 36 inches. Construction and accessories shall be as follows:

a. Insulate cover and curb with one inch thick rigid fiberboard insulation covered and protected by zinc-coated steel liner not less than 26 gage. Curb shall be 12 inches high, formed with 3 inch mounting flange with holes provided for securing to the roof deck. Equip the curb with an integral metal cap flashing of the same gage and metal as the curb, full welded and ground at corners for weather tightness.

b. Provide hatch completely assembled with pintle hinges, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, positive snap latch with turn handles on inside and outside, and neoprene draft seal. Provide fasteners for padlocking on the inside. Equip the cover with an automatic hold-open arm complete with grip handle to permit one-hand release. Cover action shall be smooth through its entire range with an operating pressure of approximately 30 pounds.

c. Paint hatch to match roof color.

3.13 INSTALLATION OF GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)

Pipe guards shall be set as indicated. Piers shall be constructed of, and the hollow cores of the pipe filled with, concrete specified in Section 03 30 00.00 20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 3.14 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES

Door frames shall be secured to the floor slab by means of angle clips and expansion bolts. Continuous door stops shall be welded to the frame or tap screwed with countersunk screws at no more than 18 inchcenters, assuring in either case full contact with the frame. Any necessary reinforcements shall be made and the frames shall be drilled and tapped as required for hardware.

3.15 INSTALLATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

Metal fire extinguisher cabinets shall be furnished and installed in accordance with NFPA 10 where shown on the drawings or specified.




SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AF&PA)

AF&PA T10 (2001) Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings

AF&PA T101 (2001) National Design Specification (NDS)for Wood Construction

AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC)

ALSC PS 20 (1970) American Softwood Lumber Standard

AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA C1 (2003) All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C2 (2003) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C20 (2003) Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C27 (2002) Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C28 (2003) Standard for Preservative Treatment of Structural Glued Laminated Members and Lamination Before Gluing of Southern Pine, Coastal Douglas Fir, Hemfir and Western Hemlock by Pressure Processes

AWPA C9 (2003) Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA M2 (2001) Standard for Inspection of Treated Wood Products

AWPA M6 (1996) Brands Used on Forest Products

AWPA P17 (2001; R 2002) Fire Retardant Formulations

AWPA P18 (2004) Nonpressure Preservatives



AWPA P5 (2005) Standard for Waterborne Preservatives

AWPA T1 (2004; R 2005) Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard

AWPA U1 (2004; R 2005) Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood

APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)

APA PS 1 (1995) Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood



ASME B18.5.2.1M (2006) Metric Round Head Short Square Neck Bolts

ASME B18.5.2.2M (1982; R 2005) Metric Round Head Square Neck Bolts


ASME B18.6.1 (1981; R 1997) Wood Screws (Inch Series)


ASTM A 307 (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength


ASTM F 547 (2006) Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base Materials

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM DS 1-49 (2000) Perimeter Flashing

FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC)

FSC STD 01 001 (2000) Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship

GREEN SEAL (GS)

GS-36 (2000) Commercial Adhesives

INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

ICC IBC (2003) International Building Code



SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

SPIB 1003 (2002) Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber


PS-56 (1973) Structural Glued Laminated Timber


CID A-A-1923 (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield, Expansion (Lag, Machine and Externally Threaded Wedge Bolt Anchors)

CID A-A-1924 (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield, Expansion (Self Drilling Tubular Expansion Shell Bolt Anchors

CID A-A-1925 (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield Expansion (Nail Anchors)

FS FF-B-588 (Rev E) Bolt, Toggle: and Expansion Sleeve, Screw

FS UU-B-790 (Rev A) Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber: (Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellent and Fire Resistant)



WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)

WCLIB 17 (2000) Standard Grading Rules

WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)

WWPA G-5 (1998) Western Lumber Grading Rules

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data


Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products



included in project.Fire-retardant treatment

Submit documentation verifying that no urea-formaldehyde resins were used.

Adhesives; (LEED)

Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content. Building wrap.

SD-06 Test Reports

Preservative-treated lumber and plywood



LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.Adhesives; (LEED)

LEED documentation relative to low emitting materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.

Certified Wood; (LEED)

LEED documentation relative to certified wood credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.




Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Store, protect, handle, and install prefabricated structural elements in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Store materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, with drainage to avoid standing water, and protection against ground moisture and dampness. Store materials with a moisture barrier at both the ground level and as a cover forming a well ventilated enclosure. Adhere to requirements for stacking, lifting, bracing, cutting, notching, and special fastening requirements. Remove defective and damaged materials and provide new materials. Store separated reusable wood waste convenient to cutting station and area of work.



1.4 GRADING AND MARKING

1.4.1 Lumber

Mark each piece of framing and board lumber or each bundle of small pieces of lumber with the grade mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency. Such association or agency shall be certified by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species used. Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks, stamps, or any type of identifying mark. Hammer marking will be permitted on timbers when all surfaces will be exposed to view.

1.4.2 Plywood

Mark each sheet with the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the plywood. The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or span rating, exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance with APA PS 1.Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks or other types of identifying marks.

1.4.3 Preservative-Treated Lumber and Plywood

The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of treated wood products. Each treated piece shall be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2 and permanently marked or branded, by the producer, in accordance with AWPA M6. The Contractor shall provide Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) with the inspection report of an approved independent inspection agency that offered products comply with applicable AWPA Standards. The appropriate Quality Mark on each piece will be accepted, in lieu of inspection reports, as evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA treatment standards.

1.4.4 Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber

Mark each piece in accordance with AWPA M6, except pieces that are to be natural or transparent finished. In addition, exterior fire-retardant lumber shall be distinguished by a permanent penetrating blue stain. Labels of a nationally recognized independent testing agency will be accepted as evidence of conformance to the fire-retardant requirements of AWPA M6.

1.5 SIZES AND SURFACING

ALSC PS 20 for dressed sizes of yard and structural lumber. Lumber shall be surfaced four sides. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the standard under which the product is produced. Other measurements are IP or SI standard.

1.6 MOISTURE CONTENT

Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment. Maximum moisture content of wood products shall be as follows at the time of delivery to the job site:

a. Framing lumber and boards - 19 percent maximum



d. Materials other than lumber - Moisture content shall be in accordance with standard under which the product is produced

1.7 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT

Treat wood products with waterborne wood preservatives conforming to AWPA P5. Pressure treatment of wood products shall conform to the requirements of AWPA U1 and AWPA T1. Pressure-treated wood products shall not contain arsenic, chromium, or other agents classified as carcinogenic, probably carcinogenic, or possibly carcinogenic to humans (compounds in Groups 1, 2A, or 2B) by the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC), Lyon, France. Pressure-treated wood products shall not exceed the limits of the U.S. EPA's Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP), and shall not be classified as hazardous waste. Submit certification from treating plant stating chemicals and process used and net amount of preservatives retained are in conformance with specified standards.lumber and timber in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C2, and plywood in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C9. Treat structural glued laminated timber in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C28.

a. 0.25 pcf intended for above ground use.

1. Nailers, edge strips, crickets, and curbs, for roof decks.

1.7.1 New Construction

Use a boron-based preservative conforming to AWPA P18, sodium silicate wood mineralization process, or Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary Compound to treat wood. Use boron-based preservatives for above-ground applications only.

1.8 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT

Fire-retardant treated plywood shall be pressure treated in accordance with AWPA C27 for plywood. Material use shall be defined in AWPA C20 and AWPA C27 for Interior Type B and Exterior Type. with fire retardants conforming to AWPA P17. Fire retardant treatment of wood products shall conform to the requirements of AWPA U1, Commodity Specification H and AWPA T1, Section 8.8. Fire-retardant-treated wood products shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate, and formaldehyde. Items to be treated include the following:

a. Telecommunications back boards..


1.9.1 Humidity Requirements

Sequence work to minimize use of temporary HVAC to dry out building and control humidity.


During and immediately after installation of treated wood, engineered wood products, and laminated wood products at interior spaces, provide temporary ventilation.






1.11.2 Certified Wood

Wood products shall be FSC-certified as specified herein.

1.11.3 Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification

Use FSC-certified wood where specified. Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC STD 01 001 and identify certifying organization. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item basis. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A minimum of 50 percent of all wood based products, including concrete formwork, shall be certified by the Forest Stewardship Councils criteria for wood building components. All composite woods, plywood, particle boards shall not contain any added Urea-formaldehyde resins.



2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Virgin Lumber

Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. Avoid companies who buy, sell, or use old growth timber in their operations, when possible. Lumber shall be FSC-certified.

2.3 LUMBER

2.3.1 Framing Lumber

Framing lumber shall be one of the species listed in the table below. Minimum grade of species shall be as listed. Finger-jointed lumber may be used in the same applications as solid lumber of an equivalent species and grade, provided the finger-jointed lumber meets all the requirements of the



certification and the quality control programs of the rules writing agency having jurisdiction and all applicable requirements of PS-56.

Table of Grades for Framing and Board Lumber

Grading Rules Species Framing Board Lumber

WWPA G-5 Aspen All Species: All Species: standard grading Douglas Fir-Larch Standard Light No. 3 Common rules Douglas Fir South Framing or No. Engelmann Spruce 3 Structural -Lodgepole Pine Light Framing Engelmann Spruce (Stud Grade for Hem-Fir 2x4 nominal size, Idaho White Pine 10 feet and shorter) Lodgepole Pine Mountain Hemlock Mountain Hemlock -Hem-Fir Ponderosa Pine -Sugar Pine Ponderosa Pine -Lodgepole Pine Subalpine Fir White Woods Western Woods Western Cedars Western Hemlock

WCLIB 17 Douglas Fir-Larch All Species: All Species: standard grading Hem-Fir Standard Light Standard rules Mountain Hemlock Framing or No. Sitka Spruce 3 Structural Western Cedars Light Framing Western Hemlock (Stud Grade for 2x4 nominal size, 10 feet and shorter)

SPIB 1003 Southern Pine Standard Light No. 2 Boards standard grading Framing or No. rules 3 Structural Light Framing (Stud Grade for 2x4 nominal size, 10 feet and shorter)

2.4 PLYWOOD

APA PS 1

2.4.1 Wall Sheathing

2.4.1.1 Plywood

C-D Grade, Exposure 1 durability classification, Span rating of 48/24 or



greater. FSC-certified.2.4.2 Other Uses

2.4.2.1 Plywood

Plywood for telecommunications back board, fire retardant treated. C-D Grade, exposure 1. Plywood shall be FSC-certified.

2.5 OTHER MATERIALS

2.5.1 Building Paper

FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 1.

2.5.2 Miscellaneous Wood Members

2.5.2.1 Nonstress Graded Members

Members shall include bridging, corner bracing, furring, grounds, and nailing strips. Members shall be in accordance with TABLE I for the species used. Sizes shall be as follows unless otherwise shown:

Member Size (inch) _________ _____________

2.5.2.2 Blocking

Blocking shall be standard or number 2 grade.

2.5.3 Adhesives

Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials, GS-36 and as specified. Use water-based adhesives with maximum VOC content of 15 grams/liter for all interior applications.

2.6 ROUGH HARDWARE

Unless otherwise indicated or specified, rough hardware shall be of the type and size necessary for the project requirements. Sizes, types, and spacing of fastenings of manufactured building materials shall be as recommended by the product manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or specified. Fasteners shall be fabricated from 100 percent re-melted steel. Rough hardware exposed to the weather or embedded in or in contact with preservative treated wood, exterior masonry, or concrete walls or slabs shall be zinc-coated.

2.6.1 Bolts, Nuts, Studs, and Rivets

ASME B18.52.1, ASME B18.5.2.1M, ASME B18.5.2.2M, ASME B18.2.2, and ASTM A 687.

2.6.2 Anchor Bolts

ASTM A 307, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers.

2.6.3 Expansion Shields

CID A-A-1923, CID A-A-1924, and CID A-A-1925. Except as shown otherwise, maximum size of devices shall be 3/8 inch.



2.6.4 Lag Screws and Lag Bolts

ASME B18.52.1.

2.6.5 Toggle Bolts

FS FF-B-588.

2.6.6 Wood Screws

ASME B18.6.1.

2.6.7 Nails

ASTM F 547, size and type best suited for purpose. In general, 8-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing through 1 inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2 inch thick lumber; 16-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing through 2 inch thick lumber. Nails used with treated lumber and sheathing shall be galvanized. Nailing shall be in accordance with the recommended nailing schedule contained in AF&PA T10. Where detailed nailing requirements are not specified, nail size and spacing shall be sufficient to develop an adequate strength for the connection. The connection's strength shall be verified against the nail capacity tables in AF&PA T101. Reasonable judgment backed by experience shall ensure that the designed connection will not cause the wood to split. If a load situation exceeds a reasonable limit for nails, a specialized connector shall be used.

2.6.8 Clip Angles

Steel, 3/16 inch thick, size best suited for intended use; or zinc-coated steel or iron commercial clips designed for connecting wood members.

2.7 BUILDING WRAP

Building wrap over wood wall substrate.Spun bonded polypropylene furnished in standard rolls.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

A. Color: Green on exterior, White on interior of membraneB. Thickness and Weight: 0.023 inches thick and 5.161 oz. / sq. yd.C. Tensile Strength: ASTM D882, 28lbf/inchD. Water Resistance (control and weathered specimens): AATCC-127, no leakageE. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, 1309 g/m²F. Low Temperature Bend: AC38, PassG. Flamespread Index: ASTM E-84, PassH. Smoke Development Index: ASTM E-84, Pass

Building wrap over sloped wood roof substrate.Spun bonded polypropylene furnished in standard rolls

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

A. Color: Red on exterior, White on interior of membraneB. Thickness and Weight: 0.020 inches thick and 5.01 oz./sq. yd.C. Tensile Strengeth: ASTM D1682, 106 lbf/inchD. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96, 406 G/m² @ 24 hours



E. Ppliability: AC207, PassF. Water Resistance (Ponding): AC 48, PassG. Cyclinbg & Elongation: AC 48, PassH. Accelerated Aging: AC 48, AC 207, PassI. UV Exposure: AC48, AC207, PassJ. Rupture Resistance (3/8" Nail Head and 7/16" Crown Staple): ASTM D3462, PassK. Liquid Water Transmission: ASTM D4869, PassL. Flamespread Index: ASTM E-84, 10M. Smoke Development Index: ASTM E-84, 35

AUXILIARY MATERIALS

Tape1. Single-Sided Tape: a. 3" Tape (Single-Sided) 20 mil2. Double-Sided Sealing Tape a. 1" (Double-Sided) 30 mil

PART 3 EXECUTION




3.2 INSTALLATION

Conform to AF&PA T10 and install in accordance with the National Association of Home Builders (NAHB) Advanced Framing Techniques: Optimum Value Engineering, unless otherwise indicated or specified. Select lumber sizes to minimize waste. Fit framing lumber and other rough carpentry, set accurately to the required lines and levels, and secure in place in a rigid manner. Do not splice framing members between bearing points. Set joists, rafters, and purlins with their crown edge up. Frame members for the passage of pipes, conduits, and ducts. Provide adequate support as appropriate to the application, climate, and modulus of elasticity of the product. Provide as necessary for the proper completion of the work all framing members not indicated or specified. Spiking and nailing not indicated or specified otherwise shall be in accordance with the Nailing Schedule contained in ICC IBC; perform bolting in an approved manner. Spikes, nails, and bolts shall be drawn up tight.3.2.1 Copings3.2.1.1

Anchors in Masonry

Except where indicated otherwise, Embed anchor bolts not less than 15 inches in masonry unit walls and provide each with a nut and a 2 inch diameter washer at bottom end. Fully grout bolts with mortar.



3.2.2 Wall Sheathing

3.2.2.1 Plywood

Apply horizontally. stagger vertical end joints. Nail panels with 6-penny nails spaced 6 inches o.c. along edges of the panel and 12 inches o.c. over intermediate supports. Keep nails 3/8 inches away from panel ledges. Provide 2 by 4 blocking for horizontal edges not otherwise supported.

3.2.3 Building Wrap

Provide building wrap where indicated . Apply shingle fashion, horizontally, beginning at the bottom of the wall. Lap, fasten, and seal as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.

3.3 MISCELLANEOUS

3.3.1 Wood Roof Nailers, Edge Strips, and Curbs

Provide sizes and configurations indicated or specified and anchored securely to continuous construction.

3.3.1.1 Roof Edge Strips and Nailers

Provide at perimeter of roof, around openings through roof, and where roofs abut walls, curbs, and other vertical surfaces. Except where indicated otherwise, nailers shall be 6 inches wide and the same thickness as the insulation. Anchor nailers securely to underlying construction. Anchor perimeter nailers in accordance with FM DS 1-49.

3.3.2 Wood Blocking

Provide proper sizes and shapes at proper locations for the installation and attachment of wood and other finish materials, fixtures, equipment, and items indicated or specified.

3.3.3 Temporary Closures

Provide with hinged doors and padlocks and install during construction at exterior doorways and other ground level openings that are not otherwise closed. Cover windows and other unprotected openings with polyethylene or other approved material, stretched on wood frames. Provide dustproof barrier partitions to isolate areas as directed.

3.3.4 Temporary, Bracing, and Shoring

Provide for the support and protection of masonry work during construction as specified in Section 04 20 00, "MASONRY". Forms and centering for cast-in-place concrete work are specified in Section 03 30 00.00 20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.


In accordance with the Waste Management Plan and as specified. Separate and reuse scrap sheet materials larger than 2 square feet, framing members larger than 16 inches, and multiple offcuts of any size larger than 12 inches. Clearly separate damaged wood and other scrap lumber for acceptable alternative uses on site, including bracing, blocking, cripples, ties, and shims.



Separate treated, stained, painted, and contaminated wood and place in designated area for hazardous materials. Dispose of according to local regulations. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, or other wood waste buried in fill or on the ground. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. Do not burn scrap lumber that has been pressure treated, or lumber that is less than one year old.




SECTION 06 20 00

FINISH CARPENTRY04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC)

ALSC PS 20 (1970) American Softwood Lumber Standard

AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA C1 (2003) All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C2 (2003) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C9 (2003) Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA M2 (2001) Standard for Inspection of Treated Wood Products



ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)

AWI Qual Stds (8th Edition) AWI Quality Standards




ASME B18.6.1 (1981; R 1997) Wood Screws (Inch Series)



ASTM F 547 (2006) Nails for Use with Wood and



Wood-Base Materials

BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

BHMA A156.9 (2003) Cabinet Hardware

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA LD 3 (2005) Standard for High-Pressure Decorative Laminates

SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

SPIB 1003 (2002) Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber


PS-58 (1974) Basic Hardboard

WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)

WCLIB 17 (2000) Standard Grading Rules

WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)

WWPA G-5 (1998) Western Lumber Grading Rules

WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA)

WDMA I.S. 4 (2000) Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings

SD-07 Certificates

Certificates of grade

Certificates of compliance

1.3 DETAIL DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall submit detail drawings showing fabricated items and special mill and woodwork items. Drawings shall indicate materials and details of construction, methods of fastening, erection, and installation.

1.4 CERTIFICATES

Provide certificates of grade from the grading agency on graded but



unmarked lumber or plywood attesting that materials meet the grade requirements specified herein.

Provide certificates of compliance unless materials bear certification markings or statements.


Deliver lumber, plywood, trim, and millwork to job site in an undamaged condition. Stack materials to ensure ventilation and drainage. Protect against dampness before and after delivery. Store materials under cover in a well-ventilated enclosure and protect against extreme changes in temperature and humidity. Do not store products in building until wet trade materials are dry.


1.6.1 Lumber

Identify each piece or each bundle of lumber, millwork, and trim by the grade mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that is certified by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species.

1.6.2 Plywood

Each sheet of plywood shall bear the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over quality of the plywood. Mark shall identify plywood by species group or span rating, and shall show exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance with APA PS 1.

1.6.3 Hardboard

Materials shall bear a marking or statement identifying the producer and the applicable standard.

1.6.4 Pressure-Treated Lumber and Plywood

Each treated piece shall be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2.

1.6.5 Nonpressure-Treated Woodwork and Millwork

Mark, stamp, or label, indicating compliance with WDMA I.S. 4.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A minimum of 50 percent of all wood based products, shall be certified by the Forest Stewardship Councils criteria for wood building components. All composite woods, plywood, particle boards shall not contain any added Urea-formaldehyde resins.

Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5



percent of the total value of that product.


Indoor sealants and adhesives used must have a VOC content less than current VOC content limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168. Sealants used as filters must meet requirements or the Bay Area Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule #51.

2.2 WOOD

2.2.1 Sizes and Patterns of Wood Products

Yard and board lumber sizes shall conform to ALSC PS 20. Provide shaped lumber and millwork in the patterns indicated and standard patterns of the association covering the species. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances allowed by the applicable standard.

2.2.2 Trim, Finish, and Frames

Provide species and grades listed for materials to be paint finished. Provide materials that are to be stain, natural, or transparent finished one grade higher than that listed. Provide species indicated for materials to be transparent finished.

TABLE OF GRADES FOR WOOD TO RECEIVE PAINT FINISH

Exterior and Interior Grading Rules Species Trim, Finish, and Frames

WWPA G-5 Aspen All Species: C & Btr. grading rules Douglas Fir-Larch Select (Choice & Btr Douglas Fir-South Idaho White Pine) or Engelmann Spruce Superior Finish. -Lodgepole Pine Western Red Cedar may Engelmann Spruce be graded C & Btr. Hem-Fir Select or A & Btr. per Idaho White Pine Special Western Red Cedar Lodgepole Pine Rules. Mountain Hemlock Mountain Hemlock -Hem-Fir Ponderosa Pine- Sugar Pine (Ponderosa Pine -Lodgepole Pine) White Woods (Western Woods) Western Hemlock

WCLIB 17 Douglas Fir-Larch All Species: C & Btr standard grading Hem-Fir VG, except A for rules Mountain Hemlock Western Red Cedar Sitka Spruce



TABLE OF GRADES FOR WOOD TO RECEIVE PAINT FINISH

Exterior and Interior Grading Rules Species Trim, Finish, and Frames Western Cedars Western Hemlock

SPIB 1003 Southern Pine C & Btr grading rules

2.2.3 Utility Shelving

Utility shelving shall be a suitable species equal to or exceeding requirements of No. 3 Common white fir under WWPA G-5, 1 inch thick; or plywood, interior type, Grade A-B, 1/2 inch thick, any species group.

2.2.4 Softwood Plywood

APA PS 1, thicknesses as indicated.

a. Plywood for Shelving: Interior type, B-B Grade, any species group.

b. Plywood for Countertops: Exterior type, A-C Grade.

2.2.5 Hardboard

PS-58, tempered type, 1/4 inch thick.

2.3 COUNTER TOPS

2.3.1 Laminated Plastic

NEMA LD 3.

2.3.1.1 Countertop Finish

Grade GP 50 or PF 42, satin finish. Color and pattern shall be as indicated. Indoor adhesives and sealants used must have a VOC content less than current VOC content limits of South Coastal Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168. Sealants used as fillers must meet requirements of the Bay Area Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule #51.

2.3.1.2 Backing Sheet

BK 20.

2.4 MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD PRODUCTS

Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment. Maximum moisture content of wood products at time of delivery to the job site, and when installed, shall be as follows:

a. Interior Finish Lumber, Trim, and Millwork 1 1/4 Inches Nominal or



Less in Thickness: 6 percent on 85 percent of the pieces and 8 percent on remainder.b. Moisture content of other materials shall be in accordance with the applicable standards.

2.5 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT OF WOOD PRODUCTS

2.5.1 Pressure Treatment

Lumber and plywood or in contact with masonry or concrete shall be treated with water-borne preservative listed in AWPA P5 in accordance with AWPA C1, AWPA C2, and AWPA C9, as applicable, and inspected in accordance with AWPA M2. Identify treatment on each piece of material by the quality mark of an agency accredited by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee.

2.6 HARDWARE

Provide sizes, types, and spacings of manufactured building materials recommended by the product manufacturer except as otherwise indicated or specified.

2.6.1 Wood Screws

ASME B18.6.1.

2.6.2 Bolts, Nuts, Lag Screws, and Studs

ASME B18.52.1, ASME B18.2.2, and ASTM A 687.

2.6.3 Nails

Nails shall be the size and type best suited for the purpose and shall conform to ASTM F 547. Nails shall be hot-dip galvanized or aluminum when used on exterior work. For siding, length of nails shall be sufficient to extend 1-1/2 inches into supports, including wood sheathing over framing. Screws for use where nailing is impractical shall be size best suited for purpose.

2.6.4 Closet Hanger Rods

Chromium-plated steel rods, not less than one inch diameter by 18 gage. Rods may be adjustable with integral mounting brackets if smaller tube is one inch by 18 gage.

2.7 FABRICATION

2.7.1 Quality Standards (QS)

The terms "Premium," "Custom," and "Economy" refer to the quality grades defined in AWI Qual Stds. Items not specified to be of a specific grade shall be Custom grade. The AWI QS is superseded by all contract document requirements indicated or stated herein.

2.7.2 Countertops

Fabricate with lumber and a core of exterior plywood particleboard, glued and screwed to form an integral unit. Bond laminated plastic under pressure to exposed surfaces, using type of glue recommended by plastic manufacturer , and bond a backing sheet under pressure to underside of



countertop. Appiled back splash shall be not less than 3 1/2 inches nor more than 4 1/2 inches high. Provide solid oak edge band as indicated.

2.7.3 Cabinets

Wall and base cabinets and vanity cabinets shall be of the same construction and appearances. Fabricate with solid ends and frame fronts, or with frames all around. Frames shall be solid hardwood not less than 3/4 by 1 1/2 inches. Ends, bottom, back, partitions, and doors shall be hardwood plywood. Mortise and tenon, dovetail, or dowel and glue joints to produce a rigid unit. Cover exposed edges of plywood with hardwood strips. Doors, frames, and solid exposed ends shall be 3/4 inch thick; bottom, partitions, and framed ends 1/2 inch minimum; shelves 5/8 inch minimum; back 1/4 inch minimum.

2.7.3.1 Cabinet Hardware

BHMA A156.9. Provide hardware for each door, including two self-closing hinges. Provide two side-mounted metal drawer slides for each drawer.

1. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hanrdware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

a. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA A156.18 #630.

2. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9..

2.7.3.2 Finish

Provide a natural factory finish on wood surfaces after fabrication. Finish shall be fabricator's standard natural finish, except that it shall be equivalent to one coat of sealer and one coat of spar varnish on all surfaces and a second coat of spar varnish on surfaces exposed to view. Sand lightly and wipe clean between coats.

2.7.4 Casework With Transparent Finish (CTF)

2.7.4.1 AWI Quality Grade (CTF)

Custom grade.

2.7.4.2 Construction (CTF)

Details shall conform to flush overlay design.

2.7.4.3 Exposed Parts

White oak specie.

2.7.4.4 Semi-Exposed Parts

As specified in the AWI Qual Stds for the grade selected.

2.7.5 Casework With High Pressure Laminate Finish (CHPL)

2.7.5.1 AWI Quality Grade (CHPL)

Custom grade.



2.7.5.2 Construction (CHPL)

Details shall conform to flush overlay design.

2.7.5.3 Exposed Surfaces

High pressure laminate, color and pattern as indicated.

2.7.5.4 Semi-Exposed Surfaces

As specified in the AWI Qual Stds for the grade selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 FINISH WORK

Provide sizes, materials, and designs as indicated and as specified. Apply primer to finish work before installing. Where practicable, shop assemble and finish items of built-up millwork. Joints shall be tight and constructed in a manner to conceal shrinkage. Miter trim and moldings at exterior angles and cope at interior angles and at returns. Material shall show no warp after installation. Install millwork and trim in maximum practical lengths. Fasten finish work with finish nails. Provide blind nailing where practicable. Set face nails for putty stopping.

3.4 SHELVING

One inch nominal thick wood shelf material or 3/4 or 23/32 inch thick plywood shelf material supported substantially with end and intermediate wood supports and arranged to prevent buckling and sagging.



3.4.1 Janitor Room at TOFT

Provide storage rooms with shelves of size and arrangement as indicated by 11 1/4 inches wide, bottom shelf 18 inches above the floor, and intermediate shelves 18 inches apart.

3.4.2 Janitor Closets

Provide two shelves wall mounted 11 1/4 inches deep.

3.5 CLOTHES HANGER RODS

Provide clothes hanger rods where indicated. Set rods parallel with front sockets at each end.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS

3.6.1 Counters

Construct as indicated. Conceal fastenings where practicable, fit counter neatly, install in a rigid and substantial manner, and scribe to adjoining surfaces. Provide counter sections in longest lengths practicable; keep joints in tops to a minimum; and where joints are necessary, provide tight hairline joints drawn up with concealed-type heavy pull-up bolts. Glue joints with water-resistant glue and, in addition, make rigid and substantial with screws, bolts, or other approved fastenings.

3.6.2 Cabinets

Install level, plumb, and tight against adjacent walls. Secure cabinets to walls with concealed toggle bolts, and secure top to cabinet with concealed screws. Make cut-outs for fixtures to templates supplied by fixture manufacturer. Carefully locate cut-outs for pipes so that edges of holes will be covered by escutcheons.

3.7 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items refrenced to this standard.

B. Frameless COncealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches long, 5/16 inches in diameter. BHMA 156.9, B02011.

D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Mortise, BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04091.

E. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2 inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

F. Closet Bar: BHMA A156.16, L03141.

G. Drawer Slides-Self Closing: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

H. Garment Hook: BHMA A156.16, L03121.



I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07621.




SECTION 06 61 16

SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A108.1 (2005) Installation of Ceramic Tile

ANSI Z124.3 (1995) Plastic Lavatories

ANSI Z124.6 (1997) Plastic Sinks


ASTM D 2583 (1995; R 2001e1) Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor

ASTM D 570 (1998) Water Absorption of Plastics

ASTM D 638 (2003) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM D 696 (2003) Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between Minus 30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer

ASTM E 84 (2007) Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM G 21 (1996; R 2002) Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi


NEMA LD 3 (2005) Standard for High-Pressure Decorative Laminates

NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

NSF 51 (2002) Food Equipment Materials

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Work in this section includes window apron and stool utilizing solid polymer (solid surfacing) fabrication as shown on the drawings and as



described in this specification. Do not change source of supply for materials after work has started, if the appearance of finished work would be affected. Variation in component size and location of openings to be plus or minus 1/8 inch.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Solid polymer materialQualifications

Product data indicating product description and compliance with specified performance requirements for solid polymer, joint adhesive, sealants, and heat reflective tape. Both the manufacturer of materials and the fabricator shall submit a detailed description of operations and processes in place that support efficient use of natural resources, energy efficiency, emissions of ozone depleting chemicals, management of water and operational waste, indoor environmental quality, and other production techniques supporting sustainable design and products.

SD-07 Certificates

Fabrications

Solid polymer manufacturer's certification attesting to fabricator qualification approval.


a. Recycled Content LEED: provide cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content precentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content.


1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Materials shall not be delivered to project site until areas are ready for installation. Components and materials shall be delivered to the site undamaged, in containers clearly marked and labeled with manufacturer's name. Materials shall be stored indoors and adequate precautions taken to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Protective coverings shall be provided to prevent physical damage or staining following installation, for duration of project.

1.5 WARRANTY

Manufacturer's warranty of ten years against defects in materials, excluding damages caused by physical or chemical abuse or excessive heat, shall be provided. Warranty shall provide for material and labor for



replacement or repair of defective material for a period of ten years after component installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 MATERIAL

Solid polymer material shall be a homogeneous filled solid polymer; not coated, laminated or of a composite construction; meeting ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.6 requirements. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.01 inch shall be repairable by sanding or polishing. Material thickness shall be as indicated on the drawings. In no case shall material be less than 1/4 inch in thickness.

2.2.1 Cast,100 Percent Acrylic Polymer Solid Surfacing Material

Cast, 100 percent acrylic solid polymer material shall be composed of acrylic polymer, mineral fillers, and pigments and shall meet the following minimum performance requirements:

PROPERTY REQUIREMENT TEST PROCEDURE (min. or max.)

Tensile Strength 5800 psi (min.) ASTM D 638

Hardness 55-Barcol ASTM D 2583 Impressor (min.)

Thermal Expansion .000023 in/in/F (max.) ASTM D 696

Boiling water No Change NEMA LD 3-3.05 Surface Resistance

High Temperature No Change NEMA LD 3-3.06 Resistance

Impact Resistance NEMA LD 3-303 (Ball drop)

1/4" sheet 36", 1/2 lb ball, no failure

1/2" sheet 140", 1/2 lb



PROPERTY REQUIREMENT TEST PROCEDURE (min. or max.) ball, no failure

3/4" sheet 200", 1/2 lb ball, no failure

Mold & Mildew No growth ASTM G 21 Growth

Bacteria Growth No Growth ASTM G 21

Liquid Absorption (Weight in 24 hrs.) 0.1% max. ASTM D 570

Flammability ASTM E 84

Flame Spread 25 max. Smoke Developed 30 max

Sanitation "Food Contact" approval NSF 51

2.2.2 Material Patterns and Colors

Patterns and colors for all solid polymer components and fabrications shall be those indicated on the project drawings . Pattern and color shall occur, and shall be consistent in appearance, throughout the entire depth (thickness) of the solid polymer material.

2.2.3 Surface Finish

Exposed finished surfaces and edges shall receive a uniform appearance. Exposed surface finish shall be matte; gloss rating of 5-20 .

2.3 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS2.3.1 Seam Adhesive

Seam adhesive shall be a two-part adhesive kit to create permanent, inconspicuous, non-porous, hard seams and joints by chemical bond between solid polymer materials and components to create a monolithic appearance of the fabrication. Adhesive shall be approved by the solid polymer manufacturer. Adhesive shall be color-matched to the surfaces being bonded where solid-colored, solid polymer materials are being bonded together. The seam adhesive shall be clear or color matched where particulate patterned, solid polymer materials are being bonded together.

2.3.2 Panel Adhesive

Panel adhesive shall be neoprene based panel adhesive meeting ANSI A108.1, Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed. This adhesive shall be used to bond solid polymer components to adjacent and underlying substrates.

2.3.3 Silicone Sealant

Sealant shall be a mildew-resistant, FDA and UL listed silicone sealant or caulk in a clear formulation. The silicone sealant shall be approved for use by the solid polymer manufacturer. Sealant shall be used to seal all expansion joints between solid polymer components and all joints between solid polymer components and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and plumbing fixtures.



2.4 FABRICATIONS

Components shall be factory or shop fabricated to sizes and shapes indicated, to the greatest extent practical, in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's requirements. Factory cutouts shall be provided for sinks, lavatories, and plumbing fixtures where indicated on the drawings. Contours and radii shall be routed to template, with edges smooth. Defective and inaccurate work will be rejected.

2.4.1 Joints and Seams

Joints and seams shall be formed between solid polymer components using manufacturer's approved seam adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids to create a monolithic appearance.

2.4.2 Edge Finishing

Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform appearance and finish. Edge shapes and treatments, including any inserts, shall be as detailed on the drawings. Rout all cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.

2.4.3 Window Stools

Window stools shall be fabricated from 1/2 inch thick solid surfacing, solid polymer material. Dimensions, edge shape, and other details shall be as indicated on the drawings .

PART 3 EXECUTION




3.2 COORDINATION

In most instances, installation of solid polymer fabricated components and assemblies will require strong, correctly located structural support provided by other trades. To provide a stable, sound, secure installation, close coordination is required between the solid polymer fabricator/installer and other trades to insure that necessary support, proper clearances, and other supporting components are provided for the installation of other solid polymer fabrications to the degree and extent recommended by the solid polymer manufacturer. Contractor shall appropriate staging areas for solid polymer fabrications.



3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Components

All components and fabricated units shall be installed plumb, level, and rigid. Field joints between solid polymer components to provide a monolithic appearance shall be made using solid polymer manufacturer's approved seam adhesives, with joints inconspicuous in the finished work.

3.3.1.1 Window Stools

Installation of window stool components to substrates shall include the use of a neoprene-based panel adhesive. Seam adhesive shall be used to adhere all solid polymer components to each other with the exception of expansion joints and inside corners. All inside corners and expansion joints between solid polymer components shall be joined with silicone sealant. All joints between solid polymer components and non-solid polymer surfaces shall be sealed with a clear silicone sealant.

3.3.2 Silicone Sealant

A clear, silicone sealant or caulk shall be used to seal all expansion joints between solid polymer components and all joints between solid polymer components and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and plumbing fixtures. Sealant bead shall be smooth and uniform in appearance and shall be the minimum size necessary to bridge any gaps between the solid surfacing material and the adjacent surface. Bead shall be continuous and run the entire length of the joint being sealed.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

Components shall be cleaned after installation and covered to protect against damage during completion of the remaining project items. Components damaged after installation by other trades will be repaired or replaced at the General Contractor's cost. Component supplier will provide a repair/replace cost estimate to the General Contractor who shall approve estimate before repairs are made.




SECTION 07 17 00

BENTONITE WATERPROOFING04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM D 1557 (2002e1) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)

ASTM D 217 (2002) Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease

1.2 SUBMITTALS



Application

Protection

Corrections





Do not place bentonite waterproofing materials in flooded areas or during precipitation. Provide bentonite panels and containers with manufacturer's labels intact, identifying the materials. Keep materials dry prior to use with polyethylene or canvas covering for sides and top and chocks or skids underneath, of sufficient height to maintain separation from ground water. Protect materials from moisture. Remove materials which show evidence of damage, deterioration, or contamination.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by aquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.


2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Bulk

Provide high-swelling, sodium bentonite containing a minimum of 90 percent montmorillonite and a maximum of 10 percent unaltered volcanic ash or other native sediments.

2.2.2 Bentonite

Provide material meeting the following requirements:

2.2.2.1 Free Swell Rating

Two grams of granular bentonite sifted into deionized water shall swell to occupy a minimum volume of 16 cubic centimeters.

2.2.2.2 Active Ingredient

Hydrous silicate of alumina, composed of the following chemical percentages and their allowable deviations:

Silica 61.0 +- 3.0Alumina 19.5 +- 1.5Iron oxide 5.0 +- 1.0Magnesia 2.8 +- 0.4Soda and potash oxides 2.4 +- 0.7Calcium oxide 0.6 +- 0.5Molecular water 6.1 +- 0.6Minor 2.6 +- 0.6

2.2.3 Composite HDPE/Bentonite Membrane

A. Composite HDPE/Bentonite-Polymer Membrane: Minimum 200-mil- thick membrane consisting of HDPE geomembrane liner bonded to a layer of bentonite-polymer clay granules.

1. Puncture Resistance: 75lbf according to ASTM D 4833. 2. Vapor Permeance: 0.005 perms according to ASTM E 96.



2.2.4 Bentonite Mineral-Base Jelly

Provide material meeting requirements of ASTM D 217 for a worked penetration range of 215 to 275. Jelly shall contain 45 percent controlled, partially hydrated, high-swelling sodium bentonite by weight with minimum pH. of 8.8, no free water, and 25 percent or more residual swell.

PART 3 EXECUTION




3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

Examine surfaces prior to treatment, eliminating irregularities and removing loose and foreign material.

3.3 APPLICATION

Apply bentonite waterproofing on exterior surfaces of below grade concrete walls and wall footings and under concrete slabs, footings, and where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Securely fasten panels over all construction joints and all expansion joints. Thoroughly pack all through-wall openings and penetrations with bentonite gel or granular bentonite, or both, prior to placement of bentonite panels.

Apply granular bentonite tubes continuously on footing against base of wall to be waterproofed according to the manufacturer's written instuction.

3.4 COMPOSITE HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane with ends and adges lapped a minimum of 3 inches. Stagger end joints between membranes. Seal joints with permanent seam tape.

B. Below Structural Slabs-on-Grade: Apply waterproofing membrane with HDPE side down and staple ends and edges.

1. Install under footings, grade beams, and pile caps; or continue waterproofing through key joints between footings and foundation walls, and extend a minimum of 8 inches up or beyond perimeter slab forms.

2. Protect waterproofing from damage caused by reinforcing bar supports with sharp edges.

C. Slabs: Starting at lowest point, install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane, with ends and edges lapped a minimum of 2 inches.



D. Vertical Concrete or Masonry Walls: Apply mastic around penetrations and form continuous 2-inch cant at intersection of footings and walls with mastic.

1. Starting at lowest point, install a layer of waterproofing membrane horizontally, extending a minimum of 6 inches onto the footing. Lap membrane ends and edges a minimum of 2 inches.

2. Secure membrane to wall with adhesive or washer-headed fasteners, and tape terminiations of membrane at grade.


A. Inspection: Arrange for manufacturer's representative to inspect completed waterproofing installation before covering with other construction and provide written report that installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove and replace applications of bentonite waterproofing where inspection indicates that it does not comply with specified requirements.

B. Perform additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.6 PROTECTION

Provide protection to bentonite during backfilling and compaction as recommended by manufacturer of bentonite materials. If backfill is not immediately applied, protect against precipitation by covering temporarily with polyethylene. Replace damaged areas before and during backfilling and compaction. Compact backfill to at least 85 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.

3.7 CORRECTIONS

Repair leaks and defective areas in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.




SECTION 07 21 13

BOARD INSULATION04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 203 (2005a) Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 272 (2001; R 2007) Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions

ASTM C 578 (2007) Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 612 (2004) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation

ASTM D 1621 (2004a) Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics


ASTM E 96 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Board insulation; G


Block or Board Insulation


a. Recycled Content LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating



materil's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-inducstrial recycled content.



1.3.1 Delivery

Deliver materials to the site in original sealed wrapping bearing manufacturer's name and brand designation, specification number, type, grade, R-value, and class. Store and handle to protect from damage. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, crushed, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storing, and protecting of materials before and during installation.

1.3.2 Storage

Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store out of weather in manufacturer's original packaging. Store only in dry locations, not subject to open flames or sparks, and easily accessible for inspection and handling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by aquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.


2.2 BOARD INSULATION

Provide only thermal insulating materials recommended by manufacturer for type of application indicated. Provide board or block thermal insulation conforming to the following standards and the physical properties listed below:

b. Extruded Preformed Cellular Polystyrene: ASTM C 578 under slab

c. Mineral Fiber Board: ASTM C 612 curtain wall

2.2.1 Thermal Resistance

As indicated .



2.2.2 Fire Protection Requirement

a. Flame spread index of 75 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

b. Smoke developed index of 200 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.2.3 Other Material Properties

Provide thermal insulating materials with the following properties:

a. Rigid cellular plastics: Compressive Resistance at Yield: Not less than 40 pounds per square inch (psi) when measured according to ASTM D 1621.

b. Flexural strength: Not less than 60 psi when measured according to ASTM C 203.

c. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than .08 Perms or less when measured according to ASTM E 96, desiccant method, in the thickness required to provide the specified thermal resistance, including facings, if any.

d. Water Absorption: Not more than .1 percent by total immersion, by volume, when measured according to ASTM C 272.

2.2.4 Prohibited Materials

Do not provide materials containing more than one percent of asbestos.

2.3 PROTECTION BOARD OR COATING

As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

2.4.1 Adhesive

As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.4.2 Mechanical Fasteners

Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Before installing insulation, ensure that all areas that will be in contact with the insulation are dry and free of projections which could cause voids, compressed insulation, or punctured vapor retarders. If installing perimeter or under slab insulation, check that the fill is flat, smooth, dry, and well tamped. If moisture or other conditions are found that do not allow the proper installation of the insulation, do not proceed but notify the Contracting Officer of such conditions.

3.4 INSTALLATION

3.4.1 Insulation Board

Install and handle insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Keep material dry and free of extraneous materials. Observe safe work practices.

3.4.2 Electrical Wiring

Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical wiring between two layers of insulation.

3.4.3 Continuity of Insulation

Butt tightly against adjoining boards and obstructions. Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners and floor. Avoid creating any thermal bridges or voids.

3.5 PERIMETER AND UNDER SLAB INSULATION

Install perimeter thermal insulation where heated spaces are adjacent to exterior walls or slab edges in slab-on-grade or floating-slab construction.

3.5.1 Manufacturer's Instructions

Install, attach, tape edges, provide vapor retarder and other requirements such as protection against vermin, insects, damage during construction as recommended in manufacturer's instructions.

3.5.2 Insulation on Vertical Surfaces

Install thermal insulation as indicated.

3.5.3 Insulation Under Slab

Provide insulation horizontally under slab on grade for a distance of 4



feet from the edge of slab. Install insulation on top of vapor retarder and turn retarder up over the outside edge of insulation to top of slab.

3.5.4 Protection of Insulation

Protect insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during construction and back filling by application of protection board or coating. Do not leave installed vertical insulation unprotected overnight.




SECTION 07 21 16

MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 665 (2006) Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing

ASTM C 930 (2005) Potential Health and Safety Concerns Associated with Thermal Insulation Materials and Accessories

ASTM D 828 (1997; R 2002) Tensile Properties of Paper and Paperboard Using Constant-Rate-of-Elongation Apparatus



ASTM E 136 (2004) Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C


29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection

TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)

TAPPI T803 OM (2006) Puncture Test of Container Board

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Blanket insulationPressure sensitive tape



Accessories


Insulation





1.3.1 Delivery

Deliver materials to site in original sealed wrapping bearing manufacturer's name and brand designation, specification number, type, grade, R-value, and class. Store and handle to protect from damage. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, crushed, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storing, and protecting of materials before and during installation.

1.3.2 Storage

Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store out of weather in manufacturer's original packaging. Store only in dry locations, not subject to open flames or sparks, and easily accessible for inspection and handling.

1.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.4.1 Respirators

Provide installers with dust/mist respirators, training in their use, and protective clothing, all approved by National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)/Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134.

1.4.2 Smoking

Do not smoke during installation of blanket thermal insulation.

1.4.3 Other Safety Concerns

Consider other safety concerns and measures as outlined in ASTM C 930.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Manufacturer's Location for Regionally Manufactured Materials LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured



project products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius.

2.2 BLANKET INSULATION

ASTM C 665, Type I, blankets without membrane coverings and III, blankets with reflective coverings; Class A, membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less, except a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.2.1 Thermal Resistance Value (R-VALUE)

As indicated

2.2.2 Recycled Materials

Provide Thermal Insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided the material meets all other requirements of this section. The minimum required recycled materials content by weight are:

Rock Wool: 75 percent slagFiberglass: 20 to 25 percent glass cullet

2.2.3 Prohibited Materials

Do not provide asbestos-containing materials.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDER

b. Membrane with the following properties:

Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96: 1 permMaximum Flame Spread: ASTM E 84: 25 Combustion Characteristics: Passing ASTM E 136Puncture Resistance: TAPPI T803 OM: 25 Tensile Strength: ASTM D 828: 20

2.4 ACCESSORIES

2.4.1 Adhesive

As recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

2.5 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; cpable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

B. Insulation-Retianing Washers: Self-locking washers formed from



0.016-inch (0.41mm) thich galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.

1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap.

C. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1 inch between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.

D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fastenersm abd substrates.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Before installing insulation, ensure that areas that will be in contact with the insulation are dry and free of projections which could cause voids, compressed insulation, or punctured vapor retarders. If moisture or other conditions are found that do not allow the workmanlike installation of the insulation, do not proceed but notify Contracting Officer of such conditions.

3.4 INSTALLATION

3.4.1 Insulation

Install and handle insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Keep material dry and free of extraneous materials. Ensure personal protective clothing and respiratory equipment is used as



required. Observe safe work practices.

3.4.1.1 Electrical wiring

Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical wiring between two layers of insulation.

3.4.1.2 Continuity of Insulation

Install blanket insulation to butt tightly against adjoining blankets and to studs, and any obstructions. Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners, wall to ceiling joints, roof, and floor. Avoid creating thermal bridges.

3.4.1.3 Insulation without Affixed Vapor Retarder

Provide snug friction fit to hold insulation in place for stud walls and on spindle anchors at roof. Insulation into cracks between studs and other framing.

3.4.1.4 Sizing of Blankets

Provide only full width blankets when insulating between trusses, joists, or studs. Size width of blankets for a snug fit where trusses, joists or studs are irregularly spaced.

3.4.1.5 Insulation on Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Insulation Anchors

As follows:

A. Fasten insulation anchors to substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation and manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

B. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation.

C. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

D. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.




SECTION 07 22 00

ROOF AND DECK INSULATION01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 1177/C 1177M (2006) Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing

ASTM C 1289 (2007) Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board


FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM AS 4470 (1986; R 1992) Class I Roof Covers

FM P7825 (2005) Approval Guide

FM P7825c (2005) Approval Guide Building Materials

FM P9513 (2002) Specialist Data Book Set for Roofing Contractors; contains 1-22 (2001), 1-28 (2002), 1-29 (2002), 1-28R/1-29R (1998), 1-30 (2000), 1-31 (2000), 1-32 (2000), 1-33 (2000), 1-34 (2001), 1-49 (2000), 1-52 (2000), 1-54 (2001)

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL Bld Mat Dir (2007) Building Materials Directory

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Taper cants and crickets

.



SD-03 Product Data

Fasteners

Insulation; G

Include minimum thickness of insulation for steel decks and fastener pattern for insulation on steel decks.

SD-06 Test Reports

Flame spread and smoke developed ratings

Submit in accordance with ASTM E 84.


Nails and fasteners

Roof insulation, including field of roof and perimeter attachment requirements.

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE

Submit certificate from the insulation manufacturer attesting that the installer has the proper qualifications for installing tapered roof insulation systems.

Certificate attesting that the expanded perlite or polyisocyanurate insulation contains recovered material and showing estimated percent of recovered material. Certificates of compliance for felt materials.


1.4.1 Insulation on Steel Decks

Roof insulation shall have a flame spread rating not greater than 75 and a smoke developed rating not greater than 150, exclusive of covering, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Insulation bearing the UL label and listed in the UL Bld Mat Dir as meeting the flame spread and smoke developed ratings will be accepted in lieu of copies of test reports. Compliance with flame spread and smoke developed ratings will not be required when insulation has been tested as part of a roof construction assembly of the type used for this project and the construction is listed as fire-classified in the UL Bld Mat Dir or listed as Class I roof deck construction in the FM P7825. Insulation tested as part of a roof construction assembly shall bear UL or FM labels attesting to the ratings specified herein.



b. Regional Materials LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating



location of final manufacturer's origin for all products and materials from within 500 mile radius.


1.5.1 Delivery

Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's unopened and undamaged standard commercial containers bearing the following legible information:

a. Name of manufacturer;

b. Brand designation;

c. Specification number, type, and class, as applicable, where materials are covered by a referenced specification; and

Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of the work.

1.5.2 Storage and Handling

Store and handle materials in a manner to protect from damage, exposure to open flame or other ignition sources, and from wetting, condensation or moisture absorption. Store in an enclosed building or trailer that provides a dry, adequately ventilated environment. Replace damaged material with new material.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Do not install roof insulation during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F and interior humidity is 45 percent or greater, or when there is visible ice, frost, or moisture on the roof deck.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 INSULATION

2.2.1 Insulation Types

Roof insulation shall be of the following materials and compatible with attachment methods for the specified insulation and roof membrane:

b. Polyisocyanurate Board: ASTM C 1289 Type II, fibrous felt or glass mat membrane both sides, except minimum compressive strength shall be 20 pounds per square inch (psi).



2.2.2 Recovered Materials

Provide thermal insulation materials containing recycled materials to the extent practical. The required minimum recycled material content for the listed materials are:

Polyisocyanurate: 9 percent recovered material

2.2.3 Insulation Thickness

As necessary to provide a thermal resistance (R value) as indicated. Thickness shall be based on the "R" value for aged insulation. Insulation over steel decks shall satisfy both specified R value and minimum thickness for width of rib opening recommended in insulation manufacturer's published literature.

2.2.4 Cants and Tapered Edge Strips

Provide preformed cants and tapered edge strips of the same material as the roof insulation; unless otherwise indicated. Face of cant strips shall have incline of 45 degrees and vertical height of 4 inches. Taper edge strips at a rate of one to 1 1/2 inch per foot down to approximately 1/8 inch thick.

2.3 PROTECTION BOARD

For use as a protection board for hot-mopped, torched-down, or adhesively-applied roofing membrane over roof insulation.

2.3.1 Glass Mat Gypsum Roof Board

ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, 0 Flame Spread and 0 Smoke Developed when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, 500 psi, Class A, non-combustible, 1/2 inch thick, 4 by 8 feet board size.

2.4 MOISTURE CONTROL

2.5 FASTENERS

Flush-driven through flat round or hexagonal steel or plastic plates. Steel plates shall be zinc-coated, flat round not less than 1 3/8 inch diameter or hexagonal not less than 28 gage. Plastic plates shall be high-density, molded thermoplastic with smooth top surface, reinforcing ribs and not less than 3 inches in diameter. Fastener head shall recess fully into the plastic plate after it is driven. Plates shall be formed to prevent dishing. Do not use bell-or cup-shaped plates. Fasteners shall conform to insulation manufacturer's recommendations except that holding power, when driven, shall be not less than 120 pounds each in steel deck. Fasteners for steel decks shall conform to FM P7825c for Class I roof deck construction, and shall be spaced to withstand an uplift pressure of 108 pounds per square foot and conforming to the International Building Code, 2006 Edition..

2.5.1 Fasteners for Steel Decks

Approved hardened penetrating fasteners or screws conforming to FM AS 4470



and listed in FM P7825c for Class I roof deck construction. Quantity and placement to withstand a minimum uplift pressure of 108 psf and conforming to the International Building Code, 2006 Edition..

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

3.3.1 Surface Inspection

Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, and dry. Check roof deck surfaces, including surfaces sloped to roof drains and outlets, for defects before starting work.

The Contractor shall inspect and approve the surfaces immediately before starting installation. Prior to installing insulation, perform the following:

b. Examine steel decks to ensure that panels are properly secured to structural members and to each other and that surfaces of top flanges are flat or slightly convex.

3.3.2 Surface Preparation

Correct defects and inaccuracies in roof deck surface to eliminate poor drainage and hollow or low spots and perform the following:

a. Install wood nailers the same thickness as insulation at eaves, edges, curbs, walls, and roof openings for securing cant strips, gravel stops, gutters, and flashing flanges.



d. Cover steel decks with a layer of insulation board of sufficient thickness to span the width of a deck rib opening, and conforming to fire safety requirements. Secure with piercing or self-drilling, self-tapping fasteners of quantity and placement conforming to FM P7825. Insulation joints parallel to ribs of deck shall occur on solid bearing surfaces only, not over open ribs.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

Apply insulation in two layers with staggered joints when total required thickness of insulation exceeds 1/2 inch. Lay insulation so that continuous longitudinal joints are perpendicular to direction of felts for the roofing, and end joints of each course are staggered with those of adjoining courses. When using multiple layers of insulation, joints of each succeeding layer shall be parallel and offset in both directions with respect to layer below. Keep insulation 1/2 inch clear of vertical surfaces penetrating and projecting from roof surface.

3.4.1 Installation Using Only Mechanical Fasteners

Secure total thickness of insulation with penetrating type fasteners.

3.4.2 Special Precautions for Installation of Foam Insulation

3.4.2.1 Polyisocyanurate Insulation

Where polyisocyanurate foam board insulation is provided, install 1/2 inch glass mat gypsum roof board over top surface of foam board insulation. Stagger joints of insulation with respect to foam board insulation below.

3.4.3 Cant Strips

Where indicated, provide cant strips at intersections of roof with walls, parapets, and curbs extending above roof. Fit cant strips flush against vertical surfaces. Where possible, nail cant strips to adjoining surfaces. Where cant strips are installed against non-nailable materials, install in an approved adhesive.

3.4.4 Tapered Edge Strips

Where indicated, provide edge strips in the right angle formed by junction of roof and wood nailing strips that extend above level of roof. Install edge strips flush against vertical surfaces of wood nailing strips. Where possible, nail edge strips to adjoining surfaces. Where installed against non-nailable materials, install in an approved adhesive.

3.5 PROTECTION

3.5.1 Protection of Applied Insulation

Completely cover each day's installation of insulation with the finished roofing specified in 07 52 00, "MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING" on same day. Do not permit phased construction. Protect open spaces between insulation and parapets or other walls and spaces at curbs, scuttles, and expansion joints, until permanent roofing and flashing are applied. Do not permit storing, walking, wheeling, or trucking directly on insulation or on roofed surfaces. Provide smooth, clean board or plank



walkways, runways, and platforms near supports, as necessary, to distribute weight to conform to indicated live load limits of roof construction . Exposed edges of the insulation shall be protected by cutoffs at the end of each work day or whenever precipitation is imminent. Cutoffs shall be 2 layers of bituminous-saturated felt set in plastic bituminous cement or single ply set in roof cement. Fill all profile voids in cut-offs to prevent entrapping of moisture into the area below the membrane. Cutoffs shall be removed when work is resumed.

3.5.2 Damaged Work and Materials

Restore work and materials that become damaged during construction to original condition or replace with new materials.

3.6 INSPECTION

The Contractor shall establish and maintain an inspection procedure to assure compliance of the installed roof insulation with the contract requirements. Any work found not to be in compliance with the contract shall be promptly removed and replaced or corrected in an approved manner. Quality control shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of insulation workers; start and end time of work.

b. Verification of certification, listing or label compliance with FM P9513.

c. Verification of proper storage and handling of insulation and vapor retarder materials before, during, and after installation.

d. Inspection of mechanical fasteners; type, number, length, and spacing.

e. Coordination with other materials, cants, and nailing strips.

f. Inspection of insulation joint orientation and laps between layers, joint width and bearing of edges of insulation on deck.

hg. Installation of cutoffs and proper joining of work on subsequent days.

h. Continuation of complete roofing system installation to cover insulation installed same day.




SECTION 07 24 00

EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM B 117 (2007) Standing Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM C 1177/C 1177M (2006) Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing


ASTM C 578 (2007) Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 67 (2007) Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile


ASTM C 1278/C 1278M (2003) Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel

ASTM D 2247 (2002) Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity

ASTM D 3273 (2000) Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber

ASTM D 968 (2005e1) Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive

ASTM E 2098 (2000) Determining Tensile Breaking Strength of Glass Fiber Reinforcing Mesh for Use in Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) after Exposure to a Sodium Hydroxide Solution

ASTM E 330 (2002) Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

ASTM E 331 (2000) Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain



Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference


ASTM G 153 (2004) Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

EIFS INDUSTRY MEMBERS ASSOCIATION (EIMA)

EIMA TM 101.01 (1995) Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB

EIMA TM 101.86 (1995) Resistance of Exterior Insulation Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB to The Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)


NFPA 268 (2001)Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS

The exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) shall be a job-fabricated exterior wall covering consisting of sheathing, insulation board, reinforcing fabric, base coat, finish coat, adhesive and mechanical fasteners as applicable. The system components shall be compatible with each other and with the substrate as recommended or approved by, and the products of, a single manufacturer regularly engaged in furnishing Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems. All materials shall be installed by an applicator approved by the system manufacturer. EIFS shall be Class PB and shall be off white color and sand finish.

1.2.1 System Requirements and Tests

The system shall meet the performance requirements as verified by the tests listed below. Where a wall system of similar type, size, and design as specified for this project has been previously tested under the condition specified herein, the resulting test reports may be submitted in lieu of job specific tests.

1.2.1.1 Water Penetration

Test the system for water penetration by uniform static air pressure in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no penetration of water beyond the plane of the base coat/EPS board interface after 15 minutes at 6.4 psf), or 20% of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater.

1.2.1.2 Wind Load

Test the system for wind load by uniform static air pressure in accordance with ASTM E 330 (procedure A) and the International Building Code. There shall be no permanent deformation, delamination, or other deterioration.



1.2.2 Component Requirements and Tests

The components of the system shall meet the performance requirements as verified by the tests listed below.

1.2.2.1 Surface Burning Characteristics

Conduct ASTM E 84 test on samples consisting of base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat. Cure for 28 days. The flame spread index shall be 25 or less and the smoke developed index shall be 450 or less.

1.2.2.2 Radiant Heat

The system shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 268 on both the minimum and maximum thickness of insulation intended for use with no ignition during the 20-minute period.

1.2.2.3 Impact Resistance

a. Class PB Systems: Hemispherical Head Test; 28 day cured specimen of PB EIFS in accordance with EIMA TM 101.86. The test specimen shall exhibit no broken reinforcing fabric per EIMA TM 101.86 at an impact of 90 to 150 in/lb.

1.2.3 Sub-Component Requirements and Tests

Unless otherwise stated, the test specimen shall consist of reinforcing mesh, base coat, and finish coat applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations to the insulation board to be used on the building. For mildew resistance, only the finish coat is applied onto glass slides for testing. These specimen shall be suitably sized for the apparatus used and be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days prior to testing.

1.2.3.1 Abrasion Resistance

Test in accordance with ASTM D 968, Method A. Test a minimum of two specimens. After testing, the specimens shall show only very slight smoothing, with no loss of film integrity after (132 gallons) of sand.

1.2.3.2 Accelerated Weathering

Test in accordance with ASTM G 153, Cycle 1. After 2000 hours specimens shall exhibit no visible cracking, flaking, peeling, blistering, yellowing, fading, or other such deterioration.

1.2.3.3 Mildew Resistance

Test in accordance with ASTM D 3273. The specimen shall consist of the finish coat material, applied to clean (3 inch by 4 inch) glass slides and shall be allowed to cure for 28 days. After 28 days of exposure, the specimen shall not show any growth.

1.2.3.4 Salt Spray Resistance

Test in accordance with ASTM B 117. The specimen shall be a minimum of (4 inch by 6 inch) and shall be tested for a minimum of 300 hours. After



exposure, the specimen shall exhibit no observable deterioration, such as chalking, fading, or rust staining.

1.2.3.5 Water Resistance

Test in accordance with ASTM D 2247. The specimen shall be a minimum of (4 inch by 6 inch). After 14 days, the specimen shall exhibit no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling, or delamination.

1.2.3.6 Absorption-Freeze/Thaw

Class PB systems shall be tested in accordance with EIMA TM 101.01 for 60 cycles of freezing and thawing. No cracking, checking, or splitting, and negligible weight gain. Class PM systems shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 67 for 50 cycles of freezing and thawing. After testing, the specimens shall exhibit no cracking or checking and have negligible weight gain.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop drawings; G

SD-03 Product Data

Sheathing board

Adhesive

Accessories

Base coat

Portland cement

Reinforcing fabric

Finish coat

Joint Sealant

Sealant Primer

Bond breaker

Backer Rod

Insulation Board

Warranty

Include joint and other details, such as end conditions, corners, windows, and parapet. Include shelf life and recommended



cleaning solvents in data for sealants. Include material safety data sheets (MSDS)for all components of the EIFS. The MSDS shall be available at the job site.

SD-06 Test Reports

Abrasion resistance

Accelerated weathering

Impact resistance

Mildew resistance

Salt spray resistance

Absorption-freeze-thaw

Surface Burning Characteristics

Radiant heat

substrate

Wind load

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications of EIFS Manufacturer

Qualification of EIFS Installer


Installation

Manufacturer's standard printed instructions for the installation of the EIFS. Include requirements for condition and preparation of substrate, installation of EIFS, and requirements for sealants and sealing.


EIFS

Include detailed finish repair procedures and information regarding compatibility of sealants with base and finish coatings.







1.4.1 Qualifications of EIFS Manufacturer

The EIFS shall be the product of a manufacturer who has been in the practice of manufacturing and designing EIFS for a period of not less than 3 years, and has been involved in at least five projects similar to this project in size, scope, and complexity, in the same or a similar climate as this project.

1.4.2 Qualification of EIFS Installer

The EIFS Installer shall be trained by the EIFS manufacturer to perform the installation of the System and shall have successfully installed at least five projects at or near the size and complexity of this project. The contractor shall employ qualified workers trained and experienced in installing the manufacturer's EIFS.

1.4.3 Qualification of Sealant Applicator

The sealant applicator shall be experienced and competent in the installation of high performance industrial and commercial sealants and shall have successfully installed at least five projects at or near the size and complexity of this project.

1.4.4 Qualifications of Third Party Inspector

Submit evidence that third party inspector has current certification from the Exterior Design Institute or equal inspector certification as inspector for the installation of EIFS.


Insulation Board shall be approved and labeled under third party quality program as required by applicable building code.


Deliver materials to job site in original unopened packages, marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, and description of contents. Store materials off the ground and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations in a clean, dry, well-ventilated area. Protect stored materials from rain, sunlight, and excessive heat. Keep coating materials which would be damaged by freezing at a temperature not less than 40 degrees F. Do not expose insulation board to flame or other ignition sources.


a. Do not prepare materials or apply EIFS during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is provided. Protect installed materials from inclement weather until they are dry.

b. Apply sealants and wet materials only at ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F or above and rising, unless supplemental heat is provided. The system shall be protected from inclement weather and to maintain this temperature for a minimum of 24 hours after installation.



c. Do not leave insulation board exposed to sunlight after installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

Furnish manufacturer's standard warranty for the EIFS. Warranty shall run directly to Government and cover a period of not less than 5 years from date Government accepted the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 COMPATIBILITY

Provide all materials compatible with each other and with the substrate, and as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

2.3 SHEATHING BOARD

2.3.1 Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board

a. Conform to ASTM C 1177/C 1177M; or

b. ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, Water Resistant Exterior Type only

2.4 ADHESIVE

Manufacturer's standard product, including primer as required, and shall be compatible with substrate and insulation board to which the system is applied.

2.5 INSULATION BOARD

2.5.1 Manufacturer's Recommendations

Provide only insulation recommended by the EIFS manufacturer for the type of application intended.


Insulation board shall be standard product of manufacturer and shall be compatible with other systems components. Boards shall be factory marked individually with the manufacturer's name or trade mark, the material specification number, the R-value at 75 degree F, and thickness.



Insulation Board shall be certified as aged, in block form, prior to cutting and shipping, a minimum of 6 weeks by air drying, or equivalent.

a. Insulating material: ASTM C 578 Type I as recommended by the EIFS manufacturer and treated to be compatible with other EIFS components. Age insulation by air drying a minimum of 6 weeks prior to cutting and shipping.

2.6 BASE COAT

Manufacturer's standard product and compatible with other systems components.

2.7 PORTLAND CEMENT

Conform to ASTM C 150, Type I or II as required, fresh and free of lumps, and approved by the systems manufacturer.

2.8 REINFORCING FABRIC

Reinforcing fabric mesh shall be alkali-resistant, balanced, open weave, glass fiber fabric made from twisted multi-end strands specifically treated for compatibility with the other system materials, and comply with ASTM E 2098 and as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

2.9 FINISH COAT

Manufacturer's standard product conforming to the requirements in the paragraph on Sub-Component Requirements and Tests. For color consistency, use materials from the same batch or lot number.

2.10 SEALANT PRIMER

Non-staining, quick-drying type recommended by sealant manufacturer and EIFS manufacturer.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

Conform to recommendations of EIFS manufacturer, including trim, edging, anchors, expansion joints. All metal items and fasteners to be corrosion resistant.

2.12 JOINT SEALANT

Non-staining, quick-drying type meeting ASTM C 920, as Type S or M, minimum Grade NS, minimum Class 25 and compatible with the finish system type and grade, and recommended by both the sealant manufacturer and EIFS manufacturer.

2.13 BOND BREAKER

As required by EIFS manufacturer and recommended by sealant manufacturer and EIFS manufacturer.

2.14 BACKER ROD

Closed cell polyethylene free from oil or other staining elements and as recommended by sealant manufacturer and EIFS manufacturer. Do not use absorptive materials as backer rod. The backer rod should be sized 25



percent larger than the width of the joint.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 EXAMINATION

Examine substrate and existing conditions to determine that the EIFS can be installed as required by the EIFS manufacturer and that all work related to the EIFS is properly coordinated. Surface shall be sound and free of oil, loose materials or protrusions which will interfere with the system installation. If deficiencies are found, notify the Contracting Officer and do not proceed with installation until the deficiencies are corrected. The substrate shall be plane, with no deviation greater than (1/4 inch) when tested with a (10 foot) straightedge. Determine flatness, plumbness, and any other conditions for conformance to manufacturer's instructions.


Prepare existing surfaces for application of the EIFS to meet flatness tolerances and surface preparation according to manufacturer's installation instructions but provide a flatness of not more that 1/4 inch in 10 feet. Provide clean surfaces free of oil and loose material without protrusions adversely affecting the installation of the insulation board. For adhesively attached EIFS, existing deteriorated paint must be removed. Due to substrate conditions or as recommended by the system manufacturer, a primer may be required. Apply the primer to existing surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. Use masking tape to protect areas adjacent to the EIFS to prevent base or finish coat to be applied to areas not intended to be covered with the EIFS. The contractor shall not proceed with the installation until all noted deficiencies of the substrate are corrected.

3.5 INSTALLATION

Install EIFS as indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions except



as otherwise specified, and in accordance with the shop drawings. EIFS shall be installed only by an applicator trained by the EIFS manufacturer. Specifically, include all manufacturer recommended provisions regarding flashing and treatment of wall penetrations.

3.5.1 Sheathing Board

Edges and ends of boards shall be butted snugly with vertical joints staggered to provide full and even support for the insulation. Do not align sheathing board joints with wall openings. Provide support at both vertical and horizontal joints. Attach sheathing board to metal studs with self-tapping drywall screws. Place fasteners sufficiently close to support imposed loads, but not more than:

a. Maximum of (8 inches) apart on each supporting stud

Space fasteners more closely when required for negative wind load resistance.


Unless otherwise specified by the system manufacturer, place the long edge horizontally from level base line. Stagger vertical joints and interlock at corners. Butt joints tightly. Provide flush surfaces at joints. Offset insulation board joints from joints in sheathing by at least (8 inches). Joints of insulation shall be butted tightly. Surfaces of adjacent insulation boards shall be flush at joints. Gaps greater than (1/16 inch) between the insulation boards shall be filled with slivers of insulation. Uneven board surfaces with irregularities projecting more than (1/16 inch) shall be rasped in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to produce an even surface. Attach insulation board as recommended by manufacturer. The adhered insulation board shall be allowed to remain undisturbed for 24 hours prior to proceeding with the installation of the base coat/reinforcing mesh, or longer if necessary for the adhesive to dry. However, do not leave insulation board exposed longer than recommended by insulation manufacturer.

3.5.3 Base Coat and Reinforcing Fabric Mesh,

3.5.3.1 Class PB Systems

Allow the adhered insulation board to dry for 24 hours, or longer if necessary, prior to proceeding with the installation of the base coat/reinforcing fabric mesh. Install reinforcing fabric in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Mix base coat in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and apply to insulated wall surfaces to the thickness specified by the system manufacturer and provide any other reinforcement recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Trowel the reinforcing fabric mesh into the wet base coat material. Fully embed the mesh in the base coat. When properly worked-in, the pattern of the reinforcing fabric mesh shall not be visible. Provide diagonal reinforcement at opening corners. Back-wrap or edge wrap all terminations of the EIFS. Overlap the reinforcing fabric mesh a minimum of 2.5 inches on previously installed mesh, or butted, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.5.4 Finish Coat

The base coat/reinforcing mesh must be allowed to dry a minimum of 24 hours prior to application of the finish coat. Surface irregularities in the



base coat, such as trowel marks, board lines, reinforcing mesh laps, etc., shall be corrected prior to the application of the finish coat. Apply and level finish coat in one operation. Obtain final texture by trowels, floats, or by spray application as necessary to achieve the required finish. Apply the finish coat to the dry base coat maintaining a wet edge at all times to obtain a uniform appearance. The thickness of the finish coat shall be in accordance with the system manufacturer’s current published instructions. Apply finish coat so that it does not cover surfaces to which joint sealants are to be applied.

3.6 JOINT SEALING

Seal EIFS at openings as recommended by the system manufacturer. Apply sealant only to the base coat or base coat with EIFS Manufacturer's color coating. Do not apply sealant to the finish coat.

3.6.1 Surface Preparation, Backer Rod, and Primer

Immediately prior to application, remove loose matter from joint. Ensure that joint is dry and free of finish coat, or other foreign matter. Install backer rod. Apply primer as required by sealant and EIFS manufacturer. Check that joint width is as shown on drawings but in no case shall it be less than 0.5 inch for perimeter seals and 0.75 inch for expansion joints. The width shall not be less than 4 times the anticipated movement. Check sealant manufacturer's recommendations regarding proper width to depth ratio.

3.6.2 Sealant

Do not apply sealant until all EIFS coatings are fully dry. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions with gun having nozzle that fits joint width. Do not use sealant that has exceeded shelf life or can not be discharged in a continuous flow. Completely fill the joint solidly with sealant without air pockets so that full contact is made with both sides of the joint. Tool sealant with a round instrument that provides a concave profile and a uniformly smooth and wrinkle free sealant surface. Do not wet tool the joint with soap, water, or any other liquid tooling aid. During inclement weather, protect the joints until sealant application. Use particular caution in sealing joints between window and door frames and the EIFS wall and at all other wall penetrations. Clean all surfaces to remove excess sealant.




SECTION 07 41 63

FABRICATED ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES01/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

AA ADM1 (2005; Errata 2005) Aluminum Design Manual



AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

ASCE 7 (2005; Supp 1) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures







ASTM A 792/A 792M (2006a) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process


ASTM B 209 (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum



and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM B 209M (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric)

ASTM B 659 (1990; R 2003) Standard Guide for Measuring Thickness of Metallic and Inorganic Coatings


ASTM D 1056 (2007) Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber

ASTM D 1308 (2002; R 2007) Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes

ASTM D 1667 (2005) Flexible Cellular Materials - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell)

ASTM D 2244 (2007) Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates


ASTM D 2794 (1993; R 2004) Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)

ASTM D 333 (2001; R 2007) Standard Guide for Clear and Pigmented Lacquers

ASTM D 3363 (2005) Film Hardness by Pencil Test

ASTM D 4214 (2007) Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films

ASTM D 522 (1993a; R 2001) Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings

ASTM D 523 (1989; R 1999) Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss

ASTM D 714 (2002e1) Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints

ASTM D 822 (2001; R 2006) Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings




ASTM E 1592 (2005) Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

ASTM E 2140 (2001) Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Metal Roof Panel Systems by Static Water Pressure Head

ASTM G 23 (1996) Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM 4471 (1995) Class I Panel Roofs

METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)

MBMA RSDM (2000) Metal Roofing Systems Design Manual

NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)

NRCA 0405 (2001; R 2003, 5th Ed) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual

NRCA ASMMRM (2006) Architectural Sheet Metal and Metal Roofing Manual

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (SMACNA)

SMACNA 1793 (2006) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sixth Edition, Second Printing


SSPC Paint 12 (1982; E 2000) Paint Specification No. 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film)

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

MIL-P-28578 (Rev B; CANC Notice 1) Paint, Water-Borne, Acrylic or Modified Acrylic, Semi-Gloss, for Metal Surfaces


UL 580 (2006) Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

a. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.

b. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide roof panel assemblies that comply with the requirements of the roof systems and attachments in accordance with ASTM E 1592 and UL 580. Uplifting force due to



wind action governs the design for panels.

Roof systems and attachments are to resist the wind loads as determined by ASCE 7 in pounds per square foot.

c. FMG Listing: Provide FRP roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FMG "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.

d. Structural Performance: Provide roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Fabricated Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof and liner panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories shop fabricated or field assembled for a complete weather-tight roofing system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Roofing Panels; GFlashing and Accessories; G

SD-03 Product Data

Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:

Coil Stock; GFactory Color Finish; G

Closure Materials; G

Pressure Sensitive Tape; GSealants; G

Accessories; G

SD-05 Design Data

As applicable submit the following:



Wind design analysis; GSD-06 Test Reports

Submit test reports; G for the following in accordance with the requirements in this section.

Leakage Tests; G

Wind Uplift Test Report; G


Installation of Roof panel assemblies; G


Warranty; GInformation Form and Placard; GManufacturer's field inspection reports; GInstructions; G To:

Submit 20 year "No-Dollar-Limit" warranty for labor and materials; G.






within 500 mile radius.


Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed; package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling.

Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weather-tight and ventilated covering; store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 WARRANTY

Furnish the metal roof panel manufacturer's 20-year no dollar limit roof system materials and installation workmanship warranty, including flashing, components, trim, and accessories necessary for a watertight roof system construction. Make warranty directly to the Government, commencing at time of Government's acceptance of the roof work. The warranty must state that:

a. if within the warranty period, the metal roof system, as installed for its intended use in the normal climatic and environmental conditions of the facility, becomes non-watertight, shows evidence of moisture intrusion within the assembly, displaces, corrodes, perforates, separates at the seams, or shows evidence of excessive weathering due to defective materials or installation workmanship, the repair or replacement of the defective and damaged materials of the metal roof system and correction of defective workmanship is the responsibility of the metal roof panel manufacturer. All costs associated with the repair or replacement work are the responsibility of the metal roof panel manufacturer. Galvanized repairs must conform to ASTM A 780.

b. if the manufacturer or his approved applicator fail to perform the repairs within 48 hours of notification, emergency temporary repairs performed by others does not void the warranty.



1.7.1 Manufacturer's Finish Warranty

Provide a manufacturer's 20 year "No-Dollar-Limit" warranty for labor and materials for the roofing system. Issue the warranty directly to the Government at the date of Government acceptance.warranting that the factory color finish, under normal atmospheric conditions at the site, will not crack, peel, or delaminate; chalk in excess of a numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4214; or fade or change colors in excess of 5 NBS units as measured in accordance with ASTM D 2244.

1.7.2 Metal Roof System Installer Warranty

Provide roof system installer warranty for a period of not less than two years that the roof system, as installed, is free from defects in installation workmanship, to include the roof panel installation, flashing, accessories, attachments, and sheet metal installation integral to a complete watertight roof system assembly. Issue warranty directly to the Government. Correction of defective workmanship and replacement of damaged or affected materials is the responsibility of the metal roof system installer. All costs associated with the repair or replacement work are the responsibility of the installer.

1.7.3 Continuance of Warranty

Repair or replacement work that becomes necessary within the warranty period must be approved, as required, and accomplished in a manner so as to restore the integrity of the roof system assembly and validity of the metal roof system manufacturer warranty for the remainder of the manufacturer warranty period.

1.8 CONFORMANCE AND COMPATIBILITY

The entire metal roofing and flashing system must be in accordance with specified and indicated requirements, including wind resistance requirements. Work not specifically addressed and any deviation from specified requirements must be in general accordance with recommendations of the MBMA RSDM, NRCA 0405, the metal panel manufacturer's published recommendations and details, and compatible with surrounding components and construction. Submit any deviation from specified or indicated requirements to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to installation.

1.9 SCHEDULE

Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical conversion of English unit measurements, and not on metric measurement commonly agreed to by the manufacturers or other parties. The English and metric units for the measurements shown are as follows:

PRODUCTS ENGLISH UNITS

a. Sheet Aluminum 0.040 inch

b. Panels 12 inches - vertical legs 2 inches - stiffening ribs 4 inches

c. Screws No. 14 No. 12



PRODUCTS ENGLISH UNITS

d. Bolts 1/4 inch

e. Studs 3/16 inch

f. Fasteners 1/2 inch One inch

g. Rivets 1/16 inch 1/8 inch

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

2.2.1 Aluminum Sheet

Roll-form aluminum roof panels to the specified profile, with fy = ksi, minimum.040 inch thickness and depth as indicated. Material must be plumb and true, and within the tolerances listed:

a. Aluminum Sheet conforming to ASTM B 209, ASTM B 209M, and AA ADM1.

b. Individual panels to have continuous length to cover the entire length of any unbroken roof slope with no joints or seams and formed without warping, waviness, or ripples that are not part of the panel profile and free of damage to the finish coating system.

c. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with the type of system specified.

(9) Profile to be a minimum 2-1/2 inch high standing seam, 16 inch coverage, with mechanical crimping or snap-together seams with concealed clips and fasteners.

(10) Smooth, flat Surface Texture.

2.2.2 Steel Sheet

Roll-form steel roof panels to the specified profile, minimum 20 gauge and



depth as indicated, conforming to ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, ASTM A 36/A 36M. Material must be plumb and true, and within the tolerances listed:

a. Galvanized/Galvannealed Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 792/A 792M, and AISI SG03-3.

b. Individual panels to have continuous length to cover the entire length of any unbroken roof slope with no joints or seams and formed without warping, waviness, or ripples that are not part of the panel profile and free of damage to the finish coating system.

c. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with the type of system specified.

(8) Profile to be a minimum 2-1/2 inch high standing seam, with mechanical crimping or snap-together seams with concealed clips and fasteners.

(9) Smooth, flat Surface Texture.

2.2.3 Finish

FACTOR COLOR FINISH

Panels shall have a factory applied polyvinylidene flouride (PVDF) finish on the exposed side. The exterior finish shall consist of a baked-on finish coat with an appropriate prime coat. Total color coating system thickness shall be not less than 1.3 mil and with any additional primer and finish coat thickness required to meet the color finish performance requirements specified. The interior coating shall be a thickness consisting of a topcoat of not less than 0.3 mil dry film thichness and the paint manufacturer's recommend primer of not less than 0.3 mil thickness.

f. Physical Properties: Coating must conform to the industry and manufacturer s standard performance criteria as listed by the following certified test reports:

Chalking: ASTM D 333Coating Thickness: ASTM B 659Color Change and Conformity: ASTM D 2244Weatherometer: ASTM G 23 and ASTM D 822Humidity: ASTM D 2247 and ASTM D 714Salt Spray: ASTM B 117Chemical Pollution: ASTM D 1308Gloss at 60: ASTM D 523Pencil Hardness: ASTM D 3363Reverse Impact: ASTM D 2794Flexibility: ASTM D 522Abrasion: ASTM D 968

2.3 FASTENERS

2.3.1 General

Type, material, corrosion resistance, size and sufficient length to



penetrate the supporting member a minimum of 1 inch with other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates in accordance with the roof panel manufacturer's and ASCE 7 requirements.

2.3.2 Exposed Fasteners

Fasteners for roof panels to be corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum, stainless steel, color matched and with the sheet panel or flashing and of a type and size recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements and design loads. Fasteners for accessories to be the manufacturer's standard. Provide an integral metal washer matching the color of attached material with compressible sealing EPDM gasket approximately 3/32 inch thick.

2.3.3 Screws

Screws to be corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum and/or stainless steel being the type and size recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements.

2.3.4 Rivets

Rivets to be closed-end type, corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum or stainless steel where watertight connections are required.

2.3.5 Attachment Clips

Fabricate clips from steel hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M Z275 G 90 or Series 300 stainless steel. Size, shape, thickness and capacity as required meeting the insulation thickness and design load criteria specified.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

2.4.1 General

All accessories to be compatible with the metal roof panels. Sheet metal flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps and similar metal accessories must not be less than the minimum thickness specified for the roof panels. Exposed metal accessories/finishes to match the panels furnished, except as otherwise indicated. Molded foam rib, ridge and other closure strips to be non-absorbent closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or pre-molded neoprene to match configuration of the panels.

2.4.2 Rubber Closure Strips

Closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056 and ASTM D 1667; extruded or molded to the configuration of the specified roof panel and in lengths supplied by the roof panel manufacturer.

2.4.3 Metal Closure Strips

Factory fabricated aluminum or steel closure strips to be the same gauge thickness, color, finish and profile of the specified roof panel.



2.4.4 Joint Sealants

2.4.4.1 Sealants

Sealants are to be an approved gun type for use in hand- or air-pressure calking guns at temperatures above 40 degrees F (or frost-free application at temperatures above 10 degrees F with minimum solid content of 85 percent of the total volume. Sealant is to dry with a tough, durable surface skin which permits it to remain soft and pliable underneath, providing a weather-tight joint. No migratory staining is permitted on painted or unpainted metal, stone, glass, vinyl, or wood.

Prime all joints to receive sealants with a compatible one-component or two-component primer as recommended by the roof panel manufacturer.

2.4.4.2 Field-Applied

Sealant for field-applied must be an approved gun grade, non-sag one component polysulfide or two-component polyurethane with an initial maximum Shore A durometer hardness of 25, and conforming to ASTM C 920, Type II. Color to match panel colors.

2.4.4.3 Tape Sealant

Pressure sensitive, 100% solid with a release paper backing; permanently elastic, non-sagging, non-toxic and non-staining as approved by the roof panel manufacturer.

2.5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

2.5.1 Fabrication, General

Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to the design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of the items indicated. Shop fabricated items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

2.6 REPAIR OF FINISH PROTECTION

Repair paint for color finish enameled roofing must be compatible paint of the same formula and color as the specified finish furnished by the roofing manufacturer. Acrylic or modified acrylic must conform to MIL-P-28578.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 EXAMINATION

Contracting Officer may request verification and certification testing of coatings and base metals of metal roofing prior to installation.

a. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

b. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer, UL, ASTM, ASCE 7 and as required for the geographical area where construction will take place.

c. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

d. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.

e. Submit to the Contracting Officer a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the work.

f. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.4 PREPARATION

a. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.

3.5 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge or eave to wall as indicated, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement in



accordance with NRCA ASMMRM.

a. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for exterior surfaces and galvanized steel fasteners for interior surfaces.

b. Aluminum Roof Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for exterior surfaces and aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for interior surfaces.

c. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.

d. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating conforming to SSPC Paint 12, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

e. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

Erect roofing system in accordance with the approved erection drawings, the printed instructions and safety precautions of the manufacturer.

Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading, abuse, or undue impact. Bent, chipped, or defective sheets must not be applied.

Sheets must be erected true and plumb and in exact alignment with the horizontal and vertical edges of the building, securely anchored, and with the indicated rake, eave, and curb overhang.

Work is to allow for thermal movement of the roofing, movement of the building structure, and to provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind pressure.

Field cutting metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.

Roofing sheets must be laid with corrugations in the direction of the roof slope.

Do not permit storage, walking, wheeling, and trucking directly on applied roofing materials. Provide temporary walkways, runways, and platforms of smooth clean boards or planks as necessary to avoid damage to the installed roofing materials, and to distribute weight to conform to the indicated live load limits of roof construction.

3.6 FASTENER INSTALLATION

Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.



3.7 FLASHING, TRIM AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION

3.7.1 General Requirements

Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA 1793. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

Sheet metalwork is to be accomplished to form weather-tight construction without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, and allow for expansion and contraction. Cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the work of other trades is to be performed by sheet metal mechanics.

3.7.2 Metal Flashing

Exposed metal flashing is to be installed at building corners, rakes and eaves, junctions between metal siding and roofing, and changes of slope or direction in metal roofing, and building expansion joints and gutters.

Exposed metal flashing is to be the same material, color, and finish as the specified metal roofing.

Flashing is to be fastened at not more than 8 inches on center for roofs, except where flashing are held in place by the same screws that secure covering sheets.

Flashing is to be furnished in at least 8-foot lengths. Exposed flashing is to have one inch locked and blind-soldered end joints, and expansion joints at intervals of not more than 16 feet.

Exposed flashing and flashing subject to rain penetration to be bedded in the specified joint sealant.

Flashing which is in contact with dissimilar metals to be isolated by means of the specified asphalt mastic material to prevent electrolytic deterioration.

Drips to be formed to the profile indicated, with the edge folded back 1/2 inch to form a reinforced drip edge.

3.7.3 Closures

Install metal closure strips at open ends of metal ridge rolls; open ends of corrugated or ribbed pattern roofs, and at intersection of wall and roof unless open ends are concealed with formed eave flashing; rake of metal roof unless open end has a formed flashing member; and in other required areas.

Install mastic closure strips at intersection of the wall with metal roofing; top and bottom of metal siding; heads of wall openings; and in other required locations.

3.8 WORKMANSHIP

Make lines, arises, and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from visible wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges neatly to form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal exposed to



the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction.

Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth, dry, and free of defects and projections which might affect the application. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered by specifications conform to the applicable requirements of SMACNA 1793. Provide sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever indicated and necessary to make the work watertight.

3.9 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS

3.9.1 Erection Tolerances

Erect metal roofing straight and true with plumb vertical lines correctly lapped and secured in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Horizontal lines must not vary more than 1/8 inch in 40 feet.

3.9.2 Leakage Tests

Finished application of metal roofing is subject to inspection and test for leakage by the Contracting Officer, Architect/Engineer. Inspection and tests will be conducted without cost to the Government.

Inspection and testing is to be made promptly after erection to permit correction of defects and the removal and replacement of defective materials.

3.9.3 Repairs to Finish

Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired with the specified repair materials. Finished repaired surfaces must be uniform and free from variations of color and surface texture.

Repaired metal surfaces that are not acceptable to the project requirements are to be immediately removed and replaced with new material.

3.10 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL

Clean all exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove metal shavings, filings, nails, bolts, and wires from roofs. Remove grease and oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed metal surfaces to be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder or weld marks, and damage to the finish coating.

Collect and place scrap/waste materials in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site; transport demolished materials from government property and legally dispose of them.

3.11 INFORMATION FORM AND PLACARD

For each roof, furnish a typewritten information card for facility records and a card laminated in plastic and framed for interior display at roof access point, or a photoengraved 1 mm (0.032) inch thick aluminum card for exterior display. Format as directed in paragraph titled "Form One".

Make card 8 1/2 by 11 inches minimum. Information card must identify



facility name and number; location; contract number; approximate roof area; detailed roof system description, including deck type, roof panel manufacturer and product name, type underlayment(s), date of completion; installing contractor identification and contact information; manufacturer warranty expiration, warranty reference number, and contact information. Install card at location as directed by the Contracting Officer and provide a paper copy to the Contracting Officer.

3.12 FORM ONE



FORM 1 - PREFORMED STEEL OR ALUMINUM PANEL ROOFING SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS

1. Contract Number:

2. Building Number & Location:

3. NAVFAC Specification Number:

4. Deck/Substrate Type:

5. Slopes of Deck/Roof Structure:

6. Insulation Type & Thickness:

7. Insulation Manufacturer:

8. Vapor Retarder: ( )Yes ( )No

9. Vapor Retarder Type:

10. Preformed Steel Standing Seam Roofing Description:

a. Manufacturer (Name, Address, & Phone No.):b. Product Name: c. Width: d. Gage:e. Base Metal: f. Method of Attachment:

11. Repair of Color Coating:

a. Coating Manufacturer (Name, Address & Phone No.):b. Product Name:c. Surface Preparation:d. Recoating Formula:e. Application Method:

12. Statement of Compliance or Exception:_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

13. Date Roof Completed:

14. Warranty Period: From_______________ To_______________

15. Roofing Contractor (Name & Address):

16. Prime Contractor (Name & Address):

Contractor's Signature _________________________ Date:

Inspector's Signature _________________________ Date:

3.13 DATE OF INSTALLATION WALL-MOUNTED PLACARD

For each metal roof panel installation, furnish an exterior "Date of Installation Placard", 0.032 inch thick aluminum, 8-1/2 inches high by 11 inches wide, with mounting accessories, photoengraved to include the following information:



Facility Name and NumberApproximate Roof Area Newly Installed and Date of CompletionManufacturer, Type of Roof Panel and NameUnderlayment and Insulation System, R valueInstalling Contractor and Contact InformationWarranty Expiration DateWarranty Reference Number and Contact Information

Install placard as directed by the Contracting Officer.




SECTION 07 42 13

METAL WALL PANELS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AA ADM1 (2005; Errata 2005) Aluminum Design Manual







ASTM A 755/A 755M (2006) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products


ASTM D 1654 (2005) Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

ASTM D 2224 (1978; R 1983) Standard Test Method for Mean Molecular Weight of Mineral Insulating Oils by the Cryoscopic Method


ASTM D 2794 (1993; R 2004) Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)

ASTM D 3359 (2002) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test




ASTM D 4587 (2005) Standard Practice for Fluorescent UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings

ASTM D 522 (1993a; R 2001) Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings

ASTM D 5894 (2005) Cyclic Salt Fog/UV Exposure of Painted Metal, (Alternating Exposures in a Fog/Dry Cabinet and a UV/Condensation Cabinet)

ASTM D 610 (2007) Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces

ASTM D 714 (2002e1) Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints


ASTM G 154 (2006) Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WALL PANEL SYSTEM

Factory color finished, galvanized or aluminum metal wall panel system with exposed fastener attachment. Panel profile shall be as shown on drawings.

1.3 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Criteria, loading combinations, and definitions shall be in accordance with ASCE 7. Maximum calculated fiber stress shall not exceed the allowable value in the AISI or AA manuals; a one third overstress for wind is allowed. Midspan deflection under maximum design loads shall be limited to L/180. Contract drawings show the design wind loads and the extent and general assembly details of the metal siding. Members and connections not shown on the drawings shall be designed by the Contractor. Siding panels and accessories shall be the products of the same manufacturer. Steel siding design shall be in accordance with AISI SG03-3. Aluminum siding design shall be in accordance with AA ADM1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Siding; G



Drawings consisting of catalog cuts, panel configuration, system assembly, attachment details, flashing details, design and erection drawings, shop coating and finishing specifications, and other data as necessary to clearly describe design, materials, sizes, layouts, construction details, fasteners, and erection. Drawings shall be accompanied by engineering design calculations for the siding panels. Drawings shall be approved by the metal wall panel manufacturer prior to submission.

SD-03 Product Data

Wall panels; G

Closures

flashing

Accessories

Fasteners

Gaskets

SD-05 Design Data

Wind load calculations; G

Calculations shall be prepared, signed, and sealed by a registered structural engineer.

SD-06 Test Reports

Salt Spray Test;

SD-07 Certificates

Wall Panels; G

Accessories;

Certificates from the wall panel manufacturer attesting that the panels and accessories conform to the specified requirements and are suitable for the installation environment.

1.5 LEED Submittal Requirements







Deliver, store, and handle panel materials, bulk products, accessories, and other manufactured items in a manner to prevent damage and deformation, as recommended by the manufacturer, and as specified.

1.6.1 Delivery

Deliver materials to the site in dry and undamaged condition. Provide adequate packaging to protect materials during shipment. Crated materials shall not be uncrated until ready for use, except for inspection. Immediately upon arrival of materials at jobsite, inspect materials for damage, deformation, dampness, and staining. Remove affected materials from the site. Remove moisture from wet materials not otherwise affected, restack and protect from further moisture exposure.

1.6.2 Storage

Stack materials stored on site on platforms or pallets, and cover with tarpaulins or other weathertight covering which prevents trapping of water or condensation under the covering. Store wall panels so that water which may have accumulated during transit or storage will drain off. Do not store panels in contact with materials that might cause staining. Storage accommodations for metal wall panels shall provide good air circulation and protection from surface staining. Secure coverings and stored items to protect from wind displacement.

1.6.3 Handling

Handle materials in a manner to avoid damage. Select and operate material handling equipment so as not to damage materials or installation.

1.7 WARRANTIES

The Contractor shall provide a weathertight material and workmanship warranty for the metal wall panel system installation for a period of 20 years and to include a manufacturer's 20 year warranty against cracking, peeling, or delamination of the color finish and corrosion of the base metal, and 10 year warranty against the corrosion of fasteners caused by ordinary wear and tear by the elements. The warranties shall start upon final acceptance of the work or the date the Government takes possession, whichever is earlier.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Manufacturer's Location for Regionally Manufactured Materials LEED:



Ensure LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured project products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius.

2.2 WALL PANEL

Panels shall be steel or aluminum and shall have a factory-applied color finish. Panel profile shall be as shown on drawings. Wall panels shall have edge configurations for overlapping adjacent sheets . Width of sheets with overlapping configurations shall provide not less than 24 inches of coverage in place . Wall panels shall be fastened to framework using exposed fasteners. Length of panels shall be sufficient to cover the entire height of any unbroken wall surface when length of run is 30 feet or less. When length of run exceeds 30 feet, each sheet in the run shall extend over two or more spans. Sheets longer than 30 feet may be furnished if approved by the Contracting Officer. Panels shall be formed without warping, waviness, or ripples that are not a part of the panel profile and shall be free of damage to the finish coating system.

2.2.1 Steel Panels

Zinc-coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Grade 40 and minimum G90 galvanized smooth metallic coating. Prepainted steel sheet shall also comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. Wall panel material shall be minimum 0.76 mm (22 gage) thick prior to coating application, and as required to meet wind load requirements. Panels shall be within 95 percent of the nominal thickness. Prior to shipment, mill finish panels shall be treated with a passivating chemical and oiled to inhibit the formation of oxide corrosion products. Panels that have become wet during shipment and have started to oxidize shall be rejected.

2.2.2 Aluminum Panels

Alloy 3003 or 3004 conforming to ASTM B 209, temper as required for the forming operation; minimum 1.0 mm (0.040 inch) thick, and as required to meet wind load requirements.

2.3 FACTORY COLOR FINISH

Panels shall have a factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) finish on the exposed side. The exterior finish shall consist of a baked-on finish coat with an appropriate prime coat. Total color coating system thickness shall be not less than 1.6 mil and with any additional primer and finish coat thickness required to meet the color finish performance requirements specified. The interior coating shall be a thickness consisting of a topcoat of not less than 0.3 mil dry film thickness and the paint manufacturer's recommended primer of not less than 0.3 mil thickness.

2.3.1 Salt Spray Test

A sample of the sheets shall withstand a cyclic corrosion test for a minimum of 2014 hours in accordance with ASTM D 5894, including the scribe requirement in the test. Immediately upon removal of the panel from the test, the coating shall receive a rating of not less than 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714; no rusting, as determined by ASTM D 610; and a rating of 6, less than (1/8 inch) creepage from scribe as determined by ASTM D 1654.



2.3.2 Formability Test

When subjected to testing in accordance with ASTM D 522 Method B, 1/8 inch diameter mandrel, the coating film shall show no evidence of fracturing to the naked eye.

2.3.3 Accelerated Weathering, Chalking Resistance and Color Change

Coating sample shall withstand weathering test of 5000 hours , in accordance with ASTM D 4587 and ASTM G 154, Type D using without cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of the protective coating, or corrosion of the base metal. Protective coating with an adhesion rating of less than 4B when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B, shall be considered as an area indicating loss of adhesion. Following the accelerated weathering test, the coating shall have a chalk rating not less than No. 8 in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test procedures, and the color change shall not exceed 5 CIE or Hunter Lab color difference (delta E) units in accordance with ASTM D 2224. For sheets required to have a low gloss finish, the chalk rating shall be not less than No. 6 and the color difference shall be not greater than 7 units.

2.3.4 Humidity Test

When subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours, a scored panel shall show no signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion.

2.3.5 Impact Resistance

Factory-painted sheet shall withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM D 2794 13 mm (0.50 inch) diameter hemispherical head indenter, equal to 1.5 times the metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch-pounds, with no loss of adhesion.

2.3.6 Abrasion Resistance Test

When subjected to the falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968, Method A, the coating system shall withstand a minimum of 80 liters of sand before the appearance of the base metal. The term "appearance of base metal" refers to the metallic coating on steel or the aluminum base metal.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

Flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps, and similar metal accessories shall be the manufacturer's standard products. Exposed metal accessories shall be finished to match the panels furnished. Molded closure strips shall be bituminous-saturated fiber, closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or neoprene, or polyvinyl chlorided premolded to match configuration of the panels and shall not absorb or retain water.

2.5 FASTENERS

Fasteners for steel panels shall be zinc-coated steel, aluminum, corrosion resisting steel type and size specified below or as otherwise approved for the applicable requirements. Fasteners for aluminum panels shall be aluminum or corrosion resisting steel. Fasteners for attaching wall panels to supports shall provide both tensile and shear strength of not less than 750 pounds per fastener. Fasteners for accessories shall be the



manufacturer's standard. Exposed wall fasteners shall be color finished to match the panels.

2.5.1 Screws

Screws shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.6 SEALANT

Sealant shall be an elastomeric type containing no oil or asphalt, as recommended by the wall panel manufacturer. Silicone based sealants are prohibited, unless approved otherwise by the panel manufacturer and the Contracting Officer. Exposed sealant shall be colored to match adjacent components and shall cure to a rubberlike consistency. Concealed sealant shall be non-hardening type. Sealant placed in the panel seams shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2.7 GASKETS

Gaskets shall be nonabsorptive and suitable for insulating contact points of incompatible materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 INSTALLATION

Installation shall meet specified requirements and be in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. Correct defects or errors in materials and installation. Do not install damaged materials. Dissimilar materials which are not compatible when contacting each other shall be insulated from each other by means of gaskets or insulating compounds. Improper or mislocated drill holes shall be plugged with an oversize screw fastener and gasketed washer; however, panels with an excess of such holes or with such holes in critical



locations shall not be used. Exposed surfaces and edges shall be kept clean and free from sealant, metal cuttings, hazardous burrs, and other foreign material. Stained, discolored, or damaged materials shall be removed from the site.

3.3.1 Wall Panels and Accessories

Wall panels shall be applied with the longitudinal configurations in the vertical position. Provide panels in longest obtainable lengths, with end laps occurring only at girts and structural members . Side laps shall be standard overlap or interlocking ribs based on manufacturer's standard. Seal side and end laps with joint-sealing material. Flash wall panels at base and at top, around windows, door frames, framed louvers, and other similar openings. Place closures, flashing, and sealing materials to achieve complete water tightness. Flashing is not required where approved. Accessories shall be fastened into framing members, except as otherwise approved. Closure strips shall be provided as indicated and where necessary to provide weathertight construction.

3.3.1.1 Lap Type Panels with Exposed Fasteners

End laps shall be made over framing members with fasteners into framing members approximately (2 inches) from the end of the overlapping sheet. Side laps shall be laid away from the prevailing winds. Spacing of fasteners shall present an orderly appearance and shall not exceed: 200 mm (8 inches) on center at end laps of wall panels, (8 inches) on center at connection of panels to intermediate supports, and 450 mm (18 inches) on center at side laps of panels except when otherwise recommended by the panel manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer. Side and end laps of wall panels and joints at accessories shall be sealed. Fasteners shall be installed in straight lines within a tolerance of 50 mm (1/2 inch) in the length of a bay. Fasteners shall be driven normal to the surface and to a uniform depth to seat the gasketed washers properly.

3.4 CLEAN UP AND FINISH TOUCH-UP

Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove metal shavings and filings. Remove grease and oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed metal surfaces shall be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder or weld marks, and damage to the finish coating. Touch up scratches in panel finish with manufacturer supplied touch-up paint system to match panel finish. Treat exposed cut edges with manufacturer supplied color coat.

3.5 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES

Where any form of deficiency is found, additional measures shall be taken as deemed necessary by the Contracting Officer to determine the extent of the deficiency and corrective actions shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer.


3.6.1 Construction Monitoring

Contractor shall make visual inspections as necessary to ensure compliance with specified requirements. Additionally, verify the following:



Materials comply with the specified requirements.

All materials are properly stored, handled and protected from damage. Damaged materials are removed from the site.

a. Framing and substrates are in acceptable condition, in compliance with specification, prior to application of wall panels.

Panels are installed without buckles, ripples, or waves and in uniform alignment and modulus.

Side laps are formed, sealed, fastened or seam locked as required.

The proper number, type, and spacing of attachment clips and fasteners are installed.

Installer adheres to specified and detailed application parameters.

Associated flashings and sheet metal are installed in a timely manner in accord with the specified requirements.




SECTION 07 52 00.00 20

MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING06/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)

ASSE A10.32 (2004) Fall Protection Systems for Construction and Demolitions

ASPHALT ROOFING MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (ARMA)

ARMA 410BUR88 (2001) Manual of Roof Maintenance and Repair

ARMA 460LSR97 (2002) NRCA/ARMA Repair Manual for Low Slope Membrane Roof Systems

ARMA PMBRG98 (1998) Quality Control Guideline for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing.


ASTM C 1289 (2007) Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board

ASTM D 2170 (2001a) Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts (Bitumens)

ASTM D 312 (2000) Standard Specification for Asphaltr Used in Roofing

ASTM D 4073 (1994; R 2003) Standard Test Method for Tensile-Tear Strength of Bituminous Roofing Membranes

ASTM D 41 (2005) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

ASTM D 4402 (2002) Standard Test Method for Viscosity Determination of Asphalt at Elevated Temperatures Using a Rotational Viscometer

ASTM D 4434 (2004) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing

ASTM D 5147 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 1


ASTM D 6163 (2000e1) Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements

ASTM E 108 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings

ASTM G 21 (1996; R 2002) Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi

FM GLOBAL (FM)


MIDWEST ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MRCA)

CERTA (2003) NRCA/MRCA Certified Roofing Torch Applicator Program


NFPA 241 (2004) Safeguarding Construction,Alteration, and Demolition Operations

NFPA 58 (2004) Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases

NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)

NRCA Details (2003) NRCA Roof Perimeter Flashing Systems Construction Details for Class 1 Roof Construction

NRCA Manual (2003) NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (2 vol.)


29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

29 CFR 1910.12 (2004) Construction Work

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

29 CFR 1926.16 (2004) Rules of Construction


UL 790 (2004e8) Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings

UL RMSD (2005) Roofing Materials and Systems Directory

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 2


1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM

Minimum two-ply SBS modified bitumen roof membrane consisting of modified bitumen base sheet,interply sheet and thermoplastic cap sheet. Modified bitumen roof membrane must be set in hot asphalt.

All work must follow the NRCA Manual guidelines and standards stated within this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Roof plan; G drawing depicting wind loads and boundaries of enhanced perimeter and corner attachments of roof system components, as applicable

SD-03 Product Data

Modified Bitumen Sheets; G

Asphalt

Thermo Plastic Cap Sheet; G

Thermoplastic Cap Sheet

Primer; G

Sample Warranty certificate; G

Submit all data required by Section 07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION, together with requirements of this section. Include in data written acceptance by the roof membrane manufacturer of the products and accessories provided. Products must be as listed in the applicable wind uplift and fire rating classification listings, unless approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer.

SD-07 Certificates

Provide evidence that products used within this specification are manufactured in the United States.

Qualification of Manufacturer

Certify that the manufacturer of the modified bitumen membrane meets requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Qualification of Manufacturer".

Qualification of Applicator

Certify that the applicator meets requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Qualification of Applicator".

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 3



Modified Bitumen Membrane Application; G

Flashing; G

Thermo Plastic Cap Sheet

Base Sheet attachment, including pattern and frequency of mechanical attachments required in field of roof, corners, and perimeters to provide for the specified wind resistance.

Primer

Cold Weather Installation; G

Include detailed application instructions and standard manufacturer drawings altered as required by these specifications. Explicitly identify in writing, differences between manufacturer's instructions and the specified requirements.


Warranty

Information Card

Instructions To Government Personnel

Include copies of Material Safety Data Sheets for maintenance/repair materials.

Submit 20 year "No-Dollar-Limit" warranty for labor and materials.





1.4.1 Qualification of Manufacturer

Modified bitumen sheet roofing system manufacturer must have a minimum of 5 years experience in manufacturing modified bitumen roofing with thermoplastic cap sheet products.

1.4.2 Qualification of Applicator

Roofing system applicator must be approved, authorized, or licensed in writing by the modified bitumen sheet roofing system manufacturer and have a minimum of five years experience as an approved, authorized, or licensed applicator with that manufacturer and be approved at a level capable of

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 4


providing the specified warranty. The applicator must supply the names, locations and client contact information of five projects of similar size and scope that the applicator has constructed using the manufacturer's roofing products submitted for this project within the previous three years.

1.4.3 Fire Resistance

Complete roof covering assembly must:

a. Be Class A rated in accordance with ASTM E 108, FM 4470, or UL 790; and

b. Be listed as part of Fire-Classified roof deck construction in UL RMSD, or Class I roof deck construction in FM P7825.

FM or UL approved components of the roof covering assembly must bear the appropriate FM or UL label.

1.4.4 Wind Uplift Resistance

Complete roof covering assembly, including insulation, must be rated Class 1-108 in accordance with FM P7825 and ASTM D 4073 capable of withstanding an uplift pressure of 108 psf. Non-rated systems must not be installed, except as approved by the Contracting Officer. Provide wind load calculations and submit engineering calculations with substantiating data to validate wind resistance of any non-rated roof system. Base all Wind uplift calculations on a design wind speed of applicable building code requirements.

1.4.5 Preroofing Conference

After approval of submittals and before performing roofing and insulation system installation work, hold a preroofing conference to review the following:

a. Drawings, including Roof Plan, specifications and submittals related to the roof work

b. Roof system components installation

c. Procedure for the roof manufacturer's technical representative's onsite inspection and acceptance of the roof structure, and roofing substrate, the name of the manufacturer's technical representatives, the frequency of the onsite visits, distribution of copies of the inspection reports from the manufacturer's technical representatives to roof manufacturer

d. Contractor's plan for coordination of the work of the various trades involved in providing the roofing system and other components secured to the roofing

e. Quality control, (ARMA PMBRG98) plan for the roof system installation

f. Safety requirements

Coordinate preroofing conference scheduling with the Contracting Officer. The conference must be attended by the Contractor, the Contracting Officer's designated personnel, and personnel directly responsible for the

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 5


installation of roofing and insulation, flashing and sheet metal work, mechanical and electrical work, other trades interfacing with the roof work, designated safety personnel trained to enforce and comply with ASSE A10.32, Fire Marshall, and representative of the roofing materials manufacturer. Before beginning roofing work, provide a copy of meeting notes and action items to all attending parties. Note action items requiring resolution prior to start of roof work.


1.5.1 Delivery

Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers and rolls with labels intact and legible. Mark and remove wet or damaged materials from the site. Where materials are covered by a referenced specification, the container must bear the specification number, type, and class, as applicable. Labels or bill of lading for roofing asphalt must indicate asphalt type, FP, FBT, and EVT, that is, the temperature at which the viscosity is either 125 centistokes when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2170 or 75 centipoise when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4402. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow work to proceed without interruption.

1.5.2 Storage

Protect materials against moisture absorption and contamination or other damage. Avoid crushing or crinkling of roll materials. Store roll materials on end on clean raised platforms or pallets one level high in dry locations with adequate ventilation, such as an enclosed building or closed trailer. Do not store roll materials in buildings under construction until concrete, mortar, and plaster work is finished and dry. Maintain roll materials at temperatures above 50 degrees F for 24 hours immediately before application. Do not store materials outdoors unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Completely cover felts stored outdoors, on and off roof, with waterproof canvas protective covering. Do not use polyethylene sheet as a covering. Tie covering securely to pallets to make completely weatherproof. Provide sufficient ventilation to prevent condensation. Do not store more materials on roof than can be installed the same day and remove unused materials at end of each days work. Distribute materials temporarily stored on roof to stay within live load limits of the roof construction.

Maintain a minimum distance of 35 foot for all stored flammable materials, including materials covered with shrink wraps, craft paper and/or tarps from all torch/welding applications.

Immediately remove wet, contaminated or otherwise damaged or unsuitable materials from the site. Damaged materials may be marked by the Contracting Officer.

1.5.3 Handling

Prevent damage to edges and ends of roll materials. Do not install damaged materials in the work. Select and operate material handling equipment to prevent damage to materials or applied roofing.


Do not install roofing system when air temperature is below 40 degrees F,

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 6


during any form of precipitation, including fog, or when there is ice, frost, moisture, or any other visible dampness on the roof deck. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation during cold weather conditions.

1.7 HOT-MOPPED ASPHALT APPLIED AND (HEAT WELD) CAPSHEET MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE SAFETY

1.7.1 Property Protection

Take all precautions necessary to prevent ignition of combustible materials during hot-mopped asphalt application and seam welding of roofing. Immediately call the fire department if a fire commences. Review all fire safety procedures as outlined at the pre-roofing conference.

Install materials using the techniques recommended by CERTA NRCA/MRCA Certified Roofing Torch Applicator Program available from the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) and the Midwest Roofing Contractors Association (MRCA} as endorsed by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA) and the United Union of Roofers, Waterproofers and Allied Workers. Application procedures must comply with NFPA 241, OSHA 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1910.12, 29 CFR 1926.16, 29 CFR 1926 Subpart F, UL Fire Resistance Directory Volume No. 1, NRCA R&W Manual, and Florida Building Code Volume 2004.

No Asphalt/Tar Kettles are allowed on roofs. Locate kettles and supply LP-Gas Cylinders safely and secured per NFPA 241 outside of the building's perimeter a minimum of 20 foot from the structure and any combustible materials.

Maintain a minimum separation of 20 foot between LP-Gas Cylinders and kettle. Provide protective fire retardant blanket barrier or shield between any building structure to a minimum height of 8 foot and a clear surround distance of 4 foot if operations force placement of kettle within a distance of 20 foot. Do not obstruct or place kettles or Cylinder storage within 10 foot of exits, means of egress, gates, roadways, entrances. Locate kettles downwind and away from any building air intakes.

Provide a minimum of two portable fully charged 20 pound ABC (dry chemical) fire extinguishers no closer than 5 foot and no further than 25 foot of horizontal travel distance from each kettle at all times while kettle is in operation, in easily accessible and identifiable locations. Also provide a minimum of two multipurpose 2-A:20-B:C portable fire extinguisher on the roof being covered or repaired.

Comply with the following safety procedures:

a. Fuel containers, burners, and related appurtenances of roofing equipment in which liquefied petroleum gas is used for heating must comply with the requirements of NFPA 58.

b. Fuel containers having capacities greater than one pound must be located a minimum of 10 foot clear distance from the burner flame.

c. All LP-Gas Cylinders must be clearly labeled "Flammable Gas", and secured to prevent accidental tip-over.

d. Check all pressure regulators and hoses prior to use for proper functioning and integrity.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 7


e. Turn off fuel supply at LP Gas Cylinder when kettle is not in use.

f. Equip all kettles with a functioning temperature measuring device to ensure no heating in excess of 50 degrees F below the flash point.

g. Provide covers, lid, or top which are close fitting, constructed of minimum No.14 manufacturer's gauge steel, and can be gravity closed on all kettles.

h. Clean all roofing mops and rags free of excess asphalt and store safely away from all combustible materials. Store discarded roofing mops and rags in a non-combustible container and remove from site each day.

i. Position all pump lines handling hot asphalt securely and equip all pump lines with a shut-off valve on each with a coupler which may be opened when lines are full. Do not subject pump lines to pressures in excess of safe and recommended NRCA and ARMA working pressures. Station an operator near the equipment to cut off flow and care for other emergencies while conducting heating, pumping and application operations.

j. Asphalt/tar bucket used by roofers or workers in similar trades must be constructed of minimum No. 24 gauge or heavier sheet steel and have a metal bail of no less than 1/4 inch diameter material. The bail is to be fastened to offset ears or equivalent which have been riveted, welded, or otherwise safely and securely attached to the bucket. Soldered bail sockets are prohibited. Position workers and other employees to avoid being struck by bucket or other roofing materials, which may accidentally fall while being hoisted, lowered, or used in the roofing operation. Provide safety barriers and caution signs at all skylights or other roof holes.

k. Do not use flammable liquids with a flash point below 100 degrees F (gasoline and similar products) for cleaning purposes.

Do not use solid fuel or Class I liquids as fuel for roofing asphalt/tar kettles. Provide a minimum of one employee fully knowledgeable of kettle operations and hazards to maintain constant surveillance during kettle operation within a minimum distance of 25 foot of the kettle.

Check all fire extinguishers prior to commencement of work, and upon completion of the day's work, to ensure fullness and operability.

Project supervisor must make daily inspections with the facility manager of all conditions and operations which could present hazards during hot-mopped applications and issue directives to address all such concerns and items of the work and existing conditions.

Identify and protect all combustible roof components, possible fire traps, and hidden hazards. Seal off voids or openings in the substrate with non-combustible materials prior to installing hot-mopped applied materials in the area. Install protective fire retardant blankets and shields at building walls, eaves, parapets and equipments curbs constructed of combustible materials within 3 foot radius of the area of hot-mopped kettle prior to commencement of the work.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 8


When working around intakes and openings, temporarily disconnect and block to prevent fumes from kettle from being drawn into the opening.

1.7.2 Fire Watch

All personnel on the roof during hot-mopped application must be properly trained to use a fire extinguisher. Provide a fire watch for a minimum of 30 minutes after completion of hot-mopped kettle operations at the end of each work shift. Maintain the fire watch for additional time required to ensure no potential ignition conditions exist. Utilize heat sensing meters to scan for hot spots in the work.

Do not leave the rooftop unattended during breaks in work during a work shift. Walk and scan all areas of application checking for hot spots, fumes, or smoldering, especially at wall and curb areas, prior to departure at the end of each work shift. Ensure any and all suspect conditions are eliminated prior to leaving the site each work shift.

1.8 SEQUENCING

Coordinate the work with other trades to ensure that components which are to be secured to or stripped into the roofing system are available and that permanent flashing and counter flashing, per NRCA Details, and are installed as the work progresses. Ensure temporary protection measures are in place to preclude moisture intrusion or damage to installed materials. Application of roofing must immediately follow application of insulation as a continuous operation. Coordinate roofing operations with insulation work so that all roof insulation applied each day is covered with roof membrane installation the same day.

1.9 WARRANTY

Provide roof system material and workmanship warranties meeting specified requirements. Provide revision or amendment to standard membrane manufacturer warranty as required to comply with the specified requirements.

1.9.1 Roof Membrane Manufacturer Warranty

Furnish the roof membrane manufacturer's 20-year no dollar limit roof system materials and installation workmanship warranty, including flashing, insulation in compliance with ASTM C 1289, and accessories necessary for a watertight roof system construction. Provide warranty directly to the Government and commence warranty effective date at time of Government's acceptance of the roof work. The warranty must state that:

a. If within the warranty period the roof system, as installed for its intended use in the normal climatic and environmental conditions of the facility, becomes non-watertight, shows evidence of moisture intrusion within the assembly, blisters, splits, tears, delaminates, separates at the seams, or shows evidence of excessive weathering due to defective materials or installation workmanship, the repair or replacement of the defective and damaged materials of the roof system assembly and correction of defective workmanship are the responsibility of the roof membrane manufacturer. All costs associated with the repair or replacement work are the responsibility of the roof membrane manufacturer.

b. When the manufacturer or his approved applicator fail to perform

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 9


the repairs within 72 hours of notification, emergency temporary repairs performed by others does not void the warranty.

c. Damage to the roofing system caused by sustained winds having a velocity of 110 mph or less is covered by the warranty.

d. Upon completion of installation, and acceptance by the Contracting Officer and Roofing System Engineer of Record, the manufacturer must supply the appropriate warranty to the Owner.

e. Installer must submit a minimum two year warranty to the membrane manufacturer from the date of acceptance, with a copy to the Contracting Officer and Roofing System Engineer of Record.

1.9.2 Roofing System Installer Warranty

The roof system installer must warrant for a period of not less than two years that the roof system, as installed, is free from defects in installation workmanship, to include the roof membrane, flashing, insulation, accessories, attachments, and sheet metal installation integral to a complete watertight roof system assembly. Make warranty directly to the Government. Correction of defective workmanship and replacement of damaged or affected materials are the responsibility of the roof system installer. All costs associated with the repair or replacement work are the responsibility of the installer.


Repair or replacement work, ARMA 410BUR88, ARMA 460LSR97 that becomes necessary within the warranty period must be approved, as required, and accomplished in a manner so as to restore the integrity of the roof system assembly and validity of the roof membrane manufacturer warranty for the remainder of the manufacturer warranty period.

1.10 CONFORMANCE AND COMPATIBILITY

The entire roofing and flashing system must be in accordance with specified and indicated requirements, including fire and wind resistance (ANSI/SPRI ES-1) requirements. Work not specifically addressed and any deviation from specified requirements must be in general accordance with recommendations of the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, membrane manufacturer published recommendations and details, and compatible with surrounding components and construction. Submit any deviation from specified or indicated requirements to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Manufacturer's Location for Regionally Manufactured Materials LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured project

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 10


products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius.

2.2 MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEETS AND FIBERGLASS FELT MATERIALS

Furnish a combination of specified materials that comprise the modified bitumen manufacturer's standard system of the number and type of plies specified. Materials provided must be suitable for the service and climatic conditions of the installation. Modified bitumen sheets must be watertight and visually free of pinholes, particles of foreign matter, non-dispersed raw material, factory splices, or other conditions that might affect serviceability. Polymer modifier must comply with ARMA PMBRG98 and be uniformly dispersed throughout the sheet. Edges of sheet must be straight and flat.

a. SBS Base Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Type II, Grade S, (80 mils) thick.

b. SBS Interply Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Type II, Grade S, (80 mils) thick.

2.3 CAP SHEET

Membrane shall contain fibers or fabric, shall be at least 60 mils thick, and shall exceed ASTM D 4434. Membrane shall be fungi resistant as demonstrated by "non sustained growth" or discoloration after 21 days exposure as specified in ASTM G 21 and the following minimum physical properties.

PROPERTY TEST PROCEDURE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Color WhiteBreaking Strength ASTM D 751 235 lbs.Elongation ASTM D 751 100 percentPuncture Resistance ASTM D 5635 260 lbs.Shore "A" Hardness ASTM D 224 83Heat Aging ASTM D 0573 90 percent of originalCold Resistance ASTM D 2136 minus 40 degrees FWater Vapor Permeability ASTM E 96 3.5g/m2/dayWeight Change after Immersion ASTM D 570 1.5 percent maximumSeam Strength ASTM D 751 80 percentDimensional Stability ASTM D 1204 0.5 percentAccel. Weathering (Xenon Arc) ASTM D 2565 10 m hrs. (No change)Solar Reflectivity ASTM E 903 .811 Energy StarEmissivity ASTM E 903 .919

2.4 BASE FLASHING MEMBRANE

Membrane manufacturer's standard, minimum two-ply modified bitumen membrane flashing system compatible with the roof membrane specified and as recommended in membrane manufacturer's published literature. Flashing membranes must meet or exceed the properties of the material standards specified for the modified bitumen base, interply and cap sheet, except that flashing membrane thickness must be as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 11


2.5 ASPHALT

ASTM D 312, Type III or IV, in accordance with modified bitumen membrane manufacturer requirements and compatible with the slope conditions of the installation.

2.6 PRIMER

ASTM D 41, or other primer compatible with the application and as approved in writing by the modified bitumen membrane manufacturer.

2.7 PRE-MANUFACTURED ACCESSORIES

Pre-manufactured accessories must be manufacturer's standard for intended purpose, comply with applicable specification section, compatible with the membrane roof system and approved for use by the modified bitumen membrane manufacturer.

2.8 WALKPADS

Walkpads shall be 125 mils thick of the same material as the cap sheet.

2.9 ROOF INSULATION BELOW MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE SYSTEM

Insulation must be compatible with the roof membrane, approved by the membrane manufacturer and as specified in UFGS Section 07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 EXAMINATION

Ensure that the following conditions exist prior to application of the roofing materials:

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 12


a. Drains, curbs, expansion joints, perimeter walls, roof penetrating components, and equipment supports are in place.

b. Surfaces are rigid, clean, dry, smooth, and free from cracks, holes, and sharp changes in elevation. Joints in the substrate are sealed to prevent dripping of bitumen into building or down exterior walls.

c. The plane of the substrate does not vary more than 1/4 inch within an area 10 by 10 foot when checked with a 10 foot straight edge placed anywhere on the substrate.

d. Substrate is sloped as indicated to provide positive drainage.

e. Walls and vertical surfaces are constructed to receive counter flashing, and will permit mechanical fastening of the base flashing materials.

f. Treated wood nailers are in place on non-nailable surfaces, to permit nailing of base flashing at minimum height of 8 inch above finished roofing surface.

g. Protect all combustible materials and surfaces which may contain concealed combustible or flammable materials. All fire extinguishing equipment has been placed as specified.

h. Verify all Fire Watch personnel assignments.

i. Cants are securely fastened in place in the angles formed by walls and other vertical surfaces. The angle of the cant is 45 degrees and the height of the vertical leg is not less than 3-1/2 inch.

j. Insulation boards are installed smoothly and evenly, and are not broken, cracked, or curled. There are no gaps in insulation board joints exceeding 1/4 inch in width. Insulation is being roofed over on the same day the insulation is installed.

k. Roof deck and framing are sloped as indicated to provide positive drainage.

3.4 PREPARATION

3.4.1 Protection of Property

3.4.1.1 Protective Coverings

Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to hoists, and kettles prior to starting the work. Lap protective coverings not less than 6 inch, secure against wind, and vent to prevent collection of moisture on covered surfaces. Keep protective coverings in place for the duration of the roofing work.

3.4.1.2 Bitumen Stops

Provide felt bitumen stops or other means to prevent bitumen drippage at roof edges, openings, and vertical projections before hot mopped application of the roofing membrane.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 13


3.4.2 Equipment

3.4.2.1 Flame-Heated Equipment

Do not place flame-heated equipment on roof. Provide and maintain a fire extinguisher adjacent to flame-heated equipment and on the roof.

3.4.2.2 Electric-Heated Equipment

Provide adequate electrical service as required by manufacturer of electrical equipment to ensure against damage to equipment and property and to ensure proper application of roofing materials.

3.4.3 Heating of Asphalt

Break up solid asphalt on a surface free of dirt and debris. Heat asphalt in kettle designed to prevent contact of flame with surfaces in contact with the asphalt. Kettles must have visible working thermometer and thermostatic controls set to the temperature limits specified herein. Keep controls in working order and calibrated. Use immersion thermometer, accurate within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.8 degrees F, to check temperatures of the asphalt frequently. When temperatures exceed maximums specified, remove asphalt from the site. Do no permit cutting back, adulterating, or fluxing of asphalt.

3.4.3.1 Temperature Limitations for Asphalt

Heat and apply asphalt at the temperatures specified below unless specified otherwise by manufacturer's printed application instructions. Use thermometer to check temperature during heating and application. Have kettle attended constantly during heating process to ensure specified temperatures are maintained. Do not heat asphalt above its finished blowing temperature (FBT). Do not heat asphalt between 500 and 525 degrees F for longer than four consecutive hours. Do not heat asphalt to the flash point (FP). Apply asphalt and embed membrane sheets when temperature of asphalt is within plus or minus 25 degrees F of the equiviscous temperature (EVT) but not less than 400 degrees F. Before heating and application of asphalt refer to the asphalt manufacturer's label or bill of lading for FP, FBT, and EVT of the asphalt used.

3.4.4 Priming of Surfaces

Prime all surfaces to be in contact with adhered membrane materials. Apply primer at the rate of 0.75 gallon per 100 sq. ft. or as recommended by modified bitumen sheet manufacturer's printed instructions to promote adhesion of membrane materials. Allow primer to dry prior to application of membrane materials to primed surface. Avoid flammable primer material conditions in torch applied membrane applications.

3.4.5 Membrane Preparation

Unroll modified bitumen membrane materials and allow to relax a minimum of 30 minutes prior to installation. In cold weather, adhere to membrane manufacturer's additional recommendations for pre-installation membrane handling and preparation. Inspect for damage, pinholes, particles of foreign matter, non-dispersed raw material, factory splices, or other conditions that might affect serviceability. Edges of seams must be straight and flat so that they may be seamed to one another without forming fish mouths or wrinkles. Discard damaged or defective materials.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 14


3.4.6 Substrate Preparation

Apply membrane to clean, dry surfaces only. Do not apply membrane to surfaces that have been wet by rain or frozen precipitation within the previous 12 hours. Provide cleaning and artificial drying with heated blowers or torches as necessary to ensure clean, dry surface prior to membrane application.

3.5 APPLICATION

Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application. Complete application of roofing in a continuous operation. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day. Maintain specified temperatures for asphalt.

3.5.1 Phased Membrane Construction

Phased application of membrane plies is prohibited unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer and supported by the membrane manufacturer's written application instructions. If cap sheet installation is delayed, thoroughly clean the applied membrane material surface and dry immediately prior to cap sheet installation. Priming of the applied membrane surface may be required at the discretion of the Contracting Officer prior to cap sheet installation.

3.5.2 Temporary Roofing and Flashing

Provide watertight temporary roofing and flashing where considerable work by other trades, such as installing cooling towers, antennas, pipes, is to be performed on the roof or where construction scheduling or weather conditions require protection of the building's interior before permanent roofing system can be installed. Do not install temporary roofing over permanently installed insulation. Provide rigid pads for traffic over temporary roofing.

3.5.2.1 Removal

Completely remove temporary roofing and flashing before continuing with application of the permanent roofing system.

3.5.3 Application Method

3.5.3.1 Hot Asphalt Application of Modified Bitumen Membrane

Apply membrane immediately following application of hot asphalt. Apply hot asphalt within 6 foot of roll. Do not work ahead with asphalt. Asphalt must be completely fluid, with mop temperatures within the asphalt's EVT range, but not less than 400 degrees F, at the instant membrane comes into contact with asphalt. Application of bitumen between layers must be such as to provide full, continuous, uniform coverage and complete contact of hot asphalt with the sheet above and below. Embed sheets in asphalt. As sheets are being rolled into hot asphalt, immediately and thoroughly apply uniform positive pressure by squeegee, roll, or broom to ensure full adhesion and lap seal, eliminate trapped air and to provide tight, smooth laminations. Avoid excessive extrusion of asphalt at lap areas. Control asphalt bleed out to approximately 1 inch maximum.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 15


3.5.4 Modified Bitumen Base Sheet

Fully adhere base sheets in accordance with membrane manufacturer's printed instructions. Roll and broom in the base sheet to ensure full contract with the hot asphalt application. Apply sheets in a continuous operation. Apply sheets with side laps at a minimum of 2 inch unless greater side lap is recommended by the manufacturer's standard written application instructions. Provide end laps of not less than 6 inch and staggered a minimum of 36 inch. Apply sheets at right angles to the roof slope so that the direction of water flow is over and not against the laps so that plies of sheets extend from eave line on one side of the barrel-type roof and 18 inch over the center line of the crown of the roof. Apply sheets on the other side in the same manner, resulting in twice the normal amount of roofing sheets and asphalt at the crown. Extend base sheets approximately 2 inch above the top of cant strips at vertical surfaces and to the top of cant strips elsewhere. Trim base sheet to a neat fit around vent pipes, roof drains, and other projections through the roof. Application must be free of ridges, wrinkles, and buckles.

3.5.5 Modified Bitumen Membrane Application

Ensure proper sheet alignment prior to installation. Apply membrane layers perpendicular to slope of roof in shingle fashion to shed water, including application on areas of tapered insulation that change slope direction. Bucking or backwater laps are prohibited. Fully adhere membrane sheets to underlying substrate materials. Provide minimum 3 inch side laps and minimum 6 inch end laps and as otherwise required by membrane manufacturer. Stagger end laps minimum 36 inch. Offset side laps between membrane layers a minimum of 12 inch. Offset end laps between membrane layers a minimum of 36 inch. Install all membrane layers the same workday, unless supported otherwise by roof membrane manufacturer application instructions and approved by the Contracting Officer. Provide tight smooth laminations of each membrane layer without wrinkles, ridges, buckles, kinks, fishmouths, or voids. Ensure full membrane adhesion and full lap seals. Rework to seal any open laps prior to application of subsequent membrane layers. The completed membrane application must be free of surface abrasions, air pockets, blisters, ridges, wrinkles, buckles, kinks, fishmouths, voids, or open seams.

3.5.5.1 Cap Sheet Installation

Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's approved instructions except as otherwise specified.

3.5.5.2 Cap Sheet

Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, the cap sheet shall be rolled out on the surface and allowed to relax for at least 1/2 hour when ambient temperature is 60 degrees F or higher. Cap sheet shall be overlapped as recommended by the roofing manufacturer. Direction of laps shall allow water to flow over and not into the lap. Cap sheet joints shall be free of wrinkles and fishmouths. The entire length of joints shall be probe-tested and corrected during the day of installation. Defective areas shall be re-sealed. Wrinkles, fishmouths, or damaged areas shall cut out and the area covered with membrane using a 3 inch seam on all sides. Repairs shall be probe-tested for continuity. Bonded areas of seams shall be a minimum 2 inches wide for heat-welded seams.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 16


3.5.5.3 Flashing

Roof edges, projections through the roof and changes in roof planes shall be flashed. The seam between the flashing and the membrane shall be completed before the flashing is bonded to vertical surfaces. The seam shall be sealed a minimum of 3 inches beyond the fasteners which attach the membrane to nailers. The installed flashings shall be secured at the top of the flashing a maximum of 12 inches on centers under the counterflashing or cap. Where possible, prefabricated components shall be used for pipe seals and flashing accessories.

3.5.5.4 Cutoffs

If work is terminated prior to weatherproofing the entire roof, the membrane shall be sealed to the roof deck. Flutes in metal decking shall be sealed off along the cutoff edge. Membrane shall be pulled free or cut to expose the insulation when resuming work and cut insulation sheets used for fill-in shall be removed. Asphalt or coal-tar products shall not be used for sealing.

3.5.5.5 Walkways

Walkways shall be fully adhered as specified by the manufacturer.

3.5.6 Membrane Flashing

3.5.6.1 Membrane Flashing at Roof Drain

Roof drains are specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Flashing for roof drains, are specified in Section 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Extend membrane sheets to edge of drain bowl opening at the roof drain deck flange in accordance with membrane manufacturer's printed application instructions. Securely clamp membrane sheets and metal roof drain flashing and strip flashing in the flashing clamping ring. Secure clamps so that sheets and metal flashing are free from wrinkles and folds. Trim stripping must be flush with inside of clamping ring.

3.5.6.2 Pre-fabricated Curbs

Securely anchor prefabricated curbs to nailer or other base substrate and flash with modified bitumen membrane.

3.5.6.3 Set-On Accessories

Where pipe or conduit blocking, supports and similar roof accessories are set on the membrane, adhere walkpad material to bottom of accessories prior to setting on roofing membrane. Specific method of installing set-on accessories must permit normal movement due to expansion, contraction, vibration, and similar occurrences without damaging roofing membrane. Do not mechanically secure set-on accessories through roofing membrane into roof deck substrate.

3.5.7 Roof Walkpads

Install walkpads at roof access points and where otherwise indicated for traffic areas and for access to mechanical equipment, in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide minimum 6 inch separation between adjacent walkpads to accommodate drainage.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 17


3.5.8 Correction of Deficiencies

Where any form of deficiency is found, additional measures will be taken as deemed necessary by the Contracting Officer to determine the extent of the deficiency and corrective actions must be performed as directed by the Contracting Officer.

3.5.9 Clean Up

Remove debris, scraps, containers and other rubbish and trash resulting from installation of the roofing system from job site each day.

3.6 PROTECTION OF APPLIED ROOFING

At the end of the day's work and when precipitation is imminent, protect applied modified bitumen roofing system from water intrusion.

3.6.1 Water Cutoffs

Straighten insulation line using loose-laid cut insulation sheets and seal the terminated edge of modified bitumen roofing system in an effective manner. Seal off flutes in metal decking along the cutoff edge. Remove the water cut-offs to expose the insulation when resuming work, and remove the insulation sheets used for fill-in.

3.6.2 Temporary Flashing for Permanent Roofing

Provide temporary flashing at drains, curbs, walls and other penetrations and terminations of roofing sheets until permanent flashing can be applied. Remove temporary flashing before applying permanent flashing.

3.6.3 Temporary Walkways, Runways, and Platforms

Do not permit storing, walking, wheeling, and trucking directly on applied roofing materials. Provide temporary walkways, runways, and platforms of smooth clean boards, mats or planks as necessary to avoid damage to applied roofing materials, and to distribute weight to conform to live load limits of roof construction. Use rubber-tired equipment for roofing work.


Perform field tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer one day before performing tests.


During progress of the roof work, Contractor must make visual inspections as necessary to ensure compliance with specified parameters. Additionally, verify the following:

a. Materials comply with the specified requirements.

b. Materials are not installed in adverse weather conditions.

All materials are properly stored, handled and protected from moisture or other damages.

c. Equipment is in working order. Metering devices are accurate.

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 18


d. Substrates are in acceptable condition, in compliance with specification, prior to application of subsequent materials.

(1) Nailers and blocking are provided where and as needed.

Insulation substrate is smooth, properly secured to its substrate, and without excessive gaps prior to membrane application.

(2) The proper number, type, and spacing of fasteners are installed.

Membrane heating, hot mopping, or adhesive application is provided uniformly and as necessary to ensure full adhesion of roll materials. Asphalt is heated and applied within the specified temperature range.

The proper number and types of plies are installed, with the specified overlaps.

Applied membrane surface is inspected, cleaned, dry, and repaired as necessary prior to cap sheet installation.

(3) Lap areas of all plies are completely sealed.

Membrane is fully adhered without ridges, wrinkles, kinks, fishmouths, or other voids or delaminations.

Installer adheres to specified and detailed application parameters.

Associated flashing and sheet metal are installed in a timely manner in accord with the specified requirements.

Temporary protection measures are in place at the end of each work shift.

3.7.1.1 Manufacturer's Inspection

Manufacturer's technical representative must visit the site a minimum of three times during the installation for purposes of reviewing materials installation practices and adequacy of work in place. Inspections must occur during the first 20 squares of membrane installation, at mid-point of the installation, and at substantial completion, at a minimum. Additional inspections must not exceed one for each 100 squares of total roof area with the exception that follow-up inspections of previously noted deficiencies or application errors must be performed as requested by the Contracting Officer. After each inspection, submit a report, signed by the manufacturer's technical representative to the Contracting Officer within 3 working days. Note in the report overall quality of work, deficiencies and any other concerns, and recommended corrective action.

3.7.2 Samples of Roofing

Take samples per ASTM D 5147, sized 4 inch by 40 inch cut across width of modified bitumen sheets as directed by the Contracting Officer. Cut samples will be examined by the Contracting Officer for specified number of plies, proper lap width, complete lap seal, full uniform adhesive compound application and adhesion, full bond between plies, harmful foreign materials, presence of moisture, and wet insulation. Where cuts are not retained by the Contracting Officer or disposed, set cut strip back in cut

SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 19


area in bed of modified bitumen cement. Repair area of cut with new minimum two-ply modified bitumen membrane patch.

3.7.3 Roof Drain Test

After completing roofing, but prior to Government acceptance, perform the following test for watertight integrity. Plug roof drains and fill with water to edge of drain sump for 8 hours. Do not plug secondary overflow drains at the same time as adjacent primary drain. To ensure some drainage from roof, do not test all drains at same time. Measure water at beginning and end of the test period. When precipitation occurs during test period, repeat test. When water level falls, remove water, thoroughly dry, and inspect installation; repair or replace roofing at drain to provide for a properly installed watertight flashing seal. Repeat test until there is no water leakage.

3.8 INSTRUCTIONS TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

Furnish written and verbal instructions on proper maintenance procedures to designated Government personnel. Furnish instructions by a competent representative of the modified bitumen membrane manufacturer and include a minimum of 4 hours on maintenance and emergency repair of the membrane. Include a demonstration of membrane repair, and give sources of required special tools. Furnish information on safety requirements during maintenance and emergency repair operations.

3.9 INFORMATION CARD

For each roof, furnish a typewritten information card for facility Records and a card laminated in plastic and framed for interior display at roof access point, or a photoengraved 0.039 inch thick aluminum card for exterior display. Card must be 8-1/2 by 11 inch minimum. Information card must identify facility name and number; location; contract number; approximate roof area; detailed roof system description, including deck type, membrane, number of plies, method of application, manufacturer, insulation and cover board system and thickness; presence of tapered insulation for primary drainage, presence of vapor retardant material; date of completion; installing contractor identification and contact information; membrane manufacturer warranty expiration, warranty reference number, and contact information. The card must be a minimum size of 8-1/2 by 11 inch. Install card at roof top or access location as directed by the Contracting Officer and provide a paper copy to the Contracting Officer.


SECTION 07 52 00.00 20 Page 20


SECTION 07 57 13.01 22

SPRAYED ROOF COATING04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 1371-98 Standard Test method for Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissioners

ASTM C 1549-02 Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer

ASTM D 1475-90 Standard Test Method for Density of Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products

ASTM D 1644-88 Non-Volatile Content of Varnishes

ASTM D 2196-86 Standard Test Methods for Rheological Properties on Non-Newtonian Materials by Rotational (Brookfield) Viscometer

ASTM D 3960-98 Determining Volatile Organic Compound (CVOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings

ASTM E 1347-90 Standard Test Method for Color and Color-Difference Measurement by Tristimulus (Filter) Colorimetry


UL 790 (2004e8) Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ROOF SYSTEM

The roofing system shall consist of sprayed in-place waterproof elastomeric protective coating.

1.2.1 Design Requirements

1.2.2 Performance Requirements

The installed coating system shall be watertight; free of defects including coating delamination, blistering, or voids; suitable for the climatic and service conditions of the installation.

SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 1


1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Roof coating; G

Submit literature including material description, physical properties, recommended storage conditions, Material Safety Data Sheets, and shelf life expiration date.

Sealant

Submit literature including material description, physical properties, recommended storage conditions, Material Safety Data Sheets, and shelf life expiration date.

SD-07 Certificates

Materials compliance; G

Certificates of compliance attesting that the roof coating materials meet the specified requirements, and that the proposed system has been tested and meets the requirements of Class A system in accordance with UL 790.

Qualification of Applicator; G


ROOF COATING

Submit manufacturer's complete application instructions and details, and to include storage, handling, and warnings or precautions on flammability and toxicity. Include manufacturer's written recommendations for primers and for surface preparation of existing roofing and other materials and surface substrates over which sprayed coating system will be applied.

Primers; G

Submit manufacturer's complete application instructions and details, and to include storage, handling, and warnings or precautions on flammability and toxicity. Include manufacturer's written recommendations for primers and for surface preparation of metals, concrete, roofing, and other materials and surface substrates over which sprayed coating system will be applied.

SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 2


Surface preparation; G

Submit manufacturer's complete application instructions and details, and to include storage, handling, and warnings or precautions on flammability and toxicity. Include manufacturer's written recommendations for primers and for surface preparation of metals, concrete, roofing, and other materials and surface substrates over which sprayed polyurethane foam and coating system will be applied.


Warranty; G

Information Card; G


1.4.1 Qualification of Applicator

The roof system applicator shall have prior manufacturer training in the application of sprayed coating materials. Applicator shall be certified and approved by the coating manufacturer to apply the specified materials and provide the specified manufacturer warranty. Applicator shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in application of the specified materials and minimum of 10 years experience in the application of sprayed roof systems. Mechanics applying the coating materials shall have minimum 3 years prior experience in handling and spraying the type of materials specified and spray equipment must be operated by or under the direct full-time supervision of manufacturer-trained personnel. The applicator shall supply the names, locations and client contact information of 5 projects of similar size and scope that the applicator has constructed using the manufacturer's roofing products submitted for this project within the previous three years.

1.4.2 Preroofing Conference

After approval of submittals and before performing roofing system work, hold a preroofing conference to review the following:

a. Drawings and specifications and submittals related to the roof work;

b. Roof system components installation;

c. Procedure for the roof manufacturer's technical representative's onsite inspection and acceptance of the roofing substrate, the name of the manufacturer's technical representatives, the frequency of the onsite visits, distribution of copies of the inspection reports from the manufacturer's technical representative;

d. Contractor's plan for coordination of the work of the various trades involved in providing the roofing system and other components impacting the roof;

e. Quality control plan for the roof system installation;

SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 3


f. Property protection measures.

g. Safety requirements.

Preroofing conference scheduling shall be coordinated with the Contracting Officer. The conference shall be attended by the Contractor, the Contracting Officer's designated personnel, personnel directly responsible for the installation of roof system, related sheet metal work, other trades interfacing with the roof work, and representative of the sprayed polyurethane foam roofing materials manufacturer. Before beginning roofing work, provide a copy of meeting notes and action items to all attending parties. Note action items requiring resolution prior to start of roof work.





1.6.1 Delivery

Deliver and store materials in sufficient quantity to allow for uninterrupted flow of work. Materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original unopened packages, clearly marked with the manufacturer's name, brand name, description of contents, and shelf life of containerized materials.

1.6.2 Storage

Materials shall be stored in clean, dry areas, away from excessive heat, sparks, and open flame. Storage area shall be ventilated to prevent build-up of flammable gases. Maintain temperatures in the storage area below the materials' flash point and within limits recommended by the manufacturer's printed instructions.

1.6.3 Handling

Handle materials and containers during application work safely and in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Store liquids in airtight containers and keep containers closed except when removing materials. Do not use equipment or containers containing remains of dissimilar materials. Mark and remove from job site materials which have been exposed to moisture or that exceed shelf life limits. Not more than half the shelf life shall have expired when materials are applied.


Do not apply materials during inclement weather or when ice, frost, surface moisture, or visible dampness is present on the surface to be covered, or

SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 4


when precipitation is imminent. Use moisture-measuring methods and equipment as required to verify that the moisture conditions of substrate surfaces are in accordance with materials manufacturer requirements prior to application of coating materials. Substrate temperatures shall be within limits recommended by the manufacturer's printed instructions, unless specified otherwise. Use wind screen protection for all spray applications when wind speeds exceed 10 miles per hour.

1.7.1 Primer

Follow manufacturer's printed application and curing instructions, except that no primer shall be applied when ambient temperature is below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) or when ambient temperature is expected to fall below 2 degrees C (35 degrees F) during drying or curing period. Primer material and color shall be selected to promote proper substrate temperature for sprayed polyurethane foam application.

1.8 COORDINATION

Roofing operations shall be coordinated with work of other trades to ensure that components are installed as required to permit continuous self-flashing of the sprayed polyurethane foam and protective coating system. The installed roofing system shall be protected from damage. Damaged areas shall be repaired.

1.9 WORK SEQUENCE

Schedule the work in order to prevent using newly constructed roofing for storage, walking surface, or material or equipment movement. If access is necessary, protect new roofing surfaces, flashings, and mechanical equipment. Repair damage which does occur and notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of the repairs.

1.10 WARRANTY

Provide coating system material and workmanship warranties meeting specified requirements. Revision or amendment to standard manufacturer warranty shall be provided as required to comply with the specified requirements.

1.10.1 Roof System Manufacturer Warranty

Furnish a single-source coating system manufacturer's 10-year no dollar limit materials and installation workmanship warranty, for a watertight roof system construction. The warranty shall run directly to the Government and commence at time of Government's acceptance of the roof work. The warranty shall state that:

a. If within the warranty period the roof system, as installed for its intended use in the normal climatic and environmental conditions of the facility, becomes non-watertight, shows evidence of moisture intrusion into the existing roof system, blisters, cracks, ruptures, splits, delaminates, disbonds, or shows evidence of excessive weathering due to defective materials or installation workmanship, the repair or replacement of the defective and damaged coating materials of the existing roof system and correction of defective workmanship shall be the responsibility of the coating manufacturer. All costs associated with the repair or replacement work shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer.

SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 5


b. When the manufacturer or his approved applicator fail to perform the repairs within 72 hours of notification, emergency temporary repairs performed by others shall not void the warranty.

1.10.2 Coating System Installer Warranty

The coating system installer shall warrant for a period of not less than two years that the coating system, as installed, is free from defects in installation workmanship, to include coating applications. The warranty shall run directly to the Government. Correction of defective workmanship and replacement of damaged or affected materials shall be the responsibility of the system installer. All costs associated with the repair or replacement work shall be the responsibility of the installer.


Repair or replacement work that becomes necessary within the warranty period shall be approved, as required, and accomplished in a manner so as to restore the integrity of the coating system assembly and validity of the manufacturer warranty for the remainder of the manufacturer warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 COATING

2.2.1 Styrenated Acrylic Latex Roof Coating

Coating shall ne water bases, heat reflective, evastomeric and asbestos free.

Physical Performance Characteristics

Property Typical Value Test Method

Density 12.2 lbs/gal ASTM D 1475-90@ 77°F (25°C) (1.46 kg/L)

Reflectance 90.0% ASTM E 1347-90Hunter "Y"

Reflectance 83% ASTM C 1549-02

Thermal emittance 0.84 ASTM C 1371-98

Viscosity 15,000 cP (15 Pa•s) ASTM D 2196-86@ 77°F (25°C) (1991)

Nonvolatile content 67% ASTM D 1644-88

VOC level <50 g/L ASTM D 3960-98

SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 6


2.2.2 Coating Color

Finish coat shall be white .

2.3 PRIMER

Primers used shall be as required and recommended by the coating manufacturer for the substrate to be covered.

2.4 SEALANTS

Sealants shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

Protect the building structure, equipment, and other surfaces adjacent to the work from overspray from foam and coating materials. Protective coverings shall be secured and vented to prevent collection of moisture on covered surfaces. Use protective shields or barriers when spraying along open roof edges and walls to prevent uncontrolled overspray. Any surfaces damaged by roof system products shall be restored or replaced to the satisfaction of the Government at no additional expense to the Government.

3.3.1 Masking

Provide masking protection to protect surfaces immediately adjacent coating terminations at time of application. Adjust or provide new masking protection at roof perimeter to protect surfaces immediately adjacent to coating terminations and to provide for clean smooth coating termination lines.

SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 7


3.4 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS

3.4.1 Safe Working Load Limits

Do not place materials or equipment on the roof deck exceeding the indicated live load limits of the roof construction.

3.4.2 Primers

Do not dilute primers or other materials unless required and recommended by the manufacturer.

3.4.3 Material Handling

Handle materials and containers during application work safely and in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. Store liquids in airtight containers and keep containers closed except when removing materials. Do not use equipment or containers containing remains of dissimilar materials or products.

3.5 ROOF AREA PREPARATION3.5.1 Preapplication Inspection3.5.1.1 Surface Examination

Examine surfaces and correct defects that may adversely affect the roofing system application or performance.

3.5.2 Close Intake Vents

Seal off and shutdown air intake vents during coating application. Coordinate with the Contracting Officer.

3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR FOAM APPLICATION3.6.1 Existing Roof Covering Surfaces

Prepare existing roof covering systems to receive coating system in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.

3.7 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PROTECTIVE COATING APPLICATION3.7.1 Primer

Apply as recommended by the coating manufacturer.

3.7.2 Sealant

Apply as recommended by the coating manufacturer to include application in V-groove at eave and rake terminations.

3.8 COATING APPLICATION

Apply coating as recommended by the manufacturer for the substrate being coated.

3.8.1 Coating Application Clean-Up

Clean surfaces that receive roof coating which are not designated to receive such materials. Remove overspray masking materials and coverings upon completion of the coating work.

SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 8




During progress of the roof work, Contractor shall make visual inspections as necessary to insure compliance with specified parameters. Additionally, verify the following:

a. Protection measures are in place.

b. Equipment is in working order.

c. Materials are not installed in adverse weather.

d. Surfaces are cleaned and primed and substrates are in acceptable condition prior to application of materials.

e. Materials comply with specified requirements.

f. All materials are properly stored, handled and protected from moisture or other damages.

g. Coating is applied as specified.

h. Wind screens are utilized as necessary.

i. Foot traffic is prohibited on coated surfaces until completely cured.

3.10 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES

Correction of deficiencies shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the Government.

3.11 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL

All waste material, material containers, and debris shall be cleaned up daily and placed in appropriate trash containers. At completion of the work all waste material, debris, and containers shall be removed from the job site and disposed of as required by local regulations.

3.12 INFORMATION CARD

For each roof, furnish a typewritten information card for facility records and a card laminated in plastic and framed for interior display at roof access point, or a photoengraved 1 mm (0.032) inch thick aluminum card for exterior display. Card shall be 215 mm by 275 mm (8 1/2 by 11 inches) minimum. Information card shall identify facility name and number; location; contract number; approximate roof area; detailed roof system description, including deck type, identification of substrate, type coating, coating manufacturer, date of completion; installing contractor identification and contact information; manufacturer warranty expiration, warranty reference number, and contact information. The card shall be a minimum size of 8 1/2 by 11 inches. Install card at roof top or access location as directed by the Contracting Officer and provide a paper copy to the Contracting Officer.


SECTION 07 57 13.01 22 Page 9


SECTION 07 60 00

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ANSI/SPRI RD-1 (20035) Standard for Retrofit Roof Drains


ASTM A 167 (1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM B 32 (2004) Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM D 41 (2005) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

ASTM D 4586 (2007) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free


SMACNA Arch. Manual (2006) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.2 General Requirements

Finished sheet metalwork will form a weathertight construction without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, which allows for expansion and contraction. Sheet metal mechanic is repsonsible for cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the work of other trades. Coordinate installation of sheet metal items used in conjunction with roofing with roofing work to permit continuous roofing operations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Covering on flat, sloped, or curved surfaces; G



Gutters; G

Downspouts; G

Gravel stops and fascias; G

Flashing for roof drains; G

Counterflashing; G

Flashing at roof penetrations; G

Reglets; G

Scuppers; G

Copings; G

Drip edge; G

Indicate thicknesses, dimensions, fastenings and anchoring methods, expansion joints, and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and contraction. Scaled manufacturer's catalog data may be submitted for factory fabricated items.








Package and protect materials during shipment. Uncrate and inspect materials for damage, dampness, and wet-storage stains upon delivery to the job site. Remove from the site and replace damaged materials that cannot be restored to like-new condition. Handle sheet metal items to avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and ends. Store materials in dry, weather-tight, ventilated areas until immediately before installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 MATERIALS

Use any metal listed by SMACNA Arch. Manual for a particular item, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Conform to the requirements specified and to the thicknesses and configurations established in SMACNA Arch. Manual for the materials. Different items need not be of the same metal, except that if copper is selected for any exposed item, all exposed items must be copper.

Furnish sheet metal items in 8 to 10 foot lengths. Single pieces less than 8 feet long may be used to connect to factory-fabricated inside and outside corners, and at ends of runs. Factory fabricate corner pieces with minimum 12 inch legs. Provide accessories and other items essential to complete the sheet metal installation. Provide accessories made of the same or compatible materials as the items to which they are applied. Fabricate sheet metal items of the materials specified below and to the gage, thickness, or weight shown in Table I at the end of this section. Provide sheet metal items with mill finish unless specified otherwise. Where more than one material is listed for a particular item in Table I, each is acceptable and may be used except as follows:

2.2.1 Exposed Sheet Metal Items

Must be of the same material. Consider the following as exposed sheet metal: gutters, including hangers; downspouts; gravel stops and fascias; cap, valley, steeped, base, and eave flashings and related accessories.



2.2.2 Drainage

Do not use copper for an exposed item if drainage from that item will pass over exposed masonry, stonework or other metal surfaces. In addition to the metals listed in Table I, lead-coated copper may be used for such items.

2.2.3 Lead Sheet

Minimum weight 4 pounds per square foot.

2.2.4 Stainless Steel

ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, 2D Finish, fully annealed, dead-soft temper.

2.2.5 Solder

ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony.

2.2.6 Bituminous Plastic Cement

ASTM D 4586, Type I.

2.2.7 Asphalt Primer

ASTM D 41.

2.2.8 Fasteners

Use the same metal or a metal compatible with the item fastened. Use stainless steel fasteners to fasten dissimilar materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION




3.2 INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Workmanship

Make lines and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from visible wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges neatly to form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal exposed to the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction.

Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth, dry, and free of defects and projections. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered by specifications conform to the applicable requirements of SMACNA Arch. Manual, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.



Provide sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever indicated and necessary to make the work watertight. Join sheet metal items together as shown in Table II.

3.2.2 Nailing

Confine nailing of sheet metal generally to sheet metal having a maximum width of 18 inch. Confine nailing of flashing to one edge only. Space nails evenly not over 3 inch on center and approximately 1/2 inch from edge unless otherwise specified or indicated. Face nailing will not be permitted. Where sheet metal is applied to other than wood surfaces, include in shop drawings, the locations for sleepers and nailing strips required to secure the work.

3.2.3 Cleats

Provide cleats for sheet metal 18 inch and over in width. Space cleats evenly not over 12 inch on center unless otherwise specified or indicated. Unless otherwise specified, provide cleats of 2 inch wide by 3 inch long and of the same material and thickness as the sheet metal being installed. Secure one end of the cleat with two nails and the cleat folded back over the nailheads. Lock the other end into the seam. Pretin cleats for soldered seams.

3.2.4 Bolts, Rivets, and Screws

Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated or required. Provide compatible washers where required to protect surface of sheet metal and to provide a watertight connection. Provide mechanically formed joints in aluminum sheets 0.040 inch or less in thickness.

3.2.5 Seams

Straight and uniform in width and height with no solder showing on the face.

3.2.5.1 Flat-lock Seams

Finish not less than 3/4 inch wide.

3.2.5.2 Lap Seams

Finish soldered seams not less than one inch wide. Overlap seams not soldered, not less than 3 inch.

3.2.5.3 Loose-Lock Expansion Seams

Not less than 3 inch wide; provide minimum one inch movement within the joint. Completely fill the joints with the specified sealant, applied at not less than 1/8 inch thick bed.

3.2.5.4 Standing Seams

Not less than one inch high, double locked without solder.

3.2.5.5 Flat Seams

Make seams in the direction of the flow.



3.2.6 Soldering

Pretin edges of sheet metal before soldering is begun.

3.2.6.1 Edges

Scrape or wire-brush the edges of lead-coated material to be soldered to produce a bright surface. Flux brush the seams in before soldering. Treat with soldering acid flux the edges of stainless steel to be pretinned. Seal the joints in aluminum sheets of 0.040 inch or less in thickness with specified sealants.

3.2.7 Protection from Contact with Dissimilar Materials

3.2.7.1 Metal Surfaces

Paint surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.2.7.2 Wood or Other Absorptive Materials

Paint surfaces that may become repeatedly wet and in contact with metal with two coats of aluminum paint or a coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.2.8 Expansion and Contraction

Provide expansion and contraction joints at not more than 32 foot intervals for aluminum and at not more than 40 foot intervals for other metals. Provide an additional joint where the distance between the last expansion joint and the end of the continuous run is more than half the required interval. Space joints evenly. Join extruded aluminum gravel stops and fascias by expansion and contraction joints spaced not more than 12 feet apart.

3.2.9 Counterflashing

Except where indicated or specified otherwise, insert counterflashing with thru wall flashing above roof decks, extend down vertical surfaces over upturned vertical leg of roof base flashings not less than 3 inch. Fold the exposed edges of counterflashings 1/2 inch. Provide end laps in counterflashings not less than 3 inch and make it weathertight with plastic cement. Do not make lengths of metal counterflashings exceed 10 feet. Form the flashings to the required shapes before installation. Turn up the concealed edge of counterflashings built into masonry or concrete walls not less than 1/4 inch and extend not less than 2 inch into the walls. Install counterflashing to provide a spring action against base flashing. Where bituminous base flashings are provided, extend down the counter flashing as close as practicable to the top of the cant strip.

3.2.10 Metal Reglets

Provide factory fabricated caulked type or friction type reglets with a minimum opening of 1/4 inch and a depth of 1 1/4 inch, as approved.

3.2.10.1 Caulked Reglets

Provide with rounded edges and metal strap brackets or other anchors for securing to the concrete forms. Provide reglets with a core to protect them from injury during the installation. Provide built-up mitered corner



pieces for external angles. Wedge the flashing in the reglets with lead wedges every 9 inches, sealed full and solid with an approved compound.

3.2.11 Gravel Stops and Fascias

Prefabricate in the shapes and sizes indicated and in lengths not less that 8 feet. Extend flange at least 4 inch onto roofing. Install gravel stops and fascias after all plies of the roofing membrane have been applied, but before the cap sheet is applied. Prime roof flange of gravel stops and fascias on both sides with an asphalt primer. After primer has dried, set flange on roofing membrane and strip-in.Nail flange securely to wood nailer with large-head, barbed-shank roofing nails 1.5 inch long spaced not more than 3 inch on center, in two staggered rows.

3.2.11.1 Edge Strip

Hook the lower edge of fascias at least 3/4 inch over a continuous strip of the same material bent outward at an angle not more than 45 degrees to form a drip. Nail hook strip to a wood nailer at 6 inchmaximum on center. Where fastening is made to concrete or masonry, use screws spaced 12 inch on center driven in expansion shields set in the concrete or masonry. Where horizontal wood nailers are slotted to provide for insulation venting, install strips to prevent obstruction of vent slots. Where necessary, install strips over 1/16 inch thick compatible spacer or washers.

3.2.11.2 Joints

Leave open the section ends of gravel stops and fascias 1/4 inch and backed with a formed flashing plate, mechanically fastened in place and lapping each section end a minimum of 4 inch set laps in plastic cement. Face nailing will not be permitted. Install prefabricated aluminum gravel stops and fascias in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and details.

3.2.12 Metal Drip Edge

Provide a metal drip edge, designed to allow water run-off to drip free of underlying construction, at eaves and rakes prior to the application of roofing shingles. Apply directly on the wood deck at the eaves and over the underlay along the rakes. Extend back from the edge of the deck not more than 3 inch and secure with compatible nails spaced not more than 10 inch on center along upper edge.

3.2.13 Gutters

The hung type of shape indicated and supported on underside by brackets that permit free thermal movement of the gutter. Provide gutters in sizes indicated complete with mitered corners, end caps, outlets, brackets, and other accessories necessary for installation. Bead with hemmed edge or reinforce the outer edge of gutter with a stiffening bar not less than 3/4 by 3/16 inch of material compatible with gutter. Fabricate gutters in sections not less than 8 feet. Lap the sections a minimum of one inch in the direction of flow or provide with concealed splice plate 6 inch minimum. Join the gutters, other than aluminum, by riveted and soldered joints. Join aluminum gutters with riveted sealed joints. Provide expansion-type slip joints midway between outlets. Install gutters below slope line of the roof so that snow and ice can slide clear. Support gutters on adjustable hangers spaced not more than 30 inch on center . Adjust gutters to slope uniformly to outlets, with high points occurring



midway between outlets. Fabricate hangers and fastenings from metals.

3.2.14 Downspouts

Space supports for downspouts according to the manufacturer's recommendation for the masonry or steel substrate. Types, shapes and sizes are indicated. Provide complete including elbows and offsets. Provide downspouts in approximately 10 foot lengths. Provide end joints to telescope not less than 1/2 inch and lock longitudinal joints. Provide gutter outlets with wire ball strainers for each outlet. Provide strainers to fit tightly into outlets and be of the same material used for gutters. Keep downspouts not less than one inch away from walls. Fasten to the walls at top, bottom, and at an intermediate point not to exceed 5 feet on center with leader straps or concealed rack-and-pin type fasteners. Form straps and fasteners of metal compatible with the downspouts.

3.2.14.1 Terminations

Neatly fit into the drainage connection the downspouts terminating in drainage lines and fill the joints with a portland cement mortar cap sloped away from the downspout. Provide downspouts terminating in splash blocks with elbow-type fittings. Provide splash pans as specified.

3.2.15 Flashing for Roof Drains

Provide a 30 inch square sheet indicated. Taper insulation to drain from 24 inch out. Set flashing on finished felts in a full bed of asphalt roof cement, ASTM D 4586. Heavily coat the drain flashing ring with asphalt roof cement. Clamp the roof membrane, flashing sheet, and stripping felt in the drain clamping ring. Secure clamps so that felts and drain flashing are free of wrinkles and folds. Retrofit roof drains must conform to ANSI/SPRI RD-1.

3.2.16 Scuppers

Line interior of scupper openings with sheet metal. Extend the lining through and project outside of the wall to form a drip on the bottom edge and form to return not less than one inch against the face of the outside wall at the top and sides. Fold outside edges under 1/2 inch on all sides. Provide the perimeter of the lining approximately 1/2 inch less than the perimeter of the scupper. Join the top and sides of the lining on the roof deck side to a closure flange by a locked and soldered joint. Join the bottom edge by a locked and soldered joint to the closure flange, where required, form with a ridge to act as a gravel stop around the scupper inlet. Provide surfaces to receive the scupper lining and coat with bituminous plastic cement.

3.2.17 Flashing at Roof Penetrations

Provide metal flashing for all pipes and conduits projecting through the roof surface and similar items supported by or attached to the roof deck.

3.2.18 Single Pipe Vents

See Table I, footnote (c). Set flange of sleeve in bituminous plastic cement and nail 3 inch on center. Bend the top of sleeve over and extend down into the vent pipe a minimum of 2 inch.



3.2.19 Flashing Boots

Provide pre-manufactured flexible EPDM boot and metal base and EPDM boot with attached metal base ring. Base and boot shall be secured per manufacturers recommendations for a water tight installation.

3.2.20 Copings

Provide coping using sheets 8 to 10 feet long. Fabricate joint plates of the same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous edge strips with 3/4 inch engagement for the external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners in the interior leg. Miter corners and seal watertight. Provide 12" wide concealed back-up plate with 6" wide top cover plate at joints.

3.3 PAINTING

Field-paint sheet metal for separation of dissimilar materials.

3.4 CLEANING

Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, handling marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings and drilling debris, and scrub-clean. Free the exposed metal surfaces of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, and solder or weld marks.

3.5 REPAIRS TO FINISH

Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and as approved. Repair damaged surfaces caused by scratches, blemishes, and variations of color and surface texture. Replace items which cannot be repaired.


Establish and maintain a Quality Control Plan for sheet metal used in conjunction with roofing to assure compliance of the installed sheet metalwork with the contract requirements. Remove work that is not in compliance with the contract and replace or correct. Include quality control, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of sheet metal workers; condition of substrate.

b. Verification that specified material is provided and installed.

c. Inspection of sheet metalwork, for proper size(s) and thickness(es), fastening and joining, and proper installation.

3.6.1 Procedure

Submit for approval prior to start of roofing work. Include a checklist of points to be observed. Document the actual quality control observations and inspections. Furnish a copy of the documentation to the Contracting Officer at the end of each day.



TABLE I. SHEET METAL WEIGHTS, THICKNESSES, AND GAGES

Copper, Ounces Per Stainless Sheet Metal Items Square Steel, Foot Inch __________________________________________________________

Downspouts andleaders............. .037 Downspout straps,2-inch.............. .050Scupper lining...... 0.37

Flashings:Cap (Counter-flashing) .037 Roof drain.......... 16(b)Pipe vent sleeve(d)Coping.............. .050 Gravel stops andfascias:Edge strip.......... .037 Gutters:Gutter section....... .037 Continuous cleat..... .050 Hangers,dimensions......... 1 inch x - - .037 inchReglets (c)......... .010 (a) Brass.

(b) May be lead weighing 4 pounds per square foot. (c) 2.5 pound minimum lead sleeve with 4 inch flange. Where lead sleeve is impractical, refer to paragraph entitled "Single Pipe Vents" for optional material.

TABLE II. SHEET METAL JOINTSTYPE OF JOINT

Item Designa- tion Stainless Steel Remarks______________________________________________________________________

Flashings

Edge Butt strip

Gutters 1.5 inch lap, Aluminum producers riveted and recommended hard soldered setting sealant for



TABLE II. SHEET METAL JOINTSTYPE OF JOINT

Item Designa- tion Stainless Steel Remarks______________________________________________________________________

locked aluminum joints.

(a) Provide a 3 inch lap elastomeric flashing with manufacturer's recommended sealant.

(b) Seal polyvinyl chloride reglet with manufacturer's recommended sealant.




SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM E 1399 (1997; R 2005) Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths of Architectural Joint Systems

ASTM E 1966 (2007) Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

ASTM E 814 (2006) Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops


FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM AS 4991 (2001) Approval of Firestop Contractors

FM P7825a (2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection


UL 1479 (2003; Rev thru Apr 2007) Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

UL 2079 (2004; Mar 2006) Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems

UL 723 (2003; Rev thru May 2005) Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

UL Fire Resistance (2007) Fire Resistance Directory

1.2 SUBMITTALS




approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Firestopping Materials.

Detail drawings including manufacturer's descriptive data, typical details conforming to UL Fire Resistance or other details certified by another nationally recognized testing laboratory, installation instructions or UL listing details for a firestopping assembly in lieu of fire-test data or report. For those firestop applications for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgement, derived from similar UL system designs or other tests, shall be submitted for review and approval prior to installation. Submittal shall indicate the firestopping material to be provided for each type of application. When more than a total of 5 penetrations and/or construction joints are to receive firestopping, provide drawings that indicate location, "F" and "T" ratings, and type of application.

SD-07 Certificates

Firestopping Materials.

Certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with the specified requirements. In lieu of certificates, drawings showing UL classified materials as part of a tested assembly may be provided. Drawings showing evidence of testing by an alternate nationally recognized independent laboratory may be substituted.

Installer Qualifications.

Documentation of training and experience.

Inspection.

Manufacturer's representative certification stating that firestopping work has been inspected and found to be applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations and the specified requirements.


Firestopping shall consist of furnishing and installing tested and listed firestop systems, combination of materials, or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke and gases, and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceiling-floor assemblies, including through-penetrations and construction joints and gaps. Through-penetrations include the annular space around pipes, tubes, conduit, wires, cables and vents. Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion, contraction, wind, or seismic movement; firestopping material shall not interfere with the required movement of the joint. Gaps requiring firestopping include gaps between the curtain wall and the floor slab and between the top of the fire-rated walls and the roof or floor deck above.




Materials shall be delivered in the original unopened packages or containers showing name of the manufacturer and the brand name. Materials shall be stored off the ground and shall be protected from damage and exposure to elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site.

1.5 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

The Contractor shall engage an experienced Installer who is:

a. FM Research approved in accordance with FM AS 4991, or

b. Certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary staff, training, and a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. The Installer shall have been trained by a direct representative of the manufacturer (not distributor or agent) in the proper selection and installation procedures.

1.6 COORDINATION

The specified work shall be coordinated with other trades. Firestopping materials, at penetrations of pipes and ducts, shall be applied prior to insulating, unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping. Firestopping materials at building joints and construction gaps shall be applied prior to completion of enclosing walls or assemblies. Cast-in-place firestop devices shall be located and installed in place before concrete placement. Pipe, conduit or cable bundles shall be installed through cast-in-place device after concrete placement but before area is concealed or made inaccessible.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

Firestopping materials shall consist of commercially manufactured, asbestos-free, noncombustible products FM P7825a approved, or UL listed, for use with applicable construction and penetrating items, complying with the following minimum requirements:

2.1.1 Fire Hazard Classification

Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723. Material shall be an approved firestopping material as listed in UL Fire Resistance or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

2.1.2 Toxicity

Material shall be nontoxic to humans at all stages of application or during fire conditions.



2.1.3 Fire Resistance Rating

Firestop systems shall be UL Fire Resistance listed or FM P7825a approved with "F" rating at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected, except that "F" rating may be 3 hours in through-penetrations of 4 hour fire rated wall or floor. Firestop systems shall also have "T" rating where required.

2.1.3.1 Through-Penetrations

Firestopping materials for through-penetrations, as described in paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall provide "F" and "T" fire resistance ratings in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479. Fire resistance ratings shall be as follows:

a. Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Walls and Partitions: F Rating = 1 hour for Rating of wall or partition being penetrated.

b. Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Floors, Floor-Ceiling Assemblies and the ceiling membrane of Roof-Ceiling Assemblies: F Rating = 1 hour, T Rating = 1 hour.

2.1.3.2 Construction Joints and Gaps

Fire resistance ratings of construction joints, as described in paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and gaps such as those between floor slabs or roof decks and curtain walls shall be the same as the construction in which they occur. Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have been tested per ASTM E 119, ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating. Systems installed at construction joints shall meet the cycling requirements of ASTM E 1399 or UL 2079.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Areas to receive firestopping shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, or loose materials which may affect the fitting or fire resistance of the firestopping system. For cast-in-place firestop devices, formwork or metal deck to receive device prior to concrete placement shall be sound and capable of supporting device. Surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Firestopping material shall completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration, subject to tolerance established by the manufacturer. Firestopping systems for filling floor voids 4 inches or more in any direction shall be capable of supporting the same load as the floor is designed to support or shall be protected by a permanent barrier to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area. Firestopping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Tested and listed firestop systems shall be provided in the following locations, except in floor slabs on grade:

a. Penetrations of duct, conduit, tubing, cable and pipe through floors and through fire-resistance rated walls, partitions, and ceiling-floor assemblies.



b. Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases, elevator shafts, and utility chutes.

c. Gaps at the intersection of floor slabs and curtain walls, including inside of hollow curtain walls at the floor slab.

d. Gaps at perimeter of fire-resistance rated walls and partitions, such as between the top of the walls and the bottom of roof decks.

e. Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions.

f. Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of the construction.

3.2.1 Insulated Pipes and Ducts

Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass through firestopping, unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping. Thermal insulation shall be replaced with a material having equal thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics.

3.2.2 Fire Dampers

Fire dampers shall be installed and firestopped in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.

3.2.3 Data and Communication Cabling

Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with re-enterable firestopping products that do not cure over time. Firestopping shall be modular devices, containing built-in self-sealing intumescent inserts. Firestopping devices shall allow for cable moves, adds or changes without the need to remove or replace any firestop materials.

3.3 INSPECTION

For Navy projects, install one of each type of penetration and have it inspected and accepted by the Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer prior to the installation of the remainder of the penetrations. At this inspection, the manufacturer's technical representative of the firestopping material shall be present. For all projects,the firestopped areas shall not be covered or enclosed until inspection is complete and approved by the manufacturer's technical representative. The manufacturer's representative shall inspect the applications initially to ensure adequate preparations (clean surfaces suitable for application, etc.) and periodically during the work to assure that the completed work has been accomplished according to the manufacturer's written instructions and the specified requirements. The Contractor shall submit written reports indicating locations of and types of penetrations and types of firestopping used at each location; type shall be recorded by UL listed printed numbers.




SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 509 (2006) Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material

ASTM C 734 (2006) Low-Temperature Flexibility of Latex Sealants After Artificial Weathering

ASTM C 919 (2002) Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications



ASTM D 217 (2002) Cone Penetration of Lubricating Grease


1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Sealants

Primers

Bond breakers

Backstops

Manufacturer's descriptive data including storage requirements, shelf life, curing time, instructions for mixing and application, and primer data (if required). Provide a copy of the Material



Safety Data Sheet for each solvent, primer or sealant material.

SD-07 Certificates

Sealant

Certificates of compliance stating that the materials conform to the specified requirements.


Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F.





Deliver materials to the job site in unopened manufacturers' external shipping containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, color, and material designation clearly marked thereon. Lable elastomeric sealant containers to identify type, class, grade, and use. Carefully handle and store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials or subjection to sustained temperatures exceeding 90 degrees F or less than 0 degrees F.


1.6.1 Compatibility with Substrate

Verify that each of the sealants are compatible for use with joint substrates.

1.6.2 Joint Tolerance

Provide joint tolerances in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

1.7 SPECIAL WARRANTY

Guarantee sealant joint against failure of sealant and against water penetration through each sealed joint for five years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled



content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.


2.2 SEALANTS

Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates to which it will be applied.

2.2.1 Interior Sealant

Provide ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use NT. Location(s) and color(s) of sealant for the following:

LOCATION COLOR

a. Small voids between walls or partitions and adjacent lockers, casework, shelving, door frames, built-in or surface-mounted Match adjacent equipment and fixtures, and similar items. surface color

b. Perimeter of frames at doors, windows, Match adjacent and access panels which adjoin exposed surface color interior concrete and masonry surfaces.

c. Joints of interior masonry walls and Match adjacent partitions which adjoin columns, pilasters, surface color concrete walls, and exterior walls unless otherwise detailed.

d. Joints between edge members for acoustical Match adjacent tile and adjoining vertical surfaces. surface color

e. Interior locations, not otherwise indicated Match adjacent or specified, where small voids exist between surface color materials specified to be painted.

f. Joints formed between tile floors and tile Match adjacent base cove; joints between tile and dissimilar surface color materials; joints occuring where substrates change.

2.2.2 Exterior Sealant

For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Provide location(s) and color(s) of sealant as follows:

LOCATION COLOR

a. Joints and recesses formed where frames Match adjacent and subsills of windows, doors, louvers, surface color



LOCATION COLOR and vents adjoin masonry, concrete, or metal frames. Use sealant at both exterior and interior surfaces of exterior wall Match adjacent penetrations. surface color

b. Joints between new and existing exterior Match adjacent masonry walls. surface color

c. Masonry joints where shelf angles occur. Match adjacent surface color d. Expansion and control joints. Match adjacent surface color

e. Interior face of expansion joints in Match adjacent exterior concrete or masonry walls where surface color metal expansion joint covers are not required.

f. Voids where items pass through exterior Match adjacent walls. surface color

g. Metal reglets, where flashing is inserted Match adjacent into masonry joints, and where flashing is surface color penetrated by coping dowels.

h. Metal-to-metal joints where sealant is Match adjacent indicated or specified. surface color

i. Joints between ends of gravel stops, fascias, Match adjacent copings, and adjacent walls. surface color

2.2.3 Floor Joint Sealant

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Provide location(s) and color(s) of sealant as follows:

LOCATION COLOR

a. Seats of metal thresholds for exterior doors. Gray

2.2.4 Acoustical Sealant

Rubber or polymer-based acoustical sealant conforming to ASTM C 919 must have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Acoustical sealant must have a consistency of 250 to 310 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 217, and must remain flexible and adhesive after 500 hours of accelerated weathering as specified in ASTM C 734, and must be non-staining.

2.2.5 Preformed Sealant

Provide preformed sealant of polybutylene or isoprene-butylene based pressure sensitive weather resistant tape or bead sealant capable of sealing out moisture, air and dust when installed as recommended by the manufacturer. At temperatures from minus 30 to plus 160 degrees F, the



sealant must be non-bleeding and no loss of adhesion.

2.2.5.1 Foam Strip

Provide foam strip of polyurethane foam. Provide foam strip capable of sealing out moisture, air, and dust when installed and compressed as recommended by the manufacturer. Service temperature must beminus 40 to plus 275 degrees F. Furnish untreated strips with adhesive to hold them in place. Do not allow adhesive to stain or bleed into adjacent finishes. Saturate treated strips with butylene waterproofing or impregnated with asphalt.

2.3 PRIMERS

Provide a nonstaining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application.

2.4 BOND BREAKERS Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent adhesion of the sealant to backing or to bottom of the joint.

2.5 BACKSTOPS

Provide glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide 25 to 33 percent oversized backing for closed cell and 40 to 50 percent oversized backing for open cell material, unless otherwise indicated. Make backstop material compatible with sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as backstops.

2.5.1 Rubber

Conform to ASTM D 1056, Type 2, closed cell, Class A , round cellular rubber sponge backing.

2.5.2 Synthetic Rubber

Conform to ASTM C 509, Option I , Type II preformed rods and tubes for Synthetic rubber backing.

2.5.3 Neoprene

Conform to ASTM D 1056, closed cell expanded neoprene cord Type 2, Class C, Grade 2C2 for Neoprene backing.

2.6 CLEANING SOLVENTS

Provide type(s) recommended by the sealant manufacturer except for aluminum and bronze surfaces that will be in contact with sealant.

PART 3 EXECUTION


a. Recycled Content LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content for LEED submittal requirements, see



Section 01 77 00.00 20, "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES".






Clean surfaces from dirt frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion. Remove oil and grease with solvent. Surfaces must be wiped dry with clean cloths. When resealing an existing joint, remove existing calk or sealant prior to applying new sealant. For surface types not listed below, contact sealant manufacturer for specific recommendations.

3.3.1 Steel Surfaces

Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical or would damage finish work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove protective coatings by sandblasting or using a residue-free solvent.

3.3.2 Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces

Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact with sealant. When masking tape is used as a protective coating, remove tape and any residual adhesive just prior to sealant application. For removing protective coatings and final cleaning, use nonstaining solvents recommended by the manufacturer of the item(s) containing aluminum or bronze surfaces.

3.3.3 Concrete and Masonry Surfaces

Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or other such materials, remove materials by sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove laitance, efflorescence and loose mortar from the joint cavity.

3.3.4 Wood Surfaces

Keep wood surfaces to be in contact with sealants free of splinters and sawdust or other loose particles.

3.4 SEALANT PREPARATION

Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to the sealant. Mix multicomponent elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's



instructions.

3.5 APPLICATION

3.5.1 Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios

a. Acceptable Ratios:

JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH Minimum Maximum

For metal, glass, or other nonporous surfaces:

1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch over 1/4 inch 1/2 of Equal to width width

For wood, concrete, masonry:

1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch 1/4 inch Equal to width

Over 1/2 inch to 2 inch 1/2 inch 5/8 inch Over 2 inch. (As recommended by sealant manufacturer)

b. Unacceptable Ratios: Where joints of acceptable width-to-depth ratios have not been provided, clean out joints to acceptable depths and grind or cut to acceptable widths without damage to the adjoining work. Grinding is not required on metal surfaces.

3.5.2 Masking Tape

Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears. Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and tooled.

3.5.3 Backstops

Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the back or bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide a joint of the depth specified. Install backstops in the following locations:

a. Where indicated.

b. Where backstop is not indicated but joint cavities exceed the acceptable maximum depths specified in paragraph entitled, "Joint Width-to-Depth Ratios".

3.5.4 Primer

Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out loose particles from joints. Where recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer to joints in concrete masonry units, wood, and other porous surfaces in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply primer to exposed finish surfaces.



3.5.5 Bond Breaker

Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces. Carefully apply the bond breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond breaker.

3.5.6 Sealants

Provide a sealant compatible with the material(s) to which it is applied. Do not use a sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and can not be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions with a gun having a nozzle that fits the joint width. Force sealant into joints to fill the joints solidly without air pockets. Tool sealant after application to ensure adhesion. Make sealant uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles. Upon completion of sealant application, roughen partially filled or unfilled joints, apply sealant, and tool smooth as specified. Apply sealer over the sealant when and as specified by the sealant manufacturer.

3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

3.6.1 Protection

Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be used for this purpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled.

3.6.2 Final Cleaning

Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains and leave the work in a clean and neat condition.

a. Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces: Immediately scrape off fresh sealant that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Allow excess sealant to cure for 24 hour then remove by wire brushing or sanding.

b. Metal and Other Non-Porous Surfaces: Remove excess sealant with a solvent-moistened cloth.




SECTION 08 11 13

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.





ASTM A 879/A 879M (2006) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, zinc Coated by the Electrolytic Process for Applications Requiring Designation of the Coating Mass on Each Surface



BHMA A115 (2006)(Complete Set - Spec dates Vary) Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware (Incl A115.1 (1990), A115.2 (1987), A115.4 (1994), A115.5 (1992), A115.6 (1993), A115.12 (1994), A115.13 (1991), A115.14 (1994), A115.15 (1994), A115.16 (1990), A115.17 (1994), A115.18 (1994)


NFPA 105 (2006) Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies

NFPA 252 (2003) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

NFPA 80 (2007) Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives



STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)

SDI/DOOR 111 (2000) Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and Accessories

SDI/DOOR A250.11 (2001) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames

SDI/DOOR A250.6 (2003) Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement - Application)

SDI/DOOR A250.8 (2003) Recommended Specification for Standard Steel Doors and Frames


UL 10B (1997; Rev thru Oct 2001) Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Doors; G

Frames; G

Accessories

Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware provisions, method of glazing, and installation details.

Schedule of doors; G

Schedule of frames; G

Submit door and frame locations.

SD-03 Product Data

Doors; G

Frames; G

Accessories

Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames, and accessories. Include data and details on door construction, panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge construction. When "custom hollow metal doors" are provided in lieu of "standard steel doors," provide additional details and data sufficient for comparison to SDI/DOOR A250.8 requirements.










Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective wrappings or packaging. Strap knock-down frames in bundles. Provide temporary steel spreaders securely fastened to the bottom of each welded frame. Store doors and frames on platforms under cover in clean, dry, ventilated, and accessible locations, with 1/4 inch airspace between doors. Remove damp or wet packaging immediately and wipe affected surfaces dry. Replace damaged materials with new.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 STANDARD STEEL DOORS

SDI/DOOR A250.8, except as specified otherwise. Prepare doors to receive door hardware. Undercut where indicated. Exterior doors shall have top edge closed flush and sealed to prevent water intrusion. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2.1 Classification - Level, Performance, Model2.2.1.1 Extra Heavy Duty Doors

SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 1 with core construction as required by the manufacturer for interior doors and for exterior doors, of size(s) and design(s) indicated. Where vertical stiffenercores are required, the space between the stiffeners shall be filled with mineral board insulation. Provide Level 3 for all doors .

2.3 ACCESSORIES

2.3.1 Louvers

2.3.1.1 Interior Louvers

SDI/DOOR 111, Louvers shall be stationary sightproof type where scheduled. Detachable moldings on room or non security side of door; on security side of door, moldings to be integral part of louver. Form louver frames of 20 gage steel and louver blades of a minimum 24 gage. Sightproof louvers to be inverted "Y" blade design with minimum 40 percent net-free opening.



2.3.1.2 Exterior Louvers

Louvers shall be inverted "Z" type with minimum of 35 percent net-free opening. Weld or tenon louver blades to continuous channel frame and weld assembly to door to form watertight assembly. Form louvers of hot-dip galvanized steel of same gage as door facings. Louvers shall have steel-framed insect screens secured to room side and readily removable. Provide aluminum wire cloth, 18 by 18 or 18 by 16 inch mesh, for insect screens . Net-free louver area to be before screening.

2.3.2 Astragals

For pairs of exterior steel doors which will not have aluminum astragals or removable mullions, as specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE provide overlapping steel astragals with the doors. For interior pairs of fire rated and smoke control doors, provide stainless steel astragals complying with NFPA 80 for fire rated assemblies and NFPA 105 for smoke control assemblies.

2.3.3 Moldings

Provide moldings around glass of interior and exterior doors and louvers of interior doors. Provide nonremovable moldings on outside of exterior doors and on corridor side of interior doors. Other moldings may be stationary or removable. Secure inside moldings to stationary moldings, or provide snap-on moldings. Muntins shall interlock at intersections and shall be fitted and welded to stationary moldings.

2.4 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 1 , except as otherwise specified. Form frames to sizes and shapes indicated, with welded corners or knock-down field-assembled corners. Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions, cased openings, and interior glazed panels, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4.1 Welded Frames

Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or continuously weld stops and rabbets. Grind welds smooth.

Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural Welding Code Sections 1 through 6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M and in accordance with the practice specified by the producer of the metal being welded.

2.4.2 Knock-Down Frames

Design corners for simple field assembly by concealed tenons, splice plates, or interlocking joints that produce square, rigid corners and a tight fit and maintain the alignment of adjoining members. Provide locknuts for bolted connections.

2.4.3 Mullions and Transom Bars

Mullions and transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction and be a member with heads and jambs butt-welded thereto or knock-down for field assembly. Bottom of door mullions shall have adjustable floor anchors and spreader connections.



2.4.4 Stops and Beads

Form stops and beads from 20 gage steel. Provide for glazed and other openings in standard steel frames. Secure beads to frames with oval-head, countersunk Phillips self-tapping sheet metal screws or concealed clips and fasteners. Space fasteners approximately 12 to 16 inch on center. Miter molded shapes at corners. Butt or miter square or rectangular beads at corners.

2.4.5 Cased Openings

Fabricate frames for cased openings of same material, gage, and assembly as specified for metal door frames, except omit door stops and preparation for hardware.

2.4.6 Anchors

Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide steel anchors, zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not lighter than 18 gage.

2.4.6.1 Wall Anchors

Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more than 7.5 feet in height, provide one additional anchor for each jamb for each additional 2.5 feet or fraction thereof.

a. Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps or 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;

b. Stud partitions: Weld or otherwise securely fasten anchors to backs of frames. Design anchors to be fastened to closed steel studs with sheet metal screws, and to open steel studs by wiring or welding;

c. Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete or masonry with expansion bolts in accordance with SDI/DOOR 111; and

2.4.6.2 Floor Anchors

Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each jamb member. Where floor fill occurs, terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor levels and support by adjustable extension clips resting on and anchored to the structural slabs.

2.5 FIRE AND SMOKE DOORS AND FRAMES

NFPA 80 and NFPA 105 and this specification. The requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 105 shall take precedence over details indicated or specified.

2.5.1 Door and Frame Labels

Fire doors and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (FM), or Warnock Hersey International (WHI) attesting to the rating required. Testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10B. Labels shall be metal with raised



letters, and shall bear the name or file number of the door and frame manufacturer. Labels shall be permanently affixed at the factory to frames and to the hinge edge of the door. Door labels shall not be painted.

2.5.2 Oversized Doors

For fire doors and frames which exceed the size for which testing and labeling are available, furnish certificates stating that the doors and frames are identical in design, materials, and construction to a door which has been tested and meets the requirements for the class indicated.

2.5.3 Astragal on Fire and Smoke Doors

On pairs of labeled fire doors, conform to NFPA 80 and UL requirements. On smoke control doors, conform to NFPA 105.

2.6 WEATHERSTRIPPING

As specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.

2.7 HARDWARE PREPARATION

Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.6. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8 and SDI/DOOR A250.6. For additional requirements refer to BHMA A115. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware at the project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware into the door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8, as applicable. Punch door frames , with the exception of frames that will have weatherstripping or lightproof or soundproof gasketing, to receive a minimum of two rubber or vinyl door silencers on lock side of single doors and one silencer for each leaf at heads of double doors. Set lock strikes out to provide clearance for silencers.

2.8 FINISHES

2.8.1 Hot-Dip Zinc-Coated and Factory-Primed Finish

Fabricate exterior and interior doors and frames from hot dipped zinc coated steel, alloyed type, that complies with ASTM A 924/A 924Mand ASTM A 653/A 653M. The coating weight shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements for coatings having 0.4 ounces per square foot, total both sides, i.e., A40. Repair damaged zinc-coated surfaces by the application of zinc dust paint. Thoroughly clean and chemically treat to insure maximum paint adhesion. Factory prime as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8. .

2.8.2 Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Anchors and Accessories

Provide electrolytically deposited zinc-coated steel in accordance with ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Quality, Coating Class A. Phosphate treat and factory prime zinc-coated surfaces as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.

2.9 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP

Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp, and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress exposed



welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame sections for use with the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed and in true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable. On wraparound frames for masonry partitions, provide a throat opening 1/8 inch larger than the actual masonry thickness. Design frames in exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow sufficient space between the inside back of trim and masonry to receive sealant.

2.9.1 Grouted Frames

For frames to be installed in exterior walls and to be filled with mortar or grout, fill the stops with strips of rigid insulation to keep the grout out of the stops and to facilitate installation of stop-applied head and jamb seals.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Frames

Set frames in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with expansion bolts or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction. Backfill frames with mortar. Coat inside of frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous material. For frames in exterior walls, ensure that stops are filled with rigid insulation before grout is placed.

3.3.2 Doors

Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8. After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.



3.3.3 Fire and Smoke Doors and Frames

Install fire doors and frames, including hardware, in accordance with NFPA 80. Install fire rated smoke doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 105.

3.4 PROTECTION

Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as directed. Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed. Clean thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same type used for shop coat.

3.5 CLEANING

Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly. Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks.




SECTION 08 11 16

ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

AAMA 2604 (2005) Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels





ASTM E 283 (2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

ASTM E 331 (2000) Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference


1.2.1 Structural

Shapes and thicknesses of framing members shall be sufficient to withstand the design wind load indicated with a deflection of not more than 1/175 times the length of the member and a safety factor of not less than 1.65. Provide glazing beads, moldings, and trim of not less than 0.050 inch nominal thickness.

1.2.2 Air Infiltration

When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, air infiltration shall not exceed 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square footof fixed area at a test pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot ( 50 mile per hour wind).



1.2.3 Water Penetration

When tested in accordance with ASTM E 331, there shall be no water penetration at a pressure of 8 pounds per square foot of fixed area.

1.2.4 Minimum Antiterrorism Performance Criteria

Meet the minimum antiterrorism performance criteria as specified in Section 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Doors and frames; G

Show elevations of each door type, size of doors and frames, metal gages, details of door and frame construction, methods of anchorage, glazing details, weatherstripping, provisions for and location of hardware, and details of installation.


Doors and frames

Submit detail specifications and instructions for installation, adjustments, cleaning, and maintenance.








Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Provide storage space in dry location with adequate ventilation, free from dust or water, and easily accessible for inspection and handling. Stack materials on nonabsorptive strips or wood platforms. Do not cover doors and frames with tarps, polyethylene film, or similar coverings. Protect finished surfaces during shipping and handling using manufacturer's standard method, except that no coatings or lacquers shall be applied to surfaces to which calking and glazing compounds must adhere.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in Part 3. Submit manufacturer's technical date sheets for specified coatings and solvents. Note: VOC emissions from paints and coatings must not exceed the VOC and chemical component limits of Green Seal's Standard GS-11 requirements.

2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES

Swing-type aluminum doors and frames of size, design, and location indicated. Provide doors complete with frames, framing members , subframes , transoms , adjoining sidelights , adjoining window wall , trim, and accessories.

2.3 MATERIALS

2.3.1 Anchors

Stainless steel .

2.3.2 Weatherstripping

Continuous wool pile, silicone treated, or type recommended by door manufacturer.



2.3.3 Aluminum Alloy for Doors and Frames

ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions. ASTM B 209, alloy and temper best suited for aluminum sheets and strips.

2.3.4 Fasteners

Hard aluminum or stainless steel.


ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.3.6 Aluminum Paint

Aluminum door manufacturer's standard aluminum paint.

2.4 FABRICATION

2.4.1 Aluminum Frames

Extruded aluminum shapes with contours approximately as indicated. Provide removable glass stops and glazing beads for frames accommodating fixed glass. Use countersunk stainless steel Phillips screws for exposed fastenings, and space not more than 12 inches on center. Mill joints in frame members to a hairline fit, reinforce, and secure mechanically.

2.4.2 Aluminum Doors

Of type, size, and design indicated and not less than 1-3/4 inch thick. Minimum wall thickness, 0.125 inch, except beads and trim, 0.050 inch. Door sizes shown are nominal and shall include standard clearances as follows: 0.093 inch at hinge and lock stiles, 0.125 inch between meeting stiles, 0.125 inch at top rails, 0.187 inch between bottom and threshold, and 0.687 inch between bottom and floor. Bevel single-acting doors 0.063 or 0.125 inch at lock, hinge, and meeting stile edges.

2.4.2.1 Full Glazed Stile and Rail Doors

Doors shall have wide stiles and rails as indicated. Fabricate from extruded aluminum hollow seamless tubes or from a combination of open-shaped members interlocked or welded together. Fasten top and bottom rail together by means of welding or by 3/8 or 1/2 inch diameter cadmium-plated tensioned steel tie rods. Provide an adjustable mechanism of jack screws or other methods in the top rail to allow for minor clearance adjustments after installation.

2.4.3 Welding and Fastening

Where possible, locate welds on unexposed surfaces. Dress welds on exposed surfaces smoothly. Select welding rods, filler wire, and flux to produce a uniform texture and color in finished work. Remove flux and spatter from surfaces immediately after welding. Exposed screws or bolts will be permitted only in inconspicuous locations, and shall have countersunk heads. Weld concealed reinforcements for hardware in place.


Provide on stiles and rails of exterior doors. Fit into slots which are



integral with doors or frames. Weatherstripping shall be replaceable without special tools, and adjustable at meeting rails of pairs of doors. Installation shall allow doors to swing freely and close positively. Air leakage of a single leaf weatherstripped door shall not exceed 1.25 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.

2.4.5 Anchors

On the backs of subframes, provide anchors of the sizes and shapes indicated for securing subframes to adjacent construction. Anchor transom bars at ends and mullions at head and sill. Place anchors near top and bottom of each jamb and at intermediate points not more than 25 inch apart.

2.4.6 Provisions for Hardware

Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE. Deliver hardware templates and hardware (except field-applied hardware) to the door manufacturer for use in fabrication of aluminum doors and frames. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and frames at the factory to receive template hardware. Provide doors to receive surface-applied hardware, except push plates, kick plates, and mop plates, with reinforcing only; drill and tap in the field. Provide hardware reinforcements of stainless steel or steel with hot-dipped galvanized finish, and secure with stainless steel screws.

2.4.7 Finishes

Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish of organic coating.

2.4.7.1 Organic Coating

Clean and prime exposed aluminum surfaces. Provide a high-performance finish in accordance with AAMA 2604 with total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. The finish color shall be as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION






Provide invoices, plant slips, certification indicating total quantities of waste material, and amounts diverted by way of means as stated above for



LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 77 00.00 20, "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES".

3.3 INSTALLATION

Plumb, square, level, and align frames and framing members to receive doors , transoms , adjoining sidelights , and , adjoining window walls. Anchor frames to adjacent construction as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Anchor bottom of each frame to rough floor construction with 3/32 inch thick stainless steel angle clips secured to back of each jamb and to floor construction; use stainless steel bolts and expansion rivets for fastening clip anchors. Hang doors to produce clearances specified in paragraph entitled "Aluminum Doors," of this section. After erection and glazing, adjust doors and hardware to operate properly.

3.4 PROTECTION FROM DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

3.4.1 Dissimilar Metals

Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact to dissimilar metals.

3.4.1.1 Protection

Provide one of the following systems to protect surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals:

a. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

b. Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the aluminum and the dissimilar metal.

c. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of aluminum paint.

d. Use a nonabsorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations.

3.4.2 Drainage from Dissimilar Metals

In locations where drainage from dissimilar metals has direct contact with aluminum, provide protective paint to prevent aluminum discoloration.

3.4.3 Masonry and Concrete

Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.4.4 Wood or Other Absorptive Materials

Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with absorptive materials subject to frequent moisture, and aluminum surfaces in contact with treated wood, with two coats of aluminum paint or one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. In lieu of painting the aluminum, the Contractor shall have the option of painting the wood or other absorptive surface with two coats of aluminum paint and sealing the joints with elastomeric sealant.



3.5 CLEANING

Upon completion of installation, clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with door manufacturer's written recommended procedure. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents.

3.6 PROTECTION

Protect doors and frames from damage and from contamination by other materials such as cement mortar. Prior to completion and acceptance of the work, restore damaged doors and frames to original condition, or replace with new ones. -- End of Section --



SECTION 08 13 73

SLIDING METAL DOORS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES







NEMA ICS 2 (2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 - Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial Control Equipment

NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial Controls and Systems Enclosures

NEMA MG 1 (2007) Standard for Motors and Generators




UL 14B (1998) Sliding Hardware for Standard, Horizontally Mounted Tin-Clad Fire Doors

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;



submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Sliding Metal Doors

Drawings including elevations of each door type, details of anchorage, details of construction, location and installation of hardware, shape and thickness of materials, details of joints and connections, and details of tracks, rollers, power operators, controls, and fittings. A schedule showing the location of each door shall be included with the drawings. Manufacturer's catalog data shall be included.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Each door shall be provided with a permanent label showing the manufacturer's name and address and the model number of the door. Each door shall be complete with operating devices, hardware, and accessories. Minimum design wind speed shall be as indicated on the drawings. Doors shall be constructed to sustain a superimposed load, both inward and outward, equal to 1-1/2 times the minimum design wind load and shall not deflect more than 1/120 of the door width and height. When tested in accordance with the static air pressure test procedure of ASTM E 330, the door shall support the superimposed loads for a minimum period of 10 seconds without evidence of serious damage and shall be operable after conclusion of the tests. As an option, tests shall be conducted using an equivalent uniform static load. The uniform static load test specimen shall be supported using rollers and track as required for project installation. Recovery shall be at least three-fourths of the maximum deflection within 24 hours after the test load is removed.


Doors shall be delivered to the jobsite wrapped in a protective covering, with the brands and names clearly marked thereon. Doors shall be stored in an adequately ventilated, dry location that is free from dust, water, or other contaminants and in a manner that permits access for inspection and handling. Doors shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to the faces, edges, and ends. Damaged items that cannot be restored to like-new condition shall be replaced.

1.5 WARRANTY

Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1 year period shall be provided.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Manufacturer's installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for sliding metal doors shall be provided.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SLIDING DOORS

Sliding doors shall be of the following type

2.1.1 Insulated

Insulated doors shall be flush panel consisting of a urethane, polystyrene, or fiberglass insulation core covered on both faces with a bonded steel sheet not lighter than 16 gauge and covered on the edges with a steel perimeter channel not lighter than16 gauge. Door construction shall provide a thermal conductance (U-value) of 0.15 btu/hr times sq f times f. Joints in face sheets shall be backed by an interior steel H column and covered with a steel surface-applied face plate. The Contractor shall comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.

2.2 OPERATION

Doors shall be center-parting on level tracks and shall be designed to normally remain in the closed position but permit normal operation for passage. Doors shall be power operated.

2.2.1 Power Operators

The operator shall be of the electric type conforming to NEMA 7 & 9and the requirements specified herein. Readily adjustable limit switches shall be provided to automatically stop the door in its full open or closed position.

2.2.2 Electric Operators

The operator shall be explosion proof Class I, II groups D, F and G, and heavy-duty industrial type designed to operate the door at not less than 3 ft per second. Electrical controls shall be push button wall switches as indicated. Electric power operators shall be complete with electric motor, brackets, controls, limit switches, magnetic reversing starter, and all other accessories necessary. The operator shall be designed so that the motor may be removed without disturbing the limit-switch timing and without affecting the emergency closing system. The power operator shall be provided with a slipping clutch coupling or torque limiter, as required to prevent stalling of the motor. Operators shall have provisions for immediate emergency manual operation of the door in case of electrical failure. Where control voltages differ from motor voltage, a control voltage transformer shall be provided in and as part of the starter. Control voltage shall be 120 volts or less. Control shall be electrical, conforming to NEMA ICS 2 and NEMA ICS 6. Enclosures shall be Type 12 (industrial use), Type 7 or 9 in hazardous locations, with push button wall switches.

2.2.2.1 Motors

Drive motors shall conform to NEMA MG 1, shall be high-starting torque, reversible type, and shall be of sufficient power and torque output to move the door in either direction from any position at the required speed without exceeding the rated capacity. Motors shall be suitable for operation on volts, 60 hertz, three phase, and shall be suitable for across-the-line starting. Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity over a supply voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of the motor voltage rating.



2.2.2.2 Controls

Each door motor shall have thermal overload protection, limit switches, and remote-control switches. The control equipment shall conform to NEMA ICS 2. Enclosures shall be NEMA ICS 6 Type 12 (industrial use), Type 7 or 9 in hazardous locations, or as otherwise indicated. Each wall control station shall be of the three-button type, with the controls marked "OPEN," "CLOSE," and "STOP." When the door is in motion and the "STOP" control is pressed, the door shall stop instantly and remain in the stop position; from the stop position, the door shall be operable in either direction by the "OPEN" or "CLOSE" controls. Controls shall be of the full-guarded type to prevent accidental operation.

2.2.3 Electrical Work

Conduit and wiring necessary for proper operation shall be provided in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.3 SAFETY DEVICE

The leading edge of doors shall have a safety device that will immediately reverse the door movement upon contact with an obstruction and cause the door to return to its full open position. The safety device shall not substitute for a limit switch. Exterior doors shall be provided with a combination weather seal and safety device.

2.4 HARDWARE

Hardware shall conform to NFPA 80, UL 14B and the requirements specified herein. Tracks, roller assemblies, and installation hardware shall be designed to support a dead load equal to 1-1/2 times the weight of the door and attached hardware without deformation that would interfere with the operation of the door. Tracks shall be formed of galvanized G90 steel not lighter than 14 gauge. Ball or roller bearing wheels or rollers with case hardened races shall be provided on all devices incorporating wheels or rollers. Hardware shall be attached using zinc plated through bolts, nut plates, or similar devices to ensure adequate fastener strength. Recessed steel pulls shall be provided on both sides of all door leaves.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

2.5.1 Track Hood

Track hood for exterior doors mounted on the exterior face of the wall shall be zinc-coated steel painted to match building, and not lighter than 18 gauge.


Weatherstripping shall be provided on head, jamb, and sills of exterior doors. Weatherstripping shall be 1/16 inch thick fabric-reinforced neoprene or shall be nylon-brush type, shall have continuous metal retainers and shall be UL listed.

2.5.3 Locking Device

Heavy-duty hasp and staple shall be provided on doors and, located on the inside.



2.6 FINISH

2.6.1 Steel Surfaces

Steel surfaces of exterior doors shall be provided with a galvanized coating. Exposed surfaces shall be provided with a shop-primed finish in addition to the galvanized coating. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 924/A 924M, coating designation G90, for steel sheets. Prior to receiving primer, all surfaces shall be cleaned and phosphate-treated for maximum paint adherence. Primer shall be metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer of the manufacturer's standard type and shall be applied by dipping or spraying.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Doors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80, approved detail drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Anchors and inserts for guides, brackets, motors, switches, hardware, and accessories shall be accurately located. Upon completion, doors shall be free from warp, twist, or distortion. Exterior doors shall be weather tight. Doors shall be lubricated, properly adjusted, and demonstrated to operate freely.

3.2 FIELD FINISHING

Doors will receive field finish. Color shall be as indicated on the drawings.




SECTION 08 14 00

WOOD DOORS07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWI Qual Stds (8th Edition) AWI Quality Standards


ASTM E 2074 (2000e1) Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies


NFPA 252 (2003) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



UL 10B (1997; Rev thru Oct 2001) Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA)

WDMA I.S. 1-A (1997) Architectural Wood Flush Doors

WDMA I.S. 4 (2000) Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork

WDMA TM-5 (1990) Split Resistance Test Method

WDMA TM-7 (1990) Cycle Slam Test Method

WDMA TM-8 (1990) Hinge Loading Test Method

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings



Doors; G

Submit drawings or catalog data showing each type of door unit . Drawings and data shall indicate door type and construction, sizes, thickness, door louvers, and glazing,.

SD-03 Product Data

Doors; G

Accessories

Water-resistant sealer

Sample warranty

Fire resistance rating; G





Deliver doors to the site in an undamaged condition and protect against damage and dampness. Stack doors flat under cover. Support on blocking, a minimum of 4 inch thick, located at each end and at the midpoint of the door. Store doors in a well-ventilated building so that they will not be exposed to excessive moisture, heat, dryness, direct sunlight, or extreme changes of temperature and humidity. Replace defective or damaged doors with new ones.

1.5 WARRANTY

Warrant doors free of defects as set forth in the door manufacturer's standard door warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Manufacturer's Location for Regionally Manufactured Materials LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured project products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent



possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius.


2.2 DOORS

Provide doors of the types, sizes, and designs indicated and specified.

2.2.1 Flush Doors

Conform to WDMA I.S. 1-A for flush doors. Provide hollow core doors with lock blocks and 1 inch minimum thickness hinge stile. Hardwood stile edge bands of doors receives a natural finish, compatible with face veneer. Provide mill option for stile edge of doors scheduled to be painted. No visible finger joints will be accepted in stile edge bands. When used, locate finger-joints under hardware.

2.2.1.1 Interior Flush Doors

Provide particleboard core, Type II flush doors conforming to WDMA I.S. 1-A with faces of premium grade natural birch . Hardwood veneers shall be rotary cut book matched.

2.2.2 Acoustical Doors

Acoustical door assemblies are specified in Section 08 34 73, "Sound COntrol Door Assemblies".

2.2.3 Fire Doors

Provide doors specified or indicated to have a fire resistance rating conforming to the requirements of UL 10B, ASTM E 2074, or NFPA 252 for the class of door indicated. Affix a permanent metal label with raised or incised markings indicating testing agency's name and approved hourly fire rating to hinge edge of each door.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

2.3.1 Door Louvers

Fabricate from wood and of sizes indicated. Provide louvers with a minimum of 35 percent free air. Equip louvers with sightproof inverted vee slat type. Mount louvers in the door with wood lip moldings.

2.3.2 Door Light Openings

Provide glazed openings with the manufacturer's standard wood moldings. Provide moldings for doors to receive natural finish of the same wood species and color as the wood face veneers. Provide moldings on the exterior doors with sloped surfaces. Lip type moldings for flush doors.



2.3.3 Additional Hardware Reinforcement

Provide the minimum lock blocks to secure the specified hardware. The measurement of top, bottom, and intermediate rail blocks are a minimum 125 mm 5 inch by full core width. Comply with the manufacturer's labeling requirements for reinforcement blocking, but not mineral material similar to the core.

2.4 FABRICATION

2.4.1 Marking

Stamp each door with a brand, stamp, or other identifying mark indicating quality and construction of the door.

2.4.2 Quality and Construction

Identify the standard on which the construction of the door was based and identify doors having a Type I glue bond.

2.4.3 Preservative Treatment

Treat doors scheduled for restrooms, janitor closets and other possible wet locations including exterior doors with a water-repellent preservative treatment and so marketed at the manufacturer's plant in accordance with WDMA I.S. 4.

2.4.4 Adhesives and Bonds

WDMA I.S. 1-A. Use Type I bond for exterior doors and Type II bond for interior doors. Provide a nonstaining adhesive on doors with a natural finish.

2.4.5 Finishes

2.4.5.1 Factory Finish

Provide doors finished at the factory by the door manufacturer as follows: AWI Qual Stds Section 1500, specification for System No. 4 Conversion varnish alkyd urea or System No. 5 Vinyl catalyzed. The coating is AWI Qual Stds premium, medium rubbed sheen, closed grain effect. Use stain when required to produce the finish specified for color. Seal edges, cutouts, trim, and wood accessories, and apply two coats of finish compatible with the door face finish. Touch-up finishes that are scratched or marred, or where exposed fastener holes are filled, in accordance with the door manufacturer's instructions. Match color and sheen of factory finish using materials compatible for field application.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Meet or exceed the following minimum performance criteria of stiles of "B" and "C" label fire doors utilizing standard mortise leaf hinges:

a. Split resistance: Averages of ten test samples not less than 500 pounds load when tested in accordance with WDMA TM-5.

b. Cycle-slam: 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with the requirements of WDMA TM-7.



c. Hinge loading resistance: Averages of ten test samples not less than 700 pounds load when tested for direct screw withdrawal in accordance with WDMA TM-8 using a No. 12, 1-1/4 inch long, steel, fully threaded wood screw. Drill 5/32 inch pilot hole, use 1-1/2 inch opening around screw for bearing surface, and engage screw full, except for last 1/8 inch. Do not use a steel plate to reinforce screw area.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 INSTALLATION

Before installation, seal top and bottom edges of doors with the approved water-resistant sealer. Seal cuts made on the job immediately after cutting using approved water-resistant sealer. Fit, trim, and hang doors with a 1/16 inch minimum, 1/8 inch maximum clearance at sides and top, and a 3/16 inch minimum, 1/4 inch maximum clearance over thresholds. Provide 3/8 inch minimum, 7/16 inch maximum clearance at bottom where no threshold occurs. Bevel edges of doors at the rate of 1/8 inch in 2 inch. Door warp shall not exceed1/4 inch when measured in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1-A.

3.3.1 Fire Doors

Install fire doors in accordance with NFPA 80. Do not paint over labels.




SECTION 08 33 23

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS07/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE FUN IP (2005) Fundamentals Handbook, I-P Edition


ASME B29.400 (2001) Combination, "H" Type Mill Chains, and Sprockets



ASTM A 27/A 27M (2005) Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application



ASTM A 48/A 48M (2003) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings



ASTM A 780 (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of



Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings





ASTM F 568M (2004) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners





NEMA ST 1 (1988; R 1997) Standard for Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose Type)


NFPA 70 (2007) National Electrical Code - 2008 Edition




1.2 DESCRIPTION

Overhead coiling doors to be counterbalanced doors by methods of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or



self-lubricating bearings for rotating members. Doors to be coiling type, with interlocking slats, complete with anchoring and door hardware, guides, hood, and operating mechanisms, and designed for use on openings as indicated.

Fire-rated door assemblies must bear the Underwriters Laboratories, Warnock Hersey, Factory Mutual or other nationally recognized testing laboratory label for the rating listed on the drawings. Provide a permanent label for each door showing the manufacturer's name and address and the model/serial number of the door.

Oversized fire-rated door assemblies must be provided with a listing agency oversize label, or a certificate signed by an official of the manufacturing company certifying that the door and operator have been designed to meet the specified requirements.


1.3.1 Wind Loading

Design and fabricate door assembly to withstand the wind speed as indicated on the drawings and a maximum deflection of 1/120 of the opening width. Provide test data showing compliance with ASTM E 330. Sound engineering principles may be used to interpolate or extrapolate test results to door sizes not specifically tested Complete assembly must meet or exceed the requirements of ASCE 7.

1.3.2 Fire-Rated Doors, Frames, and Hardware

Provide fire-rated doors, frames, and hardware which are tested, rated, and labeled in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or Warnock Hersey. The labels must indicate the rating in hours, per NFPA 80 of duration of exposure to fire, with a letter following the hourly rating to designate the location for which the assembly is designed and the temperature rise on the unexposed face of the door at the end of 30 minutes of fire exposure.

Provide and attach metal UL labels to each item of hardware in accordance with requirements specified in the UL Bld Mat Dir.

1.3.3 Oversized Coiling Fire-rated Door Assemblies

Where fire-rated doors and frames exceed the size for which testing and labeling services are offered, furnish certificates of inspection from the UL, Factory Mutual or Warnock Hersey. State within certificates that except for size; doors, frames, and hardware are identical in design, materials, and construction to a door that has been tested and rated..

1.3.4 Operational Cycle Life

All portions of the door, hardware and operating mechanism that are subject to movement, wear, or stress fatigue must be designed to operate through a minimum number of 10 cycles per day . One complete cycle of door operation is defined as when the door is in the closed position, moves to the fully open position, and returns to the closed position.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Provide fabrication drawings that show complete assembly with hardware and framing details for the following items:

Overhead Coiling DoorsCounterbalancing MechanismManual Door OperatorsElectric Door OperatorsBottom BarGuidesMounting BracketsOverhead DrumHoodPainting

Submit Installation Drawings in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies," of this section.

SD-03 Product Data

Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items listing all accessories including supports, locks and latches, and weather stripping.

Overhead Coiling DoorsHardwareCounterbalancing MechanismManual Door OperatorsElectric Door OperatorsFire-Rated Door Assembly

SD-05 Design Data

Submit equipment and performance data for the following items in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Performance Requirements," of this section.

Overhead Coiling DoorsHardwareCounterbalancing MechanismManual Door OperatorsElectric Door OperatorsFire-Rated Door


Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies , including the following items:

MaterialsDevicesProceduresManufacture's BrochuresParts Lists



Cleaning

1.5 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR DETAIL SHOP DRAWINGS

Provide installation drawings for overhead coiling door assemblies which show elevations of each door type, shape and thickness of materials, finishes, details of joints and connections, and details of guides and fittings, rough opening dimensions, location and description of hardware, anchorage locations, and counterbalancing mechanism and door operator details. Show locations of replaceable fusible links wiring diagrams for power, signal and controls. Include a schedule showing the location of each door with the drawings.

Contractor must submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies. Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract completion.

Provide operation and maintenance manuals which are consistent with manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Provide test data that is legible and of good quality.

1.6 WARRANTY, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies, including the following items:

MaterialsDevicesManual Door OperatorsElectric Door OperatorsCounterbalancing MechanismPaintingProceduresManufacture's BrochuresParts Lists

Contractor must furnish a written guarantee that the helical spring and counterbalance mechanism are free from defects in material and workmanship and that they will remain so for not less than two years after completion and acceptance of the project.

Contractor must warrant that upon notification by the Government, he will immediately make good any defects in material, workmanship, and door operation within the same time period covered by the guarantee, at no cost to the Government.







Delivered doors to the jobsite wrapped in a protective covering with the brands and names clearly marked thereon. Store doors in a dry location that is adequately ventilated and free from dirt and dust, water, and other contaminants, and in a manner that permits easy access for inspection and handling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS





2.2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

2.2.1 Curtain Materials and Construction

Provide curtain slats which are fabricated from steel sheets conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Grade A, with the additional requirement of a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. Provide sheets which are galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M.

Fabricate doors from interlocking cold-rolled slats, with section profiles as specified, designed to withstand the specified wind loading. Provide slats which are continuous without splices for the width of the door.

Provide slats filled with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation for exterior doors complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces on interior surface of slats.

2.2.2 Non-Insulated Curtains (Interior Doors)

Form Curtains from manufacturer's standard shapes of interlocking slats.

2.2.3 Insulated Curtains (Exterior Doors)

Form Curtains from manufacturer's standard shapes of interlocking slats.



Supply slat system with a minimum R-value of 4 when calculated in accordance with ASHRAE FUN IP. Slats to consist of a urethane or polystyrene core not less than 11/16 inch thick, completely enclosed within metal facings. Exterior face of slats must be the same gauge as specified for curtains. Interior face must be not lighter than 0.0219 inches. The insulated slat assembly is to have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke development factor of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.2.4 Curtain Bottom Bar

Curtain bottom bars must be pairs of angles from the manufacturer's standard steel, stainless and aluminum extrusions not less than 2.0 by 2.0 inches by 0.188 inch. Steel extrusions must conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M. Stainless steel extrusions conforming to ASTM A 666, Type 304. Aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B 221 or(ASTM B 221M). Galvanize angles and fasteners in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M. Coat welds and abrasions with paint conforming to ASTM A 780.

2.2.5 Locks

Provide end and wind locks of cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade B; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM A 924/A 924M and secured at every other curtain slat.

2.2.6 Weather Stripping

Weather-stripping at the door-head and jamb must be 3.2 millimeter 1/8-inch thick sheet of natural or neoprene rubber with air baffles, secured to the insides of hoods with galvanized-steel fasteners through continuous galvanized-steel pressure bars at least 15.9 millimeter 5/8-inch wide and 3.2 millimeter 1/8-inch thick.

Threshold weather-stripping must be 3.2 millimeter 1/8-inch thick sheet natural or neoprene rubber secured to the bottom bars.

Provide weather-stripping of natural or neoprene rubber conforming to ASTM D 2000.

2.2.7 Locking Devices

Slide Bolt to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

2.2.8 Safety Interlock

Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.2.9 Overhead Drum

Fabricate drums from nominal 0.028-inch- (0.71-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.



2.3 HARDWARE

All hardware must conform to ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM A 307, ASTM F 568M, and ASTM A 27/A 27M.

2.3.1 Guides

Fabricate curtain jamb guides from the manufacturer's standard angles or channels of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment.

2.3.2 Equipment Supports

Fabricate door-operating equipment supports from the manufacturer's standard steel shapes and plates conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M. Size the shapes and plates in accordance with the industry standards for the size, weight, and type of door installation..

2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM

Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or self-lubricating bearings for rotating members.

2.4.1 Brackets

Provide the manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel with one located at each end of the counterbalance barrel conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M.

2.4.2 Counterbalance Barrels

Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 2.5 mm per meter 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load.

2.5 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

2.5.1 Manual Chain-Hoist Door Operators

Provide door operators which consist of an endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel, guard, and a geared reduction unit of at least a 3 to 1 ratio with a maximum 25 lbf (111 N) required pull for operation must not exceed 16 kilogram 35 pounds.

Provide chain hoists to have a self-locking mechanism allowing the curtain to be stopped at any point in its upward or downward travel and to remain in that position until moved to the fully open or closed position. Provide hand chains of cadmium-plated alloy steel conforming to ASME B29.400. Yield point of the chain must be at least three times the required hand-chain pull.



Provide chain sprocket wheels of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M.

2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

Provide electrical wiring and door operating controls conforming to the applicable requirements of NFPA 70.

Electric door-operator assemblies must be the sizes and capacities recommended and provided by the door manufacturer for specified doors. Assemblies must be complete with electric motors and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear reduction units, solenoid-operated brakes, clutch, remote-control stations, manual or automatic control devices, and accessories as required for proper operation of the doors.

Design the operators so that motors may be removed without disturbing the limit-switch adjustment and affecting the emergency auxiliary operators.

Provide a manual operator of crank-gear or chain-gear mechanisms with a release clutch to permit manual operation of doors in case of power failure. Arrange the emergency manual operator so that it may be put into and out of operation from floor level, and its use will not affect the adjustment of the limit switches. Provide an electrical or mechanical device which will automatically disconnect the motor from the operating mechanism when the emergency manual operating mechanism is engaged.

2.6.1 Door-Operator Types

Provide an operator which is mounted to the right or left door head plate with the operator located to accomodate the existing clearance condition.

2.6.2 Electric Motors

Provide motors which are the high-starting-torque, reversible, constant-duty electrical type with overload protection of sufficient torque and horsepower to move the door in either direction from any position and produce a door-travel speed of not less than 8 nor more than 12 inches per second without exceeding thehorsepower rating.

Provide motors which conform to NEMA MG 1 designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency to the requirements specified.

2.6.3 Motor Bearings

Bearings must be bronze-sleeve or heavy-duty ball or roller antifriction type with full provisions for the type of thrust imposed by the specific duty load.

Pre-lubricate and factory seal bearings in motors less than 1/2 horsepower.

Equip motors coupled to worm-gear reduction units with either ball or roller bearings.

Equip bearings in motors 1/2 horsepower or larger with lubrication service



fittings. Fit lubrication fittings with color-coded plastic or metal dust caps.

In any motor, bearings that are lubricated at the factory for extended duty periods do not need to be lubricated for a given number of operating hours. Display this information on an appropriate tag or label on the motor with instructions for lubrication cycle maintenance.

2.6.4 Motor Starters, Controls, and Enclosures

Each door motor must have a factory-wired, unfused, disconnect switch; a reversing, across-the-line magnetic starter with thermal overload protection; 120-volt operating coils with a control transformer limit switch; and a safety interlock assembled in a NEMA ICS 6 type enclosure as specified herein. Control equipment must conform to NEMA ICS 2.

Provide adjustable switches, electrically interlocked with the motor controls and set to stop the door automatically at the fully open and fully closed position.

2.6.5 Control Enclosures

Provide control enclosures that conform to NEMA ICS 6 for general purpose NEMA Type 1.

2.6.6 Transformer

Provide starters with 230/460 to 115 volt control transformers with one secondary fuse when it is required to reduce the voltage on control circuits to 120 volts or less. Provide transformer that conforms to NEMA ST 1.

2.6.7 Safety-Edge Device

Provide each power operated door with a pneumatic safety device extending the full width of the door and located within a U-section neoprene or rubber astragal mounted on the bottom rail of the bottom door section. Device must immediately stop and reverse the door upon contact with an obstruction in the door opening during downward travel and cause the door to return to full-open position. Safety device is not a substitute for a limit switch.

Connect safety device to the control circuit through a retracting safety cord and reel.

2.6.8 Remote-Control Stations

Provide interior remote control stations which are full-guarded, momentary-contact three-button, heavy-duty, surface-mounted NEMA ICS 6 type enclosures as specified. Mark buttons "OPEN," "CLOSE," and "STOP." The "CLOSE" button must be the type requiring a constant pressure to maintain the closing motion of the door. When the door is in motion and the "STOP" button is pressed, the door must stop instantly and remain in the stopped position; from the stopped position, the door may then be operated in either direction.

2.6.9 Speed-Reduction Units

Provide speed-reduction units consisting of hardened-steel worm and bronze



worm gear assemblies running in oil or grease and encased in a sealed casing, coupled to the motor through a flexible coupling. Drive shafts must rotate on ball- or roller-bearing assemblies that are integral with the unit.

Provide minimum ratings of speed reduction units which are in accordance with AGMA provisions for class of service.

Ground worm gears to provide accurate thread form; machine teeth for all other types of gearing. Surface harden all gears.

Provide bearings which are the antifriction type equipped with oil seals.

2.6.10 Chain Drives

Provide roller chains that are power-transmission series steel roller type conforming to ASME B29.400, with a minimum safety factor of 10 times the design load.

Roller-chain side bars, rollers, pins, and bushings must be heat-treated or otherwise hardened.

Provide chain sprockets that are high-carbon steel with machine-cut hardened teeth, finished bore and keyseat, and hollow-head setscrews.

2.6.11 Brakes

Provide brakes which are 360-degree shoe brakes or shoe and drum brakes, solenoid-operated and electrically interlocked to the control circuit to set automatically when power is interrupted.

2.6.12 Clutches

Clutches must be the 4-inch diameter, multiple face, externally adjustable friction type or adjustable centrifugal type.

2.7 FIRE-RATED DOOR ASSEMBLY

Provide fire-rated door assemblies with the dimensions, fire rating, and operating type indicated with electric operators and assemblies that do not interfere with manufacturer's standard interconnecting fusible links.

2.7.1 Fire Ratings

Provide fire-rated door assemblies complying with NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives and UL Fire Resistance - Volume 3.

2.8 SURFACE FINISHING

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Noticeable variations in the same metal component are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 GENERAL

Install overhead coiling door assembly, anchors and inserts for guides, brackets, motors, switches, hardware, and other accessories in accordance with approved detail drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Upon completion of installation, doors must be free from all distortion.

Install overhead coiling doors, motors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations as indicated for each door in the contract documents and as required by the manufacturer.

Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility and as required by the manufacturer.

3.4 FIELD PAINTED FINISH

Steel doors and frames which are to be field painted must accordance with Section 09 90 00.00 40 PAINTING AND COATING and manufacturer's written instructions. Protect weather stripping from paint. Finishes must be free of scratches or other blemishes.


After installation, adjust hardware and moving parts. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer to provide smooth operating functions for ease movement, free of warping, twisting, or distortion of the door assembly.

Adjust seals to provide weather-tight fit around entire perimeter.



Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Test the door opening and closing operation when activated by controls or alarm-connected fire-release system. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.

Test and make final adjustment of new doors at no additional cost to the Government.

3.5.1 Maintenance and Adjustment

Not more than 90 calendar days after completion and acceptance of the project, the Contractor must examine, lubricate, test, and re-adjust doors as required for proper operation.

3.5.2 CLEANING

Clean doors in accordance with manufacturer's approved instructions.




SECTION 08 34 16.10

STEEL SLIDING HANGAR DOORS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES







ASTM A 1011/A 1011M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability


ASTM A 366/A 366M (1997e1) Standard Specification for Commercial Steel, Sheet, Carbon,(0.15 Maximum Percent Cold-Rolled




NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements


SECTION 08 34 16.10 Page 1









UL 506 (2000; Rev thru May 2006) Standard for Specialty Transformers

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1 Door Design

Doors shall operate without binding, interference, or damage to weatherstripping. Weatherstripping shall fit closely and be free from warping.

1.2.2 Steel Design

AISC 360, AISI SG03-3.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Hangar doors; G

Submit the door manufacturer's complete schematic wiring diagram, field wiring diagram, and a complete physical location drawing showing the location of controls with the runs of conduit, size of conduit, number and size of wires in each conduit, location of junction boxes, and full details of control mountings.

Submit drawings showing details of construction, installation, and operation of motor operator; size, shapes, and thickness of materials; joints and connections; reinforcing; hardware; mechanical devices; electrical devices; and design and detail data for work of other trades affected by hangar doors.




Hangar doors, Data Package 2; G

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Include wiring and control diagrams.


1.4.1 Manufacturer's Qualifications

The hangar door manufacturer shall be one who is regularly engaged in the production of steel sliding hangar doors of type and size required for this project.

1.4.2 Installer's Qualifications

The installation supervisor shall be an authorized representative of the door manufacturer. Mechanics shall be skilled and experienced in the erection of hangar doors of type and size required for this project.





Deliver materials which are not shop installed on the doors in original rolls, packages, containers, boxes, or crates bearing the manufacturer's name, brand, and model number. Store materials and equipment in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from dust and water, and so as to permit access for inspection and handling. Handle doors carefully to prevent damage. Remove damaged items that cannot be restored to like-new condition and provide new items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS






2.2 HANGAR DOORS


AISC 360 and ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.2.2 Formed Steel

AISI SG03-3.

2.2.3 Sheet Steel

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M hot-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality, or ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality.

2.2.4 Galvanized Steel

ASTM A 653/A 653M, coating designation G 90 galvanized steel sheet, commercial quality.

2.2.5 Hardware

Provide top guide rollers, bottom wheels, interleaf bumpers, track cleaners, and top and door pocket bumpers as required for a complete and operational installation.

2.2.5.1 Wheel Assemblies

Bottom wheels shall be of steel plate or cast steel, having a minimum tread diameter as required for the actual wheel loading. Where the height-to-width ratio of the door leaf exceeds three, wheel assemblies shall be vertically adjustable. Construct wheel assemblies to permit removal of the wheel without removing the door leaf from its position on the rail.

a. Treads: Machine wheel treads concentric with bearing seats. The clear distance between flanges shall not exceed the width of the rail by more than 1/8 inch at the tread nor more than 1/4 inch at the edge of the flange. Machine internal bearing seats accurately for a press fit. Heat treat wheels 18 inches or greater in diameter to obtain a rim hardness of 320 Brinnel.

b. Wheel bearings: Provide tapered roller or spherical bearings, either internal or cartridge type, arranged so that both horizontal and vertical loads shall be transferred to the rail only through the bearing. Bearings shall be tightly sealed and equipped with high-pressure grease fittings.

2.2.5.2 Fixed Pancake Top Guide Rollers

Horizontal type; each with double steel rollers of a suitable diameter and thickness for satisfactory performance under the indicated load conditions and top guide system used. Provide permanently lubricated bearings. Rollers shall be stainless steel.

2.2.6 Personnel Doors

The hangar door manufacturer shall provide structural frames and electrical



interlock for personnel doors.

2.2.6.1 Doors and Frames

Specified in Section 08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.

2.2.6.2 Hardware for Personnel Doors

Specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.

2.2.6.3 Electrical Interlock

Provide each personnel door with an electrical interlock switch to prevent motor operation of the leaf or group in which it is located when the personnel door is open. Provide an identified indicator light at each door leaf control station indicating when the personnel door is in the open position.

2.2.7 Weather Stripping

Provide adjustable and readily replaceable material. Provide as indicated and on vertical edges, sills, and heads to afford a weathertight installation.

2.2.7.1 Neoprene

Use flap-type, two-ply, cloth-inserted neoprene or extruded, double flap, single or dual opposed solid neoprene material on vertical edges and sills. The two-ply material shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch and shall be retained continuously for its full length and secured with rust-resistant fasteners 12 inches o.c. Extruded weather stripping with heavy center section shall be attached at 12 inches o.c., but continuous bar may be omitted. Clearance between metal parts on vertical edges of leaves and between leaves and jambs which are to be weather-stripped shall be as indicated.

2.2.7.2 Metallic

Form head weather stripping material between each leaf and the top guide system of not lighter than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel or flap-type, cloth-inserted neoprene, as indicated.

2.2.7.3 Hanging Head Flashing

Provide cloth-inserted neoprene weathering fastened to top of door leaves to engage the head flashing when doors are closed.

2.2.8 Fasteners

Either zinc-coated or cadmium-plated steel.

2.2.9 Sealant

Single-component or multicomponent elastomeric type conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use NT. Provide a sealant that has been tested on the types of substrate to which it will be applied.



2.2.10 Primer

Red iron oxide, zinc oxide type, SSPC Paint 25.

2.2.11 Starters

Provide magnetic reversing starters in NEMA ICS 1, Type 12 enclosures equipped with access door-controlled, fused safety disconnect switches. Starters shall be factory wired with overload and undervoltage protection, mechanical and electrical interlocks, auxiliary contacts, relays and timing devices as required, control circuit transformers, and a numbered terminal strip. The control circuit transformer shall reduce the voltage in the control circuits to 115 volts or less, and shall conform to UL 506.

2.2.12 Electrical

Provide conduit, wire, flexible cables, boxes, devices, and accessories under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. If permanent electrical power is not available when door installation is complete, provide temporary power under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRBUTION SYSTEM, for testing and adjusting the doors.

2.2.13 Pickup Plate System

The mechanical interconnection system that interconnects the doors leaves together shall be a structural plate and channel system. The pickups shall be mounted om the trailing edge and leading edges of the door leaves as required and at a full depth member connection. They shall be sized to take the full impact load as induced when contacting the adjacent door leaf under full velocity of the door system.

2.3 FABRICATION

2.3.1 Track Cleaners

Provide a device to clear debris from the rail head and wheel flange grooves as the leaf is moved.

2.4 OPERATION

2.4.1 Hangar Door Types

Hangar doors are unidirectional as indicated..

2.4.1.1 Anchored Group Doors

Each group of leaves shall have a traction-drive operating unit located in the lead leaf of the group and driving one or more wheels of the lead leaf. . Provide necessary cables, fittings, pickup plate system, housings, guards, pickups, brackets, anchors, and miscellaneous hardware.

2.4.2 Operating Units (MULE)

Each "MULE" assembly shall consist of a drive unit and an electrical control system designed for mounting on the (specified) interior or exterior door face. The operator assembly shall be factory assembled and designed to move the door section at a minimum speed of 45 feet per minute at zero wind load conditions and shall be operable up to and including a maximum wind load of 8 pounds per square foot. The drive unit shall be



designed to move the door section(s) by means of a solid rubber tire drive wheel operating against the finished floor. The unit shall be designed to permit automatic traction adjustment. The "MULE" shall also be designed to permit disengagement of the unit should manual door operation be required (due to electrical power failure) without causing damage to the drive mechanism or door(s). The drive unit shall be powered by electric motor and shall use a roller chain drive between the gearmotor unit and drive wheel. The motor and gear system shall be designed to move the doors in either direction in response to push button control.

2.4.3 Braking Systems

Braking systems shall be designed to ensure stoppage of the leaves under normal, dry rail conditions within the safety edge overtravel limit. The braking systems shall be either a magnetic, spring-set, solenoid-released brake or hydraulic type. Provide a hand release to release the brake when it becomes necessary to move the leaf with an outside force. The hand release shall be an automatic reset type so that the brake will be operable during subsequent electrical operation of the door.

2.4.4 Controls

Doors shall be controlled by constant pressure push buttons mounted on the door leaves. Removing pressure from the button shall stop the movement of the leaves. The control equipment shall conform to NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2. Interior push buttons shall be mushroom head type, mounted in heavy-duty, oil-tight enclosures conforming to NEMA ICS 6, Type 13, except that enclosure for reversing starter with disconnect switch shall be Type 1 or Type 12.

2.4.4.1 Push Buttons for Anchored Group Doors

Each group shall be controlled by a two-button push button station marked "OPEN" and "CLOSE" mounted near the inside leading edge of the lead leaf.

2.4.5 Limit Switches

Provide limit switches to prevent overtravel and bumping. Safety edges shall not be used as limit switches.

2.4.5.1 Plunger-Type Limit Switches

Provide at each end of each group of floating group doors. Limit switches shall be actuated by 3/4 inch diameter stainless steel rods of adjustable length, guided at both ends with nonmetallic bearings and with tape-type constant force springs to return the rods to their normal position after actuation. The actuating rods shall have sufficient overtravel so that the leaves cannot bump one another or any portion of the building or be damaged when being towed. Each rod shall be adjustable 6 inches plus or minus from its normal position.

2.4.5.2 Lever Arm Type Limit Switches

Provide for anchored group doors to stop the travel of each group in the fully open and fully closed positions. The limit switches shall be:

a. Positive acting, snap action, lever arm type with actuating cams designed with sufficient overtravel to permit the group to come to a complete stop without overtraveling the limit switches.



b. Mounted on the leaves, and the actuating cams mounted either on the top guides or on adjacent door leaves.

2.4.6 Safety Edges

Provide fail-safe safety edges on the leading edge of the drive leaf of anchored group doors from one inch above the floor to the top of the door leaf. For leaves over 12 inches thick (including siding,) provide a double run of safety edge spaced to provide the maximum degree of safety in stopping the leaves. For leaves over 12 inches thick (including siding) provide a double run of safety edges on the outer edge of each side of door leaf covering no less than 80% of leaf.

a. Design: Provide safety edges to provide a minimum of 3 1/2 inches of overtravel after actuation until solid resistance is met and door motion comes to a complete stop. If door requires more than 3 ½ inches to come to a complete stop, provide additional overtravel built into safety edge the distance required for door motion to come to a complete stop. Use electric safety edges.

b. Specs: Use sensing edges of reinforced polyvinyl chloride cover or other Government-approved material with chemical resistance to diesel and JP-4 fuel, hydraulic fluids, SAE-30 oil and salt water. Use cover that provides hermetic seal for weather and moisture resistant protection of internal foam and contact elements. Internal foam may be polyurethane and/or latex foam per military specification MIL-R-5001, medium density. Use two contact elements separated by perforated foam or other Government -approved materials and design to perform the switching function when the sensing edge encounters an obstruction along any portion of its active length.

b. Operation: Actuation of the safety edge on leading edge of a group of leaves shall stop movement of the group. Actuation of a safety edge shall lock out the motor control in the direction of travel until reset, but shall permit the door to be reversed away from the obstruction which tripped the safety edge. Safety edges shall be alive only when doors are moving. Safety edges shall be reset by moving doors away from the obstruction. The lower portion of the safety edges to a height of approximately 5 feet shall be independently removable for convenience in servicing or repair. The remainder of the edge may be in one piece up to a maximum of 20 feet.

c. Bumper(s): Each door leaf edge provided with a safety edge shall be protected by a spring type bumper(s). Bumper shall be designed to absorb 150 percent of the door drive force when door is pushed in an emergency. For continuous safety edges, bumpers shall extend to the sides. For sectional safety edges, the bumper can interrupt the safety edge for a distance not greater than 12 inches.

d. Keyed bypass: Provide a keyed bypass to the door controls to render the safety edges in a temporary "repair" mode, if necessary. The door drive shall be restored from its "fail safe" mode by activation of the keyed bypass.



2.4.6.1 Electrical Safety Edges

Connect the safety edge in series with the necessary relays and resistors to make the system complete. The service shall be not more than 24 volts and the circuit shall be normally energized so that the malfunction of any of the component parts will make the door inoperative. Wire sensing edges to provide for control reliable 4-wire operation of hangar door so that any power loss to the sensing edges is experienced, then the door becomes inoperable until power is restored and a reset operation is initiated. Install sensing edges to operate through a normally energized relay so that when the sensing edge is compressed the relay contacts open. Install relay contacts to also open if any component in the sensing edge control circuit is broken so as to break continuity. Use 100 volts electrical service to the control circuit. Ensure service to the sensing edge does not exceed a nominal 24 volts. Install a large red indicator light and/or a loud siren, to be simultaneously activated with the actuation of any sensing edge, to indicate the presence of an obstruction.

2.4.7 Warning Device

Provide a clearly audible signal on each group of leaves. The warning device shall:

a. Operate when the push button is actuated for movement of the door in either direction;

b. Sound 5 seconds before the door moves, and while the door is moving; and

c. Consist of not less than a 6 inch diameter bell or equivalent decibel-rated horn, loud enough to be heard in the hangar and on the apron.

2.4.8 Emergency Operation

Hangar doors shall be equipped so that they can be operated-manually or by tractors from the hangar floor in case of power failure. Manual operation of hangar doors shall be designed to avoid damage to safety edges.


The door manufacturer shall provide the proper electrical equipment and controls built in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Equipment, control circuits, and safety edge circuits shall conform to NFPA 70. Where located 18 inches or less above the floor, they shall be explosion-proof as defined in NFPA 70, Article 513. Manual or automatic control devices necessary for motor operation of the doors shall be provided, including push button stations, limit switches, combination fused disconnect switches and magnetic reversing starters, control circuit transformers, relays, timing devices, warning devices, and trolley ducts with collectors or trolleys.

2.4.9.1 Electrical Cables

Flexible cables or cable reels shall be provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, in accordance with the door manufacturer's approved drawings and wiring diagrams.



PART 3 EXECUTION




3.2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS

3.2.1 Cleaning

After fabrication, clean metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6 (Commercial Blast).

3.3 ERECTION

Assemble accessories in accordance with approved shop drawings. After completing assembly and before starting field painting, clean interior and exterior door surfaces. Clean abraded surfaces, field welds, and field bolts; and coat with priming paint. Field painting as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.


3.4.1 Manufacturer's Field Services

Provide an authorized representative of the door manufacturer to supervise retro fit of doors.

3.4.2 Tests

Immediately after the door installation is complete, the door manufacturer or his representative shall perform a complete operating test in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Correct defects disclosed by the test. Retest the doors and adjust them until the entire installation is fully operational and acceptable to the Contracting Officer.




SECTION 08 34 73

SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES10/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWI QSGSQCP (2004) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated



ASTM A 568/A 568M (2005) Standard Specifications for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for


ASTM D 2092 (2001) Standard Guide for Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for Painting

ASTM E 1289 (2003) Standard Specification for Reference Specimen for Sound Transmission Loss

ASTM E 90 (2004) Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Indicate perimeter seals, door-bottom devices and other hardware items to be assembled in the shop on Fabrication drawings for the



following:

Hollow Metal Sound Retardant DoorsWood Sound Retardant Doors

Include on Installation drawings a finish hardware schedule for each door (coordinate with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE) and a hollow metal door frame schedule for each door indicating profile, dimensions, hardware reinforcement, and frame anchorage for the following items:

Hollow Metal Sound Retardant DoorsWood Sound Retardant Doors

SD-03 Product Data

Submit Manufacturer's catalog data including STC ratings, and UL fire rating, where applicable, for the following items:

Hollow Metal Sound Retardant DoorsWood Sound Retardant DoorsDoor FramesIntumescent Seals and GasketingThresholds

SD-06 Test Reports

Test reports for the following shall be in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Guarantee," of this section.

Acoustical Tests

SD-07 Certificates

Submit Certificates for the following items and accessories showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section.

Hollow Metal Sound Retardant DoorsWood Sound Retardant DoorsDoor FramesVision PanelsIntumescent Seals,Gasketing and Door BottomsThresholds

1.3 COMPLIANCE, TESTING, AND GUARANTEE

1.3.1 Testing

1.3.1.1 Sound Transmission Classification (STC)

Provide Test reports prepared by a nationally recognized, independent laboratory for Acoustical Tests, Air Infiltration Tests,Wind Loading Tests, and Water Leakage Tests indicating that the sound transmission classification (STC) of the proposed door, based on tests at 16 third-octave band frequencies from 125 to 4,000 hertz, is no less than the specified STC when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90, and that the door



tested is hung in substantially the type of wall and frame as indicated and is fully operable with hardware and perimeter seals installed.

1.3.2 Guarantee

Provide written guarantee that each door delivered to the project is equal in construction, sound transmission classification (STC), and positive pressure test rating where applicable, with appropriate labeling and markings, to that of the sample door tested. Clearly state in written guarantee that each door assembly, when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, will have an in-place STC within 3 decibels of the specimen tested. Submit the following test data and Certificates with the written Guarantee:

Acoustical Tests





Ship all doors in the manufacturer's undamaged individual cartons, securely bundled and wrapped with moisture-resistant covers and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions in a dry, clean, and ventilated area.

Deliver and store wood doors in the building following the installation of concrete, terrazzo, plaster, or other wet materials, and only after the building has dried out and has a roof.

Maintain relative humidity in the building between 30 and 65 percent. Maintain the ambient temperature at 60 degrees F minimum at the time of installation of wood doors.

Make final adjustment of seals when temperatures and humidity conditions approximate the interior conditions that will exist when the building is occupied.


Filed verify all measurements prior to preparation of drawings and fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent



possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.



2.2 GENERAL

Provide sound retardant door assemblies of the thickness, width, and height indicated, complete with perimeter seals, seal housings, gasketing, automatic door bottoms, thresholds, door frames, and astragals as required to conform to the specified STC per ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 1289.

2.3 STC RATING

Doors shall have an STC of at least 45.

STC of each door shall be not less than that indicated.

2.4 HOLLOW METAL SOUND RETARDANT DOORS

Door construction using steel facing sheets must conform to ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; and ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Stretcher level flatness must conform to ASTM A 568/A 568M; not less than 0.0598 inch thick; free from pitting, scale, and surface defects; separated by a core construction designed to meet the required STC; and tested and rated in accordance with ASTM E 90.

Doors must have flush seamless face sheets and vertical edges,with continuous welded and smooth joints. Edges must be flush or rabbeted as required for perimeter seals.

Hardware reinforcement must be steel drilled, tapped to template requirements and welded in place. Provide minimum thicknesses as follows:

Butts, 0.1494 inch; locksets, 0.1196 inch 3.04 millimeter; surface-applied hardware, 0.0747 inch.

Door surfaces must be visually flat and free from warp, waviness, and other surface irregularities and defects. Maximum allowable warp or twist must not exceed 1/8 inch when measured with a 7-foot straightedge along the diagonal and must not exceed 1/16 inch when measured with a 7-foot straightedge in the width or in any position along the length of the door.

Shop paint exposed door surfaces, including surfaces that are galvanized.



Shop paint concealed exterior door surfaces except galvanized surfaces.

Thoroughly clean all mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials from surfaces before the application of the shop coat of paint.

After cleaning, galvanized surfaces must be free of paint in accordance with ASTM D 2092, Method A, B, C, or D.

Apply to clean prepared dry surfaces one shop coat of rust inhibitive metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer by brush, dipping, or other approved method to provide a continuous minimum dry film thickness (dft) of 0.9 mil (0.0009 inch).

2.5 WOOD SOUND-RETARDANT DOORS

Construct doors with wood veneer facings separated by a core construction designed to meet the required STC. Test, rate, and label in accordance with ASTM E 90.

Comply with the AWI QSGSQCP, "Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program," for premium grade constructions and to the requirements specified.

Perform beveling, prefitting, machining, mortising, and routing for hardware, perimeter seals, and door bottom cutouts at the mill.

Furnish premium grade door facings with standard thickness face veneers conforming to AWI QSGSQCP, Type 1 for stain and transparent factory finish.

Face veneers shall be:

Face Veneer Species: Remarks

Birch

Veneer cut shall be:

Rotary

2.6 DOOR FRAMES

Fabricate frames from steel sheets conforming to ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, not less than 0.0747 inch thick, and free from pitting, scale, stretcher strains, fluting, and surface defects.

Provide frames with 2 inch faces, profiles and dimensions as indicated, with mitered reinforced corners, welded the full depth of frame and trim,



with exposed surfaces ground smooth and flush. Close contact edges to hairline joints.

Furnish hardware reinforcement steel, drilled and tapped to template requirements, and welded in place. Weld galvanized dust covers over reinforcements. Provide minimum thicknesses as follows:

Butts, 3/16 inchLock strike, 0.1196 inchSurface applied hardware, 0.0747 inch

Locate frame anchors near the top and bottom of doors and at intermediate points not over 24 inches on center. Provide a minimum of three anchors per jamb.

Provide floor anchor clips at each jamb with 2 inch vertical adjustments on increments not exceeding 1/16 inch.

Weld a temporary angle spreader to the bottom of each jamb and remove at the time of the frame installation.

Clean thoroughly all surfaces of all mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before the application of the shop coat of paint.

Apply one shop coat of rust inhibitive metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer applied to clean, dry, and prepared surfaces by brush, dipping, or other approved method to provide a continuous minimum dft of 0.9 mil (0.0009 inch).

2.7 PERIMETER INTUMESCENT SEALS AND GASKETING

Seal material for heads, jambs, and door bottoms must be a closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056, Type S, Grade SBE-42 or SCE-42.

Install seals in formed steel or extruded aluminum shapes designed to receive and hold seals and to provide concealed adjustable attachment to door frames. Concealed adjustment screws not more than 12 inches on center must provide at least 3/8-inch adjustment.

Door bottoms must be assemblies of closed-cell neoprene seals, seal housings, and automatic operating devices, mounted on the doors as indicated. Design devices to seal the spaces between the doors and the finished floors or thresholds when closed and to retract immediately when doors are opened, with a sill clearance of approximately 1/4 inch.

2.8 THRESHOLDS

Provide metal thresholds for exterior doors. Thresholds must be extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy, mill finish, not less than 1/8 inch thick, with integral seal grooves formed to the indicated section.

Provide hardwood thresholds for interior doors made of clear, all-heartwood, free of streaks, pin or worm holes, uniform in color, free of defects, finish sanded, and ready for job site transparent or paint finish.



PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 PREPARATION

Inspect door frames and obtain approval before commencing work.

Door frames must be plumb and true with not more than 1/32-inch deviation in vertical alignment in 8 feet. Anchor to the wall in accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer. Grout frames solid with mortar in masonry, concrete, and plaster wall construction. Spot grout frames in dry wall partitions with mortar at the jamb anchor clips; fill the space between metal frame and stud partition solidly with fiberglass or mineral wool insulation.

3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION

Install and adjust all doors, hardware, and seals in accordance with the approved drawings, hardware schedules, and the printed instructions of the door manufacturer.

Install and adjust perimeter seals and automatic door bottom seals to provide positive compression contact with the entire sealing surface with no gaps, openings, or breaks. Hinges or hardware which distort or pinch the perimeter seal during operation of the door will be rejected.

Door bottom devices must seal the space between the door bottoms and the finished floor and the space between the seal and seal housing.

Field apply perimeter seal housings with mitered corners and with flush, aligned hairline joints.




SECTION 08 51 13

ALUMINUM WINDOWS01/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AAMA 101 (2005) Standard Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights

AAMA 1302.5 (1976) Voluntary Specifications for Forced-Entry Resistant Aluminum Prime Windows

AAMA 1503 (1998) Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections


AAMA WSG.1 (1995) Window Selection Guide


ASTM B 584 (2006a) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications



ASTM D 1593 (1999) Standard Specification for Non-rigid Vinyl Chloride Plastic Film and Sheeting

ASTM D 1972 (1997; R 2005) Standard Practice for Generic Marking of Plastic Products





ASTM E 331 (2000) Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

ASTM E 547 (2000) Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference

GREEN SEAL (GS)

GS-36 (2000) Commercial Adhesives

NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC)

NFRC 100 (2004) Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors

NFRC 200 (2004) Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence


NFPA 101 (2005; Errata 2006; TIA 2006; TIA 2006) Life Safety Code, 2006 Edition

NATIONAL WOOD WINDOW AND DOOR ASSOCIATION (NWWDA)

AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 (1997) Voluntary Guide Specifications for Aluminum, Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors

SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)

SCAQMD Rule 1168 (1989; R 2005) Adhesive and Sealant Applications


SSPC Paint 101 (1982) Paint Specification No. 101 Aluminum Alkyd Paint Leafing (Type I) and Non-Leafing (Type II)

SSPC Paint 12 (1982; E 2000) Paint Specification No. 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film)

U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy



Efficiency Labeling System



1.2 CERTIFICATION

Each prime window unit must bear the AAMA Label warranting that the product complies with AAMA 101. Certified test reports attesting that the prime window units meet the requirements of AAMA 101, including test size, will be acceptable in lieu of product labeling.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Windows; G

Fabrication Drawings

SD-03 Product Data

Hardware; G

Fasteners; G; (LEED)

Aluminum Windows; G

Frames; G

Aluminum Sills; G

MULLIONS; G

Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

Screens; G

Weatherstripping; G

Accessories; G

Adhesives; (LEED)




Windows

Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications.



SD-05 Design Data

Structural calculations for deflection; G

Design Analysis; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Minimum condensation resistance factor

Resistance to forced entry


Windows, Data Package 1; G

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.

Plastic Identification

When not labeled, identify types in Operation and Maintenance Manual.


1.4.1 Shop Drawing Requirements

Provide drawings that indicate elevations of windows, full-size sections, thickness and gages of metal, fastenings, proposed method of anchoring, size and spacing of anchors, details of construction, method of glazing, details of operating hardware, mullion details, method and materials for weatherstripping, material and method of attaching subframes, trim, installation details, and other related items.

1.4.2 Sample Requirements

1.4.2.1 Finish Sample Requirements

Submit color chart of standard factory color coatings when factory-finish color coating is to be provided.

1.4.3 Design Data Requirements

Submit calculations to substantiate compliance with deflection



requirements. A Professional Engineer must provide calculations.

Submit design analysis with calculations showing that the design of each different size and type of aluminum window unit and its anchorage to the structure meets the requirements of paragraph 1.9.1 "Minimum Antiterrorism Performance Criteria". Calculations verifying the structural performance of each window proposed for use, under the given loads, must be prepared and signed by a registered professional engineer in the State of North Carolina. Reflect the window components and anchorage devices to the structure, as determined by the design analysis, in the shop drawings.

1.4.4 Test Report Requirements

Submit test reports for each type of window attesting that identical windows have been tested and meet the requirements specified herein for conformance to AAMA 101 including test size, and minimum condensation resistance factor (CRF) , and resistance to forced entry.


Deliver windows to project site in an undamaged condition. Use care in handling and hoisting windows during transportation and at the jobsite. Store windows and components out of contact with the ground, under a weathertight covering, so as to prevent bending, warping, or otherwise damaging the windows. Repair damaged windows to an "as new" condition as approved. If windows can not be repaired, provide a new unit.

1.6 PROTECTION

Protect finished surfaces during shipping and handling using the manufacturer's standard method. Do not apply coatings or lacquers to surfaces to which calking and glazing compounds must adhere.



Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Window materials may be locally available.


Submit Table 1 of ASTM E 2129 for applicable products: specified.

1.7.3 Plastic Identification

Verify that plastic products to be incorporated into the project are labeled in accordance with ASTM D 1972. Where products are not labeled, provide product data indicating polymeric information in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. a. Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).b. Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE). c. Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).d. Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).e. Type 5: Polypropylene (PP). f. Type 6: Polystyrene (PS).



g. Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.


Take field measurements prior to preparation of the drawings and fabrication.


1.9.1 Minimum Antiterrorism Performance Criteria

Windows must meet the minimum antiterrorism performance criteria as specified in the paragraphs below.

1.9.1.1 Glazing

Glazing must have laminated glass as specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.

1.9.1.2 Aluminum Window Frames

Restrict aluminum framing members deflections of edges of glazing they support to L/160 under an equivalent 3-second duration loading of 45 pounds per square foot (psf), where L denotes the length of the glazing supported edge. (L is to be based on edge length of glazing in frame and not on the distance between anchors that fasten frame to the structure.)

The glazing frame bite for the window frames must be adequate to accept the width of structural silicone sealant or glazing tape as specified in paragraph "Provisions for Glazing" below.

1.9.1.3 Window Frame Anchors

Fasten window frames to the supporting structure with anchors designed to resist forces generated by a 3-second duration load of 250 pounds per square foot (psf) acting on the entire window unit.

1.9.2 Wind Loading Design Speed

Design window components, including mullions, hardware, and anchors, to withstand a wind speed as indicated.

1.9.3 Tests

Test windows proposed for use in accordance with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for the particular type and quality window specified.

Perform tests by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory equipped and capable of performing the required tests. Submit the results of the tests as certified laboratory reports required herein.

Minimum design load for a uniform-load structural test must be 50 psf.

Test projected windows in accordance with the applicable portions of the AAMA WSG.1 for air infiltration, water resistance, uniform-load deflection, and uniform-load structural test.



1.10 DRAWINGS

Submit the Fabrication Drawings for aluminum window units showing complete window assembly including hardware, weatherstripping, and subframe assembly details.

1.11 WINDOW PERFORMANCE

Aluminum windows must meet the following performance requirements. Perform testing requirements by an independent testing laboratory or agency.

1.11.1 Structural Performance

Structural test pressures on window units must be for positive load (inward) and negative load (outward) in accordance with ASTM E 330. After testing, there will be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or actuating mechanisms or any other damage which could cause window to be inoperable. There must be no permanent deformation of any main frame, sash or ventilator member in excess of the requirements established by AAMA 101 for the window types and classification specified in this section.

1.11.2 Air Infiltration

Air infiltration must not exceed the amount established by AAMA 101 for each window type when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.

1.11.3 Water Penetration

Water penetration must not exceed the amount established by AAMA 101 for each window type when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547 ASTM E 331.

1.11.4 Thermal Performance

Thermal transmittance for thermally broken aluminum windows with insulating

glass must not exceed a U-factor of 0.75 Btu/hr-ft2-F determined according

to NFRC 100, and a solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) of 0.40 Btu/hr-ft2-F determined according to NFRC 200. Provide window units that comply with the U.S. Department of Energy, Energy Star Window Program for the Southern Climate Zone.

1.11.5 Condensation Index Rating

The minimum condensation index rating must be 85 as determined using NFRC approved software THERM.

1.11.6 Life Safety Criteria

Provide windows that conform to NFPA 101 Life Safety Code when rescue and/or second means of escape are indicated.

1.12 WARRANTY

Provide Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1 year period.



PART 2 PRODUCTS





2.2 WINDOWS

Provide prime windows that comply with AAMA 101 and the requirements specified herein. In addition to compliance with AAMA 101, window framing members for each individual lite of glass must not deflect to the extent that deflection perpendicular to the glass lite exceeds L/175 of the glass edge length when subjected to uniform loads at specified design pressures. Provide Structural calculations for deflection to substantiate compliance with deflection requirements. Provide windows of types, performance classes, performance grades, combinations, and sizes indicated or specified. Design windows to accommodate hardware, glass, weatherstripping, screens, and accessories to be furnished. Each window must be a complete factory assembled unit with or without glass installed. Dimensions shown are minimum. Provide windows with insulating glass and thermal break necessary to achieve a minimum Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) of 58 when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. Glazed systems (including frames and glass) will be Energy Star labeled products as appropriate to climate zone and as applicable to window type, with a whole-window Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) maximum of 0.40 determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. Glazed systems must have a U-factor maximum of .30 Btu per square foot x hr x degree F in accordance with NFRC 100.

2.2.1 Projected Windows (AP)

Type AP-HC- 80 (Optional Performance Grade). Provide projected windows with concealed four bar friction hinges only.

Windows must be high-performance classification projected aluminum sash complete with fins, closures, accessories, fittings, and trim, meeting or exceeding AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for Type P-A2-HP and the requirements specified.

Design windows, mullions, hardware, and anchors to withstand the wind loading specified.



Outswinging vents must have not less than a 6-footclearance above the finished grade.

2.2.1.1 Materials

Frames, ventilators, mullions, mullion covers, glazing beads, and fittings must be extruded aluminum shapes fabricated from aluminum conforming to ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 alloy, AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. Aluminum sheet and plate will be 5005 alloy, temper as required.

Joint sealing compound must be a gun grade, nonsag, single-component butyl or acrylic sealant conforming to ASTM C 920.

Weatherstripping must be extruded flexible polyvinylchloride, weatherstripping grade, conforming to ASTM D 1593, Type I, with a tensile strength of at least 2,200 pounds per square inch (psi) and a tear strength of not less than 275 pounds per inch .

2.2.1.2 Construction

Windows must be unequal-leg type, double-contact weathering, with 5/8-inch anchorage and a combined depth of frame and ventilator of not less than 1-3/4 inches. Frames must be not less than 3 inches deep. Minimum web thickness for solid sections must be 1/8 inch, and the minimum web thickness for solid-ventilator hardware rails must be at least 3/16 inch. Tubular sections must have a minimum web thickness of 3/32 inch, and flanges will be not less than 1/8 inch thick.

Provide allowance for expansion between component parts for window assemblies.

Provide integral drip holes or weepholes for exterior in-sill sections at not more than 2 feet on center.

Use tubular sections in horizontal meeting rails longer than 48-7/8 inches.

Corners of window frame assemblies must be coped, double mortised-and-tenoned, and riveted, or mitered and welded.

Miter and weld corners of ventilator frames; mortise and tenon construction is not permitted.

Welds must be continuous across the web member and up the abutting flanges on the unexposed surface. Welds must be dressed smooth and flush on exposed and contact surfaces and will exhibit no discoloration, pitting, or surface defects.

Corner joints must be accurately fitted, flush, watertight hairline joints not exceeding 1/64 inch in width. Apply joint-sealing compound to the unexposed surface of all mortise and tenon joints.

Support ventilators on two aluminum side arms at least 3/16 inch thick by 1 inch wide fitted with nylon friction shoes. Secure arms to vent and frame with 3/8-inch corrosion-resistant steel pivot pins with corrosion-resistant steel bushings or 3/8-inch aluminum pivot pins with nylon bushings. Control ventilator movement by friction shoes sliding in the channel guides of the fixed frame. Assembly will permit removal of the ventilator after installation and will provide an adjustable stop to permit a maximum opening angle of 55 degrees for project-out vents and 30 degrees for



project-in vents. An adjustable tension device hold the window open in any position and consist of a fixed- or adjustable-tension corrosion-resistant steel helical spring enclosed in an aluminum or corrosion-resistant steel housing and operating through the friction shoe.

Attach ventilator hardware and balance-arm assembly to ventilator and frame members with corrosion-resistant steel screws threaded into serrated corrosion-resistant steel grommet inserts.

2.2.1.3 Hardware

Operating hardware must be nickel-silver castings conforming to ASTM B 584, Alloy C97600, or AISI Series 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel. Hardware will be a modern design, smoothly finished, free of defects, and suitable for the intended purpose.

Provide cam-action locking handles and strikes for projected-out vents; cam-action locks and provide keepers for projected-in vents. Equip pole-operated projected-in vents with suitable design cam-action locks or spring-catch fasteners.

Strikes and contact surfaces for lock fasteners must be corrosion-resistant steel.

Projected-type ventilators 42 inches and wider and not pole operated must be furnished with two sets of cam-action locking handles.

2.2.1.4 Glazing Provisions

Design windows for inside glazing, using snap-on, screwless, extruded or roll-formed aluminum, or AISI series-300 corrosion-resistant steel beads. Fixed glazing stops and stop beads must be 3/4 inch high by 1/16 inch thick. Width of the stop bead will be as required for the glass thickness.

2.2.1.5 Weatherstripping

Windows must have single continuous extruded weatherstripping set in integrally formed pockets in the sash.

2.2.1.6 Aluminum Sills

Sills will be the profiles and dimensions indicated, the same alloy and finish as windows, at least 1/8 inch thick, and furnished the full width of the window opening.

Securely anchor sills in place with concealed anchors not more than 18 inches on center.

2.2.2 Forced Entry Resistant Windows

In addition to meeting the requirements of AAMA 101, windows designated for resistance to forced entry must conform to the requirements of AAMA 1302.5.

2.2.3 Glass and Glazing

Materials are specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.



2.2.4 Calking and Sealing

Are specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.


AAMA 101.

2.3 FABRICATION

Fabrication of window units must comply with AAMA 101.

2.3.1 Provisions for Glazing

Design windows and rabbets suitable for glass thickness shown or specified. For minimum antiterrorism windows, adher glazing to its supporting frame using structural silicone sealant or adhesive glazing tape. The width of the structural silicone sealant bead must be at least equal to, but not larger than two times the thickness designation of the glass to which it adheres. The width of the adhesive glazing tape will be at least equal to two times, but not more than four times the thickness designation of the glass to which it adheres.Design sash for inside glazing and for securing glass with metal beads, glazing clips, or glazing channels.


Provide for ventilating sections of all windows to ensure a weather-tight seal meeting the infiltration requirements specified in AAMA 101. Provide easily replaceable factory-applied weatherstripping. Use molded vinyl, molded or molded-expanded neoprene or molded or expanded Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer (EPDM) compression-type weatherstripping for compression contact surfaces. Use treated woven pile or wool, or polypropylene or nylon pile bonded to nylon fabric and metal or plastic backing strip weatherstripping for sliding surfaces. Do no use neoprene or polyvinylchloride weatherstripping where they will be exposed to direct sunlight.

2.3.3 Fasteners

Fabricated from 100 percent re-melted steel. Use fasteners as standard with the window manufacturer for windows, trim, and accessories. Self-tapping sheet-metal screws are not acceptable for material more than 1/16 inch thick.

2.3.4 Adhesives

Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials, GS-36, SCAQMD Rule 1168, and as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

2.3.5 Drips and Weep Holes

Provide continuous drips over heads of top ventilators. Where fixed windows adjoin ventilators, drips must be continuous across tops of fixed windows. Provide drips and weep holes as required to return water to the outside.



2.3.6 Combination Windows

Windows used in combination must be the same class and grade and will be factory assembled. Where factory assembly of individual windows into larger units is limited by transportation considerations, prefabricate, match mark, transport, and field assemble.

2.3.7 Mullions and Transom Bars

Provide mullions between multiple window units which meet the design wind loading indicated.Provide mullions with a thermal break. Secure mullions and transom bars to adjoining construction and window units in such a manner as to permit expansion and contraction and to form a weathertight joint. Provide mullion covers on the interior and exterior to completely close exposed joints and recesses between window units and to present a neat appearance.

2.3.8 Accessories

Provide windows complete with necessary hardware, fastenings, clips, fins, anchors, glazing beads, and other appurtenances necessary for complete installation and proper operation. Furnish extruded aluminum subframe receptors and subsill with each window unit.

2.3.8.1 Hardware

AAMA 101. The item, type, and functional characteristics must be the manufacturer's standard for the particular window type. Provide hardware of suitable design and of sufficient strength to perform the function for which it is used. Equip all operating ventilators with a lock or latching device which can be secured from the inside.

2.3.8.2 Fasteners

Provide concealed anchors of the type recommended by the window manufacturer for the specific type of construction. Anchors and fasteners must be compatible with the window and the adjoining construction. Provide a minimum of three anchors for each jamb located approximately 6 inches from each end and at midpoint.

2.3.8.3 Window Anchors

Anchoring devices for installing windows must be made of aluminum, cadmium-plated steel, stainless steel, or zinc-plated steel conforming to AAMA 101.

2.3.9 Finishes

Exposed aluminum surfaces must be factory finished with an organic coating. Color as indicated. All windows will have the same finish.

2.3.9.1 Organic Coating

Clean and prime exposed aluminum surfaces. Provide a high-performance finish in accordance with AAMA 2604 with total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.



2.4 THERMAL-BARRIER WINDOWS

Provide thermal-barrier windows, complete with accessories and fittings, where indicated.

Specify material and construction except as follows:

a. Aluminum alloy must be 6063-T6.

b. Frame construction, including operable sash, must be factory-assembled and factory-sealed inner and outer aluminum completely separated from metal-to-metal contact. Join assembly by a continuous, concealed, low conductance divider housed in an interlocking extrusion of the inner frame. Metal fasteners, straps, or anchors will not bridge the connection between the inner and outer frame.

c. Operating hardware for each sash must consist of spring-loaded nylon cushion blocks and pin locks designed to lock in predetermined locations.

d. Sash must be completely separated from metal-to-metal contact by means of woven-pile weatherstripping, plastic, or elastomeric separation members.

e. Operating and storm sash will be factory-glazed with the type of glass indicated and of the quality specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.

2.5 MULLIONS

Provide mullions between multiple-window units where indicated.

Mullions and mullion covers must be reinforced as required for the specified wind loading, and securely anchored to the adjoining construction. Mullion extrusion will include serrations or pockets to receive weatherstripping, sealant, or tape at the point of contact with each window flange.

Mullion assembly must include aluminum window clamps or brackets screwed or bolted to the mullion and the mullion cover.

Mullion cover must be screw-fastened to the mullion unless otherwise indicated.

Mullion reinforcing members must be steel or aluminum shapes provided by the window manufacturer to meet the specified design loading.

2.6 FINISH

2.6.1 High-Performance Coating

Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum windows with a two-coat fluoropolymer coating system containing at least 70 percent by weight polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2 resin, factory-applied, oven-baked, conforming to AAMA 2604, with a primer coat of 0.20 to 0.30 mils and a color coat of minimum 1.0 mil, total dry film thickness of 1.20 to 1.3 mils. Finish must be free of scratches and other blemishes.



2.6.2 Color

Color must be as indicated on the drawings. Color listed is not intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Method of Installation

Install in accordance with the window manufacturer's printed instructions and details. Build in windows as the work progresses or install without forcing into prepared window openings. Set windows at proper elevation, location, and reveal; plumb, square, level, and in alignment; and brace, strut, and stay properly to prevent distortion and misalignment. Protect ventilators and operating parts against accumulation of dirt and building materials by keeping ventilators tightly closed and locked to frame. Bed screws or bolts in sill members, joints at mullions, contacts of windows with sills, built-in fins, and subframes in mastic sealant of a type recommended by the window manufacturer. Install and caulk windows in a manner that will prevent entrance of water and wind. Fasten insect screens securely in place.


Where aluminum surfaces are in contact with, or fastened to masonry, concrete, wood, or dissimilar metals, except stainless steel or zinc, protect the aluminum surfacefrom dissimilar materials as recommended in the Appendix to AAMA 101. Do not coat surfaces in contact with sealants after installation with any type of protective material.



3.3.3 Anchors and Fastenings

Make provision for securing units to each other, to masonry, and to other adjoining construction.

3.3.4 Adjustments After Installation

After installation of windows and completion of glazing and field painting, adjust all ventilators and hardware to operate smoothly and to provide weathertight sealing when ventilators are closed and locked. Lubricate hardware and operating parts as necessary. Verify that products are properly installed, connected, and adjusted.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

After the sash is erected and glazed, lubricate and adjust ventilators for smooth weathertight operation. Wax or lubricate guides and adjust balances for the proper tension.

Weatherstripping must make weathertight contact around the entire weatherstripped area when ventilators are closed and locked. Weatherstripping must not cause the sash to bind or prevent closing and locking the ventilator.

3.4.1 Hardware Adjustments

Make final operating adjustments after glazing work is complete. Operating sash or ventilators must operate smoothly and be weathertight when in locked position.

3.4.2 Cleaning

Clean aluminum window finish and glass on exterior and interior sides in accordance with window manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use alkaline or abrasive agents. Take precautions to avoid scratching or marring window finish and glass surfaces.

3.5 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

Aluminum must be kept from direct contact with steel or other dissimilar materials by painting, nonabsorptive tape, gasket, or other approved system as recommended by the manufacturer and as specified.

Give aluminum surfaces in contact with steel one coat of zinc-chromate primer applied to a dry-film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils, or one coat of a suitable nonhardening joint compound capable of excluding moisture from the joint during prolonged service.

Give steel surfaces in contact with aluminum one coat of zinc-chromate paint applied to a dry-coat thickness of 1.5 mils, and two or more coats of aluminum paint conforming to SSPC Paint 101, aluminum alkyd, Type II, applied to a dry-film thickness of 1.5 mils for each coat and a total dry-film thickness of 3.0 mils.

Corrosion-resistant, aluminized, or hot-dip galvanized steel placed in contact with aluminum need not be painted.



Give aluminum surfaces placed in contact with wood, concrete, or masonry construction one coat of bituminous paint conforming to SSPC Paint 12, applied to a thickness of at least 1/16 inch.

3.6 CLEANING

Clean interior and exterior surfaces of window units of mortar, plaster, paint spattering spots, and other foreign matter to present a neat appearance, to prevent fouling of weathering surfaces and weather-stripping, and to prevent interference with the operation of hardware. Replace all stained, discolored, or abraded windows that cannot be restored to their original condition with new windows.




SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM B 177 (2001; R 2006e1) Standard Guide for Engineering Chromium Electroplating



BHMA A156.1 (2006) Butts and Hinges

BHMA A156.13 (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches, Series 1000

BHMA A156.16 (2002) Auxiliary Hardware

BHMA A156.18 (2006) Materials and Finishes

BHMA A156.2 (2003) Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches

BHMA A156.21 (2006) Thresholds

BHMA A156.22 (2005) Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems

BHMA A156.3 (2001) Exit Devices

BHMA A156.4 (2000) Door Controls - Closers

BHMA A156.5 (2001) Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products

BHMA A156.6 (2005) Architectural Door Trim

BHMA A156.7 (2003) Template Hinge Dimensions


MIL-STD-810 (Rev F; Notice 3) Department of Defense



Test Method Standard for Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests

MIL-STD-901 Department of Defense Test Method Standard for Shock Tests, High Impact, Shipboard Machinery, Equipment, & Systems




STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)

SDI/DOOR A250.8 (2003) Recommended Specification for Standard Steel Doors and Frames



1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Hardware schedule; G

Keying system

SD-03 Product Data

Hardware items; G


Installation


Hardware Schedule items, Data Package 1; G

Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.


Key Bitting

1.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Prepare and submit hardware schedule in the following form:



Reference Mfr. UL Mark Publi- Name Key (If fire BHMA Hard- cation and Con- rated Finish ware Quan- Type Catalog trol and Designa- Item tity Size No. Finish No. Symbols listed) tion ----- ----- ---- ------ ------ ------- ------- -------- ---------

1.4 KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS

Submit key bitting charts to the Contracting Officer prior to completion of the work. Include:

a. Complete listing of all keys (AA1, AA2, etc.).

b. Complete listing of all key cuts (AA1-123456, AA2-123458).

c. Tabulation showing which key fits which door.

d. Copy of floor plan showing doors and door numbers.

e. Listing of 20 percent more key cuts than are presently required in each master system.


1.5.1 Hardware Manufacturers and Modifications

Provide, as far as feasible, locks, hinges, and closers of one lock, hinge, or closer manufacturer's make. Modify hardware as necessary to provide features indicated or specified.





Deliver hardware in original individual containers, complete with necessary appurtenances including fasteners and instructions. Mark each individual container with item number as shown in hardware schedule. Deliver permanent keys and removable cores to the Contracting Officer, either directly or by certified mail. Deliver construction master keys with the locks.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use



materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.


2.2 TEMPLATE HARDWARE

Provide hardware to be applied to metal or to prefinished doors manufactured to template. Promptly furnish template information or templates to door and frame manufacturers. Conform to BHMA A156.7 for template hinges. Coordinate hardware items to prevent interference with other hardware.

2.3 HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS

Provide all hardware necessary to meet the requirements of NFPA 80 for fire doors and NFPA 101 for exit doors, as well as to other requirements indicated, even if such hardware is not specifically mentioned under paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule." Provide the label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for such hardware listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or labeled and listed by another testing laboratory acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

2.4 HARDWARE ITEMS

Clearly and permanently mark with the manufacturer's name or trademark, hinges, locks, latches, exit devices, bolts and closers where the identifying mark will be visible after the item is installed. For closers with covers, the name or trademark may be beneath the cover.

2.4.1 Hinges

BHMA A156.1, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. Construct loose pin hinges for exterior doors and reverse-bevel interior doors so that pins will be nonremovable when door is closed. Other antifriction bearing hinges may be provided in lieu of ball-bearing hinges.

2.4.2 Continuous-Geared Hinges

Minimum 0.0120 inch thick, extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame; joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cover; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. Anodize aluminum components after milling and drilling are complete. Fabricate hinges to template screw locations. Comply with the following:

a. Grade: Heavy duty, for doors weighing up to 600 pounds, with bearings at not more than 3 inch spacing.

b. Type: Full surface, with removable continuous caps over fasteners.

c. Fire Pins: Provide steel pins to hold door in place for labeled fire doors if required by test listing.



2.4.3 Locks and Latches

2.4.3.1 Bored Locks and Latches

BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1.

2.4.3.2 Auxiliary Locks

BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

2.4.3.3 Combination Locks (Cypher Locks)

Heavy-duty, mechanical combination lockset with five pushbuttons, standard-sized knobs, 3/4 inch deadlocking latch, 2-3/4 inch backset. Operate the locks by pressing two or more of the buttons in unison or individually in the proper sequence. Inside knob will operate the latch. Provide a keyed cylinder on the interior to permit setting the combination. Provide a keyed removable-core cylinder on the exterior to permit bypassing the combination. Provide a thumb turn on the interior to activate passage set function, so that outside knob operates latch without using the combination.

2.4.3.4 High Security Locks

High security electromechanical combination rim deadbolt, dial combination, self-powered with an internal self activating power plant. A twist of the dial provides all the power necessary to enter the combination and review audit features. Provide with pedestrian exit devices.

HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS

Power: Internal, self-powered

Combinations: 3 modes:Single: 1 million combinationsDual: 500 billion combinationsSupervisor/Subordinate: 2 million combinations

Direct Dial: No need to clear before entering combination. Once you stop turning the dial, the power will shut down after 40 seconds.

Dead Zones: None

Memory: Non-volatile

LCD: Limited View Liquid Crystal Display with indicator arrows makes dialing easy and exact.

Combination Changes: (LCD indicator in change key mode.) Combination changed with correct combination or serial number.

Random Number View: True Scramble

Daylocking: No

Back Dialing: No

Lock Reset: Automatic when bolt is thrown or 40 seconds after



HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS turning has stopped.

Manipulation: Fail secure against high-voltage attack, robot attack, X-ray methods, magnetic, vibration, and R/F.

Audit: The X-09 records all openings, and the record is non-resettable.

The X-09 records unsuccessful attempts after 3 incorrect combination attempts and resets after a correct opening.

Wrong Try Penalty: 10-14 errors results in a 3 minute time out. 15 errors or greater results in a 4 minute time out. Both error count and penalty time resets with valid combination.

Back Cover: Lock on back cover pin prevents removing the back cover without the combination.

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE

Temperature: Tested - 10oF to 155oF Operational Range.ASTM B 177Salt Spray: Operational after 72 hours of continuous exposure (per ASTM B 117-90).

High R.P.M.: Not operational after 4 hours in each direction @ 600R.P.M. Fails Secure.

Cycle Test: Meets or exceeds FF-L-2740A Specifications.

Humidity: Operational after 10 days of 140oF @ 98% humidity (Operational after 10 days testing per MIL-STD-810E, Method 507.3, Procedure III,

Temperature Cycling 86oF to 140oF @ 98% RH).

Stress: Operational after 7 days in a stress chamber @

194oF. Meets FF-L-2740A Specification.

Vibration: MIL-STD-810

Shock: MIL-STD-901

Electrical Discharge: 250KV on Dial

Electromagnetic Pulse: Meets FF-L-2740A Specification for simulation of high altitude nuclear blast.

Case & Bolt Strength: 600 pounds in two directions.

2.4.4 Exit Devices

BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type and vertical rod devices. Provide open back strikes for pairs of doors with mortise and



vertical rod devices. Provide touch bars in lieu of conventional crossbars and arms. Provide escutcheons, not less than 7 by 2-1/4 inch.

2.4.5 Cylinders and Cores

Provide cylinders and cores for new locks, including locks provided under other sections of this specification. Provide cylinders and cores with six seven pin tumblers. Provide cylinders from products of one manufacturer, and provide cores from the products of one manufacturer. Rim cylinders, mortise cylinders, and knobs of bored locksets have interchangeable cores which are removable by special control keys. Stamp each interchangeable core with a key control symbol in a concealed place on the core.

2.4.6 Keying System

Provide a grand master keying system for each building. Provide a construction master keying system with construction interchangeable cores. Provide key cabinet as specified.

2.4.7 Lock Trim

Cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain design.

2.4.7.1 Knobs and Roses

Conform to the minimum test requirements of BHMA A156.2 and BHMA A156.13 for knobs, roses, and escutcheons. For unreinforced knobs, roses, and escutcheons, provide 0.050 inch thickness. For reinforced knobs, roses, and escutcheons, provide outer shell of 0.035 inch thickness, and combined thickness of 0.070 inch, except for knob shanks, which are 0.060 inch thick.

2.4.7.2 Lever Handles

Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs . Conform to the minimum requirements of BHMA A156.13 for mortise locks of lever handles for exit devices. Provide lever handle locks with a breakaway feature (such as a weakened spindle or a shear key) to prevent irreparable damage to the lock when force in excess of that specified in BHMA A156.13 is applied to the lever handle. Provide lever handles return to within 1/2 inch of the door face.

2.4.7.3 Electric Strikes

A. BHMA A156.31, Grade 1

2.4.8 Keys

Furnish one file key, one duplicate key, and one working key for each key change and for each master keying system. Furnish one additional working key for each lock of each keyed-alike group. Furnish 6 master keys, 3 construction master keys, and 5 control keys for removable cores. Furnish a quantity of key blanks equal to 20 percent of the total number of file keys. Stamp each key with appropriate key control symbol and "U.S. property - Do not duplicate." Do not place room number on keys.



2.4.9 Door Bolts

BHMA A156.16. Provide dustproof strikes for bottom bolts, except for doors having metal thresholds. Automatic latching flush bolts: BHMA A156.3, Type 25.

2.4.10 Closers

BHMA A156.4, Series C02000, Grade 1, with PT 4C. Provide with brackets, arms, mounting devices, fasteners, full size covers, except at storefront mounting, and other features necessary for the particular application. Size closers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, or provide multi-size closers, Sizes 1 through 6, and list sizes in the Hardware Schedule. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty.

2.4.10.1 Identification Marking

Engrave each closer with manufacturer's name or trademark, date of manufacture, and manufacturer's size designation located to be visible after installation.

2.4.11 Door Protection Plates

BHMA A156.6.

2.4.11.1 Sizes of Mop and Kick Plates

2 inch less than door width for single doors; one inch less than door width for pairs of doors. Provide 10 inch kick plates for flush doors . Provide 6 inch mop plates.

2.4.12 Door Stops and Silencers

BHMA A156.16. Silencers Type L03011. Provide three silencers for each single door, two for each pair.

2.4.13 Thresholds

BHMA A156.21. Use J35100, with vinyl or silicone rubber insert in face of stop, for exterior doors opening out, unless specified otherwise.

2.4.14 Weather Stripping Gasketing

BHMA A156.22. Provide the type and function designation where specified in paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule". Provide a set to include head and jamb seals, sweep strips, and, for pairs of doors, astragals. Air leakage of weather stripped doors not to exceed 1.25 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Provide weather stripping with one of the following:

2.4.14.1 Extruded Aluminum Retainers

Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.050 inch wall thickness with vinyl, neoprene, silicone rubber, or polyurethane inserts. Provide clear (natural) anodized aluminum.

2.4.15 Rain Drips

Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.08 inch thick, clear anodized. Set



drips in sealant and fasten with stainless steel screws.

2.4.15.1 Door Rain Drips

Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 5/8 inch projection. Align bottom with bottom edge of door.

2.4.15.2 Overhead Rain Drips

Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 2-1/2 inch projection, with length equal to overall width of door frame. Align bottom with door frame rabbet.

2.4.16 Special Tools

Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to service and adjust hardware items.

2.5 FASTENERS

Provide fasteners of proper type, quality, size, quantity, and finish with hardware. Provide stainless steel or nonferrous metal fasteners that are exposed to weather. Provide fasteners of type necessary to accomplish a permanent installation.

2.6 FINISHES

BHMA A156.18. Provide hardware in BHMA 630 finish (satin stainless steel), unless specified otherwise. Provide items not manufactured in stainless steel in BHMA 626 finish (satin chromium plated) over brass or bronze, except aluminum paint finish for surface door closers. Provide hinges for exterior doors in stainless steel with BHMA 630 finish. Furnish exit devices in BHMA 630 finish. Match exposed parts of concealed closers to lock and door trim. Match hardware finish for aluminum doors to the doors.

2.7 KEY CABINET AND CONTROL SYSTEM

BHMA A156.5, hooks for each building.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 INSTALLATION

Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed installation instructions. Fasten hardware to wood surfaces with full-threaded wood screws or sheet metal screws. Provide machine screws set in expansion shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry surfaces. Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core construction. Provide through bolts where necessary for satisfactory installation.

3.3.1 Weather Stripping Installation

Handle and install weather stripping to prevent damage. Provide full contact, weather-tight seals. Operate doors without binding.

3.3.1.1 Stop-Applied Weather Stripping

Fasten in place with color-matched sheet metal screws not more than 9 inch on center after doors and frames have been finish painted.

3.3.2 Threshold Installation

Extend thresholds the full width of the opening and notch end for jamb stops. Set thresholds in a full bed of sealant and anchor to floor with cadmium-plated, countersunk, steel screws in expansion sleeves.

3.4 FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS

Install hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 for fire doors, NFPA 101 for exit doors.

3.5 HARDWARE LOCATIONS

SDI/DOOR A250.8, unless indicated or specified otherwise.

a. Kick Plates: Push side of single-acting doors. Both sides of double-acting doors.

b. Mop Plates: Bottom flush with bottom of door.

3.6 KEY CABINET AND CONTROL SYSTEM

Locate where directed . Tag one set of file keys and one set of duplicate keys. Place other keys in appropriately marked envelopes, or tag each key. Furnish complete instructions for setup and use of key control system. On tags and envelopes, indicate door and room numbers or master or grand master key.


After installation, protect hardware from paint, stains, blemishes, and



other damage until acceptance of work. Submit notice of testing 15 days before scheduled, so that testing can be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Adjust hinges, locks, latches, bolts, holders, closers, and other items to operate properly. Demonstrate that permanent keys operate respective locks, and give keys to the Contracting Officer. Correct, repair, and finish, as directed, errors in cutting and fitting and damage to adjoining work.

3.8 HARDWARE SETS

HARDWARE SETS

HANGAR 130

HW-1

Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Latch Set F75 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-2

2 Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6302 Closers C02021 x 6891 Lockset F84 x 6301 Door Coordinator As Specified2 Flush Bolts L04081 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-3

Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Exit Device Type I, Function 08 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified1 Kick Plate J102 x 630

HW-4

Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6301 Lockset F84 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified1 Closer C02021 x 689

HW-5

2 Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6301 Exit Device Type I, Function 08 x 6302 Closers C02021 x 6892 Flush Bolts L04081 x 6301 Door Coordinator As Specified1 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-6

2 Continuous Hinges A51021G x 6302 Exit Device Type 6, Function 08 x 6302 Closers C02021 x 689



2 Kick Plates J102 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified2 Door Stops L02241 x 630

HW-7

Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Exit Device Type I, Function 01 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified1 Door Stop L02241 x 6301 Kick Plate J102 x 630

HW-8

3 Pairs Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6302 Closers C02021 x 6891 Lock Set F84 x 6302 Flush Bolts L04081 x 6301 Door Coordinator As Specified

HW-9

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Exit Device Type I, Function 08 x 6301 Door Stop L02141 x 6301 Kick Plate J102 x 630

HW-10

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6301 Lock Set F84 x 630

HW-11

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Lock Set F84 x 6301 Door Stop L02141 x 630

HW-12

Continuous Hinge A51021G x 630Combination Lock Set As Specified x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-13

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 630Combination Lock Set As SpecifiedDoor Stop L02141 x 630

HW-14

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Passage Set F75 x 630



1 Door Stop (G-11 OMLs) L02141 x 630

HW-15

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Passage Set F75 x 6301 High Security Lock As Specified1 Door Stop L02141 x 630

HW-16

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6301 Passage Set F75 x 6301 Door Stop L02141 x 630

HW-17

3 Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Lock Set F84 x 6302 Flush Bolts L04081 x 630

HW-18

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Kick Plate J102 x 6301 Pull Plate J402 x 6301 Push Plate J304 x 6301 Mop Plate J103 x 630

HW-19

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Key Card Reader As Specified1 Electric Strike As Specified1 Panic Device Type 01, Trim Entrance x 630

HW-20

3 Pairs Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Combination Lock As Specified2 Flush Bolts L04081 x 6302 Door Stops L02141 x 630

HW-21

2 Continuous Hinges A51021G x 6301 Combination Lock As Specified2 Closers C02021 x 6891 Door Coordinator As Specified 2 Flush Bolts L04081 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-22

3 Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6302 Exit Devices Type 6, Function 08 x 6302 Door Stops L02141 x 630



2 Kick Plates J102 x 630

HW-23

3 Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6301 Latch Set F78 x 6302 Flush Bolts L04081 x 6302 Door Stops L02141 x 630

HW-24

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 latch Set F78 x 630

TOFT

HW-1T

1 Continuous Hinge A51021G x 689 (Match Pool Color)1 Electric Strike As Specified1 Key Card Reader As Specified1 Closer C02021 x 689 (Match Door Color)1 Door Stop L02241 x 6301 Exit Device Type I, Function 08 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-2T

1 Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6302 Closers C02021 x 6891 Exit Device Type I, Function 01 x 6301 Door Coordinator As Specified2 Flush Bolts L04081 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-3T

Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Lock Set F84 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified1 Door Stop L01361 x 630

HW-4T

2 Continuous Hinge A51021G x 6302 Closer C02021 x 6891 Lock Set F84 x 6302 Flush Bolts L04081 x 632 Door Stop L01361 x 6301 Set Weatherstripping As Specified1 Door Coordinator As Specified

HW-5T

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Panic Device Type I, Function 08 x 6301 Card Reader As Specified



1 Door Stop L02141 x 6301 Electric Strike As Specified

HW-6T

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Card Reader As Specified1 Electric Strike As Specified1 Lock Set F84 x 6301 Door Stop L02141 x 630

HW-7T

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Lock Set F84 x 6301 Door Stop L02141 x 630

HW-8T

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6301 Passage Set F75 x 6301 Door Stop L02141 x 630

HW-9T

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6301 Privacy Set F76A x 6301 Door Stop L02141 x 630

HW-10T

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6301 Lock Set F84 x 6302 Flush Bolts L04081 x 63

HW-11T

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Passage Set F75 x 6301 High Security Lock As Specified1 Door Stop L02141 x 630

ORDINANCE OPS

HW-1ORD

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Panic Device Type I, Function 08 x 6301 Closer C02021 x 6891 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-2ORD

3 Pairs Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x NRP x 6301 Lock Set F84 x 6302 Closers C02021 x 6892 Flush Bolts L04081 x 6302 Door Stops L02241 x 630



1 Set Weatherstripping As Specified

HW-3ORD

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½1 Closer C02021 x 6891 Door Stop L02141 x 6301 Set Smoke Seals 1 Latch Set F75 x 630

HW-4ORD

1½ Pair Butts A5111 x 4½ x 4½ x 6301 Privacy Set F76A x 6301 Door Stop L02141 x 630

Provide hardware for aluminum doors under this section. Deliver Hardware templates and hardware, except field-applied hardware to the aluminum door and frame manufacturer for use in fabricating the doors and frames.




SECTION 08 81 00

GLAZING07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 1036 (2006) Standard Specification for Flat Glass

ASTM C 1048 (2004) Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass

ASTM C 1172 (2003) Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass

ASTM C 1184 (2005) Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants

ASTM C 509 (2006) Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material

ASTM C 864 (2005) Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers

ASTM D 395 (2003) Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Compression Set


ASTM E 773 (2001) Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units

ASTM E 774 (1997) Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units

GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

GANA Glazing Manual (2004) Glazing Manual

GANA Sealant Manual (1990) Sealant Manual

INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA)

IGMA TB-3001 (1990) Guidelines for Sloped Glazing

IGMA TM-3000 (1997) Glazing Guidelines for Sealed



Insulating Glass Units

IGMA TR-1200 (1983) Commercial Insulating Glass Dimensional Tolerances

NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC)

NFRC 100 (2004) Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors

NFRC 200 (2004) Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence


Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System




16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Insulating Glass

Documentation for Energy Star qualifications.

Glazing Accessories

Manufacturer's descriptive product data, handling and storage recommendations, installation instructions, and cleaning instructions.


Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products



included in project.

SD-07 Certificates

Insulating Glass

Certificates stating that the glass meets the specified requirements. Labels or manufacturers marking affixed to the glass will be accepted in lieu of certificates.

Glazing Accessories


Local/Regional Materials; LEED

LEED (tm) documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.


Deliver products to the site in unopened containers, labeled plainly with manufacturers' names and brands. Store glass and setting materials in safe, enclosed dry locations and do not unpack until needed for installation. Handle and install materials in a manner that will protect them from damage.



Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Glazing materials may be locally available.


Submit Table 1 of ASTM E 2129 as applicable for the products specified.

1.5 WARRANTY

1.5.1 Warranty for Insulating Glass Units

Warranty insulating glass units against development of material obstruction to vision (such as dust, fogging, or film formation on the inner glass surfaces) caused by failure of the hermetic seal, other than through glass breakage, for a 10-year period following acceptance of the work. Provide new units for any units failing to comply with terms of this warranty within 45 working days after receipt of notice from the Government.



PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 GLASS

ASTM C 1036, unless specified otherwise. In doors and sidelights, provide safety glazing material conforming to 16 CFR 1201.

2.2.1 Clear Glass

For interior glazing (i.e., pass and observation windows), 1/4 inch thick glass should be used.

Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality q4 (A) . Provide for glazing openings not indicated or specified otherwise. Use double-strength sheet glass or 1/8 inch float glass for openings up to and including 15 square feet, 3/16 inch for glazing openings over 15 square feet but not over 30 square feet, and 1/4 inch for glazing openings over 30 square feet but not over 45 square feet.

2.2.2 Annealed Glass

Annealed glass shall be Type I transparent flat type, Class 1 - clear , Quality q3 - glazing select.

2.2.3 Laminated Glass

ASTM C 1172, Kind LA fabricated from two nominal 1/8 inch pieces of Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, flat annealed transparent glass conforming to ASTM C 1036. Flat glass shall be laminated together with a minimum of 0.030 inch thick, clear polyvinyl butyral interlayer. The total thickness shall be nominally 1/4 inch.

2.2.4 Mirrors

2.2.4.1 Glass Mirrors

Glass for mirrors shall be Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear , Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Glass color shall be clear . Glass shall be coated on one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating, and mirror backing paint. Silver coating shall be highly adhesive pure silver coating of a thickness which shall provide reflectivity of 83 percent or more of incident light when viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass, and shall be free of pinholes or other defects. Copper protective coating shall be pure bright reflective copper,



homogeneous without sludge, pinholes or other defects, and shall be of proper thickness to prevent "adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Mirror backing paint shall consist of two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant paint , and shall be baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver and copper coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.

2.2.5 Tempered Glass

ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type I, Class 1 (transparent) , Quality q3, 1/4" inch thick. Color shall be clear . Provide wherever safety glazing material is indicated or specified.

2.2.6 Fire/Safety Rated Glass

Fire/safety rated glass shall be laminated Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear. Glass shall have a 60 minute rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E 119. Glass shall be permanently labeled with appropriate markings.

2.3 INSULATING GLASS UNITS

Two panes of glass separated by a dehydrated 1/2 inch airspace, filled with argon gas, and hermetically sealed. Glazed systems (including frames) shall be Energy Star labeled products as appropriate to climate zone and as applicable to window type, with a whole-window Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) maximum of 0.40 determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. Glazed panelsshall have a U-factor maximum of 0.30 Btu per square foot x hr x degree F in accordance with NFRC 100. Glazing shall meet or exceed a luminous efficacy of 1.0. Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in IGMA TR-1200. The units shall meet CBA Grade requirement when tested in accordance with ASTM E 773 and ASTM E 774, Class A. Spacer shall be black, roll-formed, , with bent or tightly welded or keyed and sealed joints to completely seal the spacer periphery and eliminate moisture and hydrocarbon vapor transmission into airspace through the corners. Primary seal shall be compressed polyisobutylene and the secondary seal shall be a specially formulated silicone.

2.3.1 Buildings

The inner light shall be ASTM C 1172, clear annealed flat glass Type I, Class I, Quality q3, 1/4 inch thick. The outer light shall be ASTM C 1048, Grade B (fully tempered), Style I (uncoated), Type I, Class 2 solar-reflective, Quality q4, 1/4 inch thick.

2.3.2 Flight Line Oriented Window Openings

The inner light and outer light shall be ASTM C 1172, clear annealed flat glass Type I, Class I, Quality q3, 1/4 inch thick.

2.4 SETTING AND SEALING MATERIALS

Provide as specified in the GANA Glazing Manual, IGMA TM-3000, IGMA TB-3001, and manufacturer's recommendations, unless specified otherwise herein. Do not use metal sash putty, nonskinning compounds, nonresilient preformed sealers, or impregnated preformed gaskets. Materials exposed to view and unpainted shall be gray or neutral color.



2.4.1 Sealants

Provide elastomeric and structural sealants.

2.4.1.1 Structural Sealant

ASTM C 1184, Type S.

2.4.2 Joint Backer

Joint backer shall have a diameter size at least 25 percent larger than joint width; type and material as recommended in writing by glass and sealant manufacturer.

2.4.3 Preformed Channels

Neoprene, vinyl, or rubber, as recommended by the glass manufacturer for the particular condition.

2.4.4 Setting Blocks and Edge Blocks

Closed-cell neoprene setting blocks shall be dense extruded type conforming to ASTM C 509 and ASTM D 395, Method B, Shore A durometer between 70 and 90. Edge blocking shall be Shore A durometer of 50 (+ or - 5). Silicone setting blocks shall be required when blocks are in contact with silicone sealant. Profiles, lengths and locations shall be as required and recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Block color shall be black.

2.4.5 Glazing Gaskets

Glazing gaskets shall be extruded with continuous integral locking projection designed to engage into metal glass holding members to provide a watertight seal during dynamic loading, building movements and thermal movements. Glazing gaskets for a single glazed opening shall be continuous one-piece units with factory-fabricated injection-molded corners free of flashing and burrs. Glazing gaskets shall be in lengths or units recommended by manufacturer to ensure against pull-back at corners. Glazing gasket profiles shall be as indicated on drawings.

2.4.5.1 Fixed Glazing Gaskets

Fixed glazing gaskets shall be closed-cell (sponge) smooth extruded compression gaskets of cured elastomeric virgin neoprene compounds conforming to ASTM C 509, Type 2, Option 1.

2.4.5.2 Wedge Glazing Gaskets

Wedge glazing gaskets shall be high-quality extrusions of cured elastomeric virgin neoprene compounds, ozone resistant, conforming to ASTM C 864, Option 1, Shore A durometer between 65 and 75.

2.4.5.3 Aluminum Framing Glazing Gaskets

Glazing gaskets for aluminum framing shall be permanent, elastic, non-shrinking, non-migrating, watertight and weathertight.

2.4.6 Accessories

Provide as required for a complete installation, including glazing points,



clips, shims, angles, beads, and spacer strips. Provide noncorroding metal accessories. Provide primer-sealers and cleaners as recommended by the glass and sealant manufacturers.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 PREPARATION

Preparation, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations. Determine the sizes to provide the required edge clearances by measuring the actual opening to receive the glass. Grind smooth in the shop glass edges that will be exposed in finish work. Leave labels in place until the installation is approved, except remove applied labels on heat-absorbing glass and on insulating glass units as soon as glass is installed. Securely fix movable items or keep in a closed and locked position until glazing compound has thoroughly set. Coordinate installation with commissioning as specified in Section 01 91 00 COMMISSIONING.

3.4 GLASS SETTING

Shop glaze or field glaze items to be glazed using glass of the quality and thickness specified or indicated. Glazing, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations. Aluminum windows, wood doors, and wood windows may be glazed in conformance with one of the glazing methods described in the standards under which they are produced, except that face puttying with no bedding will not be permitted. Handle and install glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use beads or stops which are furnished with items to be glazed to secure the glass in place. Verify products are properly installed, connected, and adjusted.



3.4.1 Sheet Glass

Cut and set with the visible lines or waves horizontal.

3.4.2 Insulating Glass Units

Do not grind, nip, or cut edges or corners of units after the units have left the factory. Springing, forcing, or twisting of units during setting will not be permitted. Handle units so as not to strike frames or other objects. Installation shall conform to applicable recommendations of IGMA TB-3001 and IGMA TM-3000.

3.4.3 Installation of Laminated Glass

Sashes which are to receive laminated glass shall be weeped to the outside to allow water drainage into the channel.

3.5 CLEANING

Clean glass surfaces and remove labels, paint spots, putty, and other defacement as required to prevent staining. Glass shall be clean at the time the work is accepted.

3.6 PROTECTION

Glass work shall be protected immediately after installation. Glazed openings shall be identified with suitable warning tapes, cloth or paper flags, attached with non-staining adhesives. Reflective glass shall be protected with a protective material to eliminate any contamination of the reflective coating. Protective material shall be placed far enough away from the coated glass to allow air to circulate to reduce heat buildup and moisture accumulation on the glass. Upon removal, separate protective materials for reuse or recycling. Glass units which are broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or otherwise damaged during construction activities shall be removed and replaced with new units.




SECTION 08 91 00.00 22

TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANELS08/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




AAMA 609/610 (2002) Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum


ASTM D 1002 (2001) Apparent Shear Strength of Single-Lap-Joint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal-to-Metal)

ASTM D 1037 (2006a) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials

ASTM D 2244 (2007) Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates

ASTM C 297/C 297M (2004) Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions

ASTM D 4060 (2001) Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser

ASTM D 572 (2004) Rubber Deterioration by Heat and Oxygen

ASTM D 635 (2006) Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position

ASTM E 72 (2004) Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction


UL 723 (2003; Rev thru May 2005) Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics

SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 1


of Building Materials

UL 972 (2002) Burglary Resisting Glazing Material

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Translucent sandwich panel system

Submit for wall system, accessories, and mock-up. Tentative approval of drawings shall be received before fabrication of mock-up. Final approval of drawings will be deferred pending approval of mock-up and accessories. Drawings shall indicate in detail all system parts including elevations, full-size sections, framing, jointing, panels, types and thickness of metal, flashing and coping details, field connections, weep and drainage system, finishes, sealing methods, glazing, glass sizes and details, firestopping insulation materials, and erection details.

SD-03 Product Data


Include descriptive literature, detailed specifications, and available performance test data.







1.3.1 Testing Requirements

System components shall have been tested in accordance with the requirements below, and shall meet performance requirements specified.

A. Flame Spread and Smoke Development (UL 723).

B. Burn Extent (ASTM D 635).

C. Color Difference (ASTM D 2244).

SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 2


D. Abrasion/Erosion Resistance (ASTM D 4060).

E. Impact Strength (UL 972).

F. Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C 297/C 297M after aging by ASTM D 1037).

G. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D 1002).

H. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E 72).

I. Foreign Object Damage (FOD)

1.3.2 Manufacturer's Qualifications

A. Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10) consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three (3) of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer.

B. Panel system must be listed by the International Code Council - Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an approved agency.


Installation shall be by an experienced installer, which has been in the business of installing specified panel systems for at least five (5) consecutive years and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.


The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete panel system.

A. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Provide system complete with framing, mullions, trim, panels, sealants, fasteners, anchors, accessories, concealed auxiliary members, and attachment devices for securing the wall to the structure as specified or indicated.

1.4.1 Source

Wall system components shall be furnished by one manufacturer or fabricator.

1.4.2 Design

Pre-assembled units with integral panels. Fully coordinate system accessories directly incorporated, and adjacent to contiguous related work and insure materials compatibility, deflection limitations, thermal

SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 3


movements, and clearances and tolerances as indicated or specified.

1.4.3 Thermal MOvement

Fabricate, assemble, and erect system with adequate allowances for expansion and contraction of components and fastenings to prevent buckling damage, joint seal failure, undue stress on fastenings or other detrimental effects.

1.4.4 Structural Requirements

Design entire system to withstand the indicated wind and concentrated loads, and the following wind loads acting normal to the plane of the wall:

A. On the field of panels 34 psf acting inward, and the same load acting outward.

B. On corner areas, on all facades, the outward-acting (negative) design load shall be increased to 64 pounds per square foot.

1.5 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

Welding shall be performed by certified welders qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M using procedures, materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.


Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store with a minimum of handling. Storage spaces shall be dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from heavy dust, not subject to combustion products or sources of water, and shall permit easy access for inspection and handling.

1.6.1 Identification

Prior to delivery, mark wall components to correspond with shop and erection drawings placement location and erection.

1.7 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturer's and installer's written warranty agreeing to repair or replace panel system work which fails in materials or workmanship within one (5) years of the date of Owner acceptance for each phase of construction. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include leakage, excessive deflection, deterioration of finish on metal in excess of normal weathering and defects in accessories, insulated translucent sandwich panels and other components of the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 4


Indoor sealants and adhesives used must have a VOC content less than current VOC content limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168. Sealants used as fillers must meet requirements of the Bay Area Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule #51.

2.2 TRANSLUCENT SANDWICH PANEL

2.2.1 Face Sheets

A. Translucent Faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins.

1. Thermoplastic (e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable.

B. Flammability of Interior Face Sheets:

1. Flame Spread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listed, which requires periodic unannounced retesting, with flame spread rating no greater than 50 and smoke developed no greater than 250 when tested in accordance with UL 723.2. Burn extent by ASTM D 635 shall be no greater than 1 inch.3. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame.4. Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200 degrees F for 30 minutes per IBC.

C. Weatherability of Exterior Face Sheets:

1. Color Stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more than 3.0 CIE units DELTA E by ASTM D 2244 after 5 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 5 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least three (3) white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching.2. Erosion Barrier: Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion barrier embedded beneath the surface to provide long-term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure. Exterior face surface loss shall not exceed .7 mils and 40 mgs when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4060 employing CS17 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500 grams for 1000 cycles. Sacrificial surface films or coatings are not acceptable erosion barriers.

D. Appearance:

1. Exterior Face Sheets: Smooth, 0.070 inch thick, hurricane high-impact white as indicated.2. Interior Face Sheets: Smooth, 0.045 inch thick and crystal.3. Face sheets shall not vary more than +/- 10 percent in thickness and be uniform in color.

2.2.2 Grid Core

A. Aluminum I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I-beam shall be no less than 7/16 inch. The I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances

SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 5


of not greater than +/- .002 inch.

2.2.3 Laminate Adhesive:

A. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25 years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives".

B. Minimum tensile strength of 750 psi when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C 297/C 297M after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D 1037.

C. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D 1002 after exposure to five (5) separate conditions:

1. 50 percent Relative Humidity at 73 degrees F: 540 psi.2. 182 degrees F: 100 psi.3. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at Room Temperature: 800 psi.4. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at 182 degrees F: 250 psi.5. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D 572: 1400 psi.

2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets resin laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking thermally broken (aluminum) I-beams. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat, sharp edge.

1. Thickness: 2-3/4 inches.2. Light Transmission: White/Crystal 30%3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: White/Crystal 0.374. U-factor to be 0.53.

5. Grid Pattern: Nominal 12 inches by 24 inches.

B. Panels shall be deflect no more than 1.9 inches at 30 psf in 10'0" span wihtout a supporting frame by ASTM E 72.

C. Panels shall withstand 1200 degree F fire for minimum one (1) hour without collapse of exterior flaming.

2.4 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM

A. Closure System: Extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system designed for horizontal load transfer to building structure.

B. Sealing Tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre-applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions.

C. Fasteners: 300 Series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building.

SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 6


D. Finish: Exposed aluminum to be manufacturer's factory applied finish that meets the performance requirements of AAMA 2604.

1. Color to be selected from manufacturer's custom colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION


a. Recycled Content LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 77 00.00 20 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.



Provide invoices, plant slips, certification indicating total quantities of waste material, and amounts diverted by way of means as stated above for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 77 00.00 20 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.

3.3 FABRICATION

The translucent fiberglass sandwich panel components shall be of the materials and thickness indicated or specified. The details indicated are representative of the required design and profiles. Acceptable designs may differ from that shown if the proposed system components conform to the limiting dimensions indicated and the requirements specified herein. Unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise, the methods of fabrication and assembly shall be at the discretion of the manufacturer. Perform fitting and assembling of components in the shop to the maximum extent practicable. Anchorage devices shall permit adjustment in three directions.

3.3.1 Ventilation and Drainage

Provide internal ventilation drainage system of weeps or based on principles of pressure equalization to ventilate the wall internally and to discharge condensation and water leakage to exterior as inconspicuously as possible. Flashings and other materials used internally shall be nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nonbleeding.

3.3.2 Protection and Treatment of Metals

3.3.2.1 General

Remove from metal surfaces lubricants used in fabrication and clean off other extraneous material before leaving the shop.

3.3.2.2 Galvanic Action

Provide protection against galvanic action wherever dissimilar metals are in contact, except in the case of aluminum in permanent contact with galvanized steel, zinc, stainless steel, or relatively small areas of white bronze. Paint contact surfaces with one coat bituminous paint or apply

SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 7


appropriate sealant material or nonabsorptive, noncorrosive, and nonstaining tape or gasket between contact surfaces.

3.3.2.3 Protection for Aluminum

Protect aluminum which is placed in contact with, built into, or which will receive drainage from masonry, lime mortar, concrete, or plaster with one coat of alkali-resistant bituminous paint. Where aluminum is contacted by absorptive materials subject to repeated wetting or treated with preservative noncompatible with aluminum, apply two coats of aluminum paint, to such materials and seal joints with approved calking compound.

3.4 INSTALLATION

Installation and erection of glazed wall system and all components shall be performed in accordance with approved recommendations and instructions of wall system manufacturer.

3.4.1 Bench Marks and Reference Points

Establish and permanently mark bench marks for elevations and building line offsets for alignment at convenient points on each floor level. Should any error or discrepency be discovered in location of the marks, stop erection work in that area until discrepancies have been corrected.

3.4.2 Verifying Conditions and Adjacent Surfaces

After establishment of lines and grades and prior to system installation examine supporting structural elements. Verify governing dimensions, including floor elevations, floor to floor heights, minimum clearances between curtain wall and structural frames, and other permissible dimensional tolerances in the building frame.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

3.5.1 Panels

Upon completion of wall system installation, thoroughly wash panel surfaces on both sides and remove labels, spots, putty, compounds, and other defacements.

3.5.2 Aluminum Surfaces

Protection methods, cleaning, and maintenance shall be in accordance with AAMA 609/610 and AAMA 609/610.

3.5.3 Other Metal Surfaces

After installation, protect, panels, and other exposed surfaces from disfiguration, contamination, contact with harmful materials, and from other construction hazards that will interfere with their operation, or damage their appearance or finish. Protection methods shall be in accordance with recommendations of product manufacturers or of the respective trade association. Remove paper or tape factory applied protection immediately after installation. Clean surfaces of mortar, plaster, paint, smears of sealants, and other foreign matter to present neat appearance. In addition, wash and thoroughly rinse. Where surfaces become stained or discolored, clean or restore finish in accordance with recommendations of product manufacturer.

SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 8



SECTION 08 91 00.00 22 Page 9


SECTION 08 91 00

METAL WALL LOUVERS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

AMCA 500-D (1998) Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating

AMCA 511 (1999; R 2004) Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices


ASTM A 366/A 366M (1997e1) Standard Specification for Commercial Steel, Sheet, Carbon,(0.15 Maximum Percent Cold-Rolled


1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Wall louvers

SD-03 Product Data

Metal Wall Louvers

SD-04 Samples

Wall louvers; G






1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and protection against dampness. Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

1.4 DETAIL DRAWINGS

Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of wall louvers. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, fastenings, and profiles.

PART 2 PRODUCTS





2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Galvanized Steel Sheet

ASTM A 653/A 653M, coating designation G90.

2.2.2 Cold Rolled Steel Sheet

ASTM A 366/A 366M, Class 1, with matte finish. Use for interior louvers only.

2.3 METAL WALL LOUVERS

Weather resistant type, with bird screens and made to withstand a wind speed as indicated on the drawings. Wall louvers shall bear the AMCA certified ratings program seal for air performance and water penetration in accordance with AMCA 500-D and AMCA 511. The rating shall show a water penetration of 0.20 or less ounce per square foot of free area at a free velocity of 800 feet per minute.



2.3.1 Formed Metal Louvers

Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than 16 U.S. gage, or aluminum sheet not less than 0.08 inch thick.

2.3.2 Screens and Frames

Provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 12 or 16 gage zinc-coated steel; 1/2 inch square mesh, 16 gage copper; or 1/4 inch square mesh, 16 gage zinc-coated steel or copper bird screening. Mount screens in removable, rewirable frames of same material and finish as the louvers.

2.4 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES

Provide zinc-coated or stainless steel screws and fasteners. Provide other accessories as required for complete and proper installation.

2.5 FINISHES

2.5.1 Steel

Provide factory-applied coating. Clean and phosphate treat exposed surfaces and apply rust-inhibitive primer and baked enamel finish coat, one mil minimum total dry film thickness, color as indicated on the drawings for exterior doors and frames.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Wall Louvers

Install using stops or moldings, flanges, strap anchors, or jamb fasteners as appropriate for the wall construction and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.2 Screens and Frames

Attach frames to louvers with screws or bolts.

3.4 PROTECTION FROM CONTACT OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS

3.4.1 Copper or Copper-Bearing Alloys

Paint copper or copper-bearing alloys in contact with dissimilar metal with heavy-bodied bituminous paint or separate with inert membrane.

3.4.2 Aluminum

Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint the dissimilar metal with a primer and two coats of aluminum paint.

3.4.3 Metal

Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.4.4 Wood

Paint wood or other absorptive materials that may become repeatedly wet and in contact with metal with two coats of aluminum paint or a coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.




SECTION 09 22 00

METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A 463/A 463M (2006) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated


ASTM C 645 (2007) Nonstructural Steel Framing Members

ASTM C 754 (2004) Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products

ASTM C 841 (2003) Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring


NAAMM ML/SFA 920 (1991) Metal Lathing and Furring

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Metal support systems; G

Submit for the erection of metal framing, furring, and ceiling suspension systems. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, and fastenings.


Deliver materials to the job site and store in ventilated dry locations. Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. If materials are stored outdoors, stack materials off the ground, supported on a level platform, and fully protected from the weather. Handle materials carefully to prevent damage. Remove damaged items and provide new items.






PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 MATERIALS

Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating ASTM A 653/A 653M, G-60; aluminum coating ASTM A 463/A 463M, T1-25; or a 55-percent aluminum-zinc coating.

2.2.1 Materials for Attachment of Lath

2.2.1.1 Wall Framing

ASTM C 841.

2.2.1.2 Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing

NAAMM ML/SFA 920.

2.2.2 Materials for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard

2.2.2.1 Suspended Ceiling Systems

ASTM C 645.

2.2.2.2 Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing and Furring

ASTM C 645, gauge as indicated on the drawings.



PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Systems for Attachment of Lath

3.3.1.1 Suspended Ceiling Systems and Wall Furring

ASTM C 841, except as indicated otherwise.


NAAMM ML/SFA 920, except that framing members shall be 16 inches o.c. unless indicated otherwise.

3.3.2 Systems for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard

3.3.2.1 Suspended Ceiling Systems

ASTM C 754, except that framing members shall be 16 inches o.c. unless indicated otherwise.


ASTM C 754, except as indicated otherwise.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

Framing members which will be covered by finish materials such as wallboard or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, shall be within the following limits:

a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;



b. Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;

c. Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and

d. Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.

Framing members which will be covered by ceramic tile set in dry-set mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive shall be within the following limits:

a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;

b. Plates and runners: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;

c. Studs: 1/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and

d. Face of framing members: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a true plane. -- End of Section --



SECTION 09 24 23

CEMENT PLASTER04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM A 185/A 185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

ASTM C 1032 (2006) Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base

ASTM C 1063 (2006) Standard Practice for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster


ASTM C 206 (2003) Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime

ASTM C 841 (2003) Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring

ASTM C 847 (2006) Standard Specification for Metal Lath

ASTM C 897 (2005) Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters

ASTM C 926 (2006) Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster

ASTM C 933 (2007b) Welded Wire Lath

ASTM D 1784 (2007) Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

1.2 SUBMITTALS




SD-03 Product Data

Materials

Detailed description of the proposed job-mix proportions for coats; including identification of thickness of coats.





Packaged materials shall be delivered to the site in the original packages and containers with labels intact and seals unbroken. Cementitious materials shall be kept dry and stored off the ground under cover away from damp surfaces until ready to be used. Aggregate shall be covered to prevent the absorption or loss of moisture.


Cement plaster shall not be applied when the ambient temperature is 40 degrees F or lower, or when a drop in temperature below 40 degrees F is expected within 48 hours after application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT

Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, white portland cement, Type I .



2.3 LIME

Lime shall conform to ASTM C 206, Type S.

2.4 SAND

Sand aggregate for job-mixed base coat and job-mixed finish coat stucco shall conform to ASTM C 897.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

Accessories shall be roll formed galvanized steel, or rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) , except that cornerite and striplath shall be formed from steel sheets with manufacturer's standard galvanized coating. Vinyl members shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1784. Welded wire corner reinforcements shall be zinc coated, galvanized 17 gauge steel wire conforming to ASTM A 185/A 185M. Furring shall include hangers, bolts, inserts, clips, fastenings, and attachments of number, size, and design to develop the full strength of the members.

2.6 METAL LATH

Metal lath shall conform to ASTM C 847, types and weights in accordance with the various spacing shown in ASTM C 841. Lath for vertical application on steel and wood framing supports shall be expanded metal or welded or woven wire and shall have paper backing with a minimum vapor permeance of 5 perms. Woven wire lath shall be a maximum 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch mesh wire of not less than 0.0540 inch nominal diameter and shall conform to ASTM C 1032. Welded wire lath shall conform to ASTM C 933, with openings not to exceed 2 x 2 inches. Expanded metal or wire lath shall be fabricated in a manner to provide not less than 1/4 inch keying between wire and paper backing and keying shall be obtained by a uniform series of slots in a perforated face paper woven between the wires.

2.7 WATER

Water shall be clean, fresh, potable, and free from amounts of oils, acids, alkalis and organic matter that would be injurious to the stucco.

PART 3 EXECUTION





Separate all waste material in accordance with the Construction Waste Management Plan. Place and/or dispose of all waste materials such that a minimum of 50 percent is diverted from landfill by either salvage,



recycling plan, and/or reuse.


3.3 LATH

Lath shall be installed in accordance with ASTM C 841 or ASTM C 1063 except as otherwise specified. Metal and wire lath shall be applied straight, without buckles and with joints staggered. End laps of metal lath shall be not less than 1 inch. When paper-backed lath is used, the paper shall be split from the lath at all lap areas to provide a paper to paper and lath to lath lap. Horizontal joints shall be shiplapped. Lath shall be interrupted at all control joints.

3.3.1 Steel and Wood Supports

Metal lath without integral backing over vertical open or solid wood and steel backing frame construction shall be applied only after a backing of shiplapped waterproofed building paper or other approved material has been applied to the area to receive the stucco. Lath shall be secured to the wood frames with nails or staples spaced not over 6 inches on centers along each support; and where sheets of lath are lapped, fasteners shall be driven so as to hold both lapped edges securely in place. Lath shall be secured to steel frames in accordance with ASTM C 841 or ASTM C 1063, as applicable.

3.3.2 On Concrete and Masonry

Lath shall be fastened every 8 inches vertically and every 16 inches horizontally. Where wood supports adjoin masonry or concrete in the same direction, casing bead, control joints, or reinforcement shall be provided as indicated.

3.3.3 Over Metal Lintels and Flashings

Lath over metal lintels shall be extended vertically over the angles to a height of not less than 6 inches and horizontally across the underside of the lintels and shall be secured in an approved manner. Lath over metal flashings shall lap the flashings not less than 2 inches and shall be extended vertically for a height of not less than 6 inches.

3.3.4 Special Shapes, Profiles, and Contours

Special shapes, profiles, and contours shall be formed with wood, metal or aluminum furring and reinforcing.

3.4 FURRING

Furring shall be installed to true lines and surfaces and shall be rigidly supported and secured in place.

3.5 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

Preparation of surfaces for application of stucco to solid bases such as stone, masonry or concrete shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C 926.



3.6 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATION

Cement plaster shall be applied in two coats to a thickness to match existing plaster including moderate texture variations. Cement plaster application shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C 926 and the following:

3.6.1 Workmanship

Items or features of the work in connection with or adjoining the stucco shall be in place, plumb, straight, and true prior to beginning the stucco work. Masonry surfaces to receive cement plaster shall be evenly dampened immediately prior to application of cement plaster. Each cement plaster coat shall be applied continuously in one general direction, without allowing mortar to dry at edges. Where it is impossible to work the full dimension of a wall surface in a continuous operation, jointing shall be made at a break, opening, or other natural division of the surface. Edges to be joined shall be dampened slightly to produce a smooth confluence. Exterior corners of cement plaster shall be slightly rounded.

3.6.2 Scratch Coat

Scratch coat shall be applied not less than 3/8 inch thick under sufficient pressure to form good keys and to completely embed the reinforcement. Before the scratch coat has set, it shall be lightly scratched in one direction and vertical surfaces shall be scratched in the horizontal direction only. The scratch coat shall be fog cured for a minimum of 72 hours.

3.6.3 Finish Coat

Surfaces of the scratch coat shall be dampened not more than 1 hour before the finish coat is to be applied to a uniform wetness with no free-standing water on the surface. The finish coat shall have a smooth trowel finish to match existing plaster. The finish coat shall be fog cured for a minimum of 48 hours. Care shall be taken to prevent staining.

3.6.4 Surface Tolerance

When a 10 foot straightedge is placed at any location on the finished surface of the cement plaster, excluding rough-textured finish, the surface shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from the straightedge.

3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION

Fog curing shall be accomplished by applying a fine mist of water to the cement plaster. Care shall be exercised during fog curing to avoid erosion damage to the stucco surfaces. A solid stream of water shall not be used. Frequency of fogging shall be not less than three times daily. When directed the Contractor shall protect the stucco from the direct rays of the sun during severe drying conditions using canvas, cloth or other approved sheet material.

3.8 PATCHING AND POINTING

Loose, cracked, damaged or defective work shall be replaced or patched as directed. Patching shall match existing work in texture and color and shall be finished flush.






SECTION 09 29 00

GYPSUM BOARD10/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 1002 (2004) Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs

ASTM C 1047 (2005) Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base

ASTM C 1396/C 1396M (2006a) Standard Specification for Gypsum Board

ASTM C 36/C 36M (2003e1) Gypsum Wallboard

ASTM C 475/C 475M (2002) Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board

ASTM C 630/C 630M (2003e1) Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board

ASTM C 840 (2007) Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board

ASTM C 954 (2004) Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness

ASTM D 1037 (2006a) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials

ASTM D 2394 (2005) Simulated Service Testing of Wood and Wood-Base Finish Flooring

ASTM D 5420 (2004) Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Strike Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact)

ASTM E 695 (2003) Measuring Relative Resistance of



Wall, Floor, and Roof Construction to Impact Loading


GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)

GA 214 (1996) Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish

GA 216 (2004) Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board




UL Fire Resistance (2007) Fire Resistance Directory

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board

Impact Resistant Gypsum Board

Accessories

Submit for each type of gypsum board and for cementitious backer units.

Gypsum Board; (LEED)


Adhesives; (LEED)Joint Treatment Materials






SD-07 Certificates

Asbestos Free Materials; G

Certify that gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types, cementitious backer units, and joint treating materials do not contain asbestos.


Material Safety Data Sheets


Manufacturer maintenance instructions

Waste Management



LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.

Gypsum Board; (LEED)

LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.

Adhesives; (LEED)

LEED documentation relative to low emitting materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.


1.3.1 Delivery

Deliver materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles with each bearing the brand name, applicable standard designation, and name of manufacturer, or supplier.

1.3.2 Storage

Keep materials dry by storing inside a sheltered building. Where necessary to store gypsum board and cementitious backer units outside, store off the



ground, properly supported on a level platform, and protected from direct exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Store per manufacturer's recommendations for allowable temperature and humidity range. Gypsum wallboard shall not be stored with materials which have high emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) or other contaminants. Do not store panels near materials that may offgas or emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.

1.3.3 Handling

Neatly stack gypsum board and cementitious backer units flat to prevent sagging or damage to the edges, ends, and surfaces.


1.4.1 Temperature

Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 50 degrees F in the structure for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and following the application of gypsum board, cementitious backer units, and joint treatment materials, or the bonding of adhesives.

1.4.2 Exposure to Weather

Protect gypsum board and cementitious backer unit products from direct exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions.

1.4.3 Temporary Ventilation

Provide temporary ventilation for work of this section.



Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Gypsum board materials may be locally available.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Furnish type of gypsum board work specialized by the installer with a minimum of 3 years of documented successful experience.

1.7 SCHEDULING

The gypsum wall board shall be taped, spackled and primed before the installation of the highly-emitting materials. The gypsum wallboard shall be installed after the installation and ventilation period of the highly-emitting materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project



products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.


2.2 MATERIALS

Conform to specifications, standards and requirements specified. Provide gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types, cementitious backing units, and joint treating materials manufactured from asbestos free materials only. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets and manufacturer maintenance instructions for gypsum materials including adhesives.

2.2.1 Gypsum Board

ASTM C 36/C 36M and ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Gypsum board shall contain a minimum of 5 percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 20 percent post-industrial recycled content. Paper facings shall contain 100 percent post-consumer recycled paper content. Gypsum cores shall contain a minimum of 95 percent post-industrial recycled gypsum content.

2.2.1.1 Regular

48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.

2.2.1.2 Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)


2.2.2 Regular Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board

ASTM C 630/C 630M

2.2.2.1 Regular


2.2.3 Impact Resistant Gypsum Board

48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.Reinforced gypsum panel with imbedded fiber mesh or lexan backing testing in accordance with the following tests. Provide fasteners that meet manufacturer requirements and specifications stated within this section. Impact resistant gypsum board, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less .

2.2.3.1 Structural Failure Test

ASTM E 695 or ASTM D 2394 for structural failure (drop penetration). ASTM E 695 using a 60 lb sand filled leather bag, resisting no less than 300 ft. lb. cumulative impact energy before failure or ASTM D 2394 using



5.5 inch hemispherical projectile resisting no less than 264 ft. lb. before failure. Provide test specimen stud spacing a minimum 16 inch on center.

2.2.3.2 Indentation Test

ASTM D 5420 or ASTM D 1037 for indentation resistance. ASTM D 5420 using a 32 oz weight with a 5/8 inch hemispherical impacting head dropped once 3 feet creating not more than 0.137 inch indentation or ASTM D 1037 using no less than 470 lb weight applied to the 0.438 inch diameter ball to create not more than a 0.0197 inch indentation depth.

2.2.4 Joint Treatment Materials

ASTM C 475/C 475M. Use all purpose joint and texturing compound containing inert fillers and natural binders, including lime compound. Pre-mixed compounds shall be free of antifreeze, vinyl adhesives, preservatives, biocides and other slow releasing compounds.

2.2.4.1 Embedding Compound

Specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at gypsum board joints and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.

2.2.4.2 Finishing or Topping Compound

Specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound.

2.2.4.3 All-Purpose Compound

Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a finishing compound and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.

2.2.4.4 Setting or Hardening Type Compound

Specifically formulated and manufactured for use with fiber glass mesh tape.

2.2.4.5 Joint Tape

Use cross-laminated or tapered edge tape recommended by the manufacturer. Paper and fiberglass joint tape are not permitted.

2.2.5 Fasteners

2.2.5.1 Screws

ASTM C 1002, Type "G", Type "S" or Type "W" steel drill screws for fastening gypsum board to gypsum board, wood framing members and steel framing members less than 0.033 inch thick. ASTM C 954 steel drill screws for fastening gypsum board to steel framing members 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. Provide cementitious backer unit screws with a polymer coating.

2.2.6 Adhesives

Do not use adhesive containing benzene, carbon tetrachloride, or trichloroethylene. Adhesive must meet the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit.



2.2.7 Accessories

ASTM C 1047. Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed for intended use. Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not acceptable. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease, and other materials that may adversely affect bond of joint treatment.

2.2.8 Water

Provide clean, fresh, and potable water.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 EXAMINATION

3.3.1 Framing and Furring

Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and spacing to provide a suitable substrate to receive gypsum board and cementitious backer units. Verify that all blocking, headers and supports are in place to support plumbing fixtures and to receive soap dishes, grab bars, towel racks, and similar items. Do not proceed with work until framing and furring are acceptable for application of gypsum board and cementitious backer units.

3.4 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD

Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with ASTM C 840 or GA 216 and the requirements specified. Apply gypsum board with separate panels in moderate contact; do not force in place. Stagger end joints of adjoining panels. Neatly fit abutting end and edge joints. Use gypsum board of maximum practical length; select panel sizes to



minimize waste. Cut out gypsum board to make neat, close, and tight joints around openings. In vertical application of gypsum board, provide panels in lengths required to reach full height of vertical surfaces in one continuous piece. Lay out panels to minimize waste; reuse cutoffs whenever feasible. Surfaces of gypsum board and substrate members may not be bonded together with an adhesive. Treat edges of cutouts for plumbing pipes, screwheads, and joints with water-resistant compound as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. Minimize framing by floating corners with single studs and drywall clips. Install 5/8 inch gypsum or ceiling board over framing. Provide type of gypsum board for use in each system specified herein as indicated.

3.4.1 Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Framing

Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840, System VIII or GA 216.

3.4.2 Gypsum Board for Wall Tile or Tile Base Applied with Adhesive

In dry areas (areas other than tubs, shower enclosures, saunas, steam rooms, gang shower rooms), apply glass mat water-resistant gypsum tile backing board in accordance with ASTM C 840, System X or GA 216.

3.4.3 Control Joints

Install expansion and contraction joints in ceilings and walls in accordance with ASTM C 840, System XIII or GA 216. Fill control joints between studs in fire-rated construction with firesafing insulation to match the fire-rating of construction.

3.4.4 Application of Impact Resistant Gypsum Board

Apply in accordance with applicable system of ASTM C 840 as specified or GA 216. Follow manufacturers written instructions on how to cut, drill and attach board.

3.5 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD

Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA 214 and GA 216. Finish plenum areas above ceilings to Level 1 in accordance with GA 214. Finish water resistant gypsum backing board, ASTM C 630/C 630M, to receive ceramic tile to Level 2 in accordance with GA 214. Finish all other gypsum board walls, partitions and ceilings to Level 5 in accordance with GA 214. Provide joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment. Tool joints as smoothly as possible to minimize sanding and dust. Do not use fiber glass mesh tape with conventional drying type joint compounds; use setting or hardening type compounds only. Provide treatment for water-resistant gypsum board as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. Protect workers, building occupants, and HVAC systems from gypsum dust.

3.5.1 Uniform Surface

Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell, semigloss or gloss paint finish, or where severe, up or down lighting conditions occur, finish gypsum wall surface in accordance to GA 214 Level 5. In accordance with GA 214 Level 5, apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to the entire gypsum board surface, after the two-coat joint and fastener treatment is complete and dry.



3.6 SEALING

Seal openings around pipes, fixtures, and other items projecting through gypsum board and cementitious backer units as specified in Section 07920 JOINT SEALANTS Apply material with exposed surface flush with gypsum board or cementitious backer units.

3.6.1 Sealing for Glass Mat or Reinforced Gypsum Board Sheathing

Apply silicone sealant in a 3/8 inch bead to all joints and trowel flat. Apply enough of the same sealant to all fasteners penetrating through the glass mat gypsum board surface to completely cover the penetration when troweled flat. Do not place construction and materials behind sheathing until a visual inspection of sealed joints during daylight hours has been completed by Contracting Officer.

3.7 FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES

Wherever fire-rated construction is indicated, provide materials and application methods, including types and spacing of fasteners, wall framing in accordance with the specifications contained in UL Fire Resistance for the Design Number(s) indicated, . Joints of fire-rated gypsum board enclosures shall be closed and sealed in accordance with UL test requirements or GA requirements. Seal penetrations through rated partitions and ceilings tight in accordance with tested systems.

3.8 PATCHING

Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance, ready to receive finishes.




SECTION 09 30 00

CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ANSI A137.1 (1988) Ceramic Tile

ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 (2005) Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile


ASTM C 1026 (1987; R 2002) Standard Test Method for Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Freeze-Thaw Cycling

ASTM C 1027 (1999; R 2004) Standard Test Method for Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile

ASTM C 1028 (2007) Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method

ASTM C 144 (2004) Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar


ASTM C 206 (2003) Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime

ASTM C 207 (2006) Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes

ASTM C 241 (1990; R 2005) Standard Specification for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic

ASTM C 33 (2003) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C 373 (1988; R 2006) Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent



Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products

ASTM C 482 (2002) Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement

ASTM C 501 (1984; R 2002) Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser

ASTM C 648 (2004) Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile

ASTM C 847 (2006) Standard Specification for Metal Lath

MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA (MIA)

MIA Design Manual (2003) Dimension Stone Design Manual

TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA (TCNA)

TCNA Hdbk (2008) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation




36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data



Manufacturer's catalog data and preprinted installation and cleaning instructions. Indicate VOC content.



Tile; (LEED)Reinforcing Wire Fabric; (LEED)

Documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project.

SD-07 Certificates

Tile; GMortar, Grout, and Adhesive; G

Certificates indicating conformance with specified requirements. Furnish a master grade certificate for tile.




Tile; (LEED)


Adhesives; (LEED)

LEED documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.


Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with seals unbroken and labels and hallmarks intact. Protect materials from weather, and stored under cover in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.


a. Close space in which tile is being set to traffic and other work. Keep closed until tile is firmly set. Do not walk or work on newly tiled floors without using kneeling boards or equivalent protection of the tiled surface. Keep traffic off horizontal portland cement mortar installations for at least 72 hours. Keep all traffic off epoxy installed floors for at least 40 hours after grouting, and heavy traffic off for at least 7 days, unless otherwise specifically authorized by manufacturer.

b. Do not perform ceramic tile work unless the substrate and ambient temperature is at least 50 degrees F and rising. Maintain temperature above 50 degrees F while the work is being performed and for at least 7 days after completion of the work. When temporary heaters are used, ventilate



the area to the outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new tilework.




1.6 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1-year period.

1.7 EXTRA STOCK

Supply an extra two percent of each type tile used in clean and marked cartons.

1.8 DETAIL DRAWINGS

Dimension and draw detail drawings at a minimum scale of 1/4 inch = 1 foot. Include drawings of pattern at inside corners, outside corners, termination points and location of all equipment items such as thermostats, switch plates, mirrors and toilet accessories mounted on surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE

Conform to ANSI A137.1 for standard grade tile. Provide grade sealed containers. Mark seals with the marks on the signed master grade certificate. Provide an impact resistant tile with a minimum floor breaking strength for wall tile of 90 pound and for floor tile of 250 pound in accordance with ASTM C 648. The manufacturer will provide a frost resistant rating for tile used in cold climate projects as determined by ASTM C 1026. Provide a 0.50 maximum percent water absorption in accordance with ASTM C 373. Provide a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50 wet and dry in accordance with ASTM C 1028. Identify floor tile as Class IV Plus-Extra Heavy Traffic, durability classification as rated by the manufacturer when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1027 for abrasion resistance as related to foot traffic.

2.1.1 Mosaic Tile

Furnish ceramic mosaic tile and trim shall be unglazed porcelain containing a minimum of 70 percent post-industrial feldspar unpolished with sharply formed face. Provide tile size 2 by 2 inch . Color as indicated.

2.1.2 Porcelain Tile

Furnish an unglazed porcelain tile and trim with the color extending uniformly through the body of the tile. Porcelain tile shall contain a minimum of 70 percent post-industrial feldspar. Provide a nominal size of 6 by 6 by 5/16 inch thick. Criteria for tile to meet or exceed is as follows: Abrasive wear in accordance with ASTM C 501 and bonding strength in accordance with ASTM C 482. Comply with 36 CFR 1191 for coefficient of friction for interior tiled floors. Color as indicated.



2.1.3 Glazed Wall Tile

Provide glazed wall tile with cushioned edges and trim edged with lead-free bright finish. Provide tile 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inch. Color as indicated.

2.2 SETTING-BED

Compose the setting-bed of the following materials:

2.2.1 Aggregate for Concrete Fill

Conform to ASTM C 33 for aggregate fill. Do not exceed one-half the thickness of concrete fill for maximum size of coarse aggregate.

2.2.2 Portland Cement

Conform to ASTM C 150 for cement, Type I, white for wall mortar and gray for other uses.

2.2.3 Sand

Conform to ASTM C 144 for sand.

2.2.4 Hydrated Lime

Conform to ASTM C 206 for hydrated lime, Type S or ASTM C 207, Type S.

2.2.5 Metal Lath

Conform to ASTM C 847 for flat expanded type metal lath, and weighing a minimum 2.5 pound/square yard.

2.3 WATER

Provide potable water.

2.4 MORTAR, GROUT, AND ADHESIVE

Conform to the following for mortar, grout, and adhesive:

2.4.1 Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar

ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1. Zero-volatile organic compound (VOC) content.

2.4.2 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar

ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1. Zero-VOC content.

2.4.3 Ceramic Tile Grout

ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1; petroleum-free and plastic-free sand portland cement grout, dry-set grout, or latex-portland cement grout. Maximum VOC content of 150 grams/liter.

2.5 MARBLE THRESHOLDS

Provide marble thresholds of size required by drawings or conditions. Categorize marble Group A as classified by MIA Design Manual. Provide a



fine sand-rubbed finish marble with white in color as approved by the Contracting Officer. Provide minimum 12.0 marble abrasion when tested in accordance with ASTM C 241.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 PREPARATORY WORK AND WORKMANSHIP

Inspect surface to receive tile in conformance to the requirements of ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 for surface conditions for the type setting bed specified and for workmanship. Provide variations of tiled surfaces that fall within maximum values shown below:

TYPE WALLS FLOORS

Dry-Set Mortar 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft. Organic Adhesives 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/16 inch in 3 ft. Latex Portland Cement Mortar 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft. 3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Do not start tile work until roughing in for mechanical and electrical work has been completed and tested. Do not start floor tile installation in spaces requiring wall tile until after wall tile has been installed. Apply tile in colors and patterns indicated in the area shown on the drawings. Install tile with the respective surfaces in true even planes to the elevations and grades shown. Provide special shapes as required for sills, jambs, recesses, offsets, external corners, and other conditions to provide a complete and neatly finished installation. Solidly back tile bases and coves with mortar.



3.5 INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE

Install wall tile in accordance with the TCNA Hdbk, method W 221-07 and W 245-07.

3.5.1 Workable or Cured Mortar Bed

Install tile over workable mortar bed or a cured mortar bed at the option of the Contractor. Install a 4 mil polyethylene membrane, metal lath, and scratch coat. Conform to ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 for workable mortar bed, materials, and installation of tile. Conform to ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 for cured mortar bed and materials.

3.5.2 Dry-Set Mortar and Latex-Portland Cement Mortar

Use Dry-set or Latex-Portland Cement to install tile in accordance with ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1. Use Latex Portland Cement when installing porcelain ceramic tile.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE

Install floor tile in accordance with TCNA Hdbk method F 112-07 and F 113-07.

3.6.1 Workable or Cured Mortar Bed

Install floor tile over a workable mortar bed or a cured mortar bed at the option of the Contractor. Conform to ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 for workable mortar bed materials and installation. Conform to ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 for cured mortar bed materials and installation. Provide minimum 1/4 inch to maximum 3/8 inch joints in uniformed width.

3.6.2 Dry-Set and Latex-Portland Cement

Use dry-set or Latex-Portland cement mortar to install tile directly over properly cured, plane, clean concrete slabs in accordance with ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1. Use Latex Portland cement when installing porcelain ceramic tile.

3.6.3 Ceramic Tile Grout

Prepare and install ceramic tile grout in accordance with ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MARBLE THRESHOLDS

Install thresholds where indicated, in a manner similar to that of the ceramic tile floor. Provide thresholds full width of the opening. Install head joints at ends not exceeding 1/4 inch in width and grouted full.

3.8 EXPANSION JOINTS

Form and seal joints as specified in Section 07 92 00JOINT SEALANTS.

3.8.1 Walls

Provide expansion joints at control joints in backing material. Wherever backing material changes, install an expansion joint to separate the different materials.



3.8.2 Floors

Provide expansion joints over construction joints, control joints, and expansion joints in concrete slabs. Provide expansion joints where tile abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs and columns and at intervals of 24 to 36 feet each way in large interior floor areas and 12 to 16 feet each way in large exterior areas or areas exposed to direct sunlight or moisture. Extend expansion joints through setting-beds and fill.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

Upon completion, thoroughly clean tile surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's approved cleaning instructions. Do not use acid for cleaning glazed tile. Clean floor tile with resinous grout or with factory mixed grout in accordance with printed instructions of the grout manufacturer. After the grout has set, provide a protective coat of a noncorrosive soap or other approved method of protection for tile wall surfaces. Cover tiled floor areas with building paper before foot traffic is permitted over the finished tile floors. Provide board walkways on tiled floors that are to be continuously used as passageways by workmen. Replace damaged or defective tiles.




SECTION 09 51 00

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM A 641/A 641M (2003) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire


ASTM B 633 (2007) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

ASTM C 423 (2007a) Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method

ASTM C 635/C 635M (2007) Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings

ASTM C 636/C 636M (2006) Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels

ASTM C 834 (2005) Latex Sealants

ASTM E 1264 (1998; R 2005) Acoustical Ceiling Products

ASTM E 1414 (2006) Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum

ASTM E 1477 (1998a; R 2003) Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers

ASTM E 795 (2005) Mounting Test Specimens During



Sound Absorption Tests

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Approved Detail Drawings

Drawings showing suspension system, method of anchoring and fastening, details, and reflected ceiling plan.

SD-03 Product Data

Acoustical Ceiling Systems

a. Manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycle material in acoustic ceiling tiles to verify affirmative procurement compliance.

b. Total weight and volume quantities of acoustic ceiling tiles with recycle material.

SD-07 Certificates

Acoustic Ceiling Tiles

Certificate attesting that the mineral based acoustical units furnished for the project contain recycled material and showing an estimated percent of such material.








Provide sound controlling units mechanically mounted on a ceiling suspension system for acoustical treatment. The unit size, texture, finish, and color must be as specified. . The location and extent of acoustical treatment must be as shown on the approved detail drawings. Coordinate with paragraph RECLAMATION PROCEDURES for reclamation of mineral fiber acoustical ceiling panels to be removed from the job site.

1.4.1 Ceiling Attenuation Class and Test

Provide a ceiling system with an attenuation class (CAC) of 33 minimum when determined in accordance with ASTM E 1414. Provide fixture attenuators over light fixtures and other ceiling penetrations, and provide acoustical blanket insulation adjacent to partitions, as required to achieve the specified CAC.

1.4.2 Ceiling Sound Absorption

Determine the Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) in accordance with ASTM C 423 Test Method.

1.4.3 Light Reflectance

Determine light reflectance factor in accordance with ASTM E 1477 Test Method.


Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. Carefully handle and store materials in dry, watertight enclosures. Immediately before installation, store acoustical units for not less than 24 hours at the same temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be installed in order to assure proper temperature and moisture acclimation.


Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 60 degrees F nor more than 85 degrees F and a relative humidity of not more than 70 percent for 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation of acoustical units.

1.7 SCHEDULING

Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering, concrete and terrazzo work before ceiling installation. Complete mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line; install and start operating heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in order to maintain temperature and humidity requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a one year period. Include an agreement to repair or replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period in the standard performance guarantee or warranty. Failures include, but are not limited to, sagging and warping of panels; rusting and manufacturers defects of



grid system.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

Furnish spare tiles, from the same lot as those installed, of each color at the rate of 5 tiles for each 1000 tiles installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. Conform acoustical units to ASTM E 1264, Class A, and the following requirements:

2.2.1 Affirmative Procurement

Mineral Wool, Cellulose, and Laminated Paperboard used in acoustic ceiling tiles are materials listed in the EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG) (http://www.epa.gov/cpg/). EPA's recommended Recovered Materials Content Levels for Mineral Wool, Cellulose, Structural Fiberboard and Laminated Paperboard are:

Product Material Percent of Post Percent of Total Consumer Materials Recovered Materials

Laminate Post Consumer Paper 100 100Paperboard

Rock Wool Slag 75

Cellulose Post Consumer Paper 75 75

a. The recommended recovered materials content levels are based on the weight (not volume) of materials in the insulating core only.

b. For informational purposes, a list of known sources for acoustical ceiling tiles using recycled material is provided in the EPA/CPG Supplier database at http://www.ergweb2.com/cpg4review/user/cpg_search.cfm.

c. Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. A product meeting CPG recycle requirements from other sources may be submitted for the Government's approval.



d. Submit recycled material content data for acoustic ceiling tiles indicating compliance with affirmative procurement.

e. Submit total weight and volume quantities of acoustic ceiling tiles with recycle material.

2.2.2 Units for Exposed-Grid System

a. Type: III (non-asbestos mineral fiber with painted finish) .

b. Flame Spread: Class A, 25 or less

c. Pattern: as indicated.

d. Minimum NRC: 0.75 in open office areas; 0.60 in conference rooms, executive offices, teleconferencing rooms, and other rooms as designated; 0.50 in all other rooms and areas when tested on mounting Type E-400 of ASTM E 795.

e. Minimum Light Reflectance Coefficient: LR-1, 0.75 or greater .

f. Nominal size: 24 by 24 inch.

g. Edge detail: Square .

h. Finish: Factory-applied standard finish .

i. Minimum CAC: 33.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Provide standard exposed-grid standard width flange suspension system conforming to ASTM C 635/C 635M for intermediate-duty systems . Provide surfaces exposed to view of aluminum or steel with a factory-applied white or black baked-enamel finish to match ceiling . Provide wall molding having a flange of not less than 15/16 inch. Provide inside and outside corner caps . Suspended ceiling framing system must have the capability to support the finished ceiling, light fixtures, air diffusers, and accessories, as shown. Provide a suspension system with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span length.

2.4 HANGERS

Provide hangers and attachment capable of supporting a minimum 300 pound ultimate vertical load without failure of supporting material or attachment.

2.4.1 Wires

Conform wires to ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, 0.11 inch in diameter.

2.4.2 Straps

Provide straps of 1 by 3/16 inch galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, with a light commercial zinc coating or ASTM A 1008/A 1008Mwith an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to ASTM B 633, Type RS.



2.5 FINISHES

Use manufacturer's standard textures, patterns and finishes as specified for acoustical units and suspension system members. Treat ceiling suspension system components to inhibit corrosion.

2.6 COLORS AND PATTERNS

Use colors and patterns for acoustical units and suspension system components as indicated on the drawings.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

Conform acoustical sealant to ASTM C 834, nonstaining.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 INSTALLATION

Examine surfaces to receive directly attached acoustical units for uneveness, irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and execution of the work. Rid areas, where acoustical units will be cemented, of oils, form residue, or other materials that reduce bonding capabilities of the adhesive. Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering, concrete, and terrazzo work before installation. Complete and approve mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line prior to the start of acoustical ceiling installation. Provide acoustical work complete with necessary fastenings, clips, and other accessories required for a complete installation. Do not expose mechanical fastenings in the finished work. Lay out hangers for each individual room or space. Provide hangers to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles, and other penetrations through ceilings. Keep main runners and carrying channels clear of abutting walls and partitions. Provide at least two main runners



for each ceiling span. Wherever required to bypass an object with the hanger wires, install a subsuspension system so that all hanger wires will be plumb.

3.3.1 Suspension System

Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M and as specified herein. Do not suspend hanger wires or other loads from underside of steel decking.

3.3.1.1 Plumb Hangers

Install hangers plumb and not pressing against insulation covering ducts and pipes. Where lighting fixtures are supported from the suspended ceiling system, provide hangers at a minimum of four hangers per fixture and located not more than 6 inch from each corner of each fixture.

3.3.1.2 Splayed Hangers

Where hangers must be splayed (sloped or slanted) around obstructions, offset the resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying, or other acceptable means.

3.3.2 Wall Molding

Provide wall molding where ceilings abut vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. Secure wall molding not more than 3 inch from ends of each length and not more than 16 inch on centers between end fastenings. Provide wall molding springs at each acoustical unit in semi-exposed or concealed systems.

3.3.3 Acoustical Units

Install acoustical units in accordance with the approved installation instructions of the manufacturer. Ensure that edges of acoustical units are in close contact with metal supports, with each other, and in true alignment. Arrange acoustical units so that units less than one-half width are minimized. Hold units in exposed-grid system in place with manufacturer's standard hold-down clips, if units weigh less than 1 psf or if required for fire resistance rating.

3.3.4 Sealing

Seal all joints around pipes, ducts or electrical outlets penetrating the ceiling. Apply a continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical web of wall or edge moldings.

3.4 CLEANING

Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of acoustical units and leave them free from defects. Remove units that are damaged or improperly installed and provide new units as directed.

3.5 RECLAMATION PROCEDURES

Neatly stack ceiling tile, designated for recycling by the Contracting Officer, on 4 by 4 foot pallets not higher than 4 foot. Panels must be completely dry. Shrink wrap and symmetrically stack pallets on top of each other without falling over.






SECTION 09 62 50.10

THIN FILM FLOORING SYSTEM FOR AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE FACILITIES

04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 679 (2003) Tack-Free Time of Elastomeric Sealants

ASTM C 882 (2005) Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear

ASTM C 884/C 884M (1998; R 2005) Thermal Compatibility between Concrete and Epoxy-Resin Overlay

ASTM D 1308 (2002; R 2007) Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes


ASTM D 2369 (2007) Volatile Content of Coatings

ASTM D 2370 (1998; R 2002) Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings

ASTM D 2621 (1987; R 2005) Infrared Identification of Vehicle Solids from Solvent-Reducible Paints

ASTM D 2697 (2003) Volume Nonvolatile Matter in Clear or Pigmented Coatings

ASTM D 3335 (1985a; R 2005) Low Concentrations of Lead, Cadmium, and Cobalt in Paint by Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy

ASTM D 3718 (1985a; R 2005) Low Concentrations of Chromium in Paint by Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy

ASTM D 3925 (2002) Sampling Liquid Paints and Related Pigmented Coatings

ASTM D 412 (2006a) Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension



ASTM D 4541 (2002) Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers

ASTM D 6237 (2003) Painting Inspectors (Concrete and Masonry Substrates)

ASTM D 638 (2003) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM D 695 (2002a) Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics

ASTM E 11 (2004) Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes

ASTM F 1869 (2004) Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride

INTERNATIONAL CONCRETE REPAIR INSTITUTE (ICRI)

ICRI 03732 (1997) Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays


SSPC-TU 2 (1997) Design, Installation, and Maintenance of Coating Systems for Concrete Used in Secondary Containment


FED-STD-595 (Rev B; Am 1) Colors Used in Government Procurement


29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants

29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection

29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-04 Samples

Joint Sealant; G

Thin Film Flooring System; G

White Aluminum Oxide Non-Skid Grit; G



SD-06 Test Reports

Joint Sealant; G


Primer; G

Urethane Topcoat; G

White Aluminum Oxide Non-Skid Grit; G

Patch Test Demonstration; G

Adhesion Testing; G

SD-07 Certificates

Flooring System Applicator Qualifications; G

Joint Sealant; G


Warranty; G

Floor Crack Sealant; G


Joint Sealant; G


Water-Based Alkaline Degreaser; G


Inspection Logbook; G


1.3.1 Test Reports

1.3.1.1 Joint Sealant

Submit test results that confirm sealant complies with the requirements of Table 1a. Samples must have been tested within the last three years.

1.3.1.2 Thin Film Flooring System

Submit test results that confirm the thin film flooring system complies with the requirements of Table Ib. Samples must have been tested within the last three years.



1.3.1.3 Primer

Submit test results that confirm the primer complies with the requirements of Table 1c. Samples must have been tested within the last three years.

1.3.1.4 Urethane Topcoat

Submit test results that confirm the urethane topcoat complies with the requirements of Table 1d. Samples must have been tested within the last three years.

1.3.2 Certificates

1.3.2.1 Flooring System Applicator Qualifications

Minimum requirements for the installation contractor are as follows: Installation contractor shall have completed three or more jobs within the past two years applying the specified materials to concrete surfaces in which the total area exceeds 200,000 square feet. Contractor shall submit documentation listing location of work, point of contact at job site, total square footage of applied materials, listing of both materials and equipment used, and validation from coating manufacturer documenting quality of materials purchased per job for work totalling 200,000 square feet within the past two years. In addition to the above requirements, installation contractor shall be certified by the material manufacturer(s) to install the submitted coatings and sealant. Submit copy of certificates.


Submit literature documenting the past performance of the sealant's use in automotive and/or aircraft maintenance shops. Minimum requirements are two or more maintenance shops with joint work totaling 10,000 linear feetwhere the sealant has performed for two years with less than 1 percent combined sealant failures and defects. Sealant manufacturer shall list location of shops, total linear feet of sealant applied per shop, shop point of contact, date sealant was applied, and the name of the installed sealant material.


Submit literature documenting the past performance of the coating system's use in aircraft maintenance shops and over floors with high rates of Moisture Vapor Emission (MVE). Minimum requirements are two or more aircraft maintenance shops totaling 34,000 square feet where the coating system has performed for two years with less than 0.05 percent combined premature coating failures, material defects and surface discoloration; no more than 0.03 percent discoloration from aviation chemicals, tire plasticizers, and UV exposure. Provide a minimum of two additional case histories where successful installation occurred on floor slabs with no less than 3.5 pounds moisture per 24 hours, 1000 square feet. Coating manufacturer shall list location of shops, total coated area per shop, shop point of contact, date coating system was applied, successful installation to concrete with high MVE, and the names of the installed coating materials.

1.3.2.4 Warranty

Warrantee materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one year following coating and sealant application. The following terms and conditions form a part of the warranty: If the applied coating system



develops either blisters (chemical), checks, softening, or lifting within one year following application, each area shall be reworked by installation contractor at contractor's expense. The following conditions are excluded from the warranty: A) concrete cracking, flooring system mirrors cracks in concrete; B) cosmetic imperfections due to scratching and gouging; C) application to metallic concrete finishes (Section 09 97 23 METALLIC TYPE CONDUCTIVE/SPARK RESISTANT CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH); and D) application to concrete with a rate of Moisture Vapor Emission (MVE)greater than 3.5 pounds moisture per 24 hours, 1000 square feet. If the coating system's adhesion is in question, one adhesion test shall be performed per 100 square feet as described in the Article entitled "ADHESION TESTING." To satisfy the warranty, each adhesion test shall produce cohesive failures, concrete removal over 95 percent of each pull-off coupon, and/or adhesion no less than 400 psi. Require two additional adhesion tests to confirm results for each area failing to meet adhesion requirements. Within the warranty period, remove to sound material and rework all areas unable to meet adhesion requirements. There shall be zero percent sealant failures within one year. Within the warranty period, remove and rework all sealant material with chemically attacked surfaces and/or lifting from joint walls. Topcoat cracking over sealant is excluded from warranty.

1.3.3 Product Data


Submit manufacturer's printed instructions to include detailed application procedures, minimum and maximum application temperatures, and curing procedures. In accordance with 29 CFR 1926.59, include Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the sealant to be used at the job site.


Submit manufacturer's printed instructions to include detailed mixing, minimum and maximum application temperatures, acceptable atmospheric and/or interior climatic conditions, application procedures, curing procedures, and procedures for maintenance cleaning of flooring system. Provide explicit instructions detailing surface preparation, recoat windows and remedial actions in case recoat windows are missed, and, if applicable, solvent-wiping between coats with acceptable types and grades of solvents. In accordance with 29 CFR 1926.59, include MSDSs for the coatings to be used at the job site.

1.3.3.3 Water-Based Alkaline Degreaser

Submit manufacturer's printed instructions to include detailed mixing, rate of dilution, application procedures, and rinsing procedures. In accordance with 29 CFR 1926.59, include MSDSs for the water-based alkaline degreaser to be used at this job site.

1.3.3.4 Floor Crack Sealant

Submit Manufacturer's printed instructions to include detailed surface preparation and application procedures, minimum and maximum storage and application temperatures, and curing procedures. In accordance with 29 CFR 1926.59, including Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for the sealant to be used at the job site.




Store coatings and sealant in spaces with temperatures from 40 degrees F to 75 degrees F. Materials on site shall be inspected for damage prior to use. Return to manufacturer packaged materials in dented, rusty, or leaking containers. Manufacturer shall test returned materials with an expired shelf life and if compliant, reissue a shelf life extension.

1.5 COATING HAZARDS

Ensure that employees are trained in all aspects of the safety plan. The coating manufacturer's written safety precautions shall be followed throughout mixing, application, and curing of coatings. Comply with respiratory protection requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134 and safe levels of airborne contaminants in 29 CFR 1910.1000.

1.6 JOB SITE REFERENCES

Make available to the Contracting Officer at least one copy each of ASTM D 4541, ASTM D 6237, SSPC-TU 2, and ICRI 03732, including replica standards ICRI 03732 CSP 1 through CSP 9, at the job site.

1.7 PATCH TEST DEMONSTRATION

Prior to the submitted flooring system's approval, the installation contractor shall apply the complete coating system to a 10 foot by 10 foot square section of existing concrete floor as prepared in accordance with Part 3 "EXECUTION." Within this area, perform three adhesion tests as described in the Article entitled "ADHESION TESTING." If adhesion testing produces cohesive failures within the concrete, no less than 40 mils concrete removed over 95 percent of each pull-off coupon, and/or adhesion more than 400 psi, patch test adhesion is acceptable. If concrete surface preparation was insufficient, apply an additional coating system patch to properly prepared concrete followed by the above adhesion testing. If adhesion results are unacceptable for both the topcoats and the primer, submit a new coating system manufactured by a different coating vendor. Apply a patch of the new coating system and subject patch to the above requirements for adhesion prior to approval. If customer dislikes non-skid grit application, adjustments to the specifications can be made. Grit coarser than #60 aluminum oxide is not recommended.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANT

The joint sealant shall be formulated to exhibit the properties as listed in Table Ia.

2.2 Floor Crack Sealant

The crack repair medium shall be 2-component very-low-viscosity, 100% solids, epoxy adhesive formulated to exhibit the properties as listed in Table Ie.

2.3 THIN FILM FLOORING SYSTEM

A three-coat industrial flooring system consisting of primer and two urethane topcoats. Apply the coating system at a Dry Film Thickness (DFT) ranging from 13 to 20 mils and contain a broadcast of aluminum oxide



non-skid grit. The complete flooring system shall be formulated to exhibit the properties as listed in Table Ib. Additional requirements for primer coat and urethane topcoat are listed in the following sub-paragraphs.

2.3.1 Primer Coat

In addition to the requirements of the thin film flooring system, the primer coat shall be formulated to exhibit the properties as listed in Table Ic.

2.3.2 Urethane Topcoat

In addition to the requirements of the thin film flooring system, the urethane top coat shall be formulated to exhibit the properties as listed in Table Id.

2.4 WHITE ALUMINUM OXIDE NON-SKID GRIT

Size #60, dust free (washed and dry), minimum 99 percent pure, having the following sieve analysis when tested using a 2.2 pound sample (ASTM E 11):

Sieve No. 40 100% passing Sieve No. 50 15-30% retained Sieve No. 60 70-85% retained Sieve No. 70 0-15% retained

2.5 PREAPPROVED MATERIALS

Table II contains a listing of vendors with "preapproved materials."

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COATING SAMPLE COLLECTION

The Contracting Officer and QC Manager shall witness all material sampling. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of three days in advance of sampling. Obtain liquid samples of each component of primer and topcoat by random selection from sealed containers and in accordance with ASTM D 3925. Samples may be either individual cans of liquid material or 1.0 quart quantities of properly mixed, extracted, and sealed liquid material. Identify samples by designated name, specification number, batch number, project contract number, sample date, intended use, and quantity involved. When the applied coating system has met the requirements defined in the Article entitled "ADHESION TESTING," coating samples shall be returned to the installation contractor for proper disposal.

3.2 JOINT MATERIAL REMOVAL, RE-SAW CUTTING, CRACK CHASING

Remove 100 percent of the existing material in all joints including material bonded to joint walls and base. Rigid material may require the use of saw cutting equipment to remove. Joints may be widened up to 1/8 inch when re-saw cutting. Chase concrete cracks identified for repair and open to a minimum depth of 1/2 inch below crack surface with smooth vertical walls.

3.3 DEGREASING

On both coated and uncoated concrete, degrease entire floor by scrubbing



using a solution of hot potable water, 120 degrees F to 170 degrees F, and a concentrated water-based alkaline degreaser. Perform two complete degreasing cycles on the entire floor surface. Allow solution to soak into surfaces prior to scrubbing and remove using hot potable water under a minimum of 4,000 psi. Rinsing shall be complete when the rinse water appears clear. If the industrial detergent is not biodegradable, collect all rinse water and dispose as hazardous waste. Squeegees and shop vacuums may be used to collect pooling rinse water. Fans may be used to aid drying of floor surfaces.


Shot blast or diamond grind entire floor to produce a level of coarseness equal to ICRI 03732 CSP 3. Overlap each pass by 1/4 inches to 1/2 inches. Add new shot to shot blasting equipment prior to blasting. Prepare surfaces inaccessible to shot blasting, base of perimeter walls and under secured equipment, using diamond disk grinding and/or light scarification to produce a level of coarseness equal to ICRI 03732 CSP 2 and/or ICRI 03732 CSP 4, respectively. Resulting surfaces shall appear clean and contain the appropriate level of surface coarseness. If the resulting level of cleanliness cannot be determined, place numerous drops of water on surfaces that appear contaminated. If the water drops soak into concrete, the surfaces are free of hydrocarbon contamination (oils, grease, skydrol). If the water drops bead up and do not flatten out, surfaces require additional degreasing as detailed in the Article entitled "DEGREASING." Shot blasting or grinding coarse concrete can produce a level of coarseness equal to ICRI 03732CSP 5: employ a best effort attempt to minimize over preparing or grinding of coarse concrete. If coarse concrete is encountered, shot blasting to a level of coarseness equal to ICRI 03732 CSP 5 is acceptable: however, extremely coarse concrete can require resurfacing prior to the flooring system's installation. Sweep, vacuum, and run a high powered magnet over all surfaces to be coated, including joints.

3.5 JOINT TREATMENT

Use the "Conventional Sealed Joint" as detailed in Figure 1 of SSPC-TU 2 to seal joints. Employ measures to reduce contamination from equipment and foot traffic. Limit floor access to essential contractor personnel. Confirm joint surfaces are sufficiently clean.

3.5.1 Install Backer Rod

Install a continuous length of round, closed-cell polyethylene backer rod into each joint using a backer rod tool. For 1/2 inch wide joints, place backer rod to a depth of 3/8 inch (depth equals the distance from the concrete's surface to the highest point on the backer rod). For joints greater than or equal to 3/4 inch width, place backer to a depth of 5/8 inch below the concrete's surface. Fit backer rod tight between joint walls (30 percent compression). All backer rod that is installed using either the incorrect size (loose fit) or at the incorrect depth shall be removed and reinstalled. Following backer rod installation, apply painter's tape to surfaces adjacent joints to protect from sealant.

3.5.2 Sealant Application

Apply sealant directly into joints using a bulk-calking gun. At room temperature, the resulting sealant application shall exhibit a concave



recess between 1/8 inch to 1/16 inch below the concrete's surface. Remove and reapply cured sealant remaining either flush or greater. Following sealant application, remove painter's tape and sealant drips on concrete surfaces. Cure sealant a minimum of 24 hours, prior to the application of coatings.

3.6 CRACK REPAIR

Slowly pour very-low viscosity floor crack sealant onto cracks prepared in Articles 3.1 and 3.4. Fill chased cracks to refusal. Allow to cure for 72 hours then lightly grind surface using a wire wheel on a high rpm mini-grinder.

3.7 PRE-APPLICATION TESTING FOR CONTAMINATION

Spot check surfaces for oil/grease contamination using the water break test. At a rate of 5 tests per 1000 square feet, place one to two drops of water onto surfaces and observe for beading. Test all other surfaces that show visible signs of potential contamination. Apply additional degreasing techniques to surfaces displaying water beading in accordance with the Article entitled "DEGREASING."

3.8 COATING APPLICATION

Vacuum flooring space one additional time prior to coating application.

3.8.1 Primer Application

Apply primer to flooring space at 7.0 mils to 15.0 mils Dry Film Thickness (DFT). If the prepared concrete resembles an ICRI 03732 CSP 3 surface, apply the primer at a minimum of 7.0 mils DFT. If the prepared concrete resembles an ICRI 03732 CSP 5 surface, apply the primer at a maximum of 15.0 mils DFT. The previously applied sealant may be lightly coated.

3.8.2 Non-Skid Grit Broadcast

Broadcast non-skid grit at a rate of 1.5 pounds per 100 square feet into the second urethane top coat and backroll. Map floor into 600 square foot sections where 9.0 pounds of non-skid grit is pre-weighed, placed into clean buckets and used in its entirety per marked 600 square foot section.

3.8.3 Application of Topcoats

Apply two coats of urethane topcoat to the epoxy primer and broadcast white aluminum oxide non-skid grit directly into the second urethane topcoat.

3.8.3.1 First Topcoat

Apply a full coat of the urethane topcoat at a spreading rate from 2.5 to 3.2 mils Dry Film Thickness (DFT). Stripe coat perimeter edges and around equipment footings. Monitor and record a minimum of one Wet Film Thickness (WFT) reading per 600 square feet of floor surface. Sealant is to be lightly coated.

3.8.3.2 Second Topcoat

Apply a second coat of the urethane topcoat at a spreading rate of 2.5 to 3.2 mils DFT. Stripe coat perimeter edges and around equipment footings. Monitor and record a minimum of one WFT reading per 600 square feet of



floor surface prior to broadcasting non-skid grit. When the correct WFT has been applied per 600 square feet of area, immediately and evenly broadcast non-skid grit directly into the second topcoat of urethane and backroll in two directions. The adhesion of the thin film flooring system shall be tested in accordance with the Article entitled "ADHESION TESTING."

3.8.3.3 Walkway Stripe and Grounding Rod Markings

Place the walkway stripe and grounding rod markings according to Government drawings, if applicable. When the second topcoat is within its recoat window, apply a walkway stripe of the red urethane topcoat at 3.0 mils DFT, completely hiding the top coat, in one coat. If insufficient hiding occurs, apply one additional coat of the walkway stripe. Lightly broadcast non-skid grit into the wet walkway stripe. Use solvent resistant tape to protect the floor coating against stripe coat bleed. A thin clear coat of either epoxy or urethane may be required to prevent stripe coat bleed prior to the full application of the colored stripe coat. Apply grounding rod markings using similar procedures, urethane top coat, and colors and size according to Government drawings.

3.9 CURING

Cure installed materials to display performance equal to manufacturer's product literature. Remove and reapply improperly cured material.

3.10 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTION

3.10.1 Coating Inspector

The Coating Inspector shall be considered a QC Specialist, work for the QC Manager, and be qualified in accordance with Section 01 45 00.00 20 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION QUALITY CONTROL. The Coating Inspector will be present during all field tests, surface preparation, flooring application, initial cure of the flooring system, and during all flooring repair work. The Coating Inspector will provide all tools/equipment necessary to perform field tests and inspection. The Coating Inspector will be responsible for field tests and specified level of inspection.

3.10.2 Inspection

The Coating Inspector shall document weather conditions, job site occurrences, and report conditions and occurrences potentially detrimental to the flooring system. The listed inspection requirements are in addition to the QC inspection and reporting requirements defined in Section 01 45 00.00 20. The Coating Inspector shall prepare a project reference sheet outlining all requirements, tests, test methods, and evaluation criteria, and hold regular meetings with contractor personnel, including shot blasting operators and applicators, to review requirements/evaluation criteria for upcoming work prior to execution. At the start of coating operations and every 1.0 hour following until daily work is complete, record air temperature, substrate temperature, and relative humidity. Following the application of each coat, inspect surfaces for improperly cured material, blisters, inadequate and/or excessive coating thickness, and other defects. Document each inspection, test, non-compliant area, and location of each non-compliant area. List method of evaluation, evaluation criteria, areas requiring rework, and all other pertinent observations.



3.10.2.1 Inspection Logbook

Record all daily activity related to this section in the Inspection Logbook, including the daily inspection reports, as well as all other pertinent observations and information. Use hard or spiral bound book with consecutively numbered pages. Prior to final payment, submit original Inspection Logbook to the Contracting Officer upon completion of project.

3.10.2.2 Inspection Equipment

Use equipment in good condition, operational within its design range, and calibrated as required by the specified standard for use with each device.

3.10.3 Adhesion Testing

Perform a minimum of three adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM D 4541 to the thin film flooring system. Select three random flooring locations spaced a minimum of 20 feet between each location. Prior to attaching pull-off coupons, lightly sand flooring surface and attach pull-off coupons containing a grit-blasted anchor profile. Adhere directly to the center of each sanded surface a 3/4 inch diameter pull-off coupon. When pull-off coupon adhesive has sufficiently cured, score circumference of each pull-off coupon to concrete substrate. Test adhesion and evaluate results. If testing produces cohesive failures within the concrete, no less than 40 mils concrete removed over 95 percent of each pull-off coupon, and/or adhesion more than 400 psi coating system's adhesion is acceptable. If the above requirements are not satisfied, then perform one adhesion test per 100 square feet using the above procedures. Perform two additional tests per non-compliant area to confirm results. Remove to sound material and rework all areas unable to meet adhesion requirements. Repair each adhesion test using a combination of primer, sand-filled epoxy mortar (for deep cohesive failures, if applicable), and two urethane topcoats. Make repairs flush with adjacent coatings and display an equivalent appearance.

3.11 FINAL CLEANUP

Following completion of the work, remove debris, equipment,and materials from the site. Remove temporary connections to Government or contractor furnished water and electrical services. Restore existing facilities in and around the work areas to their original condition.



TABLE I - MATERIALS REQUIREMENTSTABLE Ia

Test Minimum Requirement (maximum where indicated)---------------------------------------------------------------

Sealant System Polysulfide (Manganese Cure; MnO2)(two-pack: self-leveling) or Urethane

Percent Volume Solids 100 %

Chemical Resistance to JP-8+100 48 hours immersion:

Fuel @ 700 F 2.0% (max) weight increase, (ASTM D 1308) (see note 1) 5.0% (max) volume increase, 2.0% (max) weight loss

Chemical Resistance to Motor 48 hours immersion:

Oils @ 700 F 2.0% (max) weight increase(ASTM D 1308) (see note 1) 5.0% (max) volume increase 2.0% (max) weight loss

Chemical Resistance to Skydrols 48 hours immersion:

@ 700 F (ASTM D 1308) (see note 1) 2.0% (max) weight increase 5.0% (max) volume increase 2.0% (max) weight loss

Hardness (ASTM D 2240:Shore A) 20

Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412) 150 psi(or ASTM D 638)

Percent Elongation (ASTM D 412) 500%(or ASTM D 638)

Tack Free 12 hours maximum

@ 650 F(ASTM C 679)

Adhesion to Concrete 140 psi

Adhesion to Urethane Topcoats 140 psi(paintable sealant)

NOTES:(1) A 2 inch by 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch section of cured sealant shall be immersed and tested: three samples minimum.



TABLE Ib

Test Minimum Requirement (maximum where indicated)----------------------------------------------------------------

Tensile Strength (ASTM D 2370) 6,250 psi

Percent Elongation (ASTM D 2370) 6.0%

Adhesion to Concrete (ASTM D 4541) 400 psi or (see note 1) 100 % failure in concrete

Thermal Compatibility between Concrete 1400 F(ASTM C 884/C 884M)

Heat Resistance, continuous exposure "pass"

Chemical Resistance to JP-8+100 Fuel 48 hours immersion:

@ 700 F (ASTM D 1308)(see note 2) 2.0% (max) weight increase 2.0% (max) volume increase 2.0% (max) weight loss

Chemical Resistance to Motor Oils 48 hours immersion:




Lead (ASTM D 3335) 0.06% (max)

Cadmium (ASTM D 3335) 0.06% (max)

Chromium (ASTM D 3718) 0.00% NOTES:(1) When tested for adhesion, coating system shall display 400 psi adhesion and/or remove no less than 40 mils of concrete over 95 percent of each pull-off coupon throughout service.

(2) Immediately following immersion, in addition to the listed requirements, coating system shall be evaluated for blisters, checks, discoloration, softening, and lifting. Coating system shall be visually free of blisters, checks, discoloration, and display both substrate and intercoat adhesion no less than 350 psi (ASTM D 4541).



TABLE Ic

Test Minimum Requirement (maximum where indicated)--------------------------------------------------------------------

Resin System (ASTM D 2621) Epoxy (two-pack)

Percent Volume Solids (ASTM D 2369) 85%

Color 17925 (white)

Hydrolytic Stability No effect: 30 days immersion in (see note 1) Sodium Hydroxide solution with pH no less than 13.5

Moisture Insensitivity Throughout No effect: Insensitive toService (ASTM F 1869, ASTM D 4541) moisture vapor emission at rates(see note 2) no more than 3.5 pounds moisture/24 hrs, 1000 square feet

Adhesion to Concrete Throughout 400 psi or Service (ASTM D 4541) 100% failure in concrete(see note 3)

NOTES:(1) Immediately following immersion, primer shall be evaluated for blisters, checks, discoloration, softening, and substrate lifting. Primer shall appear free of blisters, checks and moderate discoloration, and display wet adhesion no less than 350 psi (ASTM D 4541).

(2) During and following application, primer shall remain unaffected by Moisture Vapor Emission (MVE) at rates no more than 3.5 pounds moisture per 24 hours, 1000 square feet: primer shall meet the requirements of Note (3). Signs of moisture sensitivity include blisters, softening, lifting, and discoloration (whitening).

(3) When tested for in-situ adhesion, primer shall display 400 psi adhesion and/or remove no less than 40 mils of concrete over 95 percent off each pull-off coupon.



TABLE Id

Test Minimum Requirement (maximum where indicated)-------------------------------------------------------------------

Resin System (ASTM D 2621) Aliphatic Urethane (two-pack)

Percent Volume Solids (ASTM D 2697) 100%

Topcoat Color (FED-STD-595) 17925 (white)

Walkway Stripe Color: Red/Orange, 22197 (red)semi-gloss (FED-STD-595)

Application Thickness per Coat 2.5 mils to 3.2 Dry Film Thickness(DFT)

Hiding Power: Red/Orange Complete hiding of white coatings at 3.2 mils mils DFT(one coat) Sunlight Resistance Non-yellowing

Heat Resistance, continuous exposure 1400 F

Heat Resistance, intermittent exposure 2000 F

Chemical Resistance to JP-8+100 Fuel 48 hours immersion:


Chemical Resistance to Motor Oils 48 hour immersion:




NOTES:(1) Immediately following immersion, in addition to the listed requirements, urethane topcoat shall be evaluated for blisters, checks, discoloration, softening, and lifting. Urethane topcoat shall be visually free of blisters, checks, and discoloration, and display adhesion no less than 350 psi (ASTM D 4541).



TABLE Ie

Test Minimum Requirement (maximum where indicated)-------------------------------------------------------------------

Percent Solids 100%

Tensils Properties (ASTM D 638)14 day Tensile Strength 7,900 psiElongation at Break 3.1%

Modulus of Elasticity 2.0 x 105 psi

Bond Strength (ASTM C 882)Hardened Concrete to Hardened Concrete2 day (dry cure) 3,000 psi14 day (moist cure) 2,200 psi

Compressive Properties (ASTM D 695)

Compressive Strength, PSI

40ºF 73ºF 90ºF 3 days 1,800 10,000 8,700 7 days 6,100 11,300 10,400 28 days 8,400 12,000 10,400

Modulus of Elasticity, E

28 days 3.5 x 105 psi



TABLE IIPREAPPROVED MATERIALS*

Vendors Materials------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Polyspec Primer: 300EX(281) 397-0033 Topcoat: Tuffrez 235 Sealant: T-2235SL

Tennant Primer: ECO-CEP(800) 553-8033 Topcoat: ECO-CEP ECO-HTS 100 Sealant: N/A (see note 2)

Stonhard Primer: Standard Primer(856) 779-7500 Topcoat: Stonseal GS6 Sealant: Vulkem 245

Crawford Labs Primer: Florock 4700(800) 356-7625 Topcoat: Florock Super CRU Sealant: N/A (see note 1)

General Polymers Primer: #3578, Universal Primer(800) 543-7694 Topcoat: #4618, Polyurethane Enamel Sealant: Cor-Seal PS

NOTES:(*) Other products may meet specification requirements, Up to specification's date of issue, preapproved materials met specification requirements. It is the user's responsibility to confirm preapproved material formulations have not changed and specification requirements will be met.

(1) Polyspec T-2235SL sealant may be used.




SECTION 09 65 00

RESILIENT FLOORING01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM D 4078 (2002) Water Emulsion Floor Polish

ASTM D 5603 (2001) Rubber Compounding Materials - Recycled Vulcanizate Particulate Rubber


ASTM F 1066 (2004) Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile

ASTM F 1344 (2004) Rubber Floor Tile

ASTM F 1861 (2002) Resilient Wall Base


ASTM F 2169 (2002) Resilient Stair Treads

ASTM F 2170 (2002) Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs in situ Probes

ASTM F 710 (2005) Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring

SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)

SCAQMD Rule 1168 (1989; R 2005) Adhesive and Sealant Applications





1.2 FIRE RESISTANCE REQUIREMENTS

Provide a minimum average critical radiant flux of 0.22 watts per square centimeter for flooring in corridors and exits when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Resilient Flooring and Accessories; G

Scaled drawings indicating patterns (including location of patterns and colors) and dimensions.

SD-03 Product Data


Manufacturer's descriptive data.

Adhesives; (LEED)

Manufacturer's descriptive data, documentation stating physical characteristics, and mildew and germicidal characteristics. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all primers and adhesives to the Contracting Officer. Highlight VOC emissions.

Vinyl Composition Tile; (LEED)Rubber Tile; (LEED)

Documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project.




Surface Preparation; GInstallation; G

Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for all flooring materials and accessories, including preparation of substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives.





Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.




Resilient Flooring and Accessories; (LEED)


Adhesives; (LEED)


LEED documentation relative to rapidly renewable materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.


Deliver materials to the building site in original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name, style name, pattern color name and number, production run, project identification, and handling instructions. Store materials in a clean, dry, secure, and well-ventilated area free from strong contaminant sources and residues with ambient air temperature maintained above 68 degrees F and below 85 degrees F, stacked according to manufacturer's recommendations. Remove resilient flooring products from packaging to allow ventilation prior to installation. Protect materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators and other heating fixtures and appliances. Observe ventilation and safety procedures specified in the MSDS. Do not store rubber surface products with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions. Do not store exposed rubber surface materials in occupied spaces.


Maintain areas to receive resilient flooring at a temperature above 68 degrees F and below 85 degrees F for 3 days before application, during application and 2 days after application, unless otherwise directed by the flooring manufacturer for the flooring being installed. Maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees F thereafter. Provide adequate ventilation to remove moisture from area and to comply with regulations limiting concentrations of hazardous vapors.






1.7 SCHEDULING

Schedule resilient flooring application after the completion of other work which would damage the finished surface of the flooring.

1.8 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a one year period.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

Furnish extra flooring material of each color and pattern at the rate of 5 tiles for each 1000 tiles installed. Furnish extra wall base material composed of 20 linear feet of each type, color and pattern. Package all extra materials in original properly marked containers bearing the manufacturer's name, brand name, pattern color name and number, production run, and handling instructions. Provide extra materials from the same lot as those installed. Leave extra stock at the site in location assigned by Contracting Officer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE

Conform to ASTM F 1066 for vinyl-composition tile, Class 2, (through pattern tile), Composition 1, asbestos-free, 12 inch square and 1/8 inch thick. Provide color and pattern uniformly distributed throughout the thickness of the tile. Tile shall contain a minimum of 90 percent recycled material.

2.3 RUBBER TILE

Conform to ASTM F 1344 for rubber tile Class 1 homogeneous , Type A (solid color) , 12 inch square. Provide raised round surface studs with



chamfered edges. Provide low stud profile. Provide 0.125 inch overall thickness. Rubber tile shall contain a minimum of 90 percent post-consumer recycled material. With Vulcanizate Particulate Rubber, use recycled tire treads in accordance with ASTM D 5603, fine mesh size particulate.

2.4 WALL BASE

Conform to ASTM F 1861 for wall base, , Style A (straight - installed with carpet) and Style B (coved - installed with resilient flooring) . Provide 4 inch high and a minimum 1/8 inch thick wall base. Furnish job formed corners in matching height, shape, and color. Rubber shall contain a minimum of 90 percent post-consumer recycled material. With Vulcanizate Particulate Rubber, use recycled tire treads in accordance with ASTM D 5603, fine mesh size particulate..

2.5 STAIR TREADS

Conform to ASTM F 2169 for treads, Type TS (vulcanized thermoset rubber) Rubber shall contain a minimum of 90 percent post-consumer recycled material. With Vulcanizate Particulate Rubber, use recycled tire treads in accordance with ASTM D 5603, fine mesh size particulate.. Conform to ASTM F 2169 for surface of treads Class 2 raised round stud pattern . Provide square nosing.

2.6 MOULDING

Provide tapered mouldings of rubber and types as recommended by flooring manufacturer for both edges and transitions of flooring materials specified. Provide vertical lip on moulding of maximum 1/4 inch. Provide bevel change in level between 1/4 and 1/2 inch with a slope no greater than 1:2.

2.7 ADHESIVES

Provide adhesives for flooring, base and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer and comply with local indoor air quality standards. Interior adhesives must meet the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit. VOC content must be less than the current VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168.

2.8 SURFACE PREPARATION MATERIALS

Provide surface preparation materials, such as floor crack fillers as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for the subfloor conditions.

2.9 POLISH/FINISH

Furnish polish as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to ASTM D 4078.

2.10 SEALANTS

Furnish sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

2.11 MANUFACTURER'S COLOR, PATTERN AND TEXTURE

Provide color, pattern and texture for resilient flooring and accessories as indicated on the drawings . Color listed is not intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers. Provide floor patterns as specified on the drawings. Provide flooring in any one continuous area or replacement of damaged flooring in continuous area from same production



run with same shade and pattern.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 EXAMINATION/VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

Examine and verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design package. Report all conditions that will prevent a proper installation. Do not take any corrective action without written permission from the Government. Work will proceed only when conditions have been corrected and accepted by the installer.


Provide a smooth, true, level plane for surface preparation of the flooring, except where indicated as sloped. Flatten floor to within 3/16 inch in 10 feet. Prepare subfloor in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommended instructions. Comply with ASTM F 710 for concrete subfloor preparation. Floor fills or toppings may be required as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Before any work under this section is begun, correct all defects such as rough or scaling concrete, chalk and dust, cracks, low spots, high spots, and uneven surfaces. Repair all damaged portions of concrete slabs as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove from the slabs concrete curing and sealer compounds, other than the type that does not adversely affect adhesion. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, waxers, and adhesives, as required by the flooring product in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

3.5 MOISTURE, ALKALINITY AND BOND TESTS

Determine the suitability of the concrete subfloor for receiving the resilient flooring with regard to moisture content and pH level by moisture



and alkalinity tests and comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Conduct moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F 1869 or ASTM F 2170, unless otherwise recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Conduct alkalinity testing as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Determine the compatibility of the resilient flooring adhesives to the concrete floors by a bond test in accordance with the flooring manufacturer's recommendations.

3.6 PLACING VINYL-COMPOSITION TILES

Install tile flooring and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Keep tile lines and joints square, symmetrical, tight, and even. Keep each floor in true, level plane, except where slope is indicated. Vary edge width as necessary to maintain full-size tiles in the field, but no edge tile with less than one-half the field tile size, except where irregular shaped rooms make it impossible. Cut flooring to fit around all permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Cut, fit, and scribe edge tile to walls and partitions after field flooring has been applied.

3.7 PLACING RUBBER TILE

Install rubber tile and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Provide square, symmetrical, tight, and even flooring lines and joints. Keep each floor in true, level plane, except where slope is indicated. Vary width of edge tiles as necessary to maintain full-size tiles, except where irregular-shaped rooms makes it impossible. Cut flooring to fit around, all permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Cut, fit, and scribe flooring to walls and partitions after field flooring has been applied.

3.8 PLACING MOULDING

Provide moulding where flooring termination is higher than the adjacent finished flooring and at transitions between different flooring materials. When required, locate moulding under door centerline. Moulding is not required at doorways where thresholds are provided. Secure moulding with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions.

3.9 PLACING WALL BASE

Install wall base in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Tighten base joints and make even with adjacent resilient flooring. Fill voids along the top edge of base at masonry walls with caulk. Roll entire vertical surface of base with hand roller, and press toe of base with a straight piece of wood to ensure proper alignment. Avoid excess adhesive in corners.

3.10 PLACING STAIR TREADS

Secure and install stair treads, in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Cover treads to the surface of the stairs to within 4 inch of the edges. Provide stairs wider than manufacturer's standard lengths with equal length pieces butted together to cover the



treads.

3.11 CLEANING

Immediately upon completion of installation of flooring in a room or an area, dry/clean the flooring and adjacent surfaces to remove all surplus adhesive. Clean flooring as recommended in accordance with manufacturer's printed maintenance instructions. No sooner than 5 days after installation, wash flooring with a nonalkaline cleaning solution, rinsed thoroughly with clear cold water, and, except for rubber flooring and stair treads, risers and stringers, vinyl and other flooring not requiring polish by manufacturer, given the number of coats of polish in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Clean and maintain all other flooring as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.12 PROTECTION

From the time of laying until acceptance, protect flooring from damage as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove and replace flooring which becomes damaged, loose, broken, or curled and wall base which is not tight to wall or securely adhered.




SECTION 09 68 00

CARPET01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS AND COLORISTS (AATCC)

AATCC 134 (2006) Standard Test Method for Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets

AATCC 16 (2004) Colorfastness to Light

AATCC 165 (1999) Colorfastness to Crocking: Textile Floor Coverings - AATCC Crockmeter Method


ASTM D 297 (1993; R 2006) Rubber Products - Chemical Analysis

ASTM D 3278 (1996; R 2004e1) Flash Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup Apparatus

ASTM D 3676 (2001) Rubber Cellular Cushion Used for Carpet or Rug Underlay

ASTM D 5252 (2005) Operation of the Hexapod Drum Tester

ASTM D 5417 (2005) Operation of the Vettermann Drum Tester

ASTM D 5793 (2005) Binding Sites Per Unit Length or Width of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings

ASTM D 5848 (2005) Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings


CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)

CRI 104 (2002) Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial Carpet


LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and



Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)


16 CFR 1630 Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs (FF 1-70)

40 CFR 247 Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for Products Containing Recovered Materials

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation; GMolding; G

Three copies of drawings indicating areas receiving carpet, carpet types, textures and patterns, direction of pile, location of seams, and locations of edge molding. Installation drawings for the following items diagramming the location of seams, edge moldings, and carpet direction for approval prior to installation.

1) Attached Cushion2) Carpet Moldings

SD-03 Product Data

Carpet; GAttached Cushion; GCarpet Moldings; G

Manufacturer's catalog data and printed documentation stating physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics for each type of carpet material and installation accessory. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:


Surface Preparation; GInstallation; G

Three copies of the manufacturer's printed installation instructions for the carpet, including preparation of substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives and tapes.

Regulatory Requirements; G



Three copies of report stating that carpet and carpet components contain recycled materials and/or involvement in a recycling or reuse program. Include in the report percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled material


Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

SD-06 Test Reports

Moisture and Alkalinity Tests; G

Three copies of test reports of moisture and alkalinity content of concrete slab stating date of test, person conducting the test, and the area tested.

SD-07 Certificates

Carpet; G

Certificates of compliance from a laboratory accredited by the National Laboratory Accreditation Program of the National Institute of Standards and Technology attesting that each type of carpet and carpet with cushion material conforms to the standards specified.

Regulatory Requirements; G

Report stating that the carpet contains recycled materials and indicating the actual percentage of recycled material. Certificates, showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section, for the following:



Carpet; GCleaning and Protection; G

Three copies of carpet manufacturer's maintenance instructions describing recommended type of cleaning equipment and material, spotting and cleaning methods, and cleaning cycles.




Local/Regional Materialss; (LEED)


Carpet; (LEED)


Carpet; (LEED)

Adhesives and Concrete Primer; (LEED)


Carpet; (LEED)

LEED documentation relative to rapidly renewable credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Provide the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) label for carpet, carpet cushion, and adhesives or demonstrate compliance with testing criteria and frequencies through independent laboratory test results. Carpet, carpet cushion, and adhesives bearing the label will indicate that the carpet has been tested and meets the criteria of the CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program, and minimizes the impact on indoor air quality. Procure carpet in accordance with 40 CFR 247, and where possible, purchased locally to reduce emissions of fossil fuels from transporting. Conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS for carpet.


Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original wrappings and packages clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, size, dye lot number, and related information. Remove materials from packaging and store them in a clean, dry, well ventilated area (100 percent outside air supply, minimum of 1.5 air changes per hour, and no recirculation),protected from damage, soiling, and moisture, and strong contaminant sources and residues,and maintain at a temperature above 60 degrees F for 2 days prior to installation. Carpet shall not be stored with materials which have high emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) or other contaminants. Do not store carpet near materials that may offgas or emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.


Maintain areas in which carpeting is to be installed at a temperature above 60 degrees F and below 90 degrees F for 2 days before installation, during installation, and for 2 days after installation. Provide temporary



ventilation during work of this section. Maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees F thereafter for the duration of the contract. Do not permit traffic or movement of furniture or equipment in carpeted area for 24 hours after installation. Complete other work which would damage the carpet prior to installation of carpet.




1.7 SCHEDULING

Install carpet systems after the installation and ventilation period of materials or finishes which have high short-term emissions of VOCs, formaldehyde, particulates, or other air-borne compounds which may be adsorbed by or settle on the carpet.

1.8 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties including minimum ten (10) year wear warranty, two (2) year material and workmanship and ten (10) year tuft bind and delamination.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIAL

Provide extra material from same dye lot consisting of full width continuous broadloom for future maintenance. Provide a minimum of 2 percent of total square yards of each carpet type, pattern, and color.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET

Furnish first quality carpet; free of visual blemishes, streaks, poorly dyed areas, fuzzing of pile yarn, spots or stains, and other physical and manufacturing defects. Provide carpet materials and treatments as reasonably nonallergenic and free of other recognized health hazards. Provide a static control construction on all grade carpets which gives adequate durability and performance. Provide the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Label. Carpet type bearing the label will indicate that carpet has been tested and meets the criteria of the CRI Green Label Requirements for Indoor Air Quality Test Criteria.

2.1.1 Polyester Carpet Face Fibers

For informational purposes, a list of sources known to recycle polyester carpet face fibers is provided below. Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. An approved product from other sources may be submitted for the Government's approval during construction. Acceptable manufacturer's include, but are not limited to:

Bretlin, Inc.LaFayette, Georgia

Central Vermont Carpet



Barre, Vermont

Environmental Building SuppliesPortland, Oregon

Image IndustriesAmuchee, Georgia

Martin Color-FIEdgefield, South Carolina

Talisman Mills, Inc.Mequon, Wisconsin

2.1.2 Physical Characteristics

2.1.2.1 Broadloom Carpet

Carpet shall comply with the following:

a. Carpet Construction: Woven .

b. Type: Broadloom 12 feet minimum usable carpet width..

c. Pile Type: Level-loop .

d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered trademark) nylon continuous filament

e. Yarn Ply: Minimum 2 .

f. Gauge or Pitch: Minimum 135 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.

g. Stitches or Rows/Wires: Minimum 6.8 per square inch.

h. Finished Pile Yarn Weight: Minimum 30 ounces per square yard. This does not include weight of backings. Determine weight in accordance with ASTM D 5848.

i. Pile Density: Minimum 8060.

j. Dye Method: Solution dyed Space dye .

k. Backing Materials: Provide primary backing materials like those customarily used and accepted by the trade for each type of carpet . Provide secondary backing to suit project requirements of those customarily used and accepted by the trade for each type of carpet, except when a special unitary back designed for gluedown is needed ..

l. Attached Cushion: Provide an attached cushion mechanically frothed urethane with minimum weight of 63 oz/sq. yard, minimum density of 18 lb/cubic foot, minimum thickness of 0.125 inch, and maximum compression resistance of 7 psi, and compression set of 10 percent in accordance with ASTM D 3676. Do not exceed the maximum ash content of 50 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 297.

m. Recycle Efforts: Use of nylon fiber with 25 per cent minimum recycled content .




a. ARR (Appearance Retention Rating): Test carpet with the minimum 3.0-3.5 (Heavy) ARR in accordance with either the ASTM D 5252(Hexapod) or ASTM D 5417 (Vettermann) test methods using the number of cycles for short and long term tests as specified.b. Static Control: Provide static control to permanently regulate static buildup to less than 3.5 kV when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F in accordance with AATCC 134.

c. Flammability and Critical Radiant Flux Requirements: Comply carpet with 16 CFR 1630. Provide carpet in corridors and exits with a minimum average critical radiant flux of 0.22 watts per square centimeter when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648.

d. Tuft Bind: Provide tuft bind force required to pull a tuft or loop free from carpet backing with a minimum 10 pound average force for loop pile .

e. Colorfastness to Crocking: Comply dry and wet crocking with AATCC 165 and with a Class 4 minimum rating on the AATCC Color Transference Chart for all colors.

f. Colorfastness to Light: Comply colorfastness to light with AATCC 16, Test Option E "Water-Cooled Xenon-Arc Lamp, Continuous Light" and with a minimum 4 grey scale rating after 40 hours.

2.3 Carpet Cushion

For informational purposes, a list of sources known to recycle carpet cushions is provided below. Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. An approved product from other sources may be submitted for the Government's approval during construction. Acceptable manufacturer's include, but are not limited to:

Collins & Aikman Floor CoveringsDalton, Georgia

Chris Craft International ProductsWaterford, New York

Carpenter CompanyRichmond, Virginia

Dixie Manufacturing CorporationNorfolk, Virginia

2.3.1 Recycling Requirments

Provide bonded urethane carpet cushions be made from 15-50 percent of postconsumer content and 15-50 percent of total recovered materials content.

2.4 CARPET MOLDINGS

Install carpet moldings where floor covering material changes or carpet edge does not abut a vertical surface.



2.5 ADHESIVES AND CONCRETE PRIMER

Adhesives and concrete primers shall comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials. Provide waterproof, nonflammable, and nonstaining adhesives and concrete primers for carpet installation to meet local air-quality standards, and as required by the carpet manufacturer. Provide release adhesive for modular tile carpet as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Provide adhesives flashpoint of minimum 140 degrees F in accordance with ASTM D 3278.

2.6 MOLDING

Provide a heavy-duty vinyl molding designed for the type of carpet being installed. Provide floor flange of a minimum 2 inches wide. Provide black or dark brown color.

2.7 TAPE

Provide tape for seams as recommended by the carpet manufacturer for the type of seam used in installation. Any seam sealant shall have a maximum VOC content of 50 grams/liter. Do not use sealants that contain 1,1,1-trichloroethane or toluene.

2.8 COLOR, TEXTURE, AND PATTERN

Provide color, texture, and pattern as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION








Do not install carpet on surfaces that are unsuitable and will prevent a



proper installation. Repair holes, cracks, depressions, or rough areas using material recommended by the carpet or adhesive manufacturer. Free floor of any foreign materials and sweep clean. Before beginning work, test subfloor with glue and carpet to determine "open time" and bond.

3.4 MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY TESTS

Test concrete slab shall for moisture content and excessive alkalinity in accordance with CRI 104.

3.5 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SUBFLOOR

Do not commence installation of the carpeting shall until concrete substrate is at least 90 days old. Prepare the concrete surfaces in accordance with instructions of the carpet manufacturer. Match carpet, when required, and adhesives to prevent off-gassing to a type of curing compounds, leveling agents, and concrete sealer.

3.6 INSTALLATION

Isolate area of installation from rest of building. Perform all work by installers who are CFI certified (International Certified Floorcovering Installer Association), or manufacturer's approved installers. Conduct installation in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and CRI 104. Protect edges of carpet meeting hard surface flooring with molding and install in accordance with the molding manufacturer's printed instructions. Mothproofing for wool carpets shall use autofoam mothproofing system. Follow ventilation, personal protection, and other safety precautions recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Continue ventilation during installation and for at least 72 hours following installation.

3.6.1 Broadloom Installation

Install broadloom carpet direct glue down and smooth, uniform, and secure, with a minimum of seams. Apply regular, unnoticeable, and treated seams with a seam adhesive. Run side seams toward the light, where practical, and where such layout does not increase the number of seams. Install breadths parallel, with carpet pile in the same direction. Match patterns accurately. Neatly cut and fit cutouts, at door jambs, columns and ducts securely. Locate seams at doorways parallel to and centered directly under doors. Do not make seams perpendicular to doors or at pivot points. Provide seams at changes in directions of corridors to follow the wall line parallel to the carpet direction.


3.7.1 Cleaning

After installation of the carpet, remove debris, scraps, and other foreign matter. Remove soiled spots and adhesive from the face of the carpet with appropriate spot remover. Cut off and remove protruding face yarn. Vacuum carpet clean.

3.7.2 Protection

Protect the installed carpet from soiling and damage with heavy, reinforced, nonstaining kraft paper, plywood, or hardboard sheets. Lap and secure edges of kraft paper protection to provide a continuous cover.



Restrict traffic for at least 48 hours. Remove protective covering when directed by the Contracting Officer.

3.8 REMNANTS

Provide remnants remaining from the installation, consisting of scrap pieces more than 2 feet in dimension with more than 6 square feet total to the Government. Remove non-retained scraps from site and recycle appropriately.




SECTION 09 69 13

RIGID GRID ACCESS FLOORING04/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ANSI A208.2 (2002) Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) For Interior Applications


APA EWCG (2005) Engineered Wood Construction Guide: Building Requirements and Related Panel Systems





ASTM F 1066 (2004) Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile

CEILINGS & INTERIOR SYSTEMS CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION (CISCA)

CISCA Access Floors (2004) Test Procedures for Access Floors

COMPOSITE PANEL ASSOCIATION (CPA)

CPA A208.1 (2002) Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) For Interior Applications

ICC EVALUATION SERVICE, INC. (ICC-ES)

ICC-ES AC300 (2005) Acceptance Criteria for Access Floors


NFPA 99 (2005; Errata 2005) Health Care Facilities



1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detailed Installation Drawings; G

Drawings showing location, details at floor perimeter, method of anchorage to structural subfloor, grounding, description of factory coating, installation height above structural floor, accessories, and other details as specified.

SD-03 Product Data

Access Flooring System

Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. The data must include information about any design and production techniques, total system including all accessories and finish coatings of under-floor components, procedures and policies used to conserve energy, reduce material, improve waste management or incorporate green building/recycled products into the manufacturer of their components or products. Cleaning and maintenance instructions must be included.

Systems which contain zinc electroplated anti-corrosion coatings are prohibited.

SD-05 Design Data

Compliance with ICC-ES AC300

Design data substantiating compliance with International Building Code Acceptance Criteria for Access Floors.

SD-07 Certificates

Access Flooring System

Certificate of compliance attesting that the installed access floor system meets specification requirements, including all special equipment loads and specific electrical and or cable requirements.


Access flooring must be installed at the location and elevation and in the arrangement shown on the drawings. The floor system must be of the rigid grid stringer type, complete with all supplemental items, and be the standard product of a manufacturer specializing in the manufacture of access flooring systems.



a. Provide for self-alignment of floor panels, adjustable pedestals and readily removable floor panels covered as specified.

b. Lateral stability of floor support system must be independent of panels. Finished assembly must be rigid and free of vibration, noises, and rocking panels. Provide bolted stringer system with equipotential plane grounding.

c. Submit Certificates for the complete Access Flooring System including, but not limited to the following:

1) Compliance with ICC-ES AC300.

2) Load-bearing capabilities of pedestals, floor panels, and pedestal adhesive resisting force.

3) Supporting independent laboratory test reports. For panel loads, test results include concentrated loads at center of panel, panel edge midpoint, and uniform loads.

4) Floor electrical characteristics.

5) Material requirements

6) Elevated floor system must be free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation, and that it will remain so for a period of not less than 10 years after completion.

d. The Contractor warrants that, upon notification by the Government, defective work will be immediately replaced with new work at no additional cost to the Government.

1.3.1 Allowable Tolerances

a. Floor Panel Flatness: Plus or minus 0.02 inches on diagonal on top of panel or underneath edge.

b. Floor Panel Length: Plus or minus 0.015 inch.

c. Floor Panel Squareness: Plus or minus 0.02 inch in panel length.

d. Finish Floor: Level within plus or minus 0.062 inch in 10 feet, and plus or minus 0.10 inch for entire floor.

1.3.2 Floor Panels

Floor panel testing must be conducted in accordance with CISCA Access Floors. When tested as specified, all deflection and deformation measurements must be made at the point of load application on the top surface of the panel. Floor panels must be capable of supporting the following loads:

a. Concentrated load of 1250 pounds on one square inch, at any point on panel, without deflecting more than 0.08 inch, with a safety factor of 2 based on static design load, without permanent deformation in excess of 0.01 inch in any of the specified tests.

b. Uniform live load of 300 psf, without deflecting more than 0.04 inch.

c. A rolling load of 800 pounds applied through hard rubber surfaced



wheel 6 inch diameter by 1 1/2 inch wide for 10,000 cycles over the same path. Permanent set at conclusion of test shall not exceed 0.010 inch.

1.3.3 Stringers

Stringers must be capable of supporting a 450 pound concentrated load at midspan without permanent deformation in excess of 0.010 inch.

1.3.4 Pedestals

Pedestals must be capable of supporting a 7500 pound axial load without permanent deformation.

1.3.5 Bonding Strength of Pedestal Adhesive

Adhesive for anchoring pedestal bases must have a bonding strength capable of resisting an overturning moment of 1,000 lbf-in when a force is applied to the top of the pedestal in any direction.

1.3.6 Bond Strength of Factory Installed Covering

Bond strength of floor covering must be sufficient to permit handling of the panels by use of the panel lifting device, and to withstand moving caster loads up to 1000 pounds, without separation of the covering from the panel.

1.3.7 Grounding

The access flooring system must be grounded for safety hazard and static suppression. Provide positive contact between components for safe, continuous electrical grounding of entire floor system. Total system resistance from wearing surface of floor to building grounding electrode must be within range of 0.5 to 20,000 megohms .

1.3.7.1 Joint Resistance

Electrical joint resistance between individual stringer and pedestal junctions must be less than 0.1 milliohms. Electrical resistance between stringers and floor panels as mounted in normal use must be less than 3 ohms.








1.5.1 Delivery

Deliver materials to site in undamaged condition, in original containers or packages, complete with accessories and instructions. Label packages with manufacturer's name and brand designations. Materials covered by specific references must be packaged bearing specification number, type and class as applicable.

1.5.2 Storage

Store all materials in original protective packaging in a safe, dry, and clean location. Panels must be stored at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees F, and between 20 and 70 percent humidity. Replace defective or damaged materials.

1.5.3 Handling

Materials must be handled and protected in a manner to prevent damage during the entire construction period.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

b. Provide four floor panels complete with specified floor covering for future use.

1.7 DETAILED INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

The Contractor ust take measurements from finished areas at site and submit detail drawings indicating:

a. Location of panels

b. Layout of supports, panels, and cutout locations

c. Stair, handrail, and ramp framing

d. Sizes and details of components

e. Lateral bracing

f. Typical cutout details

g. Floor finishes

h. Location of connection to building grounding electrode

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled



content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.


2.2 FLOOR PANELS

2.2.1 Floor System Drawings And Planer Quality

a. Submit Fabrication Drawings for elevated floor systems consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the factory.

b. Indicate on Location Drawings exact location of pedestals, ventilation openings, cable cutouts, and the panel installation pattern.

c. Provide Detail Drawings showing details of the pedestals, pedestal-floor interlocks, floor panels, panel edging, floor openings, floor opening edging, floor registers, floor grilles, cable cutout treatment, perimeter base, expansion joints, and peripheral support facilities.

d. Design and workmanship of the floor, as installed, must be completely planar within plus or minus 0.060 inch in 10 feet, 0.100 inch for the entire floor, and 0.030 inch across panel joints.

e. Floor-panel joint-width tolerances must be 0.008 inch as measured with a feeler gage at any point in any joint when the panels are in the pressure contact required in final installation.

2.2.2 Panel Construction

a. Base access floor system on a 24 by 24 inch square module providing minimum of 18 inch clearance between structural floor and top of finished floor. Fabricate so accurate job cutting and fitting may be done using standard sizes for perimeters and around columns.

b. Do not expose metal on finished top surface of panels. Provide cutouts and cutout closures to accommodate utility systems and equipment intercabling. Reinforce cutouts to meet design load requirements. Provide extra support pedestals at each corner of cutout for cutout panels that do not meet specified design load requirements.

c. Panel design must provide for convenient panel removal for underfloor servicing and for openings for new equipment. Use panels of uniform dimensions within specified tolerances. Panels must be permanently marked to indicate load rating and model number.

d. Floor panels must be machined square to within plus or minus 0.005 inch with edge straightness plus or minus 0.0025 inch. Tolerances apply to the panel before the plastic edging is applied.

2.2.2.1 Metal-Clad Wood Core

Wood core panels must have cores of wood particleboard conforming to CPA A208.1, Grade 1-M-3, or of plywood conforming to ANSI A208.2, APA EWCG,



and APA PS 1, EXT-DFPA-C-C. The core must be not less than 1 inch thick, and be faced on both sides with structurally bonded zinc-coated steel sheets not lighter than 24 gauge. All edges and corners must be sealed with zinc-coated steel or extruded aluminum. The completed panels must have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Provide zinc-coated steel, extruded aluminum, fire resistant vinyl, or other fire resistant edging to protect shop and field edge cuts and cutouts through the face of panels in a manner to meet specified flame spread requirements.

2.2.3 Floor Covering

Floor panels must be surfaced with materials firmly bonded in place with waterproof adhesive. The electrical resistance must remain stable over the life expectancy of the floor covering. Any anti-static agent used in the manufacturing process must be an integral part of the material, and must not be surface applied. Bolt heads or similar attachments must not rise above the traffic surface.

2.2.3.1 Vinyl Composition Tile

Vinyl composition tile surfacing must be 1/8 inch thick conforming to ASTM F 1066, Class II, Composition 1 . Tiles may be approximately 12 inches square or may be the full size of the panel.

2.2.4 Edge Strip

Panels must be edged with extruded vinyl edge strips secured in place with mechanical interlock or adhesive bond, or must be of a replaceable type. Top of strip must be approximately 1/8 inch wide, and must be flush with the floor surfacing. Metal edge strips exposed at finish floor surface will be rejected.

2.2.5 Resilient Base

Base must be rubber straight style . Base must be 4 inches high and a minimum 1/8 inch thick. Job Formed corners must be furnished.

2.2.6 Lifting Device

Each individual room must be provided with one floor panel lifting device standard with the floor manufacturer. A minimum of two devices must be furnished.

2.3 PANEL SUPPORT SYSTEM

Design support system to allow for 360 degree clearance in laying out cable and cutouts for service to machines and so that panel and stringer together take up maximum of 2 inches.

2.3.1 Pedestals

Pedestals must be of steel or aluminum or a combination thereof. Ferrous materials must have a factory-applied corrosion-resistant finish. Pedestal base plates must provide a minimum of 16 square inches of bearing surface and must be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Pedestal shafts must be threaded to permit height adjustment within a range of approximately 2 inches, to permit overall floor adjustment within plus or minus 0.10 inch of the required elevation, and to permit leveling of the finished floor surface



within 0.062 inch in 10 feet in all directions. Locking devices must be provided to positively lock the final pedestal vertical adjustments in place. Pedestal caps must interlock with stringers to preclude tilting or rocking of the panels.

2.3.2 Stringers

Stringers must be of rolled steel, and must interlock with the pedestal heads to prevent lateral movement. Provide stringers that can be added or removed after floor is in place.

2.4 FACTORY TESTS

Access flooring must be factory tested by an independent laboratory at the same position and maximum design elevation and in the same arrangement as shown on the drawings for installation so as to duplicate service conditions as much as possible.

2.4.1 Load Tests

Floor panel, stringer, and pedestal testing must be conducted in accordance with CISCA Access Floors.

2.4.2 Bond Strength of Covering

The test panel must be supported on pedestals and stringers as specified for the installed floor. The supports must be braced as necessary to prevent sideways movement during the test. A test load of 1000 pounds must be imposed on the test assembly through a hard plastic caster 3 inches in diameter and 1 inchwide. The caster must be rolled completely across the center of the panel. The panel must withstand 20 passes of the caster with no delamination or separation of the covering.

2.5 COLOR

Color shall be as indicated on the drawings.

2.6 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

Material must be extruded aluminum, in mill finish, to sustain point loads of 250 pounds per vane without failure or permanent deformation. No part of a grille may project more than 1/8 inch above the floor. Registers and grills are not permitted in a laminate floor tile system.

2.7 CUT OUTS

Provide cable cutouts finished with rigid polyvinylchloride or molded polypropylene edging to conform to the appearance level of the floor surface and to cover raw edges of the cutout panel. Extrusion must be of a configuration to permit its effective and convenient use when new cable openings are required. Provide at least 24 feet of additional extrusion for future use.

a. Provide non-metallic adapter for openings less than 4 inches wide. Secure adapter adhesively in cutout to preclude removal from panel. Provide at least two adapters per 1000 square feet for future use.

b. Openings larger than 4 inches wide must use rigid polyvinylchloride or molded polypropylene edging. Cutting of panels, including cutouts,



must be performed outside of the building.

c. When size of cutout reduces the performance requirement of panel, provide intermediate stringers adjacent to cutouts.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 INSTALLATION

The floor system must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with the approved detail drawings. Open ends of the floor, where the floor system does not abut wall or other construction, must have positive anchorage and rigid support. Areas to receive access flooring must be maintained between 60 and 90 degrees F, and between 20 and 70 percent humidity for 24 hours prior to and during installation.

3.3.1 Preparation for Installation

The area in which the floor system is to be installed must be cleared of all debris. Structural floor surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned and all dust must be removed. Floor coatings required for dust or vapor control must be installed prior to installation of pedestals only if the pedestal adhesive will not damage the coating. If the coating and adhesive are not compatible, the coating must be applied after the pedestals have been installed and the adhesive has cured.

3.3.2 Pedestals

Pedestals must be accurately spaced, and must be set plumb and in true alignment. Base plates must be in full and firm contact with the structural floor, and must be secured to the structural floor with adhesive.



3.3.3 Stringers

Interlock stringers with the pedestal caps to preclude lateral movement, and space uniformly in parallel lines at the indicated elevation.

3.3.4 Auxiliary Framing

Provide auxiliary framing or pedestals at open ends of the floor, and beneath panels that are substantially cut to accommodate utility systems. Special framing for additional lateral support must be as shown on the approved detail drawings. Provide additional pedestals and stringers designed to specific heights and lengths to meet structural irregularities and design loads. Connect auxiliary framing to main framing.

3.3.5 Panels

Interlock panels with supports in a manner that will preclude lateral movement. Perimeter panels, cutout panels, and panels adjoining columns, stairs, and ramps must be fastened to the supporting components to form a rigid boundary for the interior panels. Floors must be level within the specified tolerances. Cut edges of steel and wood-core panels must be finished as recommended by the panel manufacturer. Extruded vinyl edging must be secured in place at all cut edges of all panel cut-outs to prevent abrasion of cables.

3.3.6 Resilient Base

Base must be provided at vertical wall intersections. Cracks and voids in walls and other vertical surfaces to receive base must be filled with an approved filler. The base must be applied after the floor system has been completely installed. Base must be applied with adhesive in accordance with the base manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3.7 Repair of Zinc Coating

Zinc coating that has been damaged, and cut edges of zinc-coated components and accessories, must be repaired by the application of a galvanizing repair paint conforming to ASTM A 780. Areas to be repaired must be thoroughly cleaned prior to application of the paint.

3.4 FIELD TESTS

3.4.1 Electrical Resistance

Testing of electrical resistance in the completed installation must be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Testing must be in accordance with NFPA 99 modified by placing one electrode on the center of the panel surface and connecting the other electrode to the metal flooring support. Measurements must be made at five or more locations. Each measurement must be the average of five readings of 15 seconds duration at each location. During the tests, relative humidity must be 45 to 55 percent and temperature must be 69 to 75 degrees F. Select panels used in the testing at random and include two panels most distant from the ground connection. Electrical resistance must be measured with instruments that are accurate within 2 percent and that have been calibrated within 60 days prior to the performance of the resistance tests. The metal-to-metal resistance from panel to supporting pedestal must not exceed 10 ohms. The resistance between the wearing surface of the floor covering and the ground connection, as measured on the completed installation, must be in



accordance with paragraph FLOOR COVERING.


3.5.1 Cleaning

The space below the completed floor must be free of all debris. Before any traffic or other work on the completed raised floor is started, clean the completed floor in accordance with the floor covering manufacturer's instructions. Do not permit seepage of cleaner between individual panels.

3.5.2 Protection

Protect traffic areas of raised floor systems with a covering of building paper, fiberboard, or other suitable material to prevent damage to the surface. Cover cutouts with material of sufficient strength to support the loads to be encountered. Place plywood or similar material on the floor to serve as runways for installation of heavy equipment not in excess of design load capacity. Maintain protection until the raised floor system is accepted.

3.3.3 Surplus Material Removal

Surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the work, must be cleaned. Remove all installation equipment, surplus materials, and rubbish from the work site.

3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Submit maintenance instructions for proper care of the floor panel surface. When conductive flooring is specified, also submit maintenance instructions to identify special cleaning and maintenance requirements to maintain "conductivity" properties of the panel finish.




SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS10/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

ACGIH 0100Doc (2005) Documentation of the Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices



ASTM D 2092 (2001) Standard Guide for Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for Painting

ASTM D 235 (2002) Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)

ASTM D 4263 (1983; R 2005) Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

ASTM D 4444 (1992; R 2003) Use and Calibration of Hand-Held Moisture Meters

ASTM D 523 (1989; R 1999) Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss


MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

MPI 10 (Jan 2004) Exterior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss Level 1

MPI 107 (Jan 2004) Rust Inhibitive Primer (Water-Based)

MPI 134 (Jan 2004) Galvanized Primer (Waterbased)

MPI 139 (Jan 2004) Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 3

MPI 141 (Jan 2004) Interior High Performance Latex



MPI Gloss Level 5

MPI 151 (Jan 2006) Interior W.B. Light Industrial Coating, MPI Gloss Level 3

MPI 163 (Jan 2006) Exterior W.B. Light Industrial Coating, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5

MPI 23 (Jan 2004) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer

MPI 4 (Jan 2004) Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler

MPI 47 (Jan 2004) Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5

MPI 50 (Jan 2004) Interior Latex Primer Sealer

MPI 77 (Jan 2004) Epoxy Gloss

MPI 79 (Jan 2004) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer

MPI 94 (Jan 2004) Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5

MPI 95 (Jan 2004) Quick Drying Primer for Aluminum

SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

SCS SP-01 (2000) Environmentally Preferable Product Specification for Architectural and Anti-Corrosive Paints


SSPC Guide 6 (2004) Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations

SSPC Guide 7 (2004; E 2004) Guide for the Disposal of Lead-Contaminated Surface Preparation Debris

SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting

SSPC PA Guide 3 (1982; E 1995) A Guide to Safety in Paint Application

SSPC SP 1 (1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning

SSPC SP 10 (2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning

SSPC SP 12 (2002) Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating

SSPC SP 2 (1982; E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning





SSPC SP 7 (2000; E 2004) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning

SSPC VIS 1 (2002; E 2004) Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning

SSPC VIS 3 (2004) Visual Standard for Power-and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel

SSPC VIS 4 (1998; E 2000; E 2004) Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by Waterjetting

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 385-1-1 (2003) Safety -- Safety and Health Requirements


MIL-STD-101 (Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for Compressed Gas Cylinders


FED-STD-313 (Rev D; Am 1) Material Safety Data, Transportation Data and Disposal Data for Hazardous Materials Furnished to Government Activities




29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants

29 CFR 1910.1025 Lead

29 CFR 1926.62 Lead

1.2 SUBMITTALS


The current MPI, "Approved Product List" which lists paint by brand, label, product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this specification. The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI "Approved



Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire contract and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All coats on a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No variation from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable.

Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with specification requirements.

In keeping with the intent of Executive Order 13101, "Greening the Government through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and Federal Acquisition", products certified by SCS as meeting SCS SP-01 shall be given preferential consideration over registered products. Products that are registered shall be given preferential consideration over products not carrying any EPP designation.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Piping identification

Submit color stencil codes

SD-03 Product Data


Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project.

Environmental Data

Materials; (LEED)


Coating; G

Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheets; (LEED)

Indicate VOC content.

SD-07 Certificates

Applicator's qualifications

Qualification Testing laboratory for coatings; G


Application instructions

Mixing

Detailed mixing instructions, minimum and maximum application



temperature and humidity, potlife, and curing and drying times between coats.

Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets

Submit manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for coatings, solvents, and other potentially hazardous materials, as defined in FED-STD-313.


Coatings:; G

Preprinted cleaning and maintenance instructions for all coating systems shall be provided.




Materials; (LEED)

1.3 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS

1.3.1 Contractor Qualification

Submit the name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address of the contractor that will be performing all surface preparation and coating application. Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully performed surface preparation and application of coatings on a minimum of three similar projects within the past three years. List information by individual and include the following:

a. Name of individual and proposed position for this work.

b. Information about each previous assignment including:

Position or responsibility

Employer (if other than the Contractor)

Name of facility owner

Mailing address, telephone number, and telex number (if non-US) of facility owner

Name of individual in facility owner's organization who can be contacted as a reference

Location, size and description of structure

Dates work was carried out

Description of work carried out on structure




1.4.1 Field Samples and Tests

The Contracting Officer may choose up to two coatings that have been delivered to the site to be tested at no cost to the Government. Take samples of each chosen product as specified in the paragraph "Sampling Procedures." Test each chosen product as specified in the paragraph "Testing Procedure." Products which do not conform, shall be removed from the job site and replaced with new products that confrom to the referenced specification. Testing of replacement products that failed initial testing shall be at no cost to the Government.

1.4.1.1 Sampling Procedure

The Contracting Officer will select paint at random from the products that have been delivered to the job site for sample testing. The Contractor shall provide one quart samples of the selected paint materials. The samples shall be taken in the presence of the Contracting Officer, and labeled, identifying each sample. Provide labels in accordance with the paragraph "Packaging, Labeling, and Storage" of this specification.

1.4.1.2 Testing Procedure

Provide Batch Quality Conformance Testing for specified products, as defined by and performed by MPI. As an alternative to Batch Quality Conformance Testing, the Contractor may provide Qualification Testing for specified products above to the appropriate MPI product specification, using the third-party laboratory approved under the paragraph "Qualification Testing" laboratory for coatings. The qualification testing lab report shall include the backup data and summary of the test results. The summary shall list all of the reference specification requirements and the result of each test. The summary shall clearly indicate whether the tested paint meets each test requirement. Note that Qualification Testing may take 4 to 6 weeks to perform, due to the extent of testing required.

Submit name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address of the independent third party laboratory selected to perform testing of coating samples for compliance with specification requirements. Submit documentation that laboratory is regularly engaged in testing of paint samples for conformance with specifications, and that employees performing testing are qualified. If the Contractor chooses MPI to perform the Batch Quality Conformance testing, the above submittal information is not required, only a letter is required from the Contractor stating that MPI will perform the testing.


1.5.1 Environmental Protection

In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental protection, provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction. Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to conform.



1.5.2 Lead Content

Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of nonvolatile content.

1.5.3 Chromate Content

Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.

1.5.4 Asbestos Content

Materials shall not contain asbestos.

1.5.5 Mercury Content

Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.

1.5.6 Silica

Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystilline silica.

1.5.7 Human Carcinogens

Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100Doc and ACGIH 0100Doc confirmed human carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).

1.6 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE

Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract specification number, designation name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and special precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground, under cover, with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F. Do not store paint products with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb VOC emissions. Do not store paint products in occupied spaces.

1.7 SAFETY AND HEALTH

Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with the following:

Work shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations, and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 29 SAFETY AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. The Activity Hazard Analysis shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting operations on painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone.

1.7.1 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application

Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3.



1.7.2 Toxic Materials

To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the most stringent guidance of:

a. The applicable manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or local regulation.

b. 29 CFR 1910.1000.

c. ACGIH 0100Doc, threshold limit values.

d. The appropriate OSHA standard in 29 CFR 1910.1025 and 29 CFR 1926.62 for surface preparation on painted surfaces containing lead. Removal and disposal of coatings which contain lead is specified in Section 02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION." Additional guidance is given in SSPC Guide 6 and SSPC Guide 7. Refer to drawings for list of hazardous materials located on this project. Contractor to coordinate paint preparation activities with this specification section.


Comply, at minimum, with manufacturer recommendations for space ventilation during and after installation. Isolate area of application from rest of building when applying high-emission paints or coatings.

1.8.1 Coatings

Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:

a. Less than 5 degrees F above dew point;

b. Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless specifically pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed manufacturer recommendations.

1.8.2 Post-Application

Vacate space for as long as possible after application. Wait a minimum of 48 hours before occupying freshly painted rooms. Maintain one of the following ventilation conditions during the curing period, or for 72 hours after application:

a. Supply outside air 24 hours a day.

b. Supply airflow at a rate of 6 air changes per hour, when outside temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 85 degrees F and humidity is between 30 percent and 60 percent.

c. Supply airflow at a rate of 1.5 air changes per hour, when outside air conditions are not within the range stipulated above.



Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as



manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.

1.10 SCHEDULING

Allow paint installations to cure prior to the installation of materials that adsorb VOCs.

1.11 COLOR SELECTION

Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified. Where not indicated or specified, colors shall be selected by the Contracting Officer. Manufacturers' names and color identification are used for the purpose of color identification only. Named products are acceptable for use only if they conform to specified requirements. Products of other manufacturers are acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and the product conforms to specified requirements.

Tint each coat progressively darker to enable confirmation of the number of coats.

Color of wall coating systems shall be as indicated on the drawings.

1.12 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED

1.12.1 Painting Included

Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following unless indicated otherwise.

a. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by removal of fasteners, such as screws and bolts.

b. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.

c. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.

1.12.1.1 Exterior Painting

Includes new surfaces, existing coated surfaces, and existing uncoated surfaces, of the buildings and appurtenances. Also included are existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations.

1.12.1.2 Interior Painting

Includes new surfaces, existing uncoated surfaces, and existing coated surfaces of the buildings and appurtenances as indicated and existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items, unless indicated otherwise.

a. Exposed columns, girders, beams, joists, and metal deck; and

b. Other contiguous surfaces.



1.12.2 Painting Excluded

Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.

a. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed ductwork, machinery, and equipment fixed in place.

b. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed spaces above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic spaces, crawl spaces, elevator shafts and chases.

c. Steel to be embedded in concrete.

d. Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and lead except existing coated surfaces.

e. Hardware, fittings, and other factory finished items.

1.12.3 Mechanical and Electrical Painting

Includes field coating of interior new and existing surfaces.

a. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items unless indicated otherwise.

(1) Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;

(2) Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;

(3) Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.

b. Do not paint the following, unless indicated otherwise:

(1) New zinc-coated, aluminum, and copper surfaces under insulation

(2) New aluminum jacket on piping

(3) New interior ferrous piping under insulation.

1.12.3.1 Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler Systems

Clean, pretreat, prime, and paint new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves, piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous metalwork, and accessories. Apply coatings to clean, dry surfaces, using clean brushes. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, and loose mill scale. Immediately after cleaning, provide the metal surfaces with one coat primer per schedules. Shield sprinkler heads with protective covering while painting is in progress. Upon completion of painting, remove protective covering from sprinkler heads. Remove sprinkler heads which have been painted and replace with new sprinkler heads. Provide primed surfaces with the following:

a. Piping in Unfinished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil in attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces, pipe chases, mechanical equipment room, and spaces where walls or ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a prefinished material.



b. Piping in Finished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except provide valves and operating accessories with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Provide piping with 2 inch wide red enamel bands or self-adhering red plastic bands spaced at maximum of 20 foot intervals throughout the piping systems.

1.12.4 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING

Lettering

Lettering shall be provided as scheduled on the drawings, shall be block Gothic type, and shall be black enamel .

1.12.5 Definitions and Abbreviations

1.12.5.1 Qualification Testing

Qualification testing is the performance of all test requirements listed in the product specification. This testing is accomplished by MPI to qualify each product for the MPI Approved Product List, and may also be accomplished by Contractor's third party testing lab if an alternative to Batch Quality Conformance Testing by MPI is desired.

1.12.5.2 Batch Quality Conformance Testing

Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product specification. This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab.

1.12.5.3 Coating

A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate. A coating may be a metal, alloy, paint, or solid/liquid suspensions on various substrates (metals, plastics, wood, paper, leather, cloth, etc.). They may be applied by electrolysis, vapor deposition, vacuum, or mechanical means such as brushing, spraying, calendering, and roller coating. A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or both. The term "coating" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels, stains, varnishes, sealers, epoxies, and other coatings, whether used as primer, intermediate, or finish coat. The terms paint and coating are used interchangeably.

1.12.5.4 DFT or dft

Dry film thickness, the film thickness of the fully cured, dry paint or coating.

1.12.5.5 DSD

Degree of Surface Degradation, the MPI system of defining degree of surface degradation. Five (5) levels are generically defined under the Assessment sections in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual.

1.12.5.6 EPP

Environmentally Preferred Products, a standard for determining



environmental preferability in support of Executive Order 13101.

1.12.5.7 EXT

MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system.

1.12.5.8 INT

MPI short term designation for an interior coating system.

1.12.5.9 micron / microns

The metric measurement for 0.001 mm or one/one-thousandth of a millimeter.

1.12.5.10 mil / mils

The English measurement for 0.001 in or one/one-thousandth of an inch, equal to 25.4 microns or 0.0254 mm.

1.12.5.11 mm

The metric measurement for millimeter, 0.001 meter or one/one-thousandth of a meter.

1.12.5.12 MPI Gloss Levels

MPI system of defining gloss. Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals. Traditionally, Flat refers to G1/G2, Eggshell refers to G3, Semigloss refers to G5, and Gloss refers to G6.

Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows:

Gloss Description Units UnitsLevel @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees

G1 Matte or Flat 0 to 5 10 maxG2 Velvet 0 to 10 10 to 35G3 Eggshell 10 to 25 10 to 35G4 Satin 20 to 35 35 minG5 Semi-Gloss 35 to 70 G6 Gloss 70 to 85G7 High Gloss

Gloss is tested in accordance with ASTM D 523. Historically, the Government has used Flat (G1 / G2), Eggshell (G3), Semi-Gloss (G5), and Gloss (G6).

1.12.5.13 MPI System Number

The MPI coating system number in each Division found in either the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting Manual and defined as an exterior (EXT/REX) or interior system (INT/RIN). The Division number follows the CSI Master Format.

1.12.5.14 Paint

See Coating definition.



1.12.5.15 REX

MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system used in repainting projects or over existing coating systems.

1.12.5.16 RIN

MPI short term designation for an interior coating system used in repainting projects or over existing coating systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 MATERIALS

Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3. Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for specified coatings and solvents.

PART 3 EXECUTION






Provide invoices, plant slips, certification indicating total quantities of waste material, and amounts diverted by way of means as stated above for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 77 00.00 20, "CLOSEOUT



PROCEDURES".

3.3 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED

Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property, and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.

3.4 RESEALING OF EXISTING EXTERIOR JOINTS

3.4.1 Surface Condition

Surfaces shall be clean, dry to the touch, and free from frost and moisture; remove grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, defective backstop, or other foreign matter that would prevent or impair adhesion. Where adequate grooves have not been provided, clean out to a depth of 1/2 inch and grind to a minimum width of 1/4 inch without damage to adjoining work. Grinding shall not be required on metal surfaces.

3.4.2 Backstops

In joints more than 1/2 inch deep, install glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or polyethylene foams free of oil or other staining elements as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Backstop material shall be compatible with sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as backstops.

3.4.3 Primer and Bond Breaker

Install the type recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

3.4.4 Ambient Temperature

Between 38 degrees F and 95 degrees F when applying sealant.

3.4.5 Exterior Sealant

For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Color(s) shall be selected by the Contracting Officer. Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Force sealant into joints with sufficient pressure to fill the joints solidly. Sealant shall be uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles.

3.4.6 Cleaning

Immediately remove fresh sealant from adjacent areas using a solvent recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains and leave the work in a clean condition. Allow sealant time to cure, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, prior to coating.




Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, disintegrated coatings, and other foreign matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments. Oil and grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be spot-primmed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas.

3.5.1 Additional Requirements for Preparation of Surfaces With Existing Coatings

Before application of coatings, perform the following on surfaces covered by soundly-adhered coatings, defined as those which cannot be removed with a putty knife:

a. Test existing finishes for lead before sanding, scraping, or removing. If lead is present, refer to paragraph Toxic Materials.

b. Wipe previously painted surfaces to receive solvent-based coatings, except stucco and similarly rough surfaces clean with a clean, dry cloth saturated with mineral spirits, ASTM D 235. Allow surface to dry. Wiping shall immediately precede the application of the first coat of any coating, unless specified otherwise.

c. Sand existing glossy surfaces to be painted to reduce gloss. Brush, and wipe clean with a damp cloth to remove dust.

d. The requirements specified are minimum. Comply also with the application instructions of the paint manufacturer.

e. Previously painted surfaces specified to be repainted damaged during construction shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter.

f. Blistering, cracking, flaking and peeling or other deteriorated coatings shall be removed.

g. Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214, the chalk resistance rating is no less than 8.

h. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips, and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged areas.

i. Edges of chipped paint shall be feather edged and sanded smooth.

j. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC requirements. Solvent, mechanical, or chemical cleaning methods shall be used to provide surfaces suitable for painting.

k. New, proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings.



3.5.2 Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects

Sand, spackle, and treat minor defects to render them smooth. Minor defects are defined as scratches, nicks, cracks, gouges, spalls, alligatoring, and irregularities due to partial peeling of previous coatings.

3.5.3 Removal of Existing Coatings

Remove existing coatings from the following surfaces:

a. Surfaces containing large areas of minor defects;

b. Surfaces containing more than 20 percent peeling area; and

c. Surfaces designated by the Contracting Officer, such as surfaces where rust shows through existing coatings.

3.5.4 Substrate Repair

a. Repair substrate surface damaged during coating removal;

b. Sand edges of adjacent soundly-adhered existing coatings so they are tapered as smooth as practical to areas involved with coating removal; and

c. Clean and prime the substrate as specified.

3.6 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES

3.6.1 Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces

a. Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas That Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances: Solvent clean or detergent wash in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and grease. Where shop coat is missing or damaged, clean according to SSPC SP 2, SSPC SP 3, SSPC SP 6, or SSPC SP 10. ; Water jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ-4 may be used to remove loose coating and other loose materials. Use inhibitor as recommended by coating manufacturer to prevent premature rusting. Shop-coated ferrous surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by treating and touching up corroded areas immediately upon detection.

b. Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust, Mill Scale, and Other Foreign Substances: Clean entire surface in accordance with SSPC SP 6/SSPC SP 12 WJ-3.

c. Metal Floor Surfaces to Receive Nonslip Coating: Clean in accordance with SSPC SP 10.

3.6.2 Final Ferrous Surface Condition:

For tool cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and SSPC SP 3. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 3.

For abrasive blast cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 7, SSPC SP 6, and SSPC SP 10. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 1.



For waterjet cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 12. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 4.

3.6.3 Galvanized Surfaces

a. New or Existing Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation Products: Clean with solvent, steam, or non-alkaline detergent solution in accordance with SSPC SP 1. If the galvanized metal has been passivated or stabilized, the coating shall be completely removed by brush-off abrasive blast. New galvanized steel to be coated shall not be "passivated" or "stabilized" If the absence of hexavalent stain inhibitors is not documented, test as described in ASTM D 2092, Appendix X2, and remove by one of the methods described therein.

b. Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No Rusting: Water jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ3 to remove loose coating from surfaces with less than 20 percent coating deterioration and no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor as recommended by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.

c. Galvanized With Severe Deteriorated Coating or Severe Rusting: Water jet to SSPC SP 12 WJ3 degree of cleanliness.

3.6.4 Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces

Aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal surfaces.

a. Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and wash with mild non-alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water soluble contaminants.

3.6.5 Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous or Mastic-Type Coating

Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water.

3.7 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE

3.7.1 Concrete and Masonry

a. Curing: Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure at least 30 days before painting, except concrete slab on grade, which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting.

b. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.

(1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash new and existing uncoated surfaces with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cuphousehold detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water. Then rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Wash existing coated surfaces with a suitable detergent and rinse thoroughly. For large areas, water blasting may be used.

(2) Fungus and Mold: Wash new , existing coated, and existing



uncoated surfaces with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

(3) Paint and Loose Particles: Remove by wire brushing.

(4) Efflorescence: Remove by scraping or wire brushing followed by washing with a 5 to 10 percent by weight aqueous solution of hydrochloric (muriatic) acid. Do not allow acid to remain on the surface for more than five minutes before rinsing with fresh water. Do not acid clean more than 4 square feet of surface, per workman, at one time.

c. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints and minor defects, including but not limited to spalls, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prior to coating application.

d. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp surfaces, but not to surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply epoxies to damp vertical surfaces as determined by ASTM D 4263 or horizontal surfaces that exceed 3 lbs of moisture per 1000 square feet in 24 hours as determined by ASTM F 1869. In all cases follow manufacturers recommendations. Allow surfaces to cure a minimum of 30 days before painting.

3.7.2 Gypsum Board, Plaster, and Stucco

a. Surface Cleaning: Plaster and stucco shall be clean and free from loose matter; gypsum board shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and dust by brushing with a soft brush, rubbing with a dry cloth, or vacuum-cleaning prior to application of the first coat material. A damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water-based.

b. Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints, cracks, holes, surface irregularities, and other minor defects with patching plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth.

c. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp surfaces, but not surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply epoxies to damp surfaces as determined by ASTM D 4263. New plaster to be coated shall have a maximum moisture content of 8 percent, when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4444, Method A, unless otherwise authorized. In addition to moisture content requirements, allow new plaster to age a minimum of 30 days before preparation for painting.

3.8 PREPARATION OF WOOD AND PLYWOOD SURFACES

3.8.1 New Plywood and Wood Surfaces:

a. Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter.

Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be free from dust and other deleterious substances and in a condition approved by the Contracting Officer prior to receiving paint or other finish. Do not use water to clean uncoated wood. Scrape to remove loose coatings. Lightly sand to roughen the entire area of previously



enamel-coated wood surfaces.

b. Removal of Fungus and Mold: Wash existing coated surfaces with a solution composed of 3 ounces (2/3 cup) trisodium phosphate, 1 ounce (1/3 cup) household detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.

c. Moisture content of the wood shall not exceed 12 percent as measured by a moisture meter in accordance with ASTM D 4444, Method A, unless otherwise authorized.

d. Wood surfaces adjacent to surfaces to receive water-thinned paints shall be primed and/or touched up before applying water-thinned paints.

e. Cracks and Nailheads: Set and putty stop nailheads and putty cracks after the prime coat has dried.

f. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects:

(1) Knots and Resinous Wood : Prior to application of coating, cover knots and stains with two or more coats of 3-pound-cut shellac varnish, plasticized with 5 ounces of castor oil per gallon. Scrape away existing coatings from knotty areas, and sand before treating. Prime before applying any putty over shellacked area.

(2) Open Joints and Other Openings: Fill with whiting putty, linseed oil putty. Sand smooth after putty has dried.

(3) Checking: Where checking of the wood is present, sand the surface, wipe and apply a coat of pigmented orange shellac. Allow to dry before paint is applied.

3.9 APPLICATION

3.9.1 Coating Application

Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal, state and local laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein.

At the time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration. Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application.

Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer, paint may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be coated. Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based paints or using spray equipment with any paints.

Paints, except water-thinned types, shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch.

Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces. Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of



adjacent painted surfaces.

Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. Hiding shall be complete.

Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats. Interior areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material.

Apply paint to new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves, piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous metal work, and accessories. Shield sprinkler heads with protective coverings while painting is in progress. Remove sprinkler heads which have been painted and replace with new sprinkler heads. For piping in unfinished spaces, provide primed surfaces with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Unfinished spaces include attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces, pipe chases, mechanical equipment room, and space where walls or ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a prefinished material. For piping in finished areas, provide prime surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except provide valves and operating accessories with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel. Upon completion of painting, remove protective covering from sprinkler heads.

a. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to present topcoat adhesion problems. Provide each coat in specified condition to receive next coat.

b. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely, and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats.

c. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.

d. Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies and urethanes) should be applied within the overcoating window recommended by the manufacturer.

e. Floors: For nonslip surfacing on level floors, as the intermediate coat is applied, cover wet surface completely with almandite garnet, Grit No. 36, with maximum passing U.S. Standard Sieve No. 40 less than 0.5 percent. When the coating is dry, use a soft bristle broom to sweep up excess grit, which may be reused, and vacuum up remaining residue before application of the topcoat.

3.9.2 Mixing and Thinning of Paints

Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when thinning is mandatory to suit surface, temperature, weather conditions,



application methods, or for the type of paint being used. Obtain written permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners. The written permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.

When thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon. The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds. Paints of different manufacturers shall not be mixed.

3.9.3 Two-Component Systems

Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Any thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration and sealing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of substrate.

3.9.4 Coating Systems

a. Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the respective specifications listed in the following Tables:

Table

Division 3. Exterior Concrete Paint Table Division 4. Exterior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table Division 5. Exterior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table Division 3. Interior Concrete Paint Table Division 4. Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table Division 5. Interior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table Division 9: Interior Plaster, Gypsum Board, Textured Surfaces Paint Table

b. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers, varnishes, enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat unless specified otherwise in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers to the minimum dry film thickness.

c. Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces which have not been specified, the same as surfaces having similar conditions of exposure.

d. Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work, Including New Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with the following:

(1) One coat of primer.

(2) One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.

(3) One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.

e. Existing Coated Surfaces To Be Painted: Apply coatings conforming to the respective specifications listed in the Tables herein, except that pretreatments, sealers and fillers need not be provided on surfaces where existing coatings are soundly adhered



and in good condition. Do not omit undercoats or primers.

3.10 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL

Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior and Interior.

a. Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is cleaned, to surfaces that meet all specified surface preparation requirements at time of application.

b. Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use one coat of specified primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection.

c. Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.

d. Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply MPI 101, 1.5 mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane coatings.

e. Pipes and Tubing: The semitransparent film applied to some pipes and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat, but shall be overcoated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior to application of finish coats.

f. Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces. On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings, spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer MPI 107.

3.11 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES

Apply coatings of Tables in Division 3, 4 and 9 for Exterior and Interior.

3.12 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

Piping Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Provide in accordance with MIL-STD-101. Place stenciling in clearly visible locations. On piping not covered by MIL-STD-101, stencil approved names or code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2 inch high for piping and a minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere. Stencil arrow-shaped markings on piping to indicate direction of flow using black stencil paint.

3.13 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate mobility of moving components, including swinging and sliding doors, cabinets, and windows with operable sash, for inspection by the Contracting Officer. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment.


As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints. Properly dispose of paints or solvents in designated containers. Close and seal partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as necessary for reuse. Store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate



temperature. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back program. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new product. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials. Set aside extra paint for future color matches or reuse by the Government.

3.15 PAINT TABLES

All DFT's are minimum values.

3.15.1 EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES

DIVISION 3: EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE

A. New and uncoated existing and Existing, previously painted concrete; vertical surfaces, including undersides of balconies and soffits but excluding tops of slabs:

1. Latex New; MPI EXT 3.1A-G2 (Flat) / Existing; MPI REX 3.1A-G2 (Flat) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 10 MPI 10 MPI 10 System DFT: 3.5 mils Primer as recommended by manufacturer. Topcoat: Coating to match adjacent surfaces.

DIVISION 4: EXTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE

A. Existing concrete masonry on coated surface:

1. Latex Existing; MPI REX 4.2A-G1 (Flat) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: N/A MPI 10 MPI 10 System DFT:11 mills Topcoat: Coating to match adjacent surfaces.

DIVISION 5: EXTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE

STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

A. New Steel that has been hand or power tool cleaned to SSPC SP 2 or SSPC SP 3

1. Alkyd Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G5 Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 23 MPI 94 MPI 94 System DFT: 5.25 mils

C. Existing steel that has been spot-blasted to SSPC SP 6:

1. Surface previously coated with alkyd or latex:

Waterborne Light Industrial Coating



STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES MPI REX 5.1C-G5 (Semigloss) Spot Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 79 MPI 163 MPI 163 System DFT: 5 mils

EXTERIOR GALVANIZED SURFACES

F. New Galvanized surfaces:

3. Waterborne Primer / Waterborne Light Industrial Coating MPI EXT 5.3J-G5 (Semigloss) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 134 MPI 163 MPI 163 System DFT: 4.5 mils

EXTERIOR SURFACES, OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)

I. Aluminum, aluminum alloy and other miscellaneous non-ferrous metal items not otherwise specified except hot metal surfaces, roof surfaces, and new prefinished equipment. Match surrounding finish:

2. Waterborne Light Industrial Coating MPI EXT 5.4G-G5(Semigloss) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 95 MPI 163 MPI 163 System DFT: 5 mils

DIVISION 9: EXTERIOR STUCCO PAINT TABLE

A. New stucco:

1. Latex New; MPI EXT 9.1A-G1 (Flat) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 10 MPI 10 MPI 10 System DFT: 4.5 mils

Primer as recommended by manufacturer. Topcoat: Coating to match adjacent surfaces. On existing stucco, apply primer based on surface condition.

3.15.2 INTERIOR PAINT TABLES

DIVISION 3: INTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE

A. New and uncoated existing and Existing, previously painted Concrete, vertical surfaces, not specified otherwise:

2. High Performance Architectural Latex Existing; MPI RIN 3.1J-G3 (Eggshell) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:



DIVISION 3: INTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE MPI 50 MPI 139 MPI 139 System DFT: 4 mils

E. New and uncoated existing and Existing, previously painted concrete floors

3. Epoxy (non-slip finish) New; MPI INT 3.2C-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.2C-G6 (Gloss) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 77 MPI 77 MPI 77 System DFT: 5 mils

DIVISION 4: INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE

A. New and uncoated Existing Concrete masonry:

1. High Performance Architectural Latex

MPI INT 4.2D-G3 (Eggshell) Filler Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 4 N/A MPI 139 MPI 139 System DFT: 11 mils

B. Existing, previously painted Concrete masonry:

1. High Performance Architectural Latex MPI RIN 4.2K-G3 (Eggshell) Spot Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 50 MPI 139 MPI 139 System DFT: 4.5 mils

D. Existing, previously painted, concrete masonry units in high humidity areas unless otherwise specified:

1. Waterborne Light Industrial Coating MPI RIN 4.2G-G3(Eggshell) Spot Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 151 MPI 151 MPI 151 System DFT: 4.5 mils

DIVISION 5: INTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE

INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

A. Metal, Mechanical,Electrical,Fire extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves, conduit, hangers, supports, Surfaces adjacent to painted surfaces (Match surrounding finish), and miscellaneous metal items not otherwise specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished equipment:



INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

1. High Performance Architectural Latex MPI INT 5.1R-G5 (Semigloss) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 79 MPI 141 MPI 141 System DFT: 5 mils

C. Metal in high-humidity areas not otherwise specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished equipment:

1. Alkyd MPI INT 5.1E-G5 (Semigloss) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 79 MPI 47 MPI 47 System DFT: 5.25 mils E. Miscellaneous non-ferrous metal items not otherwise specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished equipment. Match surrounding finish:

1. High Performance Architectural Latex MPI INT 5.4F-G3 (Eggshell) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 95 MPI 139 MPI 139 System DFT: 5 mils

DIVISION 9: INTERIOR PLASTER, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE

A. New and Existing, previously painted Plaster and Wallboard not otherwise specified:

2. High Performance Architectural Latex New; MPI INT 9.2B-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2B-G3 (Eggshell) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 50 MPI 139 MPI 139 System DFT: 4 mils

B. New and Existing, previously painted Plaster and Wallboard in high humidity areas not otherwise specified.:

2. Alkyd New; MPI INT 9.2C-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2C-G5 (Semigloss) Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat: MPI 50 MPI 47 MPI 47 System DFT: 4 mils




SECTION 10 10 00

VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM F 152 (1995; R 2002) Tension Testing of Nonmetallic Gasket Materials

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Visual Display Boards; G

Projector Plate

Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts. Manufacturer's installation instructions, and cleaning and maintenance instructions.

SD-07 Certificates

Visual Display Boards

Projector Plate

Certificate of compliance signed by Contractor attesting that visual display boards conform to the requirements specified.

1.3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

The term visual display board when used herein includes presentation boards, marker boards, tackboards, and presentation boards. Visual display boards shall be from manufacturer's standard product line.










Materials shall be delivered to the building site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers and shall be stored in a clean dry area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Materials shall be stacked according to manufacturer's recommendations. Visual display boards shall be allowed to acclimate to the building temperature for 24 hours prior to installation.

1.6 WARRANTY

Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a one year period shall be provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 COLOR

Marker Boards - White with aluminum frame and accessories.

Tack Boards - Natural cork with aluminum frame and accessories.

2.3 MATERIALS

2.3.1 Porcelain Enamel

Marker board writing surface shall be composed of porcelain enamel fused to a nominal 28 gauge (0.0149 inches) thick steel, laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick core material with a steel or foil backing sheet. Writing surface shall be capable of supporting paper by means of magnets. Marker board surface for display track system may be a powder paint dry erase surface adhered to a nominal 18 gauge (0.0478 inches) thick steel.

2.3.2 Cork

Cork shall be a continuous resilient sheet made from soft, clean, granulated cork relatively free from hardback and dust and bonded with a binder suitable for the purpose intended. The wearing surface shall be free from streaks, spots, cracks or other imperfections that would impair its usefulness or appearance. The material shall be seasoned, and a clean cut made not less than 1/2 inch from the edge shall show no evidence of



soft sticky binder.

2.3.2.1 Natural Cork

Material shall be a single layer of pure grain natural cork without backing or facing. The color shall be light tan. The cork sheet shall have a tensile strength of not less than 40 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM F 152.

2.3.3 Aluminum

Aluminum frame extrusions shall be alloy 6063-T5 or 6063-T6, conform to ASTM B 221, and be a minimum 0.06 inches thick. Exposed aluminum shall have an anodized, satin finish. Straight, single lengths shall be used wherever possible. Joints shall be kept to a minimum. Corners shall be mitered and shall have a hairline closure.

2.3.4 Hardwood

Exposed hardwood for frames, cabinets, and cases shall be oak, or walnut. Hardwood shall be provided with a durable factory-applied stain and lacquer finish of a type standard with the manufacturer.

2.4 PRESENTATION BOARD

The presentation board shall be a wall hung cabinet with double doors and shall have a projection screen that pulls down over the marker board writing surface in the cabinet interior. The doors shall be attached to cabinet with piano hinges and have a catch or closure to keep doors closed when not in use. The interior of the cabinet shall contain a porcelain enamel markerboard writing surface with chalktray, a flip chart that can be hung on an interior door panel, and fabric covered tacksurface on the interior door panels. The cabinet shall be oak hardwood or walnut hardwood. The edge detailing shall be bullnose or radius . Dry erase markings shall be removable with a felt eraser or dry cloth without ghosting. Each unit shall come complete with an eraser and four different color compatible dry erase markers. Shall be provided for each unit. The size shall be 6'-0" x 4'-0".

2.5 MARKERBOARD

Markerboard shall have a porcelain enamel writing surface and a chalktray. Markerboard shall be a factory assembled unit complete in one piece, without joints whenever possible. When markerboard dimensions require delivery in separate sections, components shall be prefit at the factory, disassembled for delivery and jointed at the site. Frame shall be aluminum . Chalktray shall be the same material as the frame and extend the full length of the liquid markerboard. The markerboard shall have a map rail. The map rail with a tackable insert shall extend the full length of the liquid chalkboard, and shall have map hooks with clips for holding sheets of paper. Two map hooks shall be provided for each 4 foot of map rail. Dry erase markings shall be removable with a felt eraser or dry cloth without ghosting. Each unit shall come complete with an eraser and four different color compatible dry erase markers. The size shall be as shown on the drawings.



2.6 TACKBOARDS

2.6.1 Cork

Tackboard shall consist of a minimum 1/4 inch thick natural cork laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard, and shall have an aluminum frame. The size shall be as shown on the drawings.

2.7 PROJECTOR PLATE

a. Manufacturers standard projector mounting plate for use with suspended ceilings.

1. Size: 24 inches x 24 inches. 2. Color: Off white.

PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 PLACEMENT SCHEDULE

Visual display boards shall be provided as follows:

Board Type: Marker boardsBoard Size: As indicatedWall Location: As indicatedMounting Height: 36" above finish floor to bottom

Board Type: TackboardsBoard Size: As indicatedWall Location: As indicatedMounting Height: 36" above finish floor to bottom

Board Type: Presentation boards



Board Size: As indicatedWall Location: As indicatedMounting Height: 36" above finish floor to bottom

Mounting height is defined as distance from finished floor to top of the display board frame.

3.4 INSTALLATION

Installation and assembly shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Concealed fasteners shall be used. Visual display boards shall be attached to the walls with suitable devices to anchor each unit. The Contractor shall furnish and install trim items, accessories and miscellaneous items in total, including but not limited to hardware, grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, and anchorages incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, complete and finished installation. Installation shall not be initiated until completion of room painting and finishing operations. Visual display boards shall be installed in locations and at mounting heights indicated. Visual display boards shall be installed level and plumb, and if applicable doors shall be aligned and hardware shall be adjusted. Damaged units shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer.

3.5 CLEANING

Writing surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.




SECTION 10 14 01

EXTERIOR SIGNAGE04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWS C1.1M/C1.1 (2000)Resistance Welding





NAAMM MFM (1988) Metal Finishes Manual

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Approved Detail Drawings; G

Drawings showing elevations of each type of sign; dimensions, details, and methods of mounting or anchoring; shape and thickness of materials; and details of construction. A schedule showing the location, each sign type, and message shall be included.

1.3 GENERAL

All exterior signage shall be provided by a single manufacturer. Exterior signage shall be of the design, detail, sizes, types, and message content shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements specified, and shall be provided at the locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with lettering, framing as detailed, and related components for a complete installation.



1.4 CHARACTER PROPORTIONS AND HEIGHTS

Characters and numbers on indicated signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from which they are to be read. The minimum height is measured using an upper case letter "X". Lower case characters are not permitted.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

Signs, plaques, and dimensional letters shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. Items of equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has been in satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening.





Materials shall be wrapped for shipment and storage, delivered to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and stored in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.7 WARRANTY

Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a one year period shall be provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE SYSTEM

Exterior signage shall consist of a system of identification, sign located where shown. Dimensions, details, materials, message content, and design of signage shall be as shown.



2.2.1 Free-Standing Base Mount Sign

2.2.1.1 Framing

Framing shall consist of aluminum tube columns welded to companion plates. Framing members shall be designed to permit access for panel removal. Mounting shall be provided as shown.

2.2.1.2 Mounting

Mounting shall be provided by securing to concrete foundation as shown.

2.2.1.3 Finishes

Finish shall be semi-gloss baked enamel .

2.2.2 Panel And Post/Panel Type Signs

2.2.2.1 Posts

One-piece aluminum posts shall be provided with minimum 0.125 inch wall thickness. Posts shall be designed to accept panel framing system described. The post shall be designed to permit attachment of panel framing system without exposed fasteners. Caps shall be provided for each post.

2.2.2.2 Panels

Modular message panels shall be provided in sizes shown on drawings. Panels shall be fabricated a minimum of 0.125 inch aluminum . Panels shall be designed to be interchangeable.

2.2.2.3 Finishes

Post finish shall be semi-gloss baked enamel . Metal panel system finish shall be baked enamel .

2.2.2.4 Mounting

Permanent mounting shall be provided by embedding posts in concrete foundation as shown.

2.3 GRAPHICS FOR EXTERIOR SIGNAGE SYSTEMS

2.3.1 Graphics

Signage graphics shall conform to the following:

a. Message shall be applied to panel using the silkscreen process. Silkscreened images shall be executed with photo screens prepared from original art. Handcut screens will not be accepted. Original art shall be defined as artwork that is a first generation pattern of the original specified art. Edges and corners shall be clean. Rounded corners, cut or ragged edges, edge buildup, bleeding or surfaces pinholes will not be accepted.



2.3.2 Messages

Coordinbate with the Contracting Officer for message content. Typeface: Helvetica medium . Centered, upper case.

2.4 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS

Aluminum alloy products shall conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions. Aluminum extrusions shall be provided at least 1/8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at least 16 gauge thick. Welding for aluminum products shall conform to AWS C1.1M/C1.1.

2.5 ORGANIC COATING

Surfaces shall be cleaned, primed, and given a semi-gloss baked enamel finish in accordance with NAAMM MFM, AMP 505, with total dry film thickness not less than 1.2 mils.

2.6 SHOP FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE

2.6.1 Factory Workmanship

Work shall be assembled in the shop, as far as practical, ready for installation at the site. Work that cannot be shop assembled shall be given a trial fit in the shop to ensure proper field assembly. Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Drilling and punching shall produce clean, true lines and surfaces. Welding shall be continuous along the entire area of contact. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. Exposed surfaces of work shall have a smooth finish. Fastenings shall be concealed where practical. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water.


Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact with concrete, mortar, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, the surfaces shall be protected with a coat of asphalt varnish or a coat of zinc-molybdate primer to prevent galvanic or corrosive action.

2.7 COLOR, FINISH, AND CONTRAST

Color shall be as indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 INSTALLATION

Signs shall be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the approved detail drawings. Signs shall be installed plumb and true and by method shown or specified.

3.3.1 Anchorage

Anchorage and fastener materials shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions for the indicated substrate.

3.3.2 Protection and Cleaning

The work shall be protected against damage during construction. Hardware and electrical equipment shall be adjusted for proper operation. Glass, frames, and other sign surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. After signs are completed and inspected, the Contractor shall cover all project identification, directional, and other signs which may mislead the public. Covering shall be maintained until instructed to be removed by the Contracting Officer or until the facility is to be opened for business. Signs shall be cleaned, as required, at time of cover removal.




SECTION 10 14 02

INTERIOR SIGNAGE04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.



1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Detail Drawings; G

Drawings showing elevations of each type of sign, dimensions, details and methods of mounting or anchoring, shape and thickness of materials, and details of construction. A schedule showing the location, each sign type, and message shall be included.

SD-03 Product Data

Installation; G

Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalogs cuts, installation and cleaning instructions.

SD-04 Samples

Interior Signage; G

One sample of each of the following sign types showing typical quality, workmanship and color. The samples may be installed in the work, provided each sample is identified and location recorded.

a. Standard Room sign.

b. All signs indicated.




Protection and Cleaning; G

Six copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system operation shall be provided. The instructions shall include simplified diagrams for the system as installed. Six copies of maintenance instructions listing routine procedures, repairs, and guides shall be provided. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a hard cover. The following identification shall be inscribed on the covers: the words "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", name and location of the facility, name of the Contractor, and contract number.

1.3 GENERAL

Interior signage shall be of the design, detail, sizes, types, and message content shown on the drawings/attachments/signage placement schedule (as applicable), shall conform to the requirements specified, and shall be provided at the locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with lettering, framing as detailed, and related components for a complete installation. Signage shall be obtained from a single manufacturer with edges and corners of finished letterforms and graphics true and clean. Recyclable materials shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

Signs, plaques, and dimensional letters shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall essentially duplicate signs that have been in satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening.





Materials shall be packaged to prevent damage and deterioration during shipment, handling, storage and installation. Product shall be delivered to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging and stored in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 EXTRA STOCK

The Contractor shall provide extra stock of the following: 10 blank plates of each color and size for sign types. 10 pressure-sensitive letters in each color and size for sign type..



PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 ROOM IDENTIFICATIONSIGNS

2.2.1 Standard Room Signs

Signs shall consist of laminated thermosetting Type MP plastic (three-ply melamine plastic laminate with phenolic core) and shall conform to the following:

Units shall be frameless. Corners of signs shall be rounded to 1/2 inch radius.

2.2.2 Changeable Message Strip Signs

Changeable message strip signs shall be of same construction as standard room signs to include a clear sleeve that will accept plastic insert. The insert shall be prepared die-cut vinyl letters applied to 0.015 inch rigid vinyl film.

2.2.3 Type of Mounting For Signs

Surface mounted signs shall be mounted with 1/16 inch thick vinyl foam tape or countersunk mounting holes in plaques and mounting screws fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.

2.2.4 Graphics

Signage graphics for modular signs shall conform to the following:

Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphics into panel sign on face to produce precisely formed copy and sharp images, incised to uniform depth. Melamine plastic engraving stock used for ADA compliant graphic shall be three-ply lamination contrasting color core meeting ASTM D 635

Message shall be as shown on the finish schedule and coordinated with the Contracting Officer.



2.2.5 Character Proportions and Heights

Letters and numbers on indicated signs which do not designate permanent rooms or spaces shall have a width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke-width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. Characters and numbers on indicated signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from which they are to be read. The minimum height is measured using an upper case letter "X". Lower case characters are permitted. Suspended or projected overhead signs shall have a minimum character height of 3 inches.

2.2.6 Raised and Brailled Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs (Pictograms)

Raised and brailled characters and symbols are only required on signs that designate permanent rooms or spaces, including restrooms and room numbers. They are not required for information or way-finding signs. Raised letters and numbers on signs must protrude 1/32 inch upper case, sans serif or simple serif type and shall be accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be at least 5/8 inch in height, but no higher than 2 inches. Pictograms shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram. The border dimension of the pictogram shall be 6 inches minimum in height. Indicated accessible facilities shall use the international symbol of accessibility.

2.3 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE

2.3.1 Factory Workmanship

Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Drilling and punching shall produce clean, true lines and surfaces. Exposed surfaces of work shall have a smooth finish and exposed riveting shall be flush. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable.

2.4 COLOR, FINISH, AND CONTRAST

Color shall be as selected from manufacturers standard color charts. Finish of all signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish as required in handicapped-accessible buildings.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 INSTALLATION

Signs shall be installed plumb and true and in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the detail drawings. Mounting height shall be 60 inch above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign. Distance from edge of door frame to edge of sign shall be as indicated. Required blocking shall be installed. Signs shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. Where there is no wall space to the latch side of the door, including at double leaf doors, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall. Mounting location for such signage shall be so that a person may approach within 3 inches of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door. Signs on doors or other surfaces shall not be installed until finishes on such surfaces have been installed. Signs installed on glass surfaces shall be installed with matching blank back-up plates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3.1 Anchorage

Anchorage shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions. Anchorage not otherwise specified or shown shall include slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine carriage bolts for steel; lag bolts and screws for wood. Exposed anchor and fastener materials shall be compatible with metal to which applied and shall have matching color and finish. Where recommended by signage manufacturer, foam tape pads may be used for anchorage. Foam tape pads shall be minimum 1/16 inch thick closed cell vinyl foam with adhesive backing. Adhesive shall be transparent, long aging, high tech formulation on two sides of the vinyl foam. Adhesive surfaces shall be protected with a 5 mil green flatstock treated with silicone. Foam pads shall be sized for the signage as per signage manufacturer's recommendations. Signs mounted to painted gypsum board surfaces shall be removable for painting maintenance. Signs mounted to lay-in ceiling grids shall be mounted with clip connections to ceiling tees.

3.3.2 Protection and Cleaning

The work shall be protected against damage during construction. Hardware and electrical equipment shall be adjusted for proper operation. Glass, frames, and other sign surfaces shall be cleaned at completion of sign installation in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions.




SECTION 10 21 13

TOILET COMPARTMENTS01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AA DAF-45 (2003) Designation System for Aluminum Finishes



ASTM A 167 (1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A 385 (2005) Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)


ICC A117.1 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities


CID A-A-60003 (Basic) Partitions, Toilet, Complete




36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

1.2 SUBMITTALS




submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Drawings; GFabrication Drawings

Drawings showing plans, elevations, details of construction, hardware, reinforcing, fittings, mountings, and anchorings for metal partitions and urinal screens. Installation drawings as specified.

SD-03 Product Data

Toilet Partition System; GCleaning and Maintenance InstructionsColors And FinishesPartition Panels and DoorsAnchoring Devices and FastenersHardware and FittingsBracketsDoor Hardware

Manufacturer's technical data and catalog cuts including installation and cleaning instructions.



Environmental Data

Toilet Enclosures; (LEED)Room Entrance Screens; (LEED)Urinal Screens; (LEED)

Documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product.

SD-07 Certificates

Certification

Documentation of product quality, as specified.






Toilet Enclosures; (LEED)

Room Entrance Screens; (LEED)

Urinal Screens; (LEED)

LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide.


Provide a complete and usable toilet partition system, including toilet enclosures, room entrance screens, urinal screens, system of panels, hardware, and support components. Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS and Affirmative Procurement guidelines. Furnish the partition system from a single manufacturer, with a standard product as shown in the most recent catalog data. Submit Fabrication Drawings for metal toilet partitions and urinal screens consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the factory. Submit manufacturer's Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions with Fabrication Drawings for review.


Conform to ICC A117.1 code for access for the handicapped operation of toilet compartment door and hardware.


Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unopened packages with the brand, item identification, and project reference clearly marked. Store Components in a dry location that is adequately ventilated; free from dust, water, other contaminants, and damage during delivery, storage, and construction.




1.7 WARRANTY

Provide Certification or warranties that metal toilet partitions will be free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation and will remain so for a period of not less than 5 years after completion.


Take field measurements prior to the preparation of drawing and fabrication to ensure proper fits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project



products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceeds 5 percent of the total value of that product.


2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Anchoring Devices and Fasteners

Provide steel anchoring devices and fasteners hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, in conformance with ASTM A 385 and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Conceal all galvanized anchoring devices.

2.2.2 Brackets

Wall brackets must be two-ear panel brackets, T-style, 1-inch stock. Provide stirrup style panel-to-pilaster brackets.

2.2.3 Hardware and Fittings

2.2.3.1 General Requirements

Hardware for the toilet partition system must conform to CID A-A-60003 for the specified type and style of partitions. Provide hardware finish highly resistant to alkalies, urine, and other common toilet room acids. Comply latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments with 36 CFR 1191; devices and hinges must be stainless steel door latches that operate without either tight grasping or twisting of the wrist of the operator.

a. Corrosion-resistant steel must conform to ASTM A 167, Type 304.

2.2.3.2 Finishes

a. Corrosion-resistant steel must have a No. 4 finish.

b. Exposed fasteners must match the hardware and fittings.

2.2.4 Door Hardware

2.2.4.1 Hinges

Hinges must be self-lubricating with the indicated swing. Hinges must have the following type of return movement:

Gravity return movement or

Spring-action cam return movement or

Torsion-rod return movement



Hinge must be adjustable to hold in-swinging doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees and outswinging doors to 10 degrees.

2.2.4.2 Latch and Pull

Latch and pull must be a combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper equipped with emergency access.

2.2.4.3 Coat Hooks

Coat hooks must be combination units with hooks and rubber tipped pins.

2.3 PARTITION PANELS AND DOORS

Partition Panels and doors must be not less than 1 inch thick with face sheets not less than 0.0396 inch thick.

2.3.1 Toilet Enclosures

Conform toilet enclosures to CID A-A-60003, Type I, Style A, floor supported and overhead braced. Furnish width, length, and height of toilet enclosures as shown. Provide a width of 1 inch. Panels indicated to receive toilet paper holders or grab bars must be reinforced for mounting of the items required. Provide grab bars to withstand a bending stress, shear stress, shear force, and a tensile force induced by 250 lbf. Grab bars must not rotate within their fittings.

2.3.2 Room Entrance Screens

Conform room entrance screens to CID A-A-60003, Type II, Style A, floor anchored and overhead braced. Finish surface of screens must be solid polyethylene, Finish 5. Furnish length and height of screens as shown. Provide thickness of 1 inch. Fabricate screens from the same types of panels, pilasters, and fittings as the toilet partitions.

2.3.3 Urinal Screens

Conform urinal screens to CID A-A-60003, Type III, Style A, floor supported . Provide finish for surface of screens as solid polyethylene, Finish 5. Provide thickness of 1 inch. Secure wall hung urinal screens with 42 inch long, continuous flanges. Screens must be fabricated from the same types of panels and pilasters as the toilet partitions. Fittings and fasteners must be corrosion-resistant steel.

2.4 OVERHEAD-BRACED PARTITIONS

Pilasters must be not less than 1-1/4 inch thick with face sheets not less than 0.0393 inch thick. Provide anchoring device at the bottom of the pilaster consistingof a channel-shaped floor stirrup fabricated from not less than 0.0635 inch thick material and a leveling bolt. Stirrup must be secured to the pilaster with not less than a 3/16 inch bolt and nut after the pilaster is leveled. Stirrup must be secured to the floor with not less than two lead expansion shields and sheetmetal screws. Overhead brace must be fabricated from a continuous extruded aluminum tube not less than 1 inchwide by 1-1/2 inch high, 0.125-inch wall thickness. Finish must be AA-C22A31 in accordance with AA DAF-45. Set and secure brace into the top of each pilaster. Trim piece at the floor must be 3 inch high and fabricated from not less than 0.030 inch thick corrosion-resistant steel.



2.5 PILASTER SHOES

Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal floor-mounted anchorage. Pilaster shoes shall be stainless steel . Height shall be 3 inches.

2.6 HARDWARE

Hardware for the toilet partition system shall conform to CID A-A-60003 for the specified type and style of partitions. Hardware shall be pre-drilled by manufacturer. Hardware finish shall be highly resistant to alkalies, urine, and other common toilet room acids. Hardware shall include: pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings; black anodized aluminum door latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; and cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper. Latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments shall comply with 36 CFR 1191 and shall be stainless steel door latches that operate without either tight grasping or twisting of the wrist of the operator. Screws and bolts shall be stainless steel, tamper proof type. Wall mounting brackets shall be continuous, full height, stainless steel , in accordance with toilet compartment manufacturer's instructions. Floor-mounted anchorage shall consist of corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor.

2.7 COLORS AND FINISHES

2.7.1 Colors

Color charts for color of finishes for toilet partition system components shall be as indicated on the drawings.

2.7.2 Finish No. 5

Provide solid plastic fabricated of polymer resins (polyethylene) formed under high pressure rendering a single component section not less than one inch thick. Colors must extend throughout the panel thickness. Provide exposed finish surfaces: smooth, waterproof, non-absorbant, and resistant to staining and marking with pens, pencils, or other writing devices. Solid plastic partitions must not show any sign of deterioration when immersed in the following chemicals and maintained at a temperature of 80 degrees F for a minimum of 30 days:

Acetic Acid (80 percent) Hydrochloric Acid (40 percent)Acetone Hydrogen Peroxide (30 percent)Ammonia (liquid) Isopropyl AlcoholAmmonia Phosphate Lactic Acid (25 percent)Bleach (12 percent) Lime SulfurBorax NicotineBrine Potassium BromideCaustic Soda SoapsChlorine Water Sodium BicarbonateCitric Acid Trisodium PhosphateCopper Chloride Urea; UrineCore Oils Vinegar



PART 3 EXECUTION







3.3 PREPARATION

Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive work. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. Verify correct location of built in framing, anchorage, and bracing. Report in writing to Contracting Officer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the work of this section. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.4 INSTALLATION

Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level, with the panels centered between the fixtures. Provide a panel clearance of not more than 1/2 inch and secure the panels to walls and pilasters with not less than two wall brackets attached near the top and bottom of the panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall bolts occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure Panels to pilasters with brackets matching the wall brackets. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. Install adjacent components for consistency of line and plane. Equip each door with hinges, one door latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors.

a . Secure panels to ceramic tile on hollow concrete-masonry walls with toggle bolts using not less than 1/4-20 screws of the length required for the wall thickness. Toggle bolts must have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per anchor.

b. Secure panels to solid masonry or concrete with lead or brass



expansion shields designed for use with not less than 1/4-20 screws, with a shield length of not less than 1-1/2 inch. Expansion shields must have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per anchor.

c. Submit Installation Drawings for metal toilet partitions and urinal screens showing plans, elevations, details of construction, hardware, reinforcing and blocking, fittings, mountings and escutcheons. Indicate on drawingsthe type of partition, location, mounting height, cutouts, and reinforcement required for toilet-room accessories.

3.5 OVERHEAD-BRACED PARTITIONS

Secure pilasters to the floor with the anchorage device specified. Make all leveling devices readily accessible for leveling, plumbing, and tightening the installation. Overhead brace must be secured to the pilaster face with not less than two fasteners per face. Expansion shields must have a minimum 2-inch penetration into the concrete slab. Tops of doors must be parallel with the overhead brace when doors are in a closed position.

3.6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT

After completion of the installation, make final adjustments to the pilaster-leveling devices, door hardware, and other working parts of the partition assembly. Doors shall have a uniform vertical edge clearance of approximately 3/16 inch and shall rest open at approximately 30 degrees when unlatched.

3.7 CLEANING

Baked enamel finish shall be touched up with the same color of paint that was used for the finish. Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the work, in an approved manner compliant with the manufacturer's recommended cleaning and protection from damage procedures until accepted. Remove all equipment, tools, surplus materials, and work debris from the site.




SECTION 10 22 13

WIRE MESH PARTITIONS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES






1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Wire mesh partitions

Show layout, details, materials, dimensions, finishes, and all information necessary for fabrication and installation.

SD-03 Product Data

Wire mesh partitions

Submit for each type of partition, door, and window.








Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging with labels intact and legible. Deliver, store, and handle materials so as to prevent damage. Replace damaged or defective materials with new.

1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Wire mesh partitions shall be all wire type , heavy duty for extra heavy industrial use, and shall be provided complete with fasteners, capping bars, adjustable floor sockets, bracing, doors, hardware, and other items necessary for a complete, useable, and rigid installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Manufacturer's Location for Regionally Manufactured Materials LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured project products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius

2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars

ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.2.2 Cold-Formed Steel

AISI SG03-3.

2.2.3 Wire Mesh

Carbon steel wire, woven diamond mesh, intermediate crimped.

2.2.4 Floor Sockets

Cast or forged steel or ductile iron, adjustable, approximately 2 1/2 inches high.

2.3 HEAVY DUTY PARTITIONS

2.3.1 Wire Mesh

6 gage wire, 2 inch mesh.



2.3.2 Panel Frames

1 1/4 by 1 1/4 by 1/8 inch steel channels.

2.3.3 Posts

Structural steel tubes, 2" by 2" by 1/8 inch.

2.3.4 Hinged Doors

Frames shall be 1 1/2 by 3/4 by 1/8 inch channels with 1 1/2 by 1/8 inch flat bar cover on top and bottom rails and on hinge stile and a 1 5/8 by 7/8 by 1/8 inch angle riveted to the lock stile. Provide 1 1/2 pairs of heavyweight, wrought steel, non-removable pin, butt hinges riveted or welded to the door and the door opening frame for each door.

2.4 DOOR OPENING FRAMES

Provide frames the same size and shape as the vertical frames for the mesh panels.

2.5 LOCKS

Provide each door with a combination cypher lock as specified in Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware on the outside and a recessed lever handle on the inside.

2.6 FABRICATION

2.6.1 Standard Panels

Wire shall be woven into rectangular mesh, intermediate crimped, and securely clinched to frames. Joints shall be mortised and tenoned. Wire shall be continuous. Panel vertical frames shall have 3/8 inch bolt holes 18 inches o.c. for heavy duty partitions.

2.6.2 Doors

Construction shall be similar to that specified for panels. Wire mesh shall be the same as that used in the adjacent partition panels.

2.6.3 Finish

Thoroughly clean ferrous metal, treat with phosphate, and paint with black enamel in the shop.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Wire Mesh Partitions

Install plumb, level, and true to line, within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet or the height or run of the partition, if less than 10 feet. Anchor floor sockets to the floor with expansion bolts. Vertical frames and posts shall be bolted together with 3/8 inch bolts 18 inches o.c. for heavy duty partitions. Secure top frames to a continuous capping bar with 1/4 inch diameter U bolts not more than 28 inches o.c.

3.3.2 Doors

Install in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. Adjust as required so that doors and hardware operate freely and properly.

3.3.3 Bracing

Brace free standing partitions more than 20 feet in length, at intervals not greater than 20 feet with a steel channel brace connected to the capping bar and anchored to the building wall or framing member or as indicated.

3.3.4 Touch-Up

Clean and paint scratches, abrasions, and other damage to shop painted surfaces to match the shop-applied finish.




SECTION 10 28 13

TOILET ACCESSORIES07/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM C 1036 (2006) Standard Specification for Flat Glass

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

FinishesAccessory Items

Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts indicating materials of construction, fasteners proposed for use for each type of wall construction, mounting instructions, operation instructions, and cleaning instructions.

SD-04 Samples

FinishesAccessory Items

One sample of each accessory proposed for use. Incorporate approved samples into the finished work, provided they are identified and their locations noted.

SD-07 Certificates

Accessory Items

Certificate for each type of accessory specified, attesting that the items meet the specified requirements.


a. Recycled Content LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content,



and post-industrial recycled content.



Wrap toilet accessories for shipment and storage, then deliver to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and store in a clean, dry area protected from construction damage and vandalism.

1.4 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1 year period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

Provide toilet accessories shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. Provide each accessory item shall be complete with the necessary mounting plates of sturdy construction with corrosion resistant surface.

2.2.1 Anchors and Fasteners

Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a restraining force commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted and suited for use with the supporting construction. Provide tamperproof design exposed fasteners with finish to match the accessory.

2.2.2 Finishes

Except where noted otherwise, provide the following finishes on metal:

Metal Finish _____ ______

Stainless steel No. 4 satin finish



2.3 ACCESSORY ITEMS

Conform to the requirements for accessory items specified below.

2.3.1 Grab Bar (GB)

Provide an 18 gauge, 1-1/4 inch grab bar OD Type 304 stainless steel. Provide form and length for grab bar as indicated. Provide concealed mounting flange. Provide grab with peened non-slip surface. Furnish installed bars capable of withstanding a 500 pound vertical load without coming loose from the fastenings and without obvious permanent deformation. Allow 1-1/2 inch space between wall and grab bar.

2.3.2 Mirrors, Glass (MG)

Provide Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear glass for mirrors. Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Coat glass on one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating, and mirror backing paint. Provide highly adhesive pure silver coating of a thickness which provides reflectivity of 83 percent or more of incident light when viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass, free of pinholes or other defects. Provide copper protective coating with pure bright reflective copper, homogeneous without sludge, pinholes or other defects, of proper thickness to prevent "adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Provide mirror backing paint with two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant paint and baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver and copper coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.

2.3.3 Mirror With Shelf (MS)

Mirror shall be surface mounted with a 5-3/4 inch deep shelf at the base of the mirror. Mirror frame and shelf shall be satin stainless steel. Shelf shall be 22 gauge stainless steel by the width of the mirror. Shelf edges shall be returned on the front and sides with the front edge hemmed. Provide mirror with concealed wall bracjets. Conform to paragraph glass mirrors.

2.3.4 Mirror, Tilt (MT)

Provide surface mounted tilt mirror with full visibility for persons in a wheelchair. Furnish fixed tilt mirror, extending at least 4 inch from the wall at the top and tapering to 1 inch at the bottom. Provide size in accordance with the drawings . Conform to ASTM C 1036 and paragraph Glass Mirrors.

2.3.5 Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD)

Provide paper towel dispenser constructed of a minimum 0.03 inch Type 304 stainless steel, surface mounted. Furnish tumbler key lock locking mechanism.

2.3.6 Sanitary Napkin Disposer (SND)

Construct a Type 304 stainless steel sanitary napkin disposal with removable leak-proof receptacle for disposable liners. Provide fifty disposable liners of the type standard with the manufacturer. Retain receptacle in cabinet by tumbler lock. Provide disposer with a door for inserting disposed napkins, surface mounted.



2.3.7 Soap Dispenser (SD)

Provide soap dispenser surface mounted, liquid type consisting of a vertical Type 304 stainless steel tank with holding capacity of 40 fluid ounces with a corrosion-resistant all-purpose valve that dispenses liquid soaps, lotions, detergents and antiseptic soaps.

2.3.8 Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD)

Furnish Type II - surface mounted toilet tissue holder with two rolls of standard tissue stacked vertically. Provide stainless steel, satin finish cabinet.

2.3.9 Waste Receptacle (WR)

Provide Type 304 stainless steel waste receptacle, designed for surface mounting. Provide reuseable liner, of the type standard with the receptacle manufacturer. Provide receptacles with push doors and doors for access to the waste compartment with continuous hinges.

2.3.10 Mop Rack (MR)

Combination unit with 18 gage (.050 inch) Type 304, stainless steel shelf with 1/2 inch returns, 16 gage (.062 inch) support brackets for wall mounting; provide 16 gage stainless steel hooks for wiping rags on front of shelf, together with spring-loaded rubber cam-type mop/broom holders; 1/4 inch diameter stainless steel drying rod suspended beneath shelf. Provide unit 36 inches long and complete with 4 mop/broom holders and 3 hooks. Provide one in each janitor's closet, and where indicated on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 INSTALLATION

Provide the same finish for the surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation as the attached accessory. Provide oval exposed screw heads. Install accessories at the location and height indicated. Protect exposed surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other means until the installation is accepted. After acceptance of accessories, remove and dispose of strippable plastic protection. Coordinate accessory manufacturer's mounting details with other trades as their work progresses. After installation, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition or replace with new work.

3.3.1 Recessed Accessories

Fasten accessories with wood screws to studs, blocking or rough frame in wood construction. Set anchors in mortar in masonry construction. Fasten to metal studs or framing with sheet metal screws in metal construction.

3.3.2 Surface Mounted Accessories

Mount on concealed backplates, unless specified otherwise. Conceal fasteners on accessories without backplates. Install accessories with sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined braided jute, teflon or neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shields, or with toggle bolts or other approved fasteners as required by the construction. Install backplates in the same manner, or provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required by the construction. Fasten accessories mounted on gypsum board and plaster walls without solid backing into the metal or wood studs or to solid wood blocking secured between wood studs, or to metal backplates secured to metal studs.

3.4 CLEANING

Clean material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do mot use alkaline or abrasive agents. Take precautions to avoid scratching or marring exposed surfaces.




SECTION 10 44 16

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS06/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



IFC 1414 (2004) Portable Fire Extinguishers(Where Required)(Construction, Alteration, Demolition)

IFC 906 (2004) Portable Fire Extinguishers


NFPA 1 (2006) Uniform Fire Code, 2006 Edition

NFPA 10 (2006; Errata 2006) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers



29 CFR 1910.157 (2003) Portable Fire Extinguishers


UL 299 (2002; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standards for Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Submit Manufacturer's catalog and warranty data for the following items:

Fire ExtinguishersAccessoriesWall Brackets



SD-07 Certificates

Submit Certificates showing the following:

Certification that Fire Extinguishers comply with local codes and regulations.

Certification that Fire Extinguishers comply with OSHA, NFPA, and UL requirements.

Submit Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag on each extinguisher.

Guarantee that Fire Extinguishers are free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation and that they will remain so for a period of not less than 5 years after completion.


Protect materials from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage, and construction.

Deliver materials in their original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the brand name and the name and type of the material.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TYPES

Fire Extinguishers must conform to NFPA 10 Quantity and placement must comply with the applicable sections of IFC 1414, IFC 906, NFPA 1, NFPA 101, and 29 CFR 1910.157.

Provide dry chemical type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 299.

Submit Manufacturer's Data for each type of Fire Extinguisher required, detailing all related Cabinet, Wall Mounting and Accessories information, complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag.

2.2 MATERIAL

Extinguisher shell must be enameled steel .

2.3 SIZE

Extinguishers must be 10 pounds.



2.4 ACCESSORIES

Safety release

Pressure gage

2.5 WALL BRACKETS

Provide spring-clip fire extinguisher wall brackets.

Wall bracket and Accessories must be as approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install Fire Extinguishers where indicated on the drawings. Verify exact locations prior to installation.

Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations.

Provide extinguishers which are fully charged and ready for operation upon installation. Provide extinguishers complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag attached.


3.2.1 Repairing

Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with new work at no additional cost to the Government.

Provide Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part, replacement cost, and name, address and contact for replacement parts distributor.

3.2.2 Cleaning

Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as a result of the work. Remove from the site all construction equipment, tools, surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work.




SECTION 10 99 00

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES08/02

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data

Deal Tray/Exchange Window

Complete descriptive literature for each type of each of the following items. Clearly mark data to indicate which type, size, model, or item is to be provided. Data shall show conformance to specified requirements.





Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers or packaging with labels intact and legible. Deliver, store, and handle so to prevent damage. Defective products and damaged products shall be replaced with new.

PART 2 PRODUCTS






2.2 MATERIALS

2.2.1 Deal Tray/Exchange Window

Through wall tray counter designated for secure passage of documents and paper information from one side of a wall to the other.

a. Material and Window Frame: Satin stainless steel.b. Size: As indicated on drawings.c. Tray: 12 inches wide by 2 inches deep.d. Mounting: Through wall per manufacturer's recommendations..e. Speaker: 4 inch diameter talk-thru voice transmitter, stainless

steel to match.f. Glazing: Hold galzing with rubber spacers and seal per

manufacturer's. Provide clear laminate glazing.

2.3 FABRICATION

Miscellaneous specialties shall be standard products, subject to requirements specified, of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of the item, and shall be free from damage and from defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 3 EXECUTION


a. Recycled Content LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating material's recycled content percentages of post-consumer recycled content, and post-industrial recycled content for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.

b. Regional Materials LEED: Document cut sheets and invoices indicating location of final manufacturer's origin for all products and materials from within a 500 mile radius for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.



Provide invoices, plant slips, certification indicating total quantities of waste material, and amounts diverted by way of means as stated above for LEED submittal requirements, see Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.

3.3 INSPECTION

See that construction is properly complete and ready for installation of each specialty item.

3.4 ANCHORAGE

Provide anchors and fasteners as required to secure items in place as recommended by the manufacturer. Use inserts, expansion shields, toggle bolts, machine bolts, or lag bolts and adhesives as required for the particular conditions.



3.5 INSTALLATION

Install items in sizes and locations indicated. Install miscellaneous specialties true to line, level, and plumb, as applicable, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Fasten items securely in place, adjust, and leave in proper operating order.




SECTION 12 21 00

WINDOW BLINDS07/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.


NFPA 701 (2004) Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SD-03 Product Data

Window Blinds

Manufacturer's data composed of catalog cuts, brochures, product information, and maintenance instructions.


Window Blinds


Window Blinds


Provide window treatment, conforming to NFPA 701, complete with necessary brackets, fittings, and hardware. Each window treatment type must be a complete unit provided in accordance with paragraph WINDOW TREATMENT PLACEMENT SCHEDULE. Mount and operate equipment as per manufacturer's instructions. Windows to receive a treatment must be completely covered.



b. Regional Materials LEED: Provide cut sheets and invoices indicating



location of final manufacturer's origin for all products and materials from within 500 mile radius.


Deliver components to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original packaging with the brand or company name, item identification, and project reference clearly marked. Store components in a dry location that is adequately ventilated and free from dust, water, or other contaminants and has easy access for inspection and handling. Store materials flat in a clean dry area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Do not open containers until needed for installation unless verification inspection is required.


Become familiar with details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.

1.6 WARRANTY

Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1 year period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




2.2 WINDOW BLINDS

Provide each blind, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets and fastenings, as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer. All parts must be one color, unless otherwise indicated, to match the color of the blind slat. Treat steel features for corrosion resistance.

2.2.1 Horizontal Blinds

Provide horizontal blinds with 1 inch slats Blind units must be capable of nominally 180 degree partial tilting operation and full-height raising. Blinds must be inside mount. Tapes for Type II slats must be braided polyester or nylon.

2.2.1.1 Head Channel and Slats

Provide head channel made of steel or aluminum with corrosion-resistant



finish nominal 0.024 inch for Type II. Provide slats of aluminum, not less than 0.006 inch thick, and of sufficient strength to prevent sag or bow in the finished blind. Provide a sufficient amount of slats to assure proper control, uniform spacing, and adequate overlap. Enclose all hardware in the headrail.

2.2.1.2 Controls

The slats must be tilted by a transparent tilting wand, hung vertically by its own weight, and must swivel for easy operation. The tilter control must be of enclosed construction. Provide moving parts and mechanical drive made of compatible materials which do not require lubrication during normal expected life. The tilter must tilt the slats to any desired angle and hold them at that angle so that any vibration or movement of ladders and slats will not drive the tilter and change the angle of slats. Include a mechanism to prevent over tightening. Provide a wand of sufficient length to reach to within 5 feet of the floor.

2.2.1.3 Intermediate Brackets

Provide intermediate brackets for installation, as recommended by the manufacturer, of blinds over 48 inch wide.

2.2.1.4 Bottom Rail

Provide bottom rail made of steel, corrosion-resistant, with baked-on polyester paint, color coordinated with slats, and formed with a double-lock seam into a closed oval shape for optimum strength. Provide end caps to match the rail in color.

2.2.1.5 Braided Ladders

Provide braided ladders of 100 percent polyester yarn of a color to match the slat color. Space ladders a maximum of and a minimum 15.2 slats per foot of drop in order to provide a uniform overlap of the slats in a closed position.

2.3 COLOR

Provide color, pattern and texture, off white. Color listed is not intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Horizontal Blinds

Perform installation in accordance with the approved detail drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units level, plumb, secure, and at proper height and location relative to window units. Furnish and install supplementary or miscellaneous items in total, including clips, brackets, or anchorages incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation. Do not start installation until completion of room painting and finishing operations.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

Upon completion of the installation, free window treatments from soiling, damage or blemishes; and adjust them for form and appearance and proper operating condition. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the Contracting Officer. Isolate metal parts from direct contact with concrete, mortar, or dissimilar metals. Ensure blinds installed in recessed pockets can be removable without disturbing the pocket. The entire blind, when retracted, must be contained behind the pocket. Include all hardware, brackets, anchors, fasteners, and accessories necessary for a complete, finished installation.




SECTION 13 34 19

PREENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AA 30 (1986) Aluminum Structures, Construction Manual Series Section 1




AISC FCD (1995a) Quality Certification Program Description

AISC S329 (1985) Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts






ASTM A 1011/A 1011M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability


ASTM A 500 (2003a) Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes



ASTM A 529/A 529M (2005) Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality

ASTM A 570/A 570M (1998) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled

ASTM A 572/A 572M (2007) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel

ASTM A 588/A 588M (2005) Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

ASTM A 606 (2004) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance



ASTM B 308/B 308M (2002) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles

ASTM C 518 (2004) Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

ASTM C 553 (2002) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications

ASTM D 2224 (1978; R 1983) Standard Test Method for Mean Molecular Weight of Mineral Insulating Oils by the Cryoscopic Method






CRANE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION OF AMERICA (CMAA)

CMAA 70 (2004) EnviroTop Running and Bridge and Gantry Type Multiple Girder Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes, No. 70

METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)

MBMA MBSM (2002) Metal Building Systems Manual


UL 580 (2006) Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies



1.2.1.1 Design Analysis

The design analysis shall be the design of a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of North Carolina experienced in design of this work and shall include complete calculations for the building, its components, and the foundations. Foundations shown on the drawings are based on loads derived from a representative set of similar building types. The Contractor shall obtain the services of a licensed Professional Engineer to verify that the foundations shown are adequate for the building supplied using the criteria in paragraph Foundations. Formulas and references shall be identified. Assumptions and conclusions shall be explained, and cross-referencing shall be clear. Wind forces on various parts of the structure, both positive and negative pressure, shall be calculated with the controlling pressure summarized. Lateral forces due to seismic loading shall be calculated and tabulated for the various parts and portions of the building. Computer programmed designs shall be accompanied by stress values and a letter of certification, signed by a licensed Professional Engineer, stating the design criteria and procedures used and attesting to the adequacy and accuracy of the design. A narrative of the computer program delineating the basic methodology shall be included. Computer program output shall be annotated and supplemented with sketches to verify the input and output. Critical load conditions used in the final sizing of the members shall be emphasized. The design analysis shall include the name and office phone number of the designer, who shall function as a point of contact to answer questions during the detail drawing review.

1.2.1.2 Dimensions

Building dimensions shall be as standard with manufacturer, not less than those indicated, but exceeding the indicated dimensions only by the amount of the closest standard size thereto. Eave height shall be measured from the top of finished floor to intersection of insides of roof and sidewall sheets. The clear height between finished floor and bottom of roof steel shall be as indicated.

1.2.1.3 Framing

Provide building with vertical walls and gable roof. Building shall be single-span structures with one of the following framing systems: self-framing or rigid frame type, similar to AISC 360, Type I



construction. End walls shall be of beam and column design. Roof slope shall be a minimum of 1 to 12. Roof slope greater than that indicated may be furnished if the required materials are provided and appropriate drawings are submitted and approved. Design framed openings structurally.

1.2.1.4 Foundation Requirements

Design foundations for allowable soil bearing pressure and a minimum bottom of footing depth as indicated. Use a factor of safety of 1.5 for overturning, sliding and uplift, and a concrete compressive strength as specified in Section 03 30 00.00 20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. The foundation loads are supplied by the building manufacturer.


MBMA MBSM, for loading combinations and definitions with the exceptions of wind load and special collateral loads. Design for each material shall be as specified by the Design Authority as listed in MBMA MBSM.

1.2.2.1 Dead Loads

The dead load shall consist of the weight of all permanent construction such as roof, framing, covering members and all other materials of the building system.

1.2.2.2 Roof Live Loads

a. Uniform Loads: Uniform roof live loads, including maintenance traffic and construction loads, shall be determined and applied in accordance with ASCE 7.

b. Concentrated Loads: In addition to ASCE 7 roof live loads, a minimum design concentrated load of 300 pounds shall be used to simulate a construction load on roof panels. The concentrated load shall be applied at the panel midspan and shall be resisted by a single standing seam metal roof panel, or a 24 inches wide corrugated metal panel, assumed to be acting as a beam. The undeformed shape of the panel shall be used to determine the section properties.

1.2.2.3 Roof Snow Loads

The design roof snow loads, including effects of drifting, shall be determined and applied in accordance with ASCE 7.

1.2.2.4 Wind Loads

Compute and apply wind pressures, ASCE 7. Basic wind speed and multiplying factors are as indicated.

1.2.2.5 Impact Loads

Impact loads due to monorails shall be applied as indicated in MBMA MBSM .

1.2.2.6 Collateral Loads

Collateral loads shall be applied to the entire structure to account for the weight of additional permanent materials other than the building



system, such as sprinklers, mechanical systems, electrical systems, hung partitions, and ceilings. This allowance does not include the weight of hung equipment weighing 50 pounds or more. Equipment loads of 50 pounds or more shall be shown on the shop (detail) drawings and the structure (frame, purlins, girts) shall be strengthened as required. The Contractor is responsible for providing the building manufacturer the magnitude and approximate location of all concentrated loads greater than 50 pounds before design of the building commences.

1.2.2.7 Deflection

a. Structural Members: The maximum deflection of main framing members shall not exceed 1/240th of their respective spans. The maximum deflection due to live load in roof panels and purlins shall not exceed 1/180th of their respective spans.

b. Roof Panels: UL 580, Class 90. The design analysis shall establish that the roof when deflected under dead plus live or snow loads, will not result in a negative gradient. Maximum deflections shall be based on sheets continuous across two or more supports with sheets unfastened and fully free to deflect. In addition, the roof decking shall be designed for a 200-pound concentrated load at midspan on a 12 inch wide section of deck. Panels thinner than 0.03 inches are not permitted for diaphragms used to resist seismic loads in Seismic Zones 2 through 4.

c. Wall Panels: The maximum deflection due to wind on wall panels and girts shall be limited to 1/120th of their respective spans except that when interior finishes are used the maximum allowable deflection shall be limited to 1/180th of their respective spans.

d. Openings: Limit deflections of steel framing above and along the side of rolling door openings to a maximum of 1/2 the allowable movement in the telescoping top roller of the doors to ensure proper operation. Frame all equipment openings over 12 by 12 inches.

1.2.2.8 Provisions for Louvers

Louvers shall be as indicated.

1.2.2.9 Drift Provisions

Lateral deflections, or drift, at the roof level of a structure in relation to the floor or slab on grade, caused by deflection of horizontal force resisting elements, shall conform to MBMA MBSM .

1.2.2.10 Cranes

The crane loads shall be obtained from the crane manufacturer and shall be applied per MBMA MBSM for the design of the crane runways and supports. The cranes, girders, rails, end trucks, stops, and bumpers shall be provided by the crane manufacturer as specified in Section 41 22 03.16 20 MONORAILS WITH AIR MOTOR POWERED HOIST

1.3 SUBMITTALS




approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Preengineered Building

Template for anchorage

Submit as necessary to erect the building and install components.

SD-03 Product Data

Preengineered metal building materials

Submit sufficient data indicating conformance to specified requirements on materials provided under this section.

Instruction Manuals

Erection

Qualifications

SD-04 Samples

Factory color finish

Accessories

Fasteners

Insulation

Gaskets and Insulating Compounds

Sealant

Wall Liners

SD-05 Design Data

Building

Foundation loads

anchor bolts

Purlins and girts

Bracing

SD-06 Test Reports

Factory Color Finish

Insulation



SD-07 Certificates

Preengineered metal building materials

Submit certificates attesting that materials comply with this specification.


Preengineered Building, data package 1



1.4.1 Qualifications

Qualifications of the manufacturer, the manufacturer's Representative when one is used, and qualifications and experience of the building erector. A brief list of locations where buildings of similar design have been used shall be included with the detail drawings and shall also include information regarding date of completion, name and address of owner, and how the structure is used.

1.4.1.1 Manufacturer

The manufacturer shall have AISC FCD, category MB certification.

1.4.1.2 Installer

Erector shall have specialized experience in the erection of metal building systems for a period of at least 3 years.

1.4.2 Regulatory Requirements

1.4.2.1 Drawings: Preengineered Building

Submit complete design drawings for the preengineered building. Submit drawings for the foundations and anchorage.

1.4.2.2 Design Data Building

Submit design calculations for the entire preengineered building and foundations, prepared and stamped by a professional engineer in the State of North Carolina. Also submit for components requested, and stamp with the seal of a professional engineer. Include sizes and location of anchor bolts.

1.4.3 Coordination Meeting

A coordination meeting shall be held within 45 days after contract award for mutual understanding of the metal building system contract requirements. This meeting shall take place at the building site and shall include representatives from the Contractor, the roofing/metal building system manufacturer, the roofing/metal building supplier, the erector, the designer, and the Contracting Officer. All items required by paragraph SUBMITTALS shall be discussed, including applicable standard manufacturer



shop drawings, and the approval process. The Contractor shall coordinate time and arrangements for the meeting.

1.4.4 Instructions

1.4.4.1 Instruction Manuals

Manufacturer's literature for individual building component systems.

1.4.4.2 Erection

Manufacturer's erection instruction and erection drawings describing the preparation requirements, assembly sequence, temporary bracing, shoring, and related information necessary for erection of the metal building including its structural framework and components.

1.4.5 Samples

1.4.5.1 Factory color Finish

Submit one sample of each color indicated for verification that the color matches the colors indicated. Where colors are not indicated, submit not less than four different samples of manufacturer's standard colors for selection by the Contracting Officer.

1.4.5.2 Roofing and Siding

One piece of each type and finish (exterior and interior) to be used, 9 inches long, full width. The sample for factory color finished covering shall be accompanied by certified laboratory test reports showing that the sheets to be furnished are produced under a continuing quality control program and that a representative sample consisting of not less than 5 pieces has been tested and has met the quality standards specified for factory color finish.





Deliver, store, and handle manufactured items so that materials remain dry and undamaged. Do not store in contact with materials that might cause staining.

1.6 WARRANTIES

1.6.1 Warranty

The Metal Building System, composed of framing and structural members, roofing and siding, accessories, fasteners, and trim shall be warranted as



described below against material and workmanship deficiencies, system deterioration caused by exposure to the elements and service design loads, leaks and wind uplift damage. Any emergency temporary repairs conducted by the owner shall not negate the warranties.

1.6.2 Prime Contractor's Weathertightness Warranty

The Metal Building System shall be warranted by the Contractor on a no penal sum basis for a period of five years against materials and workmanship deficiencies; system deterioration caused by exposure to the elements and/or inadequate resistance to specified service design loads, water leaks, and wind uplift damage. The Metal Building System covered under this warranty shall include but is not limited to the following: framing and structural members, roofing and siding panels and seams, accessories, fasteners, trim, flashings and miscellaneous building closure items, connectors, components, and fasteners, and other system components and assemblies installed to provide a weathertight system; and items specified in other sections of these specifications that become part of the metal building system. All material and workmanship deficiencies, system deterioration caused by exposure to the elements and/or inadequate resistance to specified service design loads, water leaks and wind uplift damage shall be repaired as approved by the Contracting Officer. See the attached Contractor's written warranty for issue resolution of warrantable defects. This warranty shall warrant and cover the entire cost of repair or replacement, including all material, labor, and related markups. The Contractor shall supplement this warranty with written warranties from the installer and/or system manufacturer, which shall be submitted along with Contractor's warranty. However, the Contractor is ultimately responsible for this warranty. The Contractor's written warranty shall be as outlined in attached WARRANTY FOR METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS, and start upon final acceptance of the facility. The Contractor shall provide a separate bond in an amount equal to the installed total metal building system cost in favor of the owner (Government) covering the Contractor's warranty responsibilities effective throughout the five year Contractor's warranty period for the entire metal building system as outlined above.

1.6.3 Manufacturer's Material and/or System Weathertightness Warranties

The Contractor shall furnish, in writing, the following manufacturer's material warranties to the Contracting Officer which cover all Metal Building System components:

a. A manufacturer's 20 year material warranty warranting that the specified aluminum or zinc-coated steel, will not rupture, structurally fail, fracture, deteriorate, or become perforated under normal design atmospheric conditions and service design loads. Liability under this warranty shall be limited exclusively to the cost of either repairing or replacing nonconforming, ruptured, perforated, or structurally failed securement system including fasteners and coil material.

b. A manufacturer's 20 year exterior material finish warranty on the factory colored finish warranting that the finish, under normal atmospheric conditions at the site, will not crack, peel, or delaminate; chalk in excess of a numerical rating of eight, as determined by ASTM D 4214 test procedures; or change colors in excess of five CIE or Hunter Lab color difference (delta E) units in accordance with ASTM D 2224. Liability under this warranty is exclusively limited to replacing the defective coated material.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL AND ROOF MATERIALS

MBMA MBSM except as specified otherwise herein. Design roof and wall panels, accessories, and flashings to be completely weathertight and free of abrasions, loose fasteners, and deformations. Each piece or part of the assembly shall be clearly and legibly marked to correspond with the drawings.

2.1.1 Minimum Thickness

As required to conform to design requirements but not less than the following:

Items Minimum Thickness (Uncoated)

Steel Structural Members 18 Manufacturer's Standard (MFG STD) Other Than Roof and gage, 0.0478 inch Wall Panels

Girders and Columns 3/16 inch

Purlins and Girts 14 Manufacturer's Standard gage (MFG STD)

Bracing 3/16 inch thick steel members

Column Base Plates 5/8 inch thick

Column Anchor Bolts 5/8 inch diameter

Gable and Eave Trim, Fascia Closure Strips, Rake Flashings, Copings, and Liner Panels Steel 24 MFG STD gage Aluminum 0.032 inch Plastic 0.045 inch

2.1.2 Panels

a. Wall panels shall be as specified in Section 07 42 13, "METAL WALL PANELS".

b. For standing seam roofs, Section 07 41 63 FABRICATED ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES.

.

2.1.3 Wall Liners

Wall liners shall be 0.024 inch thick minimum for aluminum or 0.018 inch thick minimum for steel with the same composition specified for panels or siding, and formed or patterned to prevent waviness and distortion, and shall extend from floor to a height of not less than 8 feet above the



floor. Matching metal trim shall be provided at top of wall liner, around openings in walls and over interior and exterior corners. Wall liners shall have the same factory color finish as specified for the exterior face of the wall panels.

2.2 FRAMING AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

2.2.1 Steel

ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 529/A 529M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 588/A 588M.

2.2.2 Aluminum

ASTM B 221 or ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2.2.3 Uncoated Steel

ASTM A 570/A 570M, ASTM A 606, or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.2.4 Galvanized Steel

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G 90 coating designation, 0.045 inch minimum thickness.

2.2.5 Structural Tube

ASTM A 500 or ASTM B 221.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

2.3.1 Caps, Strips, and Plates

Form ridge caps, eave and edge strips, fascia strips, miscellaneous flashings, and miscellaneous sheet metal accessories from the same material and gage as the roof panels. Wall plates, base angles or base channels, and other miscellaneous framing members may be standard structural steel shapes, or may be formed from steel not lighter than 18 gage thick.

2.3.2 Closure Strips

Provide closure strips of closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or neoprene, or polyvinyl chloride premolded to match configuration of the covering. Closure strips shall not absorb or retain water.

2.3.3 Sealant

Provide elastomeric type sealant containing no oil or asphalt. Exposed sealant shall cure to a rubberlike consistency. Concealed sealant may be the nonhardening type.

2.3.4 Gaskets and Insulating Compounds

Provide nonabsorptive gaskets and insulating compounds suitable for insulating contact points of incompatible materials. Insulating compounds shall be nonrunning after drying.

2.3.5 Fasteners

Fasteners for structural connections shall provide both tensile and shear strength of not less than 750 pounds per fastener. Fasteners for



accessories shall be the manufacturer's standard. Exposed roof fasteners shall be gasketed or have gasketed washers on the exterior side of the covering to waterproof the fastener penetration. Washer material shall be compatible with the covering; have a minimum diameter of 3/8 inch for structural connections; and gasketed portion of fasteners or washers shall be neoprene or other equally durable elastomeric material approximately 1/8 inch thick. When wall covering is factory color finished, exposed wall fasteners shall be color finished to match the covering. Nonpenetrating fastener system using concealed clips shall be manufacturer's standard for the system provided.

2.3.5.1 Screws

Provide self-tapping screws not less than No. 14 diameter and not less than No. 12 diameter if self-drilling/self-tapping type.

2.3.5.2 End-Welded Studs

Provide automatic shouldered type studs with a shank diameter of not less than 3/16 inch and cap or nut for holding covering against the shoulder.

2.3.5.3 Explosive Actuated Fasteners

Fasteners for use with explosive actuated tools shall have a shank diameter of not less than 0.145 inch with a shank length of not less than 1/2 inch for fastening panels to steel and not less than one inch for fastening panels to concrete.

2.3.5.4 Blind Rivets

Provide aluminum rivets with 3/16 inch nominal diameter shank or stainless steel rivets with 1/8 inch nominal diameter shank. Rivets shall be threaded stem type if used for other than the fastening of trim. Provide hollow stem rivets with closed ends.

2.3.5.5 Bolts

Provide bolts not less than 1/4 inch diameter, shouldered or plain shank as required, with proper nuts.

2.3.6 Louvers

As specified in Section 08 91 00, WALL LOUVERS.

2.3.7 Insulation

Thermal resistance of insulation shall be not less than the R-values shown on the contract drawings. R-values shall be determined at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F in accordance with ASTM C 518. Insulation shall be a standard product with the insulation manufacturer, factory marked or identified with insulation manufacturer's name or trademark and R-value. Identification shall be on individual pieces or individual packages. Blanket insulation shall have a facing as specified in paragraph VAPOR RETARDER. Roof and wall insulation , including facings, shall have a flame spread not in excess of 25 and a smoke developed rating not in excess of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. The stated R-value of the insulation shall be certified by an independent Registered Professional Engineer if tests are conducted in the insulation manufacturer's laboratory.



2.3.7.1 Blanket Insulation

Blanket insulation shall conform to ASTM C 553 0.6 pound fiber-glass as standard with the metal building manufacturer having a factory-applied vapor retarder on one side and a permeance rating of 0.05 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.

a. Provide insulation containing 20 percent or greater recovered material which has been diverted from solid waste, but not including material reused in a manufacturing process. Where two materials have the same price and performance, provide the one containing the higher recovered material content.


2.3.8.1 Vapor Retarders as Integral Facing

Insulation facing shall have a permeability of 0.02 perm or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. Facing shall be white reinforced polypropylene kraft laminate (PSK). Facings and finishes shall be factory applied.

2.3.9 Sealant

Sealant shall be as specified in Section 07 97 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

2.3.10 Gaskets and Insulating Compounds

Gaskets and insulating compounds shall be nonabsorptive and suitable for insulating contact points of incompatible materials. Insulating compounds shall be nonrunning after drying.

2.4 FINISH

2.4.1 Shop Painting

Ferrous metal work, except factory-finished work, zinc-coated work, aluminum-coated work, and work specified to be painted herein, shall be (1) cleaned of dirt, rust, scale, loose particles, grease, oil, and other deleterious substances; (2) phosphate treated; and (3) then be given one coat of an approved rust-inhibiting primer paint of the type standard with the metal building manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION









3.3 INSPECTION

Check concrete dimensions, anchor bolt size and placement, and slab elevation with the metal building manufacturer's templates and drawings before setting any steel.

3.4 ERECTION

Erect in accordance with the manufacturer's approved erection instructions and diagrams. Correct defects and errors in the fabrication of building components in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer. If defects or errors in fabrication of components cannot be corrected, remove and provide nondefective components. When installing wall and roof systems, install closure strips, flashing, sealing material, and other accessories in accordance with building manufacturer's instructions to provide a weathertight system, free of abrasions, loose fasteners, and deformations. After erection is complete, repair and coat abraded and damaged, primed or factory-finished surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.


Prevent direct contact between aluminum surfaces, and ferrous or other incompatible metals, by one of the following methods:

a. Paint the incompatible metal with a coating of manufacturer's standard heavy-bodied paint.

b. Paint the incompatible metal with a prime coat of corrosion inhibitive primer followed by one or two coats of aluminum metal-and-masonry paint, or other suitable protective coating, excluding products containing lead and chromium pigmentation.

c. Provide an approved nonabsorptive gasket.

d. Apply an approved calking between the aluminum and the incompatible metal.

If drainage from incompatible metal passes over aluminum, paint the incompatible metal by method (a) or (b). Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or masonry materials by method (a). Paint green or wet wood, or wood treated with incompatible wood preservatives, by method (a) or use two coats of aluminum paint.

3.4.2 Rigid Frames, Bases, and Sill Members

Brace frames as necessary to ensure safety. Set accurately, using a



nonshrink grout to obtain uniform bearing on the concrete and to maintain a level base line elevation. Separate leveling plates under column base plates shall not be used. Members shall be accurately spaced to assure proper fitting of panels. As erection progresses, the work shall be securely fastened to resist the dead load and wind and erection stresses. Supports for electric overhead traveling cranes shall be positioned and aligned in accordance with CMAA 70. Clean surfaces to receive the mortar and thoroughly moisten immediately before placement of mortar. Water cure exposed surfaces of mortar with wet burlap for 7 days.

3.4.2.1 Field Welding

Steel, AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Aluminum, AA 30.

3.4.2.2 Field Bolting

AISC S329. Improper or mislocated bolt holes in structural members or other misfits caused by improper fabrication or erection, shall be repaired in accordance with AISC 303. Concrete work is specified in Section 03 30 00.00 20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Anchor bolts shall be accurately set by template while the concrete is in a plastic state.

3.4.3 Wall Construction

Apply panels full wall heights from base to eave with no horizontal joints except at the junctions of door frames, window frames, louver panels, and similar locations. Lay side laps away from the prevailing winds. Seal side and end laps with the joint sealing material recommended by the manufacturer. Flash or seal walls at the base, at the top, around windows, door frames, framed louvers, and other similar openings. Flashing will not be required where approved "self-flashing" panels are used. Minimum end laps for all types of panels shall be 2 1/2 inches. Minimum side laps for all types of panels shall be one corrugation, one configuration, or an interlocking joint. Install liner panels to height indicated .

3.4.4 Roof Construction

Apply the roofing panels in full lengths from ridge to eaves with no transverse joints except at the junction of ventilators, curbs, and similar openings. Flash and seal the roof at the ridge, at eaves and rakes, at projections through the roof, and elsewhere as necessary.

3.4.5 Louvers and Ventilators

Louvers and ventilators shall be rigidly attached to the supporting construction to assure a weather tight installation.

3.4.6 Doors and Windows

Doors and windows, including frames and hardware, shall be securely anchored to the supporting construction, shall be installed plumb and true, and shall be adjusted as necessary to provide proper operation. Joints at doors and windows shall be sealed according to manufacturer's recommendations to provide weathertight construction.

3.4.7 Minimum Fastener Spacing

Space fasteners according to manufacturer's instructions, but not to exceed:



a. 8 inches o.c. at end laps of covering,

b. 12 inches o.c. at connection of covering to intermediate supports,

3.4.8 Installation of Insulation

3.4.8.1 Roof Insulation

Install over purlins before roof coverings are applied. Hold insulation rigid until secured in place. Insulation facing shall be exposed on the interior side of the building. Fold and staple facing tabs of insulation on 6 inch centers, from exterior side of building to completely seal joints. If folding and stapling can only be accomplished from the inside, push the tabs neatly up between the edges of adjoining blankets.

3.4.8.2 Wall Insulation

Install over girts before wall coverings are applied. Hold insulation rigid until secured in place. Expose facing toward the interior side of the building. Fold and staple facing tabs of insulation on 6 inch centers, from exterior side of building, to completely seal joints. If folding and stapling can only be accomplished from the inside, push the tabs neatly up between the edges of adjoining blankets.

3.4.9 Integral Facing on Blanket Insulation

Integral facing on blanket insulation shall have the facing lapped and sealed with a compatible tape to provide a vapor tight membrane.

3.4.10 Wall Liner

Wall liner shall be securely fastened into place in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and in a manner to present a neat appearance.

3.5 FIELD PAINTING

Immediately upon detection, abraded or corroded spots on shop-painted surfaces shall be wire brushed and touched up with the same color and material used for the shop coat. Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS, for painting of shop-primed ferrous surfaces exposed on the outside of the building and all shop-primed surfaces of doors and windows.


At the discretion of the Contracting Officer, sample panels may be taken at random from each delivery or from stockpiles on the site at any time during the construction period, and tests may be made to check the conformance of the materials to the requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Factory Color Finish." Failure of the sample sheets to pass the required tests shall be cause for rejection of all sheets represented by the samples and replacement of the entire shipment.

3.7 SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS



CONTRACTOR'S FIVE (5) YEAR NO PENAL SUM WARRANTYFOR

PREENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS

FACILITY DESCRIPTION:_________________________________________________________________

BUILDING NUMBER:______________________________________________________________________

CORPS OF ENGINEERS CONTRACT NUMBER:______________________________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR

CONTRACTOR:__________________________________________________________________ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________

POINT OF CONTACT:_____________________________________________________________________

TELEPHONE NUMBER:______________________________________________________________________

OWNER

OWNER:_______________________________________________________________________

ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________

POINT OF CONTACT:_____________________________________________________________________


CONSTRUCTION AGENT

CONSTRUCTION AGENT:_______________________________________________________________________ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________

POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________________




ONTRACTOR'S FIVE (5) YEAR NO PENAL SUM WARRANTYFOR

PREENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS(continued)

THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM INSTALLED ON THE ABOVE NAMED BUILDING IS WARRANTED BY FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5) YEARS AGAINST WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL DEFICIENCIES, WIND DAMAGE AND STRUCTURAL FAILURE WITHIN PROJECT SPECIFIED DESIGN LOADS, AND LEAKAGE. THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL INCLUDE, BUT SHALL NOT BE LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: FRAMING AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS AND SEAMS, INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS, ACCESSORIES, TRIM, FLASHINGS AND MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING CLOSURE ITEMS SUCH AS DOORS AND WINDOWS (WHEN FURNISHED BY THE MANUFACTURER), CONNECTORS, COMPONENTS, AND FASTENERS, AND OTHER SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLIES INSTALLED TO PROVIDE A WEATHERTIGHT SYSTEM; AND ITEMS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS THAT BECOME PART OF THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM. ALL MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP DEFICIENCIES, SYSTEM DETERIORATION CAUSED BY EXPOSURE TO THE ELEMENTS AND/OR INADEQUATE RESISTANCE TO SPECIFIED SERVICE DESIGN LOADS, WATER LEAKS AND WIND UPLIFT DAMAGE SHALL BE REPAIRED AS APPROVED BY THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

ALL MATERIAL DEFICIENCIES, WIND DAMAGE, STRUCTURAL FAILURE AND LEAKAGE ASSOCIATED WITH THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE REPAIRED AS APPROVED BY THE CONTRACTING OFFICER. THIS WARRANTY SHALL COVER THE ENTIRE COST OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, INCLUDING ALL MATERIAL, LABOR, AND RELATED MARKUPS. THE ABOVE REFERENCED WARRANTY COMMENCED ON THE DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE ON AND WILL REMAIN IN EFFECT FOR STATED DURATION FROM THIS DATE.

SIGNED, DATED, AND NOTARIZED (BY COMPANY PRESIDENT)_____________________________________________________________________________

(Company President) (Date)




PREENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS(continued)

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLEMENT THIS WARRANTY WITH WRITTEN WARRANTIES FROM THE MANUFACTURER AND/OR INSTALLER OF THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM, WHICH SHALL BE SUBMITTED ALONG WITH THE CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY. HOWEVER, THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE ULTIMATELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS WARRANTY AS OUTLINED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS AND AS INDICATED IN THIS WARRANTY.

EXCLUSIONS FROM COVERAGE

1. NATURAL DISASTERS, ACTS OF GOD (LIGHTNING, FIRE, EXPLOSIONS, SUSTAINED WIND FORCES IN EXCESS OF THE DESIGN CRITERIA, EARTHQUAKES, AND HAIL).

2. ACTS OF NEGLIGENCE OR ABUSE OR MISUSE BY GOVERNMENT OR OTHER PERSONNEL, INCLUDING ACCIDENTS, VANDALISM, CIVIL DISOBEDIENCE, WAR, OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY FALLING OBJECTS.

3. DAMAGE BY STRUCTURAL FAILURE, SETTLEMENT, MOVEMENT, DISTORTION, WARPAGE, OR DISPLACEMENT OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURE OR ALTERATIONS MADE TO THE BUILDING.

4. CORROSION CAUSED BY EXPOSURE TO CORROSIVE CHEMICALS, ASH OR FUMES GENERATED OR RELEASED INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE BUILDING FROM CHEMICAL PLANTS, FOUNDRIES, PLATING WORKS, KILNS, FERTILIZER FACTORIES, PAPER PLANTS, AND THE LIKE.

5. FAILURE OF ANY PART OF THE BUILDING SYSTEM DUE TO ACTIONS BY THE OWNER WHICH INHIBIT FREE DRAINAGE FROM THE ROOF, AND GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS; OR CONDITIONS WHICH CREATE PONDING WATER ON THE ROOF OR AGAINST THE BUILDING SIDING.

6. THIS WARRANTY APPLIES TO THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM. IT DOES NOT INCLUDE ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE TO THE BUILDING INTERIOR OR CONTENTS WHICH IS COVERED BY THE WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION CLAUSE INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT.

7. THIS WARRANTY CANNOT BE TRANSFERRED TO ANOTHER OWNER WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE CONTRACTOR AND THIS WARRANTY AND THE CONTRACT PROVISIONS WILL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER ANY CONFLICTS WITH STATE STATUTES. REPORTS OF LEAKS AND BUILDING SYSTEM DEFICIENCIES SHALL BE RESPONDED TO WITHIN 48 HOURS OF RECEIPT OF NOTICE BY TELEPHONE OR IN WRITING FROM EITHER THE OWNER, OR CONTRACTING OFFICER. EMERGENCY REPAIRS, TO PREVENT FURTHER ROOF LEAKS, SHALL BE INITIATED IMMEDIATELY; A WRITTEN PLAN SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THIS SSSR SYSTEM WITHIN SEVEN CALENDAR DAYS. ACTUAL WORK FOR PERMANENT REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENT SHALL BE STARTED WITHIN 30 DAYS AFTER RECEIPT OF NOTICE, AND COMPLETED WITHIN A REASONABLE TIME FRAME. IF THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO ADEQUATELY RESPOND TO THE WARRANTY PROVISIONS, AS STATED




PREENGINEERED METAL BUILDINGS(Exclusions from Coverage Continued)

IN THE CONTRACT AND AS CONTAINED HEREIN, THE CONTRACTING OFFICER MAY HAVE THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM REPLACED OR REPAIRED BY OTHERS AND CHARGE THE COST TO THE CONTRACTOR. IN THE EVENT THE CONTRACTOR DISPUTES THE EXISTENCE OF A WARRANTABLE DEFECT, THE CONTRACTOR MAY CHALLENGE THE OWNER'S DEMAND FOR REPAIRS AND/OR REPLACEMENT DIRECTED BY THE OWNER OR CONTRACTING OFFICER EITHER BY REQUESTING A CONTRACTING OFFICER'S DECISION, UNDER THE CONTRACT DISPUTES ACT, OR BY REQUESTING THAT AN ARBITRATOR RESOLVE THE ISSUE. THE REQUEST FOR AN ARBITRATOR MUST BE MADE WITHIN 48 HOURS OF BEING NOTIFIED OF THE DISPUTED DEFECTS. UPON BEING INVOKED THE PARTIES SHALL, WITHIN 10 DAYS JOINTLY REQUEST A LIST OF FIVE (5) ARBITRATORS FROM THE FEDERAL MEDIATION AND CONCILIATION SERVICE. THE PARTIES SHALL CONFER WITHIN 10 DAYS AFTER RECEIPT OF THE LIST TO SEEK AGREEMENT ON AN ARBITRATOR. IF THE PARTIES CANNOT AGREE ON AN ARBITRATOR, THE CONTRACTING OFFICER AND THE PRESIDENT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S COMPANY WILL STRIKE ONE (1) NAME FROM THE LIST ALTERNATIVELY UNTIL ONE NAME REMAINS. THE REMAINING PERSON SHALL BE THE DULY SELECTED ARBITRATOR. THE COSTS OF THE ARBITRATION, INCLUDING THE ARBITRATOR'S FEE AND EXPENSES, COURT REPORTER, COURTROOM OR SITE SELECTED ETC., SHALL BE BORNE EQUALLY BETWEEN THE PARTIES. EITHER PARTY DESIRING A COPY OF THE TRANSCRIPT SHALL PAY FOR THE TRANSCRIPT. A HEARING WILL BE HELD AS SOON AS THE PARTIES CAN MUTUALLY AGREE. A WRITTEN ARBITRATOR'S DECISION WILL BE REQUESTED NOT LATER THAN 30 DAYS FOLLOWING THE HEARING. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITRATOR WILL NOT BE BINDING; HOWEVER, IT WILL BE ADMISSIBLE IN ANY SUBSEQUENT APPEAL UNDER THE CONTRACT DISPUTES ACT. A FRAMED COPY OF THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE POSTED IN THE MECHANICAL ROOM OR OTHER APPROVED LOCATION DURING THE ENTIRE WARRANTY PERIOD.




SECTION 21 13 13.00 20

WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASTM D 709 (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting Materials

FM GLOBAL (FM)



NFPA 13 (2007) Installation of Sprinkler Systems

NFPA 1963 (2003) Standard for Fire Hose Connections

NFPA 24 (2006) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances


UL 262 (2004) Standard for Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service

UL 668 (2004) Hose Valves for Fire Protection Service

UL 789 (2004) Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service

UL Fire Prot Dir (2007) Fire Protection Equipment Directory


Design and provide an automatic wet pipe fire extinguishing sprinkler systems for complete fire protection coverage as indicated on the contract drawings. Provide wet-pipe for the areas indicated for the TOFT building. TOFT wet pipe sprinkler coverage areas include all areas that does not have a raised floor system. Areas where sensitive electronics will be present shall be protected with a pre-action system under a different specification. Contract drawings indicate areas that are to be protected by wet-pipe.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 1


Provide a new overhead wet-pipe sprinkler system for the hangar bay areas. The hangar overhead system will be fed via a new water line. The Hangar administrative areas are fed by existing risers to remain. The Hangar center shops areas to be fed by new risers fed from a new waterline to be located in the AFFF pump room. Modify the existing system as necessary in building 130 for coverage of the administrative areas. Administrative areas will require added and relocated heads to accommodate any new wall configurations and some occupancy changes. All piping entering the SCIF in building 130 in the center shops area will required dielectric fittings due to security requirements. Provide sprinkler column protection in the hangar bay areas per NFPA 15 for Hangar 130.

Refer to additional specification sections and archtectural drawings for phasing of Hangar 130 work.

The Ordnance OPS will be provided with a deluge system and dry-pipe system as indicated on the contract drawings and under different specifications.

1.3 SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN

Except as modified herein,design automatic wet pipe fire extinguishing sprinkler systems in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 13 , including all recommendations and advisory portions, which shall be considered mandatory; this includes advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standard(s), as though the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it appears. Design system by hydraulic calculations for uniform distribution of water over the design area. Hydraulic calculations shall assume a 12 psi pressure loss for the backflow preventer assembly. Backflow preventors will be required for the TOFT building and for Hangar 130. The Ordnance Building has a dedicated fire suppression water supply that will not be part of a potable water system. Locate sprinklers in a consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers. Provide sprinklers and piping system layout. All Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems.

1.3.1 Location of Sprinklers

Sprinklers in relation to the ceiling and the spacing of sprinklers shall not exceed that permitted by NFPA 13 for ordinary hazard occupancy 130 sq ft per sprinkler where applicable. Light hazard areas shall not exceed 225 sq ft per sprinkler. Other occupancies shall follow the requirements of NFPA 13.Uniformly space sprinklers on the branch piping. Sprinklers shall provide coverage throughout 100 percent of the building. Hanagar overhead sprinkler system shall be in strict in accordance with NFPA 409. This includes, but is not limited to, telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces.

1.3.2 Water Distribution

Distribution shall be uniform throughout the area in which the sprinklers will open. Discharge from individual sprinklers in hydraulically most remote area shall be between 100 percent and 120 percent of the specified density. Hangar bay overhead distribution shall be in accordance with NFPA 409 and as outlined in section 1.3.3. of this specification.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 2


1.3.3 Density of Application of Water

Size pipe to provide the specified density when the system is discharging the specified total maximum required flow. Application to horizontal surfaces below the sprinklers shall be as indicated on the contract drawings.Size pipe to provide the specified density when the system is discharging the specified total maximum required flow. Application to horizontal surfaces below the sprinklers shall be 0.10 gpm per sq ft for Light Hazard Occupancies, 0.15 gpm per sq ft for Ordinary Hazard Group 1 Occupancies, 0.20 gpm per sq ft for Ordinary Hazard Group 2 Occupancies and 0.30 gpm per sq ft for Extra Hazard Group 1 Occupancies.

Overhead Hangar Bay Requirements:

Uniform sprinkler discharge shall be based on a maximum variation of 15 percent between the sprinkler providing the lowest density and the sprinkler profviding the greatest density within an individual system in the high bay hangar space. In the high bay hangar, space the maximum projected floor area under an individual sprinkler system shall not exceed 20,000 square feet. The discharge design area shall be the hydraulically most remote 15,000 square feet with a density of 0.17 gpm per sq ft.

1.3.4 Sprinkler Discharge Area

Permissible decreases and required increases from NFPA 13 shall be applied to an initial hydraulically most remote area of 3000 sq ft for the TOFT building, and areas in the Hangar that are not part of the hangar bay coverage area. The overhead hanagar bay system shall be designed for the hydraulically most remote 15,000 square feet that incompases two draft curtain areas.

1.3.5 Outside Hose Allowances

Hydraulic calculations shall include a hose allowance of 250 gpm for outside hose stream for the TOFT facility, and 500 gpm for Hangar 130.

1.3.6 Water Supply

Base hydraulic calculations on the water supply data shown on the fire protection contract drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation, NAVFAC MIDATLANTIC Fire Protection in Norfolk, VA will review the submittal for the Government.

Partial submittals and submittals not fully complying with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification section shall be returned disapproved without review. This contract stipulation is non-negotiable.

The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES and be submitted to NAVFAC Fire Protection Mid-Atlantic for review:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 3


Shop Drawings; G

Prepare 24 by 36 inch detail working drawings of sprinklers and piping. Floor plans shall be drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0". Show data essential for proper installation of each system. Show details, plan view, elevations and sections of the systems supply and piping. Show piping schematic of systems supply, devices, valves, pipe and fittings. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. Submit drawings signed by a registered fire protection engineer. Provide four copies of the Sprinkler System Shop Drawings, no later than 21 days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation.

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe; G Fittings ; G Valves, including gate, check, and globe ; G Electric Bell ; G Sprinklers ; G Pipe hangars and supports ; G Sprinkler Alarm Switches; G Fire department connections ; G Mechanical couplings ; G Backflow Prevention Assembly ; G

Strainer; G

Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item. Catalog cuts shall also indicate UL Listing/FM Approval and country of manufacture.

SD-05 Design Data

Hydraulic Calculations; G

Submit computer program generated hydraulic calculations to substantiate compliance with hydraulic design requirements. Calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended specifically for fire protection system design. Calculations shall include isometric diagram indicating hydraulic nodes and pipe segments.Submit name of software program used.

SD-06 Test Reports

request to schedule Preliminary Tests; G

Preliminary Test Report; G

Three copies of the completed Preliminary Test Report, no later that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed by the Fire Protection Engineer.

request to schedule Final Acceptance Test; G

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 4


SD-07 Certificates

Sprinkler System Installer; G

Submit data showing the Sprinkler System Installer has successfully installed systems of the same type and design as specified herein, Data shall include names and locations of at least two installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for not less than 18 months. Provide NICET IV certification of the system technician. Contractor shall submit data along with submittal of the Fire Protection Engineer Qualifications.


Operating and Maintenance Instructions

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA as supplemented and modifies by this specification section.

Provide six manuals in accordance with NFPA 13. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and telephone number) for each item of equipment.


As-built drawings

As-built shop drawings, at no later than 14 days after completion of the Final Tests. The Sprinkler System Drawings shall be updated to reflect as-built conditions after all related work is completed. Provide electronic drawings in dwg or pdf format.

On-site training

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

1.5.1 Sprinkler System Installer

The Sprinkler System Installer shall be regularly engaged in the installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months. Installation drawings, shop drawings and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an system technician who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum Level IV certification in Automatic Sprinkler System program or by a fire protection engineer.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 5



1.6.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.

1.6.2 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.6.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.6.4 Field Fabricated Nameplates

ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.

1.7 ACCESSIBILITY

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.


All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall either be capped or plugged until installed.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 6


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

2.1.1 Pipe

Pipe shall comply with NFPA 24. Minimum pipe size shall be 6 inches. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall comply with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.

2.1.2 Gate Valve and Indicator Posts

Installation shall comply with NFPA 24. Gate valves for use with indicator post shall conform to UL 262. Indicator posts shall conform to UL 789. Provide each indicator post with one coat of primer and two coats of red enamel paint.

2.1.3 Valve Boxes

Except where indicator posts are provided, for each buried valve, provide cast-iron, ductile-iron, or plastic valve box of a suitable size. Plastic boxes shall be constructed of acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or inorganic fiber-reinforced black polyolefin. Provide cast-iron, ductile-iron, or plastic cover for valve box with the word "WATER" cast on the cover. The minimum box shaft diameter shall be 5.25 inches. Coat cast-iron and ductile-iron boxes with bituminous paint applied to a minimum dry-film thickness of 10 mils.

2.1.4 Buried Utility Warning and Identification Tape

Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded for the utility involved with warning and identification imprinted in bold block letters continuously and repeatedly over the entire tape length. Warning and identification shall read "CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW" or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material.

2.2 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

All components of the aboveground piping shall fully comply with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification section. Aboveground piping shall be steel . Any piping in the SCIF area in Hangar 130 must be decoupled (insert of nonmetallic coupling or conduit) when exiting the area.

2.2.1 Steel Pipe

Pipe shall beblack steel. Steel pipe shall be Schedule 40 for sizes less than 3 inches and Schedule 10 for sizes 3 inches or larger. Fittings into which sprinklers, sprinkler riser nipples, or drop nipples are threaded shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings that use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall not be permitted. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 1.5 inches and larger. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 7


Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 shall not be threaded. Side outlet tees using rubber gasketed fittings shall not be permitted.Sprinkler pipe and fittings shall be metal.

2.2.2 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings

Grooved couplings, fittings and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer.

2.2.3 Flexible Sprinkler Hose

The use of flexible sprinkler hose is not permissible.

2.2.4 Plastic Pipe and Fittings

Plastic piping shall not be permitted

2.2.5 Sprinklers

Provide nominal 0.50 inch or 0.53 inch orifice sprinklers. Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used. Sprinklers shall be used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Provide Recessed sprinklers for finished ceiling areas and Upright sprinklers for areas with exposed construction. Sprinklers shall have a brass finish for exposed areas and polished chrome finish for finished ceiling areas. Temperature classification shall be ordinary or intermediateas required by NFPA 13. Sprinklers in high heat areas including attic spaces or in close proximity to unit heaters shall have temperature classification in accordance with NFPA 13. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used. Deflector shall not be more than 3 inches below suspended ceilings. Ceiling plates shall not be more than 0.5 inch deep. Ceiling cups shall not be permitted.

2.2.6 Valves

Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Provide an OS&Y valve for all control valves. Butterfly valves are permitted for individual floor control. Check valves shall be clear opening swing-check type with inspection and access cover plate for sizes 8 inches and larger. Each control valve shall be electrically supervised; minimum contact ratings shall be 2.5 amps at 24 volts DC. Provide supervision against valve closure or tampering of valve.

2.2.7 Pipe Supports

Provide Pipe hangars and supports and Seismic Bracing in accordance with NFPA 13.

2.2.8 Electric Bell

Provide alarms of the approved weatherproof and guarded type, to sound locally on the flow of water in each corresponding sprinkler system. Mount alarms on the outside of the outer walls of each building at a location as directed by the base fire department.

2.2.9 Fire Department Connections

Fire department connection shall be flush type with cast brass body, matching wall escutcheon lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished brass finish. The connection shall have two inlets with individual self-closing

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 8


clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2-1/2 inch diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) per NFPA 1963.

2.2.10 Backflow Prevention Assembly

Provide listed reduced pressure principle valve assembly backflow preventer. Each check valve shall have a drain. Backflow prevention assemblies shall have current "Certificate of Approval from the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, FCCCHR List. Listing of the specific make, model, design, and size in the FCCCHR List shall be acceptable as the required documentation."

2.2.11 Strainer

Provide a UL listed basket strainer with a mesh opening size of 1/16". The strainer shall be required for the hangar water supply system that feeds the AFFF system. An addition strainer is required for the AFFF concentrate system that is detailed in a separate specification section.

2.3 ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES

2.3.1 Sprinkler Alarm Switches

Provide vane type flow switch(es) with circuit opener or closer for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the facility fire alarm system. Connection of switch shall be under Section 28 31 63.00 20 ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. Vane type Alarm actuating devices shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle.

2.3.2 Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch

Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of control valve to be supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one set of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing cover or closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

2.4.1 Sprinkler Cabinet

Provide metal cabinet with extra sprinklersand sprinkler wrench adjacent to each alarm valve. The number and types of extra sprinklers shall be as specified in NFPA 13.

2.4.2 Pipe Escutcheon

Provide split hinge metal plates for piping entering walls, floors, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

The methods of fabrication and installation of the underground piping shall fully comply with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13,

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 9


NFPA 24 and the contract drawings.

3.2 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

The methods of fabrication and installation of the aboveground piping shall fully comply with the requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification section.

3.2.1 Piping in Finished Areas

In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.

3.2.2 Pendent Sprinklers

Where sprinklers are installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop nipples shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of a uniform depth throughout the finished space. The outlet of the reducing coupling shall not extend more than 1 inch below the underside of the ceiling. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a minimum of 6 inches from ceiling grids.

3.2.3 Pipe Joints

Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Welded joints will be permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13 at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings, fittings and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using the method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. A representative of the grooved couplings and fittings manufacturer shall conduct at least one onsite inspection of the piping installation to ensure the method of installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommended practices.

3.2.4 Reducers

Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing fittings. Bushings are prohibited.

3.2.5 Pipe Penetrations

Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its respective wall or floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13. The space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 10


insulation. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors, pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but pliable mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.

3.2.6 Inspector's Test Connection

Provide test connections approximately 6 feet above the floor for each sprinkler system or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with an alarm device. Provide test connection piping to a drain location that can accept full flow where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without property damage. Discharge to floor drains, janitor sinks or similar fixtures shall not be permitted. Provide discharge orifice of same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice. The penetration of the exterior wall shall be no greater than 2 feet above finished grade.

3.2.7 Backflow Preventer Test Connection

Provide downstream of the backflow prevention assembly UL 668 hose valves with 2.5 inch National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain. Provide one valve for each 250 gpm of system demand or fraction thereof. Provide a permanent sign in accordance with paragraph entitled "Identification Signs" which reads, "Test Valve."

3.2.8 Drains

Main drain piping shall be provided to discharge at a safe point outside the building. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13.

3.2.9 Installation of Fire Department Connection

Connection shall be mounted as indicated on the contract drawings or as directed by the Base Fire Department. The piping between the connection and the check valve shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and arranged to drain to the outside.

3.2.10 Identification Signs

Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as required by NFPA 13. Valve identification signs shall be minimum 6 inches wide x 2 inches high with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.

3.3 ELECTRICAL WORK

Except as supplemented and modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with 28 31 63.00 20 ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.

3.4 PIPE PAINTING AND COLOR CODE MARKING

Paint and color code mark sprinkler piping system as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 11


3.5 PRELIMINARY TESTS

The system, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground piping and system components, shall be tested to assure that equipment and components function as intended. The underground and aboveground interior piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24.Submit request to schedule Preliminary Tests, no later than 21 days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Upon completion of specified tests, the Contractor shall submit for approval a Preliminary Test Report.

3.5.1 Underground Piping

3.5.1.1 Flushing

Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24.

3.5.1.2 Hydrostatic Testing

New underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 24.

3.5.2 Aboveground Piping

3.5.2.1 Hydrostatic Testing

Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with NFPA 13.

3.5.2.2 Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test

Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested at system flow demand, including all applicable hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete forward flow test, including 2.5 inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, calibrated pressure gauges, and pitot tube gauge. The Contractor shall provide all necessary supports to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. At the system demand flow, the pressure readings and pressure drop (friction) across the assembly shall be recorded. A metal placard shall be provided on the backflow prevention assembly that lists the pressure readings both upstream and downstream of the assembly, total pressure drop, and the system test flow rate determined during the preliminary testing. The pressure drop shall be compared to the manufacturer's data and the readings observed during the final inspections and tests.

3.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST

Final Acceptance Test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test Report has been approved. Submit request to schedule Final Acceptance Test, no later than 14 days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material & Test Certificates.

An experienced technician regularly employed by the system installer shall be present during the inspection. At this inspection, repeat any or all of the required tests as directed. Correct defects in work provided by the Contractor, and make additional tests until the systems comply with contract requirements. Furnish appliances, equipment, electricity, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. The

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 12


Government will furnish water for the tests. The MID-ATLANTIC Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests and approve systems before they are accepted.

3.7 ON-SITE TRAINING

Submit request to schedule the On-site Training, at least 14 days prior to the start of related training but prior to the final inspections and tests. The sprinkler contractor shall conduct a training course for operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 4 hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete and after the Final Acceptance Test. The On-Site Training shall cover all of the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.

<END/>

SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 13


SECTION 21 13 16.00 20

DRY-PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains

FM GLOBAL (FM)


MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-58 (2002) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture








FS A-A-2962 (Rev J) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Low VOC Content



UL 789 (2004) Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 1


Service



Design new automatic dry pipe fire extinguishing sprinkler systems for fire protection coverage in the Ordnance OPS building as indicated on the contract drawings. The building suppression protection consists of a deluge and dry-pipe system. The deluge system is specified in another specification section.

Water shall be furnished by the contractor for the water supply tanks. Water will be sent in via trucks to fill the water supply tanks and to refill any water used for testing. Refer to specification section for water supply tanks for additional tank information.

The open bay area (Room 1) of the Ordnance building shall be explosion proof.


Design automatic dry pipe fire extinguishing sprinkler systems in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 13, by pipe hydraulic calculations using the area/density method for uniform distribution of water over the design area for ordinaryhazard occupancy. Each system shall include materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside the building to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts, and other construction and equipment in accordance with detailed working drawings to be submitted for approval. Locate sprinkler heads in a consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers. Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved for use in dry pipe sprinkler systems. Design systems for earthquake protection.

1.3.1 Location of Sprinkler Heads

Spacing of sprinklers and position and orientation of sprinklers in relation to the ceiling, walls, and obstructions shall conform to NFPA 13 for ordinary hazard occupancy; except for discharge density greater than 0.20 gpm per sq ft the spacing of sprinkler heads shall not exceed that for extra hazard occupancy. Uniformly space sprinklers on the branch piping.


Distribution shall be uniform throughout the area in which the sprinkler heads will open. Discharge from individual sprinklers in the hydraulically most remote area shall be not less than 100 percent of the specified density.


Size pipe to provide the specified density when the system is discharging the specified total maximum required flow. Application to horizontal surfaces below the sprinklers shall be 0.15 gpm per sq ft.

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 2


1.3.4 Sprinkler Design Area

Area shall be the hydraulically most remote room.


Hydraulic calculations shall include an allowance of 500 gpm for outside hose streams.

1.3.6 Friction Losses

Calculate losses in piping in accordance with the Hazen-Williams formula with 'C' value of 100 for steel piping, 150 for copper tubing, and 140 for cement-lined ductile-iron piping. Velocity in the sprinkler piping shall be limited to a maximum of 20 ft/sec.

1.3.7 Water Supply

Base hydraulic calculations on two water supply tanks at 33,000 gallons each and a fire pump as indicated on the contract drawings. The sole source of water is from the water storage tanks. Include discharge from fire pump provided in Section 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS in the hydraulic calculations.

1.3.8 Detail Drawing

Prepare 24 by 36 inch detail working drawings of sprinkler heads and piping system layout in accordance with NFPA 13, "Working Drawings (Plans)." Show data essential for proper installation of each system. Show details, plan view, elevations, and sections of the systems supply and piping. Show piping schematic of systems supply, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. Show location and orientation of sprinkler heads in relation to obstructions.

1.3.9 Detail Drawings

After completion, but before final acceptance, submit complete set of as-built drawings of each system for record purposes. Submit 24 by 36 inch drawings on reproducible mylar film with title block similar to full size contract drawings. Furnish the as-built (record) working drawings in addition to as-built contract drawings required by Division 1, "General Requirements."

1.4 SUBMITTALS


The Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will review and approve all submittals in this section requiring Government approval.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Sprinkler heads and piping system layout; G

Electrical wiring diagrams; G

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 3


SD-03 Product Data

Piping; G

Valves, including gate, check, and globe; G

Sprinkler heads; G

Pipe hangers and supports; G

Low air pressure supervisory switch; G

Dry pipe valves; G

Air compressor; G

Mechanical couplings; G

Pressure Switch; G

Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item.

SD-05 Design Data

Sprinkler system design; G

Submit computer program generated hydraulic calculations to substantiate compliance with hydraulic design requirements. Calculations generated by computer program shall include the name, address, and telephone number of the software manufacturer.

SD-06 Test Reports

Preliminary tests on piping system; G

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications of installer; G


Dry pipe valves, Data Package 3; G

Air compressor, Data Package 3; G



As-built drawings of each system; G


1.5.1 Qualifications of Installer

Prior to installation, submit data showing that the Contractor has

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 4


successfully installed systems of the same type and design as specified herein, or that Contractor has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having such required experience. Data shall include names and locations of at least two installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for not less than 18 months.

Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum Level-IV certification in automatic sprinkler system program. Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections. Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings; bushings will not be permitted. Perform welding in the shop; field welding will not be permitted.

2.1.1 Sprinkler Piping

NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Steel piping shall be Schedule 10 for sizes 3 inches and larger. Steel piping under 3 inches shall be schedule 40. Fittings into which sprinkler heads, sprinkler head riser nipples, or drop nipples are threaded shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and fittings which use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied will not be permitted. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 1.5 inches and larger. Fittings shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved for use in dry pipe sprinkler systems. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 shall not be threaded. Steel piping shall be galvanized. Sprinkler pipe and fittings shall be metal.

2.1.2 Sprinkler Heads

Provide nominal 0.50 inch orifice quick response sprinkler heads. No o-rings will be permitted in sprinkler heads. Release element of each head shall be of the intermediate temperature rating or higher as suitable for the specific application. Provide polished stainless steel ceiling plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy ceiling plates, and chromium-plated pendent sprinklers below suspended ceilings. Provide corrosion-resistant sprinkler heads and sprinkler head guards as required by NFPA 13. Automatic sprinklers installed in the pendent position shall be of the dry-pendent type except that standard pendent sprinklers may be installed on return bends when both the sprinklers and the return bends are located in a heated area.

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 5


2.1.3 Cabinet

Provide metal cabinet with extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler head wrench adjacent to each dry pipe valve. The number and types of extra sprinkler heads shall be as specified in NFPA 13.

2.1.4 Dry Pipe Valves

Provide valve complete with accessories and appurtenances for the proper operation of the system.

2.1.5 Pressure Switch

Provide switch with circuit opener or closer for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the facility fire alarm system. Connection of switch shall be under Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM. Do not install a shutoff valve in the piping between the dry pipe valve and any pressure switch.

2.1.6 Low Air Pressure Supervisory Switch

Provide switch for each sprinkler system and connect to building fire alarm system to activate the system supervisory alarm when air pressure in system drops halfway from the normal pressure to the tripping point. Connection of switch shall be under Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM. Provide a bleeder valve in the air line ahead of the switch for testing operation of the switch. The valve shall be normally open. Closing the valve shall shut off the air supply to the switch and exhaust the pressure between the switch and valve.

2.1.7 Tank Mounted Air Compressor

Provide an approved, automatic type, electric motor-driven air compressor including pressure switch, air piping, and 10 gallon minimum capacity tank. Compressor shall have a minimum capacity capable of charging the complete sprinkler system to normal system air pressure within 30 minutes. Provide an approved automatic air maintenance device for each system.

2.1.8 Pipe Hangers and Supports

Provide in accordance with NFPA 13. Attach to steel joists with MSS SP-58, Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor.

2.1.9 Valves

NFPA 13. Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Provide an OS&Y valve beneath each dry pipe valve. Check valves shall be flanged clear opening swing-check type valves with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 4 inches and larger.

2.1.9.1 Backflow Preventers

A backflow preventor is not required for the Ordnance building since the

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 6


water supply is from a nonpotable source.

2.1.9.2 Valve Supervision

Provide supervision of each control valve against closure and tampering in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide switch with SPDT (Form C) dry contacts for the automatic transmittal of a supervisory signal over the facility fire alarm system; minimum switch contact rating shall be 2.5 amperes at 24 VDC. A supervisory signal shall be initiated during the first two revolutions of the hand wheel, or during the first 1/5th of travel distance of the valve stem, from the full open position. Connection of the switch shall be under Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM.


NFPA 13. Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each valve and alarm device. Permanently affix hydraulic design information sign to the riser of each system.


Provide test connections approximately 6 feet above the floor for each sprinkler system or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with an alarm device; locate at the hydraulically most remote part of each system. Provide test connection piping to a location where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without property damage. Provide discharge orifice of same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice. Provide a precast concrete splash block under each exterior discharge orifice.

2.1.12 Main Drains

Provide separate drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each building.The penetration of the exterior wall shall be no greater than 2.0 feetabove finished grade. Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13. Provide precast concrete splash blocks under each exterior drain discharge.


Provide 4inches siamese type connections approximately 3 feet above finish grade, of the approved two-way type with 2.5 inch National standard female hose threads with brass caps, chain, and identifying fire department connection escutcheon plate.

2.2 BURIED WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

2.2.1 Pipe and Fittings

Provide outside-coated, cement-mortar lined, ductile-iron pipe, and fittings conforming to NFPA 24 for piping under the building and outside of building walls. Anchor joints in accordance with NFPA 24. Provide concrete thrust block at the elbow where the pipe turns up toward the floor, and restrain the pipe riser with steel rods from the elbow to the flange above the floor. Minimum pipe size shall be 8 inches. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet at finish grade. Piping beyond 5 feet outside of building walls shall be provided under Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 7


2.2.2 Valves

Provide as required by NFPA 24. Gate valves shall conform to UL 262 and shall open by counterclockwise rotation.

2.2.3 Post Indicator Valves

Provide with operating nut located about 3 feet above finish grade. Gate valves for use with indicator post shall conform to UL 262. Indicator posts shall conform to UL 789. Provide each indicator post with one coat of primer and two coats of red enamel paint.

2.2.4 Valve Boxes

Except where indicator posts are provided, for each buried valve, provide cast-iron, ductile-iron, or plastic valve box of a suitable size. Plastic boxes shall be constructed of acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) or inorganic fiber-reinforced black polyolefin. Provide cast-iron, ductile-iron, or plastic cover for valve box with the word "WATER" cast on the cover. The minimum box shaft diameter shall be 5.25 inches. Coat cast-iron and ductile-iron boxes with bituminous paint applied to a minimum dry-film thickness of 10 mils.


Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded for the utility involved with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall read "CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW" or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material.

2.3 PIPE SLEEVES

Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, floors, and roofs. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, and roofs. Provide one inch minimum clearance between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors, seal both ends of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes with UL listed fill, void, or cavity material.

a. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: Provide hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron sleeves. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are grouted smooth.

b. Sleeves in Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet.

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 8


2.4 ESCUTCHEON PLATES


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping from plaster ceilings. Keep the interior and ends of new piping and existing piping affected by Contractor's operations thoroughly cleaned of water and foreign matter. Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, securely close open ends of piping to prevent entry of water and foreign matter. Inspect piping before placing into position. Provide Teflon pipe thread paste on male threads.


Provide electrical work associated with this section under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for control and fire alarm wiring. Provide fire alarm system under Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM. Provide control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to fire alarm systems, under this section in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing conduit may be used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. All devices in the main room (Room 1) of the Ordnance OPS building shall be explosion proof as indicated on the contract drawing outline area.

3.1.2 Disinfection

Disinfect the new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's operations up to the bottom flange of the dry pipe valve in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from the systems with contractor provided water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5 ppm, or the residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit results prior to the new water piping being place into service. Disinfection of systems supplied by nonpotable water is not required.

3.1.3 Buried Piping System

Bury tape with the printed side up at a depth of 12 inches below the top surface of earth or the top surface of the subgrade under pavements.

SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 9


3.1.4 Field Painting

Clean, prime, and paint new sprinkler system piping, valves, hangers, accessories, and miscellaneous metal work as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Clean surfaces prior to painting. Immediately after cleaning, prime metal surfaces with SSPC Paint 25 or SSPC Paint 25 metal primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Exercise care to avoid painting sprinkler heads and operating devices. Upon completion of painting, remove materials which were used to protect sprinkler heads and operating devices which have been inadvertantly painted and provide new clean sprinkler heads and operating devices of the proper type. Finish primed surfaces as follows:

3.1.4.1 Systems in Unfinished Areas

Paint piping with FS A-A-2962 gloss red enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.6 mils.


Perform test to determine compliance with the specified requirements in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Test, inspect, and approve piping before covering or concealing.

3.2.1 Preliminary Tests

Hydrostatically test each system at 50 psig above normal system static pressure or 200 psig, whichever is greater, for a 2-hour period with no leakage or reduction in pressure. Flush piping with potable water and air test each system in accordance with NFPA 13. Piping above suspended ceilings shall be tested, inspected, and approved before installation of ceilings. Test the alarms and other devices. Test the water flow alarms by flowing water through the inspector's test connection. Water shall be delivered to the system test connection in not more than 60 seconds, starting at the normal air pressure on the system and at the time of a fully opened inspection test connection. When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed and dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13.

3.2.2 Formal Tests and Inspections

Do not submit a request for formal test and inspection until the preliminary test and corrections are completed and approved. Submit a written request for formal inspection at least 21 days prior to inspection date. An experienced technician regularly employed by the system installer shall be present during the inspection. At this inspection, repeat any or all of the required tests as directed. Correct defects in work provided by the Contractor, and make additional tests until the systems comply with contract requirements. Furnish appliances, equipment, water, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. The Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests and approve systems before they are accepted.


SECTION 21 13 16.00 20 Page 10


SECTION 21 13 19.00 20

PREACTION AND DELUGE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




FM GLOBAL (FM)


FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)

FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies







NFPA 72 (2007) National Fire Alarm Code




FS A-A-2962 (Rev J) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Low VOC

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 1


Content





1.2 DEFINITIONS

1.2.1 Year 2000 compliant

Computer controlled facility components that accurately process date and time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations.


Design and provide new automatic preaction fire extinguishing sprinkler systems for complete fire protection coverage throughout areas indicated for the TOFT building. Provide a new deluge system for complete coverage for areas indicated on the contract drawings for the Ordnance OPS building. Room 1 (the open bay area) is an explosion proof room to be protected by the deluge system. The ordnance building will contain a deluge and dry-pipe system. Refer to the Dry-Pipe specifications for additional information. The Ordnance OPS building deluge system shall be design for an explosion proof area, as well as for seismic requirements per NFPA 13.

The TOFT building will be supplemented by a clean agent system in a separate specification section and also protected by a wet-pipe system for areas indicated on the contract drawings. Areas with raised floors shall be protected with clean agent and a preaction system. All other areas shall be protected with a wet-pipe sprinkler system.Coordiante preaction system with the fire alarm contractor. The preaction valve and preaction panel must be UL listed or FM approved to work together.


Design automatic deluge and preaction fire extinguishing sprinkler systems in accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 13 , except as modified herein, by hydraulic calculations using the area design method for uniform distribution of water over the design area. Each system shall include materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside the building to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and provide each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ducts, and other construction and equipment in accordance with detailed working drawings to be submitted for approval. Locate sprinkler heads in a consistent pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers. Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved for use in deluge and preaction sprinkler systems. Design systems for earthquake protection for the Ordnance OPS building.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 2


1.4.1 Location of Sprinkler Heads

Spacing of sprinklers and position and orientation of sprinklers in relation to the ceiling, walls, and obstructions shall conform to NFPA 13 for light and ordinaryhazard occupancy. Uniformly space sprinklers on the branch piping.


Distribution shall be uniform throughout the area in which the sprinkler heads will cover. Discharge from individual heads shall be not less than 100 percent of the specified density.


Size pipe to provide the specified density when the system is discharging the specified total maximum required flow. Application to horizontal surfaces below the sprinklers shall be 0.20 gpm per sq ft for the Ordnance deluge system and 0.10 for the TOFT preaction system.

1.4.4 Sprinkler Design Area

Area shall be the hydraulically most remote 3000 sq ft area as defined in NFPA 13 for the TOFT building. Area modifications for the use of quick repsonse sprinklers in wet-pipe systems is allowed. For the Ordnance OPS deluge systems, design area shall be the entire area protected by the system.


Hydraulic calculations shall include an allowance of 500 gpm for outside hose streams.


Calculate losses in piping in accordance with the Hazen-Williams formula with 'C' value of 120 deluge, 100 preaction for steel piping, 150 for copper tubing, and 140 for cement-lined ductile-iron piping. Velocity in sprinkler piping shall be limited to a maximum of 20 feet per second.

1.4.7 Water Supply

For the TOFT building base hydraulic calculations on water flow test data indicated on the contract drawings. Base hydraulic calculations on operation of fire pumps provided in Section 21 30 00 FIRE PUMPS for the Ornance OPS Building. The Ordnance OPS building will have a sole water supply from two 33,000 water supply tanks provided in this contract. Water shall be trucked in to supply the water tanks and any addtional water for testing.

1.4.8 Detail Drawing

Prepare 24 by 36 inch detail working drawings of sprinkler heads and piping system layout in accordance with NFPA 13, "Working Drawings (Plans)." Show data essential for proper installation of each system. Show details, plan view, elevations, and sections of the systems supply and piping. Show piping schematic of systems supply, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings. Show location and orientation of sprinkler heads in relation to obstructions. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 3


1.4.9 As-Built Drawings

After completion, but before final acceptance, submit complete set of as-built drawings of each system for record purposes. Submit 24 by 36 inch drawings on reproducible mylar film with title block similar to full size contract drawings. Furnish the as-built (record) working drawings in addition to as-built contract drawings required by Division 1, "General Requirements."

1.5 SUBMITTALS


The MID-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will review and approve all submittals in this section requiring Government approval.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Sprinkler heads and piping system layout; G

Electrical wiring diagrams; G

SD-03 Product Data

Piping; G

Deluge and Preaction valves; G


Electric Bell; G

Sprinkler heads; G


Pressure switch; G

Fire department connections; G

Air compressor; G

Detection devices; G

Storage batteries; G

Air maintenance device; G

Control panel; G

Battery charger; G

Mechanical couplings; G

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 4


Backflow Preventer; G

Manual Remote Release Stations; G

Alarms; G

Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item.

SD-05 Design Data

Sprinkler system design; G

Secondary Power Supply; G

Submit computer program generated hydraulic calculations to substantiate compliance with hydraulic design requirements. Submit the name of the software program used.

SD-06 Test Reports

Preliminary tests on piping system; G

SD-07 Certificates


Year 2000 (Y2K) Compliance Warranty; G


Deluge valves, Data Package 3; G

Preaction valves, Data Package 3; G

Air compressor, Data Package 3; G

Control panel, Data Package 3; G

Backflow preventer, Data Package 3; G



As-built drawings of each system; G



Prior to installation, submit data showing that Contractor has successfully installed systems of the same type and design as specified herein, or that Contractor has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having such required experience. Data shall include names and locations of at least two installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 5


manner intended for not less than 18 months.

Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum Level-IV certification in Automatic Sprinkler System program. Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.

1.7 WARRANTY

1.7.1 Year 2000 (Y2K) Compliance Warranty

For each product, component and system specified in this section as a "computer controlled facility component", provide a statement of Y2K compliance warranty for the specific equipment. The contractor warrants that each hardware, software, and firmware product delivered under this contract and listed below shall be able to accurately process date and time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations to the extent that other computer controlled component, used in combination with the computer controlled component being acquired, properly exchanges date and time data with it. If the contract requires that specific listed products must perform as a system in accordance with the foregoing warranty, then that warranty shall apply to those listed products as a system. The duration of this warranty and the remedies available to the Government for breach of this warranty shall be as defined in, and subject to, the terms and limitations of the contractor's standard commercial warranty or warranties contained in this contract, provided that, notwithstanding any provision to the contrary, in such commercial warranty or warranties, the remedies available to the Government under this warranty shall include repair or replacement of any listed product whose non-compliance is discovered and made known to the contractor in writing within one year (365 days) after acceptance. Nothing in this warranty shall be construed to limit any rights or remedies the Government may otherwise have under this contract, with respect to defects other than Year 2000 performance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Y2K COMPATIBILITY

Provide computer controlled facility components, specified in this section, that are Year 2000 compliant (Y2K). Computer controlled facility components refers to software driven technology and embedded microchip technology. This includes, but is not limited to, telecommunications switches, programmable thermostats, HVAC controllers, elevator controllers, utility monitoring and control systems, fire detection and suppression systems, alarms, security systems, traffic signals, and other facilities control systems utilizing microcomputer, minicomputer, or programmable logic controllers.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 6



Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections. Make changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings; bushings will not be permitted. Perform welding in the shop; field welding will not be permitted. Conceal piping in areas with suspended ceiling. The Ordnance OPS building shall be designed for seismic protection as defined in NFPA 13.

2.2.1 Sprinkler Piping

NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Steel piping shall be Schedule 40 for pipe sizes less than 2.5 inches, and may be Schedule 10 for sizes 2.5 inches and larger. Fittings into which sprinkler heads, sprinkler head riser nipples, or drop nipples are threaded shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and fittings which use steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied will not be permitted. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 1.5 inches and larger. Fittings shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved for use in dry pipe sprinkler systems. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Side outlet tees using rubber gasketed fittings shall not be permitted. Steel piping with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 shall not be threaded. Steel piping shall be galvanized Sprinkler pipe and fittings shall be metal.

2.2.2 Sprinkler Heads

Provide nominal 0.50 inch orifice standard sprinkler heads. No o-rings will be permitted in sprinkler heads.For preaction systems, the release element of each head shall be of the ordinary temperature rating or higher as suitable for the specific application.For deluge systems, provide open heads. Provide polished stainless steel ceiling plates or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy ceiling plates, and chromium-plated pendent sprinklers below suspended ceilings. Provide corrosion-resistant sprinkler heads and sprinkler head guards as required by NFPA 13. Deflector shall not be more than 3 inches below suspended ceilings. Ceiling plates shall not be more than 0.5 inch deep. Ceiling cups shall not be permitted.

2.2.3 Cabinet for System

Provide a minimum four of each type of sprinkler head and sprinkler head wrench adjacent to each deluge or preaction valve. The number and types of extra sprinkler heads shall be as specified in NFPA 13.

2.2.4 Deluge and Preaction Valves

Valves shall be operated by a detection system listed for releasing service and independent of building fire alarm system. Deluge and Preaction valve clappers shall incorporate a mechanical latching mechanism that will not be affected by pressure changes in the water system. If 6 inch valves are used in 8 inch risers, provide smoothly tapered connections. In addition to automatic operation, arrange each valve for manual release at the valve. Provide pressure gages and other appurtenances at the deluge and preaction valves. Provide a test detection device for each actuation circuit adjacent to each valve which the device controls as required by NFPA 13. Provide remote manual releases where indicated.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 7


2.2.5 Electric Bell

Provide alarms of the approved weatherproof and guarded type, to sound locally on the flow of water in each corresponding sprinkler system. Mount alarms on the outside of the outer walls of each building at a location as directed by the base fire department.

2.2.6 Pressure Switch

Provide switch with circuit opener or closer for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the facility fire alarm system. Connection of switch shall be under Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM. Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle. Do not install a shutoff valve in the piping between the preactionor deluge valve and any pressure switch.


Provide in accordance with NFPA 13. Attach to steel joists with MSS SP-58, Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide sway bracing for the Ordnance OPS building in accordance with NFPA 13.

2.2.8 Valves

NFPA 13. Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Provide an OS&Y valve beneath each deluge or preaction valve.Check valves shall be flanged clear opening swing-check type with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 4 inchesand larger.

2.2.8.1 Valve Supervision

Provide supervision of each control valve against closure and tampering in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide switch with SPDT (Form C) dry contacts for the automatic transmittal of a supervisory signal over the facility fire alarm system; minimum switch contact rating shall be 2.5 amperes at 24 VDC. A supervisory signal shall be initiated during the first two revolutions of the hand wheel, or during the first 1/5th of travel distance of the valve stem, from full open. Connection of the switch shall be under Section 28 31 63.00 20 ANALOG / ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. Provide breakaway key operated locks and steel chains to secure all post indicator control valves against unauthorized closure or tampering.

2.2.9 Backflow Preventer

Provide reduced pressure principle valve assembly backflow preventer with OS&Y gate valve on both ends for the TOFT facility. The Ornance OPS building will not require a backflow preventor. Each check valve shall have a drain. Backflow prevention assemblies shall have current "Certificate of Approval from the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, FCCCHR List. Listing of the specific make, model, design, and size in the FCCCHR List shall be acceptable as the required documentation."

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 8



NFPA 13. Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each valve and alarm device. Permanently affix hydraulic design data nameplates to the riser of each system.

2.2.11 Test Connections

2.2.11.1 Inspector's Test Connection for Preaction Systems

Provide test connections approximately 6 feet above the floor for each sprinkler system or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with an alarm device; locate at the hydraulically most remote part of each system. Provide test connection piping to a drain location that can accept full flow where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without property damage. . Discharge to janitor sinks or similar fixtures shall not be permitted. Provide discharge orifice of same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice. The penetration of the exterior wall shall be no greater than 2 feet above finished grade.

2.2.11.2 Backflow Preventer Test Connection (Applicable to the Toft)

Provide downstream of the backflow prevention assembly listed hose valves with 2.5 inch National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain. Provide one valve for each 250 gpm of system demand or fraction thereof. Provide a permanent sign in accordance with paragraph entitled "Identification Signs" which reads, "Test Valve." The Ordnance OPS building will not require a backflow preventor.

2.2.12 Main Drains

Provide separate drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each building . Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13. Provide precast concrete splash block under each exterior drain discharge. The penetration of the exterior wall shall be no greater than 2 feet above finished grade. Site main drain pipe and valve to support flow at system demand.


For the Ordnance building provide 4 inch connections approximately 3 feet above finish grade, of the approved two-way type with 2.5 inch National Standard female hose threads with plug, chain, and identifying fire department connection escutcheon plate. Provide a remote fire department connection for the TOFT as indicated on drawings.

2.2.14 Tank Mounted Air Compressor

Provide an approved, automatic type, electric motor-driven air compressor including pressure switch, air piping, and 10 gallon minimum capacity tank. Compressor shall have a minimum capacity capable of charging the complete sprinkler system to normal system air pressure within 30 minutes and within 15 minutes for the pneumatic detection system. Provide an approved automatic air maintenance device for each system.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 9


2.3 BURIED WATER PIPING SYSTEMS


Provide outside-coated, cement-mortar lined, ductile-iron pipe, and fittings conforming to NFPA 24 for piping under the building and outside of building walls. Anchor joints in accordance with NFPA 24. Provide concrete thrust block at the elbow where the pipe turns up toward the floor, and restrain the pipe riser with steel rods from the elbow to the flange above the floor. Minimum pipe size shall be 6 inches. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet at finish grade.

2.3.2 Valves

Provide as required by NFPA 24. Gate valves shall conform to UL 262 and shall open by counterclockwise rotation.


Provide with operating nut located about 3 feet above finish grade. Gate valves for use with indicator post shall conform to UL 262. Indicator posts shall conform to UL 789. Provide each indicator post with one coat of primer and two coats of red enamel paint.

2.3.4 Valve Boxes

Except where indicator posts are provided, for each buried valve, provide cast-iron, ductile-iron, or plastic valve box of a suitable size. Plastic boxes shall be constructed of acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS) or inorganic fiber-reinforced black polyolefin. Provide cast-iron, ductile-iron, or plastic cover for valve box with the word "WATER" cast on the cover. The minimum box shaft diameter shall be 5.25 inches. Coat cast-iron and ductile-iron boxes with bituminous paint applied to a minimum dry-film thickness of 10 mils.


Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded for the utility involved with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall read "CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW" or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material.

2.4 PIPE SLEEVES

Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, floors, and roofs. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, and roofs. Provide one inch minimum clearance between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors, seal both ends of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes with UL listed fill, void, or cavity material.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 10


a. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: Provide hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron sleeves. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.

b. Sleeves in Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet.

2.5 ESCUTCHEON PLATES


2.6 DETECTION DEVICES

Provide heat detectors for the Ordnance building deluge detection system and air sampling smoke detectors for the TOFT preaction system. Connecting piping, tubing, devices, and wiring shall be supervised so that an audible and visual trouble signal is operated when there is a fault in the system. Provide tubing and wiring in protective metal conduit or tubing. Detectors located in areas subject to moisture or exterior atmospheric conditions shall be types approved for such locations. Removal of any detector from the system shall result in the actuation of a trouble signal. Furnish not less than two spare detectors of each type for each system.

2.6.1 Spot Heat Detectors

All devices and equipment contained in the Ordnance Deluge System area shall be explosion proof. Provide detectors for surfaceoutlet box mounting. Support detectors independently of conduit, tubing, or wiring connections. Detectors shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be combination fixed temperature and rate-of-rise type. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise actuation. Operation under fixed temperature actuation shall result in an indication which may be noted by external visual inspection of the detector, or the detector may be the self-resetting type. Space detectors in accordance with NFPA 72, except provide at least two detectors in areas exceeding 600 sq feet. Provide fixed temperature type detectors in areas subject to abnormal temperature changes, such as showers and boiler rooms. Reduce heat detector spacing in areas with ceiling heights greater than 10 feet in accordance with NFPA 72. For ceiling heights greater than 30 feet, space detectors based on an assumed height of 30 feet. Furnish a portable electric device suitable for testing the detectors.

2.6.2 Smoke Sampling Detectors

Provide for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the ionization principle. Provide control and power panels required for operation of the detector either as individual detectors or detectors integral with the main control panel. Provide detectors and associated panels which are compatible with main control panel being provided and suitable for use in a supervised circuit. Malfunction of the electrical circuitry to the detector or detector control or power panels shall actuate the system trouble devices. Each detector shall contain a visible indicator lamp that shall indicate when the detector is activated. Each detector shall be the

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 11


plug-in type with screw terminals in the detector base for wiring connections. Detector spacing and location shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of NFPA 72; however, spacing shall not exceed 30 by 30 feet per detector, and 30 lineal feet per detector along corridors. Do not locate detectors within 5 feet of air supply diffusers and registers, or within<MET 12 inches of lighting fixtures. Provide remote indicator lamp for each detector located above suspended ceilings, beneath raised floors, or otherwise concealed from view. Mount detectors located beneath raised floors face downward, with the base within 2 inches of the underside of the raised floor. Where the space under the raised floor is less than 12 inches in height, mount detectors with the base either horizontal or vertical, with the detection chamber located in the upper half of the underfloor space. Do not mount detectors facing upward.

a. Ionization Detectors: Provide multiple chamber type which are responsive to both invisible and visible particles of combustion. Detector operation shall not be affected by changes in relative humidity.

b. Photoelectric Detectors: Provide detectors which operate on a multiple cell concept using a light-emitting diode (LED) light source. Failure of the LED shall not cause an alarm condition but shall operate the detector indicating lamp.

2.6.3 Control Panel

Provide a separate control panel for electrically operated detection and extinguishing systems for the deluge and the preaction valve; install in a surface-mounted steel cabinet with hinged doors and cylinder lock. Control panels shall be a neat, compact, factory-wired assembly containing components and equipment necessary to perform specified operating and supervisory functions of the system. Provide a control panel with an isolation switch that shall, when activated, allow testing of the system without activating the preaction or deluge valve. House batteries in a lockable steel cabinet. Finish interior and exterior of cabinet with enamel paint; attach prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates. Provide trouble lights on cabinet door, and provide trouble alarm above cabinet top. Provide 120 volts ac service, transformed through a two-winding isolation type transformer and rectified to low-voltage dc for operation of all system actuating, signal sounding, trouble signal, and fire alarm tripping circuits. Control panel shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved as an extinguishing system releasing panel and shall be separate from the building's fire alarm control panel. The TOFT clean agent system and preaction system may be combined in one panel if the panel is FM approved for releasing of preaction and clean agent system.

2.6.4 Secondary Power Supply

Provide nickel cadmium, lead calcium, or sealed lead acid rechargeable storage batteries and battery charger. Dry cell batteries will not be permitted.

a. Storage Batteries: Provide rechargeable lead calcium or sealed lead acid type with sufficient ampere-hour rating to operate the system under supervisory and trouble conditions , including audible trouble signal devices for 60 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 10 minutes and as required per the equipment listing. Separate cells to

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 12


prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells and between battery terminals and other metal parts.

b. Battery Charger: Provide solid state automatic two rate type, capable of recharging completely discharged batteries to fully charged condition in 24 hours or less. Locate charger within the control panel or within the battery cabinet.

2.6.5 Wiring

Provide solid copper wiring in accordance with NFPA 70. All devices and equipment contained in the Ordnance Deluge System area shall be explosion proof. Obtain ac primary power for control panel, battery charger, and air compressor from the line side of the incoming building power source ahead of all building services at the location indicatedon the electical contract drawings. Provide independent, properly fused safety switches, with provisions for locking the covers and operating handles in the POWER ON position for such connections; locate switches adjacent to main distribution panel. Paint the switch boxes red and identify by a permanent lettered designation. Wiring and devices exposed to the water deluge shall be weatherproof type. Wiring and devices in hazardous atmosphere shall be explosion-proof type. Wire for 120-volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. Wire for low-voltage dc circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Identify circuit conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Identify conductor by plastic coated, self-sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type sleeves. Attach and secure markers to prevent accidental detachment. Properly identify control circuit terminations.

2.6.6 Supervision

Preaction sprinkler pipingpneumatic detection system and delugeand preaction valve electric releases shall be supervised. A break in the piping or tubing systems resulting in loss of pneumatic pressure shall activate trouble alarm. Provide a silencing switch which transfers trouble signals to an indicating lamp; arrange so that correction of the trouble condition will automatically transfer the trouble signal from the indicating lamp back to the trouble alarm until the switch is restored to normal position. Supervisory air pressure shall not exceed 10 psig.

2.6.7 Manual Remote Release Stations

Stations shall be surface mounted for the Ordnance OPS building and semiflush mounted for the TOFT. Unfinished areas in the TOFT building may utilize surface mounted devices. Stations shall not be subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Break-glass-front stations will not be permitted; however, a pull-lever, break-glass-rod type is acceptable. Station color shall be yellow . Display operating instructions on face of station in engraved or raised letters of contrasting color. Provide permanent metal or engraved plastic signs mounted above or beside each station, indicating which system that station controls. Lettering shall be a minimum of 1.5 inches high. Station shall provide positive indication of operation. Restoration of station shall be accomplished only by means of a key or special tool.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 13


2.7 ALARMS

2.7.1 Local Alarm

Provide electric alarm bell to sound locally on operation of any detection system, regardless of water flow. The current for these alarms may be taken from the normal building service provided the connection is made ahead of the other services.

2.7.2 Fire Alarm

Provide equipment for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the building fire alarm system and arrange to actuate by detection system and by the flow of water in each sprinkler system. Provide supervision of detection and actuation circuits.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping from plaster ceilings. Keep the interior and ends of new piping and existing piping affected by Contractor's operations thoroughly cleaned of water and foreign matter. Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, securely close open ends of piping to prevent entry of water and foreign matter. Inspect piping before placing into position. Provide Teflon pipe thread paste on male threads.


All devices and equipment contained in the Ordnance Deluge System area shall be explosion proof. Provide electrical work associated with this section under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for control and fire alarm wiring. Provide fire alarm system under Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. Provide control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to fire alarm systems, under this section in accordance with NFPA 72. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing conduit may be used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage.

3.1.2 Disinfection

Disinfect the new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's operations up to the bottom flange of the preaction valve in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from the systems with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0.2 to 0.5 ppm, or the residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit results prior to the new water piping being place into service. Disinfection of systems supplied by nonpotable water is not required.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 14


3.1.3 Connections to Existing Water Supply Systems

Use tapping or drilling machine valve and mechanical joint type sleeves for connections to be made under pressure. Bolt sleeves around the main piping; bolt valve to the branch connection. Open valve, attach drilling machine, make tap, close valve, and remove drilling machine, all without interruption of service. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 days prior to connection date; receive approval before any service is interrupted. Furnish materials required to make connections into existing water supply systems, and perform excavating, backfilling, and other incidental labor as required. Furnish the labor and the tapping or drilling machine for making the actual connections to existing systems. The Ordnance OPS building will not be connecting to an existing water supply system. New water supply tanks are part of this contract.

3.1.4 Buried Piping System

Bury tape with the printed side up at a depth of 12 inches below the top surface of earth or the top surface of the subgrade under pavements. Photograph piping prior to burying, covering, or concealing.


Perform test to determine compliance with the specified requirements in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Test, inspect, and approve piping before covering or concealing.


Hydrostatically test each system at 50 psig above normal system static pressure or 200 psig, whichever is greater, for a 2 hour period with no leakage or reduction in pressure. Flush piping with potable water in accordance with NFPA 13. Piping above suspended ceilings shall be tested, inspected, and approved before installation of ceilings. Test the alarms and other devices. Test the water flow alarms by flowing water through the inspector's test connection. The water shall be delivered to the system test connection in not more than 60 seconds, starting at the normal air pressure on the system and at the time of fully opened inspection test connection. When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed and dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13.

3.2.2 Formal Tests and Inspections

Do not submit a request for formal test and inspection until the preliminary test and corrections are completed and approved. Submit a written request for formal inspection at least 15 days prior to inspection date. An experienced technician regularly employed by the system installer shall be present during the inspection. At this inspection, repeat any or all of the required tests as directed. Correct defects in work provided by the Contractor, and make additional tests until the systems comply with contract requirements. Furnish appliances, equipment, electricity, instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. The Government will furnish water for the TOFT tests. The Ordnance tests will have contractor furnished water. There is no water supply on the site. The MID-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests and approve systems before they are accepted.

SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 15


3.3 FIELD PAINTING

Clean, prime, and paint new sprinkler system piping, valves, hangers, accessories, and miscellaneous metal work as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGSandherein. Clean surfaces prior to painting. Immediately after cleaning, prime metal surfaces with SSPC Paint 25 or SSPC Paint 25 metal primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Exercise care to avoid painting sprinkler heads and operating devices. Upon completion of painting, remove materials which were used to protect sprinkler heads and operating devices which have been inadvertently painted and provide new clean sprinkler heads and operating devices of the proper type. Finish primed surfaces as follows:

3.3.1 Systems in Finished Areas

Finished areas are defined as areas where walls or ceilings are painted or are constructed of a prefinished material. Paint primed surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except paint valves and operating accessories with two coats of gloss red enamel. Provide piping with 2 inch wide red enamel bands spaced at maximum 20 feet intervals throughout the piping system. Bands shall be gloss red enamel or self-adhering plastic.

3.3.2 Systems in Unfinished Areas

Paint piping in valve rooms, mechanical rooms, with FS A-A-2962 gloss red enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.


SECTION 21 13 19.00 20 Page 16


SECTION 21 13 20.00 20

FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING FOR AIRCRAFT HANGARS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWWA C500 (2002; R 2003) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service




FM GLOBAL (FM)



FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies


NFPA 11 (2005; TIA 2006) Low-, Medium- and High- Expansion Foam Systems


NFPA 16 (2006) Installation of Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems

NFPA 20 (2006) Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection


NFPA 409 (2004; TIA 2005; TIA 2006) Standard on Aircraft Hangers

NFPA 70 (2007) National Electrical Code - 2008

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 1


Edition




SSPC SP 11 (1987; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal



MIL-F-24385 (Rev F; Am 1) Fire Extinguishing Agent, Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF) Liquid Concentrate, for Fresh and Seawater



FS A-A-58092 (Basic) Tape, Antiseize, Polytetrafluoroethylene

FS WW-S-2739 (Basic) Strainers, Sediment: Pipeline, Water, Air, Gas, Oil, or Steam





1.2 DEFINITION

a. Year 2000 compliant - means computer controlled facility components that accurately process date and time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 2




Design and provide a new automatic aqueous film forming foam (AFFF) deluge for Building 130. System shall provide uniform distribution of AFFF solution to provide complete coverage throughout the hangar bay areas. The design, equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 11, NFPA 13, NFPA 16, NFPA 20, NFPA 24, NFPA 70, NFPA 72, and NFPA 409, except as modified herein. Each system shall be designed for earthquakes and shall include all materials, accessories and equipment necessary to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and install each system to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork, and all other construction and equipment to provide complete coverage in accordance with the drawings to be submitted for approval. Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be of a make and type listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. in the UL Fire Prot Dir, or approved by the Factory Mutual System and listed in FM P7825. In the publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the MID-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command Fire Protection Engineer

Hangar 130 will be phased. Refer to architectural sheets for more information.

1.4.1.1 Shop Drawings

Prepare shop drawings for fire extinguishing system in accordance with the requirements for "Plans" as specified in NFPA 11 and "Working Plans" as specified in NFPA 13. Each drawing shall be 34 by 22 inches. Do not commence work until the design of each system and the various components have been approved. Show:

a. Room, space or area layout and include data essential to the proper installation of each system

b. Low level floor nozzles and system piping layout annotated with reference points for design calculations

c. Field wiring diagrams showing locations of devices and points of connection and terminals used for all electrical field connections in the system, with wiring color code scheme

d. Triple-IR detector manufacturer's recommended detector layout plan view including horizontal and vertical angles for correct aiming.

1.4.1.2 Calculations

Submit design calculations for the system.

a. Hydraulic calculations showing basis for design in accordance with NFPA 11 and NFPA 13.

b. Pressure discharge graphs or tables showing pressure discharge relationship for sprinkler heads and discharge nozzles.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 3


c. Substantiating battery standby power requirements calculationsshowing battery capacity, supervisory and alarm power requirements.

d. System surge analysis showing surge pressure occurring throughout the system at both design flow and nonflow conditions.

1.4.1.3 AFFF Containment and Disposal Plan

Submit AFFF containment and disposal plan as required under paragraph entitled "Environmental Protection."

1.4.1.4 As-Built Drawings for the Fire Extinguishing System

Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete set of as-built drawings for the fire extinguishing system , including complete as-built circuit diagrams,. Submit 34 by 22 inch reproducible as-built drawings on mylar film with 8 by 4 inch title block similar to contract drawings. Submit as-built drawings in addition to the record drawings required by Division 1.

1.4.2 System Operation

The low level foam fire extinguishing system consists of grate nozzles that are installed at floor level in trench grating. These nozzles are designed to provide uniform delivery of AFFF to the floor of the hangar bay. Flow of water and AFFF to the nozzles in Hangar 130 is controlled y deluge and concentrate control valves. These valves are electronically tripped by a tripple infrared (IR) optical detection signal, manual activation stations.

Three deluge valves are located in each hangar bay, each controlling water flow to respective nozzles in trenches in the hangar bay floor. Water supply to the deluge valves comes from the pump house in building 122. As the discharge pattern from each nozzle is presuure dependent, special features are inclorporated in the design to control nozzle pressure. Pressure reducing valves are installed in the water supply lines to each deluge valve to set the inlet pressure to each valve (depending on vendor's equpment a single combination deluge/pressure reducing valve may be provided). Suply piping to the nozzles is over sised to minimize friction losses between the nozzles. Both of these features give the necessary control over pressure to ensure that the low level nozzles do not discharge more than 102 percent of their nominal design flow.

Each deluge valve riser station has an in-line balanced-pressure (ILBP) proportioner in the riser above the deluge valve to control the injection of AFFF concentrate into the flowing water stream when the deluge valve is activated. Each ILBP proportioner has an electrically activated concentrate control valve to allow the flow of concentrate into its associated system. Foam concentrate is pumped into the control valves from an atmospheric foam concentrate tank storage located in the fire protection equipment room.

There is a releasing panel for the low level system to control all its required functions. The releasing panel receives input signals from the optical fire detection system, manual activation stations, the the emergency shit-off button (abort stations) and the alarm line pressure switches. It outputs signals to the hangar bay local alarm horn/light, the AFFF concentrate pump controllers, the water flow deluge valves, the concentrate control valves and the main fire alarm control panel.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 4


The purpose of the abort station is to facilitate stop and re-start actions of the low level system, i.e. as a "deadman" switch intended to abort an unwanted (non-fire) activation by stopping the flow of both water and foam concentrate. Water flow shall be stopped by providing either each deluge valve or pressure reducing valve (or combination valve), of a type that can be remotely activated, then close, then re-open on a signal from the system releasing panel. The concentrate control valves are controlled from the releasing panel to start, stop, or restart the flow of foam concentrate into the solution pipin. Depending on the the vendor's equpment, an alternate single solenoid valve may be used instead of concentrate control valves to stop and re-start flow of concentrate into the supply piping to the inline balance pressure proportioners. When the abort station button is released, water and concentrate flow returns to fully operational condiditon.

In order to verify that the low level system has been activated and water is flowing through the deluge valves, alarm line pressure swithces are mounted on the alarm line trim of each deluge valve. When there is water flow into the nozzle piping, the alarm line pressure switch provides a signal to activate the primary foam concentrate pump and the mechanical vlave to divert flow of AFFF drained from the hangar to the AFFF containment system.

The releasing panel communicates directly with the concentrate pump controlwers but not with the fire pump controllers. The fire pump start-sequence is intiated by a low-water pressure signal resulting from opening of the deluge valves or activation of the overhead sprinkler system within the building. when the deluge valves trip, water pressurizes the alarm lines causing each alarm line pressure switch to register an "alarm" condition. At the same time, the concentrate control valves will have opened, dropping the concentrate line pressure below the pressure switch "start" setting on the concentrate pump controller (see pump specification for AFFF pumps). The controller the concentrate pump 1, the primary foam contrate pump, shal require both an alarm line pressure switch alarm signal and a low pressure signal to start the pump. A drop in concentrate line pressure without a confirmed water lfow int he solution piping shall not cause the primary concentrate pump to start. If the alarm line pressure switch signals are in alarm, and after 30 seconds the concentrate system pressure is too low, the stand-by foam concentrate pump shall start.

1.4.2.1 Overhead Systems

The overhead system shall utilize a wet-pipe sprinkler system in a separate specification section.

1.4.2.2 Hose System

Foam hose lines are not required.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


The fire protection engineer, Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command will review any approve all submittals in this section

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 5


requiring Government approval.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Fire extinguishing system; G

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe, fittings, and mechanical couplings; G

Deluge valves; G


Concentrate control valves; G

Concentrate fill pump:

Low level nozzles:

Water motor alarms; G

Sprinkler heads; G


Pressure switch; G

Detection devices; G


Trouble alarm; G

Alarm horns; G

Annunciator panel; G

AFFF concentrate storage tanks; G

Proportioning equipment; G

AFFF concentrate; G

Strainers; G

Manual release stations; G

Triple IR dectectors; G

Backflow preventers; G

Control panel; G

Battery charger; G Abort station devices; G

Surge suppression devices: G

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 6


Foam discharge notification devices; G

Foam Concentrate pumps; G

Data which describe more than one type of item shall be clearly marked to indicate which type the Contractor intends to provide. Submit only originals. Photocopies will not be accepted. Partial submittals will not be accepted.

SD-05 Design Data

Hydraulic calculations; G

Pressure discharge graphs or tables; G

Battery standby power requirements calculations; G

System surge analysis; G

SD-06 Test Reports

Open-area (Spot-Type) 2-wire smoke detectors; G

Submit copies of UL listing or FM approval data showing compatibility of the smoke detector model being provided with the control panel being provided, if 2-wire detectors are proposed for use.

Preliminary tests; G

Acceptance tests; G

Submit for all inspections and tests specified under paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control."

Hydrostatic testing of the diaphragm pressure proportioning tanks; G

SD-07 Certificates


Submit installers qualifications as required under paragraph entitled Qualifications of Installer."

AFFF containment and disposal plan; G

Year 2000 (Y2K) Compliance Warranty

Backflow preventers; G


Deluge valves, Data Package 3; G

Proportioning equipment, Data Package 3; G

Control panel, Data Package 3; G

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 7


AFFF concentrate storage tanks, Data Package 3; G

Low level nozzles, Data package 3; G

Instructions for operating the fire extinguishing system, Data Package 4; G

Record Drawing Software

Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Furnish one complete set of data prior to the time that final acceptance tests are performed, and furnish the remaining sets before the contract is completed.


As-built drawings for the fire extinguishing system; G



Prior to commencing work, submit data showing that the Contractor has successfully installed automatic foam fire extinguishing sprinkler systems of the same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required experience. Include the names and locations of at least two installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and design of each system, and certify that the system has performed satisfactorily for a period of at least 18 months.

Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum Level-IV certification in Special Hazard System program. Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.

1.7 SPARE PARTS

Furnish the following spare parts:

a. 2 of each type of detector installed.

b. 1 of each type of audible and/or visual alarm device installed.

c. 2 of each type of fuse required by the system.

d. 5 complete sets of system keys.

1.8 WARRANTY


For each product, component and system specified in this section as a "computer controlled facility component" provide a statement of Y2K

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 8


compliance warranty for the specific equipment. The contractor warrants that each hardware, software, and firmware product delivered under this contract and listed below shall be able to accurately process date and time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations to the extent that other computer controlled components, used in combination with the computer controlled component being acquired, properly exchange data and time data with it. If the contract requires that specific listed products must perform as a system in accordance with the foregoing warranty, then that warranty shall apply to those listed products as a system. The duration of this warranty and the remedies available to the Government for breach of this warranty shall be defined in, and subject to, the terms and limitations of the contractor's standard commercial warranty or warranties contained in this contract, provided that, notwithstanding any provisions to the contrary, in such commercial warranty or warranties, the remedies available to the Government under this warranty shall include repair or replacement of any listed product whose non-compliance is discovered and made known to the contractor in writing within one year (365 days) after acceptance. Nothing in this warranty shall be construed to limit any rights or remedies the Government may otherwise have under this contract, with respect to defects other that Year 2000 performance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Y2K COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Provide computer controlled facility components, specified in this section, that are Year 2000 compliant (Y2K). Computer controlled facility components refers to software driven technology and embedded microchip technology. This includes, but in not limited to, telecommunications switches, utility monitoring and control systems, fire detection and suppression systems, alarms, security systems, and other facilities control systems utilizing microcomputer, minicomputer, or programmable logic controllers.

2.2 DESIGN OF FOAM SYSTEMS

Design of deluge fire extinguishing foam systems shall be by hydraulic calculations for uniform distribution of AFFF solution over the protected area and shall conform to the NFPA standards listed above and to the requirements as specified herein.

2.2.1 Low Level Nozzles

A Viking corporation grate nozzle design for installation in a drainage trench shall be used for this project. The nozzle and th esection of grate required to support the nozzle are provided by Viking. the design criteria of the nozzle is an operting pressure at any nozzle of not less than 40 psi and not greater than 45 psi. The nozzle shall be installed along the trench at spacings of no more than 25 feet.

Low level nozzles shall be designed to operate as close to possble to, but not less than, the manufacturer specified operating pressure of 40 psi. Their operating pressure shall not exceed 45 psi. Adequate distribution of AFFF from each nozzle is dependent on the pressure at the nozzle. The manufacturer's maximum spacing for the nozzle is determined by the operating pressure. Head losses occurring during flow of the AFFF to each of the nozzles shall be maintained at the minimum, therby achieving almost

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 9


equal pressures at each nozzle. The pressure of water entering the deluge valve in each deluge station riser shall be set to achieve the design operating pressure at the nozzles through the use of a pressure reducing valve. The set pressure for each pressure reducing valve shall be determined by accurate hydraulic calculation.

Low level grate nozzles shall be installed in drainage trenches flush with the top of th trench grate. Nozzles shall provide AFFF at a minimum application rate of 0.10 gpm per square foot over the entire hangar bay floor area. Foam shall be supplied by the nozzles for a period of time not less than 10 minutes.

Location of nozzles shall meet the manufacturer's specification for maximum distances between nozzles. Nozzles shall be located in drainage trenches. Spacing of the grate nozzles shall be coordianted with the dimension of the standard trench grating.

2.2.2 Deluge Station Risers

Deluge stations shall be located in the hangar bays. The piping layout after the deluge station shall be as symmetrical as possible. the following valves (or similar as acceptable to NAVFAC Mid-Atlantic Fire Protection) shall be provided.

2.2.2.1 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVESInstall a UL listed or FM approved pressure-reducing valve in each system riser ahead of the deluge valve, to maintain a set inlet pressure to the deluge sysstem piping, regarless of the water supply pressure generated by the operation fo the fire pumps. The set inlet pressure shall be determined by the hydraulic calculations fo rthe low level nozzle distribution piping and deluge valve, to maintain an overall discharge of not more than 102% of the nominal discharge for the the number of grate nozzles flowing at the minimum design pressure of 40 psi. Provide pressure gages on the upstream and downstream sides of the pressure-reducing valve.

2.2.2.2 DELUGE VALVESThe low-level deluge valves shall be operated by the control/releasing panel. Release of the deluge valve shall be initiated by an alarm signal from the optical detection system,and by activation of a manual release station located in the hangar bay. A pressure switch shall be incorporated in the trim of the deluge valve to provide a signal that the valve has tripped. This signal, in combination with the pressure drop in the concentrate piping will be used to initiate the foam concentrate pump start up. The deluge valve or associated control valves shall be capable of being opened, closed and re-opened on a signal from the control/releasing panel in conjunction with the emergency shut-off button (abort switch). Deluge valves that combine pressure reducing function and deluge release are permitted. If 6" valves are installed in 8" risers, provide concentrically tapered reducers and increasers. Provide pressure gages and other appurtenances at the deluge valves as required by NFPA 13 and the listing.

2.2.2.3 WATER ONLY FLOWthe provision shall be made for water only flow from the low level system. this shall be achieved by the use of a manual bypass line. This line will bypass the proportioner and allow the flow of water to the low level system without activating the deluge valve or operating the AFFF concentrate pumps. the bypass line shall be the same size as the main supply line serving the pressure reducing valve. Provide a tamper switch in the bypass

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 10


line configred for normally closed position.

2.2.2.4 TEST HEADERprovide a test header to allow flow testing of proportioners through a closed loop to a tanker truck. Provide hydraulic calculations for test header, indicating anticipated details of hosing to tanker truck likely to be required. Design of the test header shall ensure solution flow during a test is within 15% of the design flow from the low level system.

2.2.2.5 CONCENTRATE CONTROL VALVES

Valves in contact with foam concentrate shall be brass. Provide a concentrate control valve at each deluge valve station to control the flow of AFFF concentrate into each inline balance proportioner. the concentrate control valve shall be specifaclly intended for use with AFFF concentrate and shall not be hydraulically operated. Concentrat control valve shall be capable of being opened, closed and re-opeened from the control/releasing panel.

2.2.2.6 MECHANICAL DIVERTER VALVE

Connect the mechanical diverter valve from the AFFF containment system to the foam releasing panel. Activation of the pressure switch on the deluge vavle alarm line shall cause the diverter valve to be activated. Activation of the valve diverts the flow of all fluids drained from the hangar floor into the containment sysem. Provide an indicating light and larm on the panel for when the diverter valve is in a closed position. The larm shall sound in a constantly attended location.

2.2.3 AFFF Solution Distribution

Distribution shall be essentially uniform throughout the area. Variation in discharge from any low level nozzle shall be shall be between 100 and 105 percent of the nominal design flow from an individual nozzle. The total flow from the system shall be between 100 and 102 percent of the nominal design flow.

2.2.4 AFFF Solution Application Density

Size system to provide the specified density when the system is discharging the specified total maximum required flow. Application to horizontal surfaces below the ceiling sprinklers shall be based on the low level system operating simultaneously with the overhead sprinkler system as specified in the "Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression systems" specifications.

2.2.5 Sprinkler Discharge Area

Area shall be a mininum of 15,000 square feet to encompass two draft curtain areas per NFPA 409 for Type I aircraft hangars.


Calculate losses in pipe in accordance with the Hazen-Williams Formula with 'C' value of 100 for steel pipe, except 120 for steel pipe used in deluge systems, 150 for copper tube, 150 for stainless steel and 140 for cement lined ductile iron pipe.The friction losses in piping carrying foam concentrate shall be calculated using the Darcy formula, also known as the Fanning formula.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 11


2.2.7 Location of Low Level Floor Nozzles

Location of nozzles shall meet manufacturer's specifications. Trenches shall be spaced no more than 50' and nozzles within the trenches spaced at no more than 25 feet. Refer to contract drawings.

2.2.8 Water Supply

Base hydraulic calculations on information indicated on the contract drawings.

2.2.9 Duration of Discharge

System shall apply foam solution over the discharge area for a minimum of 10 minutes. Reduction of the discharge duration based on a discharge rate higher than the specified minimum is not permitted.

2.2.10 System Piping

The pump and all piping, valves, and fittings in contact with the AFFF concentrate shall be stainless steel or brass. No threaded fittings are allow in contact with concentrate to include all piping, valves, fittings, valve inlets, valve outlets, any trim piping or any other devices.

2.2.11 Concentrate Pumps

Provide pimary and stand by AFFF concentrate pumps and controlers in accordance with specification section 21 30 00 Fire Pumps in addition to requirements required in this specification and information contained on the contract drawings. The primary and stand-by concentrate pumps shall be able to supply the concentrate demand (flow and pressure) for each entire low-level foam system.

2.2.12 Pressure Relief and By-pass Valve

Provide a pressure relief and bypass valve in the AFFF concentrate pump reture line as described in section 21 30 00 to maintain a constant pressure on the concentrate piping system at all AFFF solution flow rates.

2.3 ELECTRIC DETECTION DEVICES

Provide electric triple IR detectors. All wiring shall be supervised and installed in protective metal conduit or tubing. All wiring and devices in the hangar bay shall be waterproof.

2.3.1 Control Panel

Modular type panel installed in a surface mounted steel cabinet with hinged door and cylinder lock. Switches and other controls shall not be accessible without the use of a key. The control panel shall be a neat, compact, factory-wired assembly containing all parts and equipment required to provide specified operating and supervisory functions of the system. Panel cabinet shall be finished on the inside and outside with factory-applied enamel finish. Provide main annunciator located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door. Provide audible trouble signal. Provide prominent engraved rigid plastic or metal identification plates, or silk-screened labels attached to the rear face of the panel viewing window, for all lamps and switches. System power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding isolation

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 12


transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of all system initiating, actuating, signal sounding, trouble signal and fire alarm tripping circuits. System shall be electrically supervised on all circuits. A ground fault condition or a single break in any circuit which prevents the required operation of the system shall result in the operation of the system trouble signal.A single open or ground fault condition in any detection (initiating) or signaling circuit shall not result in any loss of system function, but shall cause the actuation of system trouble signals. A ground fault condition or single break in any other circuit shall result in the activation of the system trouble signals. Loss of AC power, a break in the standby battery power circuits, or abnormal AC power or low battery voltage shall result in the operation of the system trouble signals. The abnormal position of any system switch in the control panel shall result in the operation of the system trouble signals. Trouble signals shall operate continuously until the system has been restored to normal at the control panel. System trouble shall also be annunciated on the appropriate zone of the building fire alarm panel. Control panel, batteries, and battery charger shall be weatherproof type or located in an area not subject to water damage. System control panel shall be UL listed or FM approved for extinguishing system control (releasing device service). Permanently label all switches. Provide panel with the following switches:

a. Trouble silencing switch which transfers audible trouble signals (including remote trouble devices, if provided) to an indicating lamp. Upon correction of the trouble condition, audible signals will again sound until the switch is returned to its normal position, or the trouble signal circuit shall be automatically restored to normal upon correction of the trouble condition. The silencing switch may be a momentary action, self-resetting type.

b. Alarm silencing switch which when activated will silence all associated alarm devices without resetting the panel, and cause operation of system trouble signals.

c. Individual zone disconnect switches which when operated will disable only their respective initiating circuit and cause operation of the system and zone trouble signals.

d. Reset switch which when activated will restore the system to normal standby status after the cause of the alarm has been corrected, and all activated initiating devices reset.

e. Lamp test switch.

2.3.1.1 Main Annunciator

Provide integral with the main control panel. Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps for each zone alarm initiating circuit as indicated below, located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door. Lamps shall be LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Supervision will not be required provided a fault in the annunciator circuits results only in loss of annunciation and will not affect the normal functional operation of the remainder of the system. Each lamp shall provide specific identification of the area by means of a permanent label. In no case shall zone identification consist of the words "Zone 1," "Zone 2," etc., but shall consist of the description of the area and device.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 13


2.3.1.2 Initiating Zones

Zones shall be identified by the hangar bay area, and deluge riser number.

2.3.2 Auxiliary Power Supply

2.3.2.1 Storage Batteries

Provide sealed lead calcium, sealed lead acid, batteries and charger. Drycell batteries are not acceptable. House batteries in the control panel or in a well constructed vented steel cabinet with cylinder lock, non-corrosive base, and louvered vents. Provide batteries of adequate ampere-hour rating to operate the system under supervisory conditions for 60 hours, at the end of which time batteries shall be capable of operating the entire system in a full alarm condition for not less than 15 minutes. Provide calculations substantiating the battery capacity. Provide reliable separation between cells to prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells and between battery terminals and other metal parts. Provide batteries with post-and-nut, "L"-blade, or similar terminals. Slip-on tab type terminals are not acceptable. When a separate battery cabinet is used, provide a fuse block for battery leads within the cabinets. Finish the cabinet on the inside and outside with enamel paint. Locate the top of the battery cabinet not more than 4 feet above floor level.

2.3.2.2 Battery Charger

Provide completely automatic high/low charging rate type charger capable of recovery of the batteries from full discharge to full charge in 24 hours or less. Provide an ammeter for recording rate of charge and a voltmeter to indicate the state of battery charge under load. Meters shall be factory installed, or factory-supplied plug-in modules. Field installation of meters other than the panel manufacturer's plug-in modules is prohibited. Provide a trouble light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high-rate switch is provided. House charger in the control panel or battery cabinet.

2.4 Surge Suppression

Provide line voltage and low voltage surge suppression devices as specified the the fire alarm section 28 31 74.00 20.

2.5 MANUAL RELEASE STATIONS

Provide floor nozzle release stations where shown. Stations shall be of a type not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall have a dual action release configuration to prevent accidental system discharge. Break-glass-front stations are not permitted; however a pull lever break-glass-rod type is acceptable. Station color shall be red. Station shall provide positive visible indication of operation. Restoration shall require use of a key or special tool. Place warning signs at each station indicating that operation of the station will cause immediate AFFF discharge. Where a building fire alarm pull station is also mounted in the vicinity of a foam release station, separate the stations by at least 3 feet horizontally. Provided permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal labels to clearly distinguish foam release stations from building fire alarm stations, and to indicate the function of each foam release station. Signs shall read "OPERATION OF THIS STATION WILL CAUSE DISCHARGE OF FOAM SYSTEM. DO NOT ACTIVATE UNLESS THERE IS A FIRE IN THE HANGAR BAY". Stations shall be weatherproof type.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 14


2.6 Emergency Shut-Off Button (Abort Stations)

Provide a non-locking "deadman" emergency shut-off button to stop the flow of AFFF concentrate and water in the event of a flase discharge of the low-level system. The abort sstations shall be mounted nt he center of the rear wall of each hangar bay approximately 48" above the floor, in an unobstricted area of wall accessible at all times, distinctly marked and at at least 3 feet away from any other system activation or fire alarm device. Activation of the button shall close valves in the water supply to each deluge valve, and in the concentrate supply line or operate by similar means where approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Release of the button shall immediately return all system to normal. The means of closing and re-opening the water supply valve (s) or self recycling deluge valves will depend on the vendor's specific equipment. If required, provide a stainless steel ecetrically activated solenoid valve on the concentrate supply line to each hangar in the pump room to stop and restart the the flow of concentrate (depending on manufacturer's equipment, this fnction may be accomplished using only the concentrat control valve). Provide a sign with instructions on operation at each abort station. Signs shall be permanent engraved.

2.7 TRIPLE-INFRARED FLAME DETECTORS

Provide triple infrared (IR) optical flame detectors. Detectors shall continually monitor three IR spectral bands. All areas of the each one of the hangar bays shall be visible to a aminimum of 3 optical flame detectors. Detector shall not be activated by non-fire sources such as continuous or intermittent direct or reflected solar radiation, arc-welding, lightning, radiant heat, x-rays, artificial lighting, radio transmissions, and normal jet engine functions or flames outside of the hangar bay. All wiring shall be supervised and installed in protective metal conduit or tubing. The triple IR fdetectors shall be either Spectrex model 20/20 SharpEye, or Detector Electronics model X3300 multispectrum IR flame detectors. No alternatives will be accepted. The detectors shall have a self-test capability and shall report any failure of the self test as a detector fault. malfunction of the detecor circuitry, or unaccepable degradation of the lens cleanliness shall cause operation of the system trouble signals. Logic circuits necessary for operation of the detector shall be integral to the detector. Each detector in alarm shall be individually annunciated by an LED on the detector or at the detectro control panel. Primary and auxiliary power supply shall be taken from the foam system control/releasing panels. Detectros, and the associated control panels if required, shall be compatible with the foam system control/releasing panels.Detectors and associated control panels shall be weatherproof, or housed in weatherproof enclosure(s) when in an area subject to system discharge and shall also be explosion-proof when located in hazardous areas as defined by NFPA 70. Detector spacing and location shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation for under and over wing protection in the hangar bays, their UL listing or FM approval, and the manufacturer's recommendations. The detector manufacturer shall determine or approve the detector layout. Detector layout drawings shall include horizontal and vertical angles for correct aiming. Locate detectors so that every portion of the protected floor area is within the field of view of at least three detectors, taking into account fixed obstructions. Provide detectors with manufacturer's swivel mounting bracket capable of of retaining the set position. Detectors shall be mounted at two heights (one for underwing and one for immediately above the aircraft. Provide a permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal label at each detector location with detector aiming information (degrees horizontal

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 15


and vertical) for the corresponding detector.

Detector layout drawings shall include horizontal and vertical angles for correct aiming. Provide engraved signs at each device indicating the aiming information.

2.8 ELECTRICAL WORK

Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for control and fire alarm wiring. Fire alarm system is specified in Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.

2.8.1 Wiring

Provide control wiring and connections to fire alarm systems, under this section and conforming to NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. Wire for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum solid conductor. Wire for low voltage DC circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum solid conductor , except wire to remote annunciators, if provided, may be 18 AWG minimum solid conductor. All wiring shall be color coded. Wiring, conduit and devices exposed to water or foam discharge shall be weatherproof. Wiring, conduit and devices located in hazardous atmospheres, as defined by NFPA 70, shall be explosion proof. All conduit shall be minimum 3/4 inch size.

2.8.2 Operating Power

Power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding isolation type transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of all signal initiating, signal sounding, trouble signal, and actuating (releasing) circuits. Provide secondary DC power supply for operation of system in the event of failure of the AC supply. Transfer from normal to emergency power or restoration from emergency to normal power shall be fully automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm. Obtain AC operating power for control panel, and battery charger from the line side of the incoming building power source ahead of all building services. Provide independent properly fused safety switch, with provisions for locking the cover and operating handle in the "POWER ON" position for these connections and locate adjacent to the main distribution panel. Paint switch box red and suitably identify by a lettered designation.

2.8.3 Conductor Identification

Identify circuit conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made. Identify conductors by plastic coated self sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type sleeves. Attach the markers in a manner that will not permit accidental detachment. Properly identify control circuit terminations.

2.9 SYSTEM ACTIVATION

2.9.1 Overhead System Activation

The overhead wet pipe sprinkler system operates independently of the low level foam system.

2.9.2 Nozzle System Activation

Each system shall encompass one hangar bay . Upon activation of two or more triple-IR detectors for more than 5 seconds or activation of a manual

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 16


release station, all deluge valves in the hangar bay shall be activated.

2.10 ALARMS

2.10.1 Water Motor Alarms

Provide weatherproof and guarded type alarm for each group ofdeluge valve(s). Alarms shall sound locally on the flow of foam solution in each system to which it is connected. Mount alarms on the outside of the outer walls of each building, at locations indicated. When more than one alarm gong is provided, provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal signs indicating to which system each gong is connected.

2.10.2 Local Alarm

Provide electric alarm bells to sound locally on operation of any system, regardless of whether water flows or not. When more than one alarm is provided, provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or metal signs indicating to which system each alarm is connected.

2.10.3 Fire Alarm

Provide equipment for the automatic transmittal of an alarm over the building fire alarm system. Arrange so that the detection system and the flow of solution in each system will actuate the alarm. Activation of a single UV-IR detector shall not cause activation of the foam system but shall cause activation of the fire alarm system.

2.10.3.1 Pressure Switch

Provide switch with SPDT contacts to automatically transmit alarms upon flow of water or AFFF. Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle.

2.10.4 Trouble Alarm

Provide local 4 inch electric alarm horn to indicate trouble or failure of the detection system. Also connect trouble alarm into the building fire alarm control panel to indicate "trouble" on a separate zone labelled "Foam System Trouble".

2.11 AFFF CONCENTRATE

MIL-F-24385, 3 percent. The AFFF concentrate shall be for 3 percent solution, glycol ether free, meeting the requirements of MIL-F-24385 and be on the qualified products list. provide quantity sufficient to fill the foam concentrate tank with enough concentate to meet the totallow-level system flow requirements for a minimum of 10 minutes. Provide additional foam concentrate to fill all concentrate distribution pipingbetween the pumps, the concentrate control valves on the inline balanceproportions and to meet the needs of the final testing and commissioningof the system.

2.11.1 Concentrate Fill Pump

Provide one pump to fill foam system tank. Pump shall have a minimum flow rate of 7 gpm. Pump shall be complete with 115 VAC motor, fused switch, power cord with plug and 10 foot minimum suction and clear discharge hoses.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 17


2.12 BALANCED PRESSURE PROPORTIONING SYSTEM

2.12.1 In-Line Balanced Pressure Proportioning System

Size in-line balancing pressure proportioner equipement for required flow rates. System operation shall be fully automatic, with manual override and manual shut down. Provide an inline balance proportioner device at each deluge station riser in the hangar bays to automatically balance the AFFF concentrate pressure with the water pressure at the riser and provide correct proportioning at the flow rate of that riser. As a minimum the following devices shall be provided adjacent to each deluge system riser: a ratio proportioner mounteed in the soution piping riser, a balancing valve with duplex gage, a lever operated ball type valve for manual shutoff, a pressure agre; a check valve and a foam concentrate control valve that can be opened or closed from the releasing panel.

AFFF concentrate pump shall be positive displacement, electric motor driven, drip proof, 240/480 volts, 60 Hz AC. System operation shall be fully automatic, with manual over-ride and manual shut-down. Provide a pressure regulating device in the AFFF concentrate pump return line to maintain constant pressure on the concentrate piping system at all AFFF solution flow rates. Provide an in-line balanced pressure proportioning device at each system riser to automatically balance the AFFF concentrate pressure with the water pressure at the riser to provide correct proportioning over the range of flow rates calculated for that riser. The pump and all piping, valves, and fittings in contact with the foam concentrate shall be of materials resistant to the corrosive effects of the AFFF concentrate. Provide permanent engraved rigid plastic or corrosion-resistant metal instruction plate for emergency manual operation, along with a similarly constructed label for each control device.

2.12.2 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks

Tank shall be designed for storage of AFFF concentrate at atmospheric pressure, and shall be vertical cylindrical, fiberglass or polyethylene construction. Tank shall have the following: Drain valve located at the lowest point in the tank, connections for concentrate supply and return lines to the proportioners, top-mounted fill connections and inspection hatch, and a pressure/vacuum relief vent. All openings and tank connections shall be installed at the factory, no holes shall be made in the tank shell in the field. Tank shall include all necessary supports for free-standing installation. Provide a gage or unbreakable sight glass to permit visual determination of level of tank contents, unless liquid level is clearly visible through shell of tank. Size tank to provide sufficient AFFF concentrate for the time specified when the system is discharging foam solution at total maximum system flow. Permanently label each tank with its capacity, type and percentage of concentrate, which system it serves, and whether it is a main or reserve tank.


2.13.1 Pipe, Fittings, and Mechanical Couplings

NFPA 13, except steel piping shall be Schedule 40 for sizes smaller than 3 inches, and Schedule 10 for sizes 3 inches and larger. Pipe nipples 6 inches long and shorter shall be Schedule 80 steel pipe. Water motor alarm piping shall be zinc-coated steel pipe and fittings. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings shall only be

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 18


permitted in pipe sizes 1 1/2 inches and larger. Rubber gaskets shall be UL listed for use in dry-pipe sprinkler systems. Use of restriction orifices, reducing flanges, and plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings (which utilize steel gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied) are not permitted. Pipe and fittings in contact with AFFF concentrate shall be stainless steel. Fittings on concentrate lines shall be flanged or welded only. Screwed or mechanical fittings will not be permitted.Any connections to valves in contact with the concentrate shall have flanged fittings to prevent the use of threaded fittings and pipe.Threaded fittings and/or pipe is not permitted with foam concentrate.

2.13.2 Jointing Material

FS A-A-58092, Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tape. Pipe joint compound (pipe dope) is not acceptable.

2.13.3 Duplex Basket Strainers

FS WW-S-2739, Style Y (Y pattern). Provide duplex basket strainers with removable screens having standard perforations, 0.125 inch in diameter in the riser beneath the deluge valves.


NFPA 13. Hangars, piping and support shall coordiante location and layout with the draft curtains.

2.13.5 Valves

Provide valves as required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 409 shall be types approved for fire service. Gate valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Check valves shall be flanged clear opening swing check type with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 4 inches and larger. Provide an OS&Y valve beneath each deluge valve in each riser, when more than one valve is supplied from the same water supply pipe. Butterfly valves are not acceptable. Valves in contact with AFFF concentrate shall have flanged inlet and outlets.


Attach properly lettered approved metal signs conforming to NFPA 13 to each valve and alarm device. Permanently affix design data nameplates to the riser of each system.


Provide test connections about 6 feet above the floor for each sprinkler system and locate at the hydraulically most remote part of each system. Provide test connection piping to a location where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without damage.

2.13.8 Main Drains

Provide drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily receive the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 19


2.13.9 Pipe Sleeves

Provide where piping passes through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Secure sleeves in proper position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Provide not less than 1/4 inch space between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with insulation and calk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement.

2.13.9.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, Roofs

ASTM A 53/A 53M, schedule 40 or standard weight, zinc-coated steel pipe sleeves. Extend sleeves in floor slabs 3 inches above the finished floor.

2.13.9.2 Sleeves in Partitions

Provide zinc-coated steel sheet having a nominal weight of not less than 0.90 pounds per square foot.

2.13.10 Escutcheon Plates

Provide one piece or split hinge type plates for piping passing through floors, walls and ceilings, in both exposed and concealed areas. Provide chromium plated metal plates where pipe passes through finished ceilings. Provide other plates of steel or cast iron with aluminum paint finish. Securely anchor plates in place.

2.13.11 Fire Department Inlet Connections

Twoway type with 2 1/2 inch National Standard female hose threads with plug, chain, and identifying fire department connection escutcheon plate. Provide inlet connections about 3 feet above grade.

2.13.12 Backflow Preventers

Reduced pressure principle type. Proof shall be furnished that each make, model/design, and size of backflow preventer being furnished for the project is approved by and has a current "Certificate of Approval" from the FCCCHR List. Listing of the particular make, model/design, and size in the current FCCCHR List will be acceptable as the required proof.

2.14 BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS


NFPA 24, outside coated cement lined ductile iron pipe and fittings for piping under the building and to a point 5 feet outside the building walls. Anchor the joints in accordance with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods. Minimum pipe size shall be 6 inches. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall be outside coated cement lined ductile iron pipe and fittings conforming to NFPA 24 and as provided under Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.

2.14.2 Valves

Provide as required by NFPA 24 for fire service. Gate valves shall conform to AWWA C500 or UL 262 with cast iron body and bronze trim, and shall open by counterclockwise rotation.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 20



Provide with operating nut located about 3 feet above grade. Gate valves for use with indicator post shall conform to UL 262. Indicator posts shall conform to UL 789. Paint each indicator post with one coat of primer and two coats of red enamel paint.

2.14.4 Valve Boxes

Except where indicator posts are provided, provide each gate valve in buried piping with an adjustable cast-iron valve box of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used. Boxes outside of paved areas may be of Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) plastic or of inorganic fiber reinforced black polyolefin plastic. The head shall be round and the lid shall have the word WATER cast on it. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Coat each cast-iron box with bituminous paint.


Provide detectable aluminum foil plastic-backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded for the utility involved, with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire tape length. Warning and identification shall be CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW or similar. Use permanent code and letter coloring unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill material. Bury tape with the printed side up at a depth of 12 inches below the top surface of earth or the top surface of the subgrade under pavements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING

Provide under this section as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.

3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

Use tapping or drilling machine valve and mechanical joint type sleeves for connections to be made under pressure. Bolt sleeves around the mains; bolt valve conforming to AWWA C500 or UL 262 to the branch. Open valve, attach drilling machine, make tap, close valve, and remove drilling machine, all without interruption of service. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior to the date the connections are required; approval shall be received before any service is interrupted. Furnish all material required to make connections into the existing water supply systems, and perform all excavating, backfilling, and other incidental labor as required. Furnish the labor and the tapping or drilling machine for making the actual connections to the existing systems.

3.3 AFFF SYSTEM INSTALLATION

Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the NFPA standards referenced herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Conceal piping to the maximum extent

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 21


possible. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for all connections. Make changes in piping sizes through standard reducing pipe fittings; do not use bushings. Cut pipe accurately and work into place without springing or forcing. Ream pipe ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assembly. Make screw joints with PTFE tape applied to male thread only.

3.4 DISINFECTION

Disinfect new water piping from the system control valve to the point of connection at the water main and existing water piping affected by the Contractor's operation in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million (ppm) of free available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 ppm.

3.5 FIELD PAINTING

Clean, prime, and paint new foam systems including valves, piping, conduit, hangers, miscellaneous metal work, and accessories. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces using clean brushes. Clean the surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or SSPC SP 11. Immediately after cleaning, prime the metal surfaces with one coat of SSPC Paint 25 or SSPC Paint 25 primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Exercise care to avoid the painting of sprinkler heads and operating devices. Upon completion of painting, remove materials which were used to protect sprinkler heads and operating devices while painting is in process. Remove sprinkler heads and operating devices which have been inadvertently painted and provide new clean sprinkler heads and operating devices of the proper type. Finish primed surfaces as follows:

3.5.1 Foam Systems in Unfinished Areas

Unfinished areas are defined as attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces, foam rooms, pump rooms, pipe chases, and other spaces where ceilings are not painted or not constructed of a prefinished material. Paint primed surfaces with two coats of FS A-A-2962 red enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.

3.5.2 Foam Systems in All Other Areas

Paint primed surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except paint valves and operating accessories with two coats of FS A-A-2962 red enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Provide piping with 2 inch wide red bands spaced at maximum 20 foot intervals throughout the piping systems. Bands shall be red enamel or self adhering red plastic tape.

3.5.3 Piping Labels

Provide permanent labels in foam rooms, spaced at 20 foot maximum intervals along pipe, indicating "WATER", "FOAM CONCENTRATE", and "FOAM SOLUTION" on corresponding piping.

3.5.4 Field Touch-Up

Clean damaged areas of shop coated tanks in accordance with SSPC SP 11 and

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 22


coat cleaned areas with the same materials used for the shop applied coating system.

3.6 ELECTRICAL WORK

Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for control and fire alarm wiring. Fire alarm system is specified in Section 28 31 74.00 20 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM .

3.6.1 Wiring

Provide control wiring, and connections to fire alarm systems, under this section in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 72. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. Do not run low voltage DC circuits in the same conduit with AC circuits.

3.7 FLUSHING

Flush the piping system with potable water in accordance with NFPA 13. Continue flushing operation until water is clear, but for not less than 10 minutes.


Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment and piping systems for compliance with drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's submittals. Perform tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the specified requirements.


Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psig in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall show no leakage or reduction in gage pressure after 2 hours. The Contractor shall conduct complete preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects of system operation. Individually test all detectors, manual actuation stations, alarms, control panels, and all other components and accessories to demonstrate proper functioning. Test water flow alarms by flowing water through the inspector's test connection. When tests have been completed and all necessary corrections made, submit to the Contracting Officer a signed and dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13, attesting to the satisfactory completion of all testing and stating that the system is in operating condition. Also include a written request for a formal inspection and test.

3.8.2 Formal Inspection and Tests (Acceptance Tests)

The Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command Fire Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests and approve all systems before they are accepted. The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer's technical representative and written certification to this effect is received by the Division Fire Protection Engineer. Submit the request for formal inspection at least 15 working days prior to the date the inspection is to take place. The control panel(s) and detection system(s) shall be in continuous service for a "break-in" period of at least 15 consecutive days prior to the formal inspection. Experienced

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 23


technicians regularly employed by the Contractor in the installation of both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems shall be present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All AFFF concentrate, instruments, including Triple IR Flame detector test and function test kit, personnel, appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor. All necessary tests encompassing all aspects of system operation shall be made including the following, and any deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at no cost to the Government.

3.8.2.1 Systems and Device Testing

The entire initiating, alarm, actuation systems shall be operated. As a minimum, operation and supervision of the following functions and devices shall be demonstrated:

a. All operational and supervisory functions of the control and annunciator panels.

b. Each manual actuation station, abort station and associated circuit(s).

c. All detectors and associated circuits.

d. All alarms and associated circuits.

e. All actuator circuits and system control valve(s) (without foam discharge).

f. Activation of the building fire evacuation alarm system.

g. Activation of the Base fire alarm system (receipt of fire alarm at alarm office).

h. All of the above tests shall then be repeated with the system on battery power only.

3.8.2.2 AFFF Discharge and Concentration Testing

When all of the initiating, alarm, actuation, and supervisory functions of the system operate to the satisfaction of the system manufacturer's technical representative and the Mid-Atlantic Division Fire Protection Engineer, a complete discharge test of each system shall be performed to demonstrate satisfactory performance, proper AFFF concentration, mechanical operation and operation of valves, release devices, alarms, and interlocks which control the protected areas. These tests shall be conducted by experienced personnel according to the equipment and AFFF manufacturers' recommendations. Contractor shall seal off all door openings to prevent any spread of fluid under doors to adjacent areas.

a. Test each deluge system by full flow of foam solution from the individual systems or combination of systems to achieve maximum design flow rate for at least 60 seconds.

The manufacturer's representative shall test samples of foam solution taken from each system to ensure proper AFFF concentration. Provide protection for all electrical fixtures and equipment exposed to possible damage during tests and protect doors and other openings leading from the protected area(s), to prevent migration of foam solution into other areas or spaces.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 24


Contact NAVFAC Mid-Atlantic Fire Protection if an environmentally friendly substance will be proposed for used for the concentration testing.

3.8.2.3 Flushing and Rinsing

After completion of tests flush all piping carrying AFFF concentrate and solution with fresh water. Piping normally containing AFFF concentrate when the system is in standby mode need not be flushed. Rinse with fresh water all equipment and building surfaces exposed to AFFF discharge.

3.8.3 Environmental Protection

Provide temporary measures to prevent AFFF from entering storm drains, sanitary sewers, drainage ditches, streams and water courses. Do not allow AFFF concentrate or solution to come in contact with earth. Contain all discharged AFFF on paved surfaces. Collect all discharged AFFF and rinse and flushing water and dispose of it in an EPA - approved waste-water treatment facility which provides secondary (biological) treatment. At least 15 days prior to the date flow testing is to take place, submit written plan for AFFF containment and disposal methods(s) to the Contracting Officer for approval.

3.8.4 Additional Tests

When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the tests required, all further testing of the system shall be suspended until proper adjustments, corrections or revisions have been made to assure proper performance of the system. If these revisions require more than a nominal delay, the Contracting Officer shall be notified when the additional work has been completed, to arrange a new inspection and test of the system. All tests required shall be repeated prior to final acceptance, unless directed otherwise.

3.8.5 AFFF Concentrate Storage Tanks Fill-Up

Fill storage tanks and piping normally containing concentrate when the system is in standby mode with Contractor furnished AFFF concentrate after acceptance of the system. Reserve foam shall be stored in the foam pump room.

3.8.6 Manufacturer's Representative

Provide the services of representatives or technicians from the manufacturers of the foam system, and control panel , and UV-IR detectors, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being provided, to supervise installation, adjustment, preliminary testing, and final testing of the system and to provide instruction to Government personnel.

3.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide operating instructions at control equipment and at each remote control station. Instructions shall clearly indicate all necessary steps for the operation of the system. Submit the proposed legend for operating instructions for approval prior to installation. Instructions shall be in engraved white letters on red rigid plastic or red enameled steel backgrounds and shall be of adequate size to permit them to be easily read.

SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 25


3.10 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide two sessions of 4 hours each of operation and maintenance training to the Base Fire Department and Public Works personnel on two different days to accommodate both shifts of the Base Fire Department. Each training session shall include emergency procedures, and unique maintenance and safety requirements. Training areas will be provided by the Government in the same building as the protected areas. The training conducted shall use operation and maintenance manuals specified in paragraph entitled "Operations and Maintenance Manuals". Dates and times of the training period shall be coordinated through the Contracting Officer not less than two weeks prior to the session.


SECTION 21 13 20.00 20 Page 26


SECTION 21 22 00.00 20

CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



ASME B16.11 (2005) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300


ASTM A 106/A 106M (2006a) Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service


FM GLOBAL (FM)




MSS SP-69 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application


NFPA 2001 (2008) Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems



NFPA 75 (2003; Errata 2003) Protection of Information Technology Equipment

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 1


NFPA 90A (2002; Errata 2003; Errata 2005) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems


MIL-STD-101 (Rev B) Color Code for Pipelines & for Compressed Gas Cylinders



FS A-A-58092 (Basic) Tape, Antiseize, Polytetrafluoroethylene

FS TT-P-645 (Rev B) Primer, Paint, Zinc-Molybdate, Alkyd Type



1.2 DEFINITION

a. Year 2000 compliant - means computer controlled facility components that accurately process date and time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations.


Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3.1 Description of Work

The work includes the designing and providing of approved Clean Agent underfloor and room flooding extinguishing system(s) for protection of the TOFT areas indicated on the contract drawings. The coverage shall include all areas with raised floors. Coverage includes below the raised floor and total flooding of the room enclosure. The design, equipment, materials, installation and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 2001, except as modified herein. Each system shall include all materials, accessories and equipment inside and outside the building necessary to provide each system complete and ready for use. Design and install each system to give full consideration to built-in spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork and all other construction and equipment and to be free from operating and maintenance difficulties, all in accordance with detailed drawings to be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval. Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be of a make and type listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or approved by the Factory Mutual System. In the publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the NAVFAC Mid-Atlantic Division

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 2


Fire Protection Engineer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

The fire protection engineer, Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command will review any approve all submittals in this section requiring Government approval.

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Clean Agent system piping layout; G

Field wiring diagrams; G

SD-03 Product Data

Storage cylinders; G

Discharge heads; G

Manifolds; G

Valves; G

Discharge nozzles; G

Pipe; G


Control panel; G

Manual actuation stations; G

Pressure switches; G


Smoke detectors; G

Audible alarms; G

Visual alarms; G

Annunciator panels; G

Electromagnetic door holder release; G

Battery charger; G

Fittings; G

SD-05 Design Data

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 3


Clean Agent discharge calculations; G

Battery capacity calculations; G

SD-07 Certificates

Record of Prior Installations; G

Year 2000 (Y2K) Compliance Warranty

Clean Agent fire extinguishing system; G


Clean Agent fire extinguishing system, Data Package 3; G



Remote control station operating instructions; G

Record drawings; G


1.5.1 Record of Prior Installations

Prior to installation, submit data showing of Pre-engineered Clean Agent fire extinguishing systems of the same type and design as specified herein. The data shall include the names and locations of at least two locations where the Contractor has installed such systems. The Contractor shall indicate the type and design of these systems and certify that these systems have performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 18 months.

Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, shop drawing and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of works specified herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum Level-IVcertification in Special Hazard System program. Contractor shall submit data for approval showing the name and certification of all involved individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of drawings.

Contractor shall have successfully installed Clean Agent fire extinguishing systems of the same type and design as specified herein.

1.5.2 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System

When preliminary field tests have been completed and all necessary corrections made, submit to the Contracting Officer a signed and dated letter attesting to the satisfactory completion of testing and stating that the systems is in operating condition. The letter shall include a written request for a formal inspection and test.

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 4



Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized representative or technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being provided to supervise the installation and testing, including final testing, adjustment of the system and to provide instruction to Government personnel.

1.6 DESIGN OF Clean Agent FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

Design and installation of Clean Agent fire extinguishing systems shall conform to NFPA 2001 , NFPA 70, NFPA 72, and NFPA 75 and to the requirements as hereinafter specified.

1.6.1 Piping Layout and Wiring Diagrams

Annotate Clean Agent system piping layout with reference points for design. In field wiring diagrams, show locations of devices and points of the system. Prepare working drawings on sheets not smaller than 30 by 42 inches, in accordance with the requirements for "Plans" as specified in NFPA 2001. Include data essential to the proper installation of each system.

1.6.2 Calculations

Submit Clean Agent discharge calculations verifying total storage requirements, flooding concentrations, discharge times, flow through the piping network, pipe sizes, and nozzle orifice sizes, in accordance with the manufacturer's listed design manual and NFPA 2001. Submit substantiating battery capacity calculations showing capacity, supervisory and alarm power requirements.

1.6.3 Flooding Concentration

The system shall totally flood the protected area(s) providing a volumetric concentration of Clean Agent as dictated by the manufacturer's recommendation at 70 degrees F.

1.6.3.1 Clean Agent Concentration

The Clean Agent concentration shall be based upon shutting down the heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems at the time of agent discharge. The required Clean Agent concentration shall be maintained in the protected area(s) for a minimum of ten minutes.

1.6.4 Discharge Time

The maximum Clean Agent discharge time shall be 10 seconds or as dictated by the manufacturer's recommendation.

1.6.5 Reserve Supplies

Each system shall be provided with its own connected reserve supply of Clean Agent. Each reserve supply shall contain an amount of Clean Agent equal to the primary supply of the system to which it is connected.

1.6.6 Record Drawings

Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 5


set of as-built (record) working drawings, including complete as-built circuit diagrams, of each Clean Agent system for record purposes. The as-built working drawings shall be not smaller than 30 by 42 inches reproducible drawings on mylar film with title block (8 by 4 inches) similar to full size contract drawings. The as-built working drawings shall be furnished in addition to the record drawings required by Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

1.7 SYSTEM CONTROL

Provide all apparatus, accessories, components and associated materials specified or necessary to furnish each system complete and ready for operation. All equipment shall be the current products of their manufacturers.

1.7.1 Controls

Detection and actuating control system shall be complete, Class A electrically supervised combination automatic and manual. Automatic actuation shall be accomplished by smoke sampling devices. Manual actuation shall be accomplished by electrical manual actuation stations.

1.7.2 Sequence of Operation

Smoke detection system shall be cross-zoned, priority matrix, or have common circuit individual detector verification capability. If a cross-zoned system is used, each protected area shall contain two smoke detection circuits (zones), with each circuit having an equal number of detectors connected thereto and no two adjacent detectors connected to the same zone. Upon activation of any smoke detector, the system shall simultaneously activate pre-discharge alarms in the protected area(s), signal the building fire alarm control panel(s) to activate the building fire evacuation alarms, and send a signal to the base fire department via the base fire alarm system. Upon activation of a second detector (on the opposite zone of a cross-zoned system), the systems shall immediately shut down computer equipment and air conditioning power, close all fire dampers release all doors to permit closing activate the discharge alarms, and initiate an adjustable 0-60 second time delay. At the end of the time delay, Clean Agent shall discharge into the protected area and the fire alarm notification system alarms shall activate.

1.7.2.1 Activation By Manual Station

Upon activation by a manual station, the system shall immediately perform all the above listed alarm functions and shut-down functions, and initiate the adjustable time delay. At the end of the delay, Clean Agent shall discharge into the protected area. Provide engraved instruction signs at each manual station.

1.7.2.2 Manual Activation of Inhibit Switch (Abort Switch)

Upon manual activation of the inhibit switch, equipment shutdown and agent discharge shall be delayed. All other functions shall continue unimpeded. Upon release of inhibit switch, shutdown and discharge functions shall resume. Time delay shall not reset and shall resume countdown to discharge after release of switch. Provide engraved instruction signs at each abort station.

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 6


1.7.3 Transfer to reserve supply

Transfer from system main supply to reserve supply shall be controlled by a "main-reserve" switch at the system control panel.

1.7.4 Remote Control Station Operating Instructions

Submit the proposed legend for remote control station operating instructions.

1.8 WARRANTY


For each product, component and system specified in this section as a "computer controlled facility component" provide a statement of Y2K compliance warranty for the specific equipment. The contractor warrants that each hardware, software, and firmware product delivered under this contract and listed below shall be able to accurately process date and time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000 and leap year calculations to the extent that other computer controlled components, used in combination with the computer controlled component being acquired, properly exchange data and time data with it. If the contract requires that specific listed products must perform as a system in accordance with the foregoing warranty, then that warranty shall apply to those listed products as a system. The duration of this warranty and the remedies available to the Government for breach of this warranty shall be defined in, and subject to, the terms and limitations of the contractor's standard commercial warranty or warranties contained in this contract, provided that, notwithstanding any provisions to the contrary, in such commercial warranty or warranties, the remedies available to the Government under this warranty shall include repair or replacement of any listed product whose non-compliance is discovered and made known to the contractor in writing within one year (365 days) after acceptance. Nothing in this warranty shall be construed to limit any rights or remedies the Government may otherwise have under this contract, with respect to defects other that Year 2000 performance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Y2K COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Provide computer controlled facility components, specified in this section, that are Year 2000 compliant (Y2K). Computer controlled facility components refers to software driven technology and embedded microchip technology. This includes, but in not limited to, telecommunications switches, programmable thermostats, HVAC controllers, elevator controllers, utility monitoring and control systems, fire detection and suppression systems, alarms, security systems, traffic signals, and other facilities control systems utilizing microcomputer, minicomputer, or programmable logic controllers.

2.2 PIPING

Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible. Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for all connections. Make changes in piping sizes through standard reducing pipe fittings; the use of bushings is not

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 7


permitted.

2.2.1 Pipe

ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, black or zinc-coated, threaded, Schedule 40.

2.2.2 Fittings

ASME B16.11 or ASME B16.3, Class 300, zinc-coated, threaded, except Class 150 or 300 for pipe 3/4 inch or smaller.


MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, adjustable type. Rods, hangers and supports shall be zinc plated. Provide pipe hangers and supports as follows:

Nominal Pipe Maximum Size (inches) Spacing (feet)

1 and under 7 1.25 8 1.5 9 2 10 2.5 11 3 12 3.5 13 4 14 5 15 6 16

2.2.4 Pipe Sleeves

Provide where piping passes through masonry or concrete walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Sleeves in outside walls below and above grade, in floor, and in roof slabs, shall be standard weight zinc coated steel pipe. Sleeves in partitions shall be zinc coated sheet steel having a nominal weight of not less than 0.90 pounds per square foot. Space between piping and the sleeve, shall be not less than 0.5 inch. Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to pass through the entire thickness of walls, partitions and slabs. Extend sleeves in floor slabs 2 inches above the finished floor. Pack space between the pipe and sleeve with asbestos free insulation and calk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement.


Provide piping passing through floors, walls and ceilings with one piece or split type plates. Plates where pipe passes through finished ceilings shall be chromium plated. Other plates shall be of steel or cast iron, with aluminum paint finish. Securely anchor plates in place.

2.2.6 Discharge Nozzles

Fabricated of corrosion resistant materials. All nozzles shall be designed so that the orifice piece is connected directly to the supply pipe. The size of pipe and nozzles shall be determined from the calculated flow and terminal pressures in accordance with established, recognized test data contained in the manufacturer's listed design manual.

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 8


2.2.7 Storage Cylinders

Constructed of high strength alloy steel, conforming to all applicable specifications of the Department of Transportation. Container design shall permit on-site reconditioning and refilling when required. Safety valves, manifolds, pressure gauges, and pressure switches shall be provided.

2.2.8 Jointing Compound

Tape conforming to FS A-A-58092.

2.3 CONTROL PANEL

Provide complete electrical supervision of all circuits. Install modular type panel in a surface mounted steel cabinet with hinged door and cylinder lock. Switches and other controls shall not be accessible without the use of a key. The control panel shall be a neat, compact, factory-wired assembly containing all parts and equipment required to provide specified operating and supervisory functions of the system. Panel cabinet shall be finished on the inside and outside with factory-applied enamel finish. Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door for each zone initiating circuit. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for all lamps and switches. A single open or ground fault condition in any detection or actuation circuit shall not result in any loss of system function, but shall cause the actuation of system trouble signals. A ground fault condition or single break in any other circuit shall result in the activation of the system trouble signals. Loss of AC power, a break in the standby battery power circuits, or abnormally low battery voltage shall also result in the operation of the system trouble signals. The abnormal position of any system switch in the control panel shall also result in the operation of the system trouble signals. Trouble signals shall operate continuously until the system has been restored to normal at the control panel. Provide a 4 inch remote system trouble bell, installed where shown, arranged to operate in conjunction with the integral trouble signals of the panel. Provide remote bell with a rigid plastic or metal identification sign which reads "Clean Agent System Trouble." Lettering on identification sign shall be a minimum of one inch high. Panel shall be provided with the following switches:

1. Trouble silencing switch which transfers trouble signals to an indicating lamp. Upon correction of the trouble condition, audible signals will again sound until the switch is returned to its normal position, or the trouble circuit shall be automatically restored to normal upon correction of the trouble condition.

2. Evacuation alarm silence switch which when activated will silence all alarm devices and cause operation of system trouble signals.

System control panel shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved for extinguishing system control (releasing device service).

2.4 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY

Supply shall include nickel cadmium, lead calcium or sealed lead acid batteries and charger. Drycell batteries are not allowed. House batteries in a well constructed steel cabinet with cylinder lock.

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 9


2.4.1 Storage Batteries

Provide batteries of adequate ampere-hour rating to operate the system under supervisory conditions for 60 hours at the end of which time batteries shall be capable of operating the entire system in a full alarm condition for not less than 30 minutes. Provide calculations substantiating the battery capacity. Provide reliable separation between cells to prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells and between battery terminals and other metal parts.

2.4.2 Battery Charger

Provide completely automatic high/low charging rate type charger capable of recovery of the batteries from full discharge to full charge in 24 hours or less. Provide an ammeter for recording rate of charge and a voltmeter to indicate the state of battery charge. Provide a red pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high-rate switch is provided.

2.5 MANUAL ACTUATION STATIONS

Provide actuation stations for systems at the exits from the protected areas. Operation of a manual station shall cause the control panel to go into full alarm condition and discharge Clean Agent into the protected area following the adjustable time delay. Provide separate, clearly labelled, manual stations for control of underfloor discharge and room flooding. Stations shall be of a type not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall have a dual action release configuration to prevent accidental system discharge. Break-glass-front stations are not permitted; however a pull lever break-glass-rod type is acceptable. Station color shall be red or orange. Warning signs shall be placed at each station indicating that operation of the station will cause immediate Clean Agent discharge. Where building fire alarm pull stations are also mounted at the exits from the protected areas, they shall be separated from Clean Agent actuation stations by at least 3 feet horizontally, labels shall be provided to clearly distinguish building fire alarm stations from Clean Agent stations and stations shall be yellow in color or a color approved by NAVFAC Mid-Atlantic Fire Protection.

2.6 AIR SAMPLING SMOKE DETECTORS

Designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the ionization principle. Necessary control and/or power modules required for operation of the device shall be integral with the main control panel. Detectors shall be compatible with main control panel provided and shall be suitable for use in a supervised circuit. Detectors shall not draw power from the initiating circuit. Operating power shall be taken from a separate supervised power supply circuit. Malfunction of the electrical circuitry to the detector or its control or power units shall result in the operation of the system trouble devices. Detectors shall not be susceptible to operation by changes in relative humidity. Each detector shall contain a visible indicator lamp that shall show when the unit is activated. Each detector shall be the plug-in type in which the detector base contains screw terminals for making all wiring connections. Remote indicator lamp shall be provided for each detector that is located above suspended ceilings, beneath raised floors or otherwise concealed from view.

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 10


2.6.1 Ionization Detectors

Multiple chamber type which is responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. The sensitivity of each detector shall be field adjustable to compensate for the conditions under which it is to operate.

2.6.2 Photoelectric Detectors

Operate on a multiple cell concept using a light-emitting diode (LED) light source. Failure of the LED shall not cause an alarm condition but shall operate the detector trouble indicating lamp.

2.6.3 Detector Spacing and Location

In accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72, the manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements stated herein. Spacing and location of detectors shall take into account the airflow into the room and supply diffusers. Detectors shall not be placed closer than 5 feet from any discharge grille. Spacing of detectors on room ceilings shall not exceed 450 square feet per detector. Spacing of detectors under raised floors shall not exceed 250 square feet per detector. Detectors installed beneath raised floors shall be mounted with the detector base within 2 inches of the underside of the raised floor framing, with the detector facing downward. Where the space under the raised floor is less than 12 inches in height, detectors shall be mounted with their bases either horizontal or vertical, with the detection chambers mounted in the upper half of the underfloor space. Under no circumstances shall detectors be mounted facing upward.

2.7 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS

In accordance with the requirements of NFPA 90A, the manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements stated herein. Detectors required in ducts shall be ionization type and listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825for duct installation. Provide duct detectors with an approved duct housing, mounted exterior to the duct, with perforated sampling tubes extending across the width of the duct. Activation of duct detectors shall cause shut down of the associated air-handling unit, annunciation at the control panel, tripping of the transmitter, and sounding of building fire evacuation alarms. Detector shall have a test port or switch.

2.8 INHIBIT SWITCH

Provide where shown. Activation of switch shall delay only equipment shutdown and agent discharge. Switch shall be guarded, spring-loaded type which operates only when pressure is manually applied to the switch. Upon release of manual pressure, switch shall de-activate allowing delayed functions to resume. After start of agent discharge, switch shall have no effect. Activation of switch during normal (non-alarm) conditions shall cause activation of system trouble signals.

2.9 ALARM SIGNALLING DEVICES

Provide each protected area with audible and visual alarms located where shown. All alarm circuits shall be electrically supervised. Provide separate and distinct audible and visual pre-discharge and discharge signals. Where the building is equipped with a separate fire evacuation alarm system the discharge signals shall also be distinct from those used by the building fire evacuation system. Each signal device shall be

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 11


provided with a rigid plastic or metal identification sign with lettering a minimum of 1.5 inches high. The pre-discharge alarm shall be labelled "FIRE" and the discharge alarm shall be labelled "Clean Agent DISCHARGE."

2.9.1 Audible Alarms

a. Alarm bells

10 inch surface mounted with matching mounting back box. Bells shall be of the vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Bells shall be of the underdome type and produce a sound output rating of at least 90 decibels at 10 feet.

b. Alarm horns

Surface mounted, vibrating type suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit and shall have a sound output rating of at least 90 decibels at 10 feet.

2.9.2 Visual Alarms

Flush lamp assembly suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Lamp shall be the flashing rotary beacon type and powered from the control panel alarm circuit. Lamps shall provide a minimum of 50 candle power. Flash rate shall be between 60 and 120 flashes per minute. Lamps shall be protected by a thermo-plastic lens, red for pre-discharge alarms and blue for discharge alarms.

2.10 MAIN ANNUNCIATOR

Annunciator shall be integral with the main control panel. Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps for each zone alarm initiating circuit located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet door. Supervision will not be required provided a fault in the annunciator circuits results only in loss of annunciation and will not affect the normal functional operation of the remainder of the system. Each lamp shall provide specific identification of the area by means of a permanent label. In no case shall zone identification consist of the words "Zone 1," "Zone 2," etc., but shall consist of the description of the area.

2.10.1 Annunciation Zones

Shall be arranged as follows:

2.10.2 Annunciator Panels

a. Remote annunicator panels

Locate as shown. Panel shall duplicate all requirements specified for the main control panel annunciator, except that in lieu of individual zone trouble lamps a single common system trouble lamp may be provided. Panel shall have a lamp test switch. Zone identification shall be by means of permanently attached rigid plastic or metal plate(s). Panel shall be of the interior type, surface .

b. Graphic Annunciator Panel

Locate as directed by the Contracting Officer. Panel shall be of the interior type, surface -mounted. Panel shall be provided with the room

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 12


floor plan, drawn to scale, with remote alarm lamps mounted to represent the location of each concealed detectoreach alarm in initiating device. Principal rooms and areas shown shall be labelled with their room numbers or titles. The panel location shall be shown on the floor plan. Detectors mounted above ceilings, on ceilings, and beneath raised floors and different types of initiating devices shall have different symbols or lamps of different colors for identification. Lamps shall illuminate upon actuation of their corresponding device and shall remain illuminated until the system is reset. Panel shall have a lamp test switch.

2.11 AUTOMATIC FIRE DAMPERS

Provide automatic control of fire dampers in air conditioning supply duct work as specified in Section 23 09 53.00 20 SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS. Activation of fire dampers shall occur upon second zone detection, or upon activation of Clean Agent discharge by manual pull station. Fire dampers are specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS. Provide heaters for fusible links.

2.12 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER RELEASE

The armature portion shall be mounted on the door and shall have an adjusting screw for setting the angle of the contact plate. The electro-magnetic release shall be wall mounted, with a total horizontal projection not exceeding 4 inches. All doors shall release to close upon first stage (pre-discharge) alarm. Electrical supervision of wiring external of control panel for magnetic door holding circuits is not required.

2.13 ELECTRICAL WORK

Electrical work is specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for control and fire alarm wiring.

2.13.1 Wiring

Control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to fire alarm systems, shall be provided under this section and shall conform to NFPA 70. Wiring for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 12 AWG minimum. Wiring for low voltage DC circuits shall be No. 14 AWG minimum. All wiring shall be color coded. Use rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations not enclosed in concrete and where not subject to mechanical damage.

2.13.2 Operating Power

Power shall be 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding isolation type transformer and rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of all signal initiating, signal sounding, trouble signal and transmitter tripping circuits. Provide secondary DC power supply for operation of system in the event of failure of the AC supply. Transfer from normal to emergency power or restoration from emergency to normal power shall be fully automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm. Obtain AC operating power to control panel and battery charger from the line side of the incoming building power source ahead of all building services. Provide independent properly fused safety switch, with provisions for locking the cover and operating handle in the "POWER ON" position for these connections and locate adjacent to the main distribution panel. Paint

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 13


switch box red and suitably identify by a lettered designation.

2.13.3 Conductor Identification

All circuit conductors shall be identified within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made. Conductor identification shall be by plastic coated self sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type sleeves. Attach the markers in a manner that will not permit accidental detachment. Properly identify control circuit terminations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION

Cut screw-jointed pipe accurately and work into place without springing or forcing. Ream pipe ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assembly. Make screw joints with tetrafluoroethylene tape applied to male thread only.

3.2 FIELD PAINTING

Clean, pretreat, prime, and finish paint new Clean Agent fire extinguishing systems, including piping, conduit, hangers and miscellaneous metalwork. Apply coatings only to clean, dry, surfaces using clean brushes. Clean surfaces to remove all dust, dirt, rust and loose mill scale. Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces shall receive one coat of primer conforming to FS TT-P-645 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil. Exercise due care to avoid the painting of operating devices. Materials which are used to protect devices, while painting is in process, shall be removed upon the completion of painting. Remove all devices which are painted and provide new clean devices of the proper type in lieu thereof.

3.2.1 Systems in Unfinished Areas

Unfinished areas are defined as attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, spaces under raised floors, crawl spaces, pipe chases, and spaces where walls or ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a prefinished material. Primed surfaces shall receive one coat of red enamel conforming to FS A-A-2962 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil and color coded in accordance with MIL-STD-101.

3.2.2 Systems in All Other Areas

Primed surfaces shall receive two coats of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except stop valves and accessories shall receive one coat of red enamel conforming to FS A-A-2962 applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil. Provide piping with 2 inch wide red bands spaced at maximum of 20 feet intervals throughout the piping systems, except in finished areas such as offices, the red bands may be deleted. Red bands shall be red enamel or self adhering red plastic tape and color coded in accordance with MIL-STD-101.

3.3 FIELD TESTING

Perform tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the specified requirements.

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 14



Each piping system shall be pneumatically tested at 150 psig and shall show no leakage or reduction in gage pressure after 30 minutes. The contractor shall conduct complete preliminary tests, which shall encompass all aspects of system operation. Individually test all detectors, manual actuation stations, alarms, control panels, and all other components and accessories to demonstrate proper functioning.

3.3.2 Formal Inspection and Tests

The Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will witness formal tests and approve all systems before they are accepted. The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer's technical representative and the Contracting Officer.Submit the request for formal inspection at least 15 days prior to the date the inspection is to take place. The control panel(s) and detection system(s) shall be in service for a "break-in" period of at least 15 consecutive days prior to the formal inspection. Experienced technicians regularly employed by the contractor in the installation of both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems shall be present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All Clean Agent , instruments, personnel, appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by the contractor. All necessary tests encompassing all aspects of system operation shall be made including the following, and any deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested at no cost to the Government.

3.3.2.1 System Function Tests Without Clean Agent Discharge

The entire detection/alarm/actuation system shall be operated. As a minimum, operation and supervision of the following functions and devices shall be demonstrated.

a. All operational and supervisory functions of the control and annunciator panels, including the cross-zoning, pre-discharge alarm, discharge alarm and time delay features.

b. Each manual actuation station and associated circuit(s).

c. All smoke detectors and associated circuits.

d. All pre-discharge ,and discharge alarms and associated circuits.

e. All actuator circuits and discharge heads (without Clean Agent discharge).

f. Air handing and computer equipment shutdown.

g. Automatic fire dampers.

h. Activation of the building fire evacuation alarm system.

i. Activation of the Base fire alarm system (receipt of fire alarm at alarm office).

j. All of the above tests shall be repeated with the system on battery power only.

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 15


3.3.2.2 Clean Agent Discharge Tests

When all of the detection/alarm/actuation, and supervisory functions of the system operate to the satisfaction of manufacturer's technical representative, the Division Fire Protection Engineer, and the Contracting Officer, a complete discharge test of Clean Agent system shall be performed to demonstrate satisfactory performance, Clean Agent concentration, uniformity of Clean Agent concentration, system discharge time, mechanical operation and operation of valves, release devices, alarms, and interlocks which control the protected area. Clean Agent shall be used for this test; substitution of agents is not permitted. This test shall be conducted by experienced personnel according to the equipment and Clean Agent manufacturer's recommendations. All personal required to be in the protected area during or immediately after the test shall wear self-contained, positive pressure breathing apparatus. Contractor shall provide all breathing apparatus, except apparatus for Government personnel shall be provided by the Government. Clean Agent concentration shall be monitored at a minimum of 3 sampling points in each protected area. Provide a calibrated strip chart recorder for continuous recording of concentrations at each monitoring point. Table 1 at end of this section shall be completed using observations taken during this test.

3.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide operating instructions at each remote control station. Instructions shall clearly indicate all necessary steps for the operation of the system. Instructions shall be in raised or embossed white letters on red rigid plastic or red enameled steel backgrounds and shall be of adequate size to permit them to be easily read.

3.5 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance training to the Base Fire Department Public Works TOFT building personnel. Each training session shall include emergency procedures, and unique maintenance and safety requirements. Training areas will be provided by the Government in the same building as the protected areas. The training conducted shall use operation and maintenance manuals called for in paragraph entitled "Operation and Maintenance Instructions, Parts and Testing." Dates and times of the training period shall be coordinated through the Contracting Officer not less then two weeks prior to the session. Government shall be provided with a simplified training manual providing a description of operation and controls, possible hazards to personnel, and restart procedures for computers and air handling units.

SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 16


TABLE I

Clean Agent DATA (EACH ROOM & UNDER FLOOR)

Date:____________

Room Description ___________________________________________________________ Dimensions (Ft) Length ______________ Height ______________ Width __________ Area ______________ Sq Ft Volume ________________________________ Ventilation Rate into Room ____________ Cubic Feet per Minute Specific Volume At Design Temp. ____________________________________________ Design Temp. ______________ Deg F Max. Temp Expected ______________ Deg F Percent Design Concentration _________ lbs Required ______________ Number of Nozzles ______________ Sq Ft/Nozzle _____________________ Lbs to be Supplied/Nozzle ____________(Based on no air flow) Discharge Time _________________________ Concentration at Design Temperature ______________________ percent Concentration at Max Temperature ___________________________ percent

Concentration Point A Point B Point C 0 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 5 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 10 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 15 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 20 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 25 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 30 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 40 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 50 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 60 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ 120 Seconds after end of Discharge percent C __________ __________ __________ Agent Tanks to be Supplied for test use ________________________Lb Each Free Venting Requirements __________ lbs/SF allowable strength this requires ___________ sq. in. free venting area


SECTION 21 22 00.00 20 Page 17


SECTION 21 30 00

FIRE PUMPS04/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater

AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites

AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine

AWWA C104/A21.4 (2003) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C110/A21.10 (2003) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water

AWWA C111/A21.11 (2000) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C151/A21.51 (2002; Errata 2002) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water

AWWA C500 (2002; R 2003) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service


ASME B16.11 (2005) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B16.21 (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

ASME B16.26 (2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes


ASME B16.39 (1998; R 2006) Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250, and 300

ASME B16.5 (2003) Standard for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24



ASME B16.9 (2003) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B31.1 (2007) Power Piping


ASTM A 183 (2003) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

ASTM A 193/A 193M (2007) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A 194/A 194M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both

ASTM A 449 (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use

ASTM A 47/A 47M (2004) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings


ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2004) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A 795/A 795M (2007) Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use

ASTM B 135 (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for Seamless Brass Tube

ASTM B 42 (2002e1) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

ASTM B 88 (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM C 533 (2007) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

ASTM D 3308 (2006) PTFE Resin Skived Tape

ASTM F 436 (2007) Hardened Steel Washers

FM GLOBAL (FM)

FM P7825a (2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection



FM P7825b (2005) Approval Guide Electrical Equipment




MSS SP-80 (2003) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves




NFPA 1963 (2003) Standard for Fire Hose Connections

NFPA 20 (2006) Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection





UL 1247 (2007) Diesel Engines for Driving Centrifugal Fire Pumps

UL 142 (2006; Rev thru Dec 2007) Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids


UL 448 (2007) Pumps for Fire-Protection Service

UL 80 (2007) Steel Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel



a. Provide an electric fire pump for the Ordnance operations building. The pump shall be located in the riser room as indicated on the contract documents. Hangar 130 will utilized existing fire pumps in building 122 for the water supply. Provide foam concentrate pumps



as specified in this specification and the Foam Fire Exinguishing for Aircraft Hangars, Specification 21 13 20.00 20. Except as modified in this Section, other specifications, or on the drawings, install fire pumps in conformance with NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and NFPA 72, including all recommendations and advisory portions, which shall be considered mandatory; this includes advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it appears. In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification governs. Devices and equipment for fire protection service shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825a approved. Interpret all reference to the authority having jurisdiction to mean the Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer for Navy projects.

b. Tank supports, piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories required shall be furnished as specified to provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other construction.

c. Show detail plan view of the pump room including elevations and sections showing the fire pumps, associated equipment, and piping. Show piping schematic of pumps, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. Show piping layout and sensing piping arrangement. Show engine fuel and cooling system. Include:

(1) Pumps, drivers, and controllers

(2) Hose valve manifold test header

(3) Circuit diagrams for pumps

(4) Wiring diagrams of each controller

d. Post operating instructions for pumps, drivers, controllers, and flow meters.

e. Fully enclose or properly guard coupling, rotating parts, gears, projecting equipment, etc. so as to prevent possible injury to persons that come in close proximity of the equipment. Conduct testing of the fire pumps in a safe manner and ensure that all equipment is safely secured. Hoses and nozzles used to conduct flow tests shall be in excellent condition and shall be safely anchored and secured to prevent any misdirection of the hose streams.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


The Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will review and approve all submittals in this section requiring Government approval.

Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Requirements; G



Three copies of the Fire Pump Installation Drawings consisting of a detailed plan view, detailed elevations and sections of the pump room, equipment and piping, drawn to a scale of not less than 1/2 inch = 1 foot. Drawings shall indicate equipment, piping, and associated pump equipment to scale. All clearance, such as those between piping and equipment; between equipment and walls, ceiling and floors; and for electrical working distance clearance around all electrical equipment shall be indicated. Drawings shall include a legend identifying all symbols, nomenclatures, and abbreviations. Drawings shall indicate a complete piping and equipment layout including elevations and/or section views of the following:

a. Fire pumps, controllers, piping, valves, and associated equipment.

b. Sensing line for each pump including the pressure maintenance pump.

c. Engine fuel system for diesel driven pumps.

d. Engine cooling system for diesel driven pumps.

e. Pipe hangers and sway bracing including support for diesel muffler and exhaust piping.

f. Restraint of underground water main at entry-and exit-points to the building including details of pipe clamps, tie rods, mechanical retainer glands, and thrust blocks.

g. A one-line schematic diagram indicating layout and sizes of all piping, devices, valves and fittings.

h. A complete point-to-point connection drawing of the pump power, control and alarm systems, as well as interior wiring schematics of each controller.

As-Built Drawings; G

As-built drawings, as specified.

Piping Layout and Sensing piping Arrangement; GPump Room; G

Prepare working drawings on sheets not smaller than 24 by 36 inches; include data for the proper installation of each system.

SD-03 Product Data

Fire Pump Installation Related Submittals

A list of the Fire Pump Installation Related Submittals, no later than 7 days after the approval the Manufacturer's Representative.

Installation Requirements; G

Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Fire Pump



Installation Drawings for each separate piece of equipment proposed for use in the system. Catalog data shall indicate the name of the manufacturer of each item of equipment, with data annotated to indicate model to be provided. In addition, a complete equipment list that includes equipment description, model number and quantity shall be provided. Catalog data for material and equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Fire pumps, drivers and controllers including manufacturer's certified shop test characteristic curve for each pump. Shop test curve may be submitted after approval of catalog data but shall be submitted prior to the final tests.

b. Pressure maintenance pump and controller.

c. Piping components.

d. Valves, including gate, check, globe and relief valves.

e. Gauges.

f. Hose valve manifold test header and hose valves.

g. Flow meter.

h. Restrictive orifice union.

i. Associated devices and equipment.

Spare Parts

Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified.

Preliminary Tests

Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, at least 14days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time to begin Preliminary Tests, submitted with the Preliminary Tests Procedures.

Field Tests; G

Proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related testing.

Manufacturer's Representative; G

The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Manufacturer's Representative.

Field Training; G

Proposed schedule for field training submitted at least 14 days prior to the start of related training.

Navy Formal Inspection and Tests



Proposed date and time to begin Navy Formal Inspection and Tests, submitted with the Acceptance Procedures. Notification shall be provided at least 21 days prior to the proposed start of the test. Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material & Test Certificates.

SD-06 Test Reports

Preliminary Tests; G

Three copies of the completed Preliminary Tests Reports, no later that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed by the the Manufacturer's Representative.

Navy Formal Inspection and Tests; G

Three copies of the completed Navy Formal Inspection and Tests Reports, no later that 7 days after the completion of the tests. All items in the reports shall be signed by the and the Manufacturer's Representative. Test reports in booklet form (each copy furnished in a properly labeled three ring binder) showing all field tests and measurements taken during the preliminary and final testing, and documentation that proves compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion of the installation and final testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of the controls and pressure switches. The test reports shall include the description of the hydrostatic test conducted on the piping and flushing of the suction and discharge piping. A copy of the manufacturer's certified pump curve for each fire pump shall be included in the report.

SD-07 Certificates

Qualifications of Welders; GQualifications of Installer; G

Certificates of qualifications, as specified.

Preliminary Test Certification; G

Request for formal inspection and tests, as specified.


Fire Pumps

Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14 days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and recommended service organization (including address and telephone



number) for each item of equipment. Data Package 3 shall be submitted for fire pumps and drivers in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.


1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist

section not used

1.4.2 Qualifications of Welders

Submit certificates of each welder's qualifications prior to site welding; certifications shall not be more than one year old.


Prior to installation, submit data for approval showing that the Contractor has successfully installed fire pumps and associated equipment of the same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having such required experience. The data shall include the names and locations of at least two installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 18 months.

1.4.4 Preliminary Test Certification

When preliminary tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed and dated certificate with a request for a formal inspection and tests.


Work specified in this section shall be performed under the supervision of and certified by a representative of the fire pump manufacturer. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be regularly engaged in the installation of the type and complexity of fire pump(s) specified in the Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.


Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, excessive humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes shall be either capped or plugged until installed.

1.6 SEQUENCING

1.6.1 Primary Fire Pump

Primary fire pump for the Ordnance OPS building shall automatically upon tripping of the sprinkler systemor manually when the starter is operated. Pump shall continue to run until shut down manually.



1.6.2 Pressure Maintenance Pump

Pressure maintenance pump for the ordnance building shall operate when the system pressure drops to 64 psi. Pump shall automatically stop when the system pressure reaches 74 psi and after the pump has operated for the minimum pump run time specified herein.

The AFFF jockey pump shall be a vertical shaft, turbine type. All seats and seals shall be made of materials that are suitable for use with AFFF concentrate. Pump shall draft from the suction supply of the concentrate fire pumps on the upstream side of the fire pump suction shutoff valve and shal discharge into the system on the downstream side of the pump discharge gate valve. Provide pressure gage and an approved check valve in the maintenance pump discharge outlet.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

Submit Spare Parts data for each different item of equipment and material specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of service. Include a list of special tools and test equipment required for maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

a. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.

b. All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, contract number and accepted date; capacity or size; system in which installed and system which it controls and catalog number. Pumps and motors shall have standard nameplates securely affixed in a conspicuous place and easy to read. Fire pump shall have nameplates and markings in accordance with UL 448. Diesel driver shall have nameplate and markings in accordance with UL 1247. Electric motor nameplates shall provide the minimum information required by NFPA 70, Section 430-7.

2.2 FIRE PUMP

The Ordnance Fire pump shall be electric motor driven. Each pump capacity shall be rated at 1000 gpm with a rated net pressure of 50 psi. Fire pump shall furnish not less than 150 percent of rated flow capacity at not less than 65 percent of rated net pressure. Pump shall be centrifugal horizontal split case fire pump. Horizontal pump shall be equipped with automatic air release devices. The maximum rated pump speed shall be 2100 rpm when driving the pump at rated capacity. Pump shall be automatic start and manual stop. Pump shall conform to the requirements of UL 448. Fire pump discharge and suction gauges shall be oil-filled type.

For the Hangar, provide two electric motor driven fire pumps. Pumps shall be automatic start and manual stop. Each pump capacity at a rated head shall be 130 gpm at a discharge pressure of 150 psi. Each pump shall furnish not less than 150 percent of the rated capacity at not less than 65



percent of total rated head. Pumps shal be of the positive displacment type, drip proof, 480 V, 60 Hz. maximum pump, motor and engine speed shall be 1800 rpm.

2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE

2.3.1 General Requirements

Materials and Equipment shall have been tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by Factory Mutual and listed in FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b.

2.3.2 Alarms

Provide audible and visual alarms as required by NFPA 20 on the controller. Provide remote supervision as required by NFPA 20, in accordance with NFPA 72 under Section 28 31 74.20 Fire Alarm. Provide remote alarm devices outside of the fire pump room for the hangar. For the Ordnance building, send signals to the Base Fire Department and fire alarm panel. Alarm signal shall be activated upon the following conditions: electric motor controller has operated into a pump running condition, loss of electrical power to electric motor starter, and phase reversal on line side of motor starter. Exterior alarm devices shall be weatherproof type. Provide alarm silencing switch and red signal lamp, with signal lamp arranged to come on when switch is placed in OFF position.

2.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS


Provide outside-coated, cement mortar-lined, ductile-iron pipe (with a rated working pressure of 175 psi) conforming to NFPA 24 for piping under the building and less than 5 feet outside of the building walls. Anchor the joints in accordance with NFPA 24; provide concrete thrust block at the elbow where the pipe turns up toward the floor, and restrain the pipe riser with steel rods from the elbow to the flange above the floor. Minimum pipe size shall be 6 inches. Minimum depth of cover shall be as required by NFPA 24, but no less than 3 feet. Piping more than 5 feet outside of the building walls shall be outside coated, AWWA C104/A21.4 cement mortar-lined, AWWA C151/A21.51 ductile-iron pipe, and AWWA C110/A21.10 fittings conforming to NFPA 24 and as provided under Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.

2.4.2 Fittings and Gaskets

Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10. Gaskets shall be suitable in design and size for the pipe with which such gaskets are to be used. Gaskets for ductile iron pipe joints shall conform to AWWA C111/A21.11.

2.4.3 Valves and Valve Boxes

Valves shall be gate valves conforming to AWWA C500 or UL 262. Valves shall have cast-iron body and bronze trim. Valve shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Except for post indicator valves, all underground valves shall be provided with an adjustable cast-iron or ductile iron valve box of a size suitable for the valve on which the box is



to be used, but not less than 5.25 inches in diameter. The box shall be coated with bituminous coating. A cast-iron or ductile-iron cover with the word "WATER" cast on the cover shall be provided for each box.

2.4.4 Gate Valve and Indicator Posts

Gate valves for underground installation shall be of the inside screw type with counterclockwise rotation to open. Where indicating type valves are shown or required, indicating valves shall be gate valves with an approved indicator post of a length to permit the top of the post to be located 3 feet above finished grade. Gate valves and indicator posts shall be provided with one coat of primer and two coats of red enamel paint and shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b.


Detectable aluminum foil plastic-backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried piping shall be provided for all buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Tape shall be provided in rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color-coded for the utility involved and imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over the entire tape length. Warning and identification shall be "CAUTION BURIED WATER PIPING BELOW" or similar wording. Code and lettering shall be permanent and unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in the trench backfill material. Tape shall be buried at a depth of 12 inches below the top surface of earth or the top surface of the subgrade under pavement.

2.5 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS

2.5.1 Pipe Sizes 2.5 inches and Larger

2.5.1.1 Pipe

Piping shall be ASTM A 53/A 53M, Weight Class STD (Standard), Schedule 40 (except for Schedule 10 for pipe sizes 3 inchesand greater in diameter), Type E or Type S, Grade A; black steel pipe. Steel pipe shall be joined by means of flanges welded to the pipe or mechanical grooved joints only. Piping shall not be jointed by welding or weld fittings. Suction piping shall be galvanized on the inside per NFPA 20.

2.5.1.2 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings

Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 and shall be cadmium plated or zinc electroplated.

2.5.1.3 Flanges

Flanges shall be ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanges. Flanges shall be provided at valves, connections to equipment, and where indicated.

2.5.1.4 Gaskets

Gaskets shall be AWWA C111/A21.11, cloth inserted red rubber gaskets.



2.5.1.5 Bolts

Bolts shall be ASTM A 449, Type 1. Bolts shall extend no less than three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required torque.

2.5.1.6 Nuts

Nuts shall be ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 7.

2.5.1.7 Washers

Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.

2.5.2 Piping Sizes 2 inches and Smaller

2.5.2.1 Steel Pipe

Steel piping shall be ASTM A 795/A 795M, Weight Class STD (Standard), Schedule 40, Type E or Type S, Grade A, zinc-coated steel pipe with threaded end connections. Fittings shall be ASME B16.3, Class 150, zinc-coated threaded fittings. Unions shall be ASME B16.39, Class 150, zinc-coated unions.

2.5.2.2 Copper Tubing

Copper tubing shall be ASTM B 88, Type L or K, soft annealed. Fittings shall be ASME B16.26, flared joint fittings. Pipe nipples shall be ASTM B 42 copper pipe with threaded end connections.


Pipe hangers and support shall beMSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b and shall be the adjustable type. Finish of rods, nuts, washers, hangers, and supports shall be zinc-plated after fabrication.

2.5.4 Valves

Valves shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b for fire protection service. Valves shall have flange or threaded end connections.

2.5.4.1 Gate Valves and Control Valves

Gate valves and control valves shall be outside screw and yoke (O.S.&Y.) type which open by counterclockwise rotation. Butterfly-type control valves are not permitted.

2.5.4.2 Tamper Switch

The suction control valves, the discharge control valves, valves to test header and flow meter, and the by-pass control valves shall be equipped with valve tamper switches for monitoring by the fire alarm system.

2.5.4.3 Check Valve

Check valve shall be clear open, swing type check valve with flange or



threaded inspection plate.

2.5.4.4 Relief Valve

Relief valve type conforming to NFPA 20. A means of detecting water motion in the relief lines shall be provided where the discharge is not visible within the pump house.

2.5.4.5 Circulating Relief Valve

An adjustable circulating relief valve shall be provided for each fire pump in accordance with NFPA 20.

2.5.4.6 Suction Pressure Regulating Valve

Suction pressure regulating valve shall be FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Suction pressure shall be monitored through a pressure line to the controlling mechanism of the regulating valve. Valve shall be arranged in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2.5.5 Hose Valve Manifold Test Header

Construct header of steel pipe. Provide ASME B16.5, Class 150 flanged inlet connection to hose valve manifold assembly. Provide approved bronze hose gate valve with 2.5 inch National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain; locate 3 feet above grade in the horizontal position for each test header outlet. Welding shall be metallic arc process in accordance with ASME B31.1.

2.5.6 Pipe Sleeves

A pipe sleeve shall be provided at each location where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors, including pipe entering buildings from the exterior. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, and floors. Provide one inch minimum clearance between exterior of piping or pipe insulation, and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors, a fire seal shall be provided between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

a. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Ceilings, Roofs, and Floors: Provide hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron pipe sleeves. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves provided that cavities in the core-drilled hole be completely grouted smooth.

b. Sleeves in Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls, Ceilings, Roofs, and Floors: Provide galvanized steel sheet pipe not less than 0.90 psf.


Provide one-piece or split-hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed areas. Provide polished stainless steel or chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces. Plates shall be secured in



place.

2.6 DISINFECTING MATERIALS

2.6.1 Liquid Chlorine

Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.

2.6.2 Hypochlorites

Calcium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.

2.7 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVER

Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall be provided with their respective pieces of equipment, as specified herein and shall have electrical connections provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120-volt control circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of providing additional electrical service and related work shall be included under this section. Motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1 Design B type. Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Motor horsepower shall be of sufficient size so that the nameplate horsepower rating will not be exceeded throughout the entire published pump characteristic curve. The motor and fire pump controller shall be fully compatible.

2.8 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVER

2.8.1 Engine Capacity

Engine shall have adequate horsepower to drive the pump at all conditions of speed and load over the full range of the pump performance curve. The horsepower rating of the engine driver shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer and shall be derated for temperature and elevation in accordance with NFPA 20.

2.8.2 Exhaust System External to Engine

2.8.2.1 Steel Pipe and Fittings

ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, welding end connections for the Ordnance building. Provide stainless steel piping for the AFFF pumps. ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11 welding fittings shall be of the same material and weight as the piping.

2.8.2.2 Flanges

ASME B16.5, Class 300. Flanges shall be provided at connections to diesel engines, exhaust mufflers, and flexible connections. Gaskets shall be ASME B16.21, composition ring, 0.0625 inch. ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B8 bolts and ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 8 nuts shall be provided. Gaskets used for the AFFF shall be compatible with the foam concentrate.

2.8.2.3 Piping Insulation

Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED/ RECOVERED MATERIALS. Products containing asbestos will not be permitted.



Exhaust piping system including the muffler shall be insulated with ASTM C 533 calcium silicate insulation, minimum of 3 inches. Insulation shall be secured with not less than 0.375 inch width fibrous glass reinforced waterproof tape or Type 304 stainless steel bands spaced not more than 8 inches on center. An aluminum jacket encasing the insulation shall be provided. The aluminum jacket shall have a minimum thickness of 0.016 inches, a factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on the inside surface. The jacket shall be secured with not less than 0.5 inch wide stainless steel bands, spaced not less than 8 inches on centers. Longitudinal and circumferential seams of the jacket shall be lapped not less than 3 inches. Jackets on horizontal line shall be installed so that the longitudinal seams are on the bottom side of the pipe. The seams of the jacket for the vertical lines shall be placed on the off-weather side of the pipe. On vertical lines, the circumferential seams of the jacket shall overlap so the lower edge of each jacket overlaps the upper edge of the jacket below.

2.9 FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER

Controller shall be the automatic type and UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b for fire pump service. Pump shall be arranged for automatic start and stop, and manual push-button stop. Automatic stopping shall be accomplished only after all starting causes have returned to normal and after a minimum pump run time has elapsed. Controllers shall be completely terminally wired, ready for field connections, and mounted in a NEMA Type 4 watertight and dust tight enclosure arranged so that controller current carrying parts will not be less than 12 inches above the floor. Controller shall be provided with voltage surge arresters installed per NFPA 20. Controller shall be equipped with a bourdon tube pressure switch or a solid state pressure switch with independent high and low adjustments, automatic starting relay actuated from normally closed contacts, visual alarm lamps and supervisory power light. Controller shall be equipped with a thermostat switch with adjustable setting to monitor the pump room temperature and to provide an alarm when temperatures falls below 40 degrees F . The controller shall be factory-equipped with a heater operated by thermostat to prevent moisture in the cabinet.

2.9.1 Controller for Electric Motor Driven Fire Pump

Controller shall be electronic soft start starting type. Controller shall be designed as indicated on the contract documents. Controller and transfer switch shall have a short circuit rating as indicated on electrical drawings and in electrical specifications. An automatic transfer switch (ATS) shall be provided for each fire pump. The ATS shall comply with NFPA 20 and shall be specifically listed for fire pump service. The ATS shall transfer source of power to the alternate source upon loss of normal power. Controller shall monitor pump running, loss of a phase or line power, phase reversal, low reservoir and pump room temperature. Alarms shall be individually displayed in front of panel by lighting of visual lamps. Each lamp shall be labeled with rigid etched plastic labels. Controller shall be equipped with terminals for remote monitoring of pump running, pump power supply trouble (loss of power or phase and phase reversal), and pump room trouble (pump room temperature and low reservoir level), and for remote start. Limited service fire pump controllers are not permitted, except for fire pumps driven by electric motors rated less than 15 hp. Controller shall be equipped with a 7-day electric pressure recorder with 24-hour spring wound back-up. The pressure recorder shall provide a readout of the system pressure from 0 to 15 hp,



time, and date. Controller shall require the pumps to run for ten minutes for pumps with driver motors under 200 horsepower and for 15 minutes for pumps with motors 200 horsepower and greater, prior to automatic shutdown. The controller shall be equipped with an externally operable isolating switch which manually operates the motor circuit. Means shall be provided in the controller for measuring current for all motor circuit conductors.

2.10 PRESSURE SENSING LINE

A completely separate pressure sensing line shall be provided for each fire pump and for the jockey pump. The sensing line shall be arranged in accordance with Figure A-7-5.2.1. of NFPA 20. The sensing line shall be 1/2 inch H58 brass tubing complying with ASTM B 135. The sensing line shall be equipped with two restrictive orifice unions each. Restricted orifice unions shall be ground-face unions with brass restricted diaphragms drilled for a 3/32 inch. Restricted orifice unions shall be mounted in the horizontal position, not less than 5 feet apart on the sensing line. Two test connections shall be provided for each sensing line. Test connections shall consist of two brass 1/2 inch globe valves and 1/4 inch gauge connection tee arranged per NFPA 20. One of the test connections shall be equipped with a 0 to 300 psi water oil-filled gauge. Sensing line shall be connected to the pump discharge piping between the discharge piping control valve and the check valve.

2.11 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMP

2.11.1 General

Pressure maintenance pump shall be electric motor driven, horizontal shaft orin-line vertical shaft, centrifugal type with a rated discharge of 10 gpm at 60 psig for the Ordnance OPS building. Pump shall draft from the suction supply side of the suction pipe gate valve of the fire pump and shall discharge into the system at the downstream side of the pump discharge gate valve. An approved indicating gate valve of the outside screw and yoke (O.S.&Y.) type shall be provided in the maintenance pump discharge and suction piping. Oil-filled water pressure gauge and approved check valve in the maintenance pump discharge piping shall be provided. Check valve shall be swing type with removable inspection plate.

2.11.2 Pressure Maintenance Pump Controller

Pressure maintenance pump controller shall be arranged for automatic and manual starting and stopping and equipped with a "manual-off-automatic" switch. The controller shall be completely prewired, ready for field connections, and wall-mounted in a NEMA Type 2 drip-proof enclosure. The controller shall be equipped with a bourdon tube pressure switch or a solid state pressure switch with independent high and low adjustments for automatic starting and stopping. A sensing line shall be provided connected to the pressure maintenance pump discharge piping between the control valve and the check valve. The sensing line shall conform to paragraph, PRESSURE SENSING LINE. The sensing line shall be completely separate from the fire pump sensing lines. An adjustable run timer shall be provided to prevent frequent starting and stopping of the pump motor. The run timer shall be set for 2 minutes.



2.12 DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM EXTERNAL TO ENGINE

2.12.1 Steel pipe

ASTM A 53/A 53M, hot-dipped zinc-coated, Schedule 40, threaded connections. Fittings shall be ASME B16.3, zinc-coated, threaded malleable iron fittings. Unions shall be ASME B16.39 zinc-coated, threaded unions.

2.12.2 Copper Tubing

ASTM B 88, Type K, soft annealed, with ASME B16.26 flared fittings.

2.12.3 Diesel Fuel Tanks

UL 80 or UL 142 for aboveground tanks.

2.12.4 Valves

An indicating and lockable ball valve shall be provided in the supply line adjacent to the tank suction inlet connection. A check valve shall be provided in fuel return line. Valves shall be suitable for oil service. Valves shall have union end connections or threaded end connections.

a. Globe valve: MSS SP-80 Class 125

b. Check valve: MSS SP-80, Class 125, swing check

c. Ball valve: Full port design, copper alloy body, 2-position lever handle.

2.13 PUMP BASE PLATE AND PAD

A common base plate shall be provided for each horizontal-shaft fire pump for mounting pump and driver unit. The base plate shall be constructed of cast iron with raised lip tapped for drainage or welded steel shapes with suitable drainage. Each base plate for the horizontal fire pumps shall be provided with a 1 inchgalvanized steel drain line piped to the nearest floor drain. For vertical shaft pumps, pump head shall be provided with a cast-iron base plate and shall serve as the sole plate for mounting the discharge head assembly. Pump units and bases shall be mounted on a raised 6 inches reinforced concrete pad that is an integral part of the reinforced concrete floor.

2.14 HOSE VALVE MANIFOLD TEST HEADER

Hose valve test header shall be connected by ASME B16.5, Class 150 flange inlet connection. Hose valves shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b bronze hose gate valves with 2.5 inches American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Standard Threads (NH) per NFPA 1963. The number of valves shall be per NFPA 20. Each hose valve shall be equipped with a cap and chain, and located no more than 3 feet and no less than 2 feet above grade.

2.15 FLOW METER

Provide a flow meter for the Ordnance OPS building. Meter shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b as flow meters for fire pump installation with direct flow readout device. Flow meter shall be capable of metering any waterflow quantities between 50



percent and 150 percent of the rated flow of the pumps. The flow meter shall be arranged in accordance with Figure A-2-14.2.1 of NFPA 20. The meter throttle valve and the meter control valves shall be O.S.&Y. valves. Automatic air release shall be provided if flow meter test discharge is piped to the pump suction and forms a closed-loop meter arrangement as defined in Figure A-2-14.2.1 of NFPA 20. Meter shall be of the venturi type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work.

3.2 FIRE PUMP INSTALLATION RELATED SUBMITTALS

The fire pump manufacturer shall prepare a list of the submittals, from the Contract Submittal Register, that relate to the successful installation of the fire pump(s). The submittals identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval signed and dated by the manufacturer's representative when submitted to the Government.

3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Carefully remove materials so as not to damage material which is to remain. Replace existing work damaged by the Contractor's operations with new work of the same construction. Equipment, materials, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, installation, examination, inspection and testing shall be in accordance NFPA 20, except as modified herein. In addition, the fire pump and engine shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer.

3.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS

Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before burying, covering, or concealing. Fittings shall be provided for changes in direction of piping and for all connections. Changes in piping sizes shall be made using tapered reducing pipe fittings. Bushings shall not be used.

3.4.1 Cleaning of Piping

Interior and ends of piping shall be clean and free of any water or foreign material. Piping shall be kept clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress, open ends of the piping shall be securely closed so that no water or foreign matter will enter the pipes or fittings. Piping shall be inspected before placing in position.

3.4.2 Threaded Connections

Jointing compound for pipe threads shall be polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) pipe thread tape conforming to ASTM D 3308 and shall be applied to male threads only. Exposed ferrous pipe threads shall be provided with one coat of zinc molybdate primer applied to a minimum of dry film thickness of 1 mil.


Additional hangers and supports shall be provided for concentrated loads in



aboveground piping, such as for valves and risers.

3.4.3.1 Vertical Piping

Piping shall be supported at each floor, at not more than 10 foot intervals.

3.4.3.2 Horizontal Piping

Horizontal piping supports shall be spaced as follows:

MAXIMUM SPACING (FEET)

______________________________________________________________________Nominal 1 and 1.25 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6+Pipe UnderSize (inches)______________________________________________________________________

Copper 6 7 8Tube

Steel 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17Pipe

3.4.4 Underground Piping

Installation of underground piping and fittings shall conform to NFPA 24. Joints shall be anchored in accordance with NFPA 24. Concrete thrust block shall be provided at elbow where pipe turns up towards floor, and the pipe riser shall be restrained with steel rods from the elbow to the flange above the floor. After installation per NFPA 24, rods and nuts shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with asphalt or other corrosion-retard material approved by the Contracting Officer. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet.

3.4.5 Grooved Mechanical Joint

Grooves shall be prepared according to the couping manufacturer's instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.

3.5 ELECTRICAL WORK

Electric motor and controls shall be in accordance with NFPA 20, NFPA 72 and NFPA 70, unless more stringent requirements are specified herein or are indicated on the drawings. Electrical wiring and associated equipment shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 20 and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing conduit may be provided in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical



damage.

3.6 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING

Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.7 FLUSHING

The fire pump suction and discharge piping shall be flushed at 120percent of rated capacity of each pump. Where the pump installation consists of more than one pump, the flushing shall be the total quantity of water flowing when all pumps are discharging at 120 percent of their rated capacities. The new pumps may be used to attain the required flushing volume. No underground piping shall be flushed by using the fire pumps. Flushing operations shall continue until water is clear, but not less than 10 minutes. Submit a signed and dated flushing certificate before requesting field testing.

3.8 FIELD TESTS

Submit, at least 2 weeks before starting field tests, system diagrams that show the layout of equipment, piping, and storage units, and typed condensed sequence of operation, wiring and control diagrams, and operation manuals explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic. After approval, these items shall be posted where directed.

3.8.1 Hydrostatic Test

Piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 225 psig for a period of 2-hours, or at least 50 psi in excess of the maximum pressure, when the maximum pressure in the system is in excess of 175 psi in accordance with NFPA 20.


The Manufacturer's Representative, a representative of the fire pump controller manufacturer, and a representative of the diesel engine manufacturer (when supplied) shall witness the complete operational testing of the fire pump and drivers. The fire pump controller manufacturer's representative and the diesel engine manufacturer's representative shall each be an experienced technician employed by the respective manufacturers and capable of demonstrating operation of all features of respective components including trouble alarms and operating features. Fire pumps, drivers and equipment shall be thoroughly inspected and tested to insure that the system is correct, complete, and ready for operation. Tests shall ensure that pumps are operating at rated capacity, pressure and speed. Tests shall include manual starting and running to ensure proper operation and to detect leakage or other abnormal conditions, flow testing, automatic start testing, testing of automatic settings, sequence of operation check, test of required accessories; test of pump alarms devices and supervisory signals, test of pump cooling, operational test of relief valves, and test of automatic power transfer, if provided. Pumps shall run without abnormal noise, vibration or heating. If any component or system was found to be defective, inoperative, or not in compliance with the contract requirements during the tests and inspection, the corrections shall be made and the entire preliminary test shall be repeated.



3.8.3 Navy Formal Inspection and Tests

The Mid-Atlantic Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer will witness formal tests and approve all systems before they are accepted. Submit the request for formal inspection at least 21 days prior to the date the inspection is to take place. An experienced technician regularly employed by the pump installer shall be present during the inspection. Where pumps are engine driven, an experienced technician regularly employed by the engine manufacturer capable of demonstrating that all engine trouble alarms and operating features perform as required shall be present.

3.8.3.1 Full Water Flow Test

The Ordnance OPS building shall conducte an acceptance testto include a full water flow test. The securing of all hoses and nozzles during the tests is the responsibility of the Contractor. Water flow testing shall be conducted in a safe manner with no destruction to the existing facility or new construction. Tests shall include 100 and 150 percent capacity flows and pressures, and no-flow pressures for compliance with manufacturer's characteristic curves. At this inspection repeat the required tests as directed. Water shall be provided by the contractor for the Ordnance OPS water flow test. The water supply tank shall be full after all preliminary and final tests.

3.8.3.2 Correcting Defects

Correct defects in the work, and make additional tests until the Contractor has demonstrated that the system complies with the contract requirements.

3.8.3.3 Documentation of Test

Manufacturer's certified shop test characteristic curves for each pump being tested must be furnished by the Contractor at the time of the pump acceptance test.

3.8.4 Tests

3.8.4.1 Flow Tests

Ordnance OPS Building flow tests using the test header, hoses and playpipe nozzles shall be conducted. Flow tests shall be performed at churn (no flow), 75, 100, 125 and 150 percent capacity for each pump and at full capacity of the pump installation. Flow readings shall be taken from each nozzle by means of a calibrated pitot tube with gauge or other approved measuring equipment. Rpm, suction pressure and discharge pressure reading shall be taken as part of each flow test. Voltage and ampere readings shall taken on each phase as part of each flow test for electric-motor driven pumps.

3.8.4.2 Starting Tests

Pumps shall be tested for automatic starting and sequential starting. Setting of the pressure switches shall be tested when pumps are operated by pressure drop. Tests may be performed by operating the test connection on the pressure sensing lines. As a minimum, each pump shall be started automatically 10 times and manually 10 times, in accordance with NFPA 20. Tests of engine-driven pumps shall be divided equally between both set of batteries. The fire pumps shall be operated for a period of a least 10



minutes for each of the starts; except that electric motors over 200 horsepowershall be operated for at least 15 minutes and shall not be started more than 2 times in 10 hours. Pressure settings that include automatic starting and stopping of the fire pump(s) shall be indicated on an etched plastic placard, attached to the corresponding pump controller.

3.8.4.3 Alarms

All pump alarms, both local and remote, shall be tested. Supervisory alarms for diesel drivers shall be electrically tested for low oil pressure, high engine jacket coolant temperature, shutdown from overspeed, battery failure and battery charger failure.

3.8.4.4 Miscellaneous

Valve tamper switches shall be tested. Pressure recorder operation relief valve settings, valve operations, operation and accuracy of meters and gauges, and other accessory devices shall be verified.

3.8.4.5 Alternate Power Source

For the Ordnance OPS building, loss of primary power shall be simulated and transfer shall occur while the pump is operating at peak load. Transfer from normal to emergency source and retransfer from emergency to normal source shall not cause opening of overcurrent devices in either line. At least half of the manual and automatic starting operations listed shall be performed with the fire pump connected to the alternate source.

3.8.4.6 Correction of Deficiencies

If equipment was found to be defective or non-compliant with contract requirements, perform corrective actions and repeat the tests. Tests shall be conducted and repeated if necessary until the system has been demonstrated to comply with all contract requirements.3.8.4.7 Test

Documentation

The Manufacturer's Representative shall supply a copy of the manufacturer's certified curve for each fire pump at the time of the test. The Manufacturer's Representative shall record all test results and plot curve of each pump performance during the test. Complete pump acceptance test data of each fire pump shall be recorded. The pump acceptance test data shall be on forms that give the detail pump information such as that which is indicated in Figure A-11-2.6.3(f) of NFPA 20. All test data records shall be submitted in a three ring binder.

3.8.5 Test Equipment

Provide all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete final test, including 2.5 inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, pitot tube gauges, portable digital tachometer, voltage and ampere meters, and calibrated oil-filled water pressure gauges. Provide all necessary supports to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the test. The Contractor shall furnish water for the tests.

3.8.6 As-Built Drawings

Submit As-Built Drawings, no later than 14 days after completion of the Final Tests. The Fire Pump Installation Drawings shall be updated to reflect as-built conditions after all related work is completed and shall be on reproducible full-size mylar film.



3.9 DISINFECTION

After all system components are installed including pumps, piping, and other associated work, and all hydrostatic tests are successfully completed, thoroughly flush the pumps and all piping to be disinfected with potable water until there is no visible sign of dirt or other residue. and hydrostatic test are successfully completed, each portion of the piping specified in this Section system to be disinfected shall be thoroughly flushed with potable water until all entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed before introducing chlorinating material.

3.9.1 Chlorination

The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the sprinkler piping at a constant rate of 50 parts per million (ppm). A properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the system with a hypochlorinator, or liquid chlorine injected into the system through a solution-fed chlorinator and booster pump shall be used. Chlorination application shall continue until the entire system if filled. The water shall remain in the system for a minimum of 24 hours. Each valve in the system shall be opened and closed several times to ensure its proper disinfection. Following the 24-hour period, no less than 25 ppm chlorine residual shall remain in the system.

3.9.2 Flushing

The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than one part per million. Samples of water in disinfected containers for bacterial examination will be taken from several system locations which are approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.9.3 Sample Testing

Samples shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method shall be either the multiple-tube fermentation technique or the membrane-filter technique. The disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.

3.10 FIELD TRAINING

The Fire Protection Specialist and the Manufacturer's Representative shall conduct a training course for operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 8 hours of normal working time and shall start after the fire pump installation is functionally complete and after the Final Acceptance Test. The field instruction shall cover all of the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.




SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE04/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI)

ARI 1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers


ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2004; Addendas a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,r,s,t,u,v,x,ak 2006; Supp to Addendas 2006; Errata 2007; Interpretations 8 - 15:2007) Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, I-P Edition

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

ASSE 1001 (2002) Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers

ASSE 1003 (2001; Errata, 2003) Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves

ASSE 1005 (1999) Water Heater Drain Valves 3/4 Inch Size

ASSE 1010 (2004) Water Hammer Arresters

ASSE 1011 (2004; Errata 2004) Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers

ASSE 1012 (2002) Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent

ASSE 1013 (2005) Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers

ASSE 1018 (2001) Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable, Water Supplied

ASSE 1019 (2004; Errata 2005) Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic Draining Type



ASSE 1020 (2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004) Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly


AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater

AWWA B300 (2004) Hypochlorites

AWWA B301 (2004) Liquid Chlorine

AWWA C203 (2002) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied

AWWA C606 (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints


AWWA C652 (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities


AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2004; Errata 2004) Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

AWS B2.2 (1991) Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification


ASME A112.1.2 (2004) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected Receptors)

ASME A112.14.1 (2003) Backwater Valves

ASME A112.19.2M (2003) Standard for Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals

ASME A112.19.3 (2000: R 2004) Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use)

ASME A112.19.5 (2005) Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals

ASME A112.21.2M (1983) Roof Drains

ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2002) Cleanouts

ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2002) Floor Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use



ASME A112.6.3 (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and Trench Drains

ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)

ASME B16.12 (1998; R 2006) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

ASME B16.15 (2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.21 (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.23 (2002; Errata 2003; R 2006) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

ASME B16.24 (2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500

ASME B16.29 (2001) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV


ASME B16.34 (2004) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End


ASME B16.4 (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and 250



ASME B31.5 (2006) Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components

ASME B40.100 (2006) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments

ASME BPVC SEC IX (2007) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications



ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2007) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1 - Basic Coverage

ASME CSD-1 (2006) Control and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers


ASTM A 105/A 105M (2005) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications


ASTM A 193/A 193M (2007) Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A 47/A 47M (2004) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A 515/A 515M (2003) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service

ASTM A 516/A 516M (2006) Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service

ASTM A 518/A 518M (1999; R 2003) Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings



ASTM A 733 (2003) Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples

ASTM A 74 (2006) Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM A 888 (2007a) Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications


ASTM B 152/B 152M (2006a) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar



ASTM B 306 (2002) Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

ASTM B 32 (2004) Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B 370 (2003) Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

ASTM B 42 (2002e1) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

ASTM B 43 (1998; R 2004) Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes

ASTM B 584 (2006a) Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications

ASTM B 75 (2002) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

ASTM B 813 (2000e1) Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

ASTM B 828 (2002) Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings


ASTM B 88M (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)

ASTM C 1053 (2000; R 2005) Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Applications

ASTM C 564 (2003a) Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings


ASTM D 1785 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120


ASTM D 2235 (2004) Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings



ASTM D 2239 (2003) Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter

ASTM D 2241 (2005) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

ASTM D 2447 (2003) Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter

ASTM D 2464 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D 2466 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D 2467 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D 2564 (2004e1) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D 2661 (2006) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 2665 (2007) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 2672 (1996a; R 2003) Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement

ASTM D 2683 (2004) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing

ASTM D 2737 (2003) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing

ASTM D 2822 (2005) Asphalt Roof Cement

ASTM D 2846/D 2846M (2006) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems

ASTM D 2855 (1996; R 2002) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 2996 (2001; R 2007e1) Filament-Wound



"Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe

ASTM D 3035 (2006) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter

ASTM D 3122 (1995; R 2002) Solvent Cements for Styrene-Rubber (SR) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D 3138 (2004) Solvent Cements for Transition Joints Between Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Piping Components

ASTM D 3139 (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D 3212 (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM D 3261 (2003) Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing

ASTM D 3311 (2006a) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns

ASTM D 4101 (2007) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials

ASTM E 1 (2005) Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers

ASTM F 1760 (2001; R 2005e1) Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Plastic Pipe Having Reprocessed-Recycled Content

ASTM F 437 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM F 438 (2004) Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM F 439 (2006) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM F 441/F 441M (2002) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80



ASTM F 442/F 442M (1999; R 2005) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)

ASTM F 477 (2007) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

ASTM F 493 (2004) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F 628 (2006e1) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core

ASTM F 891 (2004) Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe with a Cellular Core

CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

CISPI 301 (2004) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

CISPI 310 (2004) Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)

CDA A4015 (1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook

CSA AMERICA, INC. (CSA/AM)

CSA/AM Z21.22 (1999; R 2004; A 2000, 2001) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems


FCCCHR Manual (1988e9) Manual of Cross-Connection Control


ICC A117.1 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

ICC IPC (2003; Errata 2003; Errata 2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2005) International Plumbing Code

INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)

ISEA Z358.1 (2004) Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment




MSS SP-110 (1996) Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends

MSS SP-25 (1998) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions

MSS SP-44 (2006) Steel Pipeline Flanges


MSS SP-67 (2002a; R 2004) Standard for Butterfly Valves


MSS SP-70 (2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-71 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-72 (1999) Standard for Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service

MSS SP-73 (2003) Brazing Joints for Copper and Copper Alloy Pressure Fittings

MSS SP-78 (2005a) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends


MSS SP-83 (2006) Standard for Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket Welding and Threaded

MSS SP-85 (2002) Standard for Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE SP0169 (2007) Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems


NEMA 250 (2003) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)





NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

NSF 14 (2007) Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

NSF 61 (2007a) Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)

PPFA-01 (1998) Plastic Pipe in Fire Resistive Construction

PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

PDI WH 201 (2006) Water Hammer Arresters Standard


SAE J1508 (1997) Hose Clamp Specifications


PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act




10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products

PL 102-486 (1992) Residential Energy Efficiency Ratings


UL 174 (2004; Rev thru May 2006) Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:



SD-02 Shop Drawings

Plumbing System; G

Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams, and other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the Plumbing Code.. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, details shall include loadings and proposed support methods. Mechanical drawing plans, elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to scale.

SD-03 Product Data

Fixtures; (LEED)

List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow rate.

Flush valve water closets

Flush valve urinals

Wall hung lavatories

Stainless steel sinks

Water heaters; G

Pumps; G

Backflow prevention assemblies; G

Welding

A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.

Vibration-Absorbing Features; G

Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement, foundation plan, dimensions and specifications.

SD-06 Test Reports

Tests, Flushing and Disinfection

Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.



Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies; G

Certification of proper operation shall be as accomplished in accordance with state regulations by an individual certified by the state to perform such tests. If no state requirement exists, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer's representative test the device, to ensure the unit is properly installed and performing as intended. The Contractor shall provide written documentation of the tests performed and signed by the individual performing the tests.


Plumbing System; G


1.3 STANDARD PRODUCTS

Specified materials and equipmentshall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.



1.3.2 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.3.4 Modification of References

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been



substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.3.4.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.


Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.


1.5.1 Welding

Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1. The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent record. Structural members shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL. Structural members shall be welded in accordance with Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.

1.5.2 Plumbing Fixtures

Water flow and consumption rates shall at a minimum comply with requirements in PL 102-486.


Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC.



1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work.

1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT


PART 2 PRODUCTS



Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceed 5 percent of the total value of that product.


2.2 MATERIALS

Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and



II. PVC pipe shall contain a minimum of 25 percent recycled content, with a minimum of 5 percent post-consumer recycled content. HDPE pipe shall contain a minimum of 100 percent post-consumer recycled content. Cement pipe shall contain recycled content as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Steel pipe shall contain a minimum of 25 percent recycled content, with a minimum of 16 percent post-consumer recycled content. Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement shall meet NSF 14 and shall be NSF listed for the service intended. Plastic pipe, fittings, and solvent cement used for potable hot and cold water service shall bear the NSF seal "NSF-PW." Polypropylene pipe and fittings shall conform to dimensional requirements of Schedule 40, Iron Pipe size. Pipe threads (except dry seal) shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Grooved pipe couplings and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. Material or equipment containing lead shall not be used in any potable water system. In line devices such as water meters, building valves, check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall comply with PL 93-523 and NSF 61, Section 8. End point devices such as drinking water fountains, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar faucets, residential ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves used to dispense water for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF 61, Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen floors. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in a pressure piping system in buildings greater than three stories including any basement levels.

2.2.1 Pipe Joint Materials

Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under ground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to the following:

a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74, AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310

b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.

c. Couplings for Grooved Pipe: Copper ASTM A 536.

d. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall be bonded with NBR.

e. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5.

f. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.

g. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32.



h. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to ASTM B 813, Standard Test 1.

i. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.

j. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless type): ASTM C 564.

k. Rubber Gaskets for Grooved Pipe: ASTM D 2000, maximum temperature 230 degrees F.

l. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D 3139, ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477.

m. Bolts and Nuts for Grooved Pipe Couplings: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183.

n. Solvent Cement for Transition Joints between ABS and PVC Nonpressure Piping Components: ASTM D 3138.

o. Plastic Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2235.

p. Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2564 and ASTM D 2855.

q. Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 493.

r. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc., shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M. Blind flange material shall conform to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515/A 515M for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material conforming to ASTM A 193/A 193M.

s. Plastic Solvent Cement for Styrene Rubber Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3122.

2.2.2 Miscellaneous Materials

Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:

a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be diaphragm or piston type.

b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B 370.

c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D 2822.

d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.

e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.

f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.

g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.



h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203.

i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.

j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.

k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100.

l. Thermometers: ASTM E 1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.

2.2.3 Pipe Insulation Material

Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

2.3 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS

Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

2.4 VALVES

Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:

Description Standard

Butterfly Valves MSS SP-67

Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends MSS SP-70

Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged andThreaded Ends MSS SP-71

Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends for General Service MSS SP-72

Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP-110

Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-78Threaded Ends

Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves MSS SP-80

Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34

Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-85Threaded Ends



Description StandardBackwater Valves ASME A112.14.1

Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASSE 1003

Water Heater Drain Valves ASSE 1005

Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves CSA/AM Z21.22for Hot Water Supply Systems

Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves ASME CSD-1for Automatically Fired HotWater Boilers Safety Code No., Part CW, Article 52.4.1 Backwater Valves

Backwater valves shall be either separate from the floor drain or a combination floor drain, P-trap, and backwater valve, as shown. Valves shall have cast-iron bodies with cleanouts large enough to permit removal of interior parts. Valves shall be of the flap type, hinged or pivoted, with revolving disks. Hinge pivots, disks, and seats shall be nonferrous metal. Disks shall be slightly open in a no-flow no-backwater condition. Cleanouts shall extend to finished floor and be fitted with threaded countersunk plugs.

2.4.2 Wall Faucets

Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with 3/4 inch male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 3/4 inch hose connection. Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.

2.4.3 Wall Hydrants (Frostproof)

ASSE 1019 with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall have a nickel-brass or nickel-bronze wall plate or flange with nozzle and detachable key handle. A brass or bronze operating rod shall be provided within a galvanized iron casing of sufficient length to extend through the wall so that the valve is inside the building, and the portion of the hydrant between the outlet and valve is self-draining. A brass or bronze valve with coupling and union elbow having metal-to-metal seat shall be provided. Valve rod and seat washer shall be removable through the face of the hydrant. The hydrant shall have 3/4 inch exposed hose thread on spout and 3/4 inch male pipe thread on inlet.

2.4.4 Relief Valves

Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive pressure buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum rate of heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be rated according to CSA/AM Z21.22. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is less than 200,000 Btuh shall have 3/4 inch minimum inlets, and 3/4 inch outlets. Relief valves for systems where the



maximum rate of heat input is greater than 200,000 Btuh shall have 1 inch minimum inlets, and 1 inch outlets. The discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet.

2.4.5 Thermostatic Mixing Valves

Provide thermostatic mixing valve for emergency eyewash and shower. Mixing valves, thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with rough or finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body shall be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze, corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F of any setting.

2.5 FIXTURES

Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC. Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. Vitreous china, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have specially selected, white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains shall be copper alloy with all visable surfaces chrome plated.

2.5.1 Lavatories

Vitreous china lavatories shall be provided with two integral molded lugs on the back-underside of the fixture and drilled for bolting to the wall in a manner similar to the hanger plate.

2.5.2 Flush Valve Water Closets

ASME A112.19.2M, white vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top of toilet seat height above floor shall be 14 to 15 inches, except 17 to 19 inches for wheelchair water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed 1.6 gallons per flush. Provide white solid plastic elongated open-front seat . Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not



interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls.

2.5.3 Flush Valve Urinals

ASME A112.19.2M, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon jet, integral trap, and extended side shields. Provide urinal with the rim 17 inches above the floor. Provide urinal with the rim 24 inches above the floor. Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve combination shall not exceed 1.0 gallons per flush. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture.

2.5.4 Wheelchair Flush Valve Type Urinals

ASME A112.19.2M, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet, blowout action, integral trap, elongated projecting bowl, 20 inches long from wall to front of flare, and ASME A112.19.5 trim. Provide large diaphragm (not less than 2.625 inches upper chamber inside diameter at the point where the diaphragm is sealed between the upper and lower chambers), nonhold-open flush valve of chrome plated cast brass conforming to ASTM B 584, including vacuum breaker and angle (control-stop) valve with back check. The water flushing volume of the flush valve and urinal combination shall not exceed 1.0 gallon per flush. Furnish urinal manufacturer's certification of conformance. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers. Mount urinal with front rim a maximum of 17 inches above floor and flush valve handle a maximum of 44 inches above floor for use by handicapped on wheelchair.

2.5.5 Non-Flushing Toilets

Provide incinerating toilets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2.5.6 Wall Hung Lavatories

ASME A112.19.2M, white vitreous china, straight back type, minimum dimensions of 19 inches, wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets, and openings for concealed arm carrier installation. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall not exceed 1.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount lavatory with the front rim 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor.

2.5.7 Stainless Steel Sinks

ASME A112.19.3, 20 gage stainless steel with integral mounting rim for flush installation, minimum dimensions of 22 inches wide by 19 inches front to rear, one compartment, with undersides fully sound deadened, with supply openings for use with top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray, and with 3.5 inch drain outlet. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall not exceed 1.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi. Provide stainless steel drain outlets and stainless steel cup strainers. Provide separate 1.5 inch P-trap and drain piping to vertical



vent piping from each compartment. Provide top mounted washerless sink faucets with hose spray.

2.5.8 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler

ARI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carrier, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet, with 27 inch minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch maximum spout height above floor. Bubblers shall also be controlled by push levers, by push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one on front and both sides of the cabinet.

2.5.9 Precast Terrazzo Mop Sinks

Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to produce 3000 psi minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Provide floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers.

2.5.10 Emergency Eyewash and Shower

ISEA Z358.1, floor supported free standing unit. Provide deluge shower head, stay-open ball valve operated by pull rod and ring or triangular handle. Provide eyewash and stay-open ball valve operated by foot treadle or push handle.

2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

Backflow preventers shall be approved and listed by the Foundation For Cross-Connection Control & Hydraulic Research. Reduced pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric (nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be tested, approved, and listed in accordance with FCCCHR Manual. Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2.

2.7 DRAINS

2.7.1 Floor and Shower Drains

Floor drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded collar. Floor drains shall be cast iron except where metallic waterproofing membrane is installed. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane shall be provided when required. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection. Between the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C 564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3.



2.7.2 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints

Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.21.2M, with dome and integral flange, and shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing and flashing. The whole assembly shall be galvanized heavy pattern cast iron. For aggregate surface roofing, the drain shall be provided with a gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction, roof drains shall be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the insulation thickness where applicable. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or membrane shall be provided when required to suit the building construction. Strainer openings shall have a combined area equal to twice that of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the downspout. An expansion joint of proper size to receive the conductor pipe shall be provided. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing, brass or bronze sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and gaskets or packing. The sleeve shall have a nominal thickness of not less than 0.134 inch. Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring packing shall be close-cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be held in place by a packing gland secured with bolts.

2.8 TRAPS

Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be copper-alloy adjustable tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be without a cleanout. Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip. Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size, and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.

2.9 WATER HEATERS

Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater shall have replaceable anodes. Each primary water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 90 to 160 degrees F. Each gas-fired water heater and booster water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 120 to 180 degrees F. Hot water systems utilizing recirculation systems shall be tied into building off-hour controls. The thermal efficiencies and standby heat losses shall conform to TABLE III for each type of water heater specified. The only exception is that storage water heaters and hot water storage tanks having more than 500 gallons storage capacity need not meet the standard loss requirement if the tank surface area is insulated to R-12.5 and if a standing light is not used. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping of combustion gases. A factory



pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to each water heater. Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable water systems and shall be rated for 200 degrees F water temperature and 150 psi working pressure. The expansion tank size and acceptance volume shall be as indicated.

2.9.1 Automatic Storage Type

Heaters shall be complete with control system, temperature gauge, and pressure gauge, and shall have ASME rated combination pressure and temperature relief valve.

2.9.1.1 Electric Type

Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating elements. Each element shall be a minimum 1.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so that only one element can operate at a time.

2.10 PUMPS

2.10.1 Circulating Pumps

Domestic hot water circulating pumps shall be electrically driven, single-stage, centrifugal, with mechanical seals, suitable for the intended service. Pump capacities, efficiencies, motor sizes, speeds, and impeller types shall be as shown. Pump and motor shall be supported by the piping on which it is installed. The shaft shall be one-piece, heat-treated, corrosion-resisting steel with impeller and smooth-surfaced housing of bronze. Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient horsepower for the service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with "START-STOP" switch in cover. Pump motors smaller than Fractional horsepower pump motors shall have integral thermal overload protection in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Guards shall shield exposed moving parts.

2.11 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

2.11.1 Air Compressors

Air compressor unit shall be a factory-packaged assembly, including motor controls, switches, wiring, accessories, and motor controllers, in a NEMA enclosure as specified by manufacturer. Tank-mounted air compressors shall be manufactured to comply with UL listing requirements. Air compressors shall have manufacturer's name and address, together with trade name, and catalog number on a nameplate securely attached to the equipment. Each compressor shall have a manual-off-automatic switch that when in the manual position, the compressor loads and unloads to meet the demand and, in the automatic position, a time delay relay shall allow the compressor to operate for an adjustable length of time unloaded, then stop the unit. Guards shall shield exposed moving parts. Each duplex compressor system shall be provided with automatic alternation system. Each compressor motor shall be provided with an across-the-line-type magnetic controller, complete with low-voltage release. An intake air filter and silencer shall be provided with each compressor. Aftercooler and moisture separator shall be installed between compressors and air receiver to remove moisture and oil condensate before the air enters the receiver. Aftercoolers shall be either air- or water-cooled, as indicated. The air shall pass through a sufficient number of tubes to affect cooling. Tubes shall be sized to give



maximum heat transfer. Water to unit shall be controlled by a solenoid or pneumatic valve, which opens when the compressors start and closes when the compressors shut down. Cooling capacity of the aftercooler shall be sized for the total capacity of the compressors. Means shall be provided for draining condensed moisture from the receiver by an automatic float type trap. Capacities of air compressors and receivers shall be as indicated.

2.11.2 Lubricated Compressors

Compressors shall be two-stage, V-belt drive, capable of operating continuously against their designed discharge pressure, and shall operate at a speed not in excess of 1800 rpm. Compressors shall have the capacity and discharge pressure indicated. Compressors shall be assembled complete on a common subbase. The compressor main bearings shall be either roller or ball. The discharge passage of the high pressure air shall be piped to the air receiver with a copper pipe or tubing. A pressure gauge calibrated to 150 psi and equipped with a gauge cock and pulsation dampener shall be furnished for installation adjacent to pressure switches.

2.11.3 Air Receivers

Receivers shall be designed for 200 psi working pressure. Receivers shall be factory air tested to 1-1/2 times the working pressure. Receivers shall be equipped with safety relief valves and accessories, including pressure gauges and automatic and manual drains. The outside of air receivers may be galvanized or supplied with commercial enamel finish. Receivers shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and shall have the design working pressures specified herein. A display of the ASME seal on the receiver or a certified test report from an approved independent testing laboratory indicating conformance to the ASME Code shall be provided.

2.11.4 Intake Air Supply Filter

Dry type air filter shall be provided having a collection efficiency of 99 percent of particles larger than 10 microns. Filter body and media shall withstand a maximum 125 psi, capacity as indicated.

2.11.5 Pressure Regulators

The air system shall be provided with the necessary regulator valves to maintain the desired pressure for the installed equipment. Regulators shall be designed for a maximum inlet pressure of 125 psi and a maximum temperature of 200 degrees F. Regulators shall be single-seated, pilot-operated with valve plug, bronze body and trim or equal, and threaded connections. The regulator valve shall include a pressure gauge and shall be provided with an adjustment screw for adjusting the pressure differential from 0 to 125 psi. Regulator shall be sized as indicated.

2.12 ELECTRICAL WORK

Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. In addition to the requirements of Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide polyphase, squirrel-cage



medium induction motors with continuous ratings, including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.

Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.

Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.

Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS


Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.

2.13.2 Pipe Sleeves

Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Provide one inch minimum clearance between exterior of piping or pipe insulation, and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends of sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors, seal both ends of sleeves or core-drilled holes with UL listed fill, void, or cavity material.

2.13.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete

Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves. Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.

2.13.3 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete

Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.



2.13.4 Pipe Hangers (Supports)

Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection shield for insulated piping.

2.13.5 Nameplates

Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates. Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums. Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in accordance with PPFA-01. The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and accessories. Water and drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless otherwise indicated. A ball valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the building approximately 6 inches above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground utilities shall be at least 12 inches below the finish grade or as indicated on the drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.

3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections

3.1.1.1 Utilities

The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures,



faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.

3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing

The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.

3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment

Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment.

3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts

Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.

3.1.1.5 Expansion and Contraction of Piping

Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, etc., where indicated and/or required. Risers shall be securely anchored as required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining. If mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the



deviation from design requirements for expansion and contraction may be allowed pending approval of Contracting Officer.

3.1.1.6 Thrust Restraint

Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1 cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks.

3.1.1.7 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters

Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.

3.1.2 Compressed Air Piping (Non-Oil Free)

Compressed air piping shall be installed as specified for water piping and suitable for 125 psig working pressure. Compressed air piping shall have supply lines and discharge terminals legibly and permanently marked at both ends with the name of the system and the direction of flow.

3.1.3 Joints

Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended.

3.1.3.1 Threaded

Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.

3.1.3.2 Mechanical Couplings

Grooved mechanical joints shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, or narrow-land micrometer. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of the pipe shall be measured and recorded for



each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.

3.1.3.3 Unions and Flanges

Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.

3.1.3.4 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe

Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.3.5 Copper Tube and Pipe

a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2, MSS SP-73, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.

b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between the air comppressor and the receiver.

c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with ICC IPC.

3.1.3.6 Plastic Pipe

Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement. PVC and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of Schedule 40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.

3.1.3.7 Other Joint Methods

3.1.4 Dissimilar Pipe Materials

Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.



3.1.5 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings

Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a protective coating. Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape manufacturer.

3.1.6 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing

Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location.

3.1.6.1 Sleeve Requirements

Pipes passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves are not required for supply, drainage, waste and vent pipe passing through concrete slab on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor. A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor. Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic. Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated. Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed 1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint between the pipe and masonry wall as specified



above. Sealant selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.6.2 Flashing Requirements

Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8 inches from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10 inches in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.

3.1.6.3 Waterproofing

Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange shall be sealed.

3.1.6.4 Optional Counterflashing

Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be accomplished by utilizing the following:

a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.

b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.



3.1.6.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors

Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.

3.1.6.6 Pipe Penetrations

Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.

3.1.7 Fire Seal

Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.8 Supports

3.1.8.1 General

Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.

3.1.8.2 Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing, Seismic Requirements

Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic loads as specified in Section Section 22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL . Structural steel required for reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided. Material used for supports shall be as specified in Section 05 50 00 METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS.

3.1.8.3 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports

Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.

a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.

b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.

c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.



d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.

e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.

f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.

g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe.

h. Type 40 shields shall:

(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.

(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.

(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.

i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.

k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:

(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.

(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.

(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.



l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.

m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.

n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.

3.1.8.4 Structural Attachments

Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.

3.1.9 Welded Installation

Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged, flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.

3.1.10 Pipe Cleanouts

Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less



than 18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron .

3.2 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS

3.2.1 Relief Valves

No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank. The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the tank or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and mounted above and within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water heater.

3.2.2 Connections to Water Heaters

Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or flanges.

3.2.3 Expansion Tank

A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the water heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve. The Contractor shall adjust the expansion tank air pressure, as recommended by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.

3.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS

Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.

3.3.1 Fixture Connections

Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided.



Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting compound or gasket and fixture used.

3.3.2 Flushometer Valves

Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be installed 39 inches above the floor, except at water closets intended for use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be mounted at approximately 30 inches above the floor and arranged to avoid interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side of the enclosure.

3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor

Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor. Wall-hung drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim 42 inches above floor. Wall-hung service sinks shall be mounted with rim 28 inches above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.

3.3.4 Fixture Supports

Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab. Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.

3.3.4.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction

Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in the masonry wall.

3.3.4.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction

Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.

3.3.4.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions

Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to these studs.



3.3.4.4 Support for Wood Stud Construction

Where floor is a concrete slab, a floor-anchored chair carrier shall be used. Where entire construction is wood, wood crosspieces shall be installed. Fixture hanger plates, supports, brackets, or mounting lugs shall be fastened with not less than No. 10 wood screws, 1/4 inch thick minimum steel hanger, or toggle bolts with nut. The wood crosspieces shall extend the full width of the fixture and shall be securely supported.

3.3.4.5 Wall-Mounted Water Closet Gaskets

Where wall-mounted water closets are provided, reinforced wax, treated felt, or neoprene gaskets shall be provided. The type of gasket furnished shall be as recommended by the chair-carrier manufacturer.

3.3.5 Backflow Prevention Devices

Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water. Backflow preventers shall be installed where indicated and in accordance with ICC IPC at all other locations necessary to preclude a cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be located below the level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a standard commercial unit.

3.3.6 Access Panels

Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 00 METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS.

3.3.7 Traps

Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311. Traps for acid-resisting waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.

3.4 VIBRATION-ABSORBING FEATURES

Mechanical equipment, including compressors and pumps, shall be isolated from the building structure by approved vibration-absorbing features, unless otherwise shown. Each foundation shall include an adequate number of standard isolation units. Each unit shall consist of machine and floor or foundation fastening, together with intermediate isolation material, and shall be a standard product with printed load rating. Piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be provided with flexible connectors. Isolation



unit installation shall limit vibration to manufacturer's recommended percentage of the lowest equipment rpm.

3.4.1 Tank- or Skid-Mounted Compressors

Floor attachment shall be as recommended by compressor manufacturer. Compressors shall be mounted to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL.

3.4.2 Foundation-Mounted Compressors

Foundation attachment shall be as recommended by the compressor manufacturer. Compressors shall be mounted to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS

3.5.1 Identification Tags

Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.

3.5.2 Pipe Color Code Marking

Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.5.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components

Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling. The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be approximately 3/8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the approximate dimensions of 3 foot width, 30 inches height, and 1/2 inch thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed, the color code symbols shall be approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. The color code board shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room. The color code system shall be as indicated below:



3.6 ESCUTCHEONS

Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish, corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or setscrew.

3.7 PAINTING

Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.7.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.7.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.

The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

3.7.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal.

Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.



b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

3.8 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION

3.8.1 Plumbing System

The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in accordance with ICC IPC, except that the drainage and vent system final test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test is chosen, the Contractor must submit a testing procedure to the Contracting Officer for approval.

a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke test.

b. Building Sewers Tests.

c. Water Supply Systems Tests.

3.8.1.1 Test of Backflow Prevention Assemblies

Backflow prevention assembly shall be tested using gauges specifically designed for the testing of backflow prevention assemblies. Gauges shall be tested annually for accuracy in accordance with the University of Southern California's Foundation of Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research or the American Water Works Association Manual of Cross Connection (Manual M-14). Report form for each assembly shall include, as a minimum, the following:

Data on Device Data on Testing FirmType of Assembly NameManufacturer AddressModel Number Certified TesterSerial Number Certified Tester No.Size Date of TestLocationTest Pressure Readings Serial Number and Test Data of Gauges

If the unit fails to meet specified requirements, the unit shall be repaired and retested.

3.8.1.2 Compressed Air Piping (Nonoil-Free)

Piping systems shall be filled with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to 150 psig and hold this pressure for 2 hours with no drop in pressure.



3.8.2 Defective Work

If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.

3.8.3 System Flushing

3.8.3.1 During Flushing

Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system shall be flushed with hot potable water. Sufficient water shall be used to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing debris in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a flushing velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of system, the Contracting Officer (or the designated representative) shall specify the number of fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for any flood damage resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until discharge water shows no discoloration.

3.8.3.2 After Flushing

System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired by the Contractor. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water system shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation according to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum efficiency requirements.

3.8.4 Operational Test

Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the system:

a. Time, date, and duration of test.

b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.

c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.

d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.



e. Pump suction and discharge pressures.

f. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.

g. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.

h. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.

i. Complete operation of each water pressure booster system, including pump start pressure and stop pressure.

j. Compressed air readings at each compressor and at each outlet. Each indicating instrument shall be read at 1/2 hour intervals. The report of the test shall be submitted in quadruplicate. The Contractor shall furnish instruments, equipment, and personnel required for the tests; the Government will furnish the necessary water and electricity.

3.8.5 Disinfection

After operational tests are complete, the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. System shall be flushed as specified, before introducing chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. Except as herein specified, water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and AWWA C652. The chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per million (ppm). A properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the main with a hypochlorinator, or liquid chlorine injected into the main through a solution-feed chlorinator and booster pump, shall be used. If after the 24 hour and 6 hour holding periods, the residual solution contains less than 25 ppm and 50 ppm chlorine respectively, flush the piping and tank with potable water, and repeat the above procedures until the required residual chlorine levels are satisfied. The system including the tanks shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing period each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several times. Samples of water in disinfected containers shall be obtained from several locations selected by the Contracting Officer. The samples of water shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be either the multiple-tube fermentation technique or the membrane-filter technique. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.


Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas for reuse.



3.10 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS

Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems.

3.11 PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT

Standard rating condition terms are as follows:

EF = Energy factor, overall efficiency.

ET = Thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.

EC = Combustion efficiency, 100 percent - flue loss when smoke = o (trace is permitted).

SL = Standby loss in W/sq. ft. based on 80 degrees F delta T, or in percent per hour based on nominal 90 degrees F delta T.

HL = Heat loss of tank surface area.

V = Storage volume in liters

3.11.1 Storage Water Heaters

3.11.1.1 Electric

a. Storage capacity of 120 gallons or less, and input rating of 12 kW or less: minimum energy factor (EF) shall be 0.95-0.00132V per 10 CFR 430.

3.12 TABLES

TABLE IPIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR

DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F--------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub X X X X X and spigot, ASTM A 74 with compression gaskets. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the CISPI trademark.

2 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings hubless, X X X X CISPI 301 and ASTM A 888. Pipe and




DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F--------------------------------------------------------------------------fittings shall be marked with the CISPI trademark.

3 Cast iron drainage fittings, threaded, X X X ASME B16.12 for use with Item 10

4 Cast iron screwed fittings (threaded) X X ASME B16.4 for use with Item 10

5 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous and X X X X non-ferrous pipe ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M

6 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X X for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M for use with Item 5

7 Bronze sand casting grooved joint X X X X pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe ASTM B 584, for use with Item 5

8 Wrought copper grooved joint pressure X X pressure fittings for non-ferrous pipe ASTM B 75 C12200, ASTM B 152/B 152M, C11000, ASME B16.22 ASME B16.22 for use with Item 5

9 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X galvanized ASME B16.3 for use with Item 10

10 Steel pipe, seamless galvanized, X X X ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B

11 Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B 43 X X

12 Bronzed flanged fittings, X X ASME B16.24 for use with Items 11 and 14

13 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X pressure fittings, ASME B16.18 for use with Item 14

14 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42 X

15 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X




DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D E F-------------------------------------------------------------------------- ASME B16.15

16 Copper drainage tube, (DWV), X* X X* X X ASTM B 306

17 Wrought copper and wrought X X X X X alloy solder-joint drainage fittings. ASME B16.29

18 Cast copper alloy solder joint X X X X X drainage fittings, DWV, ASME B16.23

19 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) X X X X X X plastic drain, waste, and vent pipe and fittings ASTM D 2661, ASTM F 628

20 Polyvinyl Chloride plastic drain, X X X X X X waste and vent pipe and fittings, ASTM D 2665, ASTM F 891, (Sch 40) ASTM F 1760

21 Process glass pipe and fittings, X ASTM C 1053

22 High-silicon content cast iron pipe X X X and fittings (hub and spigot, and mechanical joint), ASTM A 518/A 518M

23 Polypropylene (PP) waste pipe and X fittings, ASTM D 4101

24 Filament-wound reinforced thermosetting X resin (RTRP) pipe, ASTM D 2996

SERVICE:

A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings C - Underground Vent D - Aboveground Vent E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground * - Hard Temper



TABLE IIPIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D--------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 Malleable-iron threaded fittings, X X X X a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3 for use with Item 4a

b. Same as "a" but not galvanized X for use with Item 4b

2 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous pipe X X X ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M, non-ferrous pipe, ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M,

3 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X for ferrous pipe ASTM A 536 and ASTM A 47/A 47M, for use with Item 2

4 Steel pipe: X X X X a. Seamless, galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B

b. Seamless, black, X ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B

5 Seamless red brass pipe, X X X ASTM B 43

6 Bronze flanged fittings, X X X ASME B16.24 for use with Items 5 and 7

7 Seamless copper pipe, X X X ASTM B 42

8 Seamless copper water tube, X** X** X** X*** ASTM B 88, ASTM B 88M

9 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X X ASME B16.15 for use with Items 5 and 7

10 Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint X X X X pressure fittings, ASME B16.22 for use with Items 5, 7 and 8

11 Cast copper alloy solder-joint X X X X pressure fittings,




-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D-------------------------------------------------------------------------- ASME B16.18 for use with Item 8

12 Bronze and sand castings grooved X X X joint pressure fittings for nonferrous pipe ASTM B 584, for use with Item 2

13 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe, X X Schedules 40 and 80, based on outside diameter ASTM D 2447

14 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe X X (SDR-PR), based on controlled outside diameter, ASTM D 3035

15 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe X X (SIDR-PR), based on controlled inside diameter, ASTM D 2239

16 Butt fusion polyethylene (PE) plastic X X pipe fittings, ASTM D 3261 for use with Items 14, 15, and 16

17 Socket-type polyethylene fittings X X for outside diameter-controlled polyethylene pipe, ASTM D 2683 for use with Item 15

18 Polyethylene (PE) plastic tubing, X X ASTM D 2737

19 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X (CPVC) plastic hot and cold water distribution system, ASTM D 2846/D 2846M

20 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X (CPVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40 and 80, ASTM F 441/F 441M

21 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X (CPVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR) ASTM F 442/F 442M

22 Threaded chlorinated polyvinyl chloride X X X (chloride CPVC) plastic pipe fittings,




-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D-------------------------------------------------------------------------- Schedule 80, ASTM F 437, for use with Items 20, and 21

23 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl X X X chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM F 438 for use with Items 20, 21, and 22

24 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl X X X chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings Schedule 80, ASTM F 439 for use with Items 20, 21, and 22

25 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe, X X Schedules 40, 80, and 120, ASTM D 1785

26 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure-rated X X pipe (SDR Series), ASTM D 2241

27 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe X X fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM D 2466

28 Socket-type polyvinyl chloride (PVC) X X plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80, ASTM D 2467for use with Items 26 and 27

29 Threaded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) X X plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80, ASTM D 2464

30 Joints for IPS pvs pipe using solvent X X cement, ASTM D 2672

31 Filament-wound reinforced X X thermosetting resin (RTRP) pipe, ASTM D 2996

32 Steel pipeline flanges, X X MSS SP-44

33 Fittings: brass or bronze; X X ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18 ASTM B 828

34 Carbon steel pipe unions, X X X




-------------------------------------------------------------------------- SERVICE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials A B C D-------------------------------------------------------------------------- socket-welding and threaded, MSS SP-83

35 Malleable-iron threaded pipe X X unions ASME B16.39

36 Nipples, pipe threaded X X X ASTM A 733

A - Cold Water Service Aboveground B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground C - Compressed Air Lubricated D - Cold Water Service Belowground Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses. ** - Type L - Hard *** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper without joints in or under floors **** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints

TABLE IIISTANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER HEATING

EQUIPMENT

A. STORAGE WATER HEATERS

STORAGE CAPACITY INPUTFUEL GALLONS RATING TEST PROCEDURE REQUIRED PERFORMANCE

Elect. 120 max. 12 kW max. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.95-0.00132V minimum

Elect. 120 min. OR 12 kW min. ASHRAE 90.1 - IP SL = 1.9 W/sq. ft. (Addenda B) maximum




SECTION 22 05 48.00 20

MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI)

ARI 575 (1994) Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment Space


AISC 350 (2005) Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)Specification for Structural Steel Buildings








ASTM D 471 (2006) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids



SMACNA Arch. Manual (2006) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

SMACNA HVAC Duct Const Stds (1995; Addendum 1997, 2nd Ed) HVAC Duct

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 1


Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible

SMACNA Seismic Restraint Mnl (1998; Addendum 2000, 2nd Ed) Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems


The provisions of Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS apply to this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.3.1 Decibels dB

Measure of sound level. Decibels are referenced to either 20 uPa for sound pressure levels or one pW for sound power levels. dBA is the overall "A" weighted sound level.

1.3.2 Machinery

The vibration or noise producing equipment that must be isolated.

1.3.3 Manufacturer

The fabricator or supplier of vibration-isolation or seismic-protection materials and equipment. For mechanical equipment and machinery the term machinery manufacturer will be used.

1.3.4 Micropascal uPa

10 to the minus 6 power newtons per square meter.

1.3.5 Picowatt pW

10 to the minus 12 power watts.


1.4.1 Spring Isolator Data

For each type and size of spring isolator, submit the spring outside diameter, deflection, operating spring height, unloaded spring height, solid spring height, the ratio of the outside diameter to the operating spring height, the load to deflection ratio of the springs, and weight and sizes of structural steel members.

1.4.2 Machinery Manufacturer's Sound Data

For each piece of indicated machinery to be vibration isolated, the calculated sound power test data or sound pressure test data as levels in dB in the eight octave bands between 63 and 8,000 Hz. Refer sound power levels to one pW and sound pressure levels to 20 uPa. Submit the overall "A" weighted scale sound pressure level in dB. Submit the standard test procedure used to obtain the sound power or pressure data for the applicable vibration isolation equipment size.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 2


1.4.3 Machinery

For each item of machinery, compare spring static deflections with the specified minimum static deflection, to show that the calculated spring static deflections are not less than the minimum static deflections specified. Rated spring static deflections are not acceptable in lieu of calculated spring static deflections.

1.4.4 Machinery Over 300 Pounds

For machinery items over 300 pounds, provide calculations for shear, pull-up, primary overturning, and secondary overturning.

1.4.5 Machinery Vibration Criteria

TABLE 1A

Vibration Isolator Types and Minimum Static Deflection(MSD, inches) for 4-8 inch slab on grade and column supported.

Column Slab on earth Spacing and 0-30 feet

Equipment Type MSD _________ (Note (1))

Reciprocating Air or Refrigeration Compressors

500 to 750 rpm S-R 1.75

751 rpm and up S-R 1.5

Heat Pumps

500 to 750 rpm SV-R 1.75

751 rpm and up SV-R 1.5

Closed Coupled Pumps

Up to 7-1/2 hp S-I 1.0

Over 7-1/2 hp S-I 1.5

Base Mounted Pumps

Up to 20 hp S-I 1.5

20 to 75 hp S-I 1.5

Over 75 hp S-I 2.5

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 3


TABLE 1A



Equipment Type MSD _________ (Note (1)) Factory Assembled Air Handling Equipment AH, AC and HV Units (Note (2))

Suspended Units

Up to 5 hp H 1.0

Over 5 hp Up to 400 rpm H 1.75 Over 401 rpm H 1.0

Floor Mounted Units

Up to 5 hp S 1.0

Over 5 hp Up to 400 rpm S-R 1.75 Over 401 rpm S-R 1.0

Centrifugal Blowers

175 - 224 rpm S-B 4.75 225 - 299 rpm S-B 3.75 300 - 374 rpm S-B 2.75 375 - 499 rpm S-B 2.5 Over 500 rpm S-B 1.75

Tubular Centrifugal and Axial Fans (Note (2))

Suspended H with deflection specified for centrifugal blowers Utility Fans (Note (2))

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 4


TABLE 1A



Equipment Type MSD _________ (Note (1)) Floor-Mounted S-R with deflections not specified for centrifugal blowers but not to exceed 2.75 inches

High Pressure Fans HR recommended for minimizing undesirable (Over 6 Inch thrust effects Water-Column Static Pressure) and Other Machineries Producing Thrust (Note (2)) Dimmer Banks and Transformers

Up to 1000 NM 0.35 NM 0.35 S 3.5 lbs.

Over 1000 lbs. SV 1.0 SV 1.0 SV 1.0

NOTES: (1) Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule Designations (Hyphenated designations are combinations of the following:)

B - Welded structural steel bases.

H - Spring isolators (suspended equipment and piping). Where required, provide with adjustable preloading devices.

HR - Thrust restraints

I - Concrete inertia bases with steel forms.

NM - Neoprene mounts.

NP - Neoprene pads.

R - Structural steel rail for equipment mounts.

S - Freestanding spring isolators (floor-mounted equipment).

SV - Freestanding spring isolators (floor-mounted equipment).

SX - Freestanding spring isolators with adjustable cushioned vertical stops and cushioned horizontal stops (floor-mounted equipment). Protected spring isolators SX may be substituted wherever S or SV is specified and shall meet all requirements.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 5


TABLE 1A



Equipment Type MSD _________ (Note (1))

(2) Fans

a. When fan motors are 75 hp or larger, use the deflection requirements for the next wider column spacing. Except for building slab on grade a minimum of 2.5 inches should be used unless larger deflections are specified in the centrifugal blower table.

b. Provide sway brace isolators for tubular centrifugal and axial fans when the fan pressure exceeds 4 inches water column.

c. Provide inertia bases for all fans in lieu of structural steel bases or rails specified above when the fan pressure exceeds 4 inches water column.

d. With attaching brackets, suspension spring isolators bridge between the structure and the thrust-producing machinery such as high-pressure fan. Both types H and HR normally provide reaction in tension, while types S, SV, and SX normally provide reaction in compression. Thrust restraints are low-cost and effective components available from manufacturers. Use thrust restraints to eliminate the need for or reduce the magnitude of inertia mass when the mass is only used to reduce the displacement effects of the thrust.

TABLE 1B

Class II Vibration Isolator Types and Minimum Static Deflection(MSD, inches) for basements below grade and floor slabs on earth

Equipment Type (Note (1)) MSD

Centrifugal Chillers or Heat Pumps

Hermetic Type NP 0.25 NM 0.35

Open Type NM-I 0.35

Reciprocating Air or Refrigeration Compressors

500 to 750 rpm S 1.0

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 6


TABLE 1B



751 rpm and up S 1.0

Reciprocating Chillers or Heat Pumps

500 to 750 rpm SV 1.0

751 rpm and up SV 1.0

Pumps

Closed Coupled NP 0.25

Up to 7 1/2 hp NM 0.35

Over 7 1/2 hp S-I 1.0

Base Mounted

Up to 20 hp S-I 1.0

20 to 75 hp S-I 1.0

Over 75 hp S-I 1.0

Factory Assembled Air Handling Equipment AH, AC and HV Units (Note (2))

Suspended Units

Up to 5 hp H 1.0


Floor Mounted Units

Up to 5 hp NP 0.25 NM 0.35

Over 5 hp Up to 400 rpm NM 0.35 Over 401 rpm NM 0.35

Centrifugal Blowers 175 - 224 rpm NM-B 0.35

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 7


TABLE 1B


Equipment Type (Note (1)) MSD 225 - 299 rpm NM-B 0.35 300 - 374 rpm NM-B 0.35 375 - 499 rpm NM-B 0.35 Over 500 rpm NM-B 0.35


Suspended H with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers

Utility Fans (Note (2))

Floor Mounted NM 0.35

High-Pressure Fans HR recommended for minimizing (Over 6 Inch undesirable thrust effects Water-Column Static Pressure) and Other Machines Producing Thrust (Note (2))

Internal Combustion Engines and Engine Driven Equip

750 rpm and over S 1.0

Dimmer Banks and Transformers

Up to 1000 lbs. NP 0.25 NM 0.35

Over 1000 lbs. SV 1.0

NOTES: Note (1) and Note (2) are same as for TABLE 1A.

Provide vibration isolators and seismic snubbers for mechanical and electrical machinery and associated piping and ductwork , to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure borne noise to the building structure or spaces or from the building structure to the machinery. Comply with the following vibration schedule.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 8


1.4.6 Machinery Airborne Sound Level Criteria

TABLE 2ASound Data Schedule

Equipment | Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)_______________ | Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)_________ _____________________|63 | 125 | 250 | 500 | 1000 | 2000 | 4000 | 8000

| | | | | | | | Air Handling Unit | 94 | 90 | 89 | 89 | 89 | 84 | 82 | 79 | | | | | | | | Air Conditioning Unit| 100 | 96 | 90 | 89 | 86 | 80 | 75 | 72 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Air Compressor | 90 | 89 | 92 | 93 | 92 | 92 | 90 | 81 | | | | | | | | Pump | 85 | 80 | 82 | 82 | 80 | 77 | 74 | 72 | | | | | | | | Fan | 55 | 50 | 48 | 47 | 48 | 46 | 42 | 37

1.4.6.1 Basic Criteria

For each piece of machinery in the human work environment, do not exceed the maximum airborne sound levels 84 dB A-weighted scale, continuous or intermittent, or 140 dB peak sound pressure-level, impact or impulse, noise.

1.4.6.2 Sound Data Schedule

TABLE 2ASound Data Schedule

Equipment | Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)_______________ | Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)_________ _____________________|63 | 125 | 250 | 500 | 1000 | 2000 | 4000 | 8000

| | | | | | | | Air Handling Unit | 94 | 90 | 89 | 89 | 89 | 84 | 82 | 79 | | | | | | | | Air Conditioning Unit| 100 | 96 | 90 | 89 | 86 | 80 | 75 | 72 | | | | | | | | Air Compressor | 90 | 89 | 92 | 93 | 92 | 92 | 90 | 81 | | | | | | | | Pump | 85 | 80 | 82 | 82 | 80 | 77 | 74 | 72 | | | | | | | | Fan | 55 | 50 | 48 | 47 | 48 | 46 | 42 | 37

1.4.7 Seismic Protection Criteria

Use a Horizontal Force Factor minimum 100 percent of the machinery weight considered passing through the machinery center of gravity in any horizontal direction. Unless vibration isolation is required to protect machinery against unacceptable structure transmitted noise or vibration, protect the structure or machinery from earthquakes by rigid structurally sound attachment to the load-supporting structure. Protect each piece of vibration-isolated machinery with protected spring isolators or separate seismic restraint devices. Determine by calculations the number and size of seismic restraints needed for each machinery. Verify seismic restraint

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 9


vendor's calculations by a registered professional engineer. Provide seismic snubbers and protected spring isolators rated in three principle axes. Verify ratings by independent laboratory testing, by analysis of an independent licensed structural engineer.

1.4.8 Welding

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Inertia bases

Machinery bases

Platforms

Rails

Saddles

SD-03 Product Data

Isolators

Flexible connectors

Flexible duct connectors

Pipe guides

Seismic snubbers

Vertical stops

Thrust restraints

Inertia bases

Machinery bases

Machinery foundations and subbases

Platforms

Rails

Saddles

Machinery manufacturer's sound data

SD-05 Design Data

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 10


Inertia bases

Machinery bases

Platforms

Rails

Saddles

Each item of machinery

Each item of machinery over 300 pounds

Submit design calculations for inertia bases, machinery bases, platforms, rails, and saddles, either by the machinery manufacturer for the recommended machinery mounting or by the vibration-isolation equipment manufacturer.

SD-06 Test Reports

Seismic snubbers

Equipment vibration tests

Equipment sound level tests

Protected spring isolators

Submit seismic protection rating in three principal axes certified by an independent laboratory or analyzed by an independent licensed structural engineer.


Vibration and noise isolation components

Seismic protection components


1.6.1 Vibration Isolator Procurement

For each piece of machinery to be isolated from vibration, supply the inertia base, machinery base, platform, rails, saddles, vibration isolators, seismic snubbers, and other associated materials and equipment as a coordinated package by a single manufacturer or by the machinery manufacturer. Select isolators that provide uniform deflection even when machinery weight is not evenly distributed. This requirement does not include the flexible connectors or the hangers for the associated piping and ductwork.

1.6.2 Unitized Machinery Assemblies

Mounting of unitized assemblies directly on vibration isolation springs is acceptable if machinery manufacturer certifies that the end supports of the assemblies have been designed for such installation.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 11


PART 2 PRODUCTS





2.2 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL PARTS

ASTM A 653/A 653M hot-dipped galvanized, or equivalent manufacturer standard coatings. Where steel parts are exposed to the weather, provide galvanized coating of at least 2 ounces of zinc per square foot of surface. Coat springs with neoprene.

2.3 NEOPRENE

ASTM D 471 and ASTM D 2240, Grade Durometer 40, 50, or 60, and oil resistant.

2.4 FLOOR-MOUNTED ISOLATORS

2.4.1 Neoprene Isolation Pads

Provide pads at least 1/4 inch thick with cross-ribbed or waffle design. For concentrated loads, provide steel bearing plates bonded or cold cemented to the pads.

2.4.2 Neoprene Isolators

Provide molded neoprene isolators having steel base plates with mounting holes and, at the top, steel mounting plates with mounting holes or threaded inserts. Provide elements of type and size coded with molded letters or color-coded for capacity identification. Embed metal parts completely in neoprene.

2.5 SPRING ISOLATORS AND PROTECTED SPRING ISOLATORS

Provide spring isolators or protected spring isolators that are adjustable and laterally stable with free-standing springs of horizontal stiffness at minimum 80 percent of the vertical (axial) stiffness. For machine-attached and floor-attached restraining elements, separate from metal-to-metal contact by neoprene cushions 1/8 inch thick minimum. Provide neoprene acoustic friction pads at least 1/4 inch thick.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 12


2.5.1 Springs

Provide springs with base and compression plates, to keep spring ends parallel during and after deflection to operating height. Provide outside coil diameters at least 0.8 of the operating height. At operating height, springs shall have additional travel to complete (solid) compression equal to at least 50 percent of the operating deflection.

2.5.2 Mounting and Adjustment

Provide base and compression plates with mounting holes or threaded fittings. Bolt leveling adjustment bolts to machinery or base.

2.6 SUSPENSION ISOLATORS

Provide hangers with suspension isolators encased in open steel brackets. Isolate hanger rods from isolator steel brackets with neoprene-lined opening.

2.6.1 Suspension Neoprene Isolators

Provide double-deflection elements with minimum 3/8 inch deflection.

2.6.2 Suspension Spring Isolators

Provide hangers with springs and molded neoprene elements in series. Provide isolators with adjustable spring-preloading devices where required to maintain constant pipe elevations during installation and when pipe operational loads are transferred to the springs.

2.7 MACHINERY BASES, PLATFORMS, RAILS SADDLES

ASTM A 36/A 36M and AISC 350.

2.8 INERTIA BASES

ASTM A 36/A 36M steel, ASTM C 94/C 94M (2,500 psi) concrete.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR PIPING

Straight or elbow flexible connectors rated for temperatures, pressures, and fluids to be conveyed. Provide flexible connectors with the strength 4 times operating pressure at highest system operating temperature. Provide elbow flexible connectors with a permanently set angle.

2.9.1 Elastomeric Flexible Connectors

Fabricated of multiple plies of tire cord fabric and elastomeric materials with integral reinforced elastomeric flanges with galvanized malleable iron back up rings.

2.9.2 Metal Flexible Connectors

Fabricated of Grade E phosphor bronze, monel or corrugated stainless steel tube covered with comparable bronze or stainless steel braid restraining and pressure cover.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 13


2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

Provide flexible duct connectors fabricated in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Const Stds.

2.11 SEISMIC SNUBBERS FOR EQUIPMENT

Factory-fabricated, omni-directional with factory set air gaps between 1/8 inch minimum and 1/4 inch maximum. Load capacity of each snubber at 50 percent neoprene element deflection shall be 1.0g minimum. Provide replaceable neoprene elements 3/4 inch minimum thickness.

2.12 PIPE GUIDES

Factory-fabricated. Weld steel bar guides to the pipe at a maximum radial spacing of 60 degrees. The outside diameter around the guide bars shall be smaller than the inside diameter of the guide sleeve in accordance with standard field construction practice. For pipe temperatures below 60 degrees F, provide metal sleeve, minimum one pound per cubic foot density insulation.

2.13 THRUST RESTRAINTS

Adjustable spring thrust restraints, able to resist the thrust force with at least 25 percent unused capacity. The operating spring deflection shall be not less than 50 percent of the static deflection of the isolation supporting the machinery.

2.14 SEISMIC PROTECTION COMPONENTS FOR PIPING AND DUCTWORK

Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATRIALS AND METHODS.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Vibration and Noise Isolation Components

Install vibration-and-noise isolation materials and equipment in accordance with machinery manufacturer's instructions.

3.1.2 Suspension Vibration Isolators

Provide suspension isolation hangers for piping, suspended equipment, and suspended equipment platforms in mechanical equipment rooms, as specified. For operating load static deflections of 1/4 inch or less, provide neoprene pads or single deflection neoprene isolators. For operating load static deflections over 5/16 to 3/8 inch, provide double-deflection neoprene element isolators. For operating load static deflections over 3/8 inch, provide isolators with spring and neoprene elements in series.

3.1.3 Vertical Stops

For machinery affected by wind pressure or having an operational weight different from installed weight, provide resilient vertical limit stops which prevent spring extension when weight is removed. Provide vertical stops for machinery containing liquid, such as water chillers, evaporative coolers, boilers, and cooling towers. Spring isolated or protected spring isolated machinery must rock and move freely within limits of stops or

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 14


seismic restraint devices.

3.1.4 Thrust Restraints

Where required, provide pairs of thrust restraints, symmetrically installed on both sides of the steady state line of thrust.

3.1.5 Flexible Pipe and Duct Connectors

Install flexible connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. When liquid pulsation dampening is required, flexible connectors with spherical configuration may be used. Provide restraints for pipe connectors at pumps to prevent connector failure upon pump startup.

3.1.6 Seismic Snubbers

Provide snubbers as close as possible to each vibration isolator as indicated. After installing and leveling of the machinery, adjust snubbers in accordance with the snubber manufacturer's instructions.

3.1.7 Machinery

Provide vibration isolators, flexible connectors and seismic snubbers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Machinery with spring isolators or protected spring isolators shall rock or move freely within limits of stops or seismic snubber restraints.

3.1.7.1 Stability

Isolators shall be stable during starting and stopping of machinery without traverse and eccentric movement of machinery that would damage or adversely affect the machinery or attachments.

3.1.7.2 Lateral Motion

The installed vibration isolation system for each piece of floor or ceiling mounted machinery shall have a maximum lateral motion under machinery start up and shut down conditions of not more than 1/4 inch. Restrain motions in excess by approved spring mountings.

3.1.7.3 Unbalanced Machinery

Provide foundation suspension systems specifically designed to resist horizontal forces for machinery with large unbalanced horizontal forces. Vibration isolator systems shall conform to the machinery manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.7.4 Nonrotating Machinery

Mount nonrotating machinery in systems which includes rotating or vibrating machinery on isolators having the same deflection as the hangers and supports for the pipe connected to.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 15


3.1.7.5 Unitized Machinery Assemblies

TABLE 3A


Column Slab on earth 31-40 feet 41-50 feet Spacing and 0-30 feet

Equipment Type MSD Type MSD Type MSD _________ (Note (1)) (Note (1)) (Note (1))


Up to 7 1/2 hp S-I 1.0 S-I 1.0 S-I 1.0

Over 7 1/2 hp S-I 1.5 S-I 2.5 S-I 2.5

Base Mounted Pumps

Up to 20 hp S-I 1.5 S-I 2.5 S-I 2.5

20 to 75 hp S-I 1.5 S-I 2.5 S-I 3.5

Over 75 hp S-I 2.5 S-I 3.5 S-I 3.5

Cooling Towers and SV with deflections specified for centrifugal Evaporative Condensers blowers when springs are supported on beams. Use deflection listed for column supported floors with up to 30 foot column spacing when springs are located on columns or bearing walls


Suspended Units

Up to 5 hp H 1.0 H 1.0 H 1.0

Over 5 hp Up to 400 rpm H 1.75 H 1.75 H 1.75 Over 401 rpm H 1.0 H 1.5 H 2.5

Floor Mounted Units

Up to 5 hp S 1.0 S 1.0 S 1.0

Over 5 hp

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 16


TABLE 3A



Equipment Type MSD Type MSD Type MSD _________ (Note (1)) (Note (1)) (Note (1)) Up to 400 rpm S-R 1.75 S-R 1.75 S-R 2.5 Over 401 rpm S-R 1.0 S-R 1.5 S-R 2.5

Centrifugal Blowers

175 - 224 rpm S-B 4.75 S-B 4.75 S-B 4.75 225 - 299 rpm S-B 3.75 S-B 4.75 S-B 4.75 300 - 374 rpm S-B 2.75 S-B 4.5 S-B 4.75 375 - 499 rpm S-B 2.5 S-B 3.5 S-B 4.5 Over 500 rpm S-B 1.75 S-B 2.5 S-B 3.5


Suspended H with deflection specified for centrifugal blowers


Floor-Mounted S-R with deflections not specified for centrifugal blowers but not to exceed 2.75 inches


Up to 1000 NM 0.35 NM 0.35 S 3.5 lbs.

Over 1000 lbs. SV 1.0 SV 1.0 SV 1.0






SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 17


TABLE 3A



Equipment Type MSD Type MSD Type MSD _________ (Note (1)) (Note (1)) (Note (1)) NM - Neoprene mounts.

NP - Neoprene pads.





(2) Fans




d. With attaching brackets, suspension spring isolators bridge between the structure and the thrust-producing machinery such as high-pressure fan. Both types H and HR normally provide reaction in tension, while types S, SV, and SX normally provide reaction in compression. Thrust restraints are low-cost and effective components available from manufacturers. Use thrust restraints to eliminate the need for or reduce the magnitude of inertia mass when the mass is only used to reduce the displacement effects of the thrust.

Unitized assemblies such as chillers with evaporator and condenser, and top mounted centrifugal compressor or unitized absorption refrigeration machines, structurally designed with end supports, may be mounted on steel rails and springs in lieu of steel bases and springs. Where the slab or deck is less than 4 inches thick, provide spring isolation units with the

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 18


deflection double that of the vibration isolation schedule, up to a maximum static deflection of 5 inches.

3.1.7.6 Roof and Upper Floor Mounted Machinery

TABLE 3A




Reciprocating Chillers or Heat Pumps

500 to 750 rpm SV-R 1.75 SV-R 2.5 SV-R 3.5

751 rpm and up SV-R 1.5 SV-R 2.5 SV-R 3.5


Up to 7 1/2 hp S-I 1.0 S-I 1.0 S-I 1.0

Over 7 1/2 hp S-I 1.5 S-I 2.5 S-I 2.5

Base Mounted Pumps

Up to 20 hp S-I 1.5 S-I 2.5 S-I 2.5

20 to 75 hp S-I 1.5 S-I 2.5 S-I 3.5

Over 75 hp S-I 2.5 S-I 3.5 S-I 3.5

Cooling Towers and SV with deflections specified for centrifugal Evaporative Condensers blowers when springs are supported on beams. Use deflection listed for column supported floors with up to 30 foot column spacing when springs are located on columns or bearing walls


Suspended Units

Up to 5 hp H 1.0 H 1.0 H 1.0

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 19


TABLE 3A




Over 5 hp Up to 400 rpm H 1.75 H 1.75 H 1.75 Over 401 rpm H 1.0 H 1.5 H 2.5

Floor Mounted Units

Up to 5 hp S 1.0 S 1.0 S 1.0

Over 5 hp Up to 400 rpm S-R 1.75 S-R 1.75 S-R 2.5 Over 401 rpm S-R 1.0 S-R 1.5 S-R 2.5

Centrifugal Blowers

175 - 224 rpm S-B 4.75 S-B 4.75 S-B 4.75 225 - 299 rpm S-B 3.75 S-B 4.75 S-B 4.75 300 - 374 rpm S-B 2.75 S-B 4.5 S-B 4.75 375 - 499 rpm S-B 2.5 S-B 3.5 S-B 4.5 Over 500 rpm S-B 1.75 S-B 2.5 S-B 3.5


Suspended H with deflection specified for centrifugal blowers


Floor-Mounted S-R with deflections not specified for centrifugal blowers but not to exceed 2.75 inches


Up to 1000 NM 0.35 NM 0.35 S 3.5 lbs.

Over 1000 lbs. SV 1.0 SV 1.0 SV 1.0


SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 20


TABLE 3A








NM - Neoprene mounts.

NP - Neoprene pads.





(2) Fans




d. With attaching brackets, suspension spring isolators bridge between the structure and the thrust-producing machinery such as high-pressure fan. Both types H and HR normally provide reaction in tension, while types S, SV, and SX normally provide reaction in compression.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 21


TABLE 3A



Equipment Type MSD Type MSD Type MSD _________ (Note (1)) (Note (1)) (Note (1)) Thrust restraints are low-cost and effective components available from manufacturers. Use thrust restraints to eliminate the need for or reduce the magnitude of inertia mass when the mass is only used to reduce the displacement effects of the thrust.

TABLE 3B



Pumps

Closed Coupled NP 0.25

Up to 7 1/2 hp NM 0.35

Over 7 1/2 hp S-I 1.0

Base Mounted

Up to 20 hp S-I 1.0

20 to 75 hp S-I 1.0

Over 75 hp S-I 1.0

Cooling Towers and NP 0.25 Evaporative Condensers NM 0.35


Suspended Units

Up to 5 hp H 1.0


Floor Mounted Units

Up to 5 hp NP 0.25

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 22


TABLE 3B


Equipment Type (Note (1)) MSD NM 0.35

Over 5 hp Up to 400 rpm NM 0.35 Over 401 rpm NM 0.35

Centrifugal Blowers 175 - 224 rpm NM-B 0.35 225 - 299 rpm NM-B 0.35 300 - 374 rpm NM-B 0.35 375 - 499 rpm NM-B 0.35 Over 500 rpm NM-B 0.35


Suspended H with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers



Up to 1000 lbs. NP 0.25 NM 0.35

Over 1000 lbs. SV 1.0

NOTES: Note (1) and Note (2) are same as for TABLE 3A.

On the roof or upper floors, mount machinery on isolators with vertical stops. Rest isolators on beams or structures designed and installed in accordance with the SMACNA Arch. Manual, Plate 61.

3.1.8 Piping and High Pressure Ductwork

Provide vibration isolation for piping and high pressure ductwork with over 6 inches water column. The isolator deflections shall be equal to or greater than the static deflection of the vibration isolators provided for the connected machinery as follows:

3.1.8.1 High Pressure Ductwork

For a distance of 50 feet from fans, exhausters and blowers.

3.1.8.2 Piping Connected to Vibration Isolated Machinery

For a distance of 50 feet or 50 pipe diameters, whichever is greater.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 23


3.1.8.3 Steam Pressure Reducing Valves

Connected piping for a distance of 50 feet or 50 pipe diameters, whichever is greater.

3.1.8.4 Condenser Water

For the full length of the piping.

3.1.8.5 Chilled, Hot, and Dual Temperature Piping

For risers from pumps and for the first 20 feet of the branch connection of the main supply and return piping at each floor.

3.1.9 Water and Steam Distribution Piping Application

Resiliently support piping with combination spring and neoprene isolation hangers. Provide spring elements with 5/8 inch static deflection; install the hanger with spacing so that the first harmonic natural frequency is not less than 360 Hz. Provide double-deflection neoprene elements. For the first two isolation hangers from the rotating equipment of 3 1/2 inch and smaller piping systems, ensure a deflection equal to the equipment-isolation static deflection. For the first four piping isolation hanger supports from rotating equipment of 4 inch and larger piping systems, use resilient hanger-rod isolators at a fixed elevation regardless of load changes. Incorporate an adjustable preloading device to transfer the load to the spring element within the hanger mounting after the piping system has been filled with water.

3.1.10 Pipe Hanger and Support Installation

3.1.10.1 Pipe Hangers

Provide eye-bolts or swivel joints for pipe hangers to permit pipe thermal or mechanical movement without angular misalignment of hanger vibration isolator.

3.1.10.2 High Temperatures

Where neoprene elements of vibration isolator may be subjected to high pipe temperatures, above 160 degrees F, provide metal heat shields or thermal isolators.

3.1.10.3 Valves

Provide vibration isolation hangers and supports at modulating, pressure reducing, or control valves which will induce fluid pulsations. When required or indicated, isolate valves with flexible connectors.

3.1.10.4 Machinery Without Flexible Connections

When piping is not connected to vibrating machinery with flexible connectors, provide the first four hangers with isolation elements designed for deflections equal to equipment vibration isolator deflections (including static, operating, and start-up).

3.1.10.5 Twelve Inch and Larger Pipe

Suspend 12 inch and larger pipe vibration hangers from resilient hanger rod

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 24


isolators. Resilient hanger rod isolators shall be capable of supporting pipe during installation at a fixed elevation regardless of load changes. Provide an adjustable preloading device to transfer the load to isolation element after operational load is applied. Provide 12 inch and larger pipe supports with unrestrained stable springs for one inch deflection and with built-in leveling device and resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring elongation when partial load is removed. Provide isolators capable of providing rigid anchoring during erection of piping so that it can be erected at a fixed elevation.

3.1.10.6 Pipe Risers

Provide pipe riser supports with bearing plates and two layers of 1/4 inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad loaded to not more than 50 psi. Separate isolation pads with 1/4 inch steel plate. Weld pipe riser clamps at anchor points to the pipe and to pairs of vertical acoustical pipe anchor mountings which shall be rigidly fastened to the steel framing.

3.1.10.7 Supports at Base of Pipe Risers

Piping isolation supports at the base of risers shall be two layers of 1/2 inch thick heavy-duty neoprene pad separated by 1/4 inch thick steel plate. Use bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of not more than 500 psi. Weld the stanchion between the pipe and isolation support to the pipe and weld or bolt to the isolation support. Bolt isolation support to the floor slab with resilient sleeves and washers. Where supplementary steel is required to support piping, provide a maximum deflection of 0.08 inches at the mid-span of this steel under the load. Rigidly support piping from the supplementary steel with the supplementary steel isolated from the building structure with isolators.

3.1.10.8 Pipe Anchors

Attach each end of the pipe anchor to an omni-directional pipe isolator which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to the steel framing or structural concrete. Provide a telescoping pipe isolator of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 inch thick pad of heavy-duty neoprene or heavy-duty neoprene and canvas. Provide vertical restraints by similar material to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi.

3.1.11 High Pressure Ductwork Hanger and Support Installation

Provide ductwork with vibration isolation hangers and supports where required or indicated. Connect ductwork to equipment with flexible duct connectors. Segment ductwork with flexible duct connectors.

3.1.11.1 Duct Risers

Provide duct riser supports within shafts with suitable bearing plates and two layers of 1/4 inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad loaded to not more than 50 psi. Separate isolation pads with 1/4 inch steel plate.

3.1.11.2 Supports at Base of Duct Risers

For duct isolation supports at the base of risers, provide two layers of 1/2 inch thick heavy-duty neoprene pad separated by 1/4 inch thick steel plate. Use bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of not more than 500 psi. Weld the stanchion between the duct and isolation support to the

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 25


pipe, and weld or bolt to the isolation support. Bolt isolation support to the floor slab with resilient sleeves and washers. Where supplementary steel is required to support ducts, provide a maximum deflection of 1/4 inch at the midspan of this steel under the supported load. Rigidly support duct from the supplementary steel and the supplementary steel isolators.

3.1.11.3 Duct Anchors

Attach each end of the duct anchor to an omni-directional isolator which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to the steel framing or structural concrete as indicated. Vertical restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The load on the isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi.

3.1.12 Equipment Room Sound Isolation

Do not allow direct contact between pipe or ducts and walls, floor slabs, roofs, ceilings or partitions of equipment rooms.

3.1.12.1 Pipe Penetrations

Provide galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeves and tightly pack annular space between sleeves and pipe with insulation having a flame spread rating not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, maximum effective temperature 1000 degrees F, bulk density 6 pounds/cu. ft. minimum. Provide uninsulated pipe with a one inch thick mineral fiber sleeve the full length of the penetration and seal each end with an interior or exterior and weather resistant non-hardening compound. Provide sealant and mineral-fiber sleeve of a flame spread rating not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

3.1.12.2 Duct Penetrations

Pack openings around ducts with mineral fiber insulation the full length of the penetration having a flame spread rating not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. At each end of duct opening provide sealing collars and seal with an interior non-hardening compound.

3.1.12.3 Ducts Passing Through Equipment Rooms

Provide with sound insulation equal to the sound attenuation value of the wall, floor, or ceiling penetrated.

3.1.13 Machinery Foundations and Subbases

Provide cast in place anchor bolts as recommended by the machinery manufacturer.

3.1.14 Inertia Bases

Install inertia bases in accordance with the recommendations of the machinery manufacturer or inertia base manufacturer, as applicable.

3.1.15 Seismic Restraints for Piping and Ductwork

Provide seismic restraints in accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Mnl.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 26


3.1.16 Suspended Machinery Platforms

Provide with vibration-isolation hangers.

3.1.17 Electrical Connections

Provide flexible conduit or multiple conductor cable connections for machinery with sufficient extra length to permit 2 inch minimum displacement in any direction without damage.

3.1.18 Systems Not To Be Vibration Isolated

Do not provide vibration isolation for electrical raceways and conduits or for fire protection, storm, sanitary, and domestic water piping systems which do not include pumps or other vibrating, rotating, or pulsating equipment including control and pressure reducing valves.


Provide equipment and apparatus required for performing inspections and tests. Notify Contracting Officer 14 days prior to machinery sound vibration and seismic testing. Rebalance, adjust, or replace machinery with noise or vibration levels in excess of those given in the machinery specifications, or machinery manufacturer's data.

3.2.1 Field Inspections

Prior to initial operation, inspect the vibration isolators and seismic snubbers for conformance to drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's data and instructions. Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Check connector alignment before and after filling of system and during operation. Correct misalignment without damage to connector and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.2.2 Spring Isolator Inspection

After installation of spring isolators or protected spring isolators, and seismic restraint devices, the machinery shall rock freely on its spring isolators within limits of stops or seismic restraint devices. Eliminate or correct interferences.

3.2.3 Tests

Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and noise transmissions to specified levels.

3.2.3.1 Equipment Vibration Tests

Perform vibration tests to determine conformance with vibration isolation schedule specified specified.

3.2.3.2 Equipment Sound Level Tests

Measure continuous or intermittent steady state noise with a sound level meter set for low response. Measure impact or impulse noise as dB peak sound pressure level (20 uPa) with an impact noise analyzer. Measure work distance from person to machinery noise center. Perform sound level tests to determine conformance with sound level schedule specified.

SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 27


a. Interior Machinery Sound

In accordance with ARI 575, measure the sound data for air conditioning and refrigeration machinery, such as fans, boilers, valves, engines, turbines, or transformers. Measure the sound pressure levels around mechanical and electrical machinery located in equipment spaces, 3 feet horizontally from the edge closest to the acoustical center of the machinery at points 3 feet and 5.5 feet above floor. Take measurements at the center of each side of the machinery. Locate the microphone at least 3 feet from the observer and measuring instruments. Observer shall not be between the machinery and the measuring instrument.

b. Exterior Machinery Sound

Measure sound data for machinery radiating noise outside the building in such applications as grade installations, area-ways, wall and roof installations for cooling towers, refrigerant condensers, engine driven generator sets, fans, air conditioning machinery, heat pumps, evaporative coolers, exhaust silencers, and air intakes.


SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 28


SECTION 22 07 19.00 40

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION07/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES




ASTM C 1136 (2006) Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 195 (2000) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C 449/C 449M (2000) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement


ASTM C 534 (2007a) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C 552 (2003) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 592 (2004) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type)

ASTM C 795 (2003) Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel

ASTM C 916 (1985; R 2001e1) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation


ASTM C 921 (2003a) Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 1


ASTM D 579 (2004) Standard Specification for Greige Woven Glass Fabrics


ASTM E 96/E 96M (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials


NFPA 220 (2006) Standard on Types of Building Construction


SAE AMS 3779 (1990; Rev A; R 1994) Tape Adhesive, Pressure Sensitive Thermal Radiation Resistant, Aluminum Foil/Glass Cloth


Section 23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS applies to work specified in this section.


Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220. Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except cellular elastomers, shall have a flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25, and a smoke-developed classification (SDC) of 50. These maximum values shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E 84. Coatings and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.

Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Drawings for pipe insulation shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this section.

SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following items:

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 2


AdhesivesCoatingsInsulating CementInsulation MaterialsJacketingTape

PART 2 PRODUCTS





2.2 MATERIALS

Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free and conform to the following.

2.2.1 Adhesives

2.2.1.1 Cloth Adhesives

Adhesives for adhering, sizing, and finishing lagging cloth, canvas, and open-weave glass cloth shall be a pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 916, Type I.

2.2.1.2 Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives

Adhesives for attaching laps of vapor-barrier materials and presized glass cloth and for attaching insulation to itself, to metal, and to various other substrates, shall be solvent-base, synthetic-rubber type and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 916, Type I, for attaching fibrous-glass insulation to metal surfaces. Solvent shall be nonflammable.

2.2.1.3 Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive

Adhesive for cellular elastomer insulation shall be a solvent cutback chloroprene elastomer conforming to ASTM C 916, Type I, and shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the intended use.

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 3


2.2.2 Coatings

2.2.2.1 Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing

Coatings for outdoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces such as fittings and elbows shall be a nonasphaltic, hydrocarbon polymer, solvent-base mastic containing a blend of nonflammable solvents. Coatings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1136 and ASTM C 921.

2.2.2.2 Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing

Coatings for indoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces shall be a pigmented resin and solvent compound and shall conform to ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.2.2.3 Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing

Coatings for outdoor and indoor nonvapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces shall be pigmented polymer-emulsion type recommended by the insulation material manufacturer for the surface to be coated and shall be applied to specified dry-film thickness.

2.2.2.4 Cellular-Elastomer Insulation Coating

Finish coating for cellular-elastomer insulation shall be a polyvinylchloride lacquer approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer.

2.2.2.5 Coating Color

Coating color shall be as specified by the Contracting Officer.

2.2.3 Insulating Cement

2.2.3.1 General Purpose Insulating Cement

General purpose insulating cement shall be diatomaceous silica and shall conform to ASTM C 195. Composite shall be rated for 1800 degrees F service and shall have a thermal-conductivity maximum of 0.85 Btu by inch per hour per square foot for each degree F temperature differential at 200 degrees F mean temperature for 1 inch thickness.

2.2.3.2 Finishing Insulating Cement

Finishing insulating cement shall be mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting type conforming to ASTM C 449/C 449M.

2.2.4 Calking

Calking used with specified insulation materials shall be an elastomeric joint sealant in accordance with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.

2.2.5 Corner Angles

Corner angle piping insulation shall be nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall be in accordance with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003.

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 4


2.2.6 Insulation Materials

Insulation conductances shall be maximum values, as tested at any point, not an average. Insulation conductance found by test to exceed the specified maximum shall either be replaced or augmented by an additional thickness to bring it to the required maximum conductance and a complete finishing system.

2.2.6.1 Mineral Fiber

Mineral fiber shall conform to ASTM C 592, shall be suitable for surface temperatures up to 370 degrees F, and shall be of not less than 4-pound per cubic foot density. Thermal conductivity shall be not greater than 0.26 Btu per hour per square foot square per degree F at 150 degrees F mean.

2.2.6.2 Pipe Barrel

Pipe barrel insulation shall be Type II, Molded, Grade A or Type III, Precision V-Groove, Grade A for use at temperatures up to and including 1200 degrees F.

2.2.6.3 Pipe Fittings

Pipe fitting insulation shall be molded pipe fitting covering for use at temperatures up to and including 1200 degrees F.

2.2.6.4 Flexible Blankets

Flexible blankets shall be blankets and felts for use at temperatures up to and including 350 degrees F minimum 1 pound per cubic foot density. Thermal conductivity shall be not greater than 0.26 Btu per hour per square foot per degree F at 75 degrees F mean.

2.2.6.5 Cellular Elastomer

Cellular elastomer shall conform to ASTM C 534, except that the water-vapor permeability shall not exceed 0.30 perms per foot per inch per hour per square foot mercury pressure difference for 1 inch thickness.

2.2.6.6 Cellular Glass

Cellular glass shall conform to ASTM C 552, Type II, Grade 2, pipe covering. Substitutions for this material shall not be permitted. Minimum thickness shall be 1-1/2 inches.

2.2.6.7 Calcium Silicate

Calcium silicate shall conform to ASTM C 533. Apparent thermal conductivity shall be not greater than 0.54 Btu-inch per hour per square foot per degree F at 200 degrees F mean.

2.2.7 Jacketing

2.2.7.1 Aluminum Jackets

Aluminum sheet shall be in accordance with ASTM B 209 and shall be 0.016 inch thick with factory-applied vapor barrier on the insulation side. Aluminum shall be made from smooth, polished, Temper H14 , Alloy 3003 .

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 5


Straps shall be AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel, 15 mils thick, 1/2 inch wide, for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe over 12 inch diameter.

Elbow jackets shall be 0.016 inch thick, deep-drawn, die-shaped, two-piece components for long-radius, butt-weld elbows manufactured from the same materials as specified for jackets, with factory-attached vapor-seals on underside of the aluminum. Preinsulated, voidless, jacketed components conforming to these specifications shall be used. Preinsulated fittings shall have a 2 inch overlay beyond route for weld bead.

Vapor barrier shall be 30-60-30 laminated-asphalt paper with 10 pound per 100 square foot polyethylene coating.

Pipe jackets shall have not less than 2 inch longitudinal and circumferential lap.

Sealant for longitudinal and butt joints of aluminum jacketing shall be an aluminum-pigmented, butyl, polymer sealant with high-butyl solids.

2.2.7.2 Glass Cloth Jackets

Glass cloth shall be plain-weave glass cloth conforming to ASTM D 579, Style 141 and shall weigh not less than 7.23 ounces per square yard before sizing. Cloth shall be factory applied wherever possible.

Glass reinforcing cloth shall be a leno weave, 26-end and 12-pick thread conservation, with a warp and fill tensile strength of 45 and 30 pounds per inch of width, respectively, and with a weight of not less than 1.5 ounces per square yard. At the Contractor's option, Style 191 leno-weave glass cloth conforming to ASTM D 579 may be provided.

2.2.7.3 PVC Jackets

Polyvinylchloride (PVC) shall be a 0.010 inch thick, factory-premolded, one-piece fitting. Material shall be self-extinguishing, high-impact strength, moderate chemical resistance. Permeability rating shall be 0.01 grain per hour per square foot per inch of mercury pressure difference, determined in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. Vapor-barrier joint adhesive shall be the manufacturer's standard solvent-weld type.

Vapor barrier shall conform to ASTM C 1136, Type I, low-vapor transmission, high-puncture resistance for use on insulation for piping, ducts, and equipment.

2.2.7.4 3-Ply Laminate

Jacketing shall be a 3-ply laminate of 35-pound per 100 square foot white-bleached kraft, bonded to not less than 0.0007 inch thick aluminum foil and reinforced with glass fiber.

Water-vapor permeance rating of the composite shall be 0.02 perm or grain per hour per square foot, per inch of mercury pressure differential, determined in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.

2.2.8 Tape

Glass lagging shall be a knitted elastic cloth specifically suitable for continuous spiral wrapping of insulated pipe bends and fittings and shall

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 6


produce a smooth, tight, wrinkle-free surface. Tape shall conform to requirements of SAE AMS 3779, SAE AMS 3779, ASTM D 579, and ASTM C 921, and shall weigh not less than 10 ounces per square yard.

2.3 PIPING SYSTEMS

Insulation thickness and pipe sizes are in inches. Pipe size is inclusive dimensionally, and includes pipe nominal pipe size (NPS) and tubing outside diameter.

2.3.1 Dual-Temperature (Hot- and Chilled-) Water Piping

Insulation shall be mineral fiber with vapor barrier jacket, Type T-1 Thickness shall be not less than that given in the following list. Aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, and flanges shall be insulated.

PIPE SIZE INSULATION THICKNESS (INCH) (INCH)

Up to 1-1/4 1-1/2

1-1/4 to 3 1-1/2

3 and larger 2

2.3.2 Hot-Water, Steam, and Condensate-Return Piping

Insulation shall be mineral fiber with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2. Thickness shall be not less than that given in the following list. Aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces shall be insulated.


Up to 4 1

4 to 10 1-1/2

10 to 12 2

2.3.3 Cold-Water and Condensate-Drain Piping

Aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and miscellaneous surfaces shall be insulated

Insulation shall be 3/8 inch mineral fiber with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2.

2.3.4 Refrigerant Suction Piping

Insulation shall be cellular-elastomer, Type T-3. Thickness shall be nominal 3/4 inch. Surfaces, including valve, fittings, unions, and flanges, shall be insulated.

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 7


2.3.5 Steam and Condensate Piping, 350 psig

Insulation shall be calcium silicate with glass cloth jacket, Type T-5. Thickness shall be not less than indicated in following list which is based on an 80 degrees F ambient temperature in still air with an insulation "K" factor of 0.37 at 200 degrees F mean temperature:


Up to 1-1/2 3-1/2

1-1/2 to 4 4

4 to 8 4

8 to 12 4

2.3.6 Hot Water Heating Converter

Insulation shall be calcium silicate with glass cloth jacket, Type T-7. Thickness shall be 1-1/2 inches.

2.3.7 Chilled-Water and Dual-Temperature Pumps

Insulation shall be cellular elastomer, Type T-9. Thickness shall be 1 inch. Surfaces subject to condensation shall be covered, and a vapor-barrier coating shall be supplied.

2.3.8 Low-Pressure Steam and Condensate, Weather-Exposed

Insulation shall be calcium silicate with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17. Thickness shall be not less than that indicated in the following list. All systems shall be insulated.

CONDUIT SIZE INSULATION THICKNESS (INCH) (INCH)

Up to 4 1-1/2 4 to 10 2 10 and larger 2-1/2

2.3.9 Steam & Condensate, Weather-Exposed, 125 psig

Insulation shall be calcium silicate with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17. Thickness shall be not less than that indicated in the following list. All system surfaces shall be insulated.

CONDUIT SIZE INSULATION THICKNESS (INCH) (INCH)

1-1/2 1-1/2

4 2

10 and larger 3

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 8


2.3.10 Steam & Condensate, Weather-Exposed, 350 psig

Insulation shall be calcium silicate with weatherproof jacket, Type T-17. Thickness shall be not less than that indicated in the following list. All system surfaces shall be insulated.


Up to 1-1/2 3-1/2

1-1/2 to 4 4

4 to 8 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS

Contours on exposed work shall be smooth and continuous. Cemented laps, flaps, bands, and tapes shall be smoothly and securely pasted down. Adhesives shall be applied on a full-coverage basis.

Insulation shall be applied only to system or component surfaces that have been tested and approved.

Joints shall be tight with insulation lengths tightly butted against each other. Where lengths are cut, cuts shall be smooth and square and without breakage of end surfaces. Where insulation terminates, ends shall be neatly tapered and effectively sealed, or finished as specified. Longitudinal seams of exposed insulation shall be directed away from normal view.

Materials shall be applied in conformance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

Surfaces shall be clean and free of oil and grease before insulation adhesives or mastics are applied. Solvent cleaning required to bring metal surfaces to such condition shall be provided.

Installation Drawings for pipe insulation shall be in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3.2 SYSTEM TYPES

3.2.1 Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket

Piping shall be covered with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-and field-attached vapor-barrier jacket. Vapor seal shall be maintained. Jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands shall be securely cemented in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap shall be not less than 1-1/2 inches . Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 3 inches wide.

Exposed-to-view fittings and valve bodies shall be covered with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Fitting insulation shall be temporarily secured in place with light cord ties. A 60-mil coating of white indoor vapor-barrier coating shall be applied and, while still wet, wrapped with glass lagging tape with 50 percent overlap, and shall be smoothly blended into the

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 9


adjacent jacketing. Additional coating shall be applied as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillet or contour coating, then allowed to fully cure before the finish coating is applied. On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and special configurations shall be built up from mineral fiber and a special mastic consisting of a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Where standard vapor-barrier jacketing cannot be used, the surfaces shall be made vapor tight by using coating and glass lagging cloth or tape as previously specified.

In lieu of materials and methods previously specified, fittings may be wrapped with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Seams shall be made vapor tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All jacket ends shall be held in place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils thick by 1/2 inch wide.

Pipe insulation shall be set into an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of 6 inches at maximum 12-foot spacing and the ends of the insulation sealed to the jacketing with the same material to provide an effective vapor-barrier stop.

Staples shall not be used in applying insulation. Vapor-barrier materials shall be continuous over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe sleeves, hangers, and other concealments.

Piping insulation at hangers shall consist of 13-pounds per cubic foot density, fibrous-glass inserts or expanded, rigid, closed-cell, polyvinylchloride. Junctions shall be sealed with vapor-barrier jacket where required, glass-cloth mesh tape, and vapor-barrier coating.

White-bleached kraft paper side of the jacketing shall be on the side exposed to view.

Exposed-to-view insulation shall be finished with not less than a 6-mil dry-film thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.

3.2.2 Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket

Piping shall be covered with a mineral-fiber, pipe insulation with factory-attached, presized, white, glass cloth. Jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands shall be securely cemented in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap shall be not less than 1-1/2 inches. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 3 inches wide.

Exposed-to-view fittings shall be covered with preformed mineral-fiber fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation and temporarily secured in place with light cord ties. Impregnated glass lagging tape shall be installed with indoor vapor-barrier on 50 percent overlap basis and the tape shall be blended smoothly into the adjacent jacketing. Additional coating shall be applied as needed, and rubber gloved to a smooth contour. Ends of insulation shall be taped to the pipe at valves 2 inches and smaller. On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and special configurations shall be built up from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive, diluted with 3 parts water. Surfaces shall be finished with glass cloth or tape lagging.

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 10


Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger and all flanges shall be covered with preformed insulation of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation.

Exposed-to-view insulation shall be finished with a minimum 6-mil dry-film thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.

3.2.3 Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer

Piping-system surfaces shall be covered with flexible cellular-elastomer sheet or preformed insulation. Vapor seal shall be maintained. Insulation shall be cemented into continuous material with a solvent cutback chloroprene adhesive recommended by the manufacturer for the specific purpose. Adhesive shall be applied to both of the surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis to a minimum thickness of 10 mils wet or approximately 150 square feet per gallon of undiluted adhesive.

Insulation on cold water piping shall be sealed to the pipe for a minimum of 6 inches at maximum intervals of 12 feet to form an effective vapor barrier. At piping supports, insulation shall be continuous through using outside-carrying type clevis hangers with insulation shield. Cork load-bearing inserts shall be installed between the pipe and insulation shields to prevent insulation compression.

Hot-water, cold-water, and condensate drain pipes shall be insulated to the extent shown with nominal 1/2 inch thick, fire retardant (FR), cellular elastomer, preformed pipe insulation. Joints shall be sealed with adhesive.

At pipe hangers or supports where the insulation rests on the pipe hanger strap, the insulation shall be cut with a brass cork borer and a No. 3 superior grade cork inserted. Seams shall be sealed with approved adhesive. Sweat fitting shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer insulation of the same nominal pipe size and thickness as the insulation on the adjacent piping or tubing. Miter-cut pieces shall be joined with approved adhesive. Covers shall be slit and snapped over the fitting, and joints shall be sealed with approved adhesive.

Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeve-type covers formed from miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer thermal insulation having an inside diameter large enough to overlap adjacent pipe insulation. Pipe insulation shall be butted against fittings. Overlap shall be not less than 1 inch . Adhesive shall be used to join cover pieces and cement the cover to the pipe insulation.

Surfaces exposed to view or ultraviolet light shall be finished with a 2-mil minimum dry-film thickness application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer recommended by the manufacturer, and applied in not less than two coats.

3.2.4 Type T-4, Cellular Glass with Vapor-Barrier Jacket

Piping shall be covered with cellular glass insulation and factory- and field-attached vapor-barrier jacket. Vapor seal shall be maintained. Jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands shall be securely cemented in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap shall be not less than 1-1/2 inches . Jacket bands for butt joints shall be not less than 3 inches wide. Insulation shall be continuous through hangers. Insulation shall be bedded in an outdoor vapor-barrier coating applied to all piping surfaces.

Flanges, unions, valves, anchors, and fittings shall be insulated with factory premolded or prefabricated or field fabricated segments of

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 11


insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. When segments of insulation are used, elbows shall be provided with not less than three segments. For other fittings and valves, segments shall be cut to the required curvature or nesting size.

Segments of the insulation shall be secured in place with twine or copper wire. After the insulation segments are firmly in place, a vapor-barrier coating shall be applied over the insulation in two coats with glass tape imbedded between coats. First coat shall be tinted, the second shall be white to ensure application two coats. Coating shall be applied to a total dry-film thickness of 1/16 inch minimum. Glass tape seams shall overlap not less than 1 inch and the tape end not less than 4 inches .

In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped with 3/8 inch thick, vapor-barrier, adhesive-coated strips of cellular elastomer insulation. Insulation shall be under tension, compressed to 25 percent of original thickness, and wrapped until overall thickness is equal to adjacent insulation. Cellular elastomer shall be secured in place with twine and sealed with vapor-barrier coating applied to produce not less than 1/16 inch dry-film thickness. Fittings shall then be covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Seams shall be made vapor-tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Jacket ends shall be held in place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils thick by 1/2 inch wide.

Anchors secured directly to piping shall be insulated, to prevent condensation, for not less than 6 inches from the surface of the pipe insulation.

White-bleached kraft paper side of jacketing shall be on the side exposed to view. Exposed-to-view insulation shall be finished with not less than a 6-mil dry-film thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.

3.2.5 Type T-5, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Piping)

Piping shall be covered with a calcium-silicate pipe insulation with factory attached and presized, white, glass cloth. Jackets shall be field applied when required. Jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands shall be securely cemented in place with vapor-barrier adhesive. Jacket overlap shall be not less than 1-1/2 inches . Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 4-inches wide. Fittings shall be fabricated from segmented pipe barrel sections bedded in general purpose insulating cement and wired in place. Voids shall be filled with general purpose insulating cement with not less than 1/4 inch thick, final coating. Glass lagging tape shall be impregnated with lagging adhesive, wrapped with a 50-percent overlap, and be blended smoothly into adjacent jacketing. Additional adhesive shall be applied as needed and rubber-gloved to a smooth contour.

3.2.6 Type T-6, Mineral Fiber with Aluminum Jacket

Piping shall be covered with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-attached or field-applied aluminum jacketing.

Fittings and valve bodies shall be covered with preformed mineral-fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the pipe-barrel insulation. Fitting insulation shall be secured temporarily in place with light cord ties. A 60-mil coating of vapor-barrier mastic shall be applied, and while still tacky, wrapped with glass lagging tape.

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 12


Additional mastic shall be applied as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillets or contours. On-the-job fabricated insulation for special configurations shall be built up from mineral fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted with 3 parts water. Only where standard aluminum jacketing cannot be used, the surfaces shall be made vapor-tight by using mastic and glass lagging cloth or tape as specified above with an added finish coat of mastic.

Pipe insulation shall be set into outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of 6 inches at maximum 12-foot spacing. Ends of the insulation shall be sealed to the jacketing with the same material to provide effective vapor barrier stops.

Vapor barrier shall be continuous over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe sleeves, hangers, and other concealment.

Piping insulation shall be applied to both sides of pipe hangers. Junctions shall be insulated with a special mastic mixture, glass cloth mesh tape, and mastic as previously specified.

Jacket laps, flaps, and bands shall be securely cemented in place with aluminum jacket sealant. Jacketing bands for butt joints shall be 6 inches wide.

Joints, wherever possible, shall be lapped against the weather so that the water will run off the lower edge. Laps shall be in accordance with the pipe drainage pitch. Longitudinal laps on horizontal lines shall be located 45 degrees below the horizontal centerline and alternately staggered 1 inch. Jacketing material shall be lapped a minimum of 2 inches , circumferentially sealed with mastic, and strapped to provide a waterproof covering throughout. Straps shall be located 8 inches on center and shall be pulled up tight to hold jacketing securely in place. Screws shall be used in addition to straps when necessary to obtain a waterproof covering. Extra straps shall be placed on each side of supporting devices and at openings. Where flanging access occurs, a chamfer sheet shall be strapped to the pipe at jacketing.

Exposed longitudinal edges of aluminum jacketing shall be stiffened by bending a 1 inch hem on one edge.

Expansion joints shall provide for maximum and minimum dimensional fluctuations.

To prevent corrosion, the aluminum jacketing shall not come in direct contact with other types of metal.

At openings in jacket, an outdoor vapor-barrier coating shall be applied for 2 inches in all directions. Jacketing shall be applied while waterproofing is tacky.

Screws shall be used at each corner of each sheet, at fitting jackets, and as necessary for the service. Number 7, 3/8 inch long, binding-head aluminum sheet metal screws shall be placed through the mastic seal.

3.2.7 Type T-7, Calcium Silicate with Glass Cloth Jacket (Surfaces)

Surfaces shall be covered with insulation block bedded in an insulating cement and covered with glass cloth jacketing.

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 13


Surfaces shall be cleaned with a chlorinated solvent. General purpose insulating cement shall be mixed with 3 parts water to 1 part nonvapor-barrier adhesive to bring to application consistency. Block shall be set into bedding and joints and spaces shall be filled with a bedding mix and wrapped with galvanized chicken wire mesh well laced into an envelope. A 3/8 inch thick coating of bedding mix jacket shall be troweled on with nonvapor-barrier adhesive and glass cloth. Surfaces shall be finished with not less than a 6-mil dry-film thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating.

At the Contractor's option, aluminum sheet jacketing may be used in lieu of glass cloth.

3.2.8 Type T-9, Cellular Elastomer

Pump surfaces shall be solvent cleaned. Not less than 1 inch of general purpose insulating cement shall be applied, mixed with nonvapor-barrier adhesive diluted with 3 parts water, to achieve smooth surface and configuration contours. After all water has been removed, surfaces shall be covered with 1/2 inch thick cellular elastomer insulation attached and joined into a continuous sheet with an outdoor vapor-barrier coating recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the specific purpose. Coating shall be applied to both of the surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis with a minimum thickness of 10 mils wet, or approximately 150 square feet per gallon of undiluted coating. Coating shall be blended into the adjacent flange insulation and the joint covered with a band of cellular elastomer equal to the flange assembly width. Same coating shall be used to seal insulation to the casing at penetrations and terminations. Pumps shall be insulated in a manner that will permit insulation to be removed to repair or replace pumps.

Insulation shall be finished with a 2-mil minimum dry-film application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer coating recommended by the manufacturer and applied in not less than two coats.

3.2.9 Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill

Voids surrounding pipe shall be packed with mineral-fiber fill.

3.2.10 Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket

Piping system surfaces shall be covered with calcium silicate insulation. Fittings and valve bodies shall be covered with preformed insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE

Final acceptance will depend upon providing construction (Record Drawings) details to the Contracting Officer. Construction details shall include, by building area, the insulation material type, amount, and installation method. An illustration or map of the duct routing locations may serve this purpose. Data shall have a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the system name, date, and the words "Record Drawings insulation/material." Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."


SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 14


SECTION 22 15 14.00 40

GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS, LOW PRESSURE01/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





AWWA C104/A21.4 (2003) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C504 (2006) Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves


AWS WHB-2.9 (2004) Welding Handbook; Volume Two - Welding Processes

AWS-03 (2001) Welding Handbook, Volumes 1 thru 4


ASME A112.18.1 (2005) Standard for Plumbing Fixture Fittings

ASME B16.1 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings




ASME B16.9 (2003) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 1



ASME B19.3 (1991; Addenda A 1994; Addenda B 1995) Safety Standard for Compressors for Process Industries


ASME B31.3 (2006) Process Piping


ASME BPVC (2007) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes



ASTM A 126/A 126M (2004) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings

ASTM A 181/A 181M (2006) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping


ASTM A 197/A 197M (2000; R 2006) Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron

ASTM A 234/A 234M (2007) Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service


ASTM A 436 (1984; R 2006) Standard Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings



ASTM B 280 (2003) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service

ASTM B 370 (2003) Standard Specification for Copper

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 2


Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

ASTM B 62 (2002) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

ASTM B 749 (2003) Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet and Plate Products

ASTM C 592 (2004) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type)



ASTM E 1 (2005) Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers

ASTM F 104 (2003) Standard Classification System for Nonmetallic Gasket Materials

ISA - THE INSTRUMENTATION, SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATION SOCIETY (ISA)

ISA 7.0.01 (1996) Quality Standard for Instrument Air



MSS SP-67 (2002a; R 2004) Standard for Butterfly Valves


MSS SP-70 (2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

MSS SP-72 (1999) Standard for Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service



FS FF-S-325 (Int Amd 3) Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry)

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 3


FS L-C-530 (Rev C) Coating, Pipe, Thermoplastic Resin

1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Installation Drawings shall be submitted for low-pressure compressed air systems in accordance with paragraphs entitled, "Drawings," "Aboveground Piping Materials," and "Underground Piping Materials," of this section.

SD-03 Product Data

Equipment and Performance Data submitted for piping systems.

Manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following items:

Underground Piping MaterialsAboveground Piping MaterialsPiping SpecialtiesSupporting ElementsAir CompressorsValvesAccessoriesMiscellaneous MaterialsVibration Isolation

SD-05 Design Data

Design Analysis and Calculations for low-pressure compressed air systems shall be submitted for the following in accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this section.

Flow RatesAir DistributionPressure RequirementsInsulation Requirements

Equipment and Performance Data submitted for piping systems shall show conformance with ASME Code.

SD-06 Test Reports

Test reports shall be submitted for the following items in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Compressed Air Systems Testing," of this section.

Hydrostatic Testingcompressed Air Systems TestingValve-Operating TestsDrainage TestsPneumatic Testing

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 4


Each acceptance test shall require the signature of the Contracting Officer and two record copies shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer after acceptance.

SD-07 Certificates

Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section.

Underground Piping MaterialsAboveground Piping MaterialsSupporting ElementsRiser Alarm EquipmentSprinkler HeadsValvesMiscellaneous Materials


Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Operation and Maintenance," of this section.


Equipment and Performance Data submitted for piping systems shall show conformance with ASME Code.

Certificates for Riser Alarm Equipment and Sprinkler Heads shall be submitted meeting referenced standards contained within this section.

Design Analysis and Calculations for low-pressure compressed air systems shall consist of Flow Rates, Air Distribution, Pressure Requirements and Insulation Requirements meeting requirements for referenced standards contained in this section.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

Contractor shall submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the low-pressure compressed air System. Data shall be updated and resubmitted for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract completion.

1.5 DRAWINGS

Installation drawings shall be submitted for low-pressure compressed air systems in accordance with paragraphs entitled, "Aboveground Piping Materials" and "Underground Piping Materials," of this section.

Shop drawings shall be accompanied by curves indicating that an essentially flat reduced pressure curve for the capacity demand of the system will be met by the proposed valves.

Complete shop drawing data for pipe attachments shall be submitted for approval.

In lieu of separate hangers, the Contractor may submit for approval a shop drawing of trapeze hangers with a solid or split-ring clamp which he

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 5


proposes to furnish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS





2.2 UNDERGROUND PIPING MATERIALS

2.2.1 Piping Types

Type BCS-PS black carbon steel piping with polyethylene sheath shall conform to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E , in sizes through 10 inch iron pipe size (ips). Pipe in size 12 inches and larger shall have Schedule 40 wall. Pipe wall shall be 0.375 inch thick.

Thermoplastic sheath shall conform to FS L-C-530. Sheath joints shall be made with thermally fitted shrinking sleeves applied with factory-approved shrinking devices. Taped fitting protection and repairs shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Electrical flaw detection testing at the factory shall require 10,000 volts to be impressed across the sheath. Sheath breakdown voltage shall be not less than 13,000 volts.

2.2.2 Fittings

Fittings shall be long radius butt weld carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9 to match pipe wall thickness. Bending of pipe shall not be permitted. Aboveground terminal fittings shall be 150-pound working steam pressure (wsp) forged steel weld neck flanges to match wall thickness, conforming to ASME B16.5 and ASTM A 181/A 181M Class 60.

2.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING MATERIALS

2.3.1 Compressed Air Systems 125 Psig and Less

2.3.1.1 Type BCS Black Carbon Steel

Pipe 1/8 through 1-1/2 inches shall be Schedule 40, furnace butt welded, black carbon steel, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, Grade B.

Pipe 2 through 10 inches shall be Schedule 40, seamless , black carbon

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 6


steel, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Type E . Grade A pipe should be used for permissible field bending.

Pipe 12 inches and over shall be 0.375 inch wall, seamless, black carbon steel, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Type E .

Fittings 2 inches and under shall be 150-pounds per square inch, gage (psig) wsp, banded, black malleable iron, screwed, conforming to ASTM A 197/A 197M and ASME B16.3.

Unions 2 inches and under shall be 250-psig wsp, female, screwed, black malleable iron, with brass-to-iron seat and ground joint conforming to ASME B16.39, ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 for grooved pipe couplings.

Couplings 2 inches and under shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.

Fittings 2-1/2 inches and over shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.

Flanges 2-1/2 inches and over shall be 150-psig wsp, forged steel, welding neck to match pipe wall thickness, conforming to ASME B16.5.

Grooved pipe couplings and fittings 2-1/2 inches and over shall be malleable iron couplings and fittings conforming to paragraph entitled, "Piping Specialties," of this section.

2.3.1.2 Type GCS Galvanized Carbon Steel

Pipe 1/2 through 10 inches shall be Schedule 40, seamless , galvanized steel, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Type E . Type F is acceptable for sizes less than 2 inches.

Fittings 2 inches and under shall be 150-psig wsp, banded, galvanized, malleable iron, screwed, conforming to ASTM A 197/A 197M, ASME B16.3 .

Fittings 2-1/2 inches and over shall be 125-psig wsp, cast-iron flanges and flanged fittings, conforming to ASTM A 126/A 126M, Class A, and ASME B16.1 .

Unions 2 inches and under shall be 300-psig wsp, female, screwed, galvanized, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat and ground joint.

2.3.2 Control and Instrumentation Tubing, to 30 Psig

2.3.2.1 Copper

Tubing all sizes with 1/4 inch minimum outside diameter shall be hard-drawn seamless copper, conforming to ASTM B 280.

Fittings shall be solder joint wrought copper conforming to ASME B16.22.

Ball sleeve shall be of the compression type, forged brass, conforming to SAE 88, UL approved, with minimum pressure rating 200 pounds per square inch (psi) at 100 degrees F.

Solder shall be 95-5 tin-antimony, alloy Sb 5, conforming to AWS WHB-2.9.

Copper tubing systems may be installed using mechanical pipe couplings of a bolted type with a central cavity design pressure responsive gasket.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 7


Copper pipe and fittings shall be grooved in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.4.1 Air Pressure Reducing Stations

Pressure reducing station shall be installed complete with relieving type pressure reducing valve, valved bypass, particle filter, pressure indicator upstream of station, pressure indicator downstream of station, and regulated air pressure relief valve.

Pressure regulator body shall be constructed of zinc or aluminum die castings, rated for the service. Diaphragm shall be reinforced air-, oil-, and water-resistant elastomer. All components, exposed to fluid stream being controlled, shall be of nonferrous . Valves shall be of a balanced construction relieving type to automatically prevent excess pressure buildup.

Filters shall be constructed of zinc die castings, rated for the service, and furnished with ips connections. Bowl materials shall be aluminum. Filter shall be serviceable by bowl quick-disconnect devices. Bowl shall be equipped with manual drain cock. Liquid particles shall be separated by centrifugal and quiet zone action. Solid particles to 15-micrometer size shall be removed by filter elements of corrosion-resistant steel mesh.

Pressure relief valves shall be rated for the pressure of the high-pressure side and sized for the full installed capacity of the pressure regulating station at the pressure of the low-pressure side. Valve shall be set at not more than 20 percent more than the correct low side pressure. Valve shall be rated and labeled. Seat material shall be suitable for the service.

2.4.2 Air Line Lubricators

Air line lubricators shall be of the pulse-type with pickup tube, polycarbonate resin bowl, large fill opening, metering rod flow adjuster, sight ball, and drain cock.

Lubricators shall be suitable for 200 psig at 165 degrees F.

2.4.3 Compressed Air Receivers

Compressed air receivers shall conform to the sizes and capacities specified. Such vessels shall be designed for the applicable working pressures and service in accordance with the ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1, and shall be labeled.

Vessels shall be complete with connections for drain, supports, and other required Accessories.

2.4.4 Grooved Pipe Couplings and Fittings

Couplings shall have a housing fabricated in at least two parts of malleable iron castings. Coupling gasket shall be molded synthetic rubber conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2000. Coupling bolts shall be oval-neck track-head type with hexagonal heavy nuts, conforming to ASTM A 183.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 8


Pipe fittings used with couplings shall be fabricated of malleable iron castings. Where a manufacturer's standard size malleable iron fitting pattern is not available, fabricated fittings may be used.

Fittings shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 , in accordance with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, seamless steel pipe. Long radius seamless welding fittings with wall thickness to match pipe, conforming to ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

2.4.5 Pressure Gages

Pressure gages shall conform to ASME B40.100. Pressure gages shall be Type I, Class 1, (pressure) for pressures indicated. Pressure gage size shall be 3-1/2 inches nominal diameter. Case shall be corrosion-resistant steel conforming to the AISI 300 series with an ASM No. 4 standard commercial polish or better. Gages shall be equipped with damper screw adjustment in inlet connection.

2.4.6 Thermometers

Thermometers shall conform to ASTM E 1. Thermometers shall be industrial pattern Type I, Class 3. All thermometers installed 6 feet or higher above the floor shall have an adjustable angle body. Scale shall be not less than 7 inches long, and case face shall be manufacturer's standard polished aluminum. Thermometer range shall be as required for service, and shall be provided with nonferrous separable wells.

2.4.7 Line Strainers

Strainers shall be Y-type with removable basket. Strainers in sizes 2 inch ips and smaller shall have screwed ends and in sizes 2-1/2 inch ips and larger shall have flanged ends. Body working pressure rating shall exceed maximum service pressure of system in which installed by at least 50 percent. Body shall have cast-in arrows to indicate direction of flow. Strainer bodies fitted with screwed screen retainers shall have straight threads and shall be gasketed with nonferrous metal. Strainer bodies fitted with bolted-on screen retainers shall have offset blowdown holes. Strainers larger than 2-1/2-inches shall be fitted with manufacturer's standard blowdown valve. Body material shall be cast bronze conforming to ASTM B 62 . Where system material is nonferrous, strainer body material shall be nonferrous.

Minimum free-hole area of strainer element shall be equal to not less than 3.4 times the internal area of connecting piping. Strainer screens for air service shall have mesh cloth not to exceed 0.006 inch . Strainer screens shall have finished ends fitted to machined screen chamber surfaces to preclude bypass flow. Strainer element material shall be AISI Type 304 corrosion-resistant steel.

2.5 AIR COMPRESSORS

An air compressor of the standard piston type shall be provided complete with air tank, air dryer, and other appurtenances. Compressor and installation shall conform to ASME B19.3. Compressor capacity shall be as required for service and provide continuous control air when operating on a 1/3-on 2/3-off cycle. Provide an oil-level sight indicator on the compressor and a coalescing oil filter on the compressor discharge line. Air dryers shall be of the continuous duty silica-gel type with reactivation and shall maintain the air in the system with a dew point low

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 9


enough to prevent condensation 13 degrees F at 18 psi main pressure. Air dryer shall be located at the outlet of the tank. Control air delivered to the system shall conform to ISA 7.0.01.

2.6 VALVES

2.6.1 Ball Valves (BAV)

Ball valves shall conform to MSS SP-72. Valves shall be Style 1.

Grooved end ball valves may be used provided that the manufacturer certifies valve performance in accordance with MSS SP-72.

Valves shall be rated for service at not less than 175 psi at 200 degrees F.

Valve bodies in sizes 2 inch ips and smaller shall be screwed end connection type constructed of Class A copper alloy.

Valve bodies in sizes 2-1/2 inch ips and larger shall be flanged-end connection type constructed of Class D material.

Balls and stems of valves 2 inch ips and smaller shall be manufacturer's standard Class A copper alloy with 900 Brinell hard chrome plating finish. Electroless nickel plating is acceptable.

Balls and stems of valves 2-1/2 inch ips and larger shall be manufacturer's standard Class C corrosion-resistant steel alloy with hard chrome plate. In valves 6 inch ips and larger, balls shall be Class D with 900 Brinell hard chrome plate. Electroless nickel plating is acceptable.

Valves shall be designed for flow from either direction and shall seal equally tight in either direction.

Valves shall have full pipe size flow areas.

Valves with ball seals kept in place by spring washers are not acceptable. All valves shall have adjustable packing glands. Seats and seals shall be tetrafluoroethylene.

Valve body construction shall be such that torque from a pipe with valve in installed condition shall not tend to disassemble the valve by stripping setscrews or by loosening body end inserts or coupling nuts. Torque from a pipe shall be resisted by a one-piece body between end connections or by bolts in shear where body is of mating flange or surface-bolted construction.

2.6.2 Butterfly Valves (BUV)

Butterfly valves shall conform to MSS SP-67.

Grooved end butterfly valves may be used in services to 230 degrees F provided the manufacturer certifies valve performance in accordance with MSS SP-67.

Butterfly valves shall be wafer type for mounting between specified flanges and shall be rated for 150-psig shutoff and nonshock working pressure. Body shall be cast ferrous metal conforming to ASTM A 126/A 126M, Class B, and to ASME B16.1 for body wall thickness.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 10


Valves installed in insulated piping systems shall be provided with extended bonnets, placing the operator beyond the specified insulation.

Butterfly valves used in buried piping systems shall conform to requirements of AWWA C504, Class 150B, with integrally cast flanges and manual worm gear operator. Valves shall be designed and constructed for buried or 20-foot head submerged service in brackish water. Flanged ends shall conform to requirements of ASME B16.1. Operator shall require at least 20 turns for full closure with an input effort of 50 foot-pounds of torque. External surfaces shall be coated with bituminous sealer conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4.

Valve boxes shall be of not less than 3/16 inch thick cast-iron construction with locking cover with an appropriate identification legend. Boxes shall be adjustable extension type with screw adjustment. Valves 3 inches and under shall be fitted with 4-1/4 inch diameter shaft and valves 4 inches and larger shall be fitted with 5-1/4 inch shaft. Bases shall be fitted to the valve. Box full-extended length shall be greater than required by depth of cover by not less than 4 inches. One valve operating wrench shall be supplied for each size of valve wrench nut. Guide rings shall be provided where operating rods are longer than 6 feet. Internal and external surfaces shall be coated with bituminous sealer conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4.

Disk shall be free of external ribs and shall be streamlined. Disk shall be fabricated from cast ferrous alloys conforming to ASTM A 126/A 126M for Class B, cast iron.

Use of taper pins to secure the valve disk to the shaft is prohibited.

Shafts shall be fabricated from AISI 300 series and may be one-piece type. Stub shafts shall extend into the disk hub at least 1-1/2 shaft diameters except for angle disk construction. Connection between the valve shaft and disk shall be designed to transmit shaft torque equivalent to not less than 75 percent of the torsional strength of the minimum required shaft diameter. Minimum nominal shaft diameter for all valves shall be in accordance with the following:

VALVE SIZE SHAFT DIAMETER VALVE SIZE SHAFT DIAMETER INCHES INCHES INCHES INCHES

2-1/2 7/16 10 1-1/8

3 1/2 12 1-1/4

4 5/8 14 1-1/2

5 11/16 16 1-5/8

6 3/4 18 1-7/8

8 7/8 20 2-1/8

Seats and seals shall be resilient elastomer type, designed for field removal and replacement. Elastomers shall be Buna-N formulated for continuous immersion service at 225 degrees F minimum and shall be applied at least 10 percent below maximum continuous service temperature. Bonding adhesives shall comply with elastomer temperature requirements and shall have an effective life equal to or greater than the elastomer.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 11


Seals on 20 inch and smaller valves shall be designed to use standard split V packing.

Seats may be installed in the valve body or on the disk, except that circular cross section O-ring construction shall not be acceptable.

Seat or disk mating surfaces shall be of corrosion-resistant material. These materials shall be welded to substrate and ground. Plated or similarly applied surfacing materials shall not be acceptable.

Bearings shall be permanently lubricated sleeve type of manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant steel. Bearings shall be designed for a pressure not exceeding the published design load for the bearing material. Operating end of the shaft shall be provided with dual inboard bearings.

Padlocking feature shall be provided to make valve tamperproof.

For balancing service, valve operators shall have provision for infinite position locking.

Manual nonchain-operated valves through 8 inches shall be provided with not less than nine-position lever lock handles not exceeding 18 inches in length.

Manual valves 10 inches and larger, or smaller if the application torque exceeds a pull of 80 pounds, shall be provided with gear operators.

Where valves are indicated to be chain operated, all sizes shall be equipped with gear operators, and chain length shall be suitable for proper stowage and operation.

Gear operators shall be worm-gear type. Operator shall be totally enclosed in a cast iron housing suitable for grease or oil lubrication. Gears shall be "hobcut." Cast-iron-housed traveling-nut operators shall conform to AWWA C504. Operators shall be sized to provide the required torque, static or dynamic, with a maximum manual pull of 80 pounds on the handwheel or chain wheel.

Modulating or remotely actuated two-position service valves shall be provided with pneumatic operators, pilot positioners, valve position indicators, and boosters and relays.

Maximum load on a pneumatic operator shall not exceed 85 percent of rated operator capacity.

2.6.3 Diaphragm Control and Instrument Valves (DCIV)

Diaphragm valves in sizes 1/4- and 3/8 inch shall have a forged brass body with reinforced tetrafluoroethylene diaphragm, AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel spring, and round phenolic handle.

2.6.4 Gage Cocks (GC)

Gage cocks shall be T-head or lever handle ground key type with washer and screw, constructed of polished ASTM B 62 bronze, and rated for 125 psi saturated steam service. End connections shall suit the service, with or without union and nipple.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 12


2.6.5 Gate Valves (GAV)

Gate valves 2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80. Valves located in tunnels, equipment rooms, or factory-assembled equipment shall be union-ring bonnet, screwed-end type. Packing shall be woven non-asbestos material impregnated with not less than 25 percent, by weight, tetrafluoroethylene resin.

Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be Type I, Class 1, conforming to MSS SP-70. Valves shall be flanged, with bronze trim and outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) construction. Packing shall be woven non-asbestos material impregnated with not less than 25 percent, by weight, tetrafluoroethylene resin.

2.6.6 Globe and Angle Valves (GLV and ANV)

Globe and angle valves 2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80. Valves located in tunnels, equipment rooms, or factory-assembled equipment, shall be union-ring bonnet, screwed-end type. Disk shall be free to swivel on the stem in all valve sizes. Composition seating surface disk construction may be substituted for all metal disk construction. Packing shall be a woven material impregnated with not less than 25 percent, by weight, tetrafluoroethylene resin.

Globe and angle valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-80. Valve bodies shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126/A 126M, Class A, as specified for Class 1 valves under MSS SP-70. Valve ends shall be flanged in conformance with ASME B16.1, and valve construction shall be OS&Y type. Packing shall be a woven material impregnated with not less than 25 percent, by weight, tetrafluoroethylene resin.

2.6.7 Eccentric Plug Valves (EPV)

Eccentric plug valves in sizes 2 inches and smaller shall be constructed of manufacturer's standard brass . Valves shall be rated for service at 175-psi maximum nonshock pressure at 200 degrees F. Valve body shall have screwed ends. Eccentric plug surfaces in contact with flow shall be coated with a 60 to 70 Shore A durometer hardness elastomer resistant to compressed air.

Eccentric plug valves in sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be constructed of Type 2 nickel alloy iron conforming to ASTM A 436 . Valves shall be rated for service at 175-psi maximum nonshock pressure at 200 degrees F. Valve body shall have screwed ends. Eccentric plug surfaces shall be coated with a 60 to 70 Shore A durometer hardness elastomer resistant to compressed air. For specified applications, in sizes to 5 inch ips, cross-sectional area of valve bore, when open, shall equal pipe inlet area. Valves used for combination shutoff and balancing service shall be fitted with a memory device. Memory device or mechanism shall permit a valve set at a balance point to be opened or closed, but not beyond the balance point. Valves up to 6 inch ips shall be fitted with removable lever operator. Valves 6 inch ips and larger shall be fitted with totally enclosed flood-lubricated worm gear drive such that operating torque does not exceed 50 foot-pounds.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 13


2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

2.7.1 Bolting

Flange and general-purpose bolting shall be hex-head and shall conform to ASTM A 307, Grade B. Heavy hex-nuts shall conform to ASME B18.2.2. Square-head bolts shall not be acceptable.

Grooved couplings shall utilize bolts and nuts of heat treated carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 183.

2.7.2 Elastomer Calk

polyurethane base elastomer calking material shall be a two-component type conforming to ASTM C 920.

2.7.3 Escutcheons

Escutcheons shall be manufactured from nonferrous metals and shall be chrome plated except when AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel is provided. Metals and finish shall be in accordance with ASME A112.18.1.

Escutcheons shall be one-piece type. Escutcheons shall maintain a fixed position against a surface by means of internal spring tension devices or setscrews.

2.7.4 Flashing

Sheet lead shall conform to ASTM B 749, Grade B and shall weigh not less than 4 pounds per square foot.

Sheet copper shall conform to ASTM B 370 and shall weigh not less than 16 ounces per square foot.

2.7.5 Flange Gaskets

Compressed non-asbestos sheet shall conform to ASTM F 104, Type 1, and be coated on both sides with graphite.

Grooved flange adapters gasketing shall be a pressure responsive elastomer conforming to ASTM D 2000.

2.7.6 Pipe Thread Compounds

Tetrafluoroethylene tape not less than 2 mils thick shall be used in compressed air systems for pipe sizes to and including 1 inch ips. Tetrafluoroethylene dispersions and other suitable compounds may be used for other applications upon approval by the Contracting Officer.

2.8 SUPPORTING ELEMENTS

Contractor shall provide all necessary piping system components and miscellaneous required supporting elements. Supporting elements shall be suitable for stresses imposed by system pressures and temperatures, and natural and other external forces.

Supporting elements shall be UL-listed and shall conform to requirements of ASME B31.3, MSS SP-58, and MSS SP-69, except as otherwise noted. Type devices specified herein are defined in MSS standards unless otherwise

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 14


noted.

2.8.1 Building Structure Attachments

Concrete and masonry anchor devices shall conform to requirements of FS FF-S-325 Group I, Type 2, Class 2, Style 1; Group III.

Cast-in floor-mounted equipment anchor devices shall provide adjustable positions.

Masonry anchor devices shall be built-in, unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.

Power-actuated anchoring devices shall not be used to support mechanical systems components.

Beam clamps shall be center loading Type 21, UL listed, cataloged, and load rated, and commercially manufactured.

Clamps shall be used to support piping sizes 1-1/2 inches and smaller. C-clamps shall be FM approved and UL listed with hardened cup tip, setscrew, locknut, and retaining strap. Retaining strap section shall be not less than 1/8 by 1 inch . Beam flange thickness to which clamps are attached shall not exceed 0.60 inch.

Concrete inserts shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of MSS SP-58, for Type 18 and MSS SP-69. When applied to piping in sizes 2 inch ips and larger and where otherwise required by imposed loads, a 1-foot length of 1/2 inch reinforcing rod shall be inserted and wired through wing slots. Approved proprietary-type continuous inserts may be similarly used upon approval by the Contracting Officer.

2.8.2 Horizontal Pipe Attachments

Piping in sizes to and including 2 inch ips shall be supported by Type 6 solid malleable-iron pipe rings except that split-band-type rings may be used in sizes up to 1 inch ips.

Piping in sizes through 8 inch ips inclusive shall be supported by Types 1 attachments.

Piping in sizes larger than 8 inch ips shall be supported with Type 41 pipe rolls.

Trapeze hangers fabricated from approved structural steel shapes, with U-bolts, shall be used in congested areas and where multiple pipe runs occur. Structural steel shapes shall conform to supplementary steel requirements.

2.8.3 Vertical Pipe Attachments

Vertical pipe attachments shall be Type 8.

2.8.4 Hanger Rods and Fixtures

Only circular cross-section rod hangers shall be used to connect building structure attachments to pipe support devices. Pipe, straps, or bars of equivalent strength may be used for hangers only where approved by the Contracting Officer.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 15


Turnbuckles, swing eyes, and clevises shall be provided as required by support system to accommodate pipe accessibility and adjustment for load and pitch.

2.8.5 Supplementary Steel

Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members or where structural members are used in lieu of commercially rated supports, such supplementary steel shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with AISC 360.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Compressed Air System Installation

Installation of compressed air systems shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Installation shall be in the presence of the Contracting Officer who shall be notified by the Contractor 48 hours in advance of the work.

Excavations shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.

Piping shall be laid beginning at the low point of a system, and when in final position, shall be true to the grades and alignment with unbroken continuity of invert.

Pipes passing through walls below grade and ground floor slab shall pass through pipe sleeves.

In fill areas, pipe passing under or through building grade beams shall have a minimum of 4 inches clearance in all directions.

Where pipe penetrates earth or concrete grade, not less than 12 inches of polyethylene-coated Type BCS-PS pipe shall be exposed to view.

Type BCS-PS materials shall be installed in accordance with the applicable requirements for underground piping and aboveground piping. Pipe shall be palletized in padded pallets at the factory and shall be handled from pallet to final position with padded gear. Surfaces shall be protected from the sun with black polyethylene sheeting. Prior to being lowered into a trench, sheathing shall be checked for continuity with 10,000 volts applied by a continuity detector. In the trench, after joints and fittings are made, previously untested surfaces shall be checked for continuity. Where discontinuities in thermoplastic are found, not less than 12 inches of material upstream and downstream of fault shall be discarded.

After valves, valve operators, and valve boxes have been inspected and not less than 48 hours prior to being lowered into a trench, external surfaces shall be coated with a compatible bituminous coating for protection against brackish ground water. Application shall be single coat in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and shall result in a dry-film thickness of not less than 12 mils.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 16


3.1.2 Valve Boxes

Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Valve boxes shall be centered on the valves.

3.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Piping Systems

Piping systems shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with ASME B31.3, MSS SP-69, ASME BPVC, and applicable AWS requirements.

Pipe shall be fabricated to measurements established on the job and shall be carefully worked into place without springing or forcing.

Pipe, tubing, fittings, valves, equipment, and Accessories shall be clean and free of all foreign material before being installed in their respective systems. Pipe shall be cleaned by a method approved by the Contracting Officer. Lines shall be purged with dry, oil-free compressed air after erection, but purging shall not be relied upon for removing all foreign matter. Lines shall be purged at a velocity equal to 1-1/2 times maximum normal flow velocity. During the progress of construction, open ends of pipe, fittings, and valves shall be protected at all times to prevent the admission of foreign matter. Except when connections are actually underway, plugs or caps shall be installed on all pipe and component openings. Plugs or caps shall be commercially manufactured products.

Piping shall be installed straight and true, with approved offsets around obstructions and with necessary expansion bends or fitting offsets essential to a satisfactory installation and as may be necessary to increase headroom or to avoid interference with the building construction, electric conduit, or facilities equipment.

Standard long sweep pipe fittings shall be used for changes in direction. No mitered joints or unapproved pipe bends shall be permitted.

Pipe bends in seamless pipe may be made with hydraulic benders in the field for pipe sizes to 4 inch ips, upon approval of the Contracting Officer. Radius of pipe bends shall be not less than five nominal pipe diameters.

Tee connections shall be made with screwed tee fittings or grooved tee fittings, or, where pipe is being welded, branch connections shall be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings, either being acceptable without size limitations. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged, flared for improved flow where attached to the run, reinforced against external strains, and designed to withstand full burst-pressure strength requirements. Tool space shall be provided between parallel piping runs whenever threaded unions or couplings are installed.

Horizontal piping shall have a grade of 1 inch per 100 feet.

Eccentric reducers shall be used where required to permit proper drainage of pipe lines. Bushings shall not be permitted for this purpose. Drain valves shall be provided in piping systems at low points. Pipe drains shall consist of 1/2 inch globe valves with renewable disks and 3/4 inch hose adapter.

Installation of piping shall be performed in a manner that will prevent stresses and strains from being imposed on connected equipment.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 17


Expansion bends in steel pipe shall be made from pipe sections and long-radius welding elbows in sizes 1 inch and larger. Expansion U-bends shall be cold sprung and welded into the line. Line shall be anchored before removing the spreader from the expansion U-bend.

3.2.2 Joints

Pipe ends shall be reamed before joint connections are made.

Screwed joints shall be made up with joint compound.

Joint compounds shall be applied to the male thread only, and care shall be exercised to prevent compound from reaching the interior of the pipe.

Screwed unions, welded unions, or bolted flanges shall be provided wherever required to permit convenient removal of equipment, valves, and piping Accessories from the piping system.

Flanged joints shall be assembled with appropriate flanges, gaskets, and bolting. Clearance between flange faces shall be such that the connections can be gasketed and bolted tight without imposing undue strain on the piping system. Flange faces shall be parallel and the bores concentric. Gaskets shall be centered on the flange faces without projecting into the bore. Bolting shall be lubricated with oil and graphite before assembly to ensure uniform bolt stressing. Flange bolts shall be drawn up and tightened in staggered sequence to prevent unequal gasket compression and deformation of the flanges. Wherever a flange with a raised face is joined to a companion flange with a flat face, the raised face shall be machined to a smooth matching surface, and a full facegasket shall be used. After the piping system has been tested and is in service at its maximum temperature, bolting shall be retightened. Only hex-head nuts and bolts shall be used. Gasket material shall be fresh stock, 1/16 inch thick.

Field welded joints shall conform to the requirements of the AWS-03 and ASME B31.3.

Copper tubing for solder joints shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed with approved cutting and reaming tools. Inside surfaces of fittings and outside surfaces of tubes in joint area shall be cleaned before assembly of joint. Joint flux, solder, and heat source shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to provide proper capillary action to fill the socket space and to achieve 100 percent of shear-line strength capability. Valves in copper piping shall have screwed ends with end adapters to suit mechanical connections, unless solder joining is specified for a given application. Copper joints that fail pressure tests shall be remade with new materials, including pipe or tubing fittings and filler metal.

Tubing for mechanical joints shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed. Care shall be exercised to avoid work-hardened copper surfaces and tube ends shall be cut off or annealed. Heating temperature and air-cooling shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.2.3 Control and Instrument Air Tubing

Tubing shall be concealed, except in mechanical rooms or areas where other piping is exposed.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 18


Hard-drawn copper tubing shall be used in exposed areas. Annealed copper shall not be used in concealed locations.

Fittings for supply system copper tubing shall be wrought copper solder joint-type, except at connection to apparatus where specified brass mechanical and ips thread adapter fittings shall be used. Tool-made bends in lieu of fittings are acceptable. Multiple tube runs shall be neatly nested.

Tubing shall be mechanically attached to supporting surfaces. Supports using adhesives shall not be acceptable.

Copper tubing horizontal supports for less than 3 tubes shall be rigid 1-by 3/8 inch metal channel and shall be proprietary metal tube race for 3 or more tubes.

Copper-tubing runs imbedded in concrete shall be annealed and shall be protected by plastic electric conduit.

Copper-tubing runs in soil shall be jointless and shall be protected from brackish ground water and leaching concrete alkali by 12-mil thick bituminous coating .

Tubing penetrations of concrete surfaces shall be made through minimum 1 inch ips, Schedule 40, rigid unplasticized PVC pipe sleeves, except that multitube harness 1-1/2-inches outside diameter and larger need not have additional protection. Sleeve shall extend 6 inches above floors and 1 inch below grade surface of slabs. Where water- or vapor-barrier sealing is required, 1/2 inch deep elastomer calk shall be provided to surfaces that are free from oil and other deleterious substances.

Tubing shall be systematically purged with nitrogen to rid system of impurities and atmospheric moisture before connection to control instruments.

3.2.4 General Service Valve Locations

Valves shall be provided to permit isolation of branch piping and each equipment item from the balance of the system, to allow safe and convenient access without moving equipment, and to require a minimum of piping and equipment disassembly.

Valves shall be provided in piping mains and branches at equipment and equipment items.

Riser and downcomer drains shall be provided above piping shutoff valves in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger. Shutoff valve body shall be tapped and fitted with a 1/2 inch plugged globe valve.

Three-valve bypass shall be provided around each pressure-regulating valve.

Valves unavoidably located in furred or other normally inaccessible places shall be provided with access panels.

3.2.5 Bypass Throttling Valves

Valves shall be globe type with metallic.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 19


3.2.6 Supporting Elements Installation

Supporting elements shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69. Piping shall be hung from building construction. No piping shall be hung from roof deck or from other pipe.

Attachment to building construction concrete shall be by approved cast-in concrete inserts wherever possible. Attachment to building construction solid masonry shall be by built-in anchors. Where attachment by either of above methods is not possible, specified masonry anchor devices may be used upon receipt of written approval from the Contracting Officer.

Fish plates shall be embedded in the concrete to transmit hanger loads to the reinforcing steel where hanger rods exceed 7/8 inch diameter.

Masonry anchors selected for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.

Masonry anchors conforming to FS FF-S-325 Group I ; shall be installed in rotary, nonpercussion, electric drilled holes. Group III self-drilling anchors may be used provided masonry drilling is done with electric hammers selected and applied in a manner that will preclude concrete spalling or cracking both visible or invisible. Pneumatic tools shall not be allowed.

Percussive action, electric hammers, and combination rotary-electric hammers used for the installation of self-drilling anchors shall be selected in accordance with the following guide:

For nominal anchor device sizes 1/4- through 1/2 inch, the tool shall be hammer type only or combination rotary-hammer type and shall be rated at load to draw not more than 5.0 amperes when operating on 120-volt, 60-hertz power.

For nominal anchor device sizes 5/8 inch and larger, the hammer type only tool shall be rated at load to draw not more than 8.0 amperes when operating on 120-volt, 60-hertz power. Combination rotary hammer tools on the same power supply shall have a full-load current rating not to exceed 10 amperes.

Inserts and anchors shall be sized for the total stress to be applied with a safety factor as required by applicable codes but in no case less than 4 .

Anchor devices shall be inserted into concrete sections not less than twice the overall length of the device and shall be located not less than the following applicable distance from any side or end edge or centerline of adjacent anchor service:

Anchor Bolt Minimum Edge Length (Inches) Space (Inches)

1/4 3-1/2 5/16 3-3/4 3/8 4 1/2 5 5/8 6 3/4 7 7/8 8

In special circumstances, upon prior written approval of the Contracting

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 20


Officer, center-to-center distance may be reduced to 50 percent of given distance provided the load on the device is reduced in direct proportion to reduced distance.

Piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building. Piping and components shall be spaced and installed so that a threaded pipe fitting may be removed between adjacent pipes and so that there will be not less than 1/2 inch of clear space between the finished surface and other work and between the finished surface and parallel adjacent piping. Hangers on different adjacent service lines running parallel with each other shall be arranged to be in line with each other and parallel to the lines of the building.

Identical service systems piping, where practical, shall be placed at same elevation and hung on trapeze hangers adjusted for proper pitch.

Spacing of trapeze hangers where piping is grouped in parallel runs shall be the closest interval required for any size pipe supported.

Where it is necessary to avoid any transfer of load from support to support or onto connecting equipment, pipe hangers shall be constant support type.

Approved pipe alignment guides, attached in an approved manner to the building structure, shall be provided to control pipe movement in true alignment in the piping adjacent to and on each side of all pipe expansion loops.

Anchors incorporated in piping systems for the purpose of maintaining permanent pipe positions shall be welded to the piping and attached to the building structure in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer.

Piping shall be suitably braced against sway and vibration. Bracing shall consist of brackets, anchor chairs, rods, and structural steel for Vibration Isolation.

Pipe lines supported from roof purlins shall be located not greater than one-sixth of the purlin span from the roof truss. Load per hanger shall not exceed 400 pounds when support is from a single purlin, 800 pounds when hanger load is applied to purlins halfway between purlins by means of auxiliary support steel installed by the Contractor. When support is not halfway between purlins, the allowable hanger load shall be the product of 400 times the inverse ratio of the longest distance to purlin to purlin spacing.

When the hanger load exceeds the above limits, the reinforcing of the roof purlin(s) or additional support beam(s) shall be furnished and installed. When an additional beam is used, the beam shall bear on the top chord of the roof trusses, and bearing shall be over gusset plates of top chord. Beam shall be stabilized by connection to roof purlin along bottom flange.

Purlins used for supporting fire protection sprinkler lines, electrical lighting fixtures, or electrical power duct or cable tray shall be considered fully loaded, and supplemental reinforcing for these purlins or auxiliary support steel shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

Hangers and supports for piping shall be installed at intervals specified herein at locations not more than 3 feet from the ends of each runout and not over 25 percent of the specified interval from each change in direction of piping.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 21


Load rating for all pipe hanger supports shall be based on weight and forces imposed on all lines. Deflection per span shall not exceed slope gradient of pipe. Schedule 40 and heavier pipe supports shall be in accordance with the following minimum rod size. Maximum allowable hanger spacing and concentrated loads will reduce allowable span proportionately:

PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE STEEL PIPE INCHES INCHES FEET

Up to 1 3/8 8

1-1/4 to 1-1/2 3/8 10

2 3/8 12

2-1/2 to 3-1/2 1/2 12

4 to 5 5/8 16

6 3/4 16

8 to 12 7/8 20

Where possible, vertical risers shall be supported at the base at intervals specified and shall be guided for lateral stability. Clamps shall be placed under fittings wherever possible. Carbon steel pipe shall be supported at each floor at not more than 15-foot intervals for pipe 2 inches and smaller and at not more than 20-foot intervals for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

After the piping systems have been installed, tested, and placed in satisfactory operation, the Contractor shall firmly tighten hanger rod nuts and jam nuts to prevent any movement.

3.2.7 Sound Stopping

Effective sound stopping and adequate operating clearance shall be provided to prevent structure contact where piping penetrates walls, floors, or ceilings, into occupied spaces adjacent to equipment rooms, where similar penetrations occur between occupied spaces, and where penetrations occur from pipe chases into occupied spaces. Occupied spaces includes space above ceilings where no special acoustic treatment of ceiling is provided. Penetrations shall be finished to be compatible with surface being penetrated.

Sound stopping provisions shall be essentially the materials and procedures specified under "Sleeves" in this section.

Sound stopping and vapor barrier sealing of pipe shafts and large floor and wall openings shall be accomplished by packing to high density with properly supported mineral fiber or, where ambient or surface temperatures do not exceed 120 degrees F, by foaming in place with self-extinguishing, 2-pound density polyurethane foam to a depth not less than 6 inches . Foam shall be finished with a rasp. Vapor barrier shall be not less than 1/8 inch thickness of vinyl coating applied to visible and accessible surfaces. Where high temperatures and fire-stopping are a consideration, only mineral fiber shall be used and openings shall, in addition, be covered with 16-gage sheet metal.

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 22


All mineral materials shall conform to requirements specified under "Sleeves" in this section.

Leadwool and viscoelastic damping compounds may be proposed for use where other sound-stopping methods are not practical, provided temperature and fire-resistance characteristics of the compounds are suitable for the service.

3.2.8 Sleeves

Sleeves are required where piping passes through roofs, through masonry or concrete walls, or through floor.

Sleeve work shall be laid out and set before placement of slabs or construction of walls and roof. Sleeves necessary to complete the work shall be furnished.

Where pipe sleeves are required after slabs and masonry are installed, holes to accommodate these sleeves shall be made with core drills. Sleeves shall be set in place with a two-component epoxy adhesive system approved by the Contracting Officer. No load shall be carried by such sleeves unless approved by the Contracting Officer.

Sleeves shall be flush with all ceilings.

Sleeves shall be flush with the floor in finished spaces and shall extend 2 inches above the floor in unfinished spaces.

Sleeves passing through steel decks shall be continuously welded to the deck.

Sleeves extending through floors, roofs, and load bearing walls, and sleeves through fire barriers shall be continuous and shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded anchor lugs. Other sleeves may be formed by molded linear polyethylene liners or similar materials that are removable. Diameter of sleeves shall be large enough to accommodate pipe, insulation, and jacketing without touching the sleeve and shall provide a minimum 3/8 inch clearance. Sleeve size shall accommodate mechanical and thermal motion of pipe to preclude transmission of vibration to walls and generation of noise.

Space between a pipe, bare or insulated, and the inside of a pipe sleeve or a construction surface penetration shall be packed solid with a mineral fiber conforming to ASTM C 592, Form B, Class 8. Wherever the piping passes through firewalls, equipment room walls, floors and ceilings connected to occupied spaces, and other locations where sleeves or construction surface penetrations occur between occupied spaces, similar packing shall be provided. Where sleeves or construction surface penetrations occur between conditioned and unconditioned spaces, the space between a pipe, bare or insulated, and the inside of a pipe sleeve or construction surface penetration shall be filled with an elastomer calk to a depth of 1/2 inch . Surfaces to be calked shall be oil- and grease-free.

Exterior wall sleeves shall be calked watertight with lead and oakum .

Sleeve height above roof surface shall be 12 inches .

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 23


3.2.9 Escutcheons

Escutcheons shall be provided at penetrations of piping into finished areas. Where finished areas are separated by partitions through which piping passes, escutcheons shall be provided on both sides of the partition. Plates shall be provided at the underside only of such ceilings, where suspended ceilings are installed. Plates shall be large enough to fit around the insulation, for insulated pipes. Escutcheons shall be chrome-plated in occupied spaces and shall be of sufficient size to conceal openings in building construction. Escutcheons shall be firmly attached with setscrews.

3.2.10 Flashings

Required flashings shall be provided at mechanical systems penetrations of building boundaries.

3.3 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS TESTING

Prior to acceptance of the work, completed systems shall be pressure-tested in the presence of the Contracting Officer.

3.3.1 Preliminary Stage Tests

Tests shall be pneumatic and shall use dry, oil-free compressed air. Carbon dioxide or nitrogen shall be used in metallic systems.

When testing reveals that leakage exceeds specified limits, the leaks shall be isolated and repaired, defective materials shall be replaced where necessary, and the system shall be retested until specified limits are met. Leaking gasket joints shall be remade with new gaskets and new flange bolting, and used bolting and gaskets shall be discarded.

Other than standard piping flanges, plugs, caps and valves, only commercially manufactured expandable elastomer plugs shall be used for sealing off piping for test purposes. Published safe test pressure rating of any plug used shall be not less than three times the actual test pressure being applied. During pneumatic testing or hydrostatic testing, personnel shall be evacuated from areas where plugs are used.

Components that could be damaged by test pressure shall be removed from piping systems to be tested.

Valve-Operating Tests and Drainage Tests shall be performed according to referenced standards.

Piping system components, such as valves, shall be checked for proper operation under system test pressure.

No test media shall be added to a system during a test for a period specified or determined by the Contracting Officer.

Duration of a test will be determined by the Contracting Officer and will be for a minimum of 15 minutes with a maximum of 24 hours. Test may be terminated by direction of the Contracting Officer at any point after it has been determined that the leakage rate is within limits.

Test records of all piping systems tests shall be prepared and maintained. Records shall show Governmental and Contractor test personnel

SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 24


responsibilities, dates, test gage identification numbers, ambient temperatures, pressure ranges, rates of pressure drop, and leakage rates.

3.3.2 Test Gages

Contractor's test gages shall conform to ASME B40.100 and shall have a dial size of 8 inches or larger. Maximum permissible scale range for a given test shall be such that the pointer during a test shall have a starting position at midpoint of the dial or within the middle third of the scale range. Certification of accuracy and correction table shall bear a date within 90 calendar days prior to test use, test gage number, and the project number, unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.

3.3.3 Acceptance Pressure Testing

Testing shall take place during steady-state ambient temperature conditions.

Ferrous piping systems shall be tested at 1-1/2 times maximum operating pressure. Test pressure shall be maintained for a period of not less than 2 hours with an allowable pressure drop of 2 psi during that time unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.

Control and instrumentation tubing systems shall be tested at 30 psi . Test pressure shall be maintained for a period of not less than 24 hours with essentially no pressure drop during that time.

3.4 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM CLEANING

Rust and dirt shall be removed from the bore and exterior surface of all piping and equipment. Pipeline strainers, temporary and permanent, shall be cleaned during purging operations, after startup, and immediately prior to final acceptance by the Government.

New steel piping shall be flushed and cleaned with a suitable degreasing agent, until visible, grease, dirt, and other contaminants have been removed. Degreased waste material including the degreaser itself shall be disposed of in accordance with written instructions received from the Environmental authority having jurisdiction through the Contracting Officer and in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Regulations.

3.5 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION

Identification plates shall be protected and kept clean. Damaged and illegible identification plates shall be replaced at no additional expense.

Piping shall be labeled and arrowed at each point of entry and exit of piping passing through walls; at each change in direction, such as at elbows and tees; and in congested or hidden areas, at each point required to clarify service or indicate a hazard. Each riser shall also be labeled.

In long straight runs, labels shall be located at distances visible to each other, but in no case shall the distance between labels exceed 75 feet . Labels shall be legible from the primary service and operating area.


SECTION 22 15 14.00 40 Page 25


SECTION 23 03 00.00 20

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS01/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES





This section applies to all sections of Divisions: 21, FIRE SUPPRESSION; 22, PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.


1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.



1.3.3 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 1


acceptable.

1.3.5 Modification of References

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.

1.3.5.1 Definitions

For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."

1.3.5.2 Administrative Interpretations

For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.


Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

1.6 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 2


in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.

Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.

When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.7 ACCESSIBILITY


PART 2 PRODUCTS





PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 3


shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.

The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare metal.

Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.

b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.

c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.


SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 4


SECTION 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS01/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with the standard or standards referenced in this specification.


ASTM C 1126 (2004) Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 1136 (2006) Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 1290 (2006) Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts

ASTM C 1427 (2004) Specification for Preformed Flexible Cellular Polyolefin Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C 195 (2000) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C 449/C 449M (2000) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement


ASTM C 534 (2007a) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C 547 (2007) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C 552 (2003) Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 553 (2002) Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for



Commercial and Industrial Applications

ASTM C 591 (2007) Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 610 (2007) Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 612 (2004) Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 647 (1995; R 2000) Properties and Tests of Mastics and Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 665 (2006) Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing

ASTM C 795 (2003) Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel

ASTM C 916 (1985; R 2001e1) Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation


ASTM C 921 (2003a) Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation

ASTM E 2231 (2007) Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics


ASTM E 96/E 96M (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials




NFPA 255 (2005; Errata 2006) Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials




MIL-A-3316 (Rev C; Am 2) Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation


UL 723 (2003; Rev thru May 2005) Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials


Field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems shall be as specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated.

1.3 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL

1.3.1 Industry Standards

Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this specification.

1.3.2 Standard Products

Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems which are located within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems. Materials shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.


Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the last 5 years.

1.3.4 Surface Burning Characteristics

Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes, shall be determined by ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the actual construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted according to ASTM E 2231. Insulation materials located exterior to the building perimeter are not required to be fire rated.

1.3.5 Identification of Materials

Packages or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand, and a description of the material. Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.

SD-03 Product Data

Pipe Insulation Systems; GDuct Insulation Systems; GEquipment Insulation Systems; G

A complete list of materials, including manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. The product number, k-value, thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included. The product data must be copywrited, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. Materials furnished under this section of the specification shall be submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA plates booklet (SD-02). Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate is applicable.

SD-04 Samples

Thermal Insulation; G

After approval of materials, actual sections of installed systems, properly insulated in accordance with the specification requirements, shall be displayed. Such actual sections must remain accessible to inspection throughout the job and will be reviewed from time to time for controlling the quality of the work throughout the construction site. Each material used shall be identified, by indicating on an attached sheet the specification requirement for the material and the material by each manufacturer intended to meet the requirement. The Contracting Officer will inspect display sample sections at the jobsite. Approved display sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during the construction period. Upon completion of construction, the display sample sections will be closed and sealed.

Pipe Insulation Display Sections: Display sample sections shall include as a minimum an elbow or tee, a valve, dielectric waterways and flanges, a hanger with protection shield and insulation insert, or dowel as required, at support point, method of fastening and sealing insulation at longitudinal lap, circumferential lap, butt joints at fittings and on pipe runs, and terminating points for each type of pipe insulation used on the job, and for hot pipelines and cold pipelines, both interior and exterior, even when the same type of insulation is used for these services.

Duct Insulation Display Sections: Display sample sections for



rigid and flexible duct insulation used on the job. A temporary covering shall be used to enclose and protect display sections for duct insulation exposed to weather.


Pipe Insulation Systems; GDuct Insulation Systems; GEquipment Insulation Systems; G

1.5 STORAGE

Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means.

1.6 RECYCLED MATERIALS

Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided that the materials meets all other requirements of this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following insulation are:

Rock Wool - 75 percent slag of weightFiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weightRigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material

PART 2 PRODUCTS





2.2 GENERAL MATERIALS

Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free and conform to the following:



2.2.1 Adhesives

2.2.1.1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive

Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C 916, Type I.

2.2.1.2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement

Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C 195.

2.2.1.3 Lagging Adhesive

Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the cloth/material covering the insulation. Lagging adhesives shall be nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented white and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and bonding glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct insulation.

2.2.2 Contact Adhesive

Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F. The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Natural cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area (mechanical) ventilation shall be used to prevent an accumulation of solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces. Gloves and spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with safe installation practices.

2.2.3 Caulking

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.

2.2.4 Finishing Cement

ASTM C 449/C 449M: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless steel must comply with ASTM C 795.



2.2.5 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape

Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard.

2.2.6 Staples

Outward clinching type monel.

2.2.7 Jackets

2.2.7.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact strength, UV resistant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.

2.2.7.2 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket

Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive, greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive); with 0.0000 permeability when tested per ASTM E 96/E 96M; heavy duty, white or natural; and UV resistant.

2.2.8 Vapor Retarder Required

ASTM C 921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch width. ASTM C 921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units, tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that require factory applied jackets are mineral fiber, cellular glass, polyisocyanurate, and phenolic foam. Insulation materials that do not require jacketing are flexible elastomerics. All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.2.8.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)

Standard reinforced fire retardant jacket for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts, or equipment. Vapor retarder jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing.

2.2.8.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings

a. The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes. Less than 0.02 permeability when tested per ASTM E 96/E 96M. Meeting UL 723 or ASTM E 84 flame and smoke requirements; UV resistant.

b. The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color shall be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be



determined according to procedure B of ASTM E 96/E 96M utilizing apparatus described in ASTM E 96/E 96M. The coating shall be a nonflammable, fire resistant type. All other application and service properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C 647.

2.2.8.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder

ASTM C 1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed ductwork, where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Vapor retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.2.8.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape

Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor Retarder above.

2.2.8.5 Vapor Barrier

The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability when tested per ASTM E 96/E 96M). Vapor barrier shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E 84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant. Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified for laminated film vapor barrier above.

2.2.9 Vapor Retarder Not Required

ASTM C 921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.2.10 Insulation Bands

Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.

2.2.11 Sealants

Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission of 0.02 perms, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

2.3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS

Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall be 1inch. The Contractor shall comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. Pipe insulation materials shall be limited to those listed herein and shall meet the following requirements:

2.3.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg. F)

Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be



as follows:

a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

b. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534, Grade 1, Type I or II. Type II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation. Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not be used.

c. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126, Type III. Phenolic insulations shall comply with ASTM C 795 and with the ASTM C 665 paragraph Corrosiveness. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

d. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, type I. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier. Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not be used.

e. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type I or II.

f. Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM): ASTM C 547. Install per manufacturer's instructions.

2.3.2 Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)

Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall meet the following requirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

a. Mineral Fiber: ASTM C 547, Types I, II or III, supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.

b. Calcium Silicate: ASTM C 533, Type I indoor only, or outdoors above 250 degrees F pipe temperature. Supply insulation with the manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

c. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II and Type III. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.

d. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534, Grade 1, Type I or II to 200 degrees F service.

e. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126 Type III to 250 degrees F service shall comply with ASTM C 795. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

f. Perlite Insulation: ASTM C 610

g. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, Type 1, to 300 degrees F service. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory applied jacket/vapor barrier.

h. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type I or II to 200 degrees F.



2.3.3 Above Ground Dual Temperature Pipeline - Outdoors, Indoor - Exposed or Concealed

Selection of insulation for use over a dual temperature pipeline system shall be in accordance with the most limiting/restrictive case. Find an allowable material from paragraph PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS and determine the required thickness from the most restrictive case. Use the thickness listed in paragraphs INSULATION THICKNESS for cold & hot pipe applications.

2.4 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS

2.4.1 Duct Insulation

Provide factory-applied cellular glass polyisocyanurate or phenolic foam insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant vapor barrier, with identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value and out-of-package R value.

2.4.1.1 Rigid Insulation

Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C 612, Class 2 (maximum surface temperature 400 degrees F), 3 pcf average, 1-1/2 inch thick, Type IA, IB, II, III, and IV.

2.4.1.2 Blanket Insulation

Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 553, Type 1, Class B-3, 3/4 pcf nominal, 2.0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees F. Also ASTM C 1290 Type III may be used.

2.4.2 Duct Insulation Jackets

2.4.2.1 All-Purpose Jacket

Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface suitable for field painting.

2.4.2.2 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket

Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty white or natural).

2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS

Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 4 and 5. In outside locations, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified. Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary to equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a smooth, exterior surface.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL

Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull apart after one hour, shall be replaced.

3.1.1 Installation

Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests specified in other sections of this specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered on multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces.

3.1.2 Firestopping

Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

3.1.3 Painting and Finishing

Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.

3.1.4 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall be installed with seams and joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 200 degrees F. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have jacketing shall be protected with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured. A brush coating of adhesive shall be applied to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. The adhesive shall be allowed to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces. Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.

3.1.5 Welding

No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.



3.1.6 Pipes/Ducts/Equipment which Require Insulation

Insulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for omitted items, as specified.

3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

3.2.1 Pipe Insulation

3.2.1.1 General

Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier, including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following:

a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.

b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.

c. Sanitary drain lines.

d. Air chambers.

e. Adjacent insulation.

f. ASME stamps.

g. Access plates of fan housings.

h. Cleanouts or handholes.

3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors

a. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.

b. An aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder shall be provided over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.

c. Where pipes penetrate interior walls, the aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed shall extend 2 inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each end with a band.

d. Where penetrating floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from a point below the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor with one band at the floor and one not more than 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.



e. Where penetrating waterproofed floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.

f. Where penetrating exterior walls, the aluminum jacket required for pipe exposed to weather shall continue through the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior surface of the wall.

g. Where penetrating roofs, pipe shall be insulated as required for interior service to a point flush with the top of the flashing and sealed with vapor retarder coating. The insulation for exterior application shall butt tightly to the top of flashing and interior insulation. The exterior aluminum jacket shall extend 2 inches down beyond the end of the insulation to form a counter flashing. The flashing and counter flashing shall be sealed underneath with caulking.

h. For hot water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar heated service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on the backside of the finished wall. The insulation termination shall be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats (if applicable). The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. Glass tape seams shall overlap 1 inch. The annular space between the pipe and wall penetration shall be caulked with approved fire stop material. The pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration at least 3/8 inches.

i. For domestic cold water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar cooling service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). The insulation shall be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and the wall penetration shall be caulked with an approved fire stop material having vapor retarder properties. The pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8 inches.

3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers

a. Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous through hangers. All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69. Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield, insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used.



b. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches at 60 degrees F and above shall be supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE .

c. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches and below 60 degrees F shall be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield in accordance with MSS SP-69. An insulation insert of cellular glass, calcium silicate (or perlite above 80 degrees F), or the necessary strength polyisocyanurate shall be installed above each shield. The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required per the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation, as an option to installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert.

d. Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360-degree arc of the insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The insert shall cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required per the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation, as an option instead of installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert. The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe. When the pipe riser is longer than 30 feet, the weight of the pipe shall be additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe that are directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe insulation. These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.

e. Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2 inches, and shall be sealed as required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to ASTM C 1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining insulation material.

3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation

Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed



fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation.

3.2.1.5 Pipes in high abuse areas.

In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, stainless steel, aluminum or flexible laminate cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic or metal foil laminate) laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less than 0.0000 permeability; (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed) aluminum jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level shall be protected.

3.2.1.6 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness

TABLE 1Insulation Material For Piping (°F)

__________________________________________________________________________ Service Material Spec. Vapor Retarder/ Vapor Barrier Required ___________________________________________________________________________

Chilled Water Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No (Supply & Return, Dual Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes Temperature Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 Yes Piping, 40°F Mineral Fiber with ASTM C 547 Yes nominal) ___________________________________________________________________________ Heating Hot Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 No Water Supply & Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 No Return, Heated Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No Oil Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes (Max 250°F) Perlite ASTM C 610 No Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 No___________________________________________________________________________ Cold Domestic Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 Yes Water Piping, Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No Makeup Water & Drinking Fount Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes Drain Piping Polyofin Clos'cell ASTM C 1427 No ___________________________________________________________________________ Hot Domestic Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 No Water Supply & Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No Recirculating No Piping (Max. Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes 200°F) Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 No ___________________________________________________________________________ Refrigerant Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534 No Suction Piping Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 Yes (35°F nominal) Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 Yes___________________________________________________________________________ Compressed Air Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No



TABLE 1Insulation Material For Piping (°F)

__________________________________________________________________________ Service Material Spec. Vapor Retarder/ Vapor Barrier Required ___________________________________________________________________________ Discharge, Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 No Steam and Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 No Condensate Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes Return Perlite ASTM C 610 No (201 to 250°F) Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 No ___________________________________________________________________________ Exposed Lav'ry Drains, Expo'd Polyofin Clos'cell ASTM C 1427 No Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for Handicap Personnel ___________________________________________________________________________ Horizontal Roof Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 Yes Drain Leaders No (Including Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes Underside of Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 Yes Roof Drain Fittings) ___________________________________________________________________________ A/C condensate Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 Yes Drain Located Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No Inside Bldg. Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes ___________________________________________________________________________ Medium Tempera- Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 No ture Hot Water, Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 No Steam and Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No Condensate Perlite ASTM C 610 No (251 to 350°F) polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 No ___________________________________________________________________________ High Tempera- Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 No ture Hot Water Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 No & Steam (351 Perlite ASTM C 610 No to 700°F) Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 No__________________________________________________________________________ Brine Systems Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No Cryogenics (Minus 30 Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes to 0°F) Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 Yes ___________________________________________________________________________ Brine Systems Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 No Cryogenics (Zero to 34°F) Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 Yes Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 Yes___________________________________________________________________________



3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines

The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be insulated per Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes but is not limited to the following:

a. Domestic cold and chilled drinking water.

b. Make-up water.

c. Horizontal and vertical portions of interior roof drains.

d. Refrigerant suction lines.

e. Chilled water.

f. Dual temperature water, i.e. HVAC hot/chilled water.

g. Air conditioner condensate drains.

h. Brine system cryogenics

i. Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing fixtures for handicap persons.

3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness

Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.

3.2.2.2 Jacket for Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, Phenolic Foam, and Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulated Pipe

Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater than 3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed. Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black, shall have the insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein. The aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, White & Black, shall be installed as specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of the laps of the aluminum jacket is not required. In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft level.

3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe

a. Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly butted. All butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint



sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.

b. Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less than 1-1/2 inches. Butt strips 3 inches wide shall be provided for circumferential joints.

c. Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled on 4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing. If staples are used, they shall be sealed per item "e." below. Note that staples are not required with cellular glass systems.

d. Factory self-sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation. The lap system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Stapler shall be used only if specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, the section shall be replaced or the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling.

e. All Staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap systems, shall be coated with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape. All seams, except those on factory self-seal systems shall be coated with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

f. Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and securing it with adhesive, stapling, and coating with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape. The patch shall extend not less than 1-1/2 inches past the break.

g. At penetrations such as thermometers, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and sealed with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

h. Installation of flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the open ends of piping or tubing. All seams and butt joints shall be secured and sealed with adhesive. When using self seal products only the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive. Insulation shall be pushed on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints. All edges shall be clean cut. Rough or jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted. Proper tools such as sharp knives shall be used. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation when used on pipe larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.



3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

b. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions, valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch, applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a 2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the jacket of the pipe insulation.

c. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches from the insulation surface.

d. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, and check valves.

3.2.2.5 Optional PVC Fitting Covers

At the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape. Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity. The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder tape, adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers. Seams in the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a continuous vapor seal.

3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines

3.2.3.1 General Requirements

All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated per Table 2. This includes but is not limited to the following:

a. Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.

b. Steam.



c. Condensate & compressed air discharge.

d. Hot water heating.

e. Heated oil.

f. Water defrost lines in refrigerated rooms.

Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied aluminum where required or seal welded PVC.

3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories

a. General. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.

b. Precut or Preformed. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.

c. Rigid Preformed. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow".

3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather

Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no factory-applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION in PART 3.

3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket

The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers. Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with caulking while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder.



3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings

Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air) recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC fitting covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of pipe. PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed, and UV resistant.

3.2.4.3 PVC Jacket

PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall include provision for thermal expansion.

3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

Except for oven hood exhaust duct insulation, corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket. Air conditioned spaces shall be defined as those spaces directly supplied with cooled conditioned air (or provided with a cooling device such as a fan-coil unit) and heated conditioned air (or provided with a heating device such as a unit heater, radiator or convector).

3.3.1 Duct Insulation Thickness

Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4.

Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)

Cold Air Ducts 2.0 Relief Ducts 1.5 Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5

Warm Air Ducts 2.0 Relief Ducts 1.5 Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5

3.3.2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct

Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and associated equipment.

a. Supply ducts.

b. Return air ducts.

c. Relief ducts.



d. Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).

e. Plenums.

f. Duct-mounted coil casings.

g. Coil headers and return bends.

h. Coil casings.

i. Fresh air intake ducts.

j. Filter boxes.

k. Mixing boxes (field-insulated).

l. Supply fans (field-insulated).

m. Site-erected air conditioner casings.

n. Ducts exposed to weather.

o. Combustion air intake ducts.

Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf. Insulation for both concealed or exposed round/oval ducts shall be flexible type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum density 3 pcf, formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly butted and staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified, the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch. Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation.

3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct

a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.

b. For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.

c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.



d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.

e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.

f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to ensure a secure seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all directions and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.

i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.. The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.

j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket.

3.3.2.2 Installation on Exposed Duct Work

a. For rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger. One row shall be provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches. Mechanical fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G60 coated galvanized steel, and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.

b. Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams. Each piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the height of projections is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to



standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over. Vapor retarder/barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors.

c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.

d. Joints in the insulation jacket shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide strip of tape. Tape seams shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

e. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured with tape and stapled. Staples and joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

f. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the penetrations sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.

g. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish. The coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.

h. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of 3/4 pcf, attached as per MICA standards.

3.3.3 Insulation for Warm Air Duct

Insulation and vapor barrier shall be provided for the following warm air ducts and associated equipment:.

a. Supply ducts.

b. Return air ducts

c. Relief air ducts

d. Flexible run-outs (field insulated)

e. Plenums

f. Duct-mounted coil casings

g. Coil-headers and return bends

h. Coil casings.

i. Fresh air intake ducts



j. Filter boxes

k. Mixing boxes

l. Supply fans

m. Site-erected air conditioner casings

n. Ducts exposed to weather

Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, and rigid type where exposed. Insulation on exposed ducts shall be provided with a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type II jacket, or finished with adhesive finish. Flexible type insulation shall be used for round ducts, with a factory-applied Type II jacket. Insulation on concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type II jacket. Adhesive finish where indicated to be used shall be accomplished by applying two coats of adhesive with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch. Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared openings. Duct insulation shall terminate at fire dampers and flexible connections.

3.3.3.1 Installation on Concealed Duct

a. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.

b. For rectangular and oval ducts 24 inches and larger, insulation shall be secured to the bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from duct corner.

c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 18 inch centers and not more than 18 inches from duct corners.

d. The insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners where used. The insulation shall not be compressed to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and trapeze-type hangers.

e. Self-locking washers shall be installed where mechanical fasteners are used and the pin trimmed and bent over.

f. Insulation jacket shall overlap not less than 2 inches at joints and the lap shall be secured and stapled on 4 inch centers.

3.3.3.2 Installation on Exposed Duct

a. For rectangular ducts, the rigid insulation shall be secured to the duct by the use of mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not more than 16 inches apart and not more than 6 inches from the edges of the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger and a minimum of one row for each side of duct less than 12 inches.



b. Duct insulation with factory-applied jacket shall be formed with minimum jacket seams, and each piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using mechanical fasteners. When the height of projection is less than the insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams, reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried over the projection. Jacket shall be continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. Where the height of projections is greater than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried over the projection.

c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers shall be installed and pin trimmed and bent over.

d. Joints on jacketed insulation shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide strip of tape and brushed with vapor retarder coating.

e. Breaks and penetrations in the jacket material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration and shall be secured with adhesive and stapled.

f. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed with tape and brushed with vapor retarder coating.

g. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with factory Type I jacket insulation, minimum density of 3/4 pcf attached by staples spaced not more than 16 inches and not more than 6 inches from the degrees of joints. Joints shall be sealed in accordance with item "d." above.

3.3.4 Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose

For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.

3.3.5 Insulation for Evaporative Cooling Duct

Evaporative cooling supply duct located in spaces not evaporatively cooled, shall be insulated. Material and installation requirements shall be as specified for duct insulation for warm air duct.

3.3.6 Duct Test Holes

After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be repaired.

3.3.7 Duct Exposed to Weather

3.3.7.1 Installation

Ducts exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished as specified for the applicable service for exposed duct inside the building. After the above is accomplished, the insulation shall then be further finished as detailed in the following subparagraphs.



3.3.7.2 Round Duct

Laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - Less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply, heavy duty, white and natural) membrane shall be applied overlapping material by 3 inches no bands or caulking needed - see manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Aluminum jacket with factory applied moisture retarder shall be applied with the joints lapped not less than 3 inches and secured with bands located at circumferential laps and at not more than 12 inch intervals throughout. Horizontal joints shall lap down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock position. Joints shall be sealed with caulking to prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be sealed with caulking.

3.3.7.3 Fittings

Fittings and other irregular shapes shall be finished as specified for rectangular ducts.

3.3.7.4 Rectangular Ducts

Two coats of weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh for outdoor application shall be applied to the entire surface. Each coat of weatherproof mastic shall be 1/16 inch minimum thickness. The exterior shall be a metal jacketing applied for mechanical abuse and weather protection, and secured with screws.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

3.4.1 General

Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers, fasteners, flanges and accessories. Equipment insulation shall be omitted on the following:

a. Hand-holes.

b. Boiler manholes.

c. Cleanouts.

d. ASME stamps.

e. Manufacturer's nameplates.

f. Duct Test/Balance Test Holes.

3.4.2 Insulation for Cold Equipment

Cold equipment below 60 degrees F: Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following:

a. Pumps.

b. Refrigeration equipment parts that are not factory insulated.



c. Drip pans under chilled equipment.

d. Cold water storage tanks.

e. Water softeners.

f. Duct mounted coils.

g. Cold and chilled water pumps.

h. Pneumatic water tanks.

i. Roof drain bodies.

j. Air handling equipment parts that are not factory insulated.

k. Expansion and air separation tanks.

3.4.2.1 Insulation Type

Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Material and thicknesses shall be as shown in Table 5:

Legend

RMF: Rigid Mineral FiberFMF: Flexible Mineral FiberCS: Calcium SilicatePL: PerliteCG: Cellular GlassFC: Flexible Elastomeric CellularPF: Phenolic FoamPC: Polyisocyanurate FoamPE: Polyolefin closed cell

TABLE 5Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (mm and °C)

Equipment handling media Material Thicknessat indicated temperature:

___________________________________________________________________________

2 to 16 CG 40 mmdegrees C PF 40 mm FC 25 mm PC 25 mm PE 25 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

Minus 18 to 1 PF 40 mmdegree C PC 40 mm CG 75 mm FC 40 mm PE 40 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

Minus 34 to Minus 17 PF 40 mmdegrees C PC 40 mm CG 90 mm



FC 45 mm PE 45 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

TABLE 5Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (Inches and °F)

Equipment handling media Material Thicknessat indicated temperature:

_________________________________________________________________________

35 to 60 CG 1.5 inchesdegrees F PF 1.5 inches FC 1.0 inches PC 1.0 inches PE 1.0 inches

__ 1 to 34 PC 1.5 inchesdegrees F FC 1.5 inches CG 3.0 inches PF 1.5 inches PE 1.5 inches

_________________________________________________________________________Minus 30 to 0 PC 1.5 inchesdegrees F FC 1.75 inches CG 3.5 inches PF 1.5 inches PE 1.5 inches

_________________________________________________________________________

3.4.2.2 Pump Insulation

a. Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed. Joints between sides and between sides and bottom shall be joined by adhesive with lap strips for rigid mineral fiber and contact adhesive for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, thus making the top cover removable.

b. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.

c. Upon completion of installation of the insulation, including removable sections, two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be applied with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating. Caulking shall be applied to parting line, between equipment and removable section insulation, and at all penetrations.

3.4.2.3 Other Equipment

a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.



b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered with contact adhesive. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles.

c. Phenolic foam insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding compound and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer. Cellular glass shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant, and sealed with a vapor retarder coating.

d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. Removable section joints shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type joint. The entire surface of the removable section shall be finished by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.

e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.

f. Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6 inches by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch centers.

3.4.2.4 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier

Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be caulked. Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of open mesh synthetic fabric embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking or vapor barrier tape shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation.

3.4.3 Insulation for Hot Equipment

Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media above 60 degrees F including the following:

a. Converters.

b. Heat exchangers.

c. Hot water generators.

d. Water heaters.

e. Pumps handling media above 130 degrees F.

f. Fuel oil heaters.

g. Hot water storage tanks.



h. Air separation tanks.

i. Surge tanks.

j. Flash tanks.

k. Feed-water heaters.

l. Unjacketed boilers or parts of boilers.

m. Boiler flue gas connection from boiler to stack (if inside).

n. Induced draft fans.

o. Fly ash and soot collectors.

p. Condensate receivers.

3.4.3.1 Insulation

Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Shell and tube-type heat exchangers shall be insulated for the temperature of the shell medium.

Insulation thickness for hot equipment shall be determined using Table 6:

Legend

RMF: Rigid Mineral FiberFMF: Flexible Mineral FiberCS: Calcium SilicatePL: PerliteCG: Cellular GlassFC: Flexible Elastomeric CellularPF: Phenolic FoamPC: Polyisocyanurate Foam

TABLE 6Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (mm and °C)

Equipment handling steam Material Thicknessor other media to indicatedpressure or temperaturelimit

___________________________________________________________________________

103.4 kPa RMF 50 mmor FMF 50 mm121 C CS/PL 100 mm CG 75 mm PF 40 mm FC(<93 C) 25 mm PC 25 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

1379.0kPa RMF 75 mmor FMF 75 mm204 C CS/PL 100 mm CG 100 mm



___________________________________________________________________________

316 C RMF 125 mm FMF 150 mm CS/PL 150 mm CG 150 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

316 C: Thickness necessary to limit the external temperature of the insulation to 50 C. Heat transfer calculations shall be submitted to substantiate insulation and thickness selection.

TABLE 6Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (Inches and °F)

Equipment handling steam Material Thicknessor media to indicated pressureor temperature limit:

_________________________________________________________________________

15 psig RMF 2.0 inchesor FMF 2.0 inches250F CS/PL 4.0 inches CG 3.0 inches PF 1.5 inches FC (<200F) 1.0 inches

__ PC 1.0 inches

200 psig RMF 3.0 inchesor FMF 3.0 inches400 F CS/PL 4.0 inches CG 4.0 inches

_________________________________________________________________________600 F RMF 5.0 inches FMF 6.0 inches CS/PL 6.0 inches CG 6.0 inches

_________________________________________________________________________>600 F: Thickness necessary to limit the external temperature of the insulation to 120F. Heat transfer calculations shall be submitted to substantiate insulation and thickness selection.

3.4.3.2 Insulation of Pumps

Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed. Bottom and sides shall be banded to form a rigid housing that does not rest on the pump. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit tightly. The top cover shall have a joint forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, making the top cover removable. Two coats of Class I adhesive shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. A parting line shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation coating. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line of the removable sections and penetrations.



3.4.3.3 Other Equipment

a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.

b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 12 inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands with suitable corner angles.

c. On high vibration equipment, cellular glass insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer, and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound. Mineral fiber joints shall be filled with finishing cement.

d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. The removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap type joint. Entire surface of the removable section shall be finished as specified.

e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.

f. On equipment with ribs, such as boiler flue gas connection, draft fans, and fly ash or soot collectors, insulation shall be applied over 6 by 6 inch by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inch washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place on 12 inch (maximum) centers.

g. On equipment handling media above 600 degrees F, insulation shall be applied in two or more layers with joints staggered.

h. Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be caulked. Two coats of adhesive shall be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section insulation.

3.4.4 Equipment Handling Dual Temperature Media

Below and above 60 degrees F: equipment handling dual temperature media shall be insulated as specified for cold equipment.

3.4.5 Equipment Exposed to Weather

3.4.5.1 Installation

Equipment exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished in accordance with the requirements for ducts exposed to weather in paragraph DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION.

3.4.5.2 Optional Panels

At the option of the Contractor, prefabricated metal insulation panels may



be used in lieu of the insulation and finish previously specified. Thermal performance shall be equal to or better than that specified for field applied insulation. Panels shall be the standard catalog product of a manufacturer of metal insulation panels. Fastenings, flashing, and support system shall conform to published recommendations of the manufacturer for weatherproof installation and shall prevent moisture from entering the insulation. Panels shall be designed to accommodate thermal expansion and to support a 250 pound walking load without permanent deformation or permanent damage to the insulation. Exterior metal cover sheet shall be aluminum and exposed fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum.




SECTION 23 08 00.00 10

COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS01/08

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES


ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)

ACG Commissioning Guideline (2005) Commissioning Guideline

NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

NEBB Commissioning Standard (1999) Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning


SMACNA Commissioning Manual (1994, 1st Ed) HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual



1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings

Commissioning Plan; G,

Commissioning Plan prepared in accordance with Commissioning Standard, no later than 28 days after the approval of the Commissioning Specialist.

SD-03 Product Data

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists; G,

At least 28 days prior to the start of Pre-Functional Performance Test Checks. The schedule for the test checks shall be submitted at least 14 days prior to the start of Pre-Functional

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 1


Performance Test Checks.

Functional Performance Tests; G,

Test procedures at least 28 days prior to the start of Functional Performance Tests. The schedule for the tests at least 14 days prior to the start of Functional Performance Tests.

SD-06 Test Reports

Commissioning Report; G

No later than 14 days after completion of Functional Performance Tests.

SD-07 Certificates

Commissioning Firm; G

Certification of the proposed Commissioning Firm's qualifications by one of the following ACG, NEBB, or TABB to perform the duties specified herein and in other related Sections, no later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. The documentation shall include the date that the Certification was initially granted and the date that the current Certification expires. Any lapses in Certification of the proposed Commissioning Firm or disciplinary action taken by ACG, NEBB, or TABB against the proposed Commissioning Firm shall be described in detail.

Commissioning Specialist; G

Certification of the proposed Commissioning Specialist's qualifications by one of the following ACG, NEBB, or TABB to perform the duties specified herein and in other related Sections, no later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. The documentation shall include the date that the Certification was initially granted and the date that the current Certification expires. Any lapses in Certification of the proposed Commissioning Specialist or disciplinary action taken by ACG, NEBB, or TABB against the proposed Commissioning Specialist shall be described in detail.

1.3 SIMILAR TERMS

In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the Commissioning Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding ACG, NEBB, or TABB requirements where differences exist.

SIMILAR TERMS

Contract Term ACG NEBB TABB

Commissioning ACG Procedural SMACNA HVAC Standard Commissioning Standards for Commissioning Guideline Building Systems Guideline

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 2


SIMILAR TERMS Commissioning

Commissioning ACG Certified NEBB Qualified TABB Certified Specialist Commissioning Commissioning Commissioning Agent Administrator Supervisor

1.4 COMMISSIONING STANDARDS

Commissioning shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the Commissioning Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., ACG Commissioning Guideline, NEBB Commissioning Standard, or SMACNA Commissioning Manual unless otherwise stated herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the Commissioning Standard shall be considered mandatory. The Commissioning Standard shall be used for all aspects of Commissioning, including qualifications for the Commissioning Firm and Specialist and calibration of Commissioning instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the Commissioning Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All quality assurance provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the Commissioning Standard, Commissioning procedures shall be developed by the Commissioning Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the Commissioning Standard used (ACG, NEBB, or TABB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be considered mandatory.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

1.5.1 Commissioning Firm

The Commissioning Firm shall be either a member of ACG or certified by the NEBB or the TABB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm loses subject certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another Commissioning Firm for approval. Any firm that has been the subject of disciplinary action by the ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including Commissioning. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections to be performed by the Commissioning Firm shall be considered invalid if the Commissioning Firm loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor. These Commissioning services are to assist the prime Contractor in performing the quality oversight for which it is responsible. The Commissioning Firm shall be a subcontractor of the prime Contractor and shall be financially and corporately independent of all other subContractors. The Commissioning Firm shall report to and be paid by the prime Contractor.

1.5.2 Commissioning Specialist

The Commissioning Specialist shall be an ACG Certified Commissioning Agent, a NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator, or a TABB Certified Commissioning Supervisor and shall be an employee of the approved Commissioning Firm. The certification shall be maintained for the entire

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 3


duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Commissioning Specialist loses subject certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another Commissioning Specialist for approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by the ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including Commissioning. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections performed by the Commissioning Specialist shall be considered invalid if the Commissioning Specialist loses his certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by the approved successor.

1.6 COMMISSIONING SPECIALIST RESPONSIBILITIES

All Commissioning work specified herein and in related sections shall be performed under the direct guidance of the Commissioning Specialist. The Commissioning Specialist shall prepare the Commissioning Plan, which will be a comprehensive schedule and shall include all submittal requirements for procedures, notifications, reports and the Commissioning Report. After approval of the Commissioning Plan, the Contractor shall revise the Contract NAS schedule to reflect the schedule requirements in the Commissioning Plan.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

The work described in this Section shall begin only after all work required in related Sections has been successfully completed, and all test and inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals required in these Sections have been submitted and approved. Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists shall be performed at appropriate times during the construction phase of the Contract.

1.8 ENERGY

Formal LEED certification is not required; however, the Contractor is required to provide documentation that meets the LEED Energy & Atmosphere (EA) Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning. For New Construction and Major Revisions the Contractor shall also provide documentation that meets EA Credit 3; Enhanced Commissioning. The Contractor shall provide documentation for as many LEED credits as possible to support LEED Silver certification of the project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS




Manufacturer's Location for Regionally Manufactured Materials LEED: Ensure

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 4


LEED certification by acquiring and using regionally manufactured project products from within a 500 mile radius to the greatest extent possible. Use and acquire material regionally such that 20 percent of all project material value is from within a 500 mile radius.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND TEST FORMS AND CHECKLISTS

The Contractor shall designate Contractor team members to participate in the Pre- Functional Performance Test Checklists and the Functional Performance Tests specified herein. In addition, the Government team members will be include a representative of the Contracting Officer, the Design Agent's Representative, and the Using Agency's Representative. The team members shall be as follows:

Designation Function

A Contractor's Commissioning SpecialistM Contractor's Mechanical RepresentativeE Contractor's Electrical RepresentativeT Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) SpecialistC Contractor's Controls RepresentativeD Design Agency RepresentativeO Contracting Officer's RepresentativeU Using Agency's Representative

Appendices A and B shall be completed by the commissioning team. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each Pre- Functional Performance Test Checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date unless an "X" is shown indicating that participation by that individual is not required. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each functional performance test item shall be indicated by signature and date.

3.2 TESTS

The pre-functional performance test checklists and functional performance tests shall be performed in a manner that essentially duplicates the checking, testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections. Where checking, testing, and inspection methods are not specified in other Sections, methods shall be established which will provide the information required. Testing and verification required by this section shall be performed during the Commissioning phase. Requirements in related Sections are independent from the requirements of this Section and shall not be used to satisfy any of the requirements specified in this Section. The Contractor shall provide all materials, services, and labor required to perform the pre- functional performance tests checks and functional performance tests. A functional performance test shall be aborted if any system deficiency prevents the successful completion of the test or if any participating non-Government commissioning team member of which participation is specified is not present for the test.

3.2.1 Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists shall be performed for the items indicated in Appendix A. Deficiencies discovered during these checks shall be corrected and re-inspected in accordance with the applicable contract requirements.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 5


3.2.2 Functional Performance Tests

Functional Performance Tests shall be performed for the items indicated in Appendix B. Functional Performance Tests shall begin only after all Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists have been successfully completed. Tests shall prove all modes of the sequences of operation, and shall verify all other relevant contract requirements. Tests shall begin with equipment or components and shall progress through subsystems to complete systems. Upon failure of any Functional Performance Test item, the Contractor shall correct all deficiencies in accordance with the applicable contract requirements. The item shall then be retested until it has been completed with no errors.

3.3 COMMISSIONING REPORT

The Commissioning Report shall consist of completed Pre- Functional Performance Test Checklists and completed Functional Performance Tests organized by system and by subsystem and submitted as one package. The Commissioning Report shall also include all HVAC systems test reports, inspection reports (Preparatory, Initial and Follow-up inspections), start-up reports, TAB report, TAB verification report, Controls start-up test reports and Controls Performance Verification Test (PVT) report. The results of failed tests shall be included along with a description of the corrective action taken.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 6


APPENDIX A

PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLISTS

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - DX Air Cooled Condensing Unit

For Condensing Unit: SS-1 thru SS-2, CRAC-1 and CRAC-2

Checklist Item A M E T C O

Installation

a. Check condenser fans for proper rotation. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

Electrical A M E T C O

a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___

b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X ___ ___

c. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls ___ X ___ X ___ ___

Controls A M E T C O

a. Unit safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

b. Control system and interlocks installed. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

c. Control system and interlocks operational. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 7


Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Pumps

For Pump: P-1 and P-2

Checklist Item A M E T C O

Installation

a. Piping system installed. ___ ___ X X X ___


a. Power available to pump disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___

b. Pump rotation verified. ___ X ___ X X ___

c. Control system interlocks functional. ___ X ___ X ___ ___

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) A M E T C O

a. Pressure/temperature gauges installed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

b. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 8


Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Unit Heater

For Unit Heater: AHU-1 and AHU-2, EUH-1 thru EUH-8

Checklist Item

Installation A M E T C O

a. Steam and condensate piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___


a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ X X ___

c. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

d. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___


a. Control valves properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

b. Control valves operable. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

c. Verify proper location and installation of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___


a. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 9


Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Exhaust Fan

For Exhaust Fan: EF-1 thru EF-11, SF-1 thru SF-5

Checklist Item


a. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___


a. Power available to fan disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___

c. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___


a. Control interlocks properly installed. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

b. Control interlocks operable. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

e. Verify proper location and installation of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___



SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 10


Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Computer Room Unit

For Computer Room Unit: CRAC-1 and CRAC-2

Checklist Item


a. Access doors are operable and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed and routed to floor drain. ___ ___ X X X ___

c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___


a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___

b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___

c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___

d. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls. ___ X ___ X ___ ___

e. Power available to reheat coils. ___ X ___ ___ X ___

Coils/Humidifier A M E T C O

a. Chilled water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

b. Humidifier makeup water connected. ___ ___ X X X ___


a. Control valves operable. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

b. Unit control system operable and verified. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

c. Verify proper location and installation of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___


a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 11


Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC System Controls

For HVAC System: DDC-1 thru DDC-17

Checklist Item


a. Layout of control panel matches drawings. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

b. Framed instructions mounted in or near control panel. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

c. Components properly labeled (on inside and outside of panel). ___ ___ X X ___ ___

d. Control components piped and/or wired to each labeled terminal strip. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

e. EMCS connection made to each labeled terminal strip as shown. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

f. Control wiring and tubing labeled at all terminations, splices, and junctions. ___ ___ X X ___ ___

Main Power and Control Air

a. 120 volt AC power available to panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

b. 138 kPa gauge (20 psig) compressed air available to panel. ___ ___ X X ___ ___


a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 12


Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit

For Air Handling Unit: AHU-10, AHU-15, AHU-16, AHU-17

Checklist Item


a. Inspection and access doors are operable and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___

b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. ___ ___ X X X ___

c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___


a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X X ___

b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___

d. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

e. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___

Coils A M E T C O

a. Chilled water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

b. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___

c. Steam and condensate piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___


a. Control valves/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___

e. Verify proper location and installation of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___



SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 13


- End of Appendix A -

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 14


APPENDIX B

FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS

Functional Performance Test - Pump P-1 and P-2

NOTE: Prior to performing this test, for closed loop systems ensure that the system is pressurized and the make-up water system is operational, or for open loop systems ensure that the sumps are filled to the proper level.

1. Activate pump start using control system commands.

a. Verify correct operation in:

HAND__________ OFF__________ AUTO__________

b. Verify pressure drop across strainer:

Strainer inlet pressure __________ psig

Strainer outlet pressure _________ psig

c. Verify pump inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report and pump design conditions.

DESIGN TAB ACTUAL

Pump inlet pressure psig _________ __________ __________

Pump outlet pressure psig _________ __________ __________

d. Operate pump at shutoff and at 100 percent of designed flow when all components are in full flow. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.

SHUTOFF 100 percent

Pump inlet pressure psig __________ __________

Pump outlet pressure psig __________ __________

Pump flow rate gpm __________ __________

SETPOINTDifferential Pressure Transmitter ________

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 15


Functional Performance Test (cont) - Pump P-1 and P-2

e. For variable speed pumps, operate pump at shutoff (shutoff to be done in manual on var1able speed drive at the minimum rpm that the system is being controlled at) and at minimum flow or when all components are in full by-pass. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.

SHUTOFF 100 percent Pump inlet pressure psig __________ __________

Pump outlet pressure psig__________ __________

Pump flow rate gpm __________ __________

SETPOINT Differential Pressure Transmitter ________

2. Measure motor amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and phase to ground for both the full flow and the minimum flow conditions. Compare amperage to nameplate FLA

a. Full flow:

Nameplate FLA __________

Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3__________

Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3__________ Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd__________

b. Minimum flow:

Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3__________

Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3__________ Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd__________

3. Note unusual vibration, noise, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 16


Functional Performance Test (cont) - Pump P-1 and P-2

4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.

Signature and Date

Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _____________________________

Contractor's Mechanical Representative _____________________________

Contractor's Electrical Representative _____________________________

Contractor's TAB Representative _____________________________

Contractor's Controls Representative _____________________________

Contracting Officer's Representative _____________________________

Design Agency Representative _____________________________

Using Agency's Representative _____________________________

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 17


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit

For Air Handling Unit: AHU-10, -15, -16, -17

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of air handling unit as per specification including the following:

a. Ensure that a slight negative pressure exists on inboard side of the outside air dampers throughout the operation of the dampers. Modulate OA, RA, and EA dampers from fully open to fully closed positions.

a. The following shall be verified when the supply fan operating mode is initiated:

(1) All dampers in normal position prior to fan start___________.

(2) All valves in normal position prior to fan start____________.

(3) System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ___

b. Occupied mode of operation - economizer de-energized.

(1) Outside air damper at minimum position.______________________

(2) Return air damper open.______________________________________

(3) Relief air damper at minimum position .____________

(4) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space cooling temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F

(5) Hot water control valve modulating to maintain space heating temperature set point input from outside air temperature controller. ______

c. Occupied mode of operation - economizer energized.

(1) Outside air damper modulated to maintain mixed air temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F O/A damper position ___________% Return Air Temperature_____deg F Outside Air Temperature _______ deg F

(2) Relief air damper modulates with outside air damper according to sequence of operation. Relief air damper position ________%

(3) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space cooling temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F Return sensor overrides to normal operation.

d. Unoccupied mode of operation. (1) Observe fan starts when space temperature calls for heating/cooling ____. (2) All dampers in normal position. _________________________ (3) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as specified in sequence of operation. ______________________________________

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 18


Functional Performance Test Checklist (cont) - Single Zone Air Handling Unit

e. The following shall be verified when the supply fan off mode is initiated:

(1) All dampers in normal position.______________________________

(2) All valves in normal position._______________________________

(3) Fan de-energizes. ___________________________________________

f. Verify cooling coil and heating coil operation by varying thermostat set point from cooling set point to heating set point and returning to cooling set point________.

g. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection thermostat________.

h. Verify occupancy schedule is programmed into time clock/UMCS________.


Signature and Date

Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ____________________________ Contractor's Mechanical Representative _____________________________







SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 19


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Air Cooled Condensing Unit

For Condensing Unit: CRAC-1 and CRAC-2

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of refrigeration system as per specifications including the following: Start building air handler to provide load for condensing unit. Activate controls system start sequence as follows.

a. Start air handling unit. Verify control system energizes condensing unit start sequence. __________________________________________

b. Verify and record data in 2 and 3 below. c. Shut off air handling equipment to verify condensing unit de-energizes. ___________________________________________________________

d. Restart air handling equipment one minute after condensing unit shut down. Verify condensing unit restart sequence. _____________________

2. Verify condensing unit amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and phase to ground. Motor Full-Load Amps __________ Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3_______

Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3_______ Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd_______

3. Record the following information: Ambient dry bulb temperature __________ degrees F Suction pressure __________ psig Discharge pressure __________ psig 4. Unusual vibration, noise, etc. ___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

5. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications. Signature and DateContractor's Commissioning Specialist _____________________________







SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 20



SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 21


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Unit Heaters

The Contracting Officer will select unit heaters to be spot-checked during the functional performance test. The number of terminals shall not exceed 10 percent. Hot water systems {for hot water unit heaters} must be in operation and supplying design hot water supply temperature water.

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of selected unit heaters:

a. Verify unit heater response to room temperature set point adjustment.___________________________________ b. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ deg F c. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____ deg F d. Record manufacturer's submitted fan capacity _____cfm e. Calculate unit heater capacity using manufacturer's fan capacity and recorded temperatures and compare to design. f. Calculated_____BTU/hr Design______BTU/hr


Signature and Date

Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _____________________________








SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 22


Functional Performance Test Checklist - Computer Room Unit

For Computer Room Unit: CRAC-1 and CRAC-2

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of computer room unit as per specification including the following:

a. System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ______

b. Verify cooling and heating operation by varying thermostat set point from space set point to space set point plus 10 degrees, space set point minus 10 degrees, and returning to space set point. ________________

c. Verify humidifier operation by varying humidistat set point from space set point to space set point plus 20 percent RH, and returning to space set point. _________________________________________________________________

d. Verify that airflow is within tolerance specified in Section 23 08 00.00 20HVAC TESTING/ADJUSTING/BALANCING. _____________________________________________________________________________


Signature and Date

Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ____________________________








SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 23


Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC Controls

For HVAC System: DDC-1 thru DDC-17

The Contracting Officer will select HVAC control systems to undergo functional performance testing. The number of systems shall not exceed 10 percent. Perform this test simultaneously with FPT for AHU or other controlled equipment.

1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of HVAC controls by performing the Performance Verification Test {PVT} test for that system. Contractor to provide blank PVT test procedures previously done by the controls Contractor.

2. Verify interlock with UMCS system______.

3. Verify all required I/O points function from the UMCS system_____.

4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the Performance Verification Test and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.

Signature and Date

Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _________________________

Contractor's Mechanical Representative ___________________________

Contractor's Electrical Representative ___________________________

Contractor's TAB Representative ___________________________ Contractor's Controls Representative ___________________________

Design Agency Representative ___________________________

Contractor's Officer's Representative ___________________________ Using Agency's Representative ___________________________

- End of Appendix B -

-End of 15995 document


SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 24


SECTION 23 08 00.00 20

HVAC TESTING/ADJUSTING/BALANCING10/07

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AMCA 203 (1990) Field Performance Measurements of Fan Systems


ANSI S1.11 (2004) Octave- Band and Fractional-Octave-Band Analog and Digital Filters (ASA 65)

ANSI S1.4 (1983; R 2006) Sound Level Meters (ASA 47)


ASHRAE HA IP (2007) HVAC Applications Handbook, I-P Edition

ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)

AABC MN-1 (2002) National Standards for Total System Balance

AABC MN-4 (1996) Test and Balance Procedures

NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

NEBB MASV (2006) Procedural Standards for Measurements and Assessment of Sound and Vibration

NEBB TABES (2005) Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems


SMACNA HVACTAB (2002, 3rd Ed) HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

SMACNA Leakage Test Mnl (1985, 1st Ed) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 1



Requirements for price breakdown of HVAC TAB work are specified in Section 01 20 00.00 20 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES.

Requirements for construction scheduling related to HVAC TAB work are specified in Section 01 32 17.00 20 NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES.

1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Perform all work in this section in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Subcontractor Special Requirements" in Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS. The paragraph specifies that all contract requirements of this section shall be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor. No work required shall be accomplished by a second tier subcontractor.

1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The work includes test, adjust, and balance (TAB) of new and existing heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air and water distribution systems including equipment, ducts, and piping which are located within, on, under, between, and adjacent to buildings.

1.4.1 Air Distribution Systems

Systems shall be tested, adjusted, and balanced (TAB'd) in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to exterior of air distribution systems under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

1.4.2 Water Distribution Systems

Systems shall be TAB'd in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to water distribution systems under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM. At Contractor's option and with Contracting Officer's written approval, the piping systems may be insulated before systems are TAB'd. Piping insulation shall terminate immediately adjacent to each flow control valve, automatic control valve, or device. The ends of pipe insulation and the space between ends of pipe insulation and piping shall be sealed with waterproof vapor barrier coating. After completion of work under this section, the flow control valves and devices shall be insulated under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.

1.4.3 Phasing of Work

This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction, and thereby the TAB work, is going to be completed in a single phase in spite of the fact that there will be two seasons. All elements of the TAB work are addressed on this premise. When a contract is to be completed in construction phases, including the TAB work, and the DALT work, shall be planned for, completed and approved by the Contracting Officer with each phase. An example of this case would be one contract that requires the rehabilitation of the HVAC in each of several separated buildings. At the completion of the final phase, all approved reports shall be compiled and submitted as one document.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 2


1.5 DEFINITIONS

a. DALT: Duct air leakage test

b. DALT'd: Duct air leakage tested

c. Sound measurements terminology: Defined in AABC MN-1 or NEBB MASV.

d. TAB team supervisor: TAB team engineer.

e. TAB team technician: TAB team assistant.

f. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed.

g. Field check group: One or more systems of the same basic type; the subgroup of a "field check group" is a "system". An example of a "system" is a supply air handler with its duct system, which is its supply, return, and outside air ducts.

h. Out-of-tolerance data: Pertains only to field checking of Certified Final DALT or Certified TAB report. When applied to DALT work, this phase means "a leakage rate measured during DALT field checking which exceeds the leakage rate allowed by SMACNA Leak Test Manual for an indicated duct construction and sealant class." When applied to TAB work this phase means "a measurement taken during TAB field checking which does not fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the original measurement reported on the certified TAB Report for a specific parameter."

i. Season of maximum heating load: Time of year when outdoor ambient temperature at equipment installation site remains within following range throughout the period of data recording for TAB work. Indicated winter outdoor design dry bulb temperature plus 30 to minus 30 degrees Fahrenheit.

j. Season of maximum cooling load: Time of year when outdoor ambient temperature at equipment installation site remains within following range throughout the period of data recording for TAB work. Indicated summer outdoor design dry bulb temperature plus 15, minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


SD-06 Test Reports

Pre-final DALT report; G

Certified Final DALT report; G

Certified TAB report for Season 1; G

Certified TAB report for Season 2; G

Submit certified reports in the specified format including the

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 3


above data.

SD-07 Certificates

Independent TAB agency personnel qualifications; G

DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule; G

Design review report; G

Pre-field DALT preliminary notification; G

Pre-field TAB engineering report; G

Advanced notice for Season 1 TAB field work; G

Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List For Season 1; G

Advanced notice for Season 2 TAB field work; G

Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List For Season 2; G

1.7 DALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE

Submit this schedule, adapted for this particular contract, to the Contracting Officer (CO) for review and approval. Include with the submittal the planned calendar dates for each submittal or work item. Resubmit an updated version for CO approval every 90 calendar days days. Compliance with the following schedule is the Contractor's responsibility.

Qualify TAB Personnel: Within 45 calendar days after date of contract award, submit TAB agency and personnel qualifications.

Pre-DALT/TAB Meeting: Within 30 calendar days after the date of approval of the TAB agency and personnel, meet with the Contracting Officer's TAB representative.

Design Review Report: Within 60 calendar days after the date of the TAB agency personnel qualifications approval, submit design review report.

Pre-Field DALT Preliminary Notification: On completion of the duct installation for each system, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing within 5 days after completion.

Ductwork Selected for DALT: Within 7 calendar days of Pre-Field DALT Preliminary Notification, the Contracting Officer's TAB representative (COTR) will select which of the project ductwork shall be DALT'd.

DALT Field Work: Within 48 hours of COTR's selection, complete DALT field work on selected.

Submit Pre-final DALT Report: Within one working day after completion of DALT field work, submit Pre-final DALT Report. Separate Pre-final DALT reports may be submitted to allow phased testing from system to system.

DALT Work Field Check: Upon approval of the Pre-final DALT

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 4


Report, the COTR's DALT field check work shall be scheduled with the Contracting Officer.

Submit Certified Final DALT Report: Within 15 calendar days after completion of successful DALT Work Field Check, submit certified Season 1 TAB report.

Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report: Within 15 calendar days after approval of the TAB agency Personnel Qualifications, submit the Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report.

Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List For Season 1 and Advanced Notice For Season 1 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 115 calendar days prior to CCD, submit Season 1 prerequisite HVAC work check out list certified as complete, and submit advance notice of commencement of Season 1 TAB field work.

Season 1 TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 90 calendar days prior to CCD, and when the ambient temperature is within Season 1 limits, accomplish Season 1 TAB field work.

Submit Season 1 TAB Report: Within 15 calendar days after completion of Season 1 TAB field work, submit certified Season 1 TAB report.

Season 1 TAB Field Check: 30 calendar days after certified Season 1 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct Season 1 field check.

Complete Season 1 TAB Work: Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work except Season 2 TAB work.

Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List For Season 2 and Advanced Notice For Season 2 TAB Field Work: Within 150 calendar days after date of the commencement of the Season 1 TAB field work, submit the Season 2 prerequisite HVAC work check out list certified as complete and submit advance notice of commencement of Season 2 TAB field work.

Season 2 TAB Field Work: Within 180 calendar days after date of commencement of the Season 1 TAB field work and when the ambient temperature is within Season 2 limits, accomplish Season 2 TAB field work.

Submit Season 2 TAB Report: Within 15 calendar days after completion of Season 2 TAB field work, submit certified Season 2 TAB report.

Season 2 TAB Field Check: 30 calendar days after the certified Season 2 TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct Season 2 field check.

Complete Season 2 TAB Work: Within 15 calendar days after the completion of Season 2 TAB field data check, complete all TAB work.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 5



1.8.1 Modifications of References

Accomplish work in accordance with referenced publications of AABC or NEBB except as modified by this section. In the references referred to herein, consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for the words "should" or "could" or "may" wherever they appear. Interpret reference to the "authority having jurisdiction," the "Administrative Authority," the "Owner," or the "Design Engineer" to mean the "Contracting Officer."

1.8.2 Certificates

1.8.2.1 Independent TAB Agency Personnel Qualifications

For agency proposed for approval, submit information certifying that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated with any other company participating in work on this contract, including design, furnishing equipment, or construction.

Submit the following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval in compliance with paragraph entitled "TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements."

a. Independent AABC or NEBB certified TAB agency:

TAB agency: AABC registration number and expiration date of current certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration date of current certification.

TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of AABC or NEBB TAB supervisor certificate and expiration date of current certification.

TAB team field leader: Name and documented evidence that the team field leader shall have satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.

TAB team field technicians: Names and documented evidence that each field technician shall have satisfactorily assisted a TAB team field leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than one year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.

Current certificates: Registrations and certifications shall be current, and valid for the duration of this contract. Certifications which expire prior to completion of the TAB work, shall be renewed in a timely manner so that there is no lapse in registration or certification. TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current registration or current certification shall not perform TAB work on this contract.

b. TAB Team Members: TAB team approved to accomplish work on this contract shall be full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other personnel shall do TAB work on this contract.

c. Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur if each new member complies with the applicable personnel

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 6


qualifications and each is approved by the Contracting Officer.

1.8.2.2 Design Review Report

Submit typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the duct leakage testing work and the TAB work requirements of this section. Provide a complete explanation including supporting documentation detailing the design deficiency. State that no deficiencies are evident if that is the case.

1.8.2.3 Pre-Field DALT Preliminary Notification

a. Notification: On completion of the installation of each duct system indicated to be DALT'd, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing within 7 calendar days after completion.

1.8.2.4 Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report

Submit report containing the following information:

a. Step-by-step TAB procedure:

(1) Strategy: Describe the method of approach to the TAB field work from start to finish. Include in this description a complete methodology for accomplishing each seasonal TAB field work session.

(2) Procedural steps: Delineate fully the intended procedural steps to be taken by the TAB field team to accomplish the required TAB work of each air distribution system and each water distribution system. Include intended procedural steps for TAB work for subsystems and system components.

b. Pre-field data: Submit AABC or NEBB or SMACNA HVACTAB data report forms with the following pre-field information filled in:

(1) Design data obtained from system drawings, specifications, and approved submittals.

(2) Notations detailing additional data to be obtained from the contract site by the TAB field team.

(3) Designate the actual data to be measured in the TAB field work.

(4) Provide a list of the types of instruments, and the measuring range of each, which are anticipated to be used for measuring in the TAB field work. By means of a keying scheme, specify on each TAB data report form submitted, which instruments will be used for measuring each item of TAB data. If the selection of which instrument to use, is to be made in the field, specify from which instruments the choice will be made. The instrument key number shall be placed in the blank space where the measured data would be entered.

c. Prerequisite HVAC work checkout list: Provide a list of inspections and work items which are to be completed by the Contractor. This list shall be acted upon and completed by the

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 7


Contractor and then submitted and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to the TAB team coming to the contract site.

At a minimum, a list of the applicable inspections and work items listed in the NEBB TABES, Section III, "Preliminary TAB Procedures" under paragraphs titled, "Air Distribution System Inspection" and "Hydronic Distribution System Inspection" shall be provided for each separate system to be TAB'd.

1.8.3 Responsibilities

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with the requirements of this section. The following delineation of specific work responsibilities is specified to facilitate execution of the various work efforts by personnel from separate organizations. This breakdown of specific duties is specified to facilitate adherence to the schedule listed in paragraph entitled "TAB Submittal and Work Schedule."

1.8.3.1 Contractor

a. TAB personnel: Ensure that the DALT work and the TAB work is accomplished by a group meeting the requirements specified in paragraph entitled "TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements."

b. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend the meeting with the TAB Supervisor, and ensure that a representative is present for the sheetmetal contractor, mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, and automatic temperature controls contractor.

c. HVAC documentation: Furnish one complete set of the following HVAC-related documentation to the TAB agency:

(1) Contract drawings and specifications

(2) Approved submittal data for equipment

(3) Construction work schedule

(4) Up-to-date revisions and change orders for the previously listed items

d. Submittal and work schedules: Ensure that the schedule for submittals and work required by this section and specified in paragraph entitled "TAB Submittal and Work Schedule," is met.

e. Coordination of supporting personnel:

Provide the technical personnel, such as factory representatives or HVAC controls installer required by the TAB field team to support the DALT and the TAB field measurement work.

Provide equipment mechanics to operate HVAC equipment and ductwork mechanics to provide the field designated test ports to enable TAB field team to accomplish the DALT and the TAB field measurement work. Ensure these support personnel are present at the times required by the TAB team, and cause no delay in the DALT andthe TAB field work.

Conversely, ensure that the HVAC controls installer has required

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 8


support from the TAB team field leader to complete the controls check out.

f. Deficiencies: Ensure that the TAB Agency supervisor submits all Design/Construction deficiency notifications directly to the Contracting officer within 3 days after the deficiency is encountered. Further, the Contractor shall ensure that all such notification submittals are complete with explanation, including documentation, detailing deficiencies.

g. Prerequisite HVAC work: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at the project site to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes searching for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are functioning as designed. Include as prerequisite work items, the deficiencies pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design review report.

h. Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the applicable inspections and work items listed in the TAB team supervisor's pre-field engineering report. Do not allow the TAB team to commence TAB field work until all of the following are completed.

(1) HVAC system installations are fully complete.

(2) HVAC prerequisite checkout work lists specified in the paragraph "Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report" have been completed, submitted, and approved. Ensure that the TAB Agency gets a copy of the approved prerequisite HVAC work checklist.

(3) DALT field checks for all systems are completed.

(4) HVAC system filters are clean for both Season 1 and Season 2 TAB field work.

i. Advance notice: Furnish to the Contracting Officer with advance written notice for the commencement of the DALT field work and for the commencement of the TAB field work.

j. Insulation work: If DALT work is required, ensure that no insulation is shall not be installed on ducts to be DALT'd until DALT work on the subject ducts is complete. Later, ensure that openings in duct and machinery insulation coverings for TAB test ports are marked, closed and sealed.

1.8.3.2 TAB Agency

Provide the services of a TAB team which complies with the requirements of paragraph entitled "Independent TAB Agency Personnel Qualifications". The work to be performed by the TAB agency shall be limited to testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC air and water systems to satisfy the requirements of this specification section.

1.8.3.3 TAB Team Supervisor

a. Overall management: Supervise and manage the overall TAB team work effort, including preliminary and technical DALT and TAB

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 9


procedures and TAB team field work.

b. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend meeting with Contractor.

c. Design review report: Review project specifications and accompanying drawings to verify that the air systems and water systems are designed in such a way that the TAB engineer can accomplish the work in compliance with the requirements of this section. Verify the presence and location of permanently installed test ports and other devices needed, including gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, circuit setters, balancing valves, and manual volume dampers.

d. Support required: Specify the technical support personnel required from the Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as factory representatives for temperature controls or for complex equipment. Inform the Contractor in writing of the support personnel needed and when they are needed. Furnish the notice as soon as the need is anticipated, either with the design review report, or the pre-field engineering report, the during the DALT or TAB field work.

e. Pre-field DALT preliminary notification: Monitor the completion of the duct installation of each system and provide the necessary written notification to the Contracting Officer.

f. Pre-field engineering report: Utilizing the following HVAC-related documentation; contract drawings and specifications, approved submittal data for equipment, up-to-date revisions and change orders; prepare this report.

g. Prerequisite HVAC work checklist: Ensure the Contractor gets a copy of this checklist at the same time as the pre-field engineering report is submitted.

h. Technical assistance for DALT work.

(1) Technical assistance: Provide immediate technical assistance to TAB field team.

(2) DALT field visit: Near the end of the DALT field work effort, visit the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the progress of the DALT field work. Conduct a site visit to the extent necessary to verify correct procedures are being implemented and to confirm the accuracy of the Pre-final DALT Report data which has been reported. Also, sufficient evaluation shall be made to allow the TAB supervisor to issue certification of the final report. Conduct the site visit full-time for a minimum of two 8 hour workdays duration.

i. Certified Final DALT report: Certify the DALT report. This certification includes the following work:

(1) Review: Review the Pre-final DALT report data. From these field reports, prepare the Certified Final DALT report.

(2) Verification: Verify adherence, by the TAB field team, to the procedures specified in this section.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 10


j. Technical Assistance for TAB Work: Provide immediate technical assistance to the TAB field team for the TAB work.

(1) TAB field visit: At the midpoint of the Season 1 and Season 2 TAB field work effort, visit the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the progress of the TAB field work. Conduct site visit full-time for a minimum of two 8 hour workdays duration.

(2) TAB field visit: Near the end of the TAB field work effort, visit the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the progress of the TAB field work. Conduct site visit full-time for a minimum of two 8 hour workdays duration. Review the TAB final report data and certify the TAB final report.

k. Certified TAB report: Certify the TAB report. This certification includes the following work:

(1) Review: Review the TAB field data report. From this field report, prepare the certified TAB report.

(2) Verification: Verify adherence, by the TAB field team, to the TAB plan prescribed by the pre-field engineering report and verify adherence to the procedures specified in this section.

l. Design/Construction deficiencies: Within 3 working days after the TAB Agency has encountered any design or construction deficiencies, the TAB Supervisor shall submit written notification directly to the Contracting Officer, with a separate copy to the Contractor, of all such deficiencies. Provide in this submittal a complete explanation, including supporting documentation, detailing deficiencies. Where deficiencies are encountered that are believed to adversely impact successful completion of TAB, the TAB Agency shall issue notice and request direction in the notification submittal.

m. TAB Field Check: The TAB team supervisor shall attend and supervise Season 1 and Season 2 TAB field check.

1.8.3.4 TAB Team Field Leader

a. Field manager: Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the work specified in Part 3, "Execution."

b. Full time: Be present at the contract site when DALT field work or TAB field work is being performed by the TAB team; ensure day-to-day TAB team work accomplishments are in compliance with this section.

c. Prerequisite HVAC work: Do not bring the TAB team to the contract site until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC Checklist, with all work items certified by the Contractor to be working as designed, reaches the office of the TAB Agency.

1.8.4 Test Reports

1.8.4.1 Data from DALT Field Work

Report the data for the Pre-final DALT Report and Certified Final DALT Report in compliance the following requirements:

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 11


a. Report format: Submit report data on Air Duct Leakage Test Summary Report Forms as shown on Page 6-2 of SMACNA Leakage Test Mnl. In addition, submit in the report, a marked duct shop drawing which identifies each section of duct tested with assigned node numbers for each section. Node numbers shall be included in the completed report forms to identify each duct section. The report shall be reviewed and certified by the TAB supervisor.

b. The TAB supervisor shall include a copy of all calculations prepared in determining the duct surface area of each duct test section. In addition, the DALT reports shall contain copy(s) of the calibration curve for each of the DALT test orifices used for testing.

c. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure the data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration date. Instruments shall have been calibrated within one year of the date of use in the field. Instrument calibration shall be traceable to the measuring standards of the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

d. Certification: Include the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the dated signature of the TAB supervisor.

1.8.4.2 Certified TAB Reports

Submit Certified TAB Report for Season 1 and Certified TAB Report for Season 2 in the following manner:

a. Report format: Submit the completed pre-field data forms approved in the pre-field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field team, reviewed and certified by the TAB supervisor. Bind the report with a waterproof front and back cover. Include a table of contents identifying by page number the location of each report. Report forms and report data shall be typewritten. Handwritten report forms or report data are not acceptable.

b. Temperatures: On each TAB report form reporting TAB work accomplished on HVAC thermal energy transfer equipment, include the indoor and outdoor dry bulb temperature range and indoor and outdoor wet bulb temperature range within which the TAB data was recorded. Include in the TAB report continuous time versus temperature recording data of wet and dry bulb temperatures for the rooms, or zones, as designated in the following list:

(1) Data shall be measured and compiled on a continuous basis for the period in which TAB work affecting those rooms is being done.

(2) Data shall be measured/recorded only after the HVAC systems installations are complete, the systems fully balanced and the HVAC systems controls operating in fully automatic mode.

(3) Data may be compiled using direct digital controls trend logging where available. Otherwise, the Contractor shall temporarily install calibrated time versus temperature/humidity recorders for this purpose. The HVAC systems and controls shall

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 12


have been fully operational a minimum of 24 hours in advance of commencing data compilation. The specified data shall be included in the Season I and Season 2 TAB Report.

c. System Diagrams: Provide a system diagramin the TAB report showing the location of all terminal outlet supply, return, exhaust and transfer registers, grilles and diffusers. Use a key numbering system on the diagram which identifies each outlet contained in the outlet airflow report sheets.

d. Static Pressure Profiles: Report static pressure profiles for air duct systems including: AHU-1 thru AHU-17, EF-A thru EF-N, EF-1 thru EF-11, SF-1 thru SF-5, CRAC-1 and CRAC-2. Report static pressure data for all supply, return, relief, exhaust and outside air ducts for the systems listed. The static pressure report data shall include, in addition to NEBB/AABC required data, the following:

(1) Report supply fan, return fan, relief fan, and exhaust fan inlet and discharge static pressures.

(2) Report static pressure drop across chilled water coils, DX coils, hot water coils, steam coils, electric resistance heating coils and heat reclaim devices installed in unit cabinetry or the system ductwork.

(3) Report static pressure drop across outside air, return air, and supply air automatic control dampers, both proportional and two-position, installed in unit cabinetry.

(4) Report static pressure drop across air filters, acoustic silencers, moisture eliminators, air flow straighteners, air flow measuring stations or other pressure drop producing specialty items installed in unit cabinetry, or in the system ductwork. Examples of these specialty items are smoke detectors, white sound generators, RF shielding, wave guides, security bars, blast valves, small pipes passing through ductwork, and duct mounted humidifiers.

Do not report static pressure drop across duct fittings provided for the sole purpose of conveying air, such as elbows, transitions, offsets, plenums, manual dampers, and branch takes-offs.

(5) Report static pressure drop across outside air and relief/exhaust air louvers.

(6) Report static pressure readings of supply air, return air, exhaust/relief air, and outside air in duct at the point where these ducts connect to each air moving unit and also at the following locations:

Main Duct: Take readings at four locations along the full length of the main duct. Locations shall be at 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of the total duct length.

Floor Branch Mains: Take readings at floor branch mains served by a main duct vertical riser.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 13


Branch Main Ducts: Take readings at branch main ducts.

e. Duct Trasverses: Report duct traverses for main and branch main supply, return, exhaust, relief and outside air ducts. This shall include all ducts, including those which lack 7 1/2 duct diameters upstream and 2 1/2 duct diameters downstream of straight duct unobstructed by duct fittings/offsets/elbows. The TAB Agency shall evaluate and report findings on the duct traverses taken. Evaluate the suitability of the duct traverse measurement based on satisfying the qualifications for a pitot traverse plane as defined by AMCA 203, "Field Measurements", Section 8, paragraph 8.3, "Location of Traverse Plane."

f. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure the tab data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration date.

Instrumentation, used for taking wet bulb temperature readings shall provide accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent at the measured face velocities. Submit instrument manufacturer's literature to document instrument accuracy performance is in compliance with that specified.

g. Certification: Include the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the dated signature of the TAB supervisor.

h. Performance Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the Certified TAB Reports, factory pump curves and fan curves for pumps and fans TAB'd on the job.

i. Calibration Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the Certified TAB Reports, a factory calibration curve for installed flow control balancing valves, flow venturis and flow orifices TAB'd on the job.

1.9 PRE-DALT/TAB MEETING

Meet with the Contracting Officer's TAB representative to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the DALT work and TAB work requirements. Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at this meeting. Requirements to be discussed include required submittals, work schedule, and field quality control.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Recycled Content LEED: Ensure LEED certification by acquiring project products and materials containing recycled material to the greatest extent possible, and highest percentage of recycled content possible. Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of post consumer recycled content plus one-half of the post-industrial content meets or exceed 5

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 14


percent of the total value of that product.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DALT PROCEDURES

3.1.1 Instruments and personnel

Provide instruments and consumables required to accomplish the DALT field work. Follow the same basic procedure specified below in paragraph titled "TAB Field Work," which include maintenance of and calibration of instruments, accuracy of measurements, preliminary procedures, field work, workmanship and treatment of deficiencies.

3.1.2 Ductwork To Be DALT'd

From each duct system indicated as subject to DALT, the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR) shall randomly select sections of each completed duct system for testing by the Contractor. The sections selected shall not exceed 20 percent of the total measured linear footage of duct systems indicated as subject to DALT. Sections of duct systems subject to DALT shall include 20 percent of main ducts, branch main ducts, branch ducts and plenums for supply, return, exhaust, and plenum ductwork.

3.1.3 Testing

It will be acceptable for an entire duct system to be DALT'd in lieu of the 20 percent portion specified above.

Duct air leak test (DALT) the HVAC duct sections of each system as selected by the COTR. Use the duct class, seal class, leakage class and the leak test pressure data indicated on the drawings, to comply with the procedures specified in SMACNA Leakage Test Mnl. Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified in SMACNA Leakage Test Mnl, except as supplemented and modified by this section.

In spite of specifications of SMACNA Leakage Test Mnl to the contrary, ductwork of construction class of 3-inch water gauge static pressure and below shall be DALT'd if indicated to be DALT'd.

Complete DALT work on the COTR selected ductwork within 48 hours after the particular ductwork was selected for DALT. DALT work shall be conducted separately for large duct systems to enable the DALT work to be completed in 48 hours.

3.1.4 Pre-final DALT Report

After completion of the DALT work, prepare a Pre-final DALT Report using the reporting forms specified. Data required by those data report forms shall be furnished by the TAB team. Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the Pre-final DALT report shall provide the basis for the Certified Final DALT Report. TAB supervisor's shall review and certify the Pre-final DALT Report and submit this report within one day of completion of DALT field

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 15


work. Verbally notify the Contracting Officer's TAB representative that the field check of the Pre-final DALT Report data can commence.

3.1.5 Quality Assurance - Contracting Officer DALT Field Checks

The TAB team field leader shall be present full-time when DALT field checking is conducted. Field check for accuracy selected Pre-final DALT Report data in the presence of the Contracting Officer's TAB representative (COTR). For each duct system, conduct field checks on 50 percent of the duct sections DALT'd.

3.1.6 Additional Field Checks

If any of the duct sections checked for a given system are determined to be out-of-tolerance, data checking for that section shall be terminated and the associated Pre-final DALT Report data for the given system shall be disapproved. The Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised Pre-final DALT Report. A field check of the revised report data shall then be rescheduled with the Contracting Officer's TAB representative.

Further, if any data on the DALT Pre-final DALT report form for a given duct section is out-of-tolerance, then data for one additional duct section, preferably in the same duct system, shall be field checked as specified herein. The DALT'd duct section to be field checked shall be in addition to the original 50 percent of duct sections to be field checked.

3.1.7 Certified Final DALT Report

On successful completion of all field checks of the Pre-final DALT Report data for all systems, the TABS Supervisor shall assemble, review, certify and submit the Certified Final DALT Report to the Contracting Officer for approval.

3.1.8 Prerequisite for TAB Field Work

No TAB field work shall commence prior to the completion and approval, for all systems, of the Certified Final DALT Report.

3.2 TAB PROCEDURES

3.2.1 TAB Field Work

Test, adjust, and balance the listed HVAC systems to the state of operation indicated on and specified in the contract design documents. Conduct TAB work, including maintenance and calibration of instruments, measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in conformance with the AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, or NEBB TABES, and NEBB MASV, except as supplemented and modified by this section. Provide instruments and consumables required to accomplish the TAB work.

Air systems and water systems shall be proportionately balanced and reported in the Season 1 certified TAB report. The only water flow and air flow reporting which can be deferred until the Season 2 will be that data which would be affected in terms of accuracy due to outside ambient conditions.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 16


3.2.2 Preliminary Procedures

Use the approved pre-field engineering report as instructions and procedures for accomplishing TAB field work. Test ports required for testing by the TAB engineer shall be located in the field by the TAB engineer during TAB field work. It shall be the responsibility of the sheet metal contractor to provide and install test ports as required by the TAB engineer.

3.2.3 TAB Air Distribution Systems

3.2.3.1 Air Handling Units

Air handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust fans and winter ventilation fans), coils, ducts, mixing boxes, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, outside air, mixed air relief air, and makeup air.

3.2.3.2 Rooftop Air Conditioning

Rooftop air conditioning systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, and outside air.

3.2.3.3 Return Air Fans

Return air fan system including fan ducts, plenums, registers, diffusers, grilles, and louvers for supply air, return air, outside air, and mixed air.

3.2.3.4 Exhaust Fans

Exhaust fan systems including fans, ducts, plenums, grilles, and hoods for exhaust air.

3.2.4 TAB Water Distribution Systems

3.2.4.1 Chilled Water

Chilled water systems including chillers, condensers, cooling towers, pumps, coils, system balance valves and flow measuring devices.

3.2.4.2 Heating Hot Water

Heating hot water systems including boilers, hot water converters (e.g., heat exchangers), pumps, coils, system balancing valves and flow measuring devices.

3.2.5 Sound Measurement Work

3.2.5.1 Areas To Be Sound Measured

In the following spaces, measure and record the sound power level for each octave band listed in ASHRAE HA IP Noise Criteria:

a. All HVAC mechanical rooms, including machinery spaces and other spaces containing HVAC power drivers and power driven equipment.

b. All spaces sharing a common barrier with each mechanical room, including rooms overhead, rooms on the other side of side walls, and rooms beneath the mechanical room floor.

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 17


3.2.5.2 Procedure

At the time the sound level is measured, each room shall be unoccupied, except for TAB team, and all HVAC systems that would cause noise in the room shall be operating in their noisiest mode. Record the sound level (dB) in each octave band. Attempt to mitigate the sound level and bring the level to within the specified ASHRAE HA IP noise criteria goals, if such mitigation is within the TAB team's control. State in the report the ASHRAE HA IP noise criteria goals. If sound level cannot be brought into compliance, provide written notice of the deficiency to the Contractor for resolution or correction.

3.2.5.3 Timing

Sound levels shall be measured at times prescribed by AABC or NEBB.

3.2.5.4 Meters

Measure sound levels with a sound meter complying with ANSI S1.4, Type 1 or 2, and an octave band filter set complying with ANSI S1.11. Measurement methods for overall sound levels and for octave band sound levels shall be as prescribed by NEBB.

3.2.5.5 Calibration

Sound levels shall be calibrated as prescribed by AABC or NEBB except that calibrators emitting a sound pressure level tone of 94 dB at 1000 hertz (Hz) are also acceptable.

3.2.5.6 Background Noise Correction

Determine background noise component of room sound (noise) levels for each (of eight) octave bands as prescribed by AABC or NEBB.

3.2.6 Workmanship

Conduct TAB work on specified HVAC systems until measured parameters are within plus or minus 10 percent of the design values, that is, the values specified or indicated on the contract documents.

3.2.7 Deficiencies

Strive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of the equipment as designed and installed. However, if deficiencies in equipment design or installation prevent TAB work from being accomplished within the range of design values specified in the paragraph entitled "Workmanship," provide written notice as soon as possible to the Contractor and the Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and recommended correction.

Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the Contractor's. If a deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team supervisor for technical assistance. Responsibility for reporting design deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's.

3.2.8 Data From TAB Field Work

After completion of the TAB field work, prepare the TAB field data for TAB

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 18


supervisor's review and certification, using the reporting forms approved in the pre-field engineering report. Data required by those approved data report forms shall be furnished by the TAB team. Except as approved otherwise in writing by the Contracting Officer, the TAB work and thereby the TAB report shall be considered incomplete until the TAB work is accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph entitled "Workmanship."

3.2.9 Quality Assurance - Contracting Officer TAB Field Checks

3.2.9.1 Field Check

During field check, the Contractor shall check, in the presence of the Contracting Officer's TAB representative, random selections of data (water, air quantities, air motion, sound level readings) recorded in the Certified TAB Report. Points and areas of field checks shall be selected by the Contracting Officer's TAB representative. Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for TAB work for the Certified TAB Report.Selections for recheck will not exceed 25 percent of the total number of reported data entries tabulated in the report.

3.2.9.2 Additional Field Checks

If any of the data checked for a given HVAC field check group are determined to be out-of-tolerance, data checking for all affected data for that group shall be terminated and the affected TAB report data for the given group shall be disapproved. The Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised Certified TAB Report. A field check of the revised report data shall then be rescheduled with the Contracting Officer's TAB representative.

Further, if any data on the Certified TAB Report for a given field check group is out-of-tolerance, then data for one additional field check group shall be field checked as specified herein. This increase field check work shall continue until out-of-tolerance data ceases to to be found. This additional field checking is up and above the original 25 percent of the of reported data entries to be field checked.

If there are no more of the similar field check group, additional field checking from another, but different, type of field check group shall be checked.

3.2.9.3 Prerequisite for Approval

Compliance with the field checking requirements of this section is a prerequisite for the final Contracting Officer approval of the certified TAB report submitted.

3.3 MARKING OF SETTINGS

Upon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC adjustment devices including valves, splitters, and dampers so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. The permanent markings shall indicate the settings on the adjustment devices which result in the data reported on the submitted certified TAB report.

3.4 MARKING OF TEST PORTS

The TAB team shall permanently and legibly mark and identify the location

SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 19


points of the duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation, these markings shall be made on the exterior side of the duct insulation. The location of test ports shall be shown on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.


SECTION 23 08 00.00 20 Page 20


SECTION 23 09 23

DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS04/06

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES



AMCA 500-D (1998) Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating


ASME B16.15 (2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.34 (2004) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End




ASTM A 269 (2007a) Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service


ASTM B 88M (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)

ASTM D 1693 (2007) Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics


CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA)

CEA-709.1B (2002) Control Network Protocol



Specification

CEA-709.3 (1999) Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel Specification

CEA-852-A (2004) Tunneling Component Network Protocols Over Internet Protocol Channels

FLUID CONTROLS INSTITUTE (FCI)

FCI 70-2 (2006) Control Valve Seat Leakage

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002) IEEE Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

IEEE Std 142 (1991; Errata 2006) Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Green Book (Color Book Series)

ISA - THE INSTRUMENTATION, SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATION SOCIETY (ISA)

ISA 7.0.01 (1996) Quality Standard for Instrument Air

LONMARK INTERNATIONAL (LonMark)

LonMark Interoperability Guide (2002) LonMark Application-Layer Interoperability Guide; Version 3.3

LonMark SNVT List (2002) LonMark SNVT Master List; Version 11 Revision 2

LonMark XIF Guide (2001) LonMark External Interface File Reference Guide; Revision 4.0B


NEMA 250 (2003) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

NEMA C12.1 (2001) Electric Meters; Code for Electricity Metering

NEMA C12.10 (2004) Physical Aspects of Watthour Meters

NEMA C12.20 (2002) Electricity Meter - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Classes







47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices


UL 1585 (1998; Rev thru May 2006) UL Standard for Safety Class 2 and Class 3 Transformers - Fourth Edition

UL 555 (2006) Standard for Fire Dampers

UL 555S (1999; Rev thru Jul 2006) Smoke Dampers

UL 916 (1998; Rev thru Mar 2006) Energy Management Equipment

UL 94 (1996; Rev thru Jun 2006) Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances

1.2 DEFINITIONS

The following list of definitions may contain terms not found elsewhere in the Section but are included here for completeness.

a. Application Specific Controller: A device that is furnished with a pre-established built in application that is configurable but not re-programmable. An ASC has a fixed factory-installed application program (i.e Program ID) with configurable settings.

b. Binary: A two-state system where an "ON" condition is represented by a high signal level and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level. 'Digital' is sometimes used interchangeably with 'binary'.

c. Binding: The act of establishing communications between CEA-709.1B devices by associating the output of a device to the input of another.

d. Building Control Network: The CEA-709.1B control network installed under this Section, consisting of a backbone and one or more local control busses.

e. Building Point of Connection (BPOC): The BPOC is the point of connection between the UMCS network backbone (an IP network) and the building control network backbone. The hardware at this location, that provides the connection is referred to as the BPOC Hardware. In general, the term "BPOC Location" means the place where this connection occurs, and "BPOC Hardware" means the device that provides the connection. Sometimes the term "BPOC" is used to mean either and its actual meaning (i.e. location or hardware) is determined by the context in which it is used.

f. Channel: A portion of the control network consisting of one or more



segments connected by repeaters. Channels are separated by routers. The device quantity limitation is dependent on the topology/media and device type. For example, a TP/FT-10 network with locally powered devices is limited to 128 devices per channel.

g. Configuration Parameter: Controller setting usually written to EEPROM. Also see 'Standard Configuration Parameter Type (SCPT)'

h. Control Logic Diagram: A graphical representation of control logic for multiple processes that make up a system.

i. Domain: A grouping of up to 32,385 nodes that can communicate directly with each other. (Devices in different domains cannot communicate directly with each other.) Part of the Node Addressing scheme.

j. Explicit Messaging: A method of communication between devices where each message contains a message code that identifies the type of message and the devices use these codes to determine the action to take when the message is received. These messages are non-standard and often vendor (application) dependent.

k. External Interface File (XIF): A file which documents a device's external interface, specifically the number and types of LonMark objects; the number, types, directions, and connection attributes of network variables; and the number of message tags.

l. Functional Profile: The description of one or more LonMark Objects used to classify and certify devices.

m. Gateway: A device that translates from one protocol to another. Gateways are also called Communications Bridges or Protocol Translators.

n. General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC): Unlike an ASC, a GPPC is not furnished with a fixed application program. A GPPC can be (re-)programmed, usually using vendor-supplied software.

o. LonMark Object: A collection of network variables, configuration parameters, and associated behavior defined by LonMark International and described by a Functional Profile. Defines how information is exchanged between devices on a network (inputs from and outputs to the network).

p. LNS Plug-in: Software which runs in an LNS compatible software tool. Device configuration plug-ins provide a 'user friendly' interface to configuration parameters.

q. LonMark: See LonMark International. Also, a certification issued by LonMark International to CEA-709.1B devices.

r. LonMark International: Standards committee consisting of numerous independent product developers and systems integrators dedicated to determining and maintaining the interoperability guidelines for the LonWorks industry. Maintains guidelines for the interoperability of CEA-709.1B devices and issues the LonMark Certification for CEA-709.1B devices.

s. LonMark Interoperability Association: See 'LonMark International'.



t. LonWorks: The overall communications technology, developed by Echelon Corporation, for control systems. The term is often used to refer to the technology in general, and may include reference to any/all of the: protocol, network management, and interoperability guidelines where the technology is based on the CEA-709.1B protocol and employs interoperable devices along with the capability to openly manage these devices (via multiple vendors) using a network configuration (or service) tool.

u. LonWorks Network Services (LNS): A network management and database standard for CEA-709.1B devices.

v. Monitoring and Control (M&C) Software: The UMCS 'front end' software which performs supervisory functions such as alarm handling, scheduling and data logging and provides a user interface for monitoring the system and configuring these functions.

w. Network Variable: See 'Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT)'.

x. Network Configuration Tool: The software used to configure the control network and set device configuration properties. This software creates and modifies the control network database (LNS Database).

y. Node: A device that communicates using the CEA-709.1B protocol and is connected to an CEA-709.1B network.

z. Node Address: The logical address of a node on the network. Variations in node addressing are possible, but the 'Domain, Subnet, Node' format is the established standard for this specification.

aa. Node ID: A unique 48-bit identifier assigned (at the factory) to each CEA-709.1B device, sometimes called the Neuron ID.

bb. Program ID: An identifier (number) stored in the device (usually EEPROM) that identifies the node manufacturer, functionality of device (application & sequence), transceiver used, and the intended device usage.

cc. Repeater: A device that connects two control network segments and retransmits all information received on one side onto the other.

dd. Router: A device that connects two channels and controls traffic between the channels by retransmitting signals received from one subnet onto the other based on the signal destination. Routers are used to subdivide a control network and to control bandwidth usage.

ee. Segment: A 'single' section of a control network that contains no repeaters or routers. The device quantity limitation is dependent on the topology/media and device type. For example, a TP/FT-10 network with locally powered devices is limited to 64 devices per segment.

ff. Service Pin: A hardware push-button on a device which causes the device to broadcast a message (over the control network) containing its Node ID and Program ID. This broadcast can also be initiated via software.

gg. Standard Configuration Parameter Type (SCPT): Pronounced 'skip-it'. A standard format type (maintained by LonMark International) for Configuration Parameters.



hh. Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT): Pronounced 'snivet'. A standard format type (maintained by LonMark International) used to define data information transmitted and received by the individual nodes. The term SNVT is used in two ways. Technically it is the acronym for Standard Network Variable Type, and is sometimes used in this manner. However, it is often used to indicate the network variable itself (i.e. it can mean "a network variable of a standard network variable type"). In general, the intended meaning should be clear from the context.

ii. Subnet: Consists of a logical (not physical) grouping of up to 127 nodes, where the logical grouping is defined by node addressing. Part of the Node Addressing scheme.

jj. TP/FT-10: A Free Topology Twisted Pair network defined by CEA-709.3. This is the most common media type for an ANSI-709.1 control network.

kk. UMCS Network: An IP network connecting multiple building level control networks using the CEA-852-A standard.

ll. User-defined Configuration Parameter Type (UCPT): Pronounced 'u-keep-it'. A Configuration Parameter format type that is defined by the device manufacturer.

mm. User-defined Network Variable Type (UNVT): A network variable format defined by the device manufacturer. Note that UNVTs create non-standard communications (other vendor's devices may not correctly interpret it) and may close the system and therefore are not permitted by this specification.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval.

a. Technical data packages consisting of technical data and computer software (meaning technical data which relates to computer software) which are specifically identified in this project and which may be defined/required in other specifications shall be delivered strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES and in accordance with the Contract Data Requirements List, DD Form 1423. Data delivered shall be identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. All submittals not specified as technical data packages are considered 'shop drawings' under the Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (FARS) and shall contain no proprietary information and be delivered with unrestricted rights.

b. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, the CONTRACT CLAUSES and DD Form 1423 and according to the sequencing specified in paragraph PROJECT SEQUENCING:

SD-02 Shop Drawings

DDC Contractor Design Drawings; G

DDC Contractor Design Drawings shall be submitted in hard copy and on CDROM in AutoCAD format.



Draft As-Built Drawings; G

Draft As-Built Drawings shall be submitted in hard copy and on CDROM in AutoCAD format.

Final As-Built Drawings; G

Final As-Built Drawings shall be submitted in hard copy and on CDROM in AutoCAD format.

SD-03 Product Data

Manufacturer's Catalog Data; G

Product specific catalog cuts shall be submitted for each product provided under this specification.

Programming Software; G

The most recent version of the Programming software for each type (manufacturer and model) of General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC) shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package and shall be licensed to the project site. Software shall be submitted on CD-ROM and 4 hard copies of the software user manual shall be submitted for each piece of software provided.

GPPC Application Programs; G

All installed GPPC Application Programs shall be submitted on CD-ROM as a Technical Data Package. The CD-ROM shall include a list or table of contents clearly indicating which application program is associated with each device. 2 copies of the GPPC Application Program's CD-ROM shall be submitted.

XIF files; G

External interface files (XIF files) shall be submitted as a technical data package for each model of DDC Hardware provided under this specification. XIF files shall be submitted on CD-ROM.

LNS Database; G

Two copies of the LNS Database for the complete control network provided under this specification shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Each copy shall be on CD-ROM and shall be clearly marked identifying it as the LNS Database for the work covered under this specification and with the date of the most recent database modification.

LNS Plug-in; G

LNS Plug-ins for each Application Specific Controller shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package. LNS Plug-ins distributed under a license shall be licensed to the project site. Plug-ins shall be submitted on CD-ROM. Hard copy manuals, if available, shall be submitted for each plug-in provided.

SD-05 Design Data



Network Bandwidth Usage Calculations; G

Four copies of the Network Bandwidth Usage Calculations shall be submitted.

SD-06 Test Reports

Existing Conditions Report; G

Four copies of the Existing Conditions Report shall be submitted.

Four copies of the Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report shall be submitted. The Start-Up and Testing report may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.

PVT Procedures; G

Four copies of the PVT Procedures shall be submitted. The PVT Procedures may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.

PVT Report; G

Four copies of the PVT Phase Report shall be submitted. The PVT Phase Report may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.

Pre-Construction QC Checklist; G

Four copies of the Pre-Construction QC Checklist shall be submitted.

Post-Construction QC Checklist; G

Four copies of the Post-Construction QC Checklist shall be submitted.


Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G

2 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed and in booklet form shall be submitted. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.

Training Documentation; G

Training manuals shall be delivered for each trainee on the Course Attendee List with 2 additional copies delivered for archival at the project site. 2 copies of the Course Attendee List shall be delivered with the archival copies. The Training Documentation may be submitted as a Technical Data Package.


Closeout QC Checklist; G

Four copies of the Closeout QC Checklist shall be submitted.




The Direct Digital Control (DDC) system shall be a complete system suitable for the control of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) and other building-level systems as specified and shown.

1.4.1 System Requirements

Systems installed under this guide specification shall have the following characteristics:.

a. The control system shall be an open implementation of LonWorks technology using CEA-709.1B as the communications protocol and using LonMark Standard Network Variable Types as defined in LonMark SNVT List for communication over the network.

b. LonWorks Network Services (LNS) shall be used for all network management including addressing and binding of network variables. A copy of the LNS database shall be submitted to the project site as specified.

c. The hardware shall perform the control sequences as specified and shown to provide control of the equipment as specified and shown.

d. Control sequence logic shall reside in DDC hardware in the building. The building control network shall not be dependent upon connection to a Utility Monitoring and Control System (UMCS) for performance of control sequences in this specification. The hardware shall, to the greatest extent practical, perform the sequences without reliance on the building network.

e. The hardware shall be installed such that individual control equipment can be replaced by similar control equipment from other equipment manufacturers with no loss of system functionality.

f. All necessary documentation, configuration information, configuration tools, programs, drivers, and other software shall be licensed to and otherwise remain with the Government such that the Government or their agents are able to perform repair, replacement, upgrades, and expansions of the system without subsequent or future dependence on the Contractor.

g. The Contractor shall provide sufficient documentation and data, including rights to documentation and data, such that the Government or their agents can execute work to perform repair, replacement, upgrades, and expansions of the system without subsequent or future dependence on the Contractor.

h. Hardware shall be installed and configured such that the Government or their agents are able to perform repair, replacement, and upgrades of individual hardware without further interaction with the Contractor.

i. Control hardware shall be installed and configured to provide all input and output Standard Network Variables (SNVTs) as shown and as needed to meet the requirements of this specification.

j. All DDC devices installed under this specification shall communicate via CEA-709.1B. The control system shall be installed such that a SNVT output from any node on the network can be bound to any


Documents

FACILITIES AND FACILITIES UPGRADES FOR F/A-18 E/F